JP7251706B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") and a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect of switching effect images according to a game situation (for example, Patent Literature 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340037

However, if the effect images are suddenly switched in such a display effect and the player feels uncomfortable, the interest in the game may be reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

A game machine according to [means 1] includes lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, determination means for determining whether or not the lottery result by the lottery means is advantageous, and display means capable of performing a predetermined display. and an effect control means for enabling the display means to display a predetermined display based on the determination result of the determination means, and performing variation control of the decorative pattern, wherein the background display is a normal background display and a first special background display. and a second special background display, and a first ready-to-reach effect and a second ready-to-win effect in which the judgment result is more advantageous than the first ready-to-win effect and the degree of expectation is low, and the first ready-to-win effect is performed. wherein the first special background display and a display suggesting the judgment result can be displayed, and in the second ready-to-win effect, the second special background display and a display suggesting the judgment result can be displayed. , when the first ready-to-win effect ends , a first special effect of changing the visibility of the decorative pattern can be executed, and during the execution period of the first special effect, the visibility of the decorative pattern is increased to the A first period that is lower than before the execution of the first special effect, and a second period that is a period after the first period and in which it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern. , which is a period after the second period and includes a third period in which the visibility of the decorative pattern increases compared to the second period, and in the first period of the first special effect When the first special background display is displayed, the normal background display is displayed in the third period of the first special effect, and the second ready-to-win effect ends , the visibility of the decorative pattern is changed. 2 special performance can be executed, and during the execution period of the second special performance, a first period in which the visibility of the decorative pattern is lower than before the execution of the second special performance; A second period, which is a period later than the period and in which the decorative pattern is impossible or difficult to see, and a period after the second period, in which the visibility of the decorative pattern is the above A third period that increases compared to the second period is included, the second special background display is displayed during the first period of the second special effect, and the normal display is displayed during the third period of the second special effect. A background display is displayed, the first special effect and the second special effect can be executed in different display modes , and the first special effect and the second special effect are performed according to the determination result. It does not indicate the degree of expectation for being advantageous, but the length from the start of the third period included in the first special effect to the stop display of the decorative pattern, and the length included in the second special effect. The length from the start of the third period to the stop display of the decorative pattern is different, and the normal background display is the third period of the first special effect and the third period of the second special effect. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to display the decorative symbols during the variable display during the period to the non-variable display after the stationary display of the decorative symbols .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends; FIG. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37; (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a portion of the operation button is cut away to show the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion to be hidden by a first button decorative portion, a button frame, or the like of an operation button in a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit. is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56; It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63, viewed from behind; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 75; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the door frame side liquid crystal display device; It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; FIG. 90 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in FIG. 89 to the peripheral control boards; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper tray liquid crystal; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S5234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and normal electric accessary goods control processing (step S116). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing (step S5402). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (step S5403). It is the figure which showed the whole game board of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, perspective view, and exploded perspective view of the rabbit role of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a front view and a rear view of the face substrate of the rabbit character according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the face covering portion of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory of the present embodiment is in a standby position; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; It is the figure which showed the whole game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear-wall cover, and the front view of a rear-wall board|substrate. It is the figure which showed the stump box part in the modification of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear-wall cover, and the front view of a rear-wall board|substrate. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit character in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the mountain role of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the back grass accessory of this embodiment. In the stump box shown in FIGS. 129(A) and 130(A) of this embodiment, the box top wall, box right wall, box bottom wall, and box left wall are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It is the figure which showed the state to which it was made to move. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which no stump plate portion is provided in front of the stump box portion of the present embodiment, and a fixed grass plate portion is provided instead of the first grass movable portion and the second grass movable portion; be. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 148 of the present embodiment; FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 149 of the present embodiment; FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 149 of the present embodiment; FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 149 of the present embodiment; (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the box rear wall portion of FIG. 151 of this embodiment, and (C) and (D) of the box rear wall portion of FIG. 152 of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the display mode of the game board side effect display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting effect state in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the display mode of the game board side effect display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting effect state in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a game panel in the second embodiment; It is an enlarged right front perspective view of the game panel in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an area covering member in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a plan view of the arrangement of obstructing nails in the right game area in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of an area covering member in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the obstructing nail in the right playing area in the second embodiment, where (a) is a cross-sectional view of a portion where one obstructing nail is accommodated in the penetrating portion, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing two obstructing nails. A cross-sectional view of the location where the penetration portion is accommodated is shown, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the location where the three obstacle nails are accommodated in the penetration portion. It is a front view which shows an example of a nail sheet. Fig. 2 is a front view showing an example of usage of the nail sheet; FIG. 10A is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member in the third embodiment, and FIG. 11B is a front view showing an example of the installation state of the area covering member. FIG. 4C shows a cross-sectional view when the area covering member is attached to the existing member, and FIG. 4D shows a cross-sectional view when the area covering member is integrated with the existing member. Installation examples of multiple types of area covering members according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is an installation mode of the area covering member in which the right through portion is shifted inward, and (b) is an installation mode in which the left through portion is shifted inward. (c) is an installation mode of the area covering member with both penetrating portions shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode of the area covering member with the right penetrating portion shifted outward. However, (e) shows an installation mode of the area covering member in which the left through-hole is shifted outward, and (f) shows an installation mode of the area-covering member in which both through-holes are shifted outward. ing. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area covering member. However, (c) is an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 180 degrees and both penetrating parts are shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 90 degrees to the right and both penetrating parts are inward. A front view shows a staggered installation mode, and (e) shows an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 90 degrees to the left and both through-holes are shifted inward. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area covering member. However, (c) shows a front view of an installation mode in which the area covering member is moved downward and the penetrating portions on both sides are shifted downward. 3(a) to 3(d) show another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, showing various applicable shapes of the penetrating portion, respectively, in front views. Another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment, (a) is an installation mode of the area covering member that accommodates two obstacle nails in the penetration part on both sides, and (b) is an installation mode of two obstacle nails in the penetration part. (c) is a front view showing an example of a case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side, (d) and (e) are cross-sectional views showing an example of the case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side. Another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area covering member from behind the game panel, and (b) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area covering member to the game panel. A cross-sectional view showing an example of fixing from the rear of the is shown. Another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing a part of the left game area before installing the area covering member, and (b) is a left side after installing the area covering member. A front view showing a portion of the playing area is shown, respectively. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an installation mode of the area covering member molded with the penetrating portion shifted downward, and (b) is a front view showing an installation state of the area covering member formed with the penetrating portion shifted upward. Front views showing the manner in which the staggered area covering members are installed are shown, respectively. An example of an installation mode of the decorative seal on the area covering member, (a) is a front view showing the area covering member before installation of the decorative seal, and (b) is an embodiment in which the decorative seal is attached to the entire perimeter of the through portion. , and (c) is a front view showing a mode in which a decorative seal is affixed to a part of the periphery of the penetrating portion. 1A to 1C show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. The manner in which the obstructing nail is accommodated is shown in cross-sectional views. (a) to (g) show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and (a) to (g) show an obstructing nail in a penetration portion in which a convex portion is formed in the central portion of the cross section of the area covering member. The accommodation mode is shown in cross-section, respectively. (a) to (d) show an example of accommodation of an obstacle nail in a penetration portion formed in a region covering member, and (a) to (d) show an obstacle nail in a penetration portion in which a convex portion is formed on the game panel side of the region covering member. The accommodation mode is shown in cross-section, respectively. FIGS. 1A to 1D show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetrating portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. Aspects are each shown in cross-section. FIGS. 1A to 1E are cross-sectional views showing an example of how an obstacle nail is accommodated in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. are indicated respectively. 1A to 1C are cross-sectional views showing an example of a housing manner of an obstructive nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. each indicated in the figure. Fig. 10A shows an example of a manner in which an obstructing nail is accommodated in a penetration portion formed in a region covering member, and Fig. 3(a) shows a visually recognizable manner before a fraudulent act, and Fig. 4(b) is a front view showing a visually recognizable manner after the fraudulent act. It is shown. A front view of another embodiment of the area covering member of the third embodiment is shown. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. (A) and (B) are front views showing a modified pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. (C) is a front view of the root vegetable frame movable body of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the obstacle nail and panel board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the obstacle nail, the panel board, and the game ball in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member and panel board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member and panel board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the game board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the game board in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the housing|casing in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the housing|casing in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an image diagram showing the movement of the self-tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an image diagram showing the movement of the self-tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game state in this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the present embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a moving image displayed in a display area in this embodiment; It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. 4 is a diagram showing display priorities of display images in the embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a vertically extending rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100.例文帳に追加A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the plate unit 320 and a plate unit 320 attached to the center of the plate unit 320. According to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a, the player can A performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory performance, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600, which is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse side mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in the front view to pay out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are detachably attached to the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and to release the game balls according to the state of storage of the game balls on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. An upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges from either a normal discharge port 850d or a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 that guides game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and guides forward game balls released from the full tank release port 850e to guide the game balls forward and guides the game balls forward from the front end to the full ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway 862 leading to the tank ball receptacle 274 .

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921 , a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 . An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 to control the payout of game balls are housed therein. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper portion of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front, and a flat plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game ball with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, omitting the left frame member, as viewed from below, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left from the center of the left and right; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11. As shown in FIG. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging cutout portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the lateral outer side surfaces. It has concave portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface bulging forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in the assembled state with the outer frame 2 . The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 .

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward extending portion 62 to the center of the front extending portion 62 toward the front and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable bar-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 which is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 are penetrated vertically so that only one game ball can pass through. and a sized discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. be.

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a main-body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arc-shaped front end face, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. , and the right ejection hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-section cut along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 300 attached to the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 .

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball shooting device 680; and a ball shooting device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. and a foul cover unit 270 for receiving a game ball which is shot by and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower tray 322. - 特許庁

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 rotates the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, which will be described later in detail. The ball can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball extraction button 327 for extracting game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and within the range of the balance of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning the cash or prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and the cash put into the ball lending machine. , a ball rental/return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting an effect, A lower tray ball ejection button 333 for discharging game balls downward from the tray unit 320 is provided.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is possible. Although details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display the effect image. and a display device 460 .

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the through hole 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4 . The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower corner of the front surface, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 are attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111 and the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and projecting from the main body frame 4. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the door frame base 110 and the front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 are detachably mounted. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 for closing the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210 , a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , the upper speaker 573 , etc., and a door body relay board for relaying connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4 .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 110 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a through-hole 111 formed in a generally rectangular shape extending vertically in the inner peripheral shape when viewed from the front. The through-hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, and is close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 110 , and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 110 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. A cylinder mounting portion 113 to which a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view between the and the cylinder mounting portion 113, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates in the front and rear at the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 110 penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage opening 116 for a lower tray and a through-ball passage 273 of a foul cover unit 270 are penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-opening 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the through opening 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 penetrates in the front and rear direction at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending to the left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a middle reinforcing sheet metal extending to the left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 . A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front view left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement sheet attached along the front view right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A metal plate 134 and a lock engaging portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and engages the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 .

In the reinforcement unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the lock engaging portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110 .

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, each of which has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part not only increases the strength and rigidity, but also prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 includes a door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a that are separated vertically, and a pair of projections of the door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. and a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. It is shaped like a letter. The door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects a pair of protruding pieces 141a and is attached to the rear surface of the door-frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes upward from the upper projecting piece 141a. Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower projecting piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. As shown in FIG.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 . The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has its upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and its lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

In the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by a lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 or removed downward. can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view is moved. , can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 4 .

Further, in the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door-frame-side upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket 141 is attached to the door frame of the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 . As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 .

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a that extends forward, and A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a. is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower door frame hinge pin 152 has a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 to be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 .

The door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 . can support

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in the front view to the height near the center of the through opening 111 in the vertical direction. A frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and a door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the position below the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117 a substrate 162;

A door-frame left-side upper decorative board 161 and a door-frame left-side lower decorative board 162 of the door-frame left-side decorative board 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is positioned behind a door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, with the door frame 3 assembled, and has a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably mount the glass unit 190 . The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base portion 171 mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a protrusion 172 that

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

With the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 , the glass unit mounting member 170 rotates so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 . The rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 is brought into contact with the rear side of the glass unit 190 to restrict the upper portion of the glass unit 190 from moving rearward.

The center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is positioned within the projecting portion 172 because the protruding portion 172 protrudes from the disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110 . . Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 and is stable. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172. Even if the member 170 is subjected to vibration or the like, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110 .

[3-1g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 . 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of ( In this example, three) ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws while the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 .

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300 . One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side inside the tubular portion 181 and the remaining two are provided on the lower side inside the tubular portion 181 . These three ridges 183 are formed in the handle base 301 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 180, the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical portion The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118 , and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191 . The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 191a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. A mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can abut against a projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 . The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is obtained by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110 .

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 200 includes a flat plate-like body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 202 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 .

The body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 201 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed along substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the body portion 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201 . A rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball shooting device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is within the game area 5a. It does not interfere with hitting the game ball into.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 . Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110 .

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear projecting piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 to rotate a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits rotation to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of .

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of cutouts 212a that are cut out in the same direction. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the body frame 4 can be inserted from behind, and projections of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 are inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the lock unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of flat plate-like side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in directions away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in front view is attached to the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 . As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100 , the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213 a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 extends from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the cylinder insertion hole. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. A front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of a cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into the main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. is.

The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, and the central side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the production operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having an operation button 410 and a decoration board unit 420 attached to the front side, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 and effecting A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the center side bulges forward. It has an annular button frame 412 attached thereto, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a member that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 extends for a predetermined length toward the center (inner side) in a recessed state with a W-shaped cross section from the rear surface of the button frame 412 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A first button decorative portion 411a extends on an axis toward the center in a recessed state with an arcuate cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decorative portion 411a, and is arranged in a circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range. and a plurality (six) of second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the drawing, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends toward the center from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer toward the center than

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three each on the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light due to unevennesses having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be seen clearly.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality (six) of frame openings 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction in an arc shape with a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorations 411 b of the button lens 411 . This button frame 412 has a plated layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a. A plurality (three) of detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in a band-like shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d extending forward and backward through the flange portion 413b outside the main body portion 413a and along the outer circumference for a predetermined length. A plurality (six) of base openings 413e are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a. and an inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. 413 d of three detection pieces are arrange|positioned at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two may be distribute|arranged to the upper side and one to the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main-body part 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the inwardly tapering front end of the inner extending portion 413 f substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412 .

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), and is formed transparently. can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and is operated by operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Forced forward. The front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 abuts against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 . By pressing against the , it moves rearward until the rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430 . When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 . Detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440 means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 .

Further, the operation button 410 has a button lens 411 and a button frame 412 that close the front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 . A transparent portion that allows the rear to be visually recognized is formed so as to narrow from the outer periphery to the inner side with respect to the outer diameter of 410 . The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 .

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a ) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and extends from the front surface of the decoration board unit 420 . It will protrude backwards. As a result, the lights emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are emitted from the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413 . Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower interior decoration board 436 from illuminating the parts other than the part to be luminous decoration, and the luminous decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4b. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the frame, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. there is

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in rows in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c having a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 . As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening portion 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 also includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening portion 416a and the outer peripheral opening portion 416b, and has a cutout portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. In the state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is arranged so that the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively arranged. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, respectively, and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portions 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and cutout portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal cover on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) across the central opening 416a. A glossy plated layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 three each, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without unevenness on the front side, and a plurality of unevenness along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple unevennesses, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concave and convex portions extending in a zigzag pattern on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a and arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen because light is refracted by these unevennesses.

In the frame unit 415, in a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. , and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon can be decorated with light. .

[3-4c. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from the front. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400 .

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The substrate base 421 has an inner circumference that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415 .

The operation button left external decoration board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button left outer decoration board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along.
The operation button right external decoration board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. Both front and rear surfaces of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end side of the cylindrical main body part 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421 . Further, in the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the frame The inner tubular portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 illuminates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decoration board unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 400. FIG.

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 400. The player can be entertained by participating in the performance presented to the player by operating the button 410.例文帳に追加

The performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The production operation unit 400 has the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 . When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the effect operation unit 400). Since it is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438. As shown in FIG. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the operation button spring 438 pushes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 toward the frame unit 415 . It abuts on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 (center axis line CL side). there is In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) faces the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 , the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 . When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the presentation operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. is installed with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. A portion of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are flat surfaces, When a part of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot retreat straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can be done. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attachment part. , the entire effect operation unit 400 can be greatly (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player pressing the operation button 410 It is possible to transmit strong vibrations to the player, and surprise the player and enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck, the frame is not held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is regulated, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the portion 326a and the like, and to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed and an effect is presented to the player, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is not pressed. Since the 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, so that the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are higher than those of the case, and even if the button lens 411 is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

46, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the back side is the front side (player side). ). In addition, since the plate thickness changes in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with unevenness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 . Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), there are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button. 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap is positioned from the front side (player side) to close the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the operating button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided inside the operating button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operating button 410 from deteriorating in appearance. It is possible to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling, and it is possible to arrange the operation button internal decoration member 432 inside the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 are arranged so that the outer circumference of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is adjusted. The unit base 431, the decoration board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) of the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411.例文帳に追加Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line is hidden from the player's side. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, in turn, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape around the center axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the concave-convex line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). With the second button inner decoration part 432g, a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the player can see the decoration with movement, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player by using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest and have a high appeal.

In addition, in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decorative member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button An upper interior decoration board 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof emit light, thereby causing the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 to emit light. can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 , the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 , the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 , and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 . As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are as follows. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body portion 413a, so that the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body portion 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 positioned near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board A second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of lenses mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. , the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. A plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to near the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the side of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is arranged above the tray unit 320 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160). It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100 . The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent property arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit top that is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536 .

A left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear directions. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 has LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially in the vertical center when the door frame 3 is assembled. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. As shown in FIG. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface itself of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion (left portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffuser lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffuser lens member 532A and a lower diffuser lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion that is square in front view and corresponds to the square opening 531a. and a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and square lens portion 532b. formed.

A circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged in the rear can be emitted forward in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and an input lens portion 532e on the rear surface that is entirely outside of the input lens portion 532e and that extends forward as it goes away from the input lens portion 532e. and a forward reflecting portion 532f that is slanted for movement.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffuser lens portion 532d has grooves recessed rearward in an arc shape in a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves extends forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the peak portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line that divides it in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portions are formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a triangular cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with peaks between grooves sharpening rearward, and is formed in a serrated shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. In addition, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line dividing the portion in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line that divides in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward into a curved surface (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels forward in parallel. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is directed perpendicularly to the longitudinally extending axis (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. direction), and travels outward along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b from the center side. Also, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected outward from the central side in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (see Figure 50). As a result, light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwardly reflected by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions. light can be emitted substantially uniformly forward (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the .

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as boundaries. are shifted in the radial direction, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern of light and shade. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light forward with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 . The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion positioned in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and a portion positioned in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. and a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in a vertical direction on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is shaped like this. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 of the door frame right side unit 550, respectively.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536 . In addition, the left unit decorative lens member is configured such that the circular decorative portion is projected forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is projected forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. By the light irradiated to each of them, they are decorated with light emission.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular tube extending back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery thereof, which is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U shape that opens upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530 . The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion that is bent rearward. A V-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped part and the upper end of the lower V-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and a.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. Fig. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 .

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. and a door frame right side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front and back direction. A transparent plate-like right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member. and a transparent plate-like right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, and on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the right side of the center in front view and the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. there is

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is open on the front and right sides. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and an opaque right light shielding member 559 attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right diffuser having a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561 , the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front and rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563 . Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting with the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The right unit base 551 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 itself is made of a reflective material such as metal or resin. It is also possible to provide such as by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion (right portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a left LED 552b mounted on the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. and a plurality of medium LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for lighting up the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, the right LED 552b is for lighting up and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of notch portions 553c are cut out in a rectangular shape leftward from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. 554, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in a plurality in the vertical direction, and on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. A plurality of side reflection portions 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is positioned at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a vertically extending quadrangular shape in side view. It is formed in a shape that is slanted to move to the Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the body portion 553 a projects forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The right end of the rear wall portion 553 b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . When the door-frame right-side unit 550 is assembled, the inner LEDs 552c of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c. can be decorated.

The housing recess 553 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is vertically divided into 6 equal parts, it is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a concave portion forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 553e are positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 553f are formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines separating the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface of the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the body portion 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 553f, is reflected leftward in front view, and travels outward from the left surface of the body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main portion 553a and the light emitted rightward from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted from the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 to the left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the body portion 553a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 553f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of lines extending radially, and the plurality of concentric circular grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form concentric circular grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate leftward light with more uniform intensity. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the side reflection lens member 553 formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body portion 553a (the side where the accommodating recessed portion 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting short to the left in front view from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. 556b, a plurality of notch portions 556c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right when viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A front view of a housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a vertically extending rectangular front end with an upper corner notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side extending upward toward the front. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to the right direction, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in the front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the main body portion 556 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled with the door frame right side unit 550 . The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 556c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. As shown in FIG. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening penetrating back and forth between the notch portion 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is vertically divided into six equal parts, it is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 556e are positioned in front of the right LEDs 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves circumferentially divided by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 556e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 556f are formed so that the groove portions and the ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with respect to the radial line that divides the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the main body portion 556a moves leftward in a front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the body portion 556a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 556f, is reflected rightward in front view, and travels outward from the right surface of the body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is irradiated to the right side. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main portion 556a and the light emitted leftward from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right direction and passed through the body portion 556a is irradiated to the right side, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit attached to the right side of the body portion 556a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing lines as boundaries to form the concentric arc grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. It is possible to irradiate rightward light with more uniform density. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, it is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a in front view (the side on which the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right decorative member 557 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555 . Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 when viewed from the side. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, and a rear wall portion 559b. A plurality of notch portions 559c are cut leftward from the right end of the wall portion 559b in a front view and have a plurality of cutout portions 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcement portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in which the upper corners on the front end side are notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side extends upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 559c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, respectively. Therefore, when the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, one pair of reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563 . The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are enhanced by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right light shielding member 560 of the right unit has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 . The right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the horizontal direction. . Through the space formed between the body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is emitted from the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 illuminate forward, respectively. The light emitted is prevented from interfering with each other. Only the middle LED 552c can be used for luminous decoration.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. It is possible to prevent light from interfering between the spaces by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, which is located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561. , can be decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be vertically divided into a plurality of (four) areas, and each area can be illuminated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons made up of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed into a shape as shown.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b divided into four spaces by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three regions located in the front, the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction is provided with one multifaceted decorative portion 561b on each of the upper and lower sides. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged in the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561 . The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . This right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 . The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is made of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 vertically divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 530 protrudes forward in a large plate shape, and slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. there is The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both projecting left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. can be decorated with luminescence.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exhibit a function and effect like a partition between. As a result, the players playing the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, and the players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. can be done.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the door frame right side unit 550 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility can be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where many pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book can be seen from a distance. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides By making the member 561 or the like luminous and decorated in a peculiar manner, the staff of the game hall can immediately be notified of the occurrence of the trouble and be made to recognize it, and can quickly deal with the trouble. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved early, and the player's frustration and loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the center base 571 that is mounted in the center in the horizontal direction above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 . A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending to the left and right, with the center in the left and right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a passing through the pair of upper speakers 573 in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box-like shape with an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) extending vertically and penetrating them in the front-rear direction. A unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the top inner decorative member 576 having translucency, and to the rear side of the top inner decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, respectively, and left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top inner decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration. A top center left decorative member 581, which is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top center decorative member 576 to near the center side end of the opening 574a, and A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and LEDs are mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, respectively. A door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on both left and right sides of the rear side of the unit main body 271 in the center in the left and right direction are penetrated. A pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the respective portions where the LEDs 586a and 587a are attached, and a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a are mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. It is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and door frame top center right decoration board 587 and the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and door frame top center right decoration board 587 respectively. and a pair of light shielding members 588 .

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit main body 271, and a central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. An attached relay board cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and a unit cover 591 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. and a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271 .

A central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. The center base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of unevenness on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the respective front surfaces are obliquely attached so that the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone speakers capable of outputting sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending in the left and right direction bulge downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that a square extending in the left and right direction is notched with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower end side when viewed from the front. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view, and a portion of about 1/2 of the total width (length in the horizontal direction) centered on the center in the horizontal direction on the front edge side of the rectangle. A trapezoid protruding forward and a quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are combined to form a shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 is arranged such that both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are aligned with the lines connecting the left-right end portions of the unit main body 271 and the left-right direction end portions of the front ends of the portions protruding forward. It is located posteriorly (recessed).

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions extending from the right and left ends of the front surface to positions outside the portions projecting forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and that penetrate in the front-rear direction at a portion that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface and that extends obliquely. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend laterally from the vicinity of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271, which extends obliquely forward, to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Also, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be separated vertically by three.

The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c formed by notching forward from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d formed by notching from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , is equipped with An upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower opening 574 d is closed by a lower cover 592 .

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape when viewed from the front that is a modified pentagon bent so that the center of the lower side of the substantially square in the horizontal direction is positioned downward, and extends laterally outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape as if it were a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the edge and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the modified pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is arranged behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to follow the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 . side mounted. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top interior decoration substrate 577, and the interior top decoration member 576 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271 protruding forward. The side near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 is defined as the end side, and the side near the center is defined as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height, and the circular arc portion 578b has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. there is

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and formed of sawtooth unevenness, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities, It has

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. FIG. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. As the light advances toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of them is decorated with light emission.

Light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 , or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 . By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be decorated with good (uniform) light.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 579 a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574 e of the unit body 271 . That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578 .

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 580 a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids projecting forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574 f of the unit body 271 . That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584 a and 587 a of a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578 .

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580 . The top center right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted directed rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted directed leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. By means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical with each other. The substrate base 585 has side walls that are substantially square in side view and have sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is square in front view and extends outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear sides of the side walls, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The line connecting the upper sides of the side walls to the middle is the oblique side, and the upper side of a substantially right-angled triangle connects the upper sides of the side wall and the back wall. and a right-angled triangular lower wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271 . A door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or a door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left rear side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 . be done. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top center left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 586 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to light-embellish a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the right side of the left-right center so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. be done. The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted on the door frame top center right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to light-embellish a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

A pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at positions between the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271 . The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 which are arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a and 587a positioned immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 579 can be guided forward. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top center right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550 . The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590 .

The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved backward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 attaches the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 . It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated with the door frame top unit 570 .

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each in the vicinity of both left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three vertically spaced decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be listened to by the player in good condition, and the player can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Further, the door-frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top right decorative lens member 580, so that the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 583 are arranged. Light from substrate 584, door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be directed to top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, and top left decorative lens member. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light-embellish the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 .

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
Effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a through-hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, which is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. , the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , corresponds to a game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111. , and the front surface of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front lower decorative portion 326c) is hollowed backward (dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400, the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are positioned rearward. ing. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude forward greatly, so that the performance operation unit 400 is made conspicuous and emphasized to the player. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

The door frame 3 tilts the performance operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large semispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her line of sight and presses the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly recognized, and the expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 can be heightened. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 which is large in diameter and protrudes forward in a round shape and has a diameter substantially equal to the total height of the plate unit 320, the operation button 410 can be operated by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is mounted in a tilted state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be operated satisfactorily even from the front or from the front, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a state of being suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 for generating vibrations in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is startled by pressing the operation button. The production using 410 can be made even more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) extending over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and appeal strongly attracting the interest of the players. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be obtained.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that opens on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the capacity of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his or her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his or her finger on the lower plate opening 326d, Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game and increasing the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The fact that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that can also be made tactilely recognizable.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower outlet for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in front view. That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower tray 322 of the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c. As a result, the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 or the like to the lower tray 322 is immediately discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below as soon as it enters the lower tray 322. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the dollar box through the lower tray 322 also increases. can't see This allows the player to have the illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 or the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper tray 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 is erected on the right side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is obliquely curved to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is directly discharged. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or it can be reflected by the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the ball hole 322a. As a result, while the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is located in the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. (Lower tray first area A1), since it can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is not visible to the player. Game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 or approaches it, the player can feel the vibration caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 forwardly output from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a plate-shaped right side unit 550 projecting greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is there, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around.

Further, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward. In the pachinko machine 1, even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from a lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the players. machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 is more concave than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decorative member 576 can be made conspicuous and emphasized to the player, and the top can be seen to be emphasized. Strong attention can be drawn to the middle decorative member 576 .

By the way, the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other to the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 has a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A speaker 573 is provided, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of a central top middle decorative member 576 through the front of a speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the upper part of the front face of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to the player by allowing the player to recognize at a glance that it is there, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to present to the player a decoration with a sense of unity in the top and bottom in which the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and at the same time, the decoration gives a sophisticated feeling. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction protrude forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 or the like.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. As shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A big prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It has an upper part 2300 and a frame-like center accessory 2500 having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower ends thereof extending substantially vertically, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1008 projects backward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has a plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002 . By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 , the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearwardly from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (the game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. FIG.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1011 is aligned with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are circular holes arranged near the outer circumference and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged near the outer circumference at the lower left portion and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , is equipped with These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5 a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging stepped portions 1115 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging stepped portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding stepped portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear direction inside the holding stepped portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a. and a through hole 1122 penetrating through.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the same as the panel holder 1120 . Almost flush with the front surface. Further, the holding stepped portion 1121 is formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 on the front inner peripheral surface thereof. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding stepped portion 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It extends and has a plurality of projecting pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 . By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It protrudes toward and elastically engages with the engaging stepped portion 1115 .
The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip thereof does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . The engaging piece 1125 is arranged along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 on the upper side ( center side) by a predetermined amount. By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 , the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the rear lower side of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126. - 特許庁

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1127 is aligned with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these cutout portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to form the lower full ball path unit 860. Front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 face forward.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front structural member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front structural member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front structural member 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127 . The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129 .

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 , the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 .

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000 . The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the rear lower side of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the cutout portion 1011 of the front structural member 1000 and a cutout portion 1152 which penetrates in the front-view left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and which is open downward, and which is located above the cutout portion 1152 in the vertical direction. and a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000 in the same manner as the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharging portion 1201 that is positioned.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Each of the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 is provided as a transparent member so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. there is That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. Ordinary pattern display 1402 consisting of, normal holding indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 A first special design indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 A number indicator 1404, a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a second start port 2004 A second special reservation number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the big winning opening 2005 A round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves which are open on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into 3010c from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starter opening unit 2100, the first starter opening 2002 opens upward to a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the big winning opening 2005 receives a plurality of game balls at once ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) extend to the left and right with an acceptable size, and are formed so as to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front in the game area 5a, at the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is directed to the right (game area 5a). center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that a game ball hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball which has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released into a frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the game panel 1100 . Also, behind the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front. The rear wall has a square opening 3010a. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right along the axis and housing the performance drive board.

The back unit 3000 includes a back left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. , and a notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 uses a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are released by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle pegs (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are placed on the obstacle pegs. By abutting, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves left and right, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because it is positioned directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting), On the downstream side, it flows through a region provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.3 to 10 seconds), it will be in an open state, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 is possible. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of pending lottery results is set to four, and even if the game balls pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 sets an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery for the special lottery result that generates a medium hit, a small win, a variable probability win, a reduced time win, etc. is performed. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R big hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time saving (time reduction) hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball is received in the big winning opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 output a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 830. A game ball is paid out to the upper tray 321. - 特許庁Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 can receive the game balls, by making the big winning hole 2005 accept the game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) to accept a game ball. Repeat the opening and closing pattern multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of accepting game balls, or the opening to the big winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state is set. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and a special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is variably displayed by changing each symbol row in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the drawn special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED flashing time (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates). A longer time is set for the function display unit 1400 than the time until the finalized image is displayed.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 is displayed according to the special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the game can be played by various effects. It is possible to keep the player's interest in the game from declining.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main frame 4 in this embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the present invention. , the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment and the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorations of the present invention, The second inner button decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral edge decorative member 478 each correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention. .

Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration substrate mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitter of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 each correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 protruding forward in the door frame 3 is operated. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped decoration, the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped decoration, etc. Since it is possible to show the player the decoration full of decorativeness with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) approach or separate, A change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) changes the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411a. It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.). The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decorative body Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button inner decorative member 432 The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the screen is not on, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) are displayed. Since the intersecting state (overlapping condition) between the two is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the back side can be visually recognized well through the first button decoration portion 411a. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of , and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame It is possible to draw the player's attention to the side effect display device 460 strongly.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with the second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of polygonal decorations concentrically centered around the center, the button lens 411 can be seen from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to players by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g conspicuous. can.

In addition, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g By the decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 (or the sub-screen decoration substrate 477) When the LED 477a) emits light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can also be entertained by light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are operated by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, and the operation button top Direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 emits light for decoration. Indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for luminous decoration, while the second button inner decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminous-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated, the LEDs of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated. (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, and the perspective is emphasized when the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing by showing the decoration to the player and strongly attracting the interest of the player.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move to a portion outside the outer circumference of the frame-side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame The side second effect display device 460A) can be spread outward to be made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. In addition, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the whole pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative and highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of players by improving its appearance.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, the button lens 411 has a flat shape when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. Compared to the case, the applied impact force is more likely to disperse over the entire button lens 411, so the button lens 411 can be made less likely to break (be less likely to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the breakage of the button lens 411 during the game, which interrupts the game and makes some players feel frustrated and lose interest. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the front through the through hole 111 in the door frame 3. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 protruding forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. Operation buttons 410 that are movable (advance and retreat) by being operated by the player with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm, and decoration inside the operation buttons that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation buttons 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, the conventional Since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having as large an operation button 410 as possible can be seen at a position where the storage tray for the game balls is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see the performance operation unit 400 at a glance. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 partitioning the decoration portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 partitioning the second button decoration portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the second LED 422b , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated with light emission. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc., for the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration part Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a substrate, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently emitted. It is possible to irradiate the second button decoration portion 411b in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (the second base unit 450), the operation button left external decoration board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 advances and retreats. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right external decorative board 423 is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. The player can be entertained with the luminous decoration without any problem, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, since the second button decorative portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edges of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By appropriately lighting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be decorated with light emission in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emission effect, the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decorative portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when executing the player-participation type production, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light emission, thereby attracting the attention of the player to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not decorated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened so that it is positioned backward. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the transparent button lens 411 can pass through the transparent button lens 411 to the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lenses 417, the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are arranged on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. never do. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably blocks the light by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the rear side of the operation button 410 has the second button decorative portion 411b. and the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are located near the end (rear end) of the main body 413 a near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 . , the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and light from entering the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the transparent button lens 411 can be used to illuminate the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the decoration and the light emission effect, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is placed in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the door frame side second The second button decorative portion 411b can make the outside members and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) difficult to see, thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance of the operation buttons 410.例文帳に追加Also, at this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b is changed by the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player can A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, it is possible to create a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can be kept from getting bored with various light-emitting effects, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 321 used for the game by hitting the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a is formed. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 of the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the part corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine. A highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of making a player recognize that it is different from a conventional pachinko machine at a glance and strongly attracting the interest of the player. can.

In addition, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since lower tray covers 340, 340A for regulating movement of the game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the player from losing interest, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Also, lower plate covers 340, 340A for restricting movement of game balls to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j are provided in the portion of the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. , it is possible to prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 is covered by the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the portion of the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is covered by the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the player can easily move the lower tray main body 325 toward the lower tray first area A1 (lower tray opening). 326d) into the lower tray second area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. etc. can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), etc., and the player can play in a safe state. can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball against the lower plate covers 340, 340A is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is ensured. can be prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, since the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is and be discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will not reach the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is tilted. The moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated by climbing the bottom surface. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball hits the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left-right direction bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging portion thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. and a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with the outer side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower tray first area A1 and a lower tray second area A2 positioned in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small and inconspicuous. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the part where the upper tray and the lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is smaller, the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, game balls can be stored in a range (lower plate second area A2) of the lower plate 322 that cannot be seen from the front. can. Therefore, since a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured contrary to the appearance from the front, the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

Further, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension section 325B and the second extension section Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like having different sizes are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of sizes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space behind the mounting space 326j. Since the size of this rear space depends on the rearward projection amount of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rearward projection amounts can be used. The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a downwardly recessed container-like shape and a game ball. can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have the cover vertical wall section 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body vertical wall section 325b of the lower tray main body 325, various shapes of the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (attaching) the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, etc., various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed becomes the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed on the part where the load of the game balls is increased due to the storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower tray cover 340, 340A will not be pulled away from the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off the lower tray main body 325.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is performed such that the game balls are accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the and is made invisible from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player is interested. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting . In addition, since the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a is made difficult to see by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game inside the lower dish 322. It is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by making it difficult to notice the flow of the ball, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate of the lower plate 322 to guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a Since the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guide means such as the ball guide part 322c and the buffer part 322d is made difficult to see, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to create the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a difficult to see from the front. In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are positioned behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is different from the actual size of the lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Also, in the state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 Since the guide means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball hole 322a, the ball can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged to the bottom of the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , the game ball can be prevented from circulating in the lower tray 322, and the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 can be reliably made invisible from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is immediately released by the ball guiding portion 322c or the like without making the player aware of it. Since the ball can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is ejected below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), since more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the bottom plate 322 is made invisible from the front, the bottom plate visible from the front Since the actual lower tray 322 is larger than the visible size with respect to the size 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 protruding forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit attachment for attaching a large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. In addition to having a portion 326a, the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped out rearward from the center in the vertical direction. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be seen to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect The operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous. Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were arranged vertically in the conventional pachinko machine. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing by making the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped around the back of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. The player does not have to worry about the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his or her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive that a sufficient amount of game balls is secured even by touch, and in a state in which the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored in the space, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction, enjoy the game, and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player feels the same as the lower tray in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to a player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine, and to reassure the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. , and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the lower plate cover 340 covers the sides and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A), the player cannot move inside the lower plate 322. When a player puts his or her hand in, it is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and get injured. The game can be played in a safe state. Also, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326 .

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player entertained with decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine can be used. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when a player accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine plays a game with this pachinko machine 1, the function of the lower tray 322 will not be confused and the same as the conventional one. The game can be played with a relaxed feeling, and the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are arranged. A pachinko machine with a high appealing power, in which a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is not visible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3, the plate unit 320 protruding forward is A base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 is provided with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) is adjusted so as to surround the outer periphery. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450 ) is attached at the center thereof, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 is provided with a button lens 410 . A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decorative portion 411a, a second button decorative portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Therefore, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc., and improve the appearance of the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button lens 411 and the button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the button base 413. Since it is possible to make the outer edge and inner side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be 470) is relatively large, it can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration part 411a and the like, so that while preventing deterioration in appearance, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be implemented without problems. Therefore, since the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the objects outside the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) so that they cannot be seen. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the front end side opening of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the advancing/retreating direction of the operation button 410). ), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), the outer edge of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), the inner side, and the like can be made difficult to see through the gap, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases. The side effect display device 460 (the second door frame side effect display device 460A) can be made larger or made easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player through the operation button 410.例文帳に追加460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be embodied.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with a design (ornamental effect). can be made to face, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In addition, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the inner side of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

In addition, the button frame 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 covering the entire circumference with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to allow the player to Since the gap between the body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470 and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be moved smoothly and easily because there is no directivity in the outer periphery compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made large, it can be pressed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is made larger, when the player-participation-type production is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be easily operated without confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since the operation button 410 can be easily touched and pressed, the player can easily participate in the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, which amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) In addition to being able to entertain the performance, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by means of a performance image or a light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). , the decline in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player-participation-type production and entertaining the player. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the players is high. It can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, heightens the player's expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is formed with the first button decorative portion 411a on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed along the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, it is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one projection may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411 . The button base 413 may have decorations (planar decorations such as pasting stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decorations such as unevenness such as reliefs) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Also, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Also, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, and the like.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown. but not limited to, recessed backward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a lower plate that is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) 322 may be used, and only the portion on the right outside of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is recessed rearward, and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around to the rear. You can let it be.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved rearward. Although an example of a recessed shape has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. , ``equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface,'' ``equipped with a decoration with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration,'' and ``a game Equipped with decorations that three-dimensionally mimic characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama), etc., in line with the concept of the game machine", "Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns in line with the concept of the game machine" You may attach members, such as a unit or a panel provided with decorations, such as , by a seal, printing, etc., etc. Moreover, the member attached to the attachment space 326j (the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In the above-described embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the frontwardly opening effect operation unit attachment portion 326a for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. It should be noted that the front surface of such a plate unit cover should preferably be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in line with the concept of the game machine by means of stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, or the like. .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a cover. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire plate 322 may be made invisible from the front.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arranged in an arc shape partially in the circumferential direction. , and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The second inner button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including ovals) centering on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be visible at all times, it is not limited to this. may be provided with a variable light transmitting means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, there are two types of means, such as a magic mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, and a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent when the power is turned on and off. or become opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized”, and the like. In addition, the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable, or relatively non-movable.

At least one of the front member and the rear member has a variable light transmission means, so that only the front member or both the front member and the rear member are visible in a normal state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. A member and a back member, or a front member, a back member and a member behind the back member can show overlapping decorations. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

More specifically, for example, if the front member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the front member is decorated by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the sufficient condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member passes through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state, so the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. A player can be shown the surface and decoration of the Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light-emitting portion such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) can be seen by the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light emitted from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the sufficient condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like). ), and the satisfaction conditions of the respective variable light transmission means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, respectively, and the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) through the front member and the rear member can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmission means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Also, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is explained as something like a magic mirror. In addition, if a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmission means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light emission) by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED, the player can see more various effects such as light emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69; FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control section.

The pachinko machine 1 has, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. , and a second control unit SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931 will be described in this order. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that stores various control programs such as a main control program that controls game operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , and a blackout monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of blackout or momentary blackout of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches input to various input terminals thereof is not reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later, so that various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system, which will be described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs a signal based on it from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. is entered in 60, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and a back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetism detection sensor 4024 attached to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet is supplied to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5, and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or outputs a drive signal to the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the first special symbol display device 1403 via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the panel relay board 4161, and the function display unit 1400 , Second special symbol indicator 1405, first special reservation number indicator 1404, second special reservation number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main control with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting sensor 4002, the second starting sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. For the general winning hole sensor 4020, a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starter sensor 4002, the second starter sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game balls. For this reason, the count sensor 4005 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 4020 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 4020 .

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it sends a signal (main pay ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It outputs to the circuit 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power on. Is output from the payout control board 951, through the main control input circuit 1310b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU1310a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU1310a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Out of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes, as shown in FIG. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting drive signals to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952 d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952 e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 . The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially converts various information (game information) on the game and various commands on payout from the main control board 1310 into the main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and payout control is started, the payout When an operation error occurs, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the body frame open switch 619 receives a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation, it outputs a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command).

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs a signal based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball run-out detection sensor 827 for detecting the running out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. It should be noted that the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will simply be referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification for the sake of the explanation below.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial data format at the input terminal of the serial input port, or receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the dispensing device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball engage near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult to rotate the payout rotator. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (electrical connection at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via resistors (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computers installed in the game balls.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. It is designed to prevent the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout etc. It is designed not to malfunction or break down due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending/returning display unit 330. This signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 , the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 , and this signal is input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

In addition, the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the part surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the returning button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330 as a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the rental ball unit 360 .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (turned ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 is composed of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the segment displays of the three digits are sequentially driven one by one by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The lighting of the digit segment indicators is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error in the CR unit 6 . The ball rental/return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a single-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the designated single-digit segment display. segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of the luminescence of the vessel can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363 .

A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the degree display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display unit 330 through current limiting resistors mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the game ball lending device PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or not possible. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control section 953 that performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped (shooting) by the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 951 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the batted ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control section SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 with respect to the first control section MCG. 19, a performance display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side performance display device 1600 and a door. While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are controlled by rotating the knob. and a volume adjustment volume 4140a that is adjusted by operation.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and light emission modes such as various LEDs and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special A peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing effect flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally ".) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when power is immediately restored after an instantaneous power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the serialized performance operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a comprises a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. It reads and writes various data via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading and writing are performed with respect to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. to read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, it will be reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a decision notice lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state has been decided. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. , noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has an important meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

Peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to volume control volume 4140a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and from mute to maximum volume. can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above.
As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. and a track number for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a backup area stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to be cleared to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the signal is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak has an effect display drive board 4450 on its periphery. Drawing data is received from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the control board 1510, and if the received drawing data is determined to be abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output based on the LOCKN signal described later to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between connections with the effect display drive board 4450 are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms) which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is the normally used storage area. is transferred to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac as effect backup information (1ms) each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This page is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the first backup area 1511cb has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the power-on, it instructs the start of the effect). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, history of occurrence of a big hit game state etc.), on the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 1511db to a second backup area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is for backing up various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control section]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are drawn. Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a for control, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is a forced switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal, and is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input; It has The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used to display the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the player's point of view, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display a suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator.

Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting various control data from the control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the top dish side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460. frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer method" is to hold drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In addition, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source displays the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 4140a with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is amplified to the master volume value, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. Synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated to mute, the sound data of the track in which this sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification Synthesize the sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume, and change the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the informational sound It amplifies to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sounds that actually flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data for the production is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjust, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 flowing.

In this way, when the performance sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the informational sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point at which the information sound started to flow, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194. For example, the positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 into one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , the green video signal, and the blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronous signal, and a vertical synchronous signal. and a clock signal, and serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it becomes very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported to be freely opened and closed with respect to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, on the main body frame 4 side It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closing side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even if a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" is adopted by Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, such a hardware configuration alone will not cause damage due to electrostatic discharge of game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being different from normal and disturbed data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wire length for sending the drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration Therefore, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that enters the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be reduced by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. However, if the defect occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the side of the body frame 4, various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 and various wirings provided on the side of the door frame 3' can be connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, The power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed apart from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and among the harnesses, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which is provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and will be described later. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 . The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

Door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and if it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to convey that fact. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the effect display device on the door frame side. Please call the clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and a notification sound to convey that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree and reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The luminance of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa contains brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. brightness can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described luminance correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in luminance that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the currently set luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is the correction information acquired by adding 5%. and lights up, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165 aa of the RTC control unit 4165 . Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., which are output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state for the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound is muted. to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the By operating the push operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. there is This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is used. and adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of . Since the volume control volume 4140 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can turn the knob of the volume control volume 4140a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed in a customer waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player who has been playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can turn the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 931 includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generating circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

A shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 953 uses the +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and shoots the game ball at a launch strength (launch strength) that matches the rotational position of the handle 302. While adjusting the drive current for hitting (shooting) toward the ball and controlling the output to the shooting solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 A feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and performs control for feeding the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d converts the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to +5V DC (+5V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (+12V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is connected to +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned to the payout control board 951 and then again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g causes current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the memory contents are retained. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages of +5V, +12V and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, for example. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. In addition, +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310, either.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 76(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and noise components removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25 V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is connected to the vibration sensor 2405, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal of , an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and error cancellation after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 through the payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and upon detection of a power failure or momentary power failure, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952 a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when +24V is interrupted or instantaneously interrupted, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the reference voltage Vref is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). (a logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q with the logic inverted is negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the D input terminal 1D terminal and the clock input terminal 1CK terminal grounded (GND), respectively. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting to be output in the main control side power-on processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as the payout power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control board 951 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the peripheral control board. 1510.

In this way, a main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from a peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is issued to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data to be transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal. The main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb without reset function from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). configured.
) are mainly composed of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 μF) shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When it is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

A TXB terminal for outputting a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND). As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, the +5V power line to which +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 are applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage for the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. It is an output figure. First, the payout control filter circuit 951a will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board 1310, and various output signals to the external terminal board 784 will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end grounded (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3 ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is grounded (GND) and the capacitor PC4 which is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 935d of the power source substrate 931 shown in FIG. As it is supplied to the payout control board 951, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying VBB. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, and peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG.
The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the capacitance of this capacitor PC5 sets the delay time of the delay circuit. It is possible to do so.
Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. The payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is connected to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power failure notice signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. circuit, handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR24 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame open switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit made up of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit made up of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON to input the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off to turn off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that an outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 has one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor PR40. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an output power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage notice through the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above through the wiring (harness), and the output power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power outage notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Thus, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. is entered in The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 951. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. FIG.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the storage space is filled with the stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board 951. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and having a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the payout control board. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the accommodation space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of game balls stored. When the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC 50 to remove the noise component so that such a problem does not occur. adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end and the other end of the capacitor PC41. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the subsequent stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact forming the operation switch 954 repeats ON/OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 are switched. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel errors after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is sent to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the dispensing motor 834 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG generated from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 80 through ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal that is output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power outage notice signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which notifies completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal described above, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payer ACK signal to inform that the main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payer. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 provides, in addition to the above-described main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Main prize number information output signal, main prize number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal and 2 round big hit information output signal from main control board 1310 via payout control board 951. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side is output. Information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, 2-round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, information output signal during time saving, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round big-hit information output signal or the 2-round big-hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big-hit information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of big hits with two rounds (2-round big-hit ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round big wins and 15-round big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even if the player starts playing the game, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal to the hall computer as the big win information output signal, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2nd round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15th round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. do not have.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also output when the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from generation to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is not generated during a normal game when the player says that the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is generated each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize number information output signal is a signal to enter various prize winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal for notifying that each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls based on the played game balls reaches 10, and the 15-round big-hit information output signal indicates that a 15-round big-hit has occurred. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that the probability fluctuation has occurred The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that it is in the state of being in, and the special symbol display information output signal is a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. , and the normal design display information output signal terminates (stops) the normal design fluctuation display in the normal design display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The time saving medium information output signal is a signal telling that the time saving state is occurring, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. Or, it is a signal to notify that every time a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 .

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can be grasped that the body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal.
As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send it to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. The 2-round big win information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big-win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls reaches 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls to be put out. can do. In addition, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering various prize winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to output at intervals of 0.128 seconds as if it were a continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 951 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. It is possible to prevent an unintended connection. Various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center toward the right side, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main winning ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the number of game balls is running low, if the pachinko machine 1 happens to hit a 15-round jackpot, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (For example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this is resolved). Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches ten. Since it is a signal that conveys that every time, when game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 outputs a winning ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the clogged ball (or, for example, to Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball or the position of the jammed ball and resolving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress even when the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk or the like after the jackpot of 15 rounds is completed. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15 round big win is completed and the 15 round big win is not occurring. Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize number information output signal to notify that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will happen. As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , there arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the number of prize balls information output signal output by the payout control board 951 is different. As a signal, the main control board 1310 is based on the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the signal is output via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal plate 784. , to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle, etc., ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball jamming, etc.) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. It mainly comprises a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for drawing in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 . FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for drawing in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. As shown in FIG.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are inputted to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits as described above, , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the transmitter IC 1512d for frame side effect is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is sent to the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effects, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data whose data format is different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 sends the LOCKN signal output request data. By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect receiver is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

+3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power supply line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side presentation drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. In addition, the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals because the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used.

The DE terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal output from a CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal for notifying whether data output from terminals D0 to D17, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Upon input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 which are storage trays (a machine that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H. , 2 prize balls are specified, and 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and command 2EH designates a prize ball. 15 spheres are specified. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and the command 30H designates a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Toku-zu 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of Toku-zu 1 synchronization production, the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and time saving state. In addition, in the probability and time saving state, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state, a low probability It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal game state, A low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time during which patterns are variably displayed as compared with a non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stop-displaying in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery to be described later in a predetermined time is obtained. While increasing the number of times of stop display compared to the non-time-saving state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces that the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60 has is compared with the non-time-saving state (normal game state) , By increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. To increase the number of determinations as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces compared to the non-time-saving state, and to lengthen the period of the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening and closing the pair of movable pieces. This is a state in which the acceptance rate (entering ball rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 is increased.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display device 1405 of. These various commands include "B*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number.
) are assigned ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production is intended to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 N-th display command is the start during the opening of the big win 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 60). During or start of opening of the N-th round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is the start of closing the large winning opening 1 between rounds (opening of the starting opening unit 2100). 69), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from 0 to 10 has been counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that entered the big winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning design display command It instructs the display of pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit or opening start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and big winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during a small hit is detected , and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (of the starter unit 2100 When the large winning opening 2005 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is transmitted when the large winning opening 1 is closed (start closing the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 and when the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the big win opening is opened (when the big win opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened) ).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small winning), The small hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle and large winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is , Sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category is composed of a command named Power-on State and Main Control Return Destination at Power-on. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on), the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information to instruct when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). .) In the above-mentioned, low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state, low probability non-short working hours state, and high probability non short working hours state Information that indicates whether to return in which state (probability and short working hours state) , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, what kind of game specification (for example, probability variation occurs In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol is changed is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited and a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As for the transmission timing of the power-on state command and the main control recovery target command at power-on, when the main control board power is turned on ) is sent to Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time processing described later is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands with the names of normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation regarding the device 1402. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, as described above, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state High probability time saving state It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As a game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (when the normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-loss information is designated. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric role effect relates to a pair of movable pieces of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. As shown in 89, it consists of commands named opening per normal pattern, open display for normal pattern, and ending per normal pattern. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern per opening command is to instruct the general pattern per opening to start, and the general pattern open display command is the start of general pattern open state, or when expanding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern opening command is sent at the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern open display command is sent when the general pattern is opened (a pair of movable When spreading in the direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the winning opening is entered except during the big winning (when the condition device is in operation). is detected by the count sensor 4005). It instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality. 4005 or the like, it instructs the start of disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display. It instructs the start of the magnetism detection switch abnormality notification when a Further, when an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command for instructing start of notification of vibration detection switch abnormality is transmitted.

Further, the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the door frame closing command instructs the door open notification, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . When it is in the state of being opened, the end of the door open notification is instructed. On the other hand, the body frame open command is shown in FIG. When the body frame is in the open state, the body frame closing command instructs the body frame open notification. It instructs the end of the notification of the opening of the body frame when the door is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (during operation of the condition device), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 It is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display is divided into commands named Frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command) and Frame status 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration board shown in FIG. 72). This is for inspecting various substrates such as the driving amplifier substrate 194).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command. is still used for variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reservations)), and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60) The second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normal symbol 1 reservation 0 to 4 It conveys the number of balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60 and have not yet been used for the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400). There is, and the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is read ahead and the special symbol 1 is reserved before the special symbol 1 is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 Based on the first special symbol display device 1403, it is intended to instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of special symbols in the device 1405, it prefetches and instructs the start of the look-ahead performance to announce the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is issued at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the first starting entrance 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting entrance sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second When the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting hole sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the stop period has passed), and the high-probability end designation command is , In the case of "high probability N times", it is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change When the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 has a reserved number that is not yet used for variable display of special symbols, further the first start When the game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol. In a state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the second special pattern display 1405 changes the special pattern. used for display and the number of reservations has decreased), and the normal design memory command is transmitted when the number of normal design 1 operation reservation balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal design of the function display unit 1400 In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols on the display device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display device 1402 is displayed. ), and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls has decreased by using it for variable display of normal symbols, and when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is in the first start port 2002 When the number of reserved balls has increased by entering a ball), the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 2 operation increases (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases increased). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued when the starting opening wins (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not give voice notification.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. Frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection, and unconnected CR. represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for ball catching, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. An error sets bit 3 (B3) to the value 1, and a retry error sets the value 1 to bit 4 (B4). Here, the "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is malfunctioning. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 in B0, a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared as "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. Reach determination random number for use in determination, shown in FIG. 69, the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1403 and a second special pattern display device 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot pattern. A random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 when generating the small winning game state. A small-hit symbol random number for use in determining a small-hit symbol and a small-hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the small-hit symbol random number are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece possessed by the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, and this normal symbol per determination random number A random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol per determination for use in determining the initial value of, and a normal symbol for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit judging random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control internal hardware random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first receives a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (a clock signal output from the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total is stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this extracted ID code, performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per determination. It is a mechanism that executes and sets this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. can be opened and closed to generate a game state in which a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

92 and 93, the main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage section).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts clocking, and the watchdog timer clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT 1310af with built-in main control is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control program performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitor circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with the logic being LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Subsequently, in the power clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is Determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the logic HI, and passes through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, is LOW in logic, it outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is its output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. This is done depending on whether or not the Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by judging that it is an instruction to clear the RAM.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG mentioned above indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. do). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When it is determined in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as when power is restored ( step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processes being performed. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, the main control program writes all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a executes processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs RAM clearing and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal design per determination. Perform an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and this fixed value is set to the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state by hardware In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to latch and acquire the random number, the hard random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a high-speed predetermined clock signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. A random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), the A power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, even if the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored. be. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program issues an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing is started. Execution of game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt will be regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing based on the concept of time sharing to use the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Triggered by the input, RAM clear processing is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, even if there is an input of the error cancellation navigation command, the execution of RAM clear processing is regulated ( Game control side normal operation control means), handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced as a game memory unit for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Main control built-in RAM (and payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) function as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the game It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. , 2nd special reservation number display 1406, normal design display 1402, normal design memory display 1188, state display 1401, round display 1407 etc. stop the drive signal which is output (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting the RAM access prohibition, access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) becomes impossible, so that updating of the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by a fraudulent act.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, charges the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the power from the pachinko island facility will be restored by applying +5V charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power has been cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control-side main process or a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed without fail.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts to count, and immediately before reaching the waiting time. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in hardware such as the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 , the interrupt initialization is performed, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and even if the hall clerk or the like does not express the intention of clearing the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the processing at the time of power failure on the main control side, which is composed of an infinite loop. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64). Since the determination is made, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating the determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. When the clock cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then step S52 It is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the part provided by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and the power supply on the main control side The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are covered by hardware so that the interruption processing is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to convey this, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. As described above, the main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. there is Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and the information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, the attacker Driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the state in which the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a is shifted to the state in which it is opened.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round the jackpot game state is. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2005a when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the large prize winning port 1 closed display command instructing the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the large winning port 2005 of the starting port unit 2100) When the information is transmitted to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a. A 5th big winning gate opening display command for instructing the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the 5th round of the big winning gate 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that indicates that the movable piece is expanded When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to be communicated to the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2107 to display the second screen shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the pair of movable pieces of the second starting port 2004 are expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the built-in control RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. , the state in which the pair of movable pieces rises substantially vertically shifts to the state in which they spread in the left-right direction.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen for telling the presence of the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. In spite of this, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the state command at power-on and the command to return to main control at power-on classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member 2005a. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the state of ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2005a. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored, and For example, in the above-described example, in the state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then it is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen notifying that the starting port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "Movable pieces The peripheral control board 1510 displays on the game board side effect display device 1600 a screen that conveys a message to the player that the game ball is being expanded. It is possible to instruct the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored by displaying it in the area. As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the state command at power-on and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored in As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the main control return destination command at power-on is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on status command is shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to perform RAM clearing, information to instruct that effect, and when power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is Including when power is restored.) Return in any state (probability and time saving state) from the above-mentioned low probability short working time state, high probability short working time state, low probability non-short working time state, and high probability non short working time state and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the copyright of any work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs in a state where the game is played 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to when the power is turned on), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register bank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric auditors control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are sent to the payout control board 951. Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the receiver has been received normally is input.
Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program detects, for example, the detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 60, a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. Vibration sensor 2405 for detecting a fraudulent act of vibrating the game machine shown in 69 and the fact that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. , are read from the payout control board 951 and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start hole 2002, the detection from the second start hole sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start hole 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start-up winning command shown in FIG. 90 and classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starter sensor 4002, a starter winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 4004. Then, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 2001, and a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 2005. , a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004. , and a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are read first when this switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, , respectively are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 for the first time. False detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc., by performing a total of two readings by performing two readings for comparison from the third time to the third time, and two readings for the second to fourth times. can be avoided, so the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 is increased. be able to.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win-lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up to the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. When the number of scheduled game balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 60, a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is generated. has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payout control board 951 does not receive the payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command normally, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951 . If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls in excess will be added to the number of balls in the next game. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added, and the added number of game balls is calculated. is reached, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state displays shown in FIG. to send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954 .
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by state display in FIG. 90 (frame state 1 command, error release The navigation command and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error generation command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input in the non-jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005), etc. 90 as an abnormal state, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (random number) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this acquired random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. And the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, whether or not (Determine whether or not to generate a big hit game state (referred to as "special lottery")), take out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the big hit pattern, and store it in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the probability variation per determination value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control), and the built-in main control When judging whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot judgment random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start sensor 4002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In some cases, create various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning performance shown in FIG. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, and store it in the output information storage area described above as the output information do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1) classified as related to big win shown in FIG. Closed display command, big winning opening 1 count display command, big winning ending command, and big winning pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member of the big winning mouth 2005 shown in FIG. 2005a is set to output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the number of times (round) that the big winning port 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times. When , the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the output of a lighting signal to the state indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of probability variation is lit in a predetermined color, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th division, the 1st division, the 2nd division, and the 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third partition of the information storage is shifted to the second partition of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third partition of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the second start opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the above-described transmission information storage area, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 so as to light the normal design display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal per symbol determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. Determine the display pattern, create various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 has been normally received, the payout control board 951 Or, when in the jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2005a of the big winning opening 2005, and output a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece In addition to outputting, main prize number information output signal, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as time saving information output information, start winning prize information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, big wins based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big win opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role effects, Fig. 90 , various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main-circumference serial data. When the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM , as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, and the game information is read according to this game information. various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (rendering control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the clocking, thereby preventing the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. 89, which instructs the driving state of the starting solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical driving sources, by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. It is designed to be able to output to That is, the main control board 1310 is the main controller in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), a power-on state command and a power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the device is out of order because the player sees the device in the broken state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data constitutes the power-on state command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to the inspection equipment in the process. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs from the main control board 1310, shown in FIGS. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 1fr) are compared, and effect backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. ) are compared, and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared. When the contents match, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , to Bank0 (1 ms), and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms), are respectively copied back to perform a hot start. That is, when there is no match), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) are compared, and effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc, is compared. When the contents of the comparison match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. 0 is forcibly written to cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be cleared to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process to be described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted, byte by byte, via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 etc. is operated based on the detection signal from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a in the display data creation process, which will be described later, from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. It outputs to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that allows you to prioritize synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match the time.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the first screen data is stored in the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the head light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler updating process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the performance control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, starting mouth winning command for instructing the start of the starting mouth winning effect, the number of normal symbols pending Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of the pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of starting reservations changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present. In addition, this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a body frame open command, a body frame close command, a door open command or a door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame open command , door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (equivalent to second error generation command), etc. There are various commands classified, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are sent to the peripheral control unit 1511. It extracts from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal production mode accompanying the production operation, for example, the game board side Effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), lamp (effect device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside ( error reporting means). By doing so, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310, which may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program stores in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). The look-ahead effect control process executes the process related to the look-ahead effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when receiving a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or a special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command (hereinafter referred to as "prefetch effect command"), for executing the prefetch effect Make settings. Details of the look-ahead effect control processing will be described later.

The look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when the game ball wins the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 . In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a prefetch effect command, a prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the look-ahead effect control process, if the look-ahead effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether to execute the look-ahead effect based on the content of the look-ahead effect command. That is, in this embodiment, even when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to actually execute the prefetch effect.

Then, when the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the state of the pending display of the starting memory is changed as the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect). In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed to change the state of the pending display each time the starting memory for the preceding execution of the variable display is consumed. do. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect. The predetermined condition may be, for example, that the number of starting memories that have not been digested is equal to or greater than a certain number, or that there is a high degree of expectation that the outcome of the variable display game based on the starting memories to be read ahead will be a big win. may

The content of the look-ahead effect is not only to change the display mode of the start memory, but also to display effects on the door frame side effect display device 460 such as character display and background change, light emission of lamps, sound output from the speaker. , the motion of a movable body, and the like.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the effect display device on the game board side. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 4140a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low volume, the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in a first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs a peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed with the . When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 96 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) of FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, the effect that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 95, will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by 1 (step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the schedule data for the electric drive sources set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created. 73 is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are transferred byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and sets it in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device acquires the frequency of failure and the failure occurrence state between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. 460 drawing state can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah. , and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb as effect backup information (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The contents up to the stored contents are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank0 (1 ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously stored in units of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511cc (1 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510 . In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is loaded into the reception buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral controller MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built into the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are It is stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral controller reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 75, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this judgment, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 microseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are extinguished, and so on. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence from the head address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then copy all of the received command storage area sequentially by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copying is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creating process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to notify that fact. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal (normal data). predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the transmission of the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504).
In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted to the highest bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. , toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since a value of 1 or 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of connection failure determination processing executed as one processing of the warning processing in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

72, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. FIG. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal output to notify that effect. and, that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 (step S1522). This determination is to determine whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in step S1522. (to count the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is designed to restore the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

In step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the calculated cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not established when the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the upper limit value CC-LMT of the accumulated number of times. is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0 respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. and to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the schedule data for screen generation among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is being activated (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the order of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is indicated. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. When performance is completed along with the data and updating of the pointer is all completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation has not started. In addition, in this determination, the period during which the start screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the time period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be judged based on the schedule data for screen generation whether or not it is a period of time, and the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. When the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the game board side effect display device 1600 is not in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simple state of waiting for customers), This routine is terminated as it is.

In step S1540, when the effect is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine ends as it is, while in step S1540 When the presentation is completed and the pointer is completely updated, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 (step S1542). 101. As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set in step S1522 of the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then this process is performed as it is. While the routine is terminated, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, even if it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG is set when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. is set to 0 when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of , does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 . This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is executed. (step S1548) and terminate this routine. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. process to draw to the . For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message saying "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state are displayed. During the period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing processing to display in the display area of the board side effect display device 1600, an information sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.") is repeated from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Do the flow process. At this time, it is also possible to perform a process of lighting all the LEDs for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 .

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the unit steady processing etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on time processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in The first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the start opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 is 1 round to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), when game balls enter the big winning opening 2005 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and every time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, from the main control board 1310 Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that left side decorative symbols are displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and central decorative symbols are displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed even in the design or the second special design. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design become translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative design is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stop-displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right-hand decorative design correspond to the stop-displayed left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and started to be displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and stopped, are synchronized.

Peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 Upon receipt of a command from the main control board 1310 to convey the result of the special lottery, the game board shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is to be output to the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the data is displayed according to the schedule data for screen generation. Since the effect is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process is such that the routine is forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counters CC-CNT are counted during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 until the display is stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the (connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is determined to be in a state of malfunction even once, the SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are connected. and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. There is a problem with the side effect display device. Please call the store clerk." In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d. display.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control section shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the hour process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated in the scheduler update process, and the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the power supply to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine ends as it is, while the communication check counter When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT is reached. If not, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and terminates the routine. That is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC 1512d are displayed. If there is even one failure in the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number determined to be present does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is faulty reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred in the door frame side effects display device. Please call the store clerk." The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is validated.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped, and the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed again. In the interval period until is started, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated, and the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door-frame-side performance receiver IC DIC0 are validated. A state in which a failure occurs in the connection with the receiver IC SDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it reaches (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A message "A malfunction has occurred in the effect display device on the door frame side. Please call a clerk." is displayed to notify the user.

When the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, so the left decorative design and the central decorative design are displayed. , and until the right side decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if there are times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display processing of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600, and then stopped, and then the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed again. In the interval period until the start of the variable display of the pattern, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is validated. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is operated until the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is because the result of the stop display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that the player is most interested in, and the player is profitable. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which a Then, until the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise, etc., and is not correct. Even if it becomes a state where drawing is not possible, instead of interrupting the production in the middle and recovering to a state where drawing can be performed correctly, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the By stop-displaying the right decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the customer waiting state. This is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing a demonstration. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of execution, it is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The forced switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection so as to transmit the two signals when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . When the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has a different data format. Output to the control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and tells the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no trouble has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a trouble has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 assuming that a trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source and outputting a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no failure in the door frame side effect display device 460. When the signal is not input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is malfunctioning. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning, the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection recovery processing of FIG. 102 can be executed as notification processing. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the fact by executing the notification process. A store clerk or the like in the hall can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be made without trouble. ing. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without much effort.

In addition, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for door frame side effects. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be received normally, the receiver IC SDIC0 receives the image due to a communication failure between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data is abnormal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, generates a connection confirmation signal indicating the start of transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems during image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the problem. It's like Therefore, by finding and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When normal reception is not possible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication problem occurrence signal, to indicate that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. This generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a quickly discovers a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the hall clerk or the like or directly inform the hall clerk or the like who happens to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk or the like can be notified when the trouble occurs. You can start working on resolving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and elimination of the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the side effects receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication failures during image communication when the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of accumulation does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , can be output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication failure can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is generated to validate the LOCKN signal and eliminate the communication failure during image communication. A connection confirmation signal is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to inform the start of transmission to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and plays the game. , the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect stops outputting the connection confirmation signal. (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It's like Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output a connection confirmation signal, which is a signal for resolving a problem, only during the period in which the game is not progressing by starting and displaying a stop display, the communication problem can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and stops displaying. Only during the period in which the progress of the game is not executed, when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 (disturbance of the image) Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 restarts and ends the progress of the game (every time (interval period) between timing K1 and timing K2), it can be made to go in the direction of elimination.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 comprises the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first start port 2002 and a second start port 2002, which are start regions in which game balls fired by the batted ball shooting device 650 toward the game region 5a defined on the game board 5 are provided in the game region 5a. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the ball has entered the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store game information even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further comprises an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game information stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is output as a RAM clear signal in FIG. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information related to payout, and a main control side power supply of FIG. When operated after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the process at the time of power-on is performed (or the period during which the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit is performed after the power is turned on) has elapsed, the error that occurred regarding the dispensing device 830 is canceled. 82 as an error cancellation signal for the game control microprocessor to output to the payout control MPU952a payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal to the main control MPU1310a the game control microprocessor, .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information about is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the operation is performed within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on, A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. When operated after the period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on) has passed, the payout device 830 An error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. Since it has both functions, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, respectively, by operating one operation switch 954 . Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error cancellation function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

In the following, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be summarized with respect to the control of game progress and effects.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the pachinko machine 1 as a whole, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (design, various background images, characters, display images such as characters), It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) that contribute to the performance.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that the winning has been made, the processing of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1, etc. done.

If the processing flag is 0 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and after memorizing the result of this jackpot determination (hitting or losing, its type, etc.) , update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when finishing the first and second start opening winning processing, the variation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the stored result of the big hit determination and the current game state. After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the special symbols to the stop display, etc., and the stop symbols (jackpot symbols, losing symbols, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the processing during fluctuation is executed. In this process during fluctuation, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and the fluctuation display of the special design in the first special design indicator or the second special design indicator based on the timeout. to stop After that, when the result of the big hit determination stored in the variation start process is a big win, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big win determination stored in the change start process is not a big win (loss). , the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process is restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2005a is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the type of the jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process is restarted.

As the variation pattern, a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation, a variation pattern for loss reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The big win variation is a change that is performed when the result of the big win determination is a big win, and in the performance display device 1600, after the ready-to-win performance, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finally developed so that the big win pattern is fixed and stopped. The effect to be performed is executed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed such that the variable display of the symbols is finally deviated and the symbols are fixed and stopped. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is not determined that the reach is performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 does not undergo the reach effect. , an effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the finally lost symbols are fixed and stopped.
Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible for such a variation pattern of decorative symbols to appear. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to causing the effect display device 1600 to appear a variation pattern of decorative symbols based on the acquired game information, the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed, and the effect It executes control to change the mode (display and movement) in the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the behind-the-bottom movable production unit 3100 and the like.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information on the operation button 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window, and can also execute control related to effects according to these information.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), the random number for judging the first big hit is obtained from the random number counter. The first start opening passage processing such as storing this in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( Second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big-hit execution flag indicating that the big-hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) After that, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 16 times to control to a 16R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variable jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 8 times to control to the 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). A 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed after playing is repeated twice is controlled.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed, and in situations where the time-saving control is not executed, it is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. As described above, hitting left-handed is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of 8 rounds at maximum. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2004, the probability is about 50% (the allocation rate of the winning species ), 16 rounds of long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained) are executed, and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot Therefore, when the ball is controlled to shift to the right-handed state, it can be expected to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, when starting the opening control of such a big winning hole 2005, first, the process of starting the operation of the condition device, the process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after such opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, as shown in FIG. Execute each set processing of the flag and the time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109 to be described later. It is set when the big hit game state based on the probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) is ended, and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) is reset by

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot game state It is set when ending the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B), and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the occurrence of the low-probability time-saving state, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation number counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbols after the variation number counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. It is updated (for example, counted up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when starting a big hit game state based on.

Also, if the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the process of step S5236, whether or not the small hitting executing flag indicating that the small hitting game state is controlled is set. determine whether And as a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, small hit control processing (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, the process of opening the big winning opening 2005 only for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time saving flag, a time saving Each set processing such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), a small win is never won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small hit running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for the second big hit determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special design 2nd special design process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol in the pending state (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Only the lottery for the random number for judging the second big hit is continuously performed without interruption (prioritized execution), regardless of the pending status of the lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player simply maintains hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judging random numbers can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, the special game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to those that are executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol) Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the start winning prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-described first starting opening passage processing (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for judging the big hit, random number for judging the reach, random number for the big winning design, random number for the fluctuation display pattern ) from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not the (upper limit) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241, the first special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And then, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the first special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side is required to determine whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed and the content of the look-ahead effect (information related to win-loss for look-ahead determination, information related to symbol type for look-ahead determination information, information related to the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group of the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group of the pattern type, the small hit group, etc., may be transmitted as the look-ahead command before being finally determined.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second big hit determination, random number for second reach determination, second big hit symbol random number, random number for the second fluctuation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value. is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251, the second special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And next, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the second special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the second special symbol is an effect that preliminarily suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (win-lose information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the effect, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group of the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group of the pattern type, the small hit group, etc., may be transmitted as the look-ahead command before being finally determined.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (First hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is indicated in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (second hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing are the same. , and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for judging a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the random number for judging a big hit, a lottery process for a display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. 1st special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. Executed in correspondence with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600 First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

4. 1st special design fluctuation processing (step S5283) which waits until the fluctuation display of the 1st special design in 1st special design indicator 1403 is stopped

5. So that the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, and the first fluctuation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. And then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, while counting down the first special reservation number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM First-in first-in random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the pattern is stopped (for example, the first jackpot judgment random number, the first reach judgment random number, the first jackpot pattern random number, the first fluctuation display pattern random number) Shift operation is performed in the First-Out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the second start port 2004 Random numbers extracted by the first (earliest) area are stored in order. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol occurred is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

After that, as the process of step S5305, a big hit determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not the big win is hit or lost, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) Select the jackpot determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) (step S5313), select The big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) (Low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case, and high probability to use when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) and a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 204 kinds of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The random numbers for judging the first big hit (65536 types) are respectively associated so that the random number for judging the first big hit of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating that it is a loss (the probability of a big hit at low probability; "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the second special symbol jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table to be referred to, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the player won the jackpot, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the losers. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other so as to coincide with the judgment value indicating that the odds are the same (probability of a big hit at a low probability; roughly "1/321").

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 2,040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination values, and 63,496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match. The random numbers for judging the first big hits are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the judgment value for winning (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process , 2040 kinds of random numbers for judging the second big hit match the big hit judging value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the random numbers for judging the second big hit of 63496 kinds match with the judgment value showing that the above-mentioned loss. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other (probability of big win at high probability; approximately "1/32"). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (jackpot determination value The number may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the low-probability jackpot determination table and the high-probability jackpot determination table may have different jackpot determination values (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S5315 ), a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has won a jackpot is set (step S5316), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

Further, in step S5315, when it is determined that the big hit has been lost, the read-out big-hit determination random number coincides with the small-hit determination value indicating that the small-hit has been won based on the selected big-hit determination table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, since the random number for big hit determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that a small hit has not been won (determined as a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be lost in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state. A ready-to-reach judgment table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of 1 and a ready-to-reach judgment table in a low-probability state used in a case of a low-probability state of a game state (low-probability non-time-saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table at the time of the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match with . However, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. By doing so, it may be prevented from matching with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, at the time of the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased from the time of the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state Five types of reach determination including random numbers The random numbers for reach determination are associated so that the random numbers for reach match with the reach determination values indicating reach, and the random numbers for reach determination of 67 kinds match with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-working time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is made the same as the low probability non-working time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120) , a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, total 200 (random number for the first jackpot pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol contains the second big hit symbol random number ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big win design. The symbol determination table of this example is set so that the kind of big win determined based on the random numbers for the first big-hit pattern and the kind of big-win determined based on the random numbers for the second big-hit pattern are different. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability variable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot pattern The expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined based on the second big win symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined by the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.

1. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game is played. After the state, control is performed to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state, a battle production (battle victory production) is performed in which a specific character wins, and a high probability is performed. The 8R probability variable jackpot A controlled to the performance mode indicated by the game board side performance display device 1600 that it is in a relatively advantageous state in the time saving state.

2. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game is played. After the state, control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special symbols is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are digested), and the 8R jackpot game state is executed. During the period, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) is performed in which a specific character is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the game board side performance display device 1600 controls to a performance mode in which a relatively disadvantageous state is indicated. 8R normal jackpot

3. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the jackpot 2005, and this 16R jackpot game is played. After the state, it is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big win game state, an effect is given as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds). A game board side effect display device 1600 indicates that the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time after the (success effect) is performed and the additional challenge effect is performed and the control is performed to the high probability time saving state. 16R probability variable jackpot controlled by production mode

4. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game is played. After the state, it is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, an effect is given as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds). A game board side effect display device 1600 indicates that the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time after the lapse of a predetermined period after the addition challenge effect in which (failure effect) is performed is performed and the state is controlled to the high probability time saving state. 8R probability variable jackpot B controlled in production mode

5. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005 as described above. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 twice, the game ball is controlled to a 2R big winning game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2005, and after this 2R big winning game state. is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special symbols is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are digested), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state 2R is controlled to a production mode in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat production), and in a low-probability time-saving state, the game board-side production display device 1600 indicates a relatively disadvantageous state. normal jackpot

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the big hits (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol are generated. Similarly, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and the big hits (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) related to the second special symbol are generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at maximum, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum.

In addition, when the 8R probability variation big hit A is determined in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, the 8R probability variation big hit A symbol is determined as the jackpot pattern, and when the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern. decide. In addition, although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is determined, the 8R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit symbol. When the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

Also, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 decides on the losing design as the aspect of stopping the fluctuation of the special design (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5337, performs the lottery result (type of big win, small win, reach loss, or loss). (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. And after that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative pattern (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of left, middle and right decorative patterns is not the same as other patterns) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss When the missing pattern is specified, the missing pattern (combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined. The stop symbol thus determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (when the game effect is finished).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) at the time of the win to appear before the start of the big win game, so that the big win game can be played. is started, the effect display during the jackpot game is made to appear.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If it is (step S5341), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop design setting process (step S5342), small hit flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (not shown) is selected (step S5346), and if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the reach flag are set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), at the time of loss is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set to start the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process is terminated. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will take place.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a random number for judging the big hit (random number for judging the first big hit, random number for judging the second big hit) and random number for the big hit design (random number for the first big hit design, random number for the second big hit design). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). They are stored so as to be associated with the random numbers for the first variation display pattern. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for the big hit symbol. By comparing with the random number for the fluctuation display pattern, and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for the fluctuation display pattern from this table, the special design (first special design, second special design) determine the variation pattern of As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since there is no winning of a small hit, the variation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, a small win is not won, but a small win may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so that the mode type of reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the random number for the variation display pattern. It is For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of variable display pattern random numbers out of 241 types of variable display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 Random numbers for variation display patterns of types are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating execution of one of super ready-to-win performances with low expectations for big wins, and 18 types of random numbers for variation display patterns have high expectations for big wins. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super ready-to-win effects is executed.

In addition, the super reach performance (SP performance) is a player who has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach performance, and a player who wants to generate a big hit game state when the super reach performance is executed. expectations are rising. That is, such a super ready-to-win effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of the big win, and even if a loss is finally displayed by this, the player's expectation of the big win game state. will be able to increase However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectations for the jackpot game state, during the period when the super reach effect is being executed, a high-expectation notice effect that is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol provided corresponding to the random number for the first big hit determination and the random number for the first big hit pattern, the non-time saving state and the time saving state , and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to as a time saving state A variable time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variable time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-working time saving state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 As well as prompting, the time for the player to enter the game ball to the second start port 2004 is ensured.

Also, if 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) Discharge without being subjected to lottery processing is suppressed.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the area directly above the gate portion 2003 . Then, when the same game ball is received in the gate unit 2003 from this area when in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously received one after another (almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) around ``about 1/32''. become possible.

And in this example, since the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds when the player is operating the handle 302, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.), the second Game balls are often received at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 is extremely It can be set to a short time of 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the pattern variation is completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variable pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the randomly selected variable time has passed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process is terminated when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 even though the variable timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derived display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game state (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot game state (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high-probability flag is set, the high-probability flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), and the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is the initial value. When the process is updated to the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the jackpot game is played in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a). state will be executed.

Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R variable jackpot, 8R variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) are set. As a result, the production of the jackpot game state (battle production or additional challenge production) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command is executed by the production display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and time saving The function is stopped and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). And as a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. Waiting time until the start of the state (time for displaying the effect of starting the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, set a small winning in-execution flag indicating that the small winning game state is being executed (step S5396), so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the small hit is set in the process of step S5236, and in the small hit control process (step S5240b). A small winning game state is executed. Incidentally, unlike when a big win is won, the game state is not changed when such a small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the big hit or the flag during execution of the small hit is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is started according to the state of suspension. (Lottery and symbol control) processing related to progress is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the main controller 115 is executed as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, as the process of step S5402, executes the gate part passing process such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S5404) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device 1402 based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary design fluctuation processing (step S5405) to wait until the fluctuation display of the ordinary design in the ordinary design indicator 1402 is stopped.
4. Variation display of the normal symbols so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402. Normal design stop processing (step S5406) to stop
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S5407)

In addition, the normal design process flag is operated so that the initial value indicates that the normal design normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added).
Next, as the process of step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially selected from the first (earmost) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read. , is moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) during time saving ( Step S5426), if the current gaming state is non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), select the normal figure per determination table (not shown) during non-time saving ( Step S5427), it compares with the normal random number which is read out with normal design per decision table and normal design normal processing step S5422 which is selected (step S5428).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is time saving (high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-working time saving used in the case of time (low probability non-working time saving state, high probability non-working time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. In this way, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 during the time saving, the game ball is always won in the normal game, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second start port 2004 Acceptance is controlled. Instead of all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time saving state may coincide with the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that the normal pattern is won.

In addition, in the non-short-time normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per decision value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working time, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, because there is no winning per normal figure, the pair of movable pieces is in the open state second start There is no control over the acceptance of game balls into the mouth 2004 . However, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a normal pattern hit even in a non-time-saving state, in this case, the winning probability is lower than the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a hit. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, then move forward again to the second You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected normal pattern per determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing, and when it is determined that it is per normal pattern (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern (step S5430), per normal pattern as a mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of normal design normal processing, when it is determined that it is lost, the normal pattern fluctuation A general pattern loss pattern is determined as a form (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of control stop (step S5432). And after that, when the above-described normal design process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is terminated.

While such control by the main control MPU 1310a is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing (received command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect can be executed according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which starting winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to pending display and look-ahead effects in response to starting winning. And after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , jackpot game processing, or jackpot end effect processing.

Variation pattern specification command reception waiting process: During the period until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the design is not in a variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed (demonstration etc.) Along with performing control, when receiving a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the performance symbol variation start processing.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, advance notice production, etc.) in the pattern fluctuation period are determined based on the fluctuation pattern command, etc., and the variation of the decoration pattern is started based on the determined production contents. to control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation.

Production design fluctuation processing: Various production contents determined in production design fluctuation start processing are controlled to start at each timing during the design fluctuation period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is changed to production design Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.

Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design determination command) instructing to stop all designs, stop the fluctuation of the decorative design and perform control such as deriving and displaying the display result (stop design). When the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the big win pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big win display process, and when the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the losing pattern, the value of the process flag is changed to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process. Update to the corresponding value.

Big win display processing: Controls effects (display effects for informing the occurrence of a big win on the effect display device 1600, etc.) during the period from when the decorative symbols stop with the big win symbols until the start of the big win game. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big-hit game.

During jackpot game processing: Various effects are controlled during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (such as a display effect for informing the player that the big win game state has ended) is controlled during the period from the end of the big win game state to the change allowable state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specifying command reception waiting process.

Here, the control of the look-ahead effect and the timer effect executed at the time of starting winning will be described.

When the game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting opening passing process (FIG. 105) or the second starting opening passing process (FIG. 106) according to the starting winning starting opening, and starts A random value is extracted (obtained) as a memory (steps S5241 and S5251). Then, in the first special figure prefetching process (S5245) or the second special figure prefetching process (S5255), based on the extracted random number or the lottery result based on the random number, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or special symbol 2 A memory prefetch effect command (refer to FIG. 90, hereinafter referred to as “special figure prefetch effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure prefetch effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect based on the received command. Commands from the main control board 1310 are stored in the peripheral controller reception ring buffer by the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 98). Then, the received command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing (S1022) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 95).

When the special figure prefetch effect command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the prefetch effect control process in the reception command analysis process. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect of changing the starting memory display, and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. It should be noted that the prefetch effect control process may be called in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95) by setting a flag indicating that the prefetch effect command has been received in the received command analysis process. good.

In the processing for executing the normal prefetching performance for changing the starting memory display, a lottery is drawn based on the special figure prefetching performance command, and the mode of the starting memory display after the change is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the starting memory display may be changed only when shifting to the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the special figure prefetch effect command. The mode of the starting memory display changes color and shape, for example. Then, a normal look-ahead effect setting process for changing the mode of the starting memory display is executed. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the start memory display, as well as settings for outputting sound effects, lighting lamps, and moving characters at the timing of the change. . Processing for executing timer effects and background effects will be described later.

The timer effect is a pre-suggestive effect that indicates by countdown display that the execution time of the suggestive effect suggesting the result of a lottery for a specific starting memory or the possibility of winning is approaching. Broadly speaking, there are two kinds of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the above-mentioned look-ahead effects, and the variable display for the specific starting memory is started before the variable display for the specific starting memory is started. A timer effect that counts down the period until a predetermined timing (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead timer effect) and the above-mentioned look-ahead effect are controlled based on a variation pattern, and are controlled based on a specific start memory. A timer effect that does not straddle multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a timer effect within fluctuations) that counts down the period from a predetermined timing after the start of the fluctuation display to this specific starting memory to another timing of the fluctuation display for this specific start memory. ,have. In other words, both the look-ahead timer effect and the within-variation timer effect are pre-notification effects in which the symbol variation for a specific starting memory has not been completed. Although it is common in that a predetermined effect is performed when it becomes, the look-ahead timer effect is different from the intra-variation timer effect in that the countdown display is performed on the display screen over a plurality of symbol changes. Also, the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the timer effect within the fluctuation may be set to various values, but since it spans multiple fluctuations, the average value of the initial value used in the look-ahead timer effect is relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the within-variation timer effect. In this embodiment, since the look-ahead timer effect includes characteristic elements, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the processing for executing the look-ahead timer effect, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect. Since the look-ahead timer effect is a look-ahead effect that can be executed across multiple fluctuations as described above, it is enough to execute the look-ahead timer effect before the variable display corresponding to the received special figure lookahead effect command is started. determine whether sufficient time is secured.
That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the variation times of all starting memories held until the variation is started is longer than or equal to a specific time (40 seconds or longer in this embodiment). Furthermore, based on the winning/losing with respect to the starting memory of the performance execution target and the variation pattern of the starting memory, the performance contents are determined together with whether or not the look-ahead timer performance can be executed. Also, when determining the contents of the performance, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer performance is also determined. As the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect, for example, it is the time when the fluctuation starts corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory for the look-ahead effect, or before the start memory for the look-ahead effect. Either the start time of the fluctuation corresponding to the memorized start memory or the end time of the fluctuation corresponding to the start memory memorized before the start memory of the look-ahead performance object is set.

The look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect for displaying a countdown and a timer end effect executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are continuously executed. In addition, the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect varies depending on the length of the timer counting effect, but it is in the process of fluctuating with respect to the start memory that is the target of the read-ahead, before the occurrence of the reach or after the occurrence of the reach. There are various timings such as

When the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer counting effect is determined. The execution time of the timer count effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. For example, in the present embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total variation time of the starting memory held before the starting memory for the look-ahead effect, and the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is set. A predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the timing is set as the execution time of the timer count effect (initial value of the countdown display). Furthermore, the content of the production (in-countdown production pattern) to be executed as the timer counting production is set. As the effect pattern during the countdown, for example, a pattern 1 in which the lighting mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to high-speed blinking as the countdown display progresses, or a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is displayed. Examples include pattern 2 in which the color of light emitted from the lamp changes as the countdown display progresses, and pattern 3 in which a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 moves as the countdown display progresses. It corresponds to the hit expectation degree of the variation of the performance object, and is set by lottery. For example, pattern 1→pattern 2→pattern 3 is set so that the probability of winning increases in the order. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of winning than in the case of losing.

After setting the content of the effect (during countdown effect pattern) executed as the timer counting effect, the content of the timer end effect (post-countdown effect pattern) is set. In the timer end effect, for example, the characters "End!!" are superimposed on the identification pattern in colors corresponding to the degree of expectation on the display screen (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red). To make a player surely recognize that the time is up by displaying it for a predetermined time. The post-countdown production patterns include, for example, pattern 1 in which the text color of "End!!" is black, pattern 2 in which the text color of "End!!" is blue, and pattern color of "End!!" Pattern 3, which is red, can be exemplified. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the hit expectation degree of the variation of the look-ahead effect target, and are set by lottery. For example, pattern 1→pattern 2→pattern 3 are set so that the probability of winning increases in the order. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of winning than in the case of losing. Note that the post-countdown effect pattern is not limited to this, and not only the character color but also the characters may be decorated or characters may be displayed. Different expectations may be accommodated.

By the way, a gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of substrates on which electronic components are mounted. Among these, the main board and the payout control board provided on the back side of the game machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, which facilitates inspection and confirmation. On the other hand, in the light-emitting decoration substrate adopted for the movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on the game board panel, the surface facing the player on the front side has a lens that reflects and scatters the light from the light-emitting decoration substrate. Members and the like are provided, and are attached to the game board panel in a state facing the performance display device attached to the game board panel on the rear side. In addition, on the back side of the light emitting decoration board, in order to realize the function of light emitting decoration, connectors for connecting flat cables for receiving control signals from peripheral control means, control elements, drivers, resistors, capacitors, etc. of electronic components are mounted. When such a gaming machine is installed in an amusement arcade, it is difficult to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the light-emitting decoration board in the gaming machine after installation. . This is because the rear surface of the light-emitting decorative substrate faces the surface forming the display area of the effect display device. Therefore, means for solving such problems are shown below.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁Also, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100 a is formed by punching out a physical opening in the game panel 1100 . A space is formed between the game panel side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side thereof, and a plurality of accessories are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, at positions close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud object 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 consists of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 consists of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. there is In addition, a first grass role 6470 and a second grass role 6475 are provided behind these, a rabbit role 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain role 6500 is provided behind them. A game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind 6500 . By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this way, it is possible to create a sense of depth.

FIG. 119(A) is a front view of the rabbit character 6000. FIG. FIG. 119B is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 119C is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. The rabbit character 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. FIG. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as the face light emitting part 6023 on the front surface. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. A first arm portion 6016 and a second arm portion 6017 made of opaque white synthetic resin are attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, imitating the left and right front legs of a rabbit. At the lower end of the face substrate 6020, there is provided a body part 6030 which imitates the body part of a rabbit and is a plate-like member made of opaque white synthetic resin.

FIG. 120(A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. FIG. 120B is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-like member configured by a printed circuit board, and the front and rear surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the electric circuit provided on the surface. . In addition, on the front side of the face substrate 6020, an LED forming a first face light emitting portion 6023a and an LED forming a second face light emitting portion 6023b are provided. A resistor 6027a to a sixth resistor 6027f, a first capacitor 6028a, a second capacitor 6028b, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

As shown in FIG. 120A, the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular portions extend upward as a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 on the upper side of the rectangle. It has a shape. The oblong rectangular portion imitates the face of a rabbit, and the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 imitate the ears of a rabbit. When the face cover portion 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are not covered with the face cover portion 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

The first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 respectively have a first ear decoration part 6021a and a second ear decoration part 6022a which imitate the inside of a rabbit's ear. The first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are formed by printing with brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are visible brown areas. ing. In the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the white protective film described above. Electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. .

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting portion 6023a and a second face light emitting portion 6023b. Specifically, the first face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b are configured by LEDs mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, respectively. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later in detail.

A mouth decoration part 6024 is provided on the face substrate 6020 . Specifically, the mouth decoration part 6024 is formed by printing with pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape imitating a rabbit's mouth is visible in pink. It has become. On the front surface of the face substrate 6020, the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration part 6024 is pink, and the other area is white.

FIG. 120B is a diagram showing the rear side of the face substrate 6020. FIG. As described above, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is also entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the circuits, as with the front surface of the face substrate 6020 . A first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b are provided on the upper left and right sides of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front side. Dotted lines indicating the mounting locations of , and character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the names of the mounted members are formed by printing black ink on a white protective film. . A driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character string "LED1" and the character string "LED2." Under the driver 6026, a character string "DR1" is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film.

A capacitor 6028 (a first capacitor 6028a and a second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the second face light emitting unit 6023b. Character strings "C1" and "C2" corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b are formed by printing black ink on the white protective film.

Resistors 6027 (first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f) are surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 . Character strings "R1" to "R6" are formed by printing black ink on the white protective film in correspondence with the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

A control element 6025 comprising a microcomputer is surface-mounted to the right of the area where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Also, corresponding to the control element 6025, a character string "IC1" is formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and performs lighting control of the LEDs forming the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LEDs forming the second face light emitting unit 6023b.

A connector 6029 is surface mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face board 6020 . Also, corresponding to the connector 6029, a character string "CN1" is formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. Through the connector 6029 , control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 are transmitted to the control elements 6025 and power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020 . The power supplied to the face substrate 6020 through the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs forming the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b, and the like.

A control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 each have a black body and metallic terminals. Metal terminals of the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the face substrate 6020 by soldering. In FIG. 120(B), the body portions of these electronic components are represented in black, and the metal terminals and solders of these electronic components are represented in white.

121 is a perspective view of the face covering portion 6010. FIG. The face cover portion 6010 has a box shape with an open rear side and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover front portion 6011 forming the front surface, a face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 forming the upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 forming the right surface, and a face cover forming the lower surface. It is composed of a lower face portion 6014 and a face cover left face portion 6015 forming the left face.

As shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, on the front side of a face cover portion front portion 6011 that constitutes the front surface of the face cover portion 6010, a first face light scattering portion 6011a imitating rabbit eyes and a second face light scattering portion 6011a are provided. A face light scattering portion 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering portion 6011a is provided at a position overlapping the first face light emitting portion 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 when viewed from the front. In addition, the second face light scattering portion 6011b is provided at a position overlapping the second face light emitting portion 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 when viewed from the front. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(A), the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b are closer to the front view than the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. , and the outlines of the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b in front view are surrounded by the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, respectively. is configured as

The first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b are formed by forming fine lens cuts on the front side of the face cover part front part 6011, or performing processing such as a satin finish to form the first face light scattering part 6011a and second face light scattering part 6011b. When the light emitted from the portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, it is formed with a rough surface capable of diffusely reflecting the light. In the face cover front part 6011, light incident on the parts other than the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b like the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b The face substrate 6020 located in the rear is configured to be directly visible from the front. The rectangular portion forming the region of the face substrate 6020 excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and the rectangular portion forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flow and just overlap when viewed from the front. placed in position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from behind into screw holes provided in the face-cover upper surface 6012, the face-cover right surface 6013, the face-cover lower surface 6014, the face-cover left surface 6015, and the like. is attached with

The rear face of the face cover front part 6011 and the face light emitting part 6023 are provided with a predetermined gap (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023 can be easily dissipated, and it is possible to prevent the face light emitting unit 6023 from malfunctioning due to the heat generated by itself. Become. In other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted in the relationship between the light emitting section and a member such as a cover provided corresponding to the light emitting section.

As described above, the rabbit character 6000 is composed of the face substrate 6020, the face cover portion 6010 covering the front of the face substrate 6020, and the body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. On the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs functioning as a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b are surface-mounted, and face cover parts constituting the front side of the face cover part 6010 covering the front respectively. A first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011b provided in the front portion 6011 are configured to irradiate light. Electronic components such as a control element 6025 , a driver 6026 , a resistor 6027 , a capacitor 6028 and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 .

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029 and receives a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 for driving the LEDs constituting the face light emitting section 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020 . Electric power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 is supplied from the flat cable. Based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 , the control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 to control the light emission mode of the LEDs forming the face light emitting section 6023 .

The LED that constitutes the face light emitting portion 6023 is formed by encapsulating three LED chips, an LED chip capable of emitting red light, an LED chip capable of emitting green light, and an LED chip capable of emitting blue light, with a colorless and transparent resin. . In addition, the LEDs constituting the face light-emitting portion 6023 are provided with three metal terminals serving as anodes and three metal terminals serving as cathodes of each LED chip. In addition, current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, so that each LED chip can emit light. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, red, green, and blue light can be emitted independently.

Between the circuits connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip, a resistor 6027 is provided as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, first resistors 6027a to third resistors 6027c are provided between the circuits connecting the anodes of the LED chips included in the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023a to form the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023b. A fourth resistor 6027d to a sixth resistor 6027f are provided between the circuits connecting the anodes of the respective LED chips of the LEDs. By providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip in this manner, the current flowing through each LED chip can be adjusted, and when a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit can be overloaded. It prevents current from flowing.

The first capacitor 6028a is connected to the power supply terminal of the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is connected to the power supply terminal of the driver 6026 in parallel in an electric circuit. It has a function to operate

The rabbit role 6000 is controlled to move between a waiting position on the lower front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a moving position near the center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 by a drive mechanism (not shown). It is possible to This drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . The predetermined game content is notified to the player according to the movement mode and light emission mode of the rabbit role object 6000 . For example, the rabbit role object 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, and in a state where the rabbit role object 6000 is in the moving position, the first face emitting unit 6023a and the second face emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 are turned on. is lit in red, and the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b are lit in red, so that the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit. It may be configured to suggest that the degree of expectation is higher than usual. In other embodiments, examples are shown in which a part of the accessory or a member constituting the accessory is movable, or the light-emitting portion provided in the accessory is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode. may function as a performance, and the performance may suggest that the degree of expectation for stopping and displaying the changing decorative pattern in a manner indicating a big win is higher than usual.

As described above, there is a possibility that the luminous decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) included in such a decorative member (rabbit character 6000) may have a malfunction in its luminous function. For example, in the process of surface-mounting the printed circuit board that constitutes the face board 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface was insufficient, and the electrical connection between the circuit on the printed circuit board and the electronic component to be mounted was not properly performed. In some cases, there is a risk that other members or tools will come into contact with the electronic components mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board during assembly at a factory, causing the mounted electronic components to come off. In addition, there is a risk that the electronic parts may malfunction due to deterioration over time after the game machine is installed in the game arcade.

For example, in an LED functioning as a face light emitting unit 6023 capable of full-color light emission by emitting red, blue, and green light in multiple gradations using a driver 6026, one of the six metal terminals is electrically connected. When such a connection is lost, although one of the three colors is intended to emit light in terms of control, only two colors are actually emitted, and one color is emitted. As for , a non-light emitting state occurs. Such a state can occur when the LED chip fails and current does not flow, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is removed from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit becomes disconnected. .
Such a situation may give the impression that the movable decorative member does not look good to the player playing the game. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light of the same color, there is a risk that only the defective LED will emit light of a different color. In addition, there is a risk of causing a situation in which players are misunderstood as to the degree of expectation of a big win.

Further, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face substrate 6020 is bent many times due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative member, thereby deteriorating the strength of the flat cable at a predetermined portion. , the flat cable becomes disconnected, and it is possible to assume a situation in which signal transmission and power supply to the rabbit character 6000 are not properly performed. Alternatively, repeated movements of the rabbit accessory 6000 may repeatedly apply stress to a portion of the connector 6029, which may cause the connector 6029 to break. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit role object 6000, and an unintended light emission mode is shown to the player, or power supply is completely stopped. In this case, the face light-emitting part 6023 provided in the rabbit roler 6000 does not take the lighting mode, and moves from the standby position to the moving position or from the moving position to the standby position in the off state. There is a risk that the appearance of the product will deteriorate.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the game machine is turned off, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen in black, and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 positioned in front is reflected on the surface thereof. It is configured to reflect Specifically, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to specularly reflect incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflector (reflecting sheet) is installed close to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the reflecting plate may be configured to mirror-reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, when there is some kind of abnormality in the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 positioned in the back is displayed. By visually recognizing , the content of the abnormality can be confirmed. Alternatively, it is possible to check whether an abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 122(A) is a perspective view showing the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 122(A), the rabbit role 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. shows an example.

In this example, a rabbit character 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the front surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the face substrate 6020 provided on the rabbit character 6000 are arranged. A predetermined distance (specifically, about several centimeters) from the rear surface is positioned. In the example shown in FIG. 122(A), part of the driver 6026 mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 and the entirety of the first resistor 6027a and the second resistor 6027b are the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state of being reflected in the

Although FIG. 122(A) shows the rabbit character 6000 viewed obliquely from the upper right, it is also possible to visually recognize the mounted state of other electronic components by looking into it from other angles. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is viewed from above at the center in the horizontal direction, it is possible to visually recognize the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit character 6000 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, the entire connector 6029 and the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 can also be viewed. In this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, but this point will be described later.

FIG. 122(B) is a perspective view showing the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 122B, the rabbit role 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. example. In this example, electronic components such as the control element 6025 and the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are difficult to see, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a are invisible. It is possible to verify the implementation of only a portion and only a portion of the second capacitor 6028b. A method for visually recognizing electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

Thus, in the gaming machine in the power-off state, the back surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 serving as the decoration means is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. , the state of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face board 6020 can be confirmed even after the game machine is installed in the game shop. In addition, since the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and is visible in white, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is visually recognized as black is visually recognized. It is configured easily.

An example in which the entire surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film has been shown, but the circuit on the face substrate 6020 may be covered with a protective film of a bright color such as cream instead of white. may This is because, compared to the case of adopting a dark-colored protective film, the case of adopting a bright-colored protective film makes a clearer difference in brightness with respect to the display area of the game-board-side effect display device 1600, which is black. Therefore, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized.

In the process of coloring the face board 6020, a circuit structure is formed on the printed circuit board by copper plating, and then a white protective agent is used as a protective agent to protect the wiring structure, and the portions where the through holes are provided are removed. Except for this, it is desirable to form a white protective film by coating the entire surface of the printed circuit board with this protective agent, thereby making the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 white. When a protective agent other than white is used as the protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 is white. You may Alternatively, by combining these modes, a white protective agent is applied to form a protective film, and then white ink is applied on the white protective film, making the surface of the face substrate 6020 whiter. It may be configured as By forming the face substrate 6020 in such a manner, the face substrate 6020 can be made visible in white. A similar method can be employed when it is desired to make the substrate visible not only in white but also in other colors such as black and green. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate is of a specific color.
Although an example in which both sides of the face substrate 6020 are entirely white is shown, only a part of the face substrate 6020 may be colored white. Only a predetermined area on which electronic components are mounted on the rear surface may be white. The back of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a thin plate-like cover, and a punched opening is provided in the cover so that the electronic component whose mounting state is to be checked can be visually recognized. In this case, the back surface of the face board 6020 and the specific electronic component whose mounting mode is to be checked may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . If a colorless and transparent cover is used as such a cover, light is diffusely reflected on the surface of the cover, and the visibility of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is lowered. In addition, when a colored opaque cover is used as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, making it extremely difficult to check the mounted state. . Therefore, it is preferable to provide punched openings so that at least some of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are protected by the cover, and the mounting state of the electronic components whose mounting state should be checked can be confirmed through the opening provided in the cover. can. In addition, by providing such an opening, heat generated from the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be released to the outside, thereby preventing damage or deterioration of the mounted electronic components due to heat. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. It should be noted that it is preferable that the electronic component is configured so as not to protrude from the opening while protruding rearward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover. Further, as the color of the cover, black opaque or dark opaque may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a contrast with the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020 . Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a bright color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or dark blue. By adopting such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is black. Also, since the face board 6020 is light-colored and the mounted electronic components are dark-colored, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020 . It becomes possible to distinguish and visually recognize the electronic parts.

Note that the LED capable of emitting multicolor light is made of a white member in order to increase the reflectance. In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounted state of the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 . As described above, when the electronic component to be mounted is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, although the face substrate 6020 reflected in the game board side effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see, the LED mounted on the face substrate 6020 becomes easy to see. Alternatively, the mounted electronic components or the electronic components before being mounted may be coated with black or dark ink, and the electronic components may be mounted on a white or light colored substrate.

In the present specification, white refers to a color that becomes visible when visible rays of all wavelengths of incident natural light are diffusely reflected almost uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) by an object. A bright color refers to a color that can be visually recognized, for example, cream color or light gray, by absorbing a specific wavelength region to some extent and reflecting the remaining wavelength region diffusely. On the other hand, black refers to the color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and partly (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. there is In addition, dark color means that the majority of visible light of all wavelengths is uniformly absorbed, and only a part (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. It refers to a color that can be visually recognized as a close color, for example, dark blue.

The rabbit role product 6000 shown in FIGS. 122(A) and 122(B) may preferably be configured so that it can be manually moved from the standby position to the upper moving position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 at the standby position is not rendered immovable by the locking mechanism when the power is cut off, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. is configured as

As a configuration for manually moving the rabbit role object 6000, first, the immovable state will be described. In general, if the movable decoration is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, the movable decoration may be subjected to a large acceleration when the game machine is transported or installed in an amusement arcade. In addition, there is a risk that the movable decorative body will be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism is provided to lock the movable decoration when it is in the standby position while the power is on. A method of making the body immobile is being considered. However, when such a lock mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as the movable decoration. Therefore, it is possible to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 by arranging it so that such a lock mechanism is not provided.

Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for manually moving the rabbit character 6000. FIG. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that diffusely reflects light incident from the side surface in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface, so that the player can visually recognize the lighting of the predetermined pattern. Further, such a light emission pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, when such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a of the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as the movable decoration. Therefore, by constructing such a game panel opening 1100a so that such a light guide plate is not provided, it becomes possible to move the rabbit character 6000 by hand.

With such a configuration, when power is cut off, the rabbit character 6000 can be directly moved by the clerk's hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100. Different areas on the rear surface of 6020 can be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 122(A), after moving the rabbit role 6000 upward by hand, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is viewed as if looking into the rabbit role 6000 from below. This makes it easy to check the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which have been difficult to see. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 122(B), by moving the rabbit character 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which was invisible until then, It is possible to visually recognize electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

An example in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is shown, but when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a can be covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a portion of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit role 6000 is in front of the lower side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the moving position of the rabbit role 6000 is in front of the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the guidance is performed. It is preferable to arrange the light plate so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. As described above, even if the light guide plate is provided, a part of the game panel opening 1100a is not covered with the light guide plate. By manually moving the 6000, it is possible to achieve both of the functions of being able to change the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

An example has been shown in which the region where the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed by directly moving the rabbit role object 6000 by hand. The light plate may be enlarged, in which case an object smaller than a hand may be used to move the rabbit character. For example, by inserting a rod-shaped member with a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-shaped member with a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm into the area of the game panel opening 1100a not covered by the light guide plate, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved. It may be configured as In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered with the light guide plate may be set to a size that allows such a bar-shaped member or plate-shaped member to be inserted. 0 cm and 1.0 cm in length. With such a configuration, the area of the game panel opening 1100a covered by the light guide plate can be increased, and the area in which the light guide plate can be used for presentation can be expanded.

If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not equipped with a lock mechanism that prevents the rabbit accessory 6000 from moving when the power is cut off, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the clerk can hold the hand An example has been shown in which the rabbit character 6000 can be directly moved by the member. In the case where a light guide plate is provided, the rabbit character 6000 cannot be manually moved, and the area where the face substrate 6020 is reflected with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed. I can't. Such a problem is a big problem in an example in which the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are not or hardly reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the rabbit character is in the standby position. becomes.

Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch provided in the game machine during the initial check of the movable decoration executed when the power is turned on, the control unit and the drive unit of the game machine are turned off. When forcibly creating a state in which no power is supplied to the power switch, the movable decoration in a position other than the standby position does not return to the standby position due to its own weight, and the power switch is turned off or the power switch It is preferable to stop at a position a little moved by its own weight from the position where is turned off. Specific examples are shown below.

At the time of the initial check, first, the rabbit toy 6000 at the standby position is unlocked by the lock mechanism and changed from the immovable state to the movable state, after which the rabbit toy 6000 starts moving to the upper moving position. do. After the rabbit character 6000 completes the movement to the upper movement position, it stays at the movement position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), then starts moving to the lower standby position, and then the rabbit character 6000 waits. It stops at the position, and the lock mechanism changes from the movable state to the non-movable state, and the initial check is completed. When the game is started and the rabbit role product 6000 is moved as an effect in response to the start winning, etc., the rabbit role object 6000 at the standby position first changes from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit role object 6000 is moved. is controlled to move between the standby position and the moving position in a predetermined movement mode, control is performed to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the unlocked state to the locked state. and

In the gaming machine with such a configuration, by intentionally generating a power failure state, the rabbit character 6000 can be mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 without the clerk moving the rabbit character 6000 directly by hand. It is possible to make the electronic parts that are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 appear. In addition, since the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to remain at the movement position for a predetermined time at the time of the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 is forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit accessory 6000 remains at the movement position. can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided in the game machine to turn off the power does not become severe. In addition, since it is possible to stop the rabbit role object 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020 .

In addition, in the initial check, not only does it stay at the movement position for a predetermined time, but when moving from the standby position to the movement position, a predetermined position between the standby position and the movement position (for example, an intermediate position between the standby position and the movement position) position) so that the rabbit accessory 6000 stays for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then moves to the moving position, and when it is at the predetermined position, the power switch provided in the game machine is turned off to put it in a power-off state. The rabbit character 6000 may be configured to remain at a predetermined position when the rabbit character 6000 is moved. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at different positions, and it is possible to visually recognize the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from different angles. becomes. In addition, since the rabbit role object 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to form a pattern for confirming the face substrate 6020 .

An example has been shown in which the rabbit role object 6000 stays at the moving position or the predetermined position at the time of the initial check. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be configured to light up in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, when the initial check is started, the rabbit role object 6000 is in the standby position and before starting to move to the moving position, the first face emitting part 6023a and the second face emitting part 6023b are lit in a predetermined manner. You may For example, as a lighting mode, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be lit in the same color. Moreover, white is desirable as the emission color at this time. With such a configuration, the store clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission mode of the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b. It is possible to confirm what kind of abnormality has occurred by visually recognizing the back side of the face board 6020 with the game machine in which the accessory 6000 is at a predetermined position or a moving position in a power-off state. Also, when a player complains about the lighting mode, it is possible to quickly identify the cause of the abnormality.

Although an example in which the first face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b are lit in the same color is shown, three or more face light-emitting portions 6023 may be provided and configured to emit light in the same color. In this case, the light emission color should preferably include at least white. In such a configuration, if one of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other plurality of face light emitting units 6023. Emit different colors (for example, if the resistor provided in series with the LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can only emit blue and red light, and it is a mixture of those colors. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the defective face light-emitting portion by the color of the emitted light.

When the power cut-off state is forcibly generated, the rabbit role model 6000 is not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, it is preferable to once move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position and then perform the above-described initial operation check again from the beginning. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit role object 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be easily visually recognized.

Various embodiments are conceivable for the aspect of the rabbit role 6000 itself, the movement aspect of the rabbit role 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit role 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. Several examples are given below.

FIG. 123 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 changes as the rabbit character moves from the lower standby position to the upper movement position. In this example, the rabbit character 6000 is composed of the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020, and is movable between the standby position and the moving position. It is configured not to move with respect to 1100 . FIG. 123(A) shows a state where the rabbit role object 6000 is in the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. . Also, the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 because the body part 6030 is positioned immediately behind these electronic components. FIG. 123(B) shows a state in which the rabbit character 6000 is in the moving position, and in this state, almost the entire back surface of the face substrate is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. there is

It should be noted that, when the rabbit toy 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit toy 6000 may be configured to slowly rotate about the front-rear direction by a driving mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, the rabbit toy 6000 may be configured to be manually rotated about the front-rear direction when the rabbit toy 6000 is in the standby position. With such a configuration, it is extremely easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which are located below the face substrate 6020 and are difficult to check the mounting mode. Become.

FIG. 124 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 are provided separately from the face substrate 6020 that constitutes the rabbit accessory 6000 . The first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are in the shape of a vertically long rectangle. When the rabbit character 6000 moves, the face cover part 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 move to the upward movement position, thereby executing a predetermined effect. will do.

FIG. 124(A) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the standby position. Only part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are reflected in the state hidden by the second ear portions 6022 . FIG. 124(B) shows a state where the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the moving position. The whole area is reflected. In this way, by moving the member between the member whose mounting state of the electronic component is desired to be confirmed and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the visual recognition state of the member whose mounting state of the electronic component is desired to be confirmed can be changed. becomes possible. In addition, in another embodiment, aspects of the rabbit character 6000 have been described, but these aspects may be applied to the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 in the example shown in FIG.

FIG. 125 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, the body part 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is vertically long. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit accessory 6000 are configured to be invisible due to the body portion 6030, and when the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the moving position, the body portion A rabbit character 6000 is positioned above 6030 . In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

In the embodiments described so far, the area of the face covering portion 6010 of the rabbit character 6000 does not change, but when it is moved to the moving position, the member corresponding to the face covering portion 6010 is made of an opaque member. In addition, the movable decorative member, which expands in the horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100, increases in area when viewed from the front. A situation may occur in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate in the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is employed, the area in the front view may be manually reduced in the state where the power is forcibly cut off during the initial check. Alternatively, when moving to the movement position during the initial check, the state before the area when viewed from the front increases is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area when viewed from the front does not increase. Later, it may be configured to increase the area when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to check whether the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. On the other hand, it is not preferable for the player to see the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, when an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed, an electronic display mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is executed by the player. The parts will be visually recognized, and there is a risk that the player will be in a state of disappointment even though he is trying to liven up the game by executing the performance. In addition, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed for the purpose of marking a break in the game when a so-called reach failure occurs, that is, the decorative pattern stops in a state indicating a loss after forming a ready-to-win state. Even when the effect of darkening almost the entire surface is executed, the electronic parts mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are visually recognized by the player, and when the reach is out of reach, which is unfortunate for the player, Furthermore, there is a possibility that the player will be in a state of disinterest.

Therefore, when the rabbit character 6000 is positioned at the standby position at the timing of executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is expected that such reflection will be visually recognized. It is preferable to employ a configuration that suppresses this. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are positioned between the display areas of the face substrate 6020 and the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 Hidden by the ears 6022, the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the body portion 6030 is positioned between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden by these members. Reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 123, in the case of executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, etc. There is a risk of being seen. Therefore, by performing some kind of display only in the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest in accordance with the effect of darkening the display area. becomes. In the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, it is preferable to display decorative patterns, display the number of reserved games, or display the reserved image indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit related to the variation. . In this case, the color of the image may be made darker or the size of the image may be made smaller than when displaying the decorative pattern, the number of reservations, or the reserved image. Also, instead of statically displaying these, they may be dynamically displayed like animation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection that occurs in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 inconspicuous during the game.

After the darkening effect is started, while the darkening effect is being performed, the rabbit character 6000 is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 123(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 124(A) from the standby position shown in FIG. 124(B) to the movement position shown in FIG. 124(B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. may be configured to perform an effect of moving the rabbit role object 6000 to the moving position shown in .
However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 become easily visible.

Therefore, in the case of executing the effect of moving the rabbit role model 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper movement position, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 overlaps the rabbit role object 6000 in a front view. It may be configured to display a reflection suppression image that suppresses reflection. In this way, when the rabbit role object 6000 moves, an image that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed as a game board side effect display. By displaying it in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest.

The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit character 6000 when viewed from the front, or one size (about 1-2 cm) larger than the rabbit character. It is assumed that the appearance of the reflection-suppressed image completely overlaps the appearance of the rabbit character 6000 when viewed from the front, or the image is displayed in such a manner that the image with reflection-suppressed protrudes about 1 to 2 mm around the rabbit character when viewed from the front. do it. Also, the glare suppression image may be composed of white or bright color. By using white or light color, it is possible to make the reflection inconspicuous. In addition to white or bright colors, black or dark colors may also be used to form a glare-suppressed image. Furthermore, it may be an image in which a glare-suppressed image is dynamically displayed.

The timing for starting the display of the reflection suppression image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit character 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When the rabbit role object 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to move the reflection suppression image while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit role object 6000 . It is preferable to display the reflection suppression image until the dark transition effect is completed. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image. Thereafter, even when the rabbit role object 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image as long as the darkening effect is being performed.

It should be noted that a plurality of modes of such reflection suppression images are prepared, different degrees of expectation for big wins are assigned to the modes of the reflection suppression images, and one of the reflection suppression images is displayed when the rabbit character moves. , it may be configured to function as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, blue and red may be prepared as the colors of the reflection suppression image, and the red reflection suppression image may indicate that the expectation of the big win is higher. In this case, since the player also pays attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, even if some electronic parts are reflected, it is possible to make such reflection less noticeable. .

It should be noted that the display of the reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit role object 6000 has been described. good.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, it is desirable to set the back surface color of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 to black or dark. Moreover, it is desirable that electronic components are not mounted on the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 . When electronic components are mounted on the rear surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, the electronic components are preferably dark-colored. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which are members for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, is the same as that of the game board. Even if it is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the reflection.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, it is desirable that the color of the rear surface of the body portion 6030 is dark. Also, it is desirable not to mount electronic components on the rear surface of the body portion 6030 . When electronic components are mounted on the rear surface of the body portion 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body portion 6030, which is a member that suppresses the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player is affected by the reflection. can reduce the impact on

The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of the initial check may be configured to be in front of the central portion of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . In this case, the reflection in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions, and the entire area behind the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, when executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above, the rabbit role 6000 is moved forward in the central part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to execute this effect after moving to the position. In this case, the rabbit role 6000 is positioned exactly in the middle between the direction of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player moves his/her face to force the rabbit role 6000 to appear. As long as the state is not viewed, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . When ending the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, after the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is brightened, the rabbit character 6000 waits from the moving position. By moving to the position, the influence of the reflection on the player can be reduced.

The face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit role 6000 is shown as an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured such that the state of the rear surface of the member can be confirmed by reflecting it in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 . For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and for supplying power from the power supply board 931 is the game board side effect display. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600 . Further, on the rear surface of the relay board, connectors, control elements, and the like to which flat cables used for transmission of control signals and power supply are connected are surface-mounted. It is preferable that these are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . With such a configuration, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

Although an example in which the relationship between the waiting position and the moving position of the rabbit rolex 6000 is in the vertical direction has been shown, the rabbit rolex 6000 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and between the rear standby position and the forward transfer position. It may be configured to move. Alternatively, the rabbit role 6000 provided in the front lower part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates around a rotation shaft provided below the rabbit role 6000, thereby rotating the rabbit role 6000. The upper portion of 6000 may be configured to be movable so as to tilt forward. The rabbit role 6000 is configured to be movable between a standby position in which the rabbit role 6000 is in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a moving position in which the upper part of the rabbit role 6000 is tilted forward. You may Even in such a configuration, by moving the rabbit role object 6000 from the standby position to the moving position, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be widened. becomes possible.

Although the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit role 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit role 6000 is fixedly provided, The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable backward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable about a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the fixedly provided rabbit character 6000 may be positioned in the direction of movement. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to widen the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 that is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 even for the fixedly provided rabbit character. Become.

An example in which a game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and a rabbit role 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, and an example in which the rabbit role 6000 is fixedly provided and the game board side Although an example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable has been shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit character 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board-side effect display device 1600 may move backward, and the rabbit character 6000 may move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit role object 6000, which are not superimposed when viewed from the front, may be configured to move closer to each other in the horizontal direction and become superimposed when viewed from the front. good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 that is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Although an example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided has been shown, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided. The rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. In addition, the plane formed by the display area of one effect display device and the plane formed by the display area of the other effect display device are configured to face different directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. may be configured. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected from different angles in the display areas of a plurality of effect display devices, making it easier to find the cause of the abnormality.

In addition, by configuring to provide a plurality of movable effect display devices and by moving the effect display devices, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 can be a display area of at least one effect display device or a plurality of effect display devices. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the display device.

An example has been shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly turned off. By darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 126 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIGS. 118 to 125 is provided is not the lower front center of the game board side effect display device 1600, but the left lower side front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It's becoming In addition, a stump accessory 6100 shaped like a stump is provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 . As for the game board 5 as a whole, a space is formed between the game panel 1100 and the game panel 1100 on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, at positions close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud object 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 consists of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 consists of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. there is In addition, the first grass role 6470 and the second grass role 6475 are provided behind these, and the third grass role 6480 is provided behind these, so that the third grass role 6480 overlaps behind this. A fourth grass role 6485 is provided, behind which a rabbit role 6000 and a stump role 6100 are provided, behind these a mountain role 6500 is provided, and behind the mountain role 6500 a game board side effect display. An apparatus 1600 is provided. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this manner, a sense of depth can be created.

A stump portion 6200 shaped like a stump and a first grass movable portion 6360 and a second grass movable portion 6370 shaped like grass are provided on the lower right front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 . , the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 constitute the stump accessory 6100 as a unit.

FIG. 127 shows a stump accessory 6100. FIG. A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200 , and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200 . The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are plate-shaped and formed of green transparent synthetic resin. The first grass movable portion 6360 has an exposed surface formed of a green transparent synthetic resin in the outer edge portion excluding the lower end portion, so that the member positioned behind can be seen through and visually recognized. On the other hand, a portion other than the lower end portion and the outer edge is provided with a first grass decoration portion 6360a coated with green ink, and the rear side of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is invisible. . The second grass movable portion 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable portion 6360, and includes a second grass decoration portion 6370a.

The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are positioned in front of the stump portion 6200 as shown in FIG. As shown in 127(B), the first grass movable part 6360 moves leftward from the position in front of the stump part 6200, and the second grass movable part 6370 moves rightward from the position in front of the stump part 6200. It is possible to take the state of moving to The first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 127A, the end face forming the right end portion of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end face forming the left end portion of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump portion 6200 located behind is in contact. The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a partial region of the stump opening 6210a is a region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and a second grass decoration portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided. configured to be visible through unobstructed areas. In this state, a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356 that constitute the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a, and a rear wall cover 6356 provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. A part of the wall light emitting part 6354 is configured to be visible.

In this state, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set to the light emitting mode as the first light emission effect, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is emitted from the first grass movable portion 6360 where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided. The area and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided are illuminated, and the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the second grass movable part 6370 are illuminated. It may be configured so that the player can be illuminated by passing through the region where the second grass decoration portion 6370a of the portion 6370 is not provided.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 127B, the first grass movable portion 6360 moves leftward from the state in which it is positioned in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is positioned in front of the stump portion 6200. Since the stump portion 6200 has moved to the right from the state where the stump portion 6200 is moved, the visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is improved. In this state, the stump box section 6300 is visible through the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump section 6200. As shown in FIG. In this state, a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a, and a rear wall provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light-emitting portion 6354 has changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state compared to the state before the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move.

In this state, as the second light emission effect, the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is set to the light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed forward where the player is positioned. It may be configured so that it can take a state of being directly irradiated. In the second lighting effect, the light passes through the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. Compared to the first light emitting effect in which light is emitted to the player, it is possible to give the player a strong visual stimulus.

In addition, the first game state and the second game state (for example, the probability variable game state advantageous to the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the jackpot game state that are more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, the normal game state) ), in the case of the first game state, the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed is longer than the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed, In this case, the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed may be longer than the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed. Alternatively, the first light emitting effect is executed for a relatively long period in the first game state compared to the second game state, and the second game state is relatively long in comparison to the first game state. It may be configured such that the second light emitting effect is executed during the period. Further, even if only the first light emitting effect is performed in the first game state, and both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect or only the second light emitting effect is performed in the second game state. good. The second light emitting effect, which is visually more stimulating than the first light emitting effect, functions as an effect that gives interest to the player (an effect that gives a special feeling), so it is used only when the game state is advantageous. Also, when the game state is advantageous, the effect period is used longer, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Thus, in the second game state, which is advantageous to the player, the player experiences visually strong stimuli for a longer period of time than in the first game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , it is possible to further increase the excitement of the player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state.

FIG. 128(A) shows the stump portion 6200 . The stump portion 6200 is composed of a stump plate portion 6210 which is a colored and opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side, and a stump box portion 6300 having a box-like shape provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-like member having an outer shape that imitates a tree stump, and a stump opening portion 6210a is provided in the center thereof.

FIG. 128(B) shows the positional relationship between the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 when viewed from the front. In the drawing, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening portion 6210a are indicated by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening portion 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, simulating a state in which the side surface of the stump has a hole.

FIG. 129(A) shows the stump box portion 6300. FIG. The stump box portion 6300 includes a box upper wall portion 6310 forming the upper wall, a box right wall portion 6320 forming the right wall, a box lower wall portion 6330 forming the lower wall, and a box forming the left wall. It is composed of a left wall portion 6340 and a box rear wall portion 6350 forming a rear wall. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a trapezoidal shape in a plan view, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than the back side. long configured. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided so that the front sides thereof are inclined outward. Further, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Such a configuration can give a sense of depth.

FIG. 129B is an exploded view of the stump box portion 6300. FIG. The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, a dashed line on the rear wall substrate 6352 schematically shows a position where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 provided in the rear wall cover 6356 is located.

FIG. 129(C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. FIG. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 shaped like a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 . The rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is composed of a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like a root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped like a leaf of a root vegetable.

FIG. 129(D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. FIG. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 configured by surface-mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 in front view. The light emitted from the LEDs forming the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is directed forward perpendicularly to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided at a position overlapping the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a corresponds to the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like the root of a root vegetable, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6354a shaped like the leaf of a root vegetable A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to the portion 6358b. As shown in FIG. 127(A), in a state in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are positioned in front of the stump portion 6200, each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is It is configured so that it is provided at a position that does not overlap the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass moving part 6360 is not provided and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass moving part 6370 is not provided when viewed from the front. do it. In this case, even if the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 is in the light-emitting mode as an effect, the player is not directly illuminated with light, so that the player is given a visually weak stimulus.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not completely in contact with each other, but are provided with a predetermined gap (approximately 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b do not come into contact with the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With such a configuration, the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be easily dissipated, and the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to the heat generated by itself. It becomes possible.

The stump accessory 6100 is used for an effect of notifying the degree of expectation for a big hit in the game machine. Specifically, from a state in which the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right, so that the stump opening 6210a becomes easy to see. Then, when the stump opening 6210a becomes easily visible, the light emission of the box rear wall portion 6350 located on the back side of the stump box portion 6300 becomes visible through the stump opening 6210a. (For example, whether the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 appears to glow red or white, or the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located behind in the off state (whether it is visible in white), the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation for stop display in a mode indicating a big win is higher than usual. For example, in each light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352, the degree of expectation that the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern will stop and display in a mode indicating a big win may be set differently. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to arouse the player's great interest in the lighting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 .

An example has been shown in which the degree of expectation for stopping and displaying the changing decorative pattern in a manner indicating a big hit is indicated by the light emitting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352, but the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354a Such notification may be performed by using a different light emission mode from the portion 6354b.

For example, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a does not emit light, and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emits weak green light. , the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped like a root vegetable leaf is green and visible to the player. In addition, by causing the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a to emit weak white light and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b to emit weak green light, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating roots of a root can be obtained. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and shaped like a root vegetable leaf, is green and visible to the player. In addition, by causing the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a to emit weak red light and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b to weakly emit green light, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating roots of a root can be obtained. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is red and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

The reason why the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a emits weak light is to prevent the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a from strongly decorating a portion other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a. Because. In addition, the reason why the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emits weak light is to prevent the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b from strongly decorating a portion other than the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b. Because. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is substantially in the light emitting mode.

By adopting such a light emission mode, it is possible to realize an expression imitating a root vegetable radish in the first light emission example and the second light emission example, and a root vegetable carrot in the third light emission example. In addition, in the first light emission example, although the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a is not caused to emit light, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the color of the first rear wall substrate 6358a The shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (radish root in this example). In addition, in the relationship between the second light emission example and the third light emission example, a plurality of motifs (in this example, radish and carrot) are expressed by different light emission colors in the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. making it possible to

By causing the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit weak light, an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is substantially in the light emitting mode is shown. However, by making the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emit strong light in such a presentation, the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 is illuminated with the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. It may be configured so that the light from the light emitting portion 6354b reaches there strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b may be configured to emit light of the same color (for example, white).

The light from the rear wall substrate 6352 may be reflected by the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 to be visible to the player side. good. For example, in the transparent synthetic resin forming the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering portion capable of scattering the inner surfaces forming the stump box portion 6300 It may be configured as follows. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, at least the inner surfaces constituting the stump box portion 6300 are plated to form a metal thin film such as aluminum. You may make it comprise a reflection part by performing a process. With such a configuration, the light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and applied to the entire inner surface of the stump box section 6300 can be efficiently reflected toward the player. In this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has a function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

A rear wall substrate 6352 that constitutes the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white through a colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356 . Therefore, when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are moved to their respective movement positions, and the box rear wall part 6350 is visible from the stump opening 6210a, the rear wall light emitting part Even when 6354 is in the off state, the box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself. In addition, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 that imitates the shape of a root vegetable. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 in a decorated state.

Although an example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape that imitates the shape of a root vegetable is shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured as a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 has a smooth shape without providing a portion that scatters the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is may pass through as it is. Even in such a configuration, the box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself as in the above example.

An example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 includes the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 is shown, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, A structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided on either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340 . Alternatively, for at least one of the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that constitute the stump box portion 6300, A structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided. , the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may all be provided with a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 . Further, in these examples, when a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided on a predetermined wall portion, other wall portions are not provided with a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. It may be configured such that only a configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356 is provided.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, which constitute the stump box portion 6300, are made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin. It is made of translucent synthetic resin, and when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is in a light emitting state, so that the rear wall light emitting part 6354 emits light. The irradiated light may be configured to illuminate the rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 . With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump plate portion 6210, and the player can visually recognize the stump plate portion 6210 decorated with the light. The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the stump plate portion 6210, which constitute the stump box portion 6300, may be formed of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. good. For example, they may be made of brown synthetic resin. Also, a tree pattern shape may be printed on the rear surface of the stump board portion 6210 with brown ink to form an opaque or translucent area in a part of the stump board portion.

Although an example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white has been shown, other colors may be adopted. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown, similar to the stump plate portion 6210 . In such a mode, by turning off the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a, the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 can represent root vegetables with soil adhered thereto.

When the first grass moving part 6360 moves leftward and the second grass moving part 6370 moves rightward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed, and the box rear wall part located behind is exposed. Although an example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 can be visually recognized has been shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are rotated with the left-right direction of the lower ends of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 as the rotation axis. The upper parts of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are configured to be drivable so as to fall forward. , the box rear wall portion 6350 positioned at the rear may be configured to be visible.

An example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are provided in front of the stump portion 6200 has been shown, but only one of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided in front of the stump portion 6200 . The stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left movement position. Alternatively, the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are configured as an integral member, and this member moves to the right or left movement position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. may be configured.

The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotatable. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 is used as a rotation axis, and the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated by a driving source (not shown) so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 comes into contact with the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310. The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) may rotate the rear wall cover 6356 so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 comes into contact with the inner surface of the box left wall portion 6340 . With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is positioned on the front side of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by the player through the rear wall cover 6356. The box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player in any manner in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not positioned on the near side of the box 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. In addition, since the stump accessory 6100 is positioned at the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as viewed from the player's eye level, the rear wall cover 6356 can be rotated about the upper side and the left side as axes, so that the rear wall after movement can be displayed. The cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. Note that the right side or the variable may be rotated as an axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a larger shape than the rear wall cover 6356 . For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210, and the respective outer edges may overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape expanded from its original shape. In this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is emitted from the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall. It is possible to reflect the light reflected backward by the portion 6340 or the like toward the player in front again.

Also, the light emitting portion may be provided in a portion other than the area covered by the rear wall cover 6356 . For example, in the stump plate portion 6210, a light-emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind the portion imitating the root or the portion imitating the cut end of the tree, and the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light at the same time. can be configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 to emit light more lively. Alternatively, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured so that no light emitting portion other than the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided. In this case also, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light reflected backward by the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, etc. It is possible to reflect again toward the player in front.

In the example shown using FIG. 129, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the near side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the far side. On the other hand, in the example shown below using FIG. 130, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 positioned on the front side, a rear wall substrate 6352 positioned in the middle, and a rear wall plate portion 6380 positioned on the back side. and In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating a root vegetable, a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an external shape imitating a root of a root vegetable, and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an external shape imitating a leaf of a root vegetable. A wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so that the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 positioned behind can be visually recognized.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that resembles a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a that imitates roots of root vegetables and a second rear wall substrate 6352b that imitates leaves of root vegetables. A white protective film is formed with a white protective agent on the front and rear surfaces of the first rear wall substrate 6352a. A green protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the second rear wall substrate 6352b with a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. Two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and a rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. In this example, the rear wall plate portion 6380 forms the rear wall of the stump box portion 6300 .

Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed as separate printed substrates and attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 so as to function as the rear wall substrate 6352. Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed by separately coating one printed circuit board with a white protective agent and a green protective agent.

In the stump box section 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to perform an effect of moving the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 to the movement positions as described above. Also in this embodiment, the light emission mode when the first rear wall light-emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting section 6354b are used for presentation is a weak light-emitting mode that makes it visible as if root vegetables are emitting light, A strong light emission mode may be adopted in which the stump box section 6300 as a whole can be visually recognized as emitting light.

In addition, even when the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are turned off, the color and shape of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may cause the light in the stump box portion 6300 to It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, through a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a, which simulates a root, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white, and through a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which simulates a leaf. The rear wall substrate 6352b is green and visible. In this way, one decorative body can be configured only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

In this example, a plurality of grass accessories 6400 are provided in front of the lower side of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front of the rabbit role and the stump role.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, the first grass role 6470 to the fourth grass role 6485 are provided as the grass role 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a as described above. there is Several implementations of such a grass tool 6400 are shown below.

The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 131(A) is composed of a grass substrate 6420 which is colored and opaque, has a plate-like shape, and has an outline shape imitating grass. In this example, grass substrate 6420 includes grass substrate front light emitter 6422 . The grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 131(B) includes a grass substrate 6420 that is colored and opaque, has a plate-like shape, and has an outline shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface emitter 6424 . The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420 . In the example shown in FIGS. 131(A) and 131(B), the grass substrate 6420 has an outer shape that imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. White may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit green or brown light. Green or brown may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . Green can represent the color of live grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. Thus, both the color and the shape of the grass substrate 6420 can be used to realize a decoration imitating grass.

As the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420, LEDs of the same color as the grass substrate 6420 are used. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, white LEDs are used as the mounted LEDs. With such a configuration, the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when an LED is provided as a light-emitting portion on the substrate.

The light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is directed forward perpendicularly to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize an effect that gives a visually strong impression. When the grass front cover 6440, which will be described later, is provided, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are mounted on the grass substrate 6420 so that light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. can be configured to be implemented in With such a configuration, light is emitted toward the upper end of the front grass cover 6440 , so that the light emitted from the front light-emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate is transmitted to the entire front cover 6440 . , the effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 were illuminated can be visually recognized by the player. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light-emitting portion on the substrate.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize an effect as if the grass board 6420 were illuminated by a halo. When a rear weed cover 6460 (to be described later) is provided, light is emitted toward the upper end of the rear weed cover 6460 . The light emitted from the rear cover 6460 is transmitted, and the player can be made to visually recognize an effect as if the entire back cover 6460 were illuminated. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light-emitting portion on the substrate.

Through holes (not shown) forming an electronic circuit are provided on the front and rear surfaces of the grass substrate 6420 . In addition, the metal that constitutes the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through-hole, and when copper is used as the metal, the through-hole will be visually recognized in brown, which is the color of copper. . Here, if at least a part of the grass substrate 6420 is visible to the player, there is a risk that the through holes will also be visible to the player. In particular, when white is used as the color of the grass board 6420, the brown color of the through-holes provided on the front surface of the grass board 6420 is visually recognized by the player. is lost. Therefore, in order to solve such problems, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the through-holes are preferably arranged so as to be distributed over the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420, instead of concentrating them at predetermined locations. Alternatively, by arranging the through-holes along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or on the extension of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through-holes can be arranged along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize as if it is a part. A decorative shape resembling grass may be formed by arranging linear through-holes inside the contour of the grass substrate 6420 in the same shape as the contour. Also, one or more patterns having the same color as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through holes may be formed on part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . For example, if the through-holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. The above example is preferably applied to all the through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but may be applied to at least some of the through holes. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the function as a decoration is impaired. It should be noted that a through hole may be provided in a substrate included in a accessory in another example, and an embodiment relating to such a through hole may be applied.

131(C) to 131(E) show an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of a grass substrate 6420, and a grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440. FIG. The grass front cover 6440 is made of synthetic resin and has a decorative shape that resembles grass. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 on which the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted is configured to be covered with the grass front cover 6440 when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 131C, the front grass cover 6440 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420 , and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is partially covered by the front grass cover 6440 . In the example shown in FIG. 131(D), the grass substrate 6420 and the front grass cover 6440 have the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the front grass cover 6440 . In the example shown in FIG. 131(E), the grass front cover 6440 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass is positioned outside the outline of the grass substrate 6420. In the example shown in FIG. The front cover 6440 protrudes.

In the example shown in FIG. 131(C), both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the front grass cover 6440 realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. Also, a sense of depth can be produced. In the examples shown in FIGS. 131(D) and 131(E), the grass front cover 6440 is made of colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind can be visually recognized. may be In that case, both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the front grass cover 6440 can realize a decorative aspect. Also, a sense of depth can be produced.

131(F) to 131(H) show an example in which a rear grass cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460 constitute the grass accessory 6400. FIG. The grass rear cover 6460 is made of a synthetic resin and has a decorative outer shape that resembles grass. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 where the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is mounted is configured to be covered with the grass rear cover 6460 .

In the example shown in FIG. 131(F), the rear grass cover 6460 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420 and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the rear grass cover 6460 . In the example shown in FIG. 131(G), the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460 are of the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the rear grass cover 6460 . In the example shown in FIG. 131(H), the size of the rear grass cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420. The rear cover 6460 protrudes. In this example, the outer shape of the rear cover 6460 is visible in a front view.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 131(F) and 131(G), the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured such that the grass accessory 6400 rotates 180 degrees and the rear grass cover 6460 faces forward. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes a visual mode as shown in FIGS. 131(C) and 131(D), and the same effect as the example shown in FIGS. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 131(H), both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the rear cover 6460 can realize a decorative aspect. Also, a sense of depth can be produced.

FIGS. 132(A) to 132(G) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 131(C). In these examples, the size of the front grass cover 6440 is smaller than the size of the grass substrate 6420. Further, modified examples of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is A grass front cover transparent portion 6442, which will be described later, is also configured in a similar manner so that passing light can pass through without irregular reflection. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover 6440 can be directly visually recognized.

In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to the light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 emits green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(B), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420 . The weed front cover 6440 is formed of an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed from a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent sticker is pasted on a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440, or a colored transparent print is applied to the front cover 6440. A portion 6442b may be formed. An example of forming the colored transparent part 6442 b of the front cover 6440 by attaching a colored transparent seal or printing a colored transparent part on a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 has been described. The colored transparent portion 6442b of the front cover may be formed by affixing a colored transparent seal or printing colored transparently on a part of the . Further, it is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Further, the color of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the fact that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed circuit board can be made inconspicuous. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when the colored transparent portion is provided.

In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. In addition, the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is positioned in front of the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can appear green. In addition, since the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 become difficult to see from the player, and the grass substrate front surface in the off state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest due to the player directly viewing the light emitting unit 6422 . On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the intensity of the light from the light source is reduced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, which prevents the player from feeling dazzled. It can be suppressed. In addition, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color.

FIG. 132(C) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 132(B), the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, and white modes from above in a front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(D), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420 . The front grass cover 6440 includes a front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 in this example. Specifically, the front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a provided in the upper portion and a colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the lower portion. It is The weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444 a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front surface and the rear surface of the weed front cover 6440 to lens cutting or satin finishing. Preferably, the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on the front surface of the front grass cover 6440 or on both the front and rear surfaces. In this way, the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made translucent by applying lens cutting and satin finishing, so it is difficult or impossible to see the shape of the members located behind, but the color are visible to the player without change. Although an example in which the light scattering portion is formed in a colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been shown, the light scattering portion may be formed in a colored and transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin positioned in front is mixed with the member positioned in the rear and can be visually recognized. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the fact that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed circuit board can be made inconspicuous. Further, in the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge in a front view. In this case, the light from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light-emitting portion 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the end portions of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460. can highlight the external shape of Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light scattering section.

In this example, since the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are in a state where it is difficult for the player to see them, and the light is turned off. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest when the player directly looks at the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the player feels dazzled. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of

The weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the weed front cover 6440, but with this configuration, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the weed front cover 6440. Compared to the case where the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422) appear blurred, the presence of the electronic components becomes less conspicuous, and the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which interest is lost. Note that when the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the front cover 6440, the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the front cover 6420 (the LEDs constituting the front light emitting portion 6422 of the front cover 6422) ) can be made less conspicuous. In addition, the color of the grass substrate 6420 in the rear becomes visible through the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover. It is a mode that exhibits the function of.

FIG. 132(E) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 132(D), the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a to the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a to the front cover colorless transparent portion. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white modes from above in a front view.

The example shown in FIG. 132(F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132(B) is modified. In this example, a weed front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided instead of the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is formed from an opaque synthetic resin. A cover 6440 may be constructed. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 is provided with a seal or print that makes the rear invisible, thereby forming the front cover opaque portion 6446. may In addition, by applying a sticker or printing to a part of the front surface of the front surface of the front cover 6440 to make the rear invisible, instead of forming the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front surface of the front surface of the front cover 6440 has a rear part. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed by applying an invisible sticker or printing. In this case, in front of the grass front cover 6440, the state of the front side of the portion where the sticker or print is applied can be visually recognized. For example, when the front grass cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible while making the rear of the front grass cover 6440 invisible. . Further, when the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the front weed cover 6440, the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 should be visible, but the rear of the front weed cover 6440 should be invisible. becomes possible. Yellow or brown may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . Note that, in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing an opaque portion.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is white and directly visible, and the white of the grass substrate 6420 is indirectly visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. visually visible. On the other hand, regarding the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 , the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420 .
An example in which yellow or brown is used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 has been shown, but in this aspect, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on dry grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting state, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with the emitted light color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. FIG. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color, it becomes possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

As the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be employed. For example, the front cover opaque portion 6446 is made of a synthetic resin plated entirely with an aluminum thin film. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the portion 6442a. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 is affixed with a silver sticker, printed with silver paint, or plated with an aluminum thin film. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be configured by providing the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . The silver-colored opaque portion has a function of reflecting light. In addition, it may be configured such that a colored paint is applied to the opaque portion formed in silver or a colored transparent seal is attached. For example, by applying a thin layer of yellow paint, the opaque portion can be made visible in gold. Note that, in other examples, such a configuration may also be employed when providing an opaque portion or a reflective portion.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(F), the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the front surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is silver, and the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 are visible white. It is possible to express a mode in which frost or snow falls on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, light emitted forward from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is reflected backward by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . Furthermore, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected backward from the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 is incident on the grass substrate 6420 and scattered. will be decorated. In this way, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 can be efficiently used for decoration. By providing a colored transparent layer as the foremost layer of the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front cover opaque portion 6446 can be made visible in silver and in a predetermined color.

FIG. 132(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 132(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, silver, and white modes from above in a front view.

FIG. 133(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 132(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass by the part visible in white by the grass substrate 6420 and the green aspect by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It's becoming

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is made to emit light, it is desirable that the light emission color is the same as or similar to the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, such as green or yellowish green. It is desirable to emit light. In this case, it is possible to perform a dynamic presentation while keeping the color of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b as it is. In addition, the white grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the reflected light that does not pass through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized in green.

FIG. 133(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 133(A) is modified into a front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green modes from above. In addition, since the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is mixed with the green color of the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. , the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 itself is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered in the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b to decorate the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It becomes possible to make it an aspect. In addition, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

FIG. 133(C) shows that, in the example shown in FIG. 133(B), the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the front cover cover light scattering portion 6444 is replaced with the front cover colored transparent portion. This is an example modified to 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 passes through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and part of the light does not pass through. The light is reflected and scattered at the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444, and the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 can be made into a decorative mode. In addition, diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420 , and the white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

FIG. 133(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is modified to the front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, yellow, brown, or silver grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446, and the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b is reflected. It becomes possible to set it as a decoration mode. In addition, by decorating the exposed white grass substrate 6420 with the reflected light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. , can express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 133(E) shows the example shown in FIG. 133(D), in which the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed into the front cover cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example of As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, yellow, brown, silver, or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be set to the decorative mode. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 scatters on the back surface of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b or is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, thereby exposing the white light. By decorating the grass substrate 6420 , the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. , can express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 134(A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the front cover of the example shown in FIG. 132(A) is modified into a colorless front cover cover portion 6444a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a can be set to the decorative mode. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated. 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , and it is possible to express the mode in which the grass is growing.

FIG. 134(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is modified into a front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 134(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in white, white, yellow, brown, or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the luminous mode, the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 can be set to the decorative mode by the light reflected from the back surface of the front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, by scattering light on the back surface of the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. becomes. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

134(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 134(B) in which the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow, brown, silver, or white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the white grass can be displayed. It becomes possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 134(A) to 134(C), the front cover 6440 is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin to replace the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 134(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is modified to the front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light reflected from the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the white grass can be displayed. It becomes possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 132(A) to 134(D), the outer shape of each of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as a decorative shape. is configured to In addition, the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although it is provided at a position where only one of the members is covered when viewed from the front, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind the position forming the boundary line of these members. may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the off state.

For example, in the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 132(B), an LED that constitutes the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is placed behind the boundary formed by the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. When configured so as to be arranged, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 becomes less conspicuous. It becomes possible for the player to visually recognize it clearly.

Similarly, the relationship between the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the front cover color. Relationship with light scattering portion 6444b, relationship between weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and weed front cover opaque portion 6446, relationship between weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and weed front cover opaque portion 6446, and weed front cover colored light In the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, when the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind the boundary line between these, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the inconspicuous.

Further, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the weed front cover In the case where the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind these boundary lines in relation to the cover opaque portion 6446, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 becomes inconspicuous.

In the combination described above, in the combination of the front weed cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the weed front cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is In combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, it is possible to efficiently transmit to the member forming the boundary line.

The light from the LEDs forming the grass-substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 may be applied perpendicularly to the grass-substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LEDs forming the grass-substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are mounted. You may make it irradiate in the direction perpendicular|vertical to the tangential line of .

For example, when both of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a are combined, the light from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 may be used. It is preferable that the direction of light irradiation is perpendicular to the grass substrate 6420 . On the other hand, in the combination of the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the weed front cover opaque portion 6446, the boundary line at the position where the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are mounted. It is preferable to irradiate the light in the direction of the member that is perpendicular to the tangent line and combined with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to form the boundary line.

Note that when rectangular LEDs are used as the LEDs that constitute the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the longitudinal direction of the LEDs coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the contact of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. should be placed as follows.

In addition, in the case where the two parts forming the boundary line are formed by one member, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 has a size of about the same width at the part corresponding to the boundary line so that it does not protrude when viewed from the front. It may be configured to provide a V-shaped groove. With such a configuration, when viewed from the front of the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are refracted by the V-shaped grooves and visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 inconspicuous. Note that the shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove, and any structure that can be bent may be used. On the other hand, when a boundary line is formed by combining a plurality of members, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are refracted and visually recognized without providing such grooves. It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the substrate front light emitting portion 6422 inconspicuous.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 132(A) to 134(D), the outer shape of each of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as a decorative shape. is configured to This makes it possible to give a sense of depth. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . will be In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is made white and light of a color other than white is emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color to make it visible.

In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state. In addition, by mounting the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 on the grass substrate 6420 so that the light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, the light emitted from the grass substrate 6420 can be More light can reach the edge.

FIGS. 135(A) to 137(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 131(D). In these examples, the size of the grass substrate 6420 and the front grass cover 6440 are configured to be the same. Further, modified examples of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 135(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly visually recognized. In addition, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express white grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, thereby representing a mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 135(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 135(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white and green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 135(C) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 135(B) , the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, green and white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 135(D) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 135(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 135(E) shows that, in the example shown in FIG. 135(D) , the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is a modified example of the portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 135(F) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 135(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 135(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 135(F) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 136(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 135(A). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can represent green grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 136(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 135(D). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the front grass cover 6440 has a green front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 136(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 135(E). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the front grass cover 6440 has a green front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 136(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 135(F). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, green, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 136(E) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 135(G). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express yellow, brown, silver, or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 137(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 135(A) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can represent white grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 137(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 135(F) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, green, yellow, brown, or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 137(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 135(G). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 137(A) to 137(C), the front cover 6440 is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin to replace the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 137(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express yellow, brown, or silver grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400. The light reaches and it becomes possible to decorate the end of the grass accessory 6400 with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 is viewed obliquely, the edge of the grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400 in green, and to express the mode in which grass is growing.
It should be noted that even in an example in which another grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it is possible to make it visible in such a manner.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 135(A) to 137(D), the external shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having the same size as the grass front cover 6440 are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself is used for decoration. At the same time, the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the front grass cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 are different. The grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 138(A) to 140(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 131(E). In these examples, the front grass cover 6440 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the front grass cover 6440. Although it is configured to protrude, a modified example of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 138(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly visually recognized. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, thereby representing a mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 138(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 138(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in colorless and transparent, white, and green forms from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 138(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 138(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in transparent green, green, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 138(D) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 138(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in colorless and transparent, white, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 138(E) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 138(D), the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a to the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a to the front cover colorless transparent portion. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in colorless and translucent, white, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 138(F) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 138(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 138(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 138(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 139(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 138(A). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a green transparent or green mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 139(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 138(D). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in green transparent, green, and green modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 139(C) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 139(B) , the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is replaced with the front cover colored transparent portion 6444b. This is an example modified to the portion 6442b. Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in semi-transparent green, green, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored light diffusion portion 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 139(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 138(F). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to represent grass in green transparent, green, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 139(E) shows the example shown in FIG. 139(D) in which the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 is changed to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example of Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or green grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 140(A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the front cover of the example shown in FIG. 138(A) is modified into a colorless front cover cover portion 6444a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in a manner that is colorless, transparent, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 140(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 138(F) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 140(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 138(G). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 140A to 140C, the front cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin to replace the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a with the front cover colored light scattering portion 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 140(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 138(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express yellow, brown, or silver grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. reaches the upper end of the grass substrate 6420, and it becomes possible to irradiate the light upward and backward. This makes it possible to decorate other members by irradiating light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420 in green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not to decorate the grass accessory 6400 itself, but to decorate other members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 138(A) to 140(D), at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 has a decorative shape that can be visually recognized by the player. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444, decoration is performed with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. The grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 141(A) to 141(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 131(H). In these examples, a grass substrate rear surface emitting portion 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420 . In addition, the rear grass cover 6460 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the rear grass cover 6460 is covered with the grass substrate 6420. However, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 141(A), a colorless and transparent grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the rear cover 6460 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is molded smoothly. In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass rear cover located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly viewed. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. can express the mode.

FIG. 141(B) is an example in which the rear cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a in the example shown in FIG. 141(A) is modified into a rear cover cover colored transparent portion 6462b. Green may be adopted as the color of the rear cover cover colored transparent portion 6462b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in green transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the rear grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. can express the mode.

FIG. 141(C) is an example in which the back cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the back cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a in the example shown in FIG. 141(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, translucent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is made to emit light, the rear grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. You can express how you are.

FIG. 141(D) is an example in which the rear cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the rear cover cover opaque portion 6466 in the example shown in FIG. 141(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the rear cover opaque portion 6466 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. reaches, and the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in green, and to represent a mode in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 141(A) to 141(D), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover 6460, which has a larger outside shape than the grass substrate 6420, are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. This makes it possible to give a sense of depth.
In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, decoration is performed using the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. Further, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light of a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 reaches the upper end portion of the rear grass cover 6460 and the upper end portion of the rear grass cover 6460 is illuminated. is decorated with a predetermined color can be visually recognized.

FIGS. 142(A) to 143(G) show modified examples of the examples shown in FIGS. 131(A) to 132(G). Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 142(A) and 142(B), grass substrate 6420 is provided with grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape resembling the head of a rabbit. Through the substrate opening 6426, the rear side is configured to be visible.

142(C) to 142(E) and FIGS. 143(A) to 143(G), the front grass cover 6440 is positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the front grass cover 6440 A grass front cover opening 6448 having a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head is provided in the front grass cover opening 6448 so that the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized through the grass front cover opening 6448 .

In the examples shown in FIGS. 142(F) to 142(H), a rear cover 6460 is positioned behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 has grass in a decorative shape resembling a rabbit's head. A substrate opening 6426 is provided. The grass rear cover 6460 is configured to be visible through the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 142(A) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 131(A). The grass substrate openings 6426 are formed in the grass substrate 6420 in such a manner that physical openings in the form of punched holes are provided. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. In addition, it becomes possible to visually recognize the rear through the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 142(B) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 131(B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and a member located behind the grass substrate opening 6426 is configured to be directly visible. there is The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. In addition, it is possible to directly view the rear from the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 142(C) shows an example in which a front grass cover opening 6448 is provided in the front grass cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 131(C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in a manner in which a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass front cover 6440 , and the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind is directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448 . configured as possible. The grass front cover opening 6448 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of weed front cover openings 6448 may be provided, and in this example, a weed front cover first opening 6448a and a weed front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the weed front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

The front weed cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the first weed substrate front light emitting portion 6422a forming part of the weed substrate front light emitting portion 6422 when viewed from the front. The grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible through. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is positioned so as not to overlap the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, which constitute a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, when viewed from the front. is provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the front cover 6440 but also the front cover opening 6448 can have a decorative shape. Further, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized from the front grass cover opening 6448, and depending on the shape of the front grass cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 visually recognized from the front grass cover opening 6448, decoration is done.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a of the grass front cover 6440 and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface.

FIG. 142D shows an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is modified to have the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 142C. FIG. 142(E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is changed to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 142(C). In these examples as well, similar effects can be obtained by adopting a mode similar to that of the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 142(C).

FIG. 142(F) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 131(F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 positioned behind the grass substrate opening 6426 is directly visible. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. Also, the rear cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the opening 6426 of the grass substrate. Also, decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass rear cover 6460 visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426 .

When the grass-substrate rear surface first light-emitting portion 6424a and the grass-substrate rear-surface second light-emitting portion 6424b are configured to emit light, the grass-substrate rear surface first light-emitting portion 6424a and the grass-substrate rear surface second light-emitting portion 6424a are exposed from the grass substrate rear surface cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening portion 6426b. The grass substrate rear surface is decorated with light emitted from the second light emitting portion 6424b. On the other hand, the rear grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b. The amount of light that reaches the portion exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b is smaller. Therefore, the portion exposed from the first grass substrate opening 6426a of the rear grass cover 6460 is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion exposed from the second grass substrate opening 6426b of the rear grass cover 6460.

It should be noted that it may be possible to perform an effect in which the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a is turned off and only the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b is lit in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion exposed from the first grass substrate opening 6426a of the rear weed cover 6460 is substantially not in a decorative state because the light does not reach the second opening of the grass substrate 6460. Only the portion exposed from 6426b can be decorated.

FIG. 142(G) is an example in which the size of the rear cover 6460 in the example shown in FIG. FIG. 142(H) is an example in which the size of the rear cover 6460 is changed to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 142(F). In these examples as well, similar effects can be obtained by adopting a mode similar to that of the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 142(F).

FIG. 143(A) shows an example in which a front grass cover opening 6448 is provided in the front grass cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132(A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The front weed cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the first weed substrate front light emitting portion 6422a forming part of the weed substrate front light emitting portion 6422 when viewed from the front. The grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible through. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b does not overlap the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, which constitute a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, when viewed from the front. , and the grass front cover 6440. As shown in FIG.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the front grass cover is visible. The grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white because it is interposed. Therefore, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the rabbit-like shape formed by the front grass cover opening 6448 is not conspicuous. In addition, since the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is composed of white LEDs that are the same color as the grass substrate 6420, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 stands out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the presence of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the edge faces are brown and decorative, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 not exposed is viewed by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second grass front cover opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420 .

FIG. 143(B) shows an example in which a front grass cover opening 6448 is provided in the front grass cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132(B). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. 6448 is provided. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448. Through 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as green. As a result, it is possible to express an aspect as if there is a white rabbit in green grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the end face is brown and decorative, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as the white grass substrate 6420 green. Alternatively, when green, which is the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent portion, is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass is exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The end face forming the base plate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is decorated with green luminescent color, and since it has the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent part, it expresses a form as if a rabbit is hidden in the grass. be able to.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

FIG. 143(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 143(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white modes from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 143(A).

FIG. 143(D) shows an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132(D). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is visible. , the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. This makes it possible to express a mode as if a white rabbit is hidden in white grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the edge faces are green and decorated, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visible to the player as the white grass substrate 6420.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. As a result, it is possible to express an aspect as if there is a white rabbit in green grass.

FIG. 143(E) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 143(D), the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a to the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a to the front cover colorless transparent portion. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express the grass in white, white, and white form from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 143(A).

FIG. 143(F) is an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132(F). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover opaque portion 6446. are provided. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 .
In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 is yellow. or brown or silver. This makes it possible to express a mode as if a white rabbit is hidden in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, or when white blinking is adopted as the light emission mode, in the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided, The end face forming the exposed grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is decorated in yellow, brown, or white blinking mode. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first grass front cover opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 . As a result, the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are in the same decorative mode. aspect can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are The end face to be formed is white and decorated. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first grass front cover opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 . As a result, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided, which has been visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, when such a light emission mode is set from the above-described light-off state, The light emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a can also be white, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a manner that emphasizes it more.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when white is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover second opening portion 6448b is surrounded by the opening. The grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate, although the grass substrate 6420 is white and decorated. As a result, it is possible to emphatically express the appearance of a white rabbit hiding in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

FIG. 143(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 143(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow, brown, or silver, white form from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 143(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 142(A) to 143(G), decorative members provided in front (grass substrate 6420 and grass front cover 6440) have decorative shaped openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover 6440). By providing a front cover opening 6448) so that the members provided at the rear can be seen, the decoratively shaped opening is conspicuous and visible to the player. In addition, since the member provided in the front and the member provided in the rear are different in color, transparency, etc., the shape of the opening can be made more conspicuous. Further, it may be configured to use such a decorative state of the opening as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 131(A) to 131(H) and FIGS. 132(A) to 132(G), modified examples in which openings are provided are shown in FIGS. 142(A) to 143(G). However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 133(A) to 141(D), it is also possible to provide openings in the same manner.

An example has been shown in which a physical punched opening is provided in the front cover 6440 to form the front cover opening 6448 to form an area that allows the rear to be visually recognized. Instead of the method of providing, the external shape of the visible area may be formed by the boundary line between the area where the rear is invisible or difficult to see and the area where the rear is relatively easily visible.

For example, the outer invisible area may be composed of the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 and the inner easily visible area may be composed of the weed front cover transparent portion 6442 . Alternatively, the outer difficult-to-visually-visible area is configured by the colored grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easily-visible area is configured by the grass-front-cover light scattering portion 6444, or the outer difficult-to-visually-recognized area is configured by the colored grass. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 constitutes the inner easily visible region, and the outer difficult-to-recognize region is composed of the colorless front cover light scattering portion 6444. The easy-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the outer, difficult-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easy-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colorless, transparent portion 6442a. You may make it comprise by. Alternatively, the weed front cover 6440 includes a weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442 a, a weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442 b, a weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444 a, a weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444 b, and a weed front cover opaque portion 6446 . may be provided, and an inner easily visible region may be provided across two or more of these regions. With such a mode, it is also possible to provide a region that has a decorative shape and allows easy visibility of the rear side.

143(B) to 143(G), the location where the weed cover opening 6448 is provided is one of the weed cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed cover light scattering portion 6444, the weed cover opaque portion 6446, and the like. Although only the area is provided, the front weed cover opening 6448 may be provided across a plurality of areas constituting the front weed cover 6440 . Specifically, the weed front cover 6440 includes a weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a weed front cover opaque portion. 6446, and may be configured to provide front grass cover openings 6448 across areas of two or more of them.
FIGS. 131(A) to 143(G) show an example in which the grass accessory 6400 can be visually recognized as a decoration mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, but these states are used as an effect in a game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, the player may be notified of a predetermined event by changing when these states change from the above-described one state to the above-described other state. The predetermined event may be, for example, an indication of the expected degree of a big hit, or an advance notice indicating that the operation button 410 will become operable.

131(C) to 131(E), 132(A) to 140(D), and 142(C) to 143(G), an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. 131(F) to 131(H) and FIGS. 141(A) to 141(D) show an example in which the grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420; Any one of the embodiments in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided in the rear of the grass substrate 6420 and any one of the embodiments in which the grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 are combined. may

When the embodiments are combined, it is preferable that the grass substrates 6420 have the same size. 131(C) and 131(F), when the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 are smaller than the grass substrate 6420, the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 It is preferable to combine the embodiments with the rear cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. If the grass substrate 6420, the front grass cover 6440, and the rear grass cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiments shown in FIGS. , Examples may be combined. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440, the weed substrate 6420, and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. 131(E) and 131(H), when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420. It is preferable to combine the embodiments with the rear cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. In addition, the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 are preferably made of the same color of synthetic resin. is preferably made of a synthetic resin. Further, when the front cover 6440 is made of a transparent green synthetic resin, the rear cover 6460 may be made of a transparent green synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 . It may be configured so that one side is not provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 131(E) and 131(H) are combined, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the rear cover 6460 with the light from the front light-emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate. It is also possible to decorate the front grass cover 6440 with the light from the rear grass substrate light-emitting portion 6424 . In this case, it is desirable to provide a light scattering portion so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge in the front view of the front cover 6440 and the rear cover 6460 . Note that the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface emitting portion 6424 may not be provided. In this case, the grass board 6420 may be configured, for example, to have a function of relaying the signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to another role.

Any one example of the grass accessory 6400 described above may be applied to each of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 shown in FIG. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the area other than the first grass decoration portion 6360a constituting the outer area of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed. , and the first grass decorative portion 6360a that constitutes the inner region in the first grass movable portion 6360, the member that constitutes the outer region and the inner region in any one example of the grass accessory 6400 It is better to apply the member. In addition, with respect to the area other than the second grass decoration portion 6370a that constitutes the outer area of the second grass movable portion 6370 and the second grass decoration portion 6370a that constitutes the inner area of the second grass movable portion 6370, the grass It is preferable to apply the member configuring the outer region and the member configuring the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400 .

Also, any one example of the grass accessory 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 . For example, the example shown in FIG. 141(B) may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 . In this case, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 are in contact with each other to form one decoration. In addition, the left and right transparent green rear covers 6460 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass rear covers 6460 each form a single decorative body. are doing.

In FIG. 126, a third grass role 6480 is provided, and a fourth grass role 6485 is provided behind it. It is configured to be hidden in the grass role 6480 . Here, any one example of the above-described grass role 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 . At this time, it is desirable that the grass substrates 6420 of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 have the same size. In addition, one or both of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 that can be provided in the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 can be made to emit light as in the above example. may be configured.

141(A) as the third grass role 6480 and the grass role 6400 shown in FIG. 138(E) as the fourth grass role 6485 are shown below. In this case, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 provided in the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass role 6480 provided in front is lit, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass role 6485, It is possible to illuminate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 from the front side. In addition, the fourth herb accessory 6485 efficiently diffusely reflects the light emitted from the third herb accessory 6480 to the front to enhance the interest of the player as an effect.

On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the rear cover 6460 of the third grass role 6480 by emitting light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided in the fourth grass role 6485 . At this time, only the peripheral portion such as the upper side of the rear cover 6460 is visible to the player as a decorative aspect, but the light passing through the rear cover 6460 is directed backward by the white grass substrate 6420. The light is diffusely reflected and irradiated toward the fourth grass role 6485 to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the fourth grass role 6485 .

In this way, the light is diffusely reflected alternately between the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear, thereby making the position of the light source invisible to the player. It is possible to efficiently reflect light forward while arranging. In particular, when a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light is used as the front cover opaque portion 6446 and the rear cover opaque portion 6466, light can be reflected more efficiently.

An example in which the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the back partly overlap in a front view has been shown, but the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. Also, the third grass role 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass role 6485 . The fourth grass role 6485 may be completely hidden behind the third grass role 6480 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, they may be arranged at positions that are adjacent to each other but do not overlap when viewed from the front.

One or both of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided behind may be configured to be movable as a presentation. For example, an example in which the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap in front view has been shown, but from this state, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured so as to completely overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, by moving one of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 in the horizontal direction, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 completely overlap when viewed from the front. By moving both the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 in the left-right direction, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 can be viewed from the front. may be configured so that they completely overlap with each other. In this case, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may be configured so that they can move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state in which they overlap. In addition, the moving direction may be configured so as to be movable not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. In this case, it should be configured such that it can move upward or downward by the height of the grass accessory itself. Even in such a configuration, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 can be configured to move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state in which they overlap. Then, it is preferable to configure so that it is possible to take a light emission mode as in each of the examples described above in a state in which the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 are superimposed in a front view.

An example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, but by moving the grass accessory 6400, the openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover opening 6448) are difficult to see or invisible. A change to a visible state may be employed as an effect. Specifically, the relationship between the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear and provided with the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 is shown in the front view. From the state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the front cover opening 6448 of the fourth grass role 6485 are located behind the third grass role 6480, the third grass role 6480 is positioned behind the third grass role 6480 in front view. The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the 4-grass accessory 6485 change to a state where they are not positioned, and the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 can be visually recognized from the front view by the player. It is preferable to configure so as to be

Although an example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to move to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 as an effect. At this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Specifically, when the grass role 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the grass role 6400 is modeled according to the movement of the grass role 6400. The image may be moved upward and displayed. At this time, it is desirable to move while displaying an image simulating the outline of the grass role 6400 slightly above the grass role 6400 in a front view. By adopting such a configuration, the front grass cover 6440 is constituted by an image simulating the outline of the grass accessory 6400, the outer shape of the grass accessory 6400 configured by the front grass cover 6440, the grass substrate 6422, or the rear cover 6460. There are a plurality of grass-like shapes represented by a boundary line between a plurality of members or a grass substrate 6420 that is smaller than the transparent grass front cover 6440 and visible through the grass front cover 6440 from top to bottom when viewed from the front. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. In this way, one decoration mode can be realized as an effect by three elements, ie, the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the character, and the shape provided inside the character. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 133(B) and 138(B), etc., when the grass accessory 6400 has two shapes in a front view, a total of four shapes are used to realize one decoration mode as an effect. be able to.

The back surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as the rabbit character 6000 has. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. The wiring may be similarly attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so as to make the wiring difficult to see from the player. The configuration may be such that the LEDs and wiring are positioned behind them visually. In addition, by printing or engraving a pattern having the same shape as the LEDs and the wiring on the transparent grass substrate 6420, the transparency of the grass substrate 6420 is ensured, but the LEDs and the wiring are difficult for the player to see. may be configured. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 to emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, or the LED A pattern having the same shape as the wiring may be illuminated to be in a decorative state. With such a configuration, these members can realize both the function of hiding the presence of the LEDs and wiring and the function of decoration.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 131(C) to 143(G), one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440, or one grass substrate 6420 and one grass rear cover 6460, or one 6420, one front grass cover 6440, and one rear grass cover 6460 constitute one grass accessory 6400. At least one member of may be increased to a plurality to configure one grass accessory 6400 . For example, two grass front covers 6440 may be attached to one grass substrate 6420 to configure one grass accessory 6400, or two grass substrates 6420 may be attached to one grass front cover 6440, It is also possible to configure one grass accessory 6400 . In addition, when a plurality of grass substrates 6420, front grass covers 6440, and rear grass covers 6460 are provided, the embodiments shown in FIGS. may apply. For example, in the later-described mountain accessory 6500, one substrate is provided with two front covers, and one of the front covers is provided with an opening so that the substrate positioned behind can be visually recognized, and the substrate is also opened. It is an example in which a part is provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 138(A) to 140(D), a grass front cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front cover 6440. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the front cover opaque portion 6446 are provided at least in front of the front cover 6444, and in the front view of the grass substrate 6420, the front cover colorless transparent portion is provided in front of the portion other than the outer edge. 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even with such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, a front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 and a front grass cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in a strip shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 138(D), the area occupied by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the front cover 6440 is enlarged upward so that the area in front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is the front cover colorless light scattering portion. It may be configured to be covered by the portion 6444b. In the example shown in FIG. 138(E), the area occupied by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the front cover 6440 is reduced upward so that the area in front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b. It may be configured to be covered by the scattering portion 6444b. 138(F) and 138(G), similarly, by expanding or contracting the area occupied by the front cover opaque portion 6446 upward, the front portion of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 becomes the front cover. It may be configured to be covered by an opaque portion 6446 . Alternatively, the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 and the opaque front cover cover 6446 are formed so that at least a part of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the opaque front cover cover 6446 . A similar effect can be obtained even when the portion 6446 is provided.

118 and 126 show an example in which the grass role 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100, but the grass role 6400 is provided in a position other than this. It may be configured as For example, a grass accessory 6400 may be provided in the area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190 . Alternatively, the door frame 3 may be configured such that the member forming the door frame 3 is provided with the grass accessory 6400 . For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to provide grass accessories. It should be noted that not only the grass accessory 6400 but also other accessories may be provided at the same position as the grass accessory 6400 .

In this way, in the grass accessory 6400, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc. by the plurality of members that make up the grass accessory 6400. It can express green grass, withered grass, and withered grass with frost and snow. Also, it is possible to express how the grass has changed from one of these modes to another mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, a rabbit role 6000 and a stump role 6100 are provided in front of a mountain role 6500 . In these examples, the rabbit character 6000 has a face light emitting part 6023, and the stump character 6100 has a first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and a second rear wall light emitting part 6354b. It is possible to take a production state by irradiating forward. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting unit is diffusely reflected by the members provided around the light emitting unit, and part of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is directed backward, and the light from the light emitting unit is reflected. However, there is a problem that the light cannot be efficiently irradiated forward, and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is reduced. Therefore, an example in which the efficiency of using the light from the light-emitting unit can be improved by reflecting forward the light directed backward on the front side of the decorative object 6500 will be described.

FIG. 144 shows a modification of the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIG. 119 and the like.
FIG. 144(A) is a front view of the rabbit character 6000. FIG. FIG. 144(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 144(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG.
The rabbit character 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. FIG. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as the face light emitting part 6023 on the front surface. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. A first arm portion 6016 and a second arm portion 6017 made of opaque white synthetic resin are attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, imitating left and right front legs of a rabbit. At the lower end of the face substrate 6020, there is provided a body part 6030 which imitates the body part of a rabbit and is a plate-like member made of opaque white synthetic resin. The face covering portion 6010 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011a at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. A portion 6011b is provided. Up to this point, the configuration is the same as that of the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIG. 119 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 144(A), the face substrate 6020 does not have the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a concave shape toward the rear formed by the face cover upper surface portion 6012, the face cover right surface portion 6013, the face cover lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion 6010. It is attached so that it fits in the part where it is attached. In the face cover portion 6010, the upper surface of the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 has a shape that protrudes upward at two locations on the left and right, thereby forming a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022. As shown in FIG. A first ear decoration portion 6021a and a second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing on the front surface of the face cover portion 6010 with brown ink.

When the rabbit character 6000 takes such a form, the light from the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b is irregularly reflected by the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b. After that, the face-cover upper surface 6012, the face-cover right surface 6013, the face-cover lower surface 6014, the face-cover left surface 6015, the first ear 6021, the first ear decoration 6021a, and the second ear 6022. , the second ear decoration portion 6022a, etc., the light may be reflected many times and may be directed backward.

Also, when the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump accessory 6100 shown in FIGS. The light from the light emitting portion 6354b diffusely reflects at the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, and then reaches the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330. , left wall portion 6340 of the box, and the like, the light may be reflected and directed backward.

Therefore, an example of increasing the efficiency of light utilization by reflecting the light that has traveled backward from the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100 forward again on the front side of the mountain character 6500 will be described below.

FIG. 145(A) shows a mountain role 6500. FIG. The dotted lines in the figure indicate the positions where the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 are provided. In addition, for the rabbit character 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also indicated by dotted lines. The mountain accessory 6500 is composed of a mountain substrate 6520 , a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain substrate 6520 , and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right side of the mountain substrate 6520 .

The mount board 6520 is composed of a printed circuit board with white front and rear surfaces. In addition, on the front surface of the mount substrate 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mount substrate front light emitting portion 6522 are mounted. A mountain substrate opening 6524 is provided at substantially the center of the mountain substrate 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain substrate opening 6524 is formed by punching out a physical opening in the mountain substrate 6520 . Members positioned behind can be visually recognized through the mountain substrate opening 6524 .

The first ridge front cover 6540 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first ridge front cover colored transparent portion 6542 , a first ridge front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 , and a first ridge front cover opening 6548 . there is With such a configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized in the color of the first mountain front cover 6540 . Specifically, the color of the first crest front cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to express a state in which a mountain is covered with snow or a mountain has a glacier. The first crest front cover opening 6548 is formed by punching out a physical opening in the first crest front cover 6540 . Also, the first crest front cover opening 6548 is formed across the first crest front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first crest front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 . The peak substrate 6520 positioned behind through the first peak front cover opening 6548 is visible in white. The second ridge front cover 6560 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second ridge front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second ridge front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to express a mode in which snow is piled up on a mountain or a mountain has a glacier. In addition, the mountain substrate opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 decoratively express the appearance of a cave in the mountain by their shapes.

On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, as the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portion 6522, a mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a to a mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting portion 6522i are provided. A first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6522b. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the third light emitting portion 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided in the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is located in front of it. are doing. A first peak cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front surface of the peak substrate, and a face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is located in front of it. there is A stump accessory 6100 is positioned in front of the mountain board front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e. A stump accessory 6100 is positioned in front of the mountain board front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface seventh light emitting portion 6522g, and a stump accessory 6100 is located in front of it. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface eighth light emitting portion 6522h. A second ridge front cover colorless light scattering section 6564 is provided in front of the ridge substrate front surface ninth light emitting section 6522i.

When viewed from the front, the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visible in light blue. , the area in front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 and is visible in light blue, and the area behind the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is blue transparent because the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned. an area that is visually recognized as a solid color, an area that is visually recognized as translucent blue because the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned behind the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6542b, and an opening portion 6524 that is open. A region in which the rear member can be visually recognized in a hole shape, a region where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and is visually recognized in white, and a front of the mountain substrate 6520 are the second. It consists of a region covered by the second front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 and visible in white, and a region behind the second peak front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 where the peak substrate 6520 is not positioned and visible transparently. ing.

FIG. 145(B) shows a state in which the above-described rabbit role 6000 and stump role 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain role 6500 . At the rear of the rabbit character 6000, there is an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and an area in front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visible in light blue. , the front side of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 to provide an area visually recognized in light blue. By diffusely reflecting the light from the face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b forward, it is possible to increase the light utilization efficiency. In addition, behind the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visible white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and visible white. In these areas, the light from the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b provided in the stump accessory 6100 provided in front is diffusely reflected forward. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of light utilization. Thus, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to have a plurality of reflective areas corresponding to the plurality of members having the light-emitting portions.

It should be noted that when the light from the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward by the mountain substrate 6520 positioned behind the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100, the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward. It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in substrate areas obscured by object 6000 and stump feature 6100 . Specifically, it is desirable to use white or bright color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520 . In addition, in the substrate area hidden by the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed without providing a cover in front, or when a cover is provided, a colorless and transparent cover is provided. It should be configured to In the example shown in FIG. 145(A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in the region corresponding to the right side of the rabbit character 6000 when viewed from the front. Further, in the area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed, the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520 is configured so as not to mount electronic components such as the front surface light-emitting portion 6522 of the mountain substrate. In addition, in the area corresponding to the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is either exposed or covered with the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second front cover. By adopting such a mode, it becomes possible to further increase the reflection efficiency of forward light.

Of the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portions 6522 provided on the mountain substrate 6520, the mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d have the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 in front of them. For the front surface second light-emitting portion 6522b and the mountain substrate front surface third light-emitting portion 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is located forward, and for the mountain substrate front surface ninth light-emitting portion 6522i, the second mountain front cover is located forward. A colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided. In this way, by providing a colored or light-scattering cover in front of the board front light-emitting portion 6522, the light from the light-emitting portion is prevented from directly illuminating the player's eyes. On the other hand, the front surface fifth light-emitting portion 6522e and the sixth light-emitting portion 6522f of the front surface of the mountain substrate are exposed at the front surface of the surface substrate 6520 without a front cover. This is used to illuminate the stump accessory 6100 positioned in front of the light from the mountain board front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e and the mountain board front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f. This is because the player is not directly irradiated with light from the sixth light-emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain board. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 inconspicuous. Thus, in the ridge board 6500, instead of arranging the ridge board front light-emitting portions 6522 evenly on the front surface of the ridge board 6520, the first ridge front cover 6540 located in front of the ridge board front light-emitting portions 6522, They are unevenly distributed corresponding to the second mountain front cover 6560 , the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 .

FIG. 145(C) shows the rabbit role object 6000 moved from the waiting position to the moving position with a dotted line. In this state, the mountain board front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain board front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d, which have overlapped behind the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front, are configured to be visible to the player when viewed from the front. It is The rabbit character 6000 can emit light not only in the standby position as described above, but also in the moving position as an effect by emitting light in a predetermined color. At this time, the effect display device 1600 on the game board side may perform an effect display in the same luminescent color as that of the rabbit character 6000 . For example, when the rabbit role 6000 is made to emit white light, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured to display a white line radially extending from the position where the rabbit role 6000 is positioned. good too.

FIG. 145(C) shows the rabbit role object 6000 moved from the standby position to the movement position with a dotted line. A mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and a mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are provided behind the rabbit role object 6000 in a front view, so that even when the rabbit role object 6000 is at the standby position, the rabbit role object can be Even when the 6000 is in the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is at the moving position, the board side effect display device 1600 may display a white line and at the same time, the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 may emit white light.

In the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, when the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are in the light emitting mode as an effect, the upper surface of the face cover portion of the rabbit accessory 6000 6012 , face cover portion right surface portion 6013 , face cover portion lower surface portion 6014 , face cover portion left surface portion 6015 . , the outline of the rabbit's face becomes a luminous mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit character 6000, the light emitted from the front third light emitting portion 6522c and the fourth front light emitting portion 6522d of the mountain substrate and directed forward is diffusely reflected backward. As a result, this light is diffusely reflected forward from the front surface of the mountain object 6500 again. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light.

In the example shown in FIG. 145, the area of the mountain role 6500 is larger than that of the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 in front view. An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 so as to exhibit the same function as the mountain accessory 6500 . For example, such accessories may be arranged so as to fit within the area formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 when viewed from the front. In addition, as such an accessory, for example, a white accessory such as the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered with the colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. Even with such a configuration, the white grass substrate 6420 that is exposed or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a prevents the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 from It is possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

In the rabbit role product 6000 shown in FIG. 144, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the face cover portion 6010 when viewed from the front. Such an aspect may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400 described above. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is housed in the front grass cover 6440 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the grass rear cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400 . In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is housed in the rear grass cover 6460 when viewed from the front. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates having a flower-like shape are provided so that each substrate does not overlap the rear surface of the front cover 6440 and the front surface of the front cover 6460 in a front view. Each substrate may be attached so as to be completely housed in the cover 6440 or the rear cover 6460 . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to achieve decoration by combining the substrate and the front grass cover 6440 or by combining the substrate and the rear grass cover 6460 . Note that, in other examples, such a configuration may also be employed when providing the substrate and the cover.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of accessories are provided in the space. Among these accessories, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the back grass role are located close to the back side of the game panel 1100. 6800 is provided. These are visible through the game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and have the function of decorating the rear surface of the game panel 1100 .

The first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree role 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Specifically, it consists of a first giant tree role 6600 positioned on the left side of the back of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree role 6650 positioned on the right side of the back of the game panel 1100 . The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 . The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is a brown printed board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is a green printed board. A plurality of LED light sources are arranged on the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and these light sources are oriented rightward. The second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 . The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is a brown substrate, and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 is a green substrate. A plurality of LED light sources are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6680, and these light sources are oriented leftward. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. However, for each of these substrates, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 131(A) to 143(G) may be adopted.

The first cloud object 6700 and the second cloud object 6750 are provided so as to cover the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Each of the first cloud object 6700 and the second cloud object 6750 is composed of a white printed circuit board. For each of these substrates, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 131(A) to 143(G) may be adopted.

A first giant tree leaf board 6630 forming a first giant tree role 6600 and a second giant tree leaf board 6680 forming a second giant tree role 6650 are arranged from the end of the game panel 1100 into the game area 5a and further into the game area. It is configured to be continuously visible to the player over the panel opening 1100a. In addition, the second cloud role object 6750 is configured to be continuously visible to the player from the outside of the game area 5a to the inside of the game area 5a and further to the game panel opening 1100a.
On the other hand, the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 forming the first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 forming the second giant tree role 6650 are arranged to overtake the game board side effect display device 1600 in the upper left and upper right. , and is configured so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look square. The mountain role 6500 is also provided so as to overtake the lower left and lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look square. Further, the mountain role 6500 is provided at the position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the various roles provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

FIG. 146 shows the back grass accessory 6800. FIG. The back grass accessory 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the bottom of the back surface of the game panel 1100 .
The back grass accessory 6800 is composed of a back grass substrate 6820 and a back grass front cover 6840 . The board back grass front cover 6840 is preferably made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and more specifically, preferably made of a green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the back grass substrate 6820 and the back grass front cover 6840, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 131(A) to 143(G) is adopted. It may be configured to
Similarly, the structure related to the rear cover 6460 may be adopted for the back grass accessory 6800 .

In the board back grass accessory 6800, a passing portion for passing game balls that have entered a prize winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 located on the front side and passed through the opening provided on the game panel 1100. A circular weed substrate opening 6824 and a weed front cover opening 6848 having a circular shape are provided. A game ball that has passed through the back grass substrate opening 6824 and the back grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the back grass accessory 6800 . In addition, sensors for detecting game balls are attached to the lower side of each passing portion and to the rear surface of the back grass substrate 6820 . With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the existence of the sensor. As shown below, the back grass substrate first opening portion 6824a to the back grass substrate fourth opening portion 6824d serve as the back grass substrate opening portion 6824, and the back grass substrate front cover opening portion 6848 serves as the back grass front cover opening portion 6848. A first opening portion 6848a to a fourth opening portion 6848d in front of the board back grass front cover are provided.

The back grass board first opening 6824a and the back grass front cover first opening 6848a are circular with the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping each other in the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front. Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the back grass front cover first opening 6848a and moves to the back surface of the game panel 1100. to pass through.

The back grass substrate second opening 6824b has a front surface not covered with the front grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passing portion for allowing a game ball to pass directly through the exposed back grass substrate 6820.例文帳に追加

The board back grass front cover second opening 6848b does not have the board back grass substrate 6820 positioned behind it, and constitutes a passing part for directly passing game balls only by the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b. are doing. In this example, the back grass substrate 6820 has a shape that follows the contour of the bottom of the back grass front cover second opening 6848b. By adopting such a configuration, while the shape of the back grass substrate 6820 is made into a decorative outer shape, a passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the back grass front cover second opening 6848b to the sensor located below. can be made as difficult to see as possible.

The back grass board third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c are circular with the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping each other in the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front. Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass board third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c and moves to the back of the game panel 1100. to pass through. In this example, two elliptical regions are formed in the back weed front cover 6840 above the passing portion formed by the back weed substrate third opening 6824c and the back weed front cover third opening 6848c. By doing so, it is possible to visually recognize a decorative shape that imitates a rabbit's head. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the

The back weed substrate fourth opening 6824d and the back weed front cover fourth opening 6848d have the same size and shape, and are shaped like two elliptical portions protruding from the upper part of a circular outer shape. None. Moreover, these are provided in the position which overlaps with front view in the back grass accessory 6800. As shown in FIG. Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass board fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d, and moves to the back of the game panel 1100. to pass through. In this example, the shapes themselves of the back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c are configured to be visible as decorative shapes imitating a rabbit's head. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the

In addition, it is preferable that a cylindrical member formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged in the passage portion through which the game ball passes so that the game ball can pass through. In addition, it is preferable that the cylindrical member is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the synthetic resin is the same as that of the back grass front cover 6840 or the same color as that of the back grass substrate 6820 . With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the cylindrical member inconspicuous, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 is impaired. .

The first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the back grass role 6800 are attached to the front of the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. It is located behind the game panel 1100 in a manner straddling the rail member 5950 that is mounted. As a result, each accessory can be visually recognized as a decoration without being conscious of the presence of the rail member 5950 . Note that the rail member 5950 as a whole may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be composed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, at least one of which may be composed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of each accessory located behind is improved, and the range in which decoration is performed can be expanded. Also, the rail member 5950 may be made of a synthetic resin of the same color as the accessories positioned behind. For example, when the back grass accessory 6800 is green and visible, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front may be made of green transparent synthetic resin.

When the game ball hit into the game area 5a is charged, discharge occurs at an unintended place, and the high voltage causes electronic parts to malfunction, or the electromagnetic pulse generated by the discharge causes the control element to malfunction unintentionally. There is a risk of control. In particular, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the backside grass role 6800 are provided with printed circuit boards on which electronic components are mounted. When objects are provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the possibility of such a situation occurring in the electronic components mounted on these substrates becomes higher.

Therefore, in the case of these accessories having a front cover, at least a part of the front cover may be provided with a silver-colored opaque portion formed of the metal thin film described above. More specifically, it is preferable to provide the front cover so that the opaque portion is located in front of the portion where the electronic component is mounted on the substrate. Further, each accessory may be provided so that the front surface of each accessory, which may be affected by such charged game balls, does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Alternatively, at least in the area overlapping the game area 5a where the charged game ball rolls and falls when viewed from the front, each character is provided so that the front surface of each character does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. may be configured.

Further, it is desirable that the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 and the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided for each accessory be separated as much as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 is finally installed on the island facility via a ground circuit provided for each role, or conversely, the ground wire for each role is provided on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to have the island facility finally installed via a ground circuit that is connected to the ground. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a ground circuit board having a static elimination function at a predetermined location on the back surface of the game machine so that the ground path from the game panel 1100 and the ground path from each accessory join on the ground circuit board. . With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of a charged game ball hit into the game area 5a.

118 and 126 show an example in which the grass role 6800 is provided on the lower side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Instead of the grass role 6800 behind the board, a mountain role 6500, a rabbit role 6000, and a stump role are shown. The object 6100 may be arranged below the back surface of the game panel 1100 . In this case as well, the light diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward again to increase the light utilization efficiency. By utilizing the reflection function of the mountain board 6520, another decorative accessory or a prize winning opening unit having a winning opening may be arranged in front of the mountain role in the same manner as the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100. can be configured to In this case also, the light emitted from the light-emitting part provided in the decorative accessory or the prize-winning unit and diffusely reflected backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520 .

In addition, by providing a plurality of cylindrical spacers on the back surface of the front cover that constitutes these accessories, the front surface of the substrate contacts the top of the spacers and does not directly contact the back surface of the front cover. You may As the structure of each spacer, specifically, a cylindrical structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm vertically from the rear surface of the front cover may be adopted. Also, the spacer and the front cover are preferably integrally molded from the same material. Further, when the front cover has a plurality of regions, the spacers are preferably arranged in regions where it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side. For example, the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover may be molded integrally with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes green and transparent.
Further, in this case, it is preferable that the colored transparent portion is not provided with the spacer and the colored light scattering portion is provided with the spacer. By providing the spacer having such a configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged parallel to each other while being separated by the height of the spacer. With such a configuration, the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated with the front cover, and the substrate is decorated at a position several millimeters behind the front cover. At this time, compared with the case where the board is decorated at the part closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board is located at the rear, so that the decoration effect by the color of the board and the external shape of the board is exhibited. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the presence of through holes and electronic parts provided on the board. Further, by separating the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the substrate, it is possible to reduce the influence of the electric discharge from the charged game ball and the electromagnetic pulse on the substrate.

The back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750 are provided close to the back side of the game panel 1100. . Specifically, it is arranged on the front side of the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100 . In addition, in the space between the back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750 and the game board side effect display device 1600 is provided with a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 as movable accessories. It should be noted that the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 may be provided below the game panel 1100 where the grass role 6800 is provided.

The first giant tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750, which do not have a front cover, are configured so that a light emitting part is provided on the front surface of the board. In that case, a scattering section may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 overlapping the light emitting section in front view to scatter the light emitted from the light emitting section. Alternatively, in these accessories, even if a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting part when viewed from the front, the scattering part is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may

127 to 130 show an example in which the stump accessory 6100 is provided, but the members forming the stump accessory 6100 may be configured to be movable as a presentation. For example, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that constitute the stump box portion 6300 may be configured to be movable as a presentation.

FIGS. 147(A) to 147(D) show that, in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 129(A) and 130(A), the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are moved from their standby positions. It is the figure which showed the state moved to the position. FIG. 147(A) shows an example in which the box top wall 6310 is moved backward until the front end of the box top wall 6310 contacts the top of the box rear wall 6350 . FIG. 147B shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved left and rearward until the front end of the box right wall portion 6320 contacts the right end of the box rear wall portion 6350 . FIG. 147(C) shows an example in which the box bottom wall 6330 is moved rearward until the front end of the box bottom wall 6330 contacts the bottom end of the box rear wall 6350 . FIG. 147(D) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved right rearward until the front end of the box right wall portion 6320 contacts the left end of the box rear wall portion 6350 . Note that only one of the box upper wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 may be configured to be movable as shown, and the other walls may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of wall portions among the portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable. For example, all of the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable.

With such a configuration, the stump plate portion 6210, the first grass movable portion 6360, and the second grass movable portion 6370 provided in front of the stump box portion 6300 can be connected to the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. The mode of light irradiation from the light emitting portion 6354b can be changed. For example, in a state before the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box portion 6300, and the stump plate portion 6210 is illuminated in a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, when the box top wall portion 6310 is moved rearward, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not reflected by the box top wall portion 6310, so that the rear wall light is emitted. The light emitted obliquely upward from the portion 6354 travels straight to illuminate the back side of the stump plate portion 6210 . Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the shape of the front surface of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is also illuminated in the area above the front surface of the stump box portion 6300. FIG. By moving the box top wall portion 6310 in this way, it is possible to change the area to be illuminated. Note that even when the box right wall portion 6320 to the box left wall portion 6340 are slid backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the illuminated area is changed corresponding to the moved wall portions. It is possible to

Further, the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction while maintaining its inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIG. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with the front ends. Further, it may be configured to be movable backward from the state shown in FIG. 129(A).

Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rotatable with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350 . For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the side formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable about the side formed by the box rear wall portion 6350 as an axis. By rotating the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 inward, the front surface of the box rear wall portion 6350 can be covered with the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340, or the box can By rotating the right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 outward, the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be in a parallel state. In addition, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box rear wall portion 6350 is formed in the same manner as the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. You may comprise so that rotation is possible with respect to.

An example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 can be moved has been shown, but in the examples shown in FIGS. A rear wall cover 6356 that constitutes the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction in the same manner as the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, the stump opening 6210a can be directly irradiated with the light from the rear wall light emitter 6354 without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. FIG. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, a distance is created between the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially. It becomes possible to illuminate the entire cover 6356 . In the case of adopting such a mode, it is preferable that the regions of the rear wall cover 6356 other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b also serve as scattering portions. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-rear direction, so that a state in which a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and a state in which the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated. may be visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIGS. 130(A) to 130(D), the rear wall plate portion 6380 is provided in a fixed manner, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 in the box described above. Like the rear wall portion 6350, it may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction.

Examples have been shown in which the members that are fixedly provided can be made movable. The second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b may be configured to continue to maintain a predetermined light-emitting mode. As the predetermined light emitting mode, for example, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a or the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b may continue to light, may blink periodically, or may adopt a light-off state in which no light is emitted. You may make it Further, in the case of executing such a light emission mode of continuous lighting or periodic blinking, it may be configured to continuously emit light of the same color. By adopting such a configuration, instead of changing the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 are arranged. By moving such members, it is possible to change the performance mode visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, it is also possible to change the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b during the period from the timing when the movement of the member is started to the timing when the movement of the member is finished. good. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a more complicated presentation mode.

129 and 130, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and other members are moved as an effect. By moving members such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect, a predetermined member that has been moved may be configured to be in the state shown in FIG. 129 or 130 . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the presentation mode visually recognized by the player.

Although an example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move in the left-right direction is shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured not to move. Even with such a configuration, by moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356, the light emission mode of the stump accessory 6100 can be diversified. Also, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured as one member. In this case, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a may be configured as one decoration portion, or may be configured as a plurality of decoration portions. In addition, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a are colored and translucent by a method such as painting or attaching a seal, and when the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is irradiated forward, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a The decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a may be configured to be in a staged state by being illuminated with light.

Further, as described below, the stump accessory 6100 is configured by the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381 without providing the first grass movable portion 6360, the second grass movable portion 6370, and the stump plate portion 6210. can be configured to

FIG. 148 shows an example in which the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided in front of the stump box portion 6300, and a fixed grass plate portion 6381 is provided in place of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. is shown. The grass plate portion is preferably made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the grass plate portion 6381 has a plurality of decorative portions. Specifically, the grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a imitating the outline shape of grass, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a imitating the shape of an animal's face, the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, It has a grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, a grass plate left decoration portion 6382e, and a colorless and transparent grass plate colorless and transparent portion 6381b which is an area other than these. The colored transparent grass plate 6381a, the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e are each made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It is constructed by attaching a print or a seal to the front or rear surface of the grass plate portion 6381 to be constructed. The grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is linearly formed in the shape of an animal's face and ears, so that the rear wall substrate 6352 positioned behind can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e have a shape imitating an animal's face, and are translucent or colored transparent through which light can pass. is configured to

In such a configuration, members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved as described above. By doing so, it is possible to change the lighting mode of the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e. In particular, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e were irradiated with light from a state in which they had hardly been irradiated until then. The shape can be changed in various ways, and the shape imitating the face of each animal can be configured to be visually recognizable to the player.

The stump box portion 6300 is a box-shaped box having a box top wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, a box bottom wall portion 6330, a box left wall portion 6340, and a box rear wall portion 6350, and having no front facing surface. Although shaped, at least one of these members may be configured to vary in position, size, or shape.

FIG. 149 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are rectangular with the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350 , and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350 . By providing the stump box 6300 at right angles, the stump box 6300 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the stump board 6210 is not provided, and the grass plate 6381 is positioned in front of the opening of the stump box 6300. are doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 By configuring to rotate or slide in the front-rear direction, it is possible to change the irradiation mode of the light emitted from the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 to the grass plate portion 6381 . Further, in accordance with the cuboid shape of the stump box portion 6300, the right grass plate decoration portion 6382c is moved to the left side, and the left grass plate decoration portion 6382e is moved to the right side, compared with the example shown in FIG. position.

150 to 152 show modifications of the example shown in FIG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 150 to 152, the shape of the box rear wall portion 6350 and the manner of mounting are different.
In the example shown in FIG. 150(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided at a position that is half shifted leftward when viewed from the front. FIG. 150(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 150(A).

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 151(A), the entire box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be doubled in length in the front view. FIG. 151(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 151(A). FIG. 153(A) is a view showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 151(A). FIG. 153(B) is a diagram showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 151(A).

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 152(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be reduced to half its size in the front view. FIG. 152(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 152(A). FIG. 153(C) is a view showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 152(A). FIG. 153(D) is a diagram showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 152(A).

On this premise, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b provided in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 130(B), 153(A), and 153(B)), the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e are illuminated from behind. It becomes possible to Here, by moving the box top wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to bring the grass plate top decorative portion 6382b into the luminous decorative state. On the other hand, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light irradiated is reduced. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320 and the box bottom wall portion 6330 are moved backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c and the grass plate bottom decorative portion 6382d are brought into the luminous decoration state. can do. Although an example in which both the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are caused to emit light has been shown, in the example shown in FIG. The protruding region may be configured not to emit light. In this case, only the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be brought into the luminous decorative state. From this state, as described above, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box bottom wall portion 6330 may be moved rearward.

In addition, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b (see FIGS. 153C and 153D for details) provided in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIG. In this state, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be in a light-emitting decorative state in which it is illuminated from behind. Here, by moving the box top wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to bring the grass plate top decorative portion 6382b into the luminous decorative state. On the other hand, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light irradiated is reduced. When the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are moved backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c and the grass plate bottom decorative portion 6382d and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e can be brought into the luminous decorative state.

In this way, in the state where the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is decorated with light, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 backward, The upper plate decoration portion 6382b, the right grass plate decoration portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decoration portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decoration portion 6382e can be brought into the luminous decoration state. Also, at this time, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is in the luminous decorative state with a weaker amount of light than before. In this way, by setting the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decoration portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decoration portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decoration portion 6382e into the luminous decoration state, a certain state of the game machine is suggested or notified. It may be configured as For example, when four states with different degrees of advantage for the player are occurring or are in a state that can occur, the grass board top decoration portion 6382b is set to the light emitting decoration state corresponding to the most advantageous state, and the second most advantageous state. The right grass plate decorative portion 6382c is set to the luminous decoration state corresponding to the most favorable state, the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e is set to the luminous decoration state to correspond to the third most favorable state, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e to the fourth most favorable state. The lower grass board decorative portion 6382d may be configured to be in the light emitting decorative state. By adopting such a mode, it becomes possible for the player to have a sense of anticipation as to which wall portion will move in the state where the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a is decorated with light.

Alternatively, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are turned off, and the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is not decorated with light. , the box bottom wall portion 6330, or the box left wall portion 6340 is moved backward, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are set to the light emitting state. good. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to know which of the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e can be visually recognized. It is possible to notify in advance. In this case, each wall is set upright with respect to the front direction, and the player cannot necessarily notice that each wall has moved. Therefore, the player who can notice the movement of one of the wall parts watches the subsequent change of the one of the decoration parts to the luminous decoration mode with a great sense of anticipation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

Further, for example, in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (so-called normal game state, etc.), the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are set to the front position (non-operating position), and the front grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is set. Only the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion is limited to the shipping decoration mode, and only when the state is advantageous for the player (for example, the probability fluctuation state, the time-saving game state, the jackpot game state). 6340 may be moved backward to irradiate the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b to the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e with light, thereby increasing the area of the luminous decorative mode. As a result, the appearance of the light-emitting area can be changed according to the interest of the player who improves by shifting from a disadvantageous game state to an advantageous game state.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 150(A) and 152(A), the opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall 6350. It may be configured such that the moving decorative member appears and disappears from the opening.

With reference to FIGS. 150(A) to 153(D), an example is shown in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is displaced to the left or expanded or contracted. It may also be configured to be shifted in the same way, or to be provided by enlarging or reducing it. Further, the structure of the stump box portion 6300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 129, and the example shown in FIG. 130 may be adopted.

129 to 130 show an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided with the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. ∼ At least one wall portion of the left wall portion 6340 of the box may be provided with a configuration related to light emission such as a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion.

Specifically, in the modification shown with reference to FIGS. 148(A) to 153(D), the box upper wall portion 6310 includes the light emitting portion and the light scattering portion described with reference to FIGS. may be provided to illuminate the interior of the stump box section 6300 and the grass plate section 6381 . At this time, at least one of the box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, and box left wall 6340 is moved backward as shown in FIGS. should be configured to By adopting such a configuration, in the grass plate portion 6381, only the front region corresponding to the opening of the stump box 6300 is mainly illuminated, and in addition to the front of the opening of the stump box 6300, It is also possible to illuminate the right side, the lower side, and the left side. An example in which the box top wall portion 6310 is provided with a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300 has been shown, but instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320 is provided. , the box bottom wall portion 6330 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be provided with a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion so that the lighting mode can be changed by moving each wall portion.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are each configured as a plate having the same thickness. A structure in which the inner wall of the wall portion is slanted toward the outside may be employed so that the thickness of the wall portion is reduced. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further reflect the light reflected in the stump box section 6300 forward.

In order to move the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 and change the light irradiation mode to the grass plate portion 6381 as described above, the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are colored and opaque. or by plating the inner wall with an aluminum thin film to provide a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light and a scattering portion capable of scattering light. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode in which the light irradiation mode to the grass board portion 6381 changes more conspicuous. Even when the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are formed of a colorless transparent or colored transparent material, and the inner wall and outer wall thereof are made smooth, the light irradiation state to the grass plate portion 6381 changes. It is possible to let

As described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be deformed so as to be movable. Alternatively, any plurality of members may be movable, or all members may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall portion 6310 may be movable, and the other members may be fixed and immovable. Alternatively, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 may be movable, and the other members may be fixed and immovable. . Further, all of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the lighting decoration mode for the grass board portion 6381 .

The movement of the box top wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and the like may be performed by driving means (not shown) by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Also, it is preferable that the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, and the like.

118 to 153, various movable bodies (rabbit character 6000, stump character 6100, etc.) used for presentation and decoration on the game board 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1 are hereinafter referred to as movable bodies in the game board. ) has been shown, below, a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) used for presentation and decoration with respect to the door frame 3 provided in the pachinko machine 1.
) is provided.

154(A) to 154(E) show a door frame top unit 570 that constitutes the door frame 3 and a right ear frame movable body 7100 imitating the ears of an animal (specifically, a rabbit) as a frame movable body. An embodiment in which a left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are movable in the vertical direction, and specific structures and operation modes will be described later.

154(A) and 154(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 154(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 154(D) and 154(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 154(A), 154(C), and 154(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 154(B) and 154(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 project upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. FIG. 154(D) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 .

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided above the door frame 3 . A glass unit 190 is provided in the central part of the door frame 3. Through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located behind, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board are displayed. (rabbit character 6000, stump character 6100, etc.) can be visually recognized. A plate unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided below the door frame 3 . In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has an operation button 410, and can receive an operation input by the player. In the figure, illustration of the upper tray 321, the lower tray 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, etc. is omitted.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its upper surface, right side surface and left side surface correspond to the upper surface, right side surface and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 constituting the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. They are provided so as to overlap when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of a white translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of several millimeters and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to a vertically movable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a door corresponding to a vertically movable left ear frame movable body 7200. and a left ear opening 7010 on the frame top unit.

As shown in FIGS. 154(A) to 154(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. there is Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 basically have the same structure, only right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative in the following description.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. ing. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is composed of a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 is provided. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are outside the right ear frame movable body first surface. It is made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114 . The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112 in a front view. Further, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 in a front view. The light-emitting part 7116 inside the right ear frame movable body is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated with a white protective film on both sides, and a light-emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on its surface. It is The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and can emit light forward in a predetermined light emitting manner. The movable body inner light emitting part 7116 can light-embellish the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7112, and the right ear frame movable body outer first surface light emitting part 7118 can light-embellish the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7114. is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. 154(B) and 154(E) from the standby position (first state) in the door frame top unit 570, vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) protruding to the side. The upper surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. It is The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal's ear, and project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the state of moving.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several millimeters. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 154(A), when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are accommodated in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame movable body 7116 When the movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly illuminated. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it in the state where it is held. The same structure may be adopted for the door frame top unit 570 in other embodiments. The light is reflected and scattered within the unit 570, and the front and side surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 can be vaguely illuminated for the player to see.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, and the left ear frame movable body When the movable body inner light emitting part 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part of the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 7112, the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114, the left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7212 of the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210, and the left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7214 can be visually recognized by the player in a predetermined lighting effect state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body), a part of the frame movable body moves from the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is located above the top surface, the area occupied by the player's field of vision when looking up increases, and the volume of the housing appears to have increased, giving the player unprecedented surprises and fun. It is possible to give to

Next, referring to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B), the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the game board side according to the motion mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit). Mode of accepting player's operation, right ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116, right ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118, left ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7216, left ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7218 (hereinafter referred to as frame Shown here is an example of a presentation that combines the light emission mode, etc., of a movable body light emitting section.

155(A) to 156(B) respectively show the operation mode of the movable frame and the display of the simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of a movable frame light emitting unit.

In the time charts shown in FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. 164(A) to 165(B), FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B), and FIGS. 179(A) to 180(B), which will be described later. The same applies to each drawing etc. in which the is modified.

FIG. 155(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 155(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 156(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 156(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period in which operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the manner in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes effective, and the operation instruction display are performed. The start timing and the timing at which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body changes from the light-emitting effect state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body changes from the off state to the light-emitting effect state or the specific light-emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B).

155(A) to 156(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as first state or standby state). In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise at the same time. is started (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. The frame movable body simulated image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 . As for the simulated image of the movable frame, the image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the image simulating the movable left ear frame 7200 rise in accordance with the actual rise of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200. It is dynamically displayed in a manner that The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the rising of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 ends (timing t9). The rise of the image simulating the body 7200 is completed, and after that it continues to be displayed in a mode indicating a stopped state (after timing t9). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete their rising at timing t9 two seconds after starting to rise at timing t7 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or rising state). Become.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light-emitting sections are turned off from the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 155(A) and 155(B) show the effects when the operating section is operated at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operating section is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 155(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operating unit is operated (timing t14), the light emitting unit of the movable frame changes from the off state to the normal state. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the light emission effect state. In this way, when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the specific light-emitting effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win.

On the other hand, FIG. 155(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost. It will be in a light emitting state. In this way, the movable frame body light-emitting portion is brought into the normal light-emitting effect state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In the specific lighting effect state, compared to the light emitting state in the normal lighting effect state, the flashing state of the light becomes faster, the amount of light becomes stronger, and the number of colors increases, so that the player feels more stimulation. It is preferable to employ a light emission mode. In this way, the special lottery result indicates a big win to the player by allowing the player to visually recognize the effect state of the specific light emission mode which is different from the normal state. Specifically, in the specific lighting effect state, the inner portion of the movable frame body and the outer portion of the movable frame body may be set to the light emitting state in different manners. For example, the inner portion of the movable frame body may be configured to be visually recognizable in a more irritating light emission mode than the outer portion of the movable frame body. It should be noted that this definition of the specific light-emitting effect state and the normal light-emitting effect state may be applied to other embodiments.

In FIGS. 156A and 156B, after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, This shows an effect mode when the operation effective period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined period of time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 156(A) shows a production pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light-emitting part emits specific light different from the normal light-emitting production state. It is in the production state. In this way, when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the specific light-emitting effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win.

On the other hand, FIG. 156(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the light emitting part of the frame movable body enters a normal light emitting effect state. . In this way, the light-emitting portion is brought into the normal light-emitting effect state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the effective period of operation, the varying decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 155(A) and 156(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production patterns shown in FIGS. 155(B) and 156(B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) is displayed. ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves to the raised position (the second state) while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. ) to the retracted position (first state). At the same time, the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed in such a manner that it descends in accordance with the actual downward movement of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200 . At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the movable frame body to the retracted position is completed, the simulated image of the movable frame body changes to a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent movement of the movable frame body. Display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the light emission state of the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

157(A) to 157(C) show the moving state of the frame movable body, the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, and the reception of the operation unit when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 155(A) is executed. 4 schematically shows changes in the state, the state of the operation instruction display, and the light emitting state of the frame movable body with the lapse of time. As described above, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 155(A) is the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a big hit.

FIG. 157(A) shows the state at timing t5, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the frame movable body is in the retracted position (first state) in the normal light emitting state, The frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 157(B) shows the state at timing t8, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting state from the retracted position (first state) to the raised position (second state). The simulated image of the movable frame is a display simulating a state during movement from the retracted position (first state) to the raised position (second state), and the operation section is disabled. It is a period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 157(C) shows the state at timing t11, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the movable frame is in the off state and in the raised position (second state), and the simulated image of the movable frame is A display simulating the frame movable body positioned at the raised position (second state) is provided, and an operation valid period is started in the operation section, and an image simulating the operation section is displayed as an instruction display as an operation instruction display. ing.

FIG. 158(A) shows the state at timing t19, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the special lighting effect state, and the frame movable body is simulated. The image is displayed simulating the raised position (second state), the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 158(B) shows the state at timing t23, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a grid mode (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) in the special lighting effect state, and the simulated image of the frame movable body moves from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position ( The display simulates the state during movement to the first state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 158(C) shows the state at timing t28, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a grid mode (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is located at the retracted position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed. .

In this way, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame at the timing when the movable frame starts to move, it is possible to change the lighting mode according to the operation of the movable frame and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the In addition, the movable frame body appears at a position not conventionally available in response to the result of the special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect), so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. In addition, by changing the light emission mode of the movable frame light-emitting section when the player operates the operation section, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he/she has decided the result of the special lottery. becomes.

FIGS. 159(A) to 159(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 154(A) to 154(E). 159(A) and 159(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 159(C) and 159(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 159(E) and 159(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 159(A), 159(C), and 159(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. showing. 159(B), 159(D), and 159(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159(C) and 159(E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), and the front side A right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided on the sides, and when viewed from the right side, the right ear frame movable body rotates by 90 degrees counterclockwise. 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 move from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 160(A) to 160(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 159(A) to 159(F). 160(A) and 160(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 160(C) and 160(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 160(E) and 160(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 160(A), 160(C), and 160(E) show the state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 160(B), 160(D), and 160(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 160(C) and 160(E), the movable frame body has a rotation shaft on the back side, and rotates clockwise by 90 degrees when viewed from the right side. As a result, the movable frame body moves from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 161(A) to 161(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 154(A) to 154(E). 161(A) and 161(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 161(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 161(D) and 161(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 161(A), 161(C), and 161(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 161(B) and 161(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the upper portion of the movable frame is visible in the front view in the standby state (first state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this way, in the standby state, a part of the movable frame body is visible in a front view, so that the player can be reminded that the movable frame body will move. Also, during a normal game, only the right ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7118 and the left ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7218 are set to the normal light emission effect state, and only when the specific light emission effect state is set, the inside of the right ear frame movable body is set. The light emitting portion 7116 and the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7216 may also be configured to emit light. Also, a similar light emission pattern may be adopted in a movable frame body having another structure.

FIGS. 162(A) to 162(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 161(A) to 161(E). 162(A) and 162(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 162(C) and 162(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 162(E) and 162(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 162(A), 162(C), and 162(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 162(B), 162(D), and 162(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing.

In this embodiment, in the standby position (first state), the left and right movable frame bodies are adjacent to each other, and the upper part of the movable frame body is visible in a front view. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the upper both ear openings 7040 of the door frame top unit. In addition, the movable frame bodies are configured to be movable upward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the state of moving to the movement position (second state), it becomes visible to the player in the same state as in FIG. 154(B). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

163(A) to 163(E) show another embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 is provided with a frame movable body. In this embodiment, the frame movable body is rotatable, and the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

163(A) and 163(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 163(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 163(D) and 163(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 163(A), 163(C), and 163(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 163(B) and 163(E) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 163(A) and 163(D) as viewed from the right. It shows a state in which it is rotated by 90 degrees and protrudes upward from the door frame top unit 570 .

The door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin, and in the housed state shown in FIG. configured to be invisible. On the other hand, when the player views the door frame top unit 570 obliquely from above, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized as shown in FIG. 163(C).

As shown in FIGS. 163(A) to 163(E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 . The shape of the door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and the door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, in the door frame top unit 570, there are a door frame top unit right light emitting portion 7050 that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a door frame top unit left light emitting portion 7052 that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200. is provided. Except for these points, the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment basically has the same structure as the structure described with reference to FIGS. 154(A) to 154(E). .

As shown in FIGS. 163(A) to 163(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. there is Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 basically have the same structure, only right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative in the following description.

Figures 163(A), 163(C), and 163(D) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 is in the retracted state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, with the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body facing downward and the second surface of the right ear frame movable body facing upward. 7120. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is composed of a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 is provided. On the other hand, the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body is entirely made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the first surface outer decorative portion 7114 of the right ear frame movable body 7114 . The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 . Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 is attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . The right ear frame movable body 7100 can rotate about the horizontal direction as an axis by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 having a similar structure, and power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is applied to the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft. By being transmitted to 7240, it is possible to rotate around the horizontal direction. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are independently controlled by pulse motors (not shown) to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle when viewed from the right. , and can be stopped at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 163(A) to 163(E), in the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit right light emitting section 7050 for illuminating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is provided. The right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is installed in a state rotated clockwise by about 30 degrees from the horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated with a white protective film on both sides. A light emitting diode capable of emitting light to the first surface 7110 is mounted on the top surface. By causing the light-emitting diode to emit light in a predetermined color, the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body can be made to have a predetermined light-emitting effect. The left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. The door frame top unit 570 can be stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle from the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 . Fig. 163(B) and Fig. 163(E) are examples, in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right from the retracted state, and are positioned vertically. In this state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face the front and stop. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal's ear, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and vertical from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking the above, it is possible to express the state of the animal's ears standing up decoratively.

In addition, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized by the player in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. is. When rotating in this manner, it is preferable to rotate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 multiple times in the same direction at a speed of about one rotation per second. It can also be said that FIGS. 163(B) and 163(E) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating. The directions of rotation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right, or to rotate counterclockwise a plurality of times viewed from the right. It may be configured as With such a configuration, the first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame and the second surface 7120 of the movable right ear frame are alternately visible to the player. Also, the first surface 7210 of the movable left ear frame and the second surface 7220 of the movable left ear frame are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, and light is emitted from the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. Although it has been described that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into a predetermined decorative state by light, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 163(A), 163(C), and 163(D), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear of the left ear frame movable body 7200 With the first surface 7210 of the movable frame facing downward, when light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the inside of the door frame top unit 570 By the light reflected by , the entire door frame top unit 570 can dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. In the state where the first surface 7210 faces forward, when light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light illuminates the right ear frame movable body. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body are decorated. In this case as well, part of the light emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is emitted to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Since the reflected light illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly dim state.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated and light is emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light is emitted. The light alternately illuminates the first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame, the second surface 7120 of the movable right ear frame, and the first surface 7210 of the movable left ear frame and the second surface 7220 of the movable left ear frame. state. In addition, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly faint light emitting state.

In this manner, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned above the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 in a stopped state or rotated. When the player looks up, the area occupied by the field of vision is increased, and the housing looks as if the volume of the housing has increased, so that it is possible to provide the player with unexpected surprises and amusement.

Next, referring to FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B), a specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the game board side according to the motion mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit). An example of an effect combining a player's operation reception mode, a light emission mode of the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. is shown.

164(A) to 165(B) respectively show the operation mode of the movable frame and the display of the simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light irradiation mode for a frame movable body.

FIG. 164(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 164(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operating unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operating unit is valid. there is FIG. 165(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 165(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), and display of the frame movable body simulated image. The mode, the timing at which operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the movable frame body changes from the rotating state (second state) to another state, and the light irradiation state of the movable frame body from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state The timing may differ depending on the production pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B).

164(A) to 165(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). 163(A), 163(C), and 163(D). The body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at timing t9. , the rotation is started at the same time, and a state in which the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. The frame movable body simulated image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 . As for the simulated image of the movable frame, the image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the image simulating the movable left ear frame 7200 are the same according to the actual rotation of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200. It continues to be displayed dynamically in a rotating manner. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also set to rotate at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the frame movable body (the speed of one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a rotated state facing the front as shown in FIGS. The image imitating the frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also the image imitating the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7110 of the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body. An image simulating the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 included in the image simulating the frame movable body 7200 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as a frame movable body simulated image in a front facing manner.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the movable frame body, change from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 164(A) and 164(B) show effects when an operation is performed on the operation unit at timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the movable frame body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery, and light is directed to the movable frame body. The lighting mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 164(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the surface 7110 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 on the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state). Become. At the same time, the lighting mode of light to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 164(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loser. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the second surface 7120 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the second surface 7220 on the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a fourth state) ). At the same time, the illumination state of the light for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

165(A) and 165(B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, This shows an effect mode when the operation effective period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined period of time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The illumination mode of the light to the is set to a predetermined light emission performance state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 165(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. The left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 facing forward (third state). At the same time, the lighting mode of light to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 165(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. The left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 facing forward (fourth state). At the same time, the illumination state of the light for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the effective period of operation, the varying decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 164(A) and 165(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production pattern shown in FIG. 164(B) and FIG. 165(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is loosing (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the right ear frame movable body maintains either the specific lighting effect state or the normal lighting effect state. A state in which the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body face forward (third state), or a state in which the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body and the second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body face forward. The state is changed from the facing state (fourth state) to a state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the lighting state of the light to the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the timing when the movable frame body changes from the waiting state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the second state). In addition, in response to the result of the special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect), the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. . In addition, when the player operates the operation unit, the movable frame stops in a predetermined stop state (third state or fourth state), and the light irradiation mode of the movable frame changes. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he or she decided the result of the special lottery.

FIGS. 166(A) to 166(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 163(A) to 163(E). 166(A) and 166(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 166(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 166(D) and 166(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 166(A), 166(C), and 166(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 166(B) and 166(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating.

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 respectively have a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240 at their lower portions. Further, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 163(A) to 163(E). Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . Also, the upper halves of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned higher than the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 .

In the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face each other. positioned. On the other hand, in the rotated state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates clockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. For example, in FIGS. 166(B) and 166(E), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is rotated clockwise in plan view. It can also be said that it shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees. By adopting such a rotation mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is rotated clockwise in plan view. Compared to the case where the frame is rotated around, even if a player or a store clerk carelessly puts their hand or face close to the movable frame body, the hand or face may be dragged behind the machine and injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 167(A) to 167(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 166(A) to 166(E). 167(A) and 167(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 167(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 167(D) and 167(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 167(A), 167(C), and 167(D) show the state (first state) where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 167(B) and 167(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided so as to be perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 has a part that protrudes upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and rear of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. are doing. In addition, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are colored (specifically pink) and transparent. It is made of resin. Further, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of gray opaque synthetic resin. Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 166(A) to 166(E). . By providing a part that covers the movable frame body in this way, even if a player or a store clerk carelessly puts his or her hand or face close to the movable frame body, the hand or face will be hidden behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person is dragged and injured. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 168(A) to 168(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 167(A) to 167(E). 168(A) and 168(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 168(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 168(D) and 168(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 168(A), 168(C), and 168(D) show the state (first state) where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 168(B) and 168(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

In this embodiment as well, a portion of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and rear of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upwardly protruding portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, or the upwardly protruding portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are integrated, and after they move forward, The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to rotate. FIG. 168(D) shows the state before starting forward movement, and FIG. 168(E) shows the state after forward movement is completed.

Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 166(A) to 166(E). .
By providing a part that covers the movable frame body in this way, even if a player or a store clerk carelessly puts his or her hand or face close to the movable frame body, the hand or face will be hidden behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person is dragged and injured. By covering the front portion of the upwardly protruding portion with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, but cannot be touched by a player or a store clerk. It may be configured as

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B). In this case, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be moved forward from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7 to timing t7. It may be performed over timing t9. Further, an image simulating the upwardly projecting portion may be used as the movable frame simulated image, and may be displayed at the timing when the upwardly projecting portion starts to move. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

154 to 156, an embodiment in which the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a movable frame and a simulated image of the movable frame is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. A variation of this embodiment is shown with reference to FIGS. In the embodiments described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200 with A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

169(A) and 169(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 169(C) and 169(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 169(E) and 169(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 169(A), 169(C), and 169(E) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. It shows a state in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is retracted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state). 169(B), 169(D), and 169(F) show, from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, A state in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 169(A) to 169(F), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 basically have the same structure, in the following description, Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be representatively described.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 169(A) to 169(F) and FIGS. 178(A) to 178(E) described later, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are sometimes referred to as frame movable bodies. Also, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are referred to as the inner frame movable body, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are referred to as the outer frame movable body. There is

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body having a rectangular shape elongated in the front-rear direction in a plan view of the housed state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing upward in the housed state (first state) and facing forward in the protruded state (second state), and a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing forward in the housed state (first state). and a second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body facing rearward in the protruding state (second state). The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is made of colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 other than the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 (upper surface, left side, right side, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) are white translucent synthetic resin. formed by The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 has the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 .

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. and a surface 7370 . The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are white translucent. It is made of synthetic resin. The left ear outer frame movable body 7450 has the same structure as the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

Inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 is provided. In addition, inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a square-shaped right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 is provided.

Specifically, the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 are configured by printed circuit boards coated with white protective films on both sides. A light-emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player side in the projected state (second state) is mounted on the surface. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are rotated by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the left ear inner frame movable body. 169(A), 169(C), and 169(E), the door frame top unit 570 is rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right using the shaft 7440 as a rotation axis. 169(B), 169(D), and 169(F) from the state stored in the standby position (first state) upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) protruding to the side.

On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, as shown in FIGS. ), from the state (first state) housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 169(E), to FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) in which the door frame top unit 570 vertically protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown.

A right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 vertically protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. When the state (second state) is reached, as shown in FIG. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is positioned inside and can be visually recognized by the player. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 , a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570 . By taking a stored state (first state) and a state (second state) protruding vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the state in which the animal's ears move can be expressed decoratively. it is possible.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 (first state). It is possible to take a state (second state) projecting vertically upward from the upper surface of the .

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. When it is in the state (second state), it is independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 by the control of the peripheral control board 1510 (first state), and from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 It is possible to change the state to a state of vertically protruding upward (second state).

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169(A), when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7380 When the outer ear frame movable body light-emitting portion 7480 emits light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a dimly lit state.

On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame is movable. When the body light emitting portion 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7480 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear inner frame The movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are visually recognized by the player in a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible to

Note that in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). , the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is positioned to cover the back of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is positioned to cover the back of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. , the light emitted forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light-emitting portion 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light-emitting portion 7480 is emitted from the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 . Even if it faces, the second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body and the second surface 7420 of the left inner frame movable body are diffusely reflected backward, and finally, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the second surface 7420 of the left ear inner frame movable body Since the light is diffusely reflected forward by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body, the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7480 can be increased.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved to move the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is positioned above the upper surface, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprises and amusement compared to the case where the movable body in the game board is moved.

170(A) to 171(B), right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A display mode of a simulated image of a movable frame, which is an image simulating a movable frame, displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to a specific operation mode, an operation mode of the movable frame, and an operation button 410 (hereinafter referred to as an operation button 410). player's operation reception mode for the player's operation on the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330, right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380, left ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7430, left ear outer frame movable body Shown is an example of presentation in which the light emitting modes of the body light emitting section 7480 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body light emitting section) are combined.

FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B) respectively show the operation mode of the movable frame and the display of the simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of a movable frame light emitting unit.

FIG. 170(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 170(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 171(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 171(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

Figure 170 (A) ~ Figure 171 (B) in each production pattern shown, the state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body is retracted to the state (second state) protruded state (second state) timing, the frame movable body The display mode of the simulated image, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the movable frame light emitting unit changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, presence/absence of operation of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light-emitting portion changes from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B).

170(A) to 171(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), the door frame top unit 570 is in a state of being accommodated (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state or standby state). In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 move. It starts to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of a part of the simulated image of the movable frame is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. Specifically, the simulated image of the frame movable body is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body. and an image imitating the frame movable body 7450 . The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear inner frame body 7300 and the movable left ear inner frame body 7400 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 . A simulated image is dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. Of the frame movable body simulated images, the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not yet displayed at this stage. An image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the actual movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends (timing t9). After that, the display of the rotating state of the image simulating ends, and thereafter the display continues in the state of indicating the stopped state (after timing t9). The movable body 7300 of the right ear inner frame and the movable body 7400 of the left ear inner frame start to rise at timing t7, and two seconds later, at timing t9, the rotation is completed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a second state or a raised state). Yes).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light-emitting sections are turned off from the light-emitting effect state.

FIGS. 170(A) and 170(B) show the mode of presentation when an operation to the operation unit is performed at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 170(A) shows a production pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the off state to normal light emission production. It becomes a specific light emission production state different from the state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and two seconds later (timing t16), the rising operation is started. It becomes a completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped state, on the game board side effect display device 1600, As new simulated frame movable body images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the actual upward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From timing t14 to timing t16, the display mode changes from the stored state to the display mode in which the rising operation is completed. In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete the turning motion (the second state), the light-out state changes to the specific light-emission effect state, and the light-out state changes to the specific light emission effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) changes to a state (second state) in which the rising operation is completed. , an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, whereby a special lottery is offered to the player. It will be shown that the result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 170(B) shows an effect pattern when the result of the special lottery is no. It is in the production state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the retracted state (first state), and no operation is performed. In addition, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is given to the player when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the normal light emitting state, or when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a failure.

171(A) and 171(B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, This shows an effect mode when the operation effective period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined period of time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 171(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits specific light different from the normal light emitting effect state. It is in the production state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and two seconds later (timing t16), the rising operation is started. It becomes a completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped state, on the game board side effect display device 1600, As new simulated frame movable body images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the actual upward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From timing t18 to timing t20, the display mode changes from the stored state to the display mode in which the rising operation is completed.

In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed the turning motion (second state), the light-out state changes to the specific light-emission effect state, and the light-out state changes to the specific light emission effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) changes to a state (second state) in which the rising operation is completed. , an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, whereby a special lottery is offered to the player. It will be shown that the result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, FIG. 171(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light-emitting portion becomes the normal light-emitting effect state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the retracted state (first state), and no operation is performed. In addition, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is given to the player when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the normal light emitting state, or when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a failure.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the expiration of the effective period of operation, the varying decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 170(A) and 171(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production patterns shown in FIGS. 170(B) and 171(B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) is displayed. ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t26) when two seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in either a specific light emitting state or a normal light emitting state. It starts moving from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) while maintaining the light emission mode. At the same time, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame among the frame movable body simulated images are displayed in accordance with the actual downward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . An image simulating the movable body 7450 is displayed in a descending manner. At the timing (timing t28) when the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed. The image simulating is in a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the display ends.

At the timing (timing t30) two seconds after the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the retracted position is completed, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame move. The movable body 7400 starts to move from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) while maintaining either the specific light emission state or the normal light emission state. At the same time, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is simulated in the frame movable body simulated image in accordance with the actual downward movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 while rotating. The image and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner of descending while rotating. At the timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the storage positions is completed, the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed. The image simulating is in a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the light emission state of the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this way, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame at the timing when the movable frame starts to move, it is possible to change the lighting mode according to the operation of the movable frame and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the In addition, according to the result of the special lottery, the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. Further, after the inner frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body is moved to the standby state (first State) may or may not change to a moving state (second state), so that the player can feel as if he/she has decided the result of the special lottery. In addition, in a situation where the inner frame movable body first enters the moving state (second state) and the player can notice that it has entered the moving state, the player is requested to operate the operation unit. As a result, the player can operate the operating section while having a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the outer frame movable body will enter the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

FIGS. 172(A) to 172(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 169(A) to 169(F). 172(A) and 172(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 172(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 172(D) and 172(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 172(A), 172(C), and 172(D) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. The state (first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed is shown. 172(B) and 172(E), from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown. A state of protruding upward (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 172(A), 172(C), and 172(D), the door frame top unit 570 is housed in the standby position ( 172(B) and 172(E) to a state in which the door frame top unit 570 vertically protrudes upward from the upper surface (second state). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is positioned corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 is provided on the door frame top unit at the position. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. As shown in FIGS. 161(A) to 161(E), even in the frame movable body of the structure in this embodiment, the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may project from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in the first state.

FIGS. 173(A) to 173(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 172(A) to 172(E). 173(A) and 173(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 173(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 173(D) and 173(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 173(A), 173(C), and 173(D) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, The state (first state) in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored is shown. 173(B) and 173(E), from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown. A state of protruding upward (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 do not move upward, but move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 173(A), 173(C), and 173(D), respectively, from the state (first state) housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, to the state shown in FIG. 173(B). 173(E), the door frame top unit 570 can be controlled to vertically protrude upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 or downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a door frame opening 7000 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is provided. In addition, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the door frame is located at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. A top unit lower left ear opening 7030 is provided.

The movable frame body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, in a state in which it is not clear whether the result of the special lottery will be a big hit or not, the inner frame movable body starts moving downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the result of the special lottery. is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and store clerks. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move. can be reduced. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169(A) to 169(F), the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body express the animal's ears decoratively. In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 173(A) to 173(E), the upwardly projecting outer frame movable body expresses the animal's ears, and the inner frame movable body expresses the animal's eyes. there is

FIGS. 174(A) to 174(E) and FIGS. 175(A) to 175(E) show FIGS. 172(A) to 172(E) and FIGS. 173(A) to 173(E). 4 shows a modification of the frame movable body described above. 174(A), 174(B), 175(A), and 175(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 174(C) and 175(C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 174(D), 174(E), 175(D), and 175(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, each frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). It is possible to take

174(A), 174(C), and 174(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. there is 174(B) and 174(E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), and the outer frame movable body extends upward from the door frame top unit 570. shows a state (first state) projecting downward from the lower surface of the . 175(A), 175(C), and 175(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body shows a state (second state) projecting upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . 175(B) and 175(E) show a state (second state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are driven (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to move to any position from the first state to the second state and stop by the mechanism.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is positioned corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 is provided on the door frame top unit at the position.

In addition, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7022 under the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The door frame top unit second right ear opening 7024 corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7032 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7034 is provided at the position below the door frame top unit.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the production pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

In this case, in a state in which it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will result in a big win, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. (timing t7) and movement is completed at timing t9. FIGS. 174(B) and 174(E) show the state in which the movement of the inner frame movable body is completed. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). . FIGS. 175(B) and 175(E) show the state (second state) in which the movement of the outer frame movable body is completed. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and store clerks. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move. can be reduced.

An example has been shown in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward to enter the second state, and then the outer frame movable body protrudes upward to enter the second state, but the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the outer frame movable body starts to project upward at timing t7. After that, when the movement is completed (timing t9), the states shown in FIGS. 175(A) and 175(D) are obtained. Further, at timing t14 or timing t18, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start moving upward. It may be configured to be able to execute two production patterns in which the order in which the frame movable body operates is reversed. Furthermore, it is better to set the expectation of a big hit in a production pattern in which the outer frame movable body operates first than in a production pattern in which the inner frame movable body operates first, for example, when the outer frame movable body operates first. It may be configured to ensure a big hit.

FIGS. 176(A) to 177(B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 169(A) to 169(F). 176(A) and 176(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 176(C) and 176(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 177(A) and 177(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 176(A), 176(C), and 177(A) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. The state (first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed is shown. FIGS. 176(B), 176(D), and 177(B) show the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear. A state (second state) in which the outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward is shown.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are all controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. When viewed from the right, it is configured to be able to move upward by rotating clockwise by 90 degrees by a non-rotating drive mechanism.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the production pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B), after the inner frame movable body is in the second state, the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In the frame movable body described with reference to 176(A) to FIG. 177(B), the order of movement of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body is reversed, and the outer frame movable body is moved from timing t7 to timing t9. After the state is changed from the first state to the second state in , the inner frame movable body is preferably changed from the first state to the second state at timing t14 or timing t18. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

163 to 165, an embodiment in which the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a movable frame and a simulated image of the movable frame is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. A variation of this embodiment is shown with reference to FIGS. In the embodiments described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200 with A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

178(A) and 178(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 178(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 178(D) and 178(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 178(A), 178(C), and 178(D) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. It shows a state in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is retracted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state). 178(B) and 178(E) show that from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body. 7450 shows a state in which 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 178(A) to 178(E), the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000, a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010, and an inner right side of the door frame top unit. It has a light emitting part 7050 and a left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. The specific structures and functions of these are the same as those with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 178(A) to 178(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 basically have the same structure, in the following description, Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be representatively described.

Figures 178(A), 178(C), and 178(D) show the state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in the retracted state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in plan view, and has a right ear inner frame movable body first face 7310 facing downward and a right ear inner frame movable body first face 7310 facing upward. It has two sides 7320 . The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is made of colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in which the vicinity of the center is hollowed out so as to surround the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in plan view, and the right ear outer frame facing downward. It has a frame movable body first surface 7360 and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 is made of white translucent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

The right inner ear frame movable body 7300 has a right inner ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 on the right side (inner side) in plan view. In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in plan view. In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are positioned on the same axis. In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are powered by a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body. By being transmitted to the rotating shaft 7390, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction as an axis. In addition, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have a left ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7490 having similar structures. Power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the control board 1510 is transmitted to the left ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7490, thereby rotating about the horizontal direction as an axis. Is possible. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are each independently controlled by a pulse motor (not shown), thereby moving from the right. It is possible to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle and to stop at an arbitrary angle.

As shown in FIGS. 178(A) to 178(E), in the door frame top unit 570, the right side of the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is provided. A light emitting part 7050 and a left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit for illuminating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structures of the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. do.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are controlled by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 178(A), 178(C), and 178(D), from the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, to a state of being stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. is possible. Fig. 178(B) and Fig. 178(E) are examples, in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed. From the state, rotate 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right, and in a vertical state, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7360, A first plane 7410 shows a state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first plane 7460 faces the front and stops. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 , a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570 . It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the stored state and the state perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 .

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continuously drive a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible for the player to visually recognize the rotating state by driving it with the . When rotating in this manner, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated at a speed of about one rotation per second. Rotate multiple times in the same direction. 178(B) and 178(E) show the state during rotation of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. It can be said that it shows The directions of rotation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right, or to rotate counterclockwise a plurality of times viewed from the right. It may be configured as With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be stopped or rotated at predetermined positions, and the door frame top unit Right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body Although it has been shown that the bodies 7450 can each be in a predetermined decorative state, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 178(A), 178(C), and 178(D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, Left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 included in left ear inner frame movable body 7400, Left ear outer frame movable body first surface included in left ear outer frame movable body 7450 When light is emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit with the 7460 facing downward, the light reflected in the door frame top unit 570 causes the door to open. It is possible to make the entire frame top unit 570 dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 178(B) and 178(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7350 The frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 face forward. When the light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit in the facing state, the right ear inner frame of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is irradiated with the light. Movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer side It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the frame movable body 7450 is decorated. Also in this case, part of the light emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside. , the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly dim state.

On the other hand, while the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door When light is irradiated from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit, the irradiated light causes the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, and the right ear outer frame movable body. Body first surface 7360, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 The left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 is alternately illuminated.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body are positioned above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since the 7450 is positioned and rotated in a stopped state, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprises and amusement compared to the case where the movable body in the game board is moved. .

179(A) to 180(B), right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ( A frame movable body simulation which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the specific operation mode of the frame movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) The image display mode, the player's operation reception mode for the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit), the light emission mode of the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. An example of combined effects is shown.

Figures 179(A) to 180(B) respectively show the operation mode of the frame movable bodies (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside, and the effect display on the game board side. A display state of a frame movable body simulated image, which is an image simulating the frame movable body provided outside (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) displayed on the device 1600, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image provided on the inside. The operation mode of the frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) and the frame movable body provided inside (right ear inner frame movable body) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The display state of the frame movable body simulation image which is an image simulating the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the reception state of the operation unit, and the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 2 is a time chart showing a display state of , and a light irradiation mode for a movable frame.

FIG. 179(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 179(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 180(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 180(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 179(A) to 180(B), the frame movable body provided on the outside and the frame movable body provided on the inside are changed from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). ), the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the lighting mode of the movable frame from the light emitting state to the extinguished state. The timing of entering the state is the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the movable frame body changes from the second state (rotating state) to another state, and the light irradiation state of the movable frame body from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state The timing may differ depending on the production pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 179(A) to 180(B).

179(A) to 180(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), the door frame top unit 570 is stored in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). 178(C), as shown in FIG. 178(D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer The frame movable body first surface 7460 faces downward. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) between timing t0 and timing t5, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body The first body surface 7460 simultaneously starts rotating at timing t5, and enters a state in which the rotation continues (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or rotating state). The direction of rotation is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the speed of rotation is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. Specifically, the simulated image of the frame movable body is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body. and an image imitating the frame movable body 7450 . The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear outer frame body 7350 and the movable left ear outer frame body 7450 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The rotated image continues to be dynamically displayed while rotating in the same direction. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also rotated at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the outer outer frame movable body (the speed of one rotation per second). to be displayed. As a result, when the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a rotated state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 178(B) and 178(E), The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 possessed by the simulated image or the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is used as a frame movable body simulated image in a state in which the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 faces the game board side effect display device. 1600 is displayed.

After the rotating state (second state) of the outer frame movable body continues from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable body (the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400). start rotating at the same time, and the state in which the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). Since the rotation mode of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of the image simulating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, description thereof is omitted. On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the movable frame body, change from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 179(A) and 179(B) show the effects when the operating section is operated at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operating section is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The lighting mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 179(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface. The surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body are brought to the near side and vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the third state). At the same time, a specific light emitting effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emitting state. state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 179B shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. The movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are formed on the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7370, respectively. The second surface 7420 and the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body are vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

180(A) and 180(B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, This shows an effect mode when the operation effective period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined period of time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The lighting mode of the light to the is set to a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 180(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. The inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right inner ear frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, A state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is on the front side and is vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state) is established. At the same time, a specific light emitting effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emitting state. state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 180(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are displayed. , the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. , the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body is on the front side, and the state is vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In this way, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, each frame movable body stops in the third state to indicate a big win, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, each The frame movable body stops in the fourth state, indicating a failure.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 179(A) to 180(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the valid operation period, the changing decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 179(A) and 180(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 179(B) and 180(B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) is displayed. ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves the frame inside the right ear while maintaining either the specific lighting effect state or the normal lighting effect state. A state in which the body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward (third state) or The state in which the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 face forward ( From the fourth state), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are downward. The state changes to the state facing (first state). At the same time, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the lighting state of the light to the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the timing when the movable frame body changes from the waiting state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the second state). In addition, according to the result of the special lottery, the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. Further, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the inner frame movable body rotates from the standby state (first state) with the start of the operation valid period. state (second state), and when the player operates the operation unit, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body are brought into a third state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win , or the fourth state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he himself decided the result of the special lottery.

FIGS. 181(A) to 181(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 178(A) to 178(E). 181(A) and 181(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 181(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 181(D) and 181(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 181(A), 181(C), and 181(D) show a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (first state) in the standby position is shown. 181(B) and 181(E) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating ( second state).

In this embodiment, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. The body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

In the vicinity of the front end of the door frame top unit, a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit can emit light backward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be brought into a predetermined light emitting state. be.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 179(A) to 180(B). In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame. It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7460 faces the front and stops (third state) as shown in FIGS. 181(B) and 181(E). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body is stopped facing the front (fourth state). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 182(A) to 183(B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 178(A) to 178(E). 182(A) and 182(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 182(C) and 182(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 183(A) and 183(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 182(A), 182(C), and 183(A) show a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (first state) in the standby position is shown. 182(B), 182(D), and 183(B) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The rotating state (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the central portion of the door frame top unit 570 is hollowed out in the left-right direction, and can be visually recognized as a U-shape when viewed from the right side. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are located at the lower part of the door frame top unit 570 hollowed out in the horizontal direction. are provided with a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are placed in the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. The frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 are positioned to face each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape obtained by vertically inverting a bottomed cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical side surface is cut. 182(A), 182(C), and 183(A), in the standby state (first state), in front of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are positioned facing forward, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are positioned facing forward. It is configured to be invisible when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the first state, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are viewed obliquely from below, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame are positioned inside. It is possible to visually recognize the lower part of each movable body 7400 .

In the lower part of the door frame top unit 570 , a right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit can emit light obliquely upward and forward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are positioned obliquely forward and upward, can be brought into a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 179(A) to 180(B). Incidentally, when the special lottery result is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7410 is in a stopped state (third state) facing the front. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 should face the front and stop (fourth state). . On the other hand, for the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the second surface 7370 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the left ear outer frame movable body 7370 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7370 are used regardless of whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a loss. It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the player side. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

Figures 184(A) to 184(D) and Figures 185(A) to 185(B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 154(A) to 154(E). there is 184(A) and 184(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 184(C) and 184(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 185(A) and 185(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 184(A), 184(C), and 185(A) show a state (first state) in which a plurality of movable frame bodies are housed in the standby position. FIGS. 184(B), 184(D), and 185(B) show the state (second state) in which the plurality of movable frame bodies have moved to the movement positions.

In the embodiments described below, instead of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is provided, and a door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, a door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, and a curtain board bottom unit are provided. A right leg movable body 7700 and a curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are provided.

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating a two-member box with a lid, and the right side and left side thereof form the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. It is provided so as to overlap the right side and left side of the door frame base unit 100 in a front view. In addition, the upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is always positioned above the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 consists of a door frame top unit face movable body 7510 corresponding to a lid box to be put on the top of a box composed of two members with a lid, and a lid in a box composed of two members with a lid. and a door frame top unit face lower part 7520 corresponding to the body box on which the door frame is covered.

The door frame top unit face upper movable body 7510 has a lid box shape without a rear side part, is provided so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is installed so as to be vertically movable by a drive mechanism. In addition, on the front side of the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right eye decoration of the door frame top unit, which has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and has a shape imitating the eyes of an animal robot, is provided. A portion 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decoration portion 7514 are provided. The door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 imitating animal ears in the same manner as the door frame top unit 570 . Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be vertically movable.

The door frame top unit face lower part 7520 has a box-like shape with a concave portion capable of accommodating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and is similar to the door frame top unit 570. 3 is provided in a fixed state. Further, the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 includes a door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 .

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower face 7520 near the center in the left-right direction of the front side of the door frame top unit face lower face 7520 . The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but has a box shape with an open bottom like a sliding door of a chest of drawers turned upside down. The door frame top unit face under nose movable body 7522 is movable in the front-rear direction. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is a frame movable body imitating the nose and mouth of an animal robot.

The door-frame top unit under-the-face movable body 7522 is provided so as to be covered with the front-side side portion of the door-frame top unit upper-the-face movable body 7510 . Therefore, in the state (first state) covered by the front side surface portion of the door-frame top unit upper-face movable body 7510, the lower-nose-face movable body 7522 of the door-frame top unit cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 cannot move forward.

When the door-frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 moves upward and enters the second state, the door-frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 provided to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 is changed. The front side surface becomes visible from the front, and the door frame top unit face under nose movable body 7522 becomes movable forward.

The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the bottom face portion of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 . The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is shaped like a circular cylinder cut into a fan shape, and as shown in FIGS. It is provided so that the side forming the central angle is located on the right side. The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 can rotate within a predetermined angle range with the side forming the central angle of the sector as the rotation axis. Further, the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the near side. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 184(B) and 185(B), when the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, The inside is configured to be visible.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 changes from a state (first state) provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520 to a state (second state) moved forward, The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side (first state) from the state (first state) stored in the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520 (first state). 2 state), it is possible to decoratively express the state of an animal robot with its mouth open.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 are provided below the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 so as to protrude forward from the front surfaces of both the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100 . ing.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 is composed of a door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 , a door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 , and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 .

The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 has a box shape with a space inside, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 are movable inside. is. The thickness of the right arm case portion 7610 of the door frame side unit is about several millimeters, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 that move inside can be visually recognized.

The door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is formed in a pipe shape from flexible synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right upper arm part 7620 has a length of about 50 cm. It can be rolled up and down. FIGS. 184(A) and 185(A) show a state (first state) in which the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit is wound up by a reel-shaped driving mechanism (not shown).

The door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is formed of two members in the shape of the letter L when viewed from the side and a cylindrical member imitating a shaft for locking them, imitating a manipulator of a robot. It has a shape. The end of the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit is attached to this cylindrical member, and the upper arm portion 7620 of the right arm of the door frame side unit is wound up by the reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown). In the first state), the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located at the upper part inside the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 .

By rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in a direction opposite to the winding up direction, the door-frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is lowered in the door-frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, whereby the door frame side unit right arm The lower arm portion 7630 is positioned at the lower portion in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 due to its own weight. FIG. 184(B) shows a state (second state) in which the door-frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is positioned at the lower portion within the door-frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 . Note that, in the second state, the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit, which has been invisible until then, becomes visible.

The door-frame side unit left arm portion 7650 has the same structure and function as the door-frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and is bilaterally symmetrical. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 has the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion. The door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630 . Therefore, detailed description of each member constituting the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 is omitted.

As for the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, similarly to the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) (first state). By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism in a direction opposite to the winding direction, it is possible to take a state (second state) positioned at the lower portion. For example, FIGS. 184(B) and 185(B) show a state (second state) in which the left lower arm portion 7680 of the door frame side unit is positioned at the bottom. Note that, in the second state, the left upper arm portion 7670 of the door frame side unit, which was invisible until then, becomes visible.

The whole or part of the outside (left side in front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 and the whole or part of the outside (right side in front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case part 7660 are made of opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, it may be constructed such that a colored and opaque seal or the like is attached after being formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The entire inside (right side in front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 and the entire inside (left side in front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 are preferably made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

With this configuration, the door frame side unit right upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670, and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 move. can be visually recognized by the left and right players, and only the players who are playing the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the game without letting the other players know about the action. In addition, as will be described later, when these movable frame bodies are operated for the purpose of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation, even if the special lottery results are lost after these movable frame bodies are operated, other It becomes difficult for other players to visually recognize the player, and it becomes difficult for other players to feel embarrassed.

The curtain plate member 50 has a curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 on the left side in front view, and a curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 on the right side in front view. The curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby position (first state) as shown in FIGS. They are located below the handle unit 300 respectively.

The curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 is composed of a curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 and a curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 . The shape of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 is cylindrical. In addition, the right foot part 7720 of the curtain plate bottom unit has a cuboid shape that imitates the shape of the foot, and has two circular recesses in the part that corresponds to the sole of the foot. A curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 is attached to the front side surface of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 . Therefore, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 operate integrally.

A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided in the lower portion of the outer frame 2, and the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 can be moved in the front-rear direction. Further, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 can be rotated by a predetermined angle around the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 .

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 is moved forward by a predetermined distance from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. It may be configured to operate in a stopped state (second state) by rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees. FIGS. 184(B) and 185(B) show the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 in the stopped state (second state) in this way.

The curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure and function equivalent to those of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 . Specifically, the panel bottom unit left leg shin portion 7760 has the same structure and function as the panel bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710, and the panel bottom unit left leg tip portion 7770 has the panel bottom unit right leg. It has the same structure and function as tip 7720 . Therefore, a detailed description of each member constituting the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 will be omitted.

By providing the frame movable body under the game machine in this way, the movement of the frame movable body is not visually recognized by the player as in the conventional art, but is performed by a part of the player's body such as an arm. By the contact of the movable frame body, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented perceptual experience of recognizing that the movable frame body has moved.

With reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of frame movable bodies, and an embodiment in which they operate has been described. Specifically, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524. , door frame side unit right upper arm 7620, door frame side unit right lower arm 7630, door frame side unit left upper arm 7670, door frame side unit left lower arm 7680, curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, curtain plate 184(A), 184(C), and 185(A) from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. ), and changes to the state (second state) of the movement position shown in FIGS. 184(D) and 185(B). Further, each frame movable body can take the first state and the second state by controlling a drive means (not shown) provided corresponding to each frame movable body by the peripheral control board 1510. .

Further, each frame movable body may be provided with a light emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the normal light emitting state and the specific light emitting state described above can be established.

155(A) to 156(B), the production patterns shown in FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B), or the production patterns modified from these production patterns. It may be configured to be applied to a pattern to operate or emit light.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided in the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 . The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear in the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 after the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is positioned upward in the second state. The movable frame body 7200 may be configured to protrude upward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B) and their modification examples. Specifically, in each time chart, first, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear The movable frame body 7200 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is in the second state located upward, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is stored in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state). 7522 may be configured to protrude forward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B) and their modification examples. Specifically, in each time chart, first, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 may be configured to transition from the first state to the second state.

In addition, after the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower mouth mouth movable body 7524 is configured to be changed from the first state to the second state. good too. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B) and their modification examples.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state. good too. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B) and their modification examples.

FIGS. 186(A) to 186(K) show modifications of the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame which can be applied to the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). It is a thing. Note that FIG. 186(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B).

FIG. 186(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t4, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is completed at timing t6. After that, at timing t7, the upward movement of the movable frame body is started.

By constructing such an action/display pattern to be executable as an effect, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame becomes an advance notice of the action of the movable frame. In addition, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image enables the player to recognize how the movable frame body operates. The motion of the movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the motion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently touching the movable frame body from injuring his or her fingers. In addition, it is possible to indicate that a player who has placed a light load or the like on the frame movable body should move them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or the driving section for moving the frame movable body is subjected to a load.

FIG. 186(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, the rising motion of the movable frame body is completed at timing t9, then the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is started at timing t10, and the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is started at timing t12. is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the frame movable body to the raised position (moving position). Therefore, if the player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, such a player will suddenly be able to see the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the raised position. can be given to people. Further, since the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed after moving to the raised position, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the movable frame that has moved. Also, the player can know how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 186(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t6, the upward motion of the movable frame body is then started at timing t7, and the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t8. is completed, and the upward movement of the movable frame body is completed at timing t9.

By adopting such a configuration, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame serves as an advance notice of the movement of the movable frame. The player can be made to recognize how the frame movable body operates. The movement of the frame movable body can be visually recognized from the start of movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body injures his finger or the like.

FIG. 186(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, at timing t7, the moving frame movable body starts to move upward, then at timing t8 dynamic display of the movable frame simulated image starts, at timing t9 the moving frame moving body moves upward, and At timing t10, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is completed.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can be surprised when the movable frame body starts to move without realizing it. Also, the player can be notified that the frame movable body has started to move.

FIG. 186(F) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t3 to timing t7 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 186(G) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t5 to timing t9 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 186(H) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the movable frame is raised from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed from timing t9 to timing t13 (4 seconds). will be The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 186(I) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated frame movable body image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed again from timing t7 to timing t9. done. On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed three times or more. For example, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed from timing t3 to timing t5.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame moves.

FIG. 186(J) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed again from timing t9 to timing t11. done. On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed three times or more. For example, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed from timing t11 to timing t13.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame body has moved.

FIG. 186(K) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, a total of three times from timing t4 to timing t5, from timing t5 to timing t6, and from timing t6 to timing t7, which are the timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, are performed. At twice the speed of the frame movable body, the simulated image of the movable frame is changed from the display mode imitating the first state to the display mode imitating the second state. Such display may be performed twice in total from timing t5 to timing t6 and from timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once from timing t6 to timing t7.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame moves in a short period of time. In addition, since the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed quickly, the player's eyes become accustomed to the movement of the actual movable frame, allowing the player to fully enjoy the movement of the actual movable frame. becomes possible. Further, by performing the display a plurality of times, it is possible to make the player more aware of the action mode.

186(A) to 186(K) may be configured to be executed in response to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this case, the degree of expectation for the big win and the appearance frequency thereof may be different for each production pattern. For example, when a predetermined ready-to-win effect occurs, one of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 186(A) to 186(K) is selected and executed. good. 186(A) has the highest appearance frequency, and the appearance frequency gradually decreases with the production patterns explained with reference to FIGS. 186(B) to 186(K). 186(A) has the lowest expectation for the big win, and the expectation for the big win gradually increases as the production pattern explained with reference to FIGS. 186(B) to 186(K) becomes The performance pattern to be executed may be selected based on the result of the jackpot lottery so that the . Further, each modified example described below may be similarly configured to be executed with a predetermined degree of expectation and appearance frequency.

By adopting such a configuration, when a performance pattern about the frame movable body different from the usual one appears, the degree of expectation of the player for the big win is not higher than that of the normal frame movable body performance pattern. It is possible to make it feel like.

It should be noted that some of the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 186(A) to 186(K) may be combined and executed as effects. In this case, in the game board side effect display device 1600, it is preferable to combine so as not to display a plurality of simulated frame movable body images at the same time. For example, the production pattern shown in FIG. 186(K) is executed from timing t4 to timing t7, and the production pattern shown in FIG. 186(J) is executed from timing t7 to timing t11. It is possible to execute a production pattern that can play both.

FIGS. 187(A) to 187(E) show modifications of the light emission mode of the light emitting portion of the frame movable body which can be applied to the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). is shown. Note that FIG. 187(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B).

FIG. 187(B) shows an effect pattern in which the light-emitting section of the movable frame is turned off at the timing (timing t7) when the movable frame starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. Also, in FIG. 187(C), the light-emitting section of the movable frame is turned off at the timing (timing t5) before the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. It shows the performance pattern.

In this way, before the movable frame body enters the second state, the light-emitting section of the movable frame body is turned off, and this state is maintained until the operation section is operated or until the effective period of operation ends. By being maintained, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body is moving from the standby position to the moving position. In such a situation, when the player operates the operation unit, the movable frame that has completed the movement to the movement position suddenly emits light from the extinguished state (special light emitting effect state or light emitting effect state). state), it is possible to give the player a big surprise.

FIG. 187(D) shows an effect pattern in which the light emission of the light emitting unit of the movable frame body is suppressed at timing t9 instead of being turned off. The state in which light emission is suppressed may be, for example, light emission with a longer blinking period or a smaller light amount than in the light emission effect state.

In this way, the same effect as in the case of turning off the light can be obtained by setting the state in which light emission is suppressed instead of turning off the light.

FIG. 187(E) shows an effect pattern in which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body is put into a specific light-emission state instead of being turned off at timing t9. This effect pattern should be selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big win. At timing t9 when the frame movable body enters the second state, an example of a production pattern in which the light-emitting section of the frame movable body is in the specific light emission production state has been shown. At timing t5, which is the timing before the body starts to move, the light-emitting section of the frame movable body may be brought into a specific light-emitting effect state.

By suddenly changing the state of the light-emitting part of the frame movable body to the specific light-emission presentation state instead of turning off the light, the player can have a great sense of anticipation for the big win.

FIGS. 188(A) to 188(E) show modifications of the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame applicable to the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B). It is a thing. Note that FIG. 188(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 164(A) to 165(B).

FIG. 188B is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t7, and thereafter, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) are displayed. starts rotating and enters a rotating state (second state).

As described above, the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at the same speed as the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate. displayed. Therefore, between timing t7 and timing t9, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate twice. , the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually starts rotating. It should be noted that the timing for starting the display of the frame movable body simulation image may be earlier. For example, if the display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started at timing t5, an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed in four rotations. Later, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start rotating.

In this way, by displaying the movable-frame-body simulated image before the movable-frame-body starts to operate, the display of the movable-frame-body simulated image serves as an advance notice that the movable-frame-body will operate. . In addition, the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame allows the player to recognize how the movable frame operates. A player who sees such a simulated image of the movable frame can visually recognize the movement of the movable frame from the start of the movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, by dynamically displaying simulated images of the movable frame before the movable frame starts to move, the player can certainly recognize how the movable frame moves. becomes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently touching the movable frame body from injuring his finger or the like. In addition, it is possible to indicate that a player who has placed a light load or the like on the frame movable body should move them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or the driving section for moving the frame movable body is subjected to a load.

FIG. 188(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state). At t11, the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started.

In this way, by displaying the movable frame simulated image after the movable frame starts to move, the player can notice that the movable frame has changed to the rotating state (second state). It becomes possible to make it difficult to break. Therefore, if the player does not notice the change in the state of the movable frame, the player suddenly sees the movable frame in a rotating state, which can bring a great surprise to the player. becomes.

FIG. 188(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t7. From timing t7 to timing t9, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed at high speed (two rotations per second). After that, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this manner, before the movable frame starts to operate, the simulated image of the movable frame is rotated and displayed at a faster speed (twice the speed) than the actual movable frame. changes to the rotating state (second state), it is possible to get used to the operation mode.

FIG. 188(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t5. From timing t5 to timing t9, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed at a low speed (half rotation per second). After that, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this manner, before the movable frame body starts to operate, the simulated image of the movable frame body is rotated and displayed at a slower speed (half the speed) than the actual movable frame body. It is possible for the player who feels that the motion mode is too fast when the body changes to the rotating state (second state) to know the motion mode of the frame movable body.

186(B) to 186(E) are described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171, etc., and modifications of these embodiments. It may be configured to be executable as an effect pattern by appropriately applying it to the inner frame movable body in .

188(B) to 188(E) are described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180, etc., and modifications of these embodiments. may be applied to either one of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body, or may be applied to both in the same manner so as to be executable as a production pattern.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, and FIGS. 179 and 180, respectively, the first movable frame body is changed from the first state to the second state, and then this state is maintained for a certain period of time. It is configured to change the second frame movable body from the first state to the second state later. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, it is configured to take a predetermined time even when changing the first movable frame body from the first state to the second state.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the mode in which the movable frame body changes state.

155 and 156, 164 and 165, 170 and 171, and 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as the timing, the simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the change of the real movable frame. C), FIG. 186(E), FIG. 186(H), and FIG. The movable body may be configured to start an action to change from the first state to the second state or to change from the first state to the second state.

By adopting such a configuration, a player who sees the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame can easily find the movable frame in motion without noticing that the real movable frame is in motion. It becomes possible to

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, FIGS. 170 and 171, and FIGS. 179 and 180, when the player operates the operation unit during the operation valid period, the result of the special lottery Depending on the condition, the state of the movable frame may change from the first state to the second state, or the second state may change to either the third state or the fourth state. .

With such a configuration, the player can determine the position of the operation unit and the position of the movable frame body whose state may change, and then operate the movable frame body while keeping his/her eyes aligned with the movable frame body. It is possible for the player to operate the operation part at a desired timing without looking at the part. As a result, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the state of the movable frame body changes, and if so, to what state the state of the movable frame body changes.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, FIGS. 170 and 171, and FIGS. However, in addition to the above example, a production pattern for displaying a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big win may be configured to be executable. For example, as the operation instruction image, the image of the movable frame may be displayed simultaneously with the image of the operation unit.

With such a configuration, when the player visually recognizes the special operation instruction image, the player can recognize that the result of the special lottery is a big win and that the movable frame body will always operate when the operation section is operated.
As a result, it is possible to operate the operation section while keeping the line of sight on the frame movable body, and to fully enjoy the movement of the frame movable body.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, FIGS. 164 and 165, FIGS. 170 and 171, and FIGS. A light-emitting part that can irradiate light is provided separately from the movable frame, and after the movable frame changes its state, it is turned off at the same timing as the operation effective period starts, and the operation to the operation part is performed. 187(D) and 187(E). , it is not always necessary to turn off the light, and it may be configured to be in a light emitting state distinguishable from the normal light emitting state. For example, only the outer frame movable body is turned off, the inner frame movable body is turned into a specific light emission state, or the right frame movable body is turned off and the left frame movable body is turned into a specific light emission state, so that a big hit It may be configured to notify the occurrence of Alternatively, all the frame movable bodies are turned off until the operation effective period occurs, and the inner frame movable body is put into a lighting effect state in response to the occurrence of the operation effective period to notify that the operation effective period has occurred, and then the operation unit. According to the operation to or the end of the operation valid period, the light emitting state of all the frame side movable bodies may be set to the light emitting state according to the result of the special lottery.

In this way, by changing the light emission state of the movable frame body to a different state according to the change in the state of the movable frame body, it becomes easier to perceive that the movable frame body has moved by the change in the light emission mode. In addition, if at least a part of the movable frame is illuminated, the player is less likely to be injured when the movable frame moves compared to when the movable frame is turned off. be

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, FIGS. 164 and 165, FIGS. 170 and 171, and FIGS. 179 and 180, the timing at which the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state 186 (B ), FIG. 186(D), FIG. 186(F), FIG. 186(G), FIG. 186(I), FIG. 186(K), FIG. 188(B), FIG. As described above with reference, at the timing prior to the timing at which the actual movable frame body starts to change from the first state to the second state or changes from the first state to the second state, , dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame may be started.

By adopting such a configuration, since the movable frame can be visually recognized in a state in which the motion of the movable frame is known in advance, every move of the movable frame can be overlooked. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation. Such a configuration is particularly effective when the frame movable body moves intricately as in the time charts shown in FIGS. 170 and 171 or FIGS. 179 and 180.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, and FIGS. 170 and 171, respectively, the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state in the same time (two seconds). The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the changing mode of the actual movable frame, but as described above with reference to FIG. The speed at which the display mode simulating the first state changes to the display mode simulating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, the display mode in which the simulated image of the movable frame simulates the first state in a time (one second) shorter than the time (two seconds) required for the movable frame body to change from the first state to the second state. By setting the display mode to a state simulating the second state, the eyes get accustomed to the quick movement of the simulated image of the movable frame body, so that the real movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state. In some cases, it becomes possible to fully enjoy the movement.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, and FIGS. 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference, before the movable frame enters the second state, the movable frame simulated image may be dynamically displayed so as to rotate at a faster speed than the movable frame simulated image. For example, after the movable frame simulated image is displayed so as to rotate once or multiple times at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the movable frame may be placed in the second state.

In this manner, dynamic display is performed in which the simulated image of the movable frame rotates once in a time (0.5 seconds) shorter than the time required for the movable frame to rotate once (1 second). By doing so, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the simulated image of the movable frame, so that it is possible to fully enjoy the rotational movement of the real movable frame in the second state.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, and FIGS. 170 and 171, respectively, the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state in the same time (two seconds). The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the changing mode of the actual frame movable body, but see FIGS. As described above, the speed at which the movable frame simulated image changes from the display state simulating the first state to the display state simulating the second state is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be slower than the changing speed.

In this way, the movable frame simulated image is displayed in the first state in a longer time (4 seconds) than the time (2 seconds) required for the movable frame body to change from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode so as to change from the mode to the display mode of the state simulating the second state, even if the player feels that the movement of the movable frame is too fast for the player, the simulated image of the movable frame can be viewed. By being there, the player can recognize the action mode.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, and FIGS. 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference, before the movable frame body enters the second state, the movable frame simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a mode rotating at a slower speed than that. For example, after the movable frame simulated image is displayed so as to rotate once or multiple times at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the movable frame may be placed in the second state.
In this manner, dynamic display is performed in which the simulated image of the movable frame rotates once over a period of time (two seconds) longer than the time required for one rotation of the movable frame (one second). As a result, even if the player feels that the actual rotating motion of the frame movable body in the second state is too fast for the player, the player recognizes the motion mode by looking at the simulated image of the movable frame body. becomes possible.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, and FIGS. 170 and 171, respectively, the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed in the same manner as the actual state of the movable frame is changed from the first state to the second state. However, it is configured so that the display dynamically changing from the image showing the state simulating the first state to the image showing the state simulating the second state is performed only once. As described with reference to FIGS. 186(J) and 186(K), the frame movable body simulation image may be displayed a plurality of times.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, and FIGS. 179 and 180, respectively, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the same timing as when the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state. is started, and while the actual movable frame body continues in the second state (rotating state), the simulated image of the movable frame body is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the actual movable frame body changes. It is configured. Therefore, the simulated image of the movable frame body is repeatedly rotated and displayed in a loop.

In this way, the manner in which the state of the movable frame changes is dynamically displayed a plurality of times as a simulated image of the movable frame. To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player misses the change of a movable frame body from a first state to a second state by repeatedly and dynamically displaying simulated images of the movable frame body in a manner of periodically changing the frame movable body. becomes possible.

FIGS. 189(A) to 190(B) show modifications of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). In this embodiment, at the start of the valid operation period (timing t9), the movable frame body starts to change from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement state (second state). the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed; the precursor display is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 before the operation effective period occurs; This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the effective period of operation ends without being performed (timing t18). Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 189(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 189(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operating unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operating unit is valid. there is FIG. 190(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 190(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 189(A) to 190(B), the game board-side effect display device 1600 starts a precursor display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, at timing t7. . As the precursor display, the characters "Push?" At timing t9, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "Push!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t18). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t16 or timing t20).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the movable frame body is turned off and starts to move from the standby position (first state), and at timing t11, the movement is completed (second state). Become.

In this way, before or during the movement of the movable frame body, a display (an indication display or an operation instruction display) that distracts the player's attention from the movable frame body is provided, thereby allowing the player to read the operation section. When the operation is performed, the player's line of sight is guided to the movable frame by changing the state of the movable frame from the extinguished state to the specific luminous effect state or the normal luminous effect state. Since the player feels as if the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, it is possible to give the player a great surprise. Further, even if it takes a long time to change the state of the movable frame from the first state to the second state, the player can be assured that the movable frame will be in the second state by the precursor display or the operation instruction display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person feels irritated. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

FIGS. 191(A) to 192(B) show modifications of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 189(A) to 190(B). In this embodiment, the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is changed to the timing (t14) when the operation section is operated or the timing (timing t9) when the effective period of operation ends (timing t9). 189 (A) to 189 (A) to 189 (A) to 189 (A) to the point where the change to the state (second state) where the movement is completed starts, and that the frame movable body changes to the second state only when the special lottery result is a big win. This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 190(B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 191(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 191(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 192(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 192(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period in which operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 191(A) and 191(B), an operation valid period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while an operation instruction is being displayed (timing t14). , When the special lottery result is a big hit, the movable frame moves from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state), and displays after the operation ( Timing t14 to timing t16), if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) remains unchanged, and only the display after the operation is performed. there is

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 192A and 192B, when the operation valid period ends (t18) and the special lottery result is a big hit, the frame movable body is in the standby position. While moving from (first state) to the state where movement is completed (second state), display after operation is performed (timing t18 to timing t20), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the movable frame body is in the standby position (first state), and only the post-operation display is performed.

191(A) and 192(A), at timing t22, the state in which the frame movable body has been completely moved (second state) to the state in which it is in the standby position (first state). Movement is started, and movement to the standby position is completed at timing t24.

In this way, even after the player has operated the operation unit, by performing the post-operation display instead of the operation instruction display, the game can be played from the movable frame body that changes the state from the first state to the second state. It is possible to divert a person's consciousness. By terminating the post-operation display at the timing when the change to the second state of the frame movable body is completed, the player finally notices that the frame movable body is in the second state. It is possible to give surprises. In addition, even if it takes a long time to change the state of the movable frame from the first state to the second state, the player is irritated by the post-operation display that the movable frame is in the second state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user feels an emotion. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

The timing of changing the frame movable body from the light-out state to the specific light emitting state is set to be the timing (timing t16) when the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. may By adopting such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice changes in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 193(A) to 194(B) show modified examples of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B). In the present embodiment, the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is changed to the state in which movement is completed (second state) in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t7). The starting point, the point at which the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed, the point at which the precursor display is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 before the operation valid period occurs, the point at which the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or the operation 170(A) to 171(B) is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 193(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 193(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 194(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 194(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 193(A) to 194(B), the game board-side effect display device 1600 starts a precursor display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, at timing t5. . As a precursor display, the text "Push?" At timing t7, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "PUSH!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t16). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

On the other hand, at timing t7, the inner frame movable body is turned off and starts to move from the standby position (first state), and at timing t9, the movement is completed (second state). becomes.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 193(A) and 193(B), an operation effective period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while an operation instruction is being displayed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body moves from the standby position (first state) to the completed state (second state), and displays after the operation. (Timing t11 to timing t13), when the special lottery result is a loss, the effect pattern in which only the display after the operation is performed without changing from the state (first state) where the outer frame movable body is in the standby position is displayed. It is

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 194(A) and 194(B), when the operation effective period ends (t16) and the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. While moving from the state (first state) to the state where the movement is completed (second state), a post-operation display is performed (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the frame is movable. A production pattern is shown in which only the post-operation display is performed without changing from the state where the body is in the standby position (first state).

After that, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 193(A) and 194(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. Further, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 193(A) to 194(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies operation ends.

In this way, before or during the movement of the inner frame movable body, a display (premonitory display or operation instruction display) that distracts the player from the frame movable body is performed, thereby increasing the player's awareness. The focus will be on the game board side effect display device 1600 . In addition, even during the movement of the outer frame movable body after the player has operated the operation section, the post-operation display is performed in place of the operation instruction display that has been performed up to that point, so that the player's awareness is improved. The player continues to be directed to the game board side effect display device 1600 . By adopting such a configuration, the player feels as if both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body have changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, which greatly surprises the player. be able to give. In addition, even if it takes time to change the state of the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the inner frame movable body can be moved by the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels irritated by the fact that the body or the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

It should be noted that the timing of changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting state is performed at the timing (timing t13 or timing t18) when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. It may be configured as By adopting such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice changes in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B) show modifications of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 170(A) to 171(B). In this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation ends (timing t16), the state where the inner frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is changed. , start to change to the state (second state) where the movement is completed, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the point where the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed, and the valid operation period is Precursor display is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 before occurrence, and post-operation display when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation ends without being operated (timing t16). 170(A) to 171(B) is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 195(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 195(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 196(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 196(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B), the game board-side effect display device 1600 starts a precursor display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, from timing t5. . As a precursor display, the text "Push?" At timing t7, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "PUSH!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t16). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 195(A) and 195(B), an operation valid period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while an operation instruction is being displayed (timing t11). , When the special lottery result is a big hit, the inner frame movable body changes from the state (first state) in the standby position to the state (second state) in which the movement is completed (timing t11 to timing t13). , the outer frame movable body changes from the state (first state) in the standby position to the state (second state) in which the movement is completed (timing t15 to timing t17), and when the special lottery result is a loss, An effect pattern is shown that does not change from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 196(A) and 196(B), when the operation effective period ends (t16) and the special lottery result is a big hit, the inner frame movable body is at the standby position. After changing from the state (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) (timings t16 to t18), the movement is completed from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. When the state (second state) changes (timing t20 to timing t22) and the result of the special lottery is a loss, there is an effect pattern that does not change from the state (first state) where the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. It is shown.

After that, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 195(A) and 196(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. In addition, in the production pattern shown in FIG. 195 (A) and FIG. 196 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies operation ends.

In this way, when the player operates the operation section, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By changing the state, the player slowly observes the manner in which the frame movable body changes the state, and from the player's point of view, the degree of excitement gradually increases over time.

193(A) to 194(B) and the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B) are executed according to the game state. may be configured.

For example, when the average variation time of the decorative pattern is relatively long normal game state (non-probability variation, non-time saving, non-electric support, etc.), Figure 195 (A) ~ Figure 196 (B) It is preferable to execute the production pattern described with reference to . In this case, the player can thoroughly enjoy the movement of the frame movable body because the effect is performed in a state in which a big win is unlikely to occur.

On the other hand, it is a state that can occur after a big hit occurs once, and the average variation time of decorative symbols is relatively short compared to the normal game state. , during time saving, during electric power support, etc.), it is preferable to configure so as to execute the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. In this case, the time from the operation of the operation part until the frame movable body enters the second state is short, and the transition to the jackpot game state can be performed at a good tempo.

In the normal game state, only the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B) can be executed. ) may be made executable.
195(A) to 196(B) rather than the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 193(A) to 194(B). 193(A) to 194(B) rather than the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B). It may be configured to increase the ratio of execution of the effect patterns described with reference.

Also, the timing for executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B) is configured to be executed at an earlier stage than immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbols is performed. good too. For example, before the decorative pattern forms the ready-to-reach state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. When the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the decorative pattern may form the ready-to-win state. By adopting such a structure, the players who have visually recognized the state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body operate over time gradually develop an expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. can be increased. In addition, it is desirable that the decorative pattern forms the reach state when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, timing t24).

In addition, after executing the production pattern described with reference to FIG. 195(A) to FIG. 193(A) to 194(B) or the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B). good.

In this way, after executing the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. 193(A) to 194(B) or the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B) are executed, 195(A) to 196(B) as an effect pattern for determining whether or not the ready-to-reach state is formed. It may be configured to execute an effect pattern that operates. In this case, the operation invalid period continues as the reception state of the operation unit, and the precursor display, operation instruction display, and post-operation display are naturally not performed. By executing the performance pattern of such a modified mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels troublesome to operate the operating part in a state where the expectation of the big win is not so high.

In the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. 193(A) to 194(B), an example of displaying the characters "Push?" You may display so that it may move to a position. Also, it is preferable to move the movable frame body away from a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, as a precursor display, from the position directly above or diagonally above the game board side effect display device 1600 It is preferable that the characters "Push?" Further, as a post-operation display, the characters “!!” may move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 directly below or obliquely downward from the game board side effect display device 1600 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further distract the player's attention from the upper movable frame body. As will be described later, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side effect display device 1600, the precursor display and the post-operation display may be configured to move upward in the opposite manner.

In the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195(A) to 196(B), an example of displaying the characters "Push?" You may display so that it may move to a position. Also, it is preferable to move the movable frame body closer to a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board-side effect display device 1600, the characters "PUSH?" It should be configured as follows. Further, as a post-operation display, the characters “!!” may move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 . With such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be guided to the frame movable body, and the player can fully view the entire series of changes of the frame movable body.

Further, as the operation instruction display, characters such as "!! PUSH!!" may be displayed as a special operation instruction display that occurs only when the special lottery result is a big hit. As a post-operation display, instead of the character "!!", the operation instruction display "Push!!" or the special operation instruction display "!!Push!!" continues to be displayed as it is. may In addition, in response to the special operation instruction display "!!Push!!", the characters "!Push?!" !” may be displayed. In this way, the special characters displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit are continuously displayed from before the effective period of operation until after the operation of the operation part, thereby giving the player a great sense of satisfaction. becomes possible.

FIGS. 197(A) to 197(D), FIGS. 198(A) to 198(C), and FIGS. 199(A) to 199(C) refer to FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). 10 shows a modification of the effect pattern described above. In these modifications, only one of right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as first frame movable body) and left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as second frame movable body) the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body may be moved at different timings, and the first frame movable body is modeled after the first frame movable body. Although the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is basically not displayed for the second movable frame. is operated, and the timing at which the frame movable body operates is not limited to the timing just before the decorative pattern stops.

197 (A) ~ Figure 197 (D), Figure 198 (A) ~ Figure 198 (C), Figure 199 (A) ~ Figure 199 (C) production patterns shown in the production during the variation of the decorative pattern It is a pattern, and indicates a state in which a predetermined number of seconds have passed since the start of variation of the decorative design (for example, 10 seconds have passed since the start of variation of the decorative design at timing t0).

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(A), the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and maintains the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds). After that (timing t7 to timing t15), the second state changes to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). Further, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame changes from the first state to the second state in accordance with the movement of the first movable frame, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. and changes from the second state to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). On the other hand, the second frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position.
Also, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(B), the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (timing t7 to timing t15), the state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). In addition, when the second frame movable body operates, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Also, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is not displayed.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(B), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. Since the image is displayed, the player can easily notice that the first frame movable body has moved. On the other hand, in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(B), even when the second frame movable body is operated, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed. , the player hardly notices that the second frame movable body has moved.

When the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern will be a big hit is determined by the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body. It is preferable to configure such that the effect pattern is selected so as to be higher than when it is not performed. For example, the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates and the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates may each be 10%. With such a configuration, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame, the first movable frame is in a state where the eyes are directed toward the first movable frame. A player who notices this will have a sense of expectation for the big win.

On the other hand, in order to notice the movement of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look away from the game board side effect display device 1600 on which decorative symbols are displayed and look at the second frame movable body. Therefore, if you frequently check whether the second frame movable body is operating or if you accidentally face the direction in which the second frame movable body is provided, the second frame movable body will not operate. You will notice that you are there. In this case, the player feels that he/she has learned by his or her own strength that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, and as part of the effect such that the simulated frame movable body imitating the first frame movable body is displayed, the first frame movable body simulation image is displayed. A greater sense of accomplishment will be felt compared to the case where the one-frame movable body is visually recognized, so to speak.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the frame movable body, and the player's interest, which was conventionally within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, can be directed outward. It is possible to expand.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 197(A) and 197(B), an example is shown in which the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate is the same 10%, but FIG. ) may be set higher than the expectation level when the first frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(A). . For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates is 15% and the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates is 10%. With such a configuration, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

The production pattern shown in FIG. 197(C) is a production pattern obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 197(B). In this production pattern, the time (timing t7 to timing t21) during which the second frame movable body is in the second state is 14 seconds, and in the production pattern shown in FIG. This is longer than the 8 seconds during which the state is maintained (timing t7 to timing t15). In this way, by making the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time during which the first frame movable body is in the second state, it is possible for the player to put the second frame movable body in the second state. Being in two states makes it easier to notice.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(B). For example, the effect patterns may be selected such that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(B) is 15% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(C) is 25%. . With such a configuration, the player will have a greater sense of anticipation as to how long the second state will be maintained from the moment the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and there are cases where it is unknown when the second state has been reached, so the duration of the second state is As the game continues, the player will have a greater sense of expectation.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body being in the second state, the greater the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. Although the embodiment in which the is high is shown, it is also possible to provide three or more production patterns in which the duration of the second state is different. For example, an effect pattern that maintains the second state from timing t7 to time t27 may be made executable, and the degree of expectation for this effect pattern may be 30%.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body being in the second state, the greater the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. However, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of times the second frame movable body is in the second state, not by the duration that the second frame movable body is in the second state. good too.
The production pattern shown in FIG. 197(D) shows an example thereof. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(D) shows an example in which the second frame movable body moves from the first state to the second state twice, but the second frame movable body does not perform the second motion. Alternatively, an effect pattern in which the third action is performed after the second action may be configured to be executable. Also at this time, it is preferable that the degree of expectation increases as the number of operations increases. For example, the expectation level is 15% when the second frame movable body operates only once, the expectation level is 25% when the second frame movable body operates twice, and the second frame movable body operates three times. It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation when operating is 35%. In this way, the higher the number of times the second frame movable body moves, the higher the degree of expectation. As to how many times the 2nd frame movable body will move, the 2nd frame movable body will be visually recognized with a great sense of anticipation.

The production pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) is a production pattern obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 197(A). In this effect pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are the same as those of the effect pattern shown in FIG. There is no difference in the mode of production). On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(A), the second frame movable body starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t21, is in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33, and is in the second state at timing t23. It differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) in that it returns to the first state at t35. Also, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(A), when the second frame movable body is moved, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the production pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) and the production pattern shown in FIG. 198(A), at a predetermined timing during the variation of the decorative symbols, one of the production patterns is executed. , the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and after returning to the first state, the second frame movable body changes to the first state at the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. 197(A) is selected), and when the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (see FIG. 198(A) When the production pattern shown is selected).

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight once turns to the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600, the first frame movable body is moved. Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) may be set higher than the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(A). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) is 25% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) is 10%. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The production patterns shown in FIGS. 198(B) and 198(C) are production patterns obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 197(A). This production pattern differs from the production pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) in that the motion of the first frame movable body and the display of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are performed multiple times.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 198(B) and 198(C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t2, and moves from timing t4 to timing t6. 2 state, returns to the first state at timing t8, then again starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t11, enters the second state from timing t13 to timing t15, and returns to the second state at timing t17. It returns to state 1. In addition, a dynamic display of a frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is performed in synchronization with the motion of the first frame movable body.

After that, in the production pattern shown in FIG. 198(C), the second frame movable body starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t21, and is in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33. At t35, it returns to the first state. On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(B), the motion of the second frame movable body is not performed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the production pattern shown in FIG. 198(B) and the production pattern shown in FIG. , the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then returns to the first state (timing t17). There are cases where the movable body changes from the first state to the second state and cases where the second frame movable body maintains the first state and does not change to the second state.

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight continues to face the first frame movable body when the first frame movable body operates, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(B). For example, the production pattern shown in FIG. 198(B) may be configured to have an expectation level of 25%, and the production pattern shown in FIG. 198(C) may have an expectation level of 35%. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The production patterns shown in FIGS. 199(A) to 199(C) are production patterns obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 197(A). This effect pattern differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(A) in that the second frame movable body may operate at a timing prior to the motion of the first frame movable body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 199(A) to 199(C), the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is displayed are the same. . Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t21 to timing t23, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (timing t23 to timing t31 ), and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). Further, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame changes from the first state to the second state in accordance with the movement of the first movable frame, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

On the other hand, in each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 199(A) to 199(C), the operation mode of the second frame movable body is different as follows.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(A), the second frame movable body continues to be in the first state during the period from timing t0 to timing t39 and never enters the second state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(B), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, stays in the second state from timing t7 to timing t15, and reaches timing t17. , the state returns to the first state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, stays in the second state from timing t7 to timing t33, and reaches timing t35. , the state returns to the first state. It should be noted that the display of the frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

The expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 199(C) is made higher than the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 199(B), and the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. ) may be set higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. For example, the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 199(A) is 10%, the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 199(B) is 20%, and the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. %.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(B), the player may miss the action of the second frame movable body when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(B) is executed. be. A player who can visually recognize the action of the second frame movable body can recognize that the degree of expectation is 20% due to the action of the first frame movable body after that. On the other hand, the player who did not notice the movement of the second frame movable body would be in a state of not knowing the exact degree of expectation even if the first frame movable body were to move.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(C), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. The movable body remains in the movement position (second state). Therefore, when the player sees the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body and notices that the first frame movable body is in the second state, the player checks the state of the second frame movable body. , when the second frame movable body is not operating at that time and is in the first state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is not so high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is operating at that time and is in the second state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively high.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(B) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. The player is interested in whether the first movable frame moves while the movable frame is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body operates and enters the second state, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body enters the first state before the first frame movable body enters the first state, the player may recognize that the degree of expectation is relatively low. becomes.

In addition, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199(C), the second frame movable body is set to the first state after the first frame movable body is set to the first state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player for a long period of time in a desirable state for the player, who has a high degree of expectation.

The embodiments have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 154 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, so as to execute the effect pattern described above.

The embodiments have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 154 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively. Either one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is the first frame movable body, and either the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 or the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is used as the first frame movable body. Alternatively, both of them may be used as the second frame movable body. A state in which one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are in the second state is defined as the second state of the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body. A state in which either or both of 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is in the second state may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern as the second state of the second frame movable body. .

169 and the like, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 178 and the like, one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state. Then, the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. You may adopt it as an action to do. In addition, after the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the second state to the first state, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

Similarly, when executing the effect pattern described above in the embodiments shown in FIGS. After changing to the second state, the other of left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state to the second state. You may employ|adopt as operation|movement which makes two states. In addition, after the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the second state to the first state, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 , from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

In this way, state changes due to continuous motions of a plurality of frame movable bodies may be grouped together as a state change of one frame movable body.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are used as the first frame movable body to change the state, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are used as the second frame movable body. Although an example of changing the state has been shown, only one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is configured to operate as the first frame movable body, and the other is not operated and is in a standby state. may be configured to remain as it is. Alternatively, only one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is configured to operate as the second frame movable body, and the other is configured to remain in a standby state without being operated. may

For example, of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is changed as the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are changed. The outer ear frame movable body 7450 may be configured to change the state as the second frame movable body.

In this case, the areas of the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body differ when viewed from the front and when viewed from the side. Specifically, since the first frame movable body is composed of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the visible area is relatively small, and the second frame movable body consists of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. Since it is composed of the outer frame movable body 7450, the visible area is relatively large.

With such a configuration, when the state of the first frame movable body changes relatively small, a simulated frame movable body image corresponding to the state change of the first frame movable body is displayed when the state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the change in the state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when the state of the second-frame movable body changes relatively large, the second-frame movable body does not change the state by not displaying the frame-movable-body simulated image corresponding to the second-frame movable body. It is possible to give the player a greater surprise when the player notices that the

The structure of the plurality of frame movable bodies described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185 may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be the first frame movable body, and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 may be the second frame movable body. Further, the state in which the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. , FIG. 184(B), FIG. 184(D), and FIG. 185(B) may be set as the second state, and the above-described effect pattern may be executed.

Alternatively, the door frame side unit right upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630 are the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 are the second frame movable body. It may be a movable body. Furthermore, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 are shown in FIGS. C), the state in the standby position shown in FIG. 185(A) is defined as the first state, and the state in the movement position shown in FIGS. , may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above.

For example, when the production pattern shown in FIG. Accompanied by the display of the frame movable body simulation image simulating the side unit right lower arm 7630, after changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the movement position (second state), and then to the standby position After changing to a certain state (first state), the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 are changed to the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion. 7680 without displaying the simulated image of the movable frame imitating the 7680, after changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the movement position (second state), the state in the standby position (first state) state).

Alternatively, either one or both of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face-up movable body included in the door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is movable. At least one of body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is used as the second frame movable body. may be Further, curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750, door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit lower face A state in which the nose movable body 7522 and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. B), FIG. 184(D), and FIG. 185(B) may be configured such that the above-described effect pattern is executed with the states of the movement positions shown in FIG. 184(D) and FIG.

For example, the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 may be the second frame movable body, and the above-described effect pattern may be executed. In this case, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed for the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 which is larger than the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 . By adopting such a configuration, when the player notices that the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) is changing its state, the player is more surprised. can be given.

In addition to the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also the second frame movable bodies, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is stored below. After completing the upward movement from this position, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the upward movement from the state in which they are housed in the door frame top unit face upward movable body 7510. This state may be the second state of the second frame movable body.

In this way, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body are arranged at positions facing each other with the game area 5a and the game board side effect display device 1600 interposed therebetween. When the player is visually recognizing one of the frame movable bodies, the other frame movable body is less likely to be visually recognized by the player. In particular, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(A) is executed, the player's attention is focused on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body, which is far from the viewing angle, is in the field of view. You will not be able to enter. Then, it is possible to give a big surprise that the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state to the player who notices the state after the movement of the second frame movable body.

Although the production pattern in which the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is not displayed when the second movable frame is operated, the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is shown for a short period of time. It may be configured to display a simulated image. In this case, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body for a short period of time (for example, 1 second) in the latter half of the predetermined period when the second frame movable body is in the second state. may be configured to be displayed in For example, from timing t30 to timing t31 in the production pattern shown in FIG. 198(A), it is preferable to display a frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has moved.

Alternatively, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body may be displayed from timing t33 to timing t34 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198(A).

With such a configuration, the player can see the state in which the second frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state, and the player can see that the second frame movable body is in the first state. The user feels frustration that he or she could not enjoy the second state. As a result, in subsequent games, it is possible to heighten awareness of the possibility that the second frame movable body may be operating without realizing it.

155(A) to 156(B) show production patterns in which the movable frame moves. Due to the position of the movable frame body after the movement, the player may violently contact the movable frame body with his or her hand or head, which may injure the player or damage the movable frame body. On the other hand, in a game machine capable of moving the frame movable body, in addition to the movement of the frame movable body, various effects are performed on the game board 5 side, and the effect is performed in an excessive manner for the player. There is a risk of The embodiments described below are intended to solve such problems. 200 and 201, 202 and 203, 204 and 205, 206 and 207 correspond to FIGS. 155 and 156, 164 and 165, 170 and 171, and 179 and 180, respectively. 4 shows a modified example of the production pattern described with reference to each.

200 and 201, 202 and 203, 204 and 205, and 206 and 207, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is lowered from the normal state at a predetermined timing. It is configured to be in a restrained state. The fluctuating effect sound is a sound that a predetermined music is reproduced in accordance with the fluctuation of the decoration pattern, and the player recognizes it as background music. For example, a piece of music consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the variation of decorative patterns seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and a configuration may be adopted in which playback of a different song is started at the timing when playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with the change of the game state, the music that has been reproduced so far may be faded out in the middle of reproduction, and another music different from the music that has been reproduced so far may be reproduced. In the present embodiment, by suppressing the volume of such fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body operates, the state of excessive effect is suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, a special sound is reproduced for a short period of time to remind the player that the movable frame body is moving or that the movable frame body has been moved. . As the special evocative sound, instead of emitting a sound that can be recognized as a series of songs that are played for a long time like the fluctuating effect sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping-pong") is played in one second. Alternatively, it is preferable to reproduce a piece of music whose reproduction ends in a short period of time (for example, two seconds), or to reproduce a sound like a drum being continuously beaten (for example, a sound such as "thumping") for several seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sound constituting the special evocation sound does not include the instrumental sound used as part of the fluctuating effect sound. Also, the special wake-up sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the fluctuating effect sound. For example, even in a normal state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is not suppressed, and in a suppressed state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed, the special awakening sound is output at a predetermined volume. Also, the volume of the special evocative sound should be higher than the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in the suppression state. It should be noted that, in the effect pattern described later, there is a case where the state in which the special evocation sound is output is maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to repeat such sound effects or music whose reproduction ends in a short period of time so as to maintain the state in which the special evocative sound is output.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound and generating a special evocative sound in accordance with the operation of the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the effect provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 200(A) to 201(B), at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the movement position, the variable production It is configured to set the sound state to a suppressed state and to output a special evocative sound. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 202(A) to 203(B), the timing (timing t9 ), the state of the fluctuating effect sound is set to the suppressed state, and the state of outputting the special evocative sound is set. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

Figure 204 (A) ~ Figure 205 (B) in the effect pattern shown, at the timing (timing t7) when the inner frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position (timing t7), the fluctuation The state of the effect sound is set to the suppression state, and the state is set to output the special evocative sound. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

206 (A) ~ Figure 207 (B) in the effect pattern shown, the timing (timing At t5), the state of the fluctuating effect sound is set to the suppressed state, and the state of outputting the special evocative sound is set. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In this way, at the timing when the frame movable body starts to operate, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state and the special evocative sound is changed from the non-output state to the output state, so that the effect state becomes excessive. It is possible to suppress

Also, as shown in FIGS. 204(A) to 205(B), when a plurality of movable frame bodies can operate in order, the second moving frame movable body starts its operation. , the output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special evocative sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive stopping of the fluctuating effect sound necessary for the effect.

The timing of returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppression state to the normal state and the timing of not outputting the output state of the special evocative sound are when the player operates the operation unit or when the valid operation period ends. It is the timing of Since the predetermined time has passed since the movable frame moved, it is not meaningful to suppress the fluctuating effect sound. This is because the player notices that the movable body has moved.

On the other hand, the timing of returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppression state to the normal state and the timing of changing the output state of the special evocative sound from the output state to the non-output state may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame. In addition, in the case of an effect pattern in which the plurality of frame movable bodies return to the first state at different timings, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the frame movable body that is the latest to enter the first state returns to the first state. It is preferable that the state is returned to the normal state and the output state of the special alert sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state.

Alternatively, at the timing when the operating unit is operated or when the effective period of operation ends, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is returned from the suppression state to the normal state, while the special evocation sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

Alternatively, the output state of the special evocation sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the operation effective period ends, and the timing for returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state is set. It may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

204 and 205, and 206 and 207, when there are a plurality of frame movable bodies and there are a plurality of timings at which the frame movable bodies start to operate, a plurality of frame movable bodies You may comprise so that a different special evocation sound may be output corresponding to each of the above.

In the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed at the timing (timing t14) when the operating unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends. An example is shown in which the state is changed to the normal state and the special alert sound is not output. It may be configured so that the sound output state may be continued.

For example, in the production pattern shown in FIG. 204(A), until timing t15 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position, or until timing t16 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the movement position, or when the outer frame movable body The state of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound or the state of outputting the special evocative sound may be continued until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the standby position. .

In addition, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 205(A), until timing t19 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position, or until timing t20 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the movement position, or when the outer frame movable body The state of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound or the state of outputting the special evocative sound may be continued until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the standby position. .

On the other hand, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 204(B) and 205(B), the production pattern is not transformed, and in the production pattern shown in FIG. 204(B), at timing t14, the production shown in FIG. In the pattern, at timing t18, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special evocative sound is changed to the non-output state.

In this way, when the outer frame movable body operates (that is, when the special lottery result is a big hit), depending on the operation of the outer frame movable body, the suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound and the output state of the special evocative sound are controlled. By configuring so as to continue, the player may be injured or injured when the player touches the outer frame movable body that is in the state of moving to the moving position or in the state of moving to the moving position (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the outer frame movable body is damaged. In particular, the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when it is confirmed that the special lottery result is a big win, so the excitement felt by the player is very great. It is possible to make the player recognize that the outer frame movable body is operating without discouraging the player.

The timing of outputting the special wake-up sound may be restricted. For example, the special evocation sound is output only during at least one of the period during which the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state and the period during which the second state is changing to the first state. may

For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 200(A) to 201(B), during the period when the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), is changed from the second state to the first state (period from timing t22 to timing t24), the special evocation sound is output only during at least one period, and the special evocation sound is not output during the other periods. may be configured. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

204(A) and 205(B), the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the inner frame The special evocation sound is output only during at least one period of the period in which the movable body changes from the second state to the first state (period from timing t30 to timing t32), and the special evocation sound is not output during the other periods. It may be configured as Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 204A and 205A, the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (timing t14 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 204A) to timing t16, the period from timing t18 to timing t20 in the production pattern shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the special alert sound is output only during at least one period, and the special alert sound is not output during the other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In addition, the period during which the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the period during which the inner frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing period from t30 to timing t32), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (period from timing t14 to timing t16 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 204(A); In the production pattern shown, the special evocation sound is generated only during at least one of the period from timing t18 to timing t20) and the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (from timing t26 to timing t28). It may be configured not to output the special alert sound during other periods.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In each of the production patterns described above, the state of the fluctuating production sound may be set to the suppressed state, and then the special evocative sound may be output with a slight delay. For example, it may be configured to output a special evocative sound two seconds after the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 200(A) to 201(B), it is preferable that the variable effect sound is suppressed at timing t7, and then the special evocation sound is output at timing t9. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed and that the special evocation sound has a different property from the fluctuating effect sound.

Alternatively, in each effect pattern described above, the state of the fluctuating effect sound may be set to the suppressed state at a timing a predetermined time before the timing of outputting the special evocation sound. For example, two seconds before the timing of outputting the special awakening sound, the fluctuating effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 200(A) to 201(B), it is preferable that the variable effect sound is suppressed at timing t5, and then the special evocation sound is output at timing t7. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the variable effect sound has been suppressed and that the special evocation sound has a different property from the variable effect sound.

The timing for ending the output of the special awakening sound may be a predetermined timing. For example, it may be configured such that the special evocation sound is output only for the first two seconds after the movable frame body starts to move. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 200(A) to 201(B), at timing t7, the variable production sound is suppressed and the output of the special evocation sound is started, and at the timing t9, the output of the special evocation sound is started. It should be configured to terminate. It should be noted that the fluctuating effect sound may end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated, or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. With such a configuration, since the state in which the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed continues even after the timing when the output of the special evocation sound is finished, the player can easily recognize that the special evocation sound has been output.

It may be configured such that the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed and the special evocative sound is output before the start of the movement of the frame movable body. For example, at a timing two seconds before the frame movable body starts to move, it is preferable to suppress the fluctuating effect sound and output the special evocative sound. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 200(A) to 201(B), at timing t5, the fluctuating production sound is suppressed and the output of the special evocative sound is started, and at timing t7, the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the movable frame body is moving, and it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by coming into contact with the movable frame body.

The operation effective period may be generated in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body starts to operate and when the variable effect sound is set to the suppression state. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 204(A) to 205(B), at timing t7, an operation effective period is generated, an operation instruction display is started, and the light emission effect state of the movable frame is turned off. It should be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the movable frame body is moving, and it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by coming into contact with the movable frame body.

By slowly rotating the frame movable body in the embodiments shown in FIGS. Alternatively, it may be operated like the frame movable body in the modified examples of the time charts shown in FIGS. 155(A) to 156(B). For example, the frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 163 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. When moving to the standby position, it is preferable to rotate the frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds.

178, 181, 182 and 183, the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body in the embodiments shown in FIGS. may be operated like the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 178 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit and the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends, the inner frame movable body may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. . When moving to the standby position, the inner frame movable body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds, and then the outer frame movable body is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Rotate it 90 degrees around.

154, 159, 160, 161 and 162, the movable frame body, FIGS. 169, 172, 173, 174 and 175, and 176 and 177. 169, 172, 173, 174 and 175, and 176 and 177 are in the second state, the frame movable body is in the second state. Either one or both of the body, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to continue vertical movement of about 1 to 2 centimeters or rotational movement of about 5 degrees. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are operated to enter the second state.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, and FIGS. 179 and 180, respectively, the rotating direction of the frame movable body is clockwise when viewed from the right side. For this reason, compared to the case where the rotating direction of the frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, when the player puts his or her hand or the like on the frame, the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation.

On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, FIGS. 179 and 180, the rotating direction of the movable frame body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. By adopting such a configuration, the rotating body can be visually recognized as if approaching the player, and the movable frame body can be visually recognized by the player in a powerful manner.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 164, 165, 179 and 180, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are not rotated more than 360 degrees in the second state, but are rotated a predetermined number of times. A configuration may be adopted in which clockwise rotation when viewed from the right and counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the right are alternately repeated within the movement range. For example, as shown in FIGS. 163(B) and 163(E) or FIGS. 178(B) and 178(E), the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body stand upright. The frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeat the turning motion within the range of 45 degrees to the front side and 45 degrees to the rear side. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player puts the hand or the like on the frame.

In addition, in the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body shown in FIGS. 178(A) to 178(E), when the inner frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right, the outer When the frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right and the inner frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right. It may be configured to rotate around. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player puts the hand or the like on the frame.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 169, the movable frame has a light emitting unit, but the movable frame is illuminated at a predetermined location outside the movable frame (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570). It may be configured to have a light-emitting portion that illuminates the movable frame body. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the movable frame body may be illuminated by the light-emitting portion provided in the movable frame body and the light-emitting portion outside the movable frame body to create a predetermined rendering state.

On the other hand, in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 163(A) to 163(E) and FIGS. 178(A) to 178(E), the right light emission inside the door frame top unit corresponds to the frame movable body. 7050 and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided in the door frame top unit 570. By providing a light emitting part in each of the inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit, the door The frame movable body may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the movable frame body may be illuminated by the light-emitting portion provided in the movable frame body and the light-emitting portion outside the movable frame body to create a predetermined rendering state.

154 to 207, examples have been shown in which the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state, or changes from the second state to the third or fourth state. A player or an amusement store clerk pushes the movable frame body in the middle of changing to the second state or the movable frame body that has completed the change from the second state to the fourth state by hand. It may be configured so that it can be returned to the state (first state) located at the position. In this case, a drive mechanism (not shown) for driving the movable frame is provided with a sensor capable of detecting the position of the movable frame, so that when the movable frame is at the initial position at a timing when it should not be at the initial position, may be configured so that the frame movable body stays at the initial position by determining that an operation such as push-in has been performed by a player or an amusement store clerk and not operating the drive mechanism any more.

With such a configuration, the movable frame body can be returned to the initial position (first state) by the player or the store clerk at any timing. Further, even when a heavy article (such as a bag carried by the player) is placed on the movable frame, the driving mechanism for operating the movable frame is controlled so as not to operate the movable frame. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load from being applied to the drive mechanism. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player or a store clerk is injured.

154 to 207 show the basic structure of the movable frame, modified examples of the structure of the movable frame, basic control modes of the movable frame, and modified examples of the control modes of the movable frame. However, the predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the movable frame may be applied to the predetermined embodiment or modification of the structure of the movable frame. Further, one or more other embodiments and modifications of the structure of the movable frame may be applied to the given embodiment and modifications of the structure of the movable frame. In addition, one or more other embodiments or modifications of the control mode of the movable frame may be applied to the predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the frame movable body.

Embodiments may be obtained by applying each of the production examples in the embodiments and the technical matters in the production examples in combination. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment combining and applying each technical matter in each role product structure.

(Second embodiment)
The second embodiment will be described below based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 208-235.

By the way, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed in the rolling area of the game ball in the game machine. There was a fraudulent act that led many game balls to enter the winning slot illegally.

For example, it is illegal to break into an amusement arcade after it is closed, open the door frame and bend the obstacle nail directly with a tool, etc., or, while the arcade is open, insert a piano wire or the like into the game area and bend the obstacle nail. A game ball has been illegally led to an advantageous direction by bending it, etc., and such illegality has brought great damage to the game parlor. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide means for preventing fraudulent acts with respect to obstructive nails.

FIG. 208 shows a front view of the game board 5' in the second embodiment, and FIG. 209 shows an exploded front perspective view of the game board 5'. As shown, the game board 5' in this embodiment is mainly composed of a front unit 2000, a game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000. As shown in FIG.

The back unit 3000 is composed of a movable effect unit 3600 that mainly performs movable effects using various movable members, and a game board side effect display device 1600 that is arranged behind it and displays game information, effect displays, etc. as images. It is The effects by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movable effect unit 3600 are configured to be visible to the player through an opening formed in the center of the game panel 1100 .

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game board 5' shown in FIG. 209 and the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 shown in FIG. , an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 are attached, and further, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 and various prize winning devices (general prize winning port 2001, first starting port 2002) are provided, and an opening spreading in the center of the panel plate 1110 The front unit 2000 is fitted into the portion from the front and fixed to the panel plate 1110 from the front with screws (not shown).

The panel plate 1110 in this embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of about 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 may be made of, for example, a transparent synthetic resin plate such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like.

In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 are planted on the panel plate 1110 in this embodiment, and the left side game area 5'a and the right side game area 5b of the panel plate 1110 correspond to the shooting direction of the game ball. configured on the front. That is, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of FIG. 210, a right game area 5b is formed as a rolling area for a game ball shot by a player to the right. A panel projection 1117 projecting toward the opening is integrally formed with the panel plate 1110 . Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted on the front side of the panel projection 1117, as shown in the layout plan view of the obstacle nails in FIG.

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 210, the front unit 2000 in this embodiment is formed in a substantially annular shape from a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of about 2 mm, and is mainly composed of It is composed of a stage 2530, a warp exit 2522, a prize winning opening 2005, a channel device 2700, an area cover member 2600 to be described later, and the like.

Also, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 211 and the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 212, the channel device 2700 includes first channel forming members 2720a and second channel forming members 2720a and and a forming member 2720b.

Above the first flow passage forming member 2720a and the second flow passage forming member 2720b, a first flow passage ball entrance 2710a and a second flow passage ball entrance 2710b are provided, respectively, for receiving a game ball shot by hitting to the right. Furthermore, the lower portion is provided with a first channel outlet 2730a and a second channel outlet 2730b. Therefore, the game ball fired by hitting to the right enters the first passage ball entrance 2710a or the second passage ball entrance 2710b, and is discharged from the first passage exit 2730a or the second passage exit 2730b. Then, the game ball is discharged to the right game area 5b formed on the panel plate 1110 described above.

In this embodiment, as described above, obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the panel convex portion 1117 forming the right game area 5b. More specifically, FIG. Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in an arrangement manner as shown in Fig. 2 to form flow paths for a plurality of game balls. That is, three obstruction nails 1201, 1202, and 1203 are planted at equal intervals above the panel convex portion 1117 in the horizontal direction, and twelve obstruction nails 1204 to 1215 are planted thereunder in two substantially vertical directions. of obstructing nails are planted in close proximity. Further below, three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are planted close to each other in a substantially oblique direction. In the present embodiment, the obstructing nails are planted in the above-described arrangement, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to such an arrangement, and the obstructing nails can be planted in arbitrary positions as appropriate. It is possible.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 211 and the exploded front perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. A region cover member 2600 is attached so as to cover the game region 5b from the front side.

The area covering member 2600 of this embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material having a thickness of about 2 mm and extending vertically as shown in the figure. According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the rolling state of the game ball on the back side through the area cover member 2600 while covering the channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b.

Note that the thickness of the region covering member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the thickness in this embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. It is also possible to use a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate such as polyarylate resin or methacrylic resin.

The area cover member 2600 has a substantially flat front surface and a rear surface, and a penetration portion 2610 including penetration portions 2611 to 2620 is formed as a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the front view. ing. These penetrating portions 2611 to 2620 are configured to function as accommodating portions capable of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 of the right game area 5b.

More specifically, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 211 and the exploded rear perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. 2613 accommodate the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203, respectively, and the elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 accommodate the adjacent obstructing nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215. A penetrating portion 2619 which accommodates two nails each and has an elongated hole longer than the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 is configured to accommodate the nail heads of the three obstructing nails 1216 to 1218 . A through portion 2620 having a notch is formed at the right end portion of the area covering member 2600 in front view, and the through portion 2620 has the nail heads of the two obstructing nails 1210 and 1211 adjacent to each other. configured to accommodate the part.

Also, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. By contacting the ball regulating protrusion 2640, the game ball rolling on the back side of the , it is possible to reduce the flowing speed of the game ball, prevent clogging, and regulate the rolling direction. .

Also, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. In order to prevent this, the area cover member 2600 is fixed with a screw (not shown) on the back side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 214, screws screwed into mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 from behind the game panel 1100 are provided so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. can be accessed, but the screws screwed into the mounting bosses 2632 are blocked by the panel plate 1110 and cannot be accessed. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself is temporarily removed. It is constructed so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110 . With such a configuration, for example, it becomes difficult for a malicious player or the like to remove the area cover member 2600, and it is possible to suppress an act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

Additionally, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of area covering member 2600 in FIG. , each flow path is formed by attaching and covering the area cover member 2600 on the front side. That is, since the area covering member 2600 is an essential constituent member that constitutes a part of the flow path of the game ball, for example, a malicious player removes the area covering member 2600 and plant it in the right game area 5b. Even if the provided obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are illegally bent and the game is played as it is, the game ball cannot move as expected in design when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is configured to lead to damage of parts, etc., and make it difficult to play the game normally. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of removing the area covering member 2600 and illegally bending the obstructing nail.

Next, FIGS. 215(a) to 215(c) show sectional views of the implanted portion of the obstacle nail in the right game area 5b. Specifically, the illustration shows a manner in which the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1209 and 1212 to 1218 implanted in the panel convex portion 1117 are accommodated in the penetration portion 2610 of the area covering member 2600, and this embodiment , the nail head of each obstructing nail is configured to be accommodated within the thickness of the area covering member 2600 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the thickness of the area covering member 2600 is set to 2 mm, and the dimension (h) from the front surface of the panel protrusion 1117 where each obstructing nail is implanted to the front surface of the area covering member 2600. is approximately 18 mm. Also, the distance (w) between the center of the nail head of each obstructing nail and the end of each penetrating portion 2610 of the area covering member 2600 is approximately 4 mm. Therefore, since the diameter of the nail head of the obstructing nail is about 4 mm, the gap between the peripheral end of the nail head and the open end of each through portion 2610 is about 2 mm.

To describe this embodiment more specifically, the sectional view of FIG. 215(a) shows how the nail heads of obstructing nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613. As shown in FIG. In this case, the gap from the peripheral end of the nail head of each of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203 to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area covering member 2600 is approximately 2 mm as described above. The center of the nail head and the center of each penetrating portion are configured to match.

The sectional view of FIG. 215(b) shows how the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 are accommodated in the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618. As shown in FIG. In this case, the gaps from the peripheral edge of the nail heads of the pair of adjacent obstructing nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 to the open ends of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area covering member 2600 are the same as described above. It is approximately 2 mm.

The sectional view of FIG. 215(c) shows how the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1216 to 1218 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2619. As shown in FIG. In this case, the clearance from the peripheral end of the nail head of each of the obstructing nails 1216 to 1218 to the open end of the penetrating portion 2619 provided in the area covering member 2600 is approximately 2 mm as described above.

As described above, since the gap between the outer peripheral edge of the nail head of the obstructing nail and the open end of the penetrating part 2610 constituting the receiving part is only about 2 mm, a tool for bending the obstructing nail is required. It becomes difficult to insert the obstructing nail, and even if the obstructing nail is improperly bent in some way, the peripheral edge of the nail head of the obstructing nail and the open end of the penetrating part 2610 interfere with each other. The degree of bending is limited to a very small amount, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail. Further, when the obstructing nail is illegally bent, the central position of the penetrating part 2610 and the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail are eccentric, so that the eccentricity can be visually recognized from the front, thereby facilitating the illegal act. can be discovered.

As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

For example, the relationship between the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion 2610 constituting the accommodating portion for the obstructing nail is as described above based on the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The form is not limited, and the form of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610 can be variously changed as follows.

In the example of the penetrating portion 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 228(a) to (c), two points on the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a, one on the front side of the region covering member 2600a and the other on the panel plate 1110 side, are: A convex portion with a small cross section is formed. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstacle nail 1220, traces such as chipping and denting are likely to remain on the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail.

On the other hand, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. there is According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Moreover, compared with the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 228(a) to 228(c), it is possible to easily process and form the convex portions.

230(a) to 230(d) and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 231(a) to 231(d). A convex portion with a small cross section is formed on either the front side of or the panel plate 1110 side. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail.

232(a) to 232(e), the front side of the area covering member 2600a in the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a is closed integrally with the area covering member 2600a, A receiving recess 2670 is formed to receive the nail head. According to such a configuration, since it is impossible to access the obstructing nail 1220 from the front side of the area covering member 2600a, it is possible to prevent the illegal bending of the obstructing nail 1220 in advance. Furthermore, when the blocking part is destroyed and a tool or the like is inserted, the trace remains, which makes it easier to detect fraudulent acts, and it is possible to suppress acts of illegally bending the obstructing nail. becomes.

In addition, in the examples shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), a rib of about several millimeters may be provided at the open end of the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area covering member 2600a. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for a tool for illegally bending an obstacle nail, a piano wire, or the like to access the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220 housed in the penetration portion 2610a, and the tool cannot be forcibly bent. When the nail is inserted, traces such as cracks and dents remain on the rib, so that the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail can be further suppressed. Furthermore, by providing the ribs, the strength of the through portion 2610a can be increased, and the rigidity of the area covering member 2600a itself can be increased.

In the present embodiment and the other examples described above, various modes of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodation portion for the obstructing nail were exemplified. Various forms can be adopted as long as they can accommodate all or part of the obstructing nail in a front view and function as an accommodating portion, including a penetrating portion having a similar shape.

In addition, a decorative seal with a decorative pattern may be attached to the front surface of the area covering member 2600. This not only improves the design of the area covering member 2600 itself, If a tool or the like is forcibly inserted into the gap between the end portion and the open end portion of the through portion 2610, traces such as scratches or peeling will remain on the decorative seal, making it easier to discover fraudulent acts. , it is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. By attaching a decorative sticker with a through-hole corresponding to the through-hole 2610 to the surface of the area cover member 2600, the game area can be decorated at the rear side position of the obstacle nail. In contrast to the conventional technology in which only cell sheet decoration (cell decoration) is performed, a decorative sticker with a through hole attached to the area cover member 2600 can be used to create a game area close to the obstacle nail at the front position of the obstacle nail. decoration becomes possible. In addition, by adopting such a decorative seal attached to the area covering member 2600 together with the cell decoration, a three-dimensional decoration can be realized on both the rear side and the front side of the obstacle nail, and a game area that has never been seen before can be achieved. New decorations are possible. In this case, the area covering member 2600 is made of a transparent material, and the decorative sticker attached to the area covering member 2600 has a translucent part that allows the rear cell decoration area to be visually recognized. preferably. In the above embodiment, a sheet-shaped decorative seal was explained as an example, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a sticker. You may make it decorate directly by methods, such as processing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 was formed as a single unit and attached to the front side of the front unit 2000, but it is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. It may be formed integrally with various prize winning devices, decoration members, and the like provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the trouble of attaching the area cover member 2600 in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the area covering member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the channel device 2700 and the right gaming area 5b, but is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. , the area cover member 2600 may be divided into a member covering the channel device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b, and may be configured to be attached to the front unit 2000 respectively.

In the above-described embodiment, the channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b are covered with the area cover member 2600. However, the invention is not limited to this embodiment. It is also possible to attach the region covering member 2600 to an arbitrary location.

For example, it is possible to attach the area covering member 2600a of the present invention to the game area shown in the front view of FIG. 225(a) in the manner shown in the front view of FIG. 225(b). More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area covering member 2600a has a substantially rectangular penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called dead nail 1230. a notch-shaped penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232; and a slot shape that accommodates the nail heads of four right guide nails 1233. are formed, and are screwed and fixed from the back side of the panel plate 1110 to four boss portions 2660 integrally formed with the region cover member 2600a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally bending each obstacle nail that greatly affects the winning rate of the game ball to the first start hole 2002 . Furthermore, since the area cover member 2600a is fixed with screws from the rear side of the panel plate 1110, it is not possible to easily access the screws, and it is possible to prevent illegal bending of obstructing nails. ing. In this embodiment, the area cover member 2600a is provided so as to accommodate the obstructing nails planted around the first start opening 2002, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other game areas may be provided. Also, an area covering member 2600a may be provided, and it is also possible to cover the entire game area with a single area covering member 2600a.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 211, the through portion 2620 having the cutout portion formed in the area cover member 2600 is formed by the member forming the outer edge of the game area. Although the cross section of the notch portion is configured to be closed, it is not limited to such an embodiment. , the notch portion of the through portion may be closed. In addition, the cutout portion in the through portion may be provided in any direction of the area covering member 2600. In this case, another component existing at a position facing the cutout portion may be provided in the cutout portion. should be configured to close

Also, FIG. 234 illustrates an installation mode of a region covering member 2600 in another embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 234(a), the obstructing nails 1212 and 1213 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2617 serving as the accommodating portion for the obstructing nail, and a part of the penetrating portion 2617 has a notch portion. is provided.

234(a) shows that all of the obstructing nails, including obstructing nails 1212 and 1213, are in their designed positions. By locating the nail head portion of the obstructing nail 1213 inside the line connecting the notched ends 2617a, it is possible to visually confirm that the obstructing nail 1213 is in the designed position.

On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 234(b), the obstructing nail 1213 is improperly bent, and the nail head of the obstructing nail 1213 crosses the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a. It is configured so that it is possible to easily visually recognize that the obstructing nail is illegally bent by being visually recognized in the state of exceeding. FIG. 234(a) shows an example in which the obstacle nail 1213 is positioned inside the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a as designed. The region covering member 2600 is formed so as to be positioned on the line connecting the ends 2617a (so that the obstructing nail 1213 overlaps the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a in a front view) as designed. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 234(b), if the line that connects the two notched ends 2617a is crossed, the fraud can be easily discovered.

By the way, in a pachinko machine as a game machine, the ball output rate (the degree of prize winning) is greatly influenced by the adjustment of obstacle nails planted on the board surface of the game board. Depending on the ball output rate, the number of customers entering the hall changes greatly, which greatly affects the sales of the game hall. Therefore, it is necessary to check the condition of the obstructing nail at the time of installation of the game machine and at appropriate timing after installation, and to adjust the obstructing nail as necessary. Conventionally, therefore, a nail sheet has been used in order to easily and accurately check the condition of a plurality of obstructing nails and adjust the nails.

The nail sheet is formed into a thin sheet by using a translucent or transparent plastic film or paper material. A pattern corresponding to each obstacle nail is printed on the surface of the nail sheet in the same manner as the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail planted on the game board.

In order to check the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstructing nails actually planted in the game board and the designed gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet, conventionally printed on the nail sheet together with the above gauge arrangement Various accessory devices and various prize winning devices are aligned with the top surface of the various accessory devices and various prize winning devices that are actually placed on the game board, and are superimposed on each other. I was checking the gauge array of.

However, in general, in addition to obstacle nails, various members such as multiple prize-winning devices, windmills, stages, decorative members, etc. also vary. Therefore, when the thin and freely deformable nail sheet is arranged on the game board, it is quite difficult even for a skilled person to arrange the nail sheet so as not to be twisted due to the irregularities on the back surface of the nail sheet. As a result, there has been a problem that it is impossible to accurately grasp the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails planted on the game board and the gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet.

The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine in which the positions of obstructing nails can be relatively easily confirmed.

FIG. 216 shows a front view of the nail sheet 5000 corresponding to the game panel 1100 in this embodiment. In the nail sheet 5000, the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail printed body 5200 and the pattern of various arrangement members around the obstacle nail printed body 5200 are printed on an A4 size transparent film sheet 5100 in black.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 216, a first area printed on the nail sheet 5000 is used so that the array of gauges at a plurality of locations on the game panel 1100 can be confirmed using a limited range within the nail sheet 5000. A body 5110 and a second area printed body 5120 are printed, and the gauge arrays corresponding to the two obstruction nail implantation areas and the peripheral arrangement members are printed separately.

When using the nail sheet 5000 shown in FIG. 216 to check the gauge arrangement of the actually implanted obstructing nails, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The outer edge of the area cover member 2600 and the plurality of through parts 2610 printed on the surface are aligned accurately and superimposed on the game panel 1100, and the printed obstacle nail printed body 5200 and the obstacle nails planted on the back surface are provided. Check for any discrepancy between

As described above, the area covering member 2600 of this embodiment is shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 211, the layout plan view of the obstructing nails in FIG. As shown, the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the circular through portions 2611 to 2613 of the area covering member 2600 when viewed from the front. , 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 , two of which are adjacent to each other. It is configured to accommodate ~1218 nail heads. A through portion 2620 having a partial notch is formed in the right end portion of the region covering member 2600 in front view, and the nail heads of the adjacent two obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the through portion 2620. configured to accommodate the part.

214, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the rear side of the area cover member 2600 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. The member 2600 is screwed on the rear side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 214, screws screwed into mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 from behind the game panel 1100 are provided so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. can be accessed, but the screws screwed into the mounting bosses 2632 are blocked by the panel plate 1110 and cannot be accessed. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself is temporarily removed. It is constructed so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110 .

Also, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. 212, the area covering member 2600 of the present embodiment covers the flow channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b in which a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted. In this way, it is provided on the game panel 1100 to form a wide and flat surface on the game panel 1100 . Due to such a characteristic configuration, when the very soft nail sheet 5000 is placed on the game panel 1100, it is superimposed on the above-mentioned flat surface, so that it affects various members and obstacle nails that protrude forward in different amounts. The nail sheet 5000 can be stably overlaid on the game panel 1100 without being damaged, even by a non-expert, and without twisting.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the front view of FIG. 208, a large winning opening 2005 is arranged below the right game area 5b, and a large winning opening (not shown) is placed in front of the large winning opening 2005. A mouth cover member is provided. It should be noted that, like the area cover member 2600, the large winning opening cover member is formed to have flat surfaces on the front side and the rear side, and the area covering member 2600 is installed above the large winning opening cover member. and the front side are flush with each other. With such a configuration, the region covering member 2600 and the large winning opening covering member can form a wider flat surface on the game panel 1100 , and the nail sheet 5000 can be further laid on the game panel 1100 . It is possible to stably superimpose them.

211 and the rear perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. A plurality of penetrating portions 2610 having different shapes are formed, and when the nail sheets 5000 are superimposed, the shape of the penetrating portions printed on the nail sheet 5000 can be superimposed on the penetrating portions 2610 on the back surface to facilitate the positioning. In addition, it is possible to accurately position the nail sheet 5000 and quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstructing nail while observing the eccentricity between the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion.

As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

In the above-described embodiment, the region cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the channel device 2700 and the right game region 5b, but is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. The member 2600 may be provided on the game panel 1100 separately into a member covering the channel device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b. That is, even if the area covering member 2600 having a flat surface on the front side is divided and mounted on the game panel 1100, one large flat surface can be formed. It is possible to stack on the front of the 2600.

Also, the area covering member 2600 may be integrally formed so as to cover a wider area of the game area, and such a configuration allows the nail sheet 5000 to be stably overlaid on the front surface of the area covering member 2600. is.

In addition, the area covering member 2600 in the above-described embodiment was constructed of a single member capable of covering the channel device 2700 and the right playing area 5b. Any range may be covered with a single area covering member or multiple area covering members, for example, as shown in the front view of FIG. One example is the provision of an area cover member 2600a for accommodating an obstructing nail.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and accurately superimpose the nail sheets 5000 at any place on the game panel 1100, and it is possible to quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstructing nails. Become.

(Third Embodiment)
The third embodiment will be described below based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 208-235.

By the way, a pachinko machine as a game machine is equipped with a plurality of obstacle nails. There was fraudulent activity. For the purpose of preventing such fraudulent acts, conventionally, a decorative cover is provided on the winning gate device so that the entrance obstruction nail planted directly above the winning gate device cannot be illicitly bent. A concentric restricting portion is provided at a position corresponding to the obstructing nail for the introduction port. (For example, JP-A-2008-188259).

In general, the ball output rate (degree of winning) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle nails planted on the board surface of the game board. They have a great interest in the direction of inclination of the nail, and if the state of the obstructing nail is in a disadvantageous state for the game, they tend not to play the game with the game machine.

On the other hand, in the prior art as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. Since the relative positional relationship between the introduction port obstruction nail and the restricting portion forming the penetrating portion is grasped, the player can recognize that the entrance obstruction nail is inclined in a direction disadvantageous to the winning of the game ball. there was a risk of causing a decrease in interest if

The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

In order to deal with the above problems, in this embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. is the most important feature.

An area covering member 2600a in this embodiment illustrated in FIG. 218 shares the basic configuration with the above-described second embodiment, and an obstacle nail 1219 is provided in the same manner as the area covering member 2600 of the second embodiment. , 1220 are housed in the through portion 2610a.

On the other hand, the area covering member 2600a in the present embodiment has an obstacle nail 1219 planted near the first start opening 2002 that greatly affects the winning degree of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 under the above-described problem. , 1220 are accommodated in the through portion 2610a.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(a), the area covering member 2600a is attached to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002, and the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 are attached as shown in FIG. 218(a). It is accommodated in the through portion 2610a in the manner illustrated in b).

As a method for attaching the area covering member 2600a to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. It is possible. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 218(d), it is also possible to integrally mold and attach the decorative member of the first starting port 2002 .

As an example of this embodiment, FIG. 219 shows a plurality of embodiments in which the central position of the penetrating portion 2610a formed in the area covering member 2600a is shifted from the central position of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. ing.

That is, in order to solve the conventional problems described above, the center of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 are attached to the area covering member 2600a without bending or adjusting the actually planted obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. By forming (eccentrically) the penetrating portion 2610a with a position shifted from the position as the center position, is it an advantageous or disadvantageous state compared to the actual implanted state of the obstructing nail (curvature of the obstructing nail, etc.)? , which is visually recognized by the player.

For example, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(a), the central position of the through portion 2610a on the right side in the front view is shifted to the left from the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1220. A player who sees such an eccentric mode is given the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is spread outward, and it is possible to induce a desire to play the game machine.

In the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(b), the center position of the through portion 2610a on the left side in the front view is shifted to the right side of the center position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1219, thereby It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is spread outward, and induce the desire to play the game machine.

Furthermore, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(c), the central positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are shifted inward from the central positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220, thereby It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward, and to induce the desire to play the game machine.

On the other hand, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(d), the center position of the through portion 2610a on the right side in the front view is shifted to the right side of the center position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1220, so that this It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the right obstruction nail 1220 is not bent inward, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(e), the central position of the through portion 2610a on the left side in the front view is shifted leftward from the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1219, thereby It is possible to give the player who sees the illusion that the left obstacle nail 1219 is bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the left obstruction nail 1219 is not bent inward, the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219(f), the central positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are shifted outward from the central positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220, thereby It is possible to give the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the obstruction nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are not bent inward, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 219(a) to (f), area covering members 2600a having different formation positions of the penetrating portions 2610a are produced, and replaced as appropriate to make the first starting port 2002. It is very troublesome because it needs to be attached to the decorative part of the. Therefore, in the following, based on FIGS. 220(a) to (e), it is possible to reduce the trouble of manufacturing a plurality of area covering members 2600a and the trouble of storing and exchanging the plurality of area covering members 2600a on the amusement arcade side. An embodiment will be described.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 220(a), in this embodiment, one area covering member 2600a is formed with four through-holes 2610a, and the two lower through-holes 2610a are replaced by the upper two through-holes. It is formed inside from 2610a. Then, when attached to the decorative portion of the first starting port 2002 with the illustrated Δ-shaped mark facing upward, as shown in the front view of FIG. The player can visually recognize the center position and the center positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides in the same state. Further, if the area cover member 2600a is rotated 180 degrees and the Δ-shaped mark is directed downward without exchanging the area cover member 2600a, the central positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are aligned as shown in the front view of FIG. 220(c). The nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides can be arranged inside from the central positions of the nail heads, thereby giving the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward. It is possible.

Also, as shown in FIG. 220(d), when the region covering member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the right and the triangle-shaped mark is placed facing right, the left obstructing nail 1219 is spread outward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220(e), if the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the left and the Δ-shaped mark is placed facing the left side, the right side It is possible to give the player the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 is spread upward and slightly outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to variously change the viewing mode for the player with one area covering member 2600a without increasing the number of area covering members 2600a.

As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

For example, as shown in FIG. 221(a), it is possible to form an egg-shaped through portion 2610a in the area covering member 2600a and attach it to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 221(b). By moving the area covering member 2600a downward from the installation mode to the installation mode shown in FIG. It is possible to make an illusion like this. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game machine.

The shape of the penetrating portion 2610a is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the penetrating portion 2610a may be of various shapes as long as the player can visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the penetrating portion 2610a and the obstacle nail. can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 222(a), the shape of the through portion 2610a can be a substantially square shape with R portions arranged at the corners. It is also possible to have a square shape.

Furthermore, the penetrating portion 2610a of the present invention is not necessarily limited to a closed shape, and as shown in FIG. , 1220 of the nail heads. Further, as shown in FIG. 222(d), a notch-shaped penetrating portion may be formed in an oblique direction to accommodate the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. FIG.

In addition, from the viewpoint of making the state of the obstacle nail visible, the penetration part 2610a of the present invention may accommodate the nail heads of a plurality of obstacle nails in one penetration part 2610a. As shown in the figure, the shape of the through portion 2610a provided in the area covering member 2600a is an elongated hole, and the nail heads of a plurality of obstacle nails 1221, 1222 (or 1223, 1224) are accommodated in one through portion 2610a. It is also possible to configure Then, as shown in FIG. 223(b), by forming two long-hole-shaped through portions 2610a at inner positions in the region cover member 2600a, the player visually recognized from the front can see the obstacle nails 1221 and 1222. , 1223, 1224 are spread outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game machine.

In addition, in the above-described various embodiments, the area covering member is targeted for obstructive nails planted in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, such as so-called dead nails that greatly affect the winning rate of the first starting port 2002. 2600a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to the obstacle nail as described above. An area covering member 2600a may be provided to accommodate the obstruction nail within the penetration 2610a. That is, the player is made to visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the nail head of the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the region cover member 2600a, and the state of the obstructing nail is advantageous or disadvantageous for the game. If it is possible to recognize whether the player is in a good state or not, it is possible to increase the willingness to play the game machine.

For example, another embodiment illustrated in the front views of FIGS. 225 and 226 shows the installation of an area covering member 2600a for accommodating a plurality of obstructing nails planted around the first opening 2002. More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the region covering member 2600a has a substantially rectangular penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called dead nail 1230. , a notch-shaped through-hole 2652 for accommodating the nail heads of the two left-side guide nails 1232, and a length for accommodating the nail-heads of the four right-side guide nails 1233. A hole-shaped through portion 2653 is formed, and is screwed from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 to four boss portions 2660 formed integrally with the area cover member 2600a.

A region cover member 2600a is provided in the manner shown in FIG. 225(b) with respect to the game region shown in FIG. 225(a). The area covering member 2600a provided in FIG. 225(b) is configured so that the player can visually recognize the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 in a state that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous. 2, the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is positioned at the center of the penetrating part 2651 and the nail head of the life nail 1230 is positioned below the penetrating part 2650 .

On the other hand, the area covering member 2600a illustrated in FIGS. 226(a) and 226(b) includes the area covering member 2600a of FIG. The formation correspondence of the through portion 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is different, and the area covering member 2600a shown in FIG. A longer penetrating portion 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is formed by shifting downward. With such a configuration, a player who visually recognizes the states of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in an advantageous state for winning a prize at the starting port 2002, and to increase the player's willingness to play.

Conversely, the region covering member 2600a shown in FIG. are formed in short. With such a configuration, a player who visually recognizes the states of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in a disadvantageous state for winning a prize at the starting port 2002, thereby increasing the player's interest in selecting a gaming machine to play. Moreover, even if it is visually recognized in a seemingly disadvantageous state, the actual state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is not in a state disadvantageous to winning, so the winning rate to the first start port 2002 is reduced. It's not going down. Therefore, a player who has played the game while visually confirming that the jump nail 1231 or the life nail 1230 is in a disadvantageous state will be surprised and exhilarated by the relatively good winning rate of the first start port 2002. can feel the feeling.

225 and 226. For example, as shown in the front view of FIG. The state of the nail head is determined by whether the nail head is located inside the line connecting the ends of the notched portions of the penetrating portion 2650 or outside beyond the line connecting the ends. It is also possible to configure so that the user can grasp it.

Also, the method of installing the area cover member 2600a to the game panel 1100 is not limited to the method of fixing to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002 described above. 223(d) or (e), it is possible to fix the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 from the front side with screws or the like. As a fixing method, a mounting boss may be integrally formed with the panel plate 1110 as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. A screw hole may be provided on the 1110 side, and at that time, as shown in the front view of FIG. preferably.

Furthermore, the manner in which the area cover member 2600a is attached to the panel plate 1110 is not limited to the embodiment described above. It is also possible to fix the area covering member 2600a by using the above structure. With such a configuration, since the area covering member 2600a cannot be easily removed from the front side of the game machine, the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail is prevented. can be prevented.

In the present embodiment and the other examples described above, various modes of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodation portion for the obstructing nail were exemplified. Various forms can be adopted as long as they can accommodate all or part of the obstructing nail in a front view and function as an accommodating portion, including a penetrating portion having a similar shape.

By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 207 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-093655, the progress of the game is indicated to the player by the display contents on the predetermined display means, By operating the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel interesting. However, some players find it troublesome to move their line of sight from the predetermined display means to the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine, and do not move their line of sight to the movable decoration means that has been activated. In such a case, there is a risk that the player will not be able to fully enjoy the excitement of operating the movable decoration means.

Below, the movable decoration provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine, because the player feels troublesome to move the line of sight to the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine. An embodiment of a game machine capable of making the player feel a sense of interest even when the line of sight does not move to the means will be described.

Figures 236 and 237 show a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 154 . In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, in addition to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit 570 includes a frame movable body shaped like a root vegetable. Root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that can move in any direction.

236(A), 236(B), 237(A), and 237(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 236(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 236(D) and 236(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIG. 237(C) is a front view showing the internal structure of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. FIG. 236(A), 236(C), and 236(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Shows the stowed state. FIG. 236(B) shows a state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have moved to the moving positions. there is FIG. 237(A) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has moved to the movement position. there is FIGS. 236(E) and 237(B) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement positions.

As shown in FIG. 237(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 imitating root vegetable leaves on the right side in a front view. In addition, a root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 imitating the root of a root vegetable is provided on the left side in a front view. Root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 are each made of white translucent synthetic resin, and root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 is provided inside.

As shown in FIGS. 236(A), 236(B), etc., the lower end of the right connecting linear member 7820 is attached to a predetermined position on the left side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. A lower end portion of a left connecting linear member 7830 is attached to a predetermined position on the right side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in front view. On the other hand, the upper end of the right coupling linear member 7820 is connected to the right up-and-down drive mechanism 7825 . In addition, the upper end of the left connecting linear member 7830 is connected to the left vertical motion drive mechanism 7835 . The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are string-shaped and have a predetermined length.

The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are specifically composed of a tubular cable, inside of which a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. A signal line (not shown) and a feeder line (not shown) for supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are provided. The signal line and the feeder line may be configured to be provided inside either one of the right connecting wire member 7820 and the left connecting wire member 7830 . It should be noted that instead of transmitting a signal or supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 by wire, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 wirelessly. A loop antenna or the like may be used to feed power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the side of the door frame 3 in a non-contact manner.

The right vertical motion drive mechanism 7825 and the left vertical motion drive mechanism 7835 each have a rotation mechanism (not shown). It is possible to wind up and down the right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 configured by.

An opening (not shown) is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and by passing through the opening, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved downward from the state stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to change the position to the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, or to the state to be stored in the door frame top unit 570 from the state to be positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. be. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 237(A), it is possible to move the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to a position in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, by rotating the rotation mechanism in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be moved from the state in which it is positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. It can be moved to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 shown in 236(A).

As shown in FIG. 237(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 inside. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting part 7810 has a shape along the outer shape of the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 that constitute the front surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 . It consists of a white printed circuit board. As a specific configuration of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting section 7810, for example, the configuration described above for the face substrate 6020 may be adopted. By driving and controlling a plurality of light sources (for example, full-color LEDs) mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board by the peripheral control board 1510, the first cover portion 7802 of the movable root vegetable frame and the second cover portion 7804 of the movable root vegetable frame are controlled. It is possible to have a luminescence decoration mode of a predetermined luminescence color.

As the light emitting mode of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810, the same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode described above for the rear wall substrate 6352 may be adopted. For example, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a root-like portion of the root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting portion 7810, is caused to emit white light, and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion like a leaf, emits white light. By causing a plurality of light sources corresponding to one cover portion 7802 to emit green light, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be made into a light-emitting decorative mode imitating a radish. On the other hand, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion simulating a root, emits red light, and a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802, which is a portion simulating a leaf. By emitting green light from the light source of , it is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 into a light-emitting decorative mode imitating a carrot.

An example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 154 is shown, but FIGS. 185, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be provided. Moreover, in such an embodiment, it may be configured so as to execute the effect mode shown below. In an embodiment in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be operated, one of these frame movable bodies The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be moved in response to the motion of at least one frame movable body (moving from the standby position to the moving position, changing from the stopped state to the rotating state, etc.).

238 and 239, an effect mode using the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below. 238(A) and 238(B) show the moving state of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), and a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means. It is the time chart which showed the display mode and the movement state of the 2nd movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). 239(A) to 239(C) are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing of such an effect mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 238, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. These points also apply to the time charts shown in later-described FIGS. 242, 244, 245, 249 to 253, and the like, and to the performance modes obtained by modifying them.

FIG. 238(A) shows an effect mode using the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237. FIG. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. do. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

FIG. 239(A) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is in the reach state at timing t7, and a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 has started to be displayed. The display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts immediately after this (0.1 second or the like).

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement positions is dynamically displayed.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete movement to the movement positions. Simultaneously, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed in a manner simulating the state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 239(B) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed their movement to the movement positions at timing t9. It shows a state in which a simulated image simulating a body 7200 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It will remain stationary in position. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is terminated.

In FIG. 239(C), at timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 displays a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows a state in which it has moved to a position that overlaps the previous position in a front view.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t22, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. From timing t22 to timing t24, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At this time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement position is not displayed. At timing t24, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 238(B) shows a game having the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. It shows the production mode when applied to the machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. Reach state. At timing t7, drive control by peripheral control board 1510 causes right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to change from a state of being stopped in door frame top unit 570 to a state of being rotated. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It will remain stationary in position. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is terminated.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. At timing t<b>24 , the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state where they are housed in the door frame top unit 570 .

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

During the game, the player keeps looking at the predetermined display means (the game board side effect display device 1600) in which the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed. A simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means is displayed on a predetermined display means in accordance with the drive control of the provided first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). As a result, the player is notified that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled, so that the player does not notice that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled. , the situation that the player cannot feel the excitement due to the driving control of the first movable decoration means, or the player carelessly touches the first movable decoration means and gets injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

On the other hand, a player who is reluctant to visually recognize the driving control of the first movable decoration means, such as feeling tired, directly recognizes that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled. It is possible to virtually experience the operation of the first movable decoration means by viewing a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means displayed on the predetermined display means instead of viewing.

Furthermore, since the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves to a position overlapping the display position of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means in a front view, the first movable decoration means To impose a burden such as moving the line of sight on a reluctant player who does not move the line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means in spite of being aware that the decoration means is driven and controlled. Instead, it is possible for the user to feel the interest caused by the movement of the second movable decoration means.
In addition, it is possible to make such passive players regain their positive attitude towards games.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 238(A) and 238(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move forward of the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing t13. , In addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves forward of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move forward of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame A presentation mode in which the player continues to be positioned at the standby position in the top unit 570 may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, after the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves the right ear frame movable body 7100. A rendering mode in which the simulated image and the simulated left ear frame movable body 7200 are superimposed in a front view with respect to the display position of the simulated simulated image, and a rendering mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 continues to be positioned at the standby position. and can be executed.

Further, when the performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved is executed, the expectation of the occurrence of the big hit state is higher than when the performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is not moved is executed. may be configured.

With such a configuration, after the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) is displayed, the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is driven and controlled to move to a position where the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means is superimposed when viewed from the front, and the second movable decoration means stands by. Since the second effect mode of continuing to be positioned is executed, the player's interest is focused on whether or not the second movable decoration means moves.

Further, when the first effect mode is executed and when the second effect mode is executed, there is a state (jackpot state) in which the player is more advantageous when the first effect mode is executed. If the degree of expectation is increased, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the movement of the second movable decoration means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 238(A) and 238(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 from timing t13 to timing t14. However, it may be configured to provide a plurality of operation modes when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves forward of the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then returns to the standby position (timing t15). Alternatively, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then moves to the moving position (timing t15). can be configured to run In this case, it is preferable that the probability of occurrence of the big win state is higher when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position.

Alternatively, during the period (timing t14 to timing t18) after the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes movement to the game board side effect display device 1600 and starts to move into the door frame top unit 570, the root vegetable frame movable body In addition to the mode in which 7800 is stopped in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, it may be configured to move in a predetermined operation mode within the range in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

In addition, a plurality of operation modes may be provided when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves into the door frame top unit 570 and returns. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 returns from the movement position to the standby position from timing t18 to timing t19, and in addition, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at an intermediate position between the standby position and the movement position. (Between timing t18 and timing t19), after that, it returns to the waiting position (timing t20).

A mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the moving position, a mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position, and a mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the moving position to the standby position have been shown. A combination of the operation modes may be adopted as a plurality of operation modes for operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 . Further, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state may differ depending on the plurality of operation modes.

With such a configuration, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves, drive control is performed in one of a plurality of operation modes when it moves. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means moves, the player's interest is focused on how the second movable decoration means moves.

Furthermore, when the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (big win state) is configured to differ depending on the operation mode, the player will not be able to understand in what mode the second movable decoration means will move. It is possible to raise the expectation of

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to be in a light-off state until the forward movement of the game board side effect display device 1600 is completed, and to be in a light emitting decoration state after the movement to the movement position is completed. . Specifically, from timing t13 to timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned off, and at timing t14 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned into the light emitting decorative state. , the light emitting decoration state should be continued until timing t18 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving to the storage position. Alternatively, the luminous decoration state may be continued until timing t19 at which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes movement to the storage position. As the luminous decorative state, it is preferable to select one of the above-described radish-like luminescence mode and carrot-like luminescence mode based on the result of a special lottery.

In this way, after moving the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) to the movement position in front of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in the off state, the luminous decoration is made at the movement position. By setting the state, it is possible to give the player a big surprise. In addition, by setting the luminous decoration state based on the result of the special lottery, the player can have a sense of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be advantageous to the player (big win). Further, when the second movable decoration means is accommodated in the standby position, by continuing the luminous decoration state, interest in the first movable decoration means located on the extension line of the movement direction of the second movable decoration means is increased. It becomes possible for the player to hold it.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239, at the same time as the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts, in the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 , display of a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are started. In addition, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238(A), at the same time as the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position is completed, the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the substantially central display area, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed to complete the movement to the movement position. In addition, the right ear frame movable from the standby position to the moving position, such as timing t9 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 238(A) and timing t7 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. In the same manner as the operation state of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have changed from the non-rotating state at the standby position to the rotating state, during these periods , a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the first movable decoration means changes from the first state (positioned at the standby position) to the second state (positioned at the moving position or rotating state). The state of (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) can be accurately grasped by visual recognition of predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600).

On the other hand, a simulated image simulating the right ear-frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear-frame movable body 7200 are displayed in a manner different from the operating states of the right ear-frame movable body 7100 and the left ear-frame movable body 7200 . may be configured to do so.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 238A, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move and appear from timing t7 to timing t9. However, this dynamic display may be performed again from timing t9 to timing t11, and further from timing t11 to timing t13.

In this way, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame shifts from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving state). Even after the change, a simulated image simulating the operation mode of the first movable decoration means is dynamically displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), so that the player can see the first movable decoration means. It is possible to make the user interested in the operation of the decoration means. In the above example, such dynamic display is performed twice (period from timing t9 to timing t11 and period from timing t11 to timing t13), but dynamic display may be performed once. It is good also as 3 times or more.

Further, at timing t9 in the example shown in FIG. 238(A), the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, and the game board side effect display device is displayed. It may be configured such that it starts to move upward within the display area of 1600, then moves upward within the display area, and moves out of the display area at timing t11. Furthermore, from timing t11 to timing t13, a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be similarly dynamically displayed. FIG. 240(A) is a diagram showing the state at timing t10 in such an embodiment, in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570. It shows the state of moving upward.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame are changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved position). position), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear A simulated image imitating the frame movable body 7200) is configured to be moved in a predetermined direction suggesting the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be positioned on an extension line of the moving direction of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates to change from the first state to the second state. In addition, it is possible to directly suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. In addition, an action that is impossible in the actual action of the first movable decoration means is performed with a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means. It is possible to have it brought to

Alternatively, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the example shown in FIG. It may be configured to dynamically display so as to alternately appear and appear from simulated images. FIG. 240(B) shows a state in which the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is half retracted with respect to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 .

In this example, the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame are changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved position). position), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear A simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7200) is displayed in a mode in which it reciprocates in a predetermined direction. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be positioned on an extension line of the reciprocating direction when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates to change from the first state to the second state. In addition, it is possible to suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. Also, the comical display of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means makes it possible for the player to take an interest in the operation of the first movable decoration means.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 240(A) and 240(B), the first movable decoration means provided on the frame (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) are After changing from the first state (standby state) to the second state (positioned at the movement position), the first movable decoration means moves to the first position in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). A dynamic display of a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (ears popping upward, ears moving bouncing, etc.) is performed in a manner different from the manner in which the state changes from the state of (1) to the second state. Configure.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the first movable decoration means actually operates.

On the other hand, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the presentation mode shown in FIG. 238(A), a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are dynamically displayed in a predetermined color. It may be configured to For example, in a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, after displaying an image in which the portion simulating the inner side of the ear is red and the portion simulating the outer side of the ear is white, the colors are exchanged and the ear is displayed. The display operation of displaying an image in which the part simulating the inside of the ear is white and the part simulating the outside of the ear is red may be repeated multiple times (for example, 5 times in total by changing the colors every second). . Further, such a display operation may be performed simultaneously on a simulated image simulating left ear frame movable body 7200 . FIG. 241(A) shows a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The part simulating the inside of the ear is white, and the outside of the ear is white. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which an image is displayed in which the simulated portion is red;

On the other hand, the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to continue to be displayed in a predetermined color without changing the colors. FIG. 241(B) shows, as a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, an image in which both a portion simulating the inside of the ear and a portion simulating the outside of the ear are pink, and a left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode in which, as a simulated image simulating the ear, an image in which both the portion simulating the inside of the ear and the portion simulating the outside of the ear are pink are continuously displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the first movable decoration means actually emits light.

The degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state may be different depending on each effect mode described with reference to FIG. 240 and FIG. For example, the production mode described with reference to FIG. 240(A) is configured to have a higher degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state than the production mode described with reference to FIG. 240(B). good too. In addition, the production mode described with reference to FIG. 241(A) is configured to have a higher degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state than the production mode described with reference to FIG. 241(B). good too.

Furthermore, it may be configured to execute an effect mode in which the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 240 and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 241 are combined. For example, the effect explained with reference to FIG. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state is higher in the performance mode in which the mode and the performance mode described with reference to FIG. 241(B) are combined.

Further, it is preferable to configure such that the ratio of execution of the performance modes with a high degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state is low. For example, the performance mode is adjusted so that the ratio of the number of executions of the performance mode with the lower expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state to the number of times of the performance mode with the higher expectation for the occurrence of the big win state is 9:1. It is good to set the execution ratio.

With such a configuration, a simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100) displayed on the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) By providing a plurality of display modes of the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the monotony of the presentation is eliminated, and it becomes possible for the player to take an interest in the first movable decoration means. . In addition, the act of visually recognizing the action itself of the first movable decoration means directly, and the act of visually recognizing the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means and knowing the degree of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to provide the player with interest as to which action he enjoys.

In addition, since the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (jackpot state) will occur is shown to the player by the display mode of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the first movable decoration means is visually recognized. In particular, it is possible to make a reluctant player recognize the presence of the first movable decoration means again.

In addition, the higher the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (big hit state), the lower the proportion of execution of the performance mode. Although many modes are visually recognized, a performance mode with a high degree of expectation and a low execution rate is rarely seen (for example, once in 10 times), which gives the player a sense of surprise. In addition, the players who have visually recognized the latter presentation mode are excited by the fact that the degree of expectation is high, and they become more interested in the first movable decoration means.

The light emitting states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are emitted so that they can be recognized in the same manner as the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to allow For example, in the state shown in FIG. 241(A), the outer sides of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are made to emit red light, or in the state shown in FIG. The entire movable frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 may be configured to emit pink light.

In this way, the light emission mode in the second state (positioned at the movement position) of the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame can be controlled in a predetermined manner. A simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200) displayed on the display means (game board side effect display device 1600) By making it the same as the image color of the image), when a player visually recognizing the predetermined display means tries to visually recognize the first movable decoration means, the player can quickly recognize the first movable decoration means. becomes possible.

In the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved in a configuration in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the special lottery after starting the variation of the decorative patterns. It may be configured as

For example, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is to be operated, the variation of the decorative symbols is started at substantially the center of the game board side production display device 1600, and from the state in which the decorative symbols are being varied, the decorative symbols being varied are displayed. is moved to the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 and displayed in a reduced size, and a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is displayed in the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. and the display of a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be started.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further the root vegetable frame is moved from the position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. After the movable frame body 7800 is moved in the direction to be stored in the door frame top unit 570, the decorative pattern that has been displayed on the upper right until then is moved to substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then the original size. It is preferable to configure such that the variable display is continued by expanding to 200 mm, and finally the stop display is performed in a manner suggesting the result of the lottery.

When such a decorative symbol variation mode is adopted, the decorative symbol variations are repeated approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

With this configuration, the player's line of sight stays at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600), and the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable Display of a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means and display of the second movable decoration means are provided for a reluctant player who feels stressed by visually recognizing the drive control of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). The movement of the decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is forced to move the line of sight, and the player feels stress.

At approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the decorative pattern starts to change, and at the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, a smaller size than the decorative pattern displayed substantially at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. Along with starting the variation of the decorative symbols, from the state in which the respective decorative symbols are varied, in the state where the variable display of the decorative symbols during variation is continued on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, the game board side. Display of the decorative pattern displayed in the approximate center of the production display device 1600 is temporarily terminated, and a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body are displayed in the approximate center of the game board side production display device 1600. 7200 may be configured to start displaying a simulated image.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the display area in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame is moved from the position overlapping the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the body 7800 in the direction in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is resumed, and finally, together with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right. , may be stopped and displayed in a mode suggesting the result of the lottery.

When such a variation mode of decorative symbols is employed, the variation of decorative symbols is repeated approximately in the center and upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

By adopting such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 where relatively large decorative patterns are displayed). , the first movable decoration means for a reluctant player who feels stressed by visually recognizing the drive control of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). The display of a simulated image imitating the root vegetable frame and the movement of the second movable decoration means (the root vegetable frame movable body 7800) make the player feel as if he/she is forced to move his or her line of sight, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stress. It becomes possible to

Although an example of displaying a small decorative pattern on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown, it is configured to be displayed on the lower right or lower left of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to be displayed. During the period of moving from the standby position to the moving position (timing t13 to timing t14 in FIGS. 238(A) and 238(B)) and the period of being positioned at the moving position (timing t14 to timing t18), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves. During the period of movement from the position to the standby position (timing t18 to timing t19 in FIGS. 238(A) and 238(B)), the small decorative pattern is not hidden by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. may Specifically, during these periods, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the small-sized decorative pattern should not overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, by the movement of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), the predetermined position of the predetermined display means (the game board side effect display device 1600 in which relatively small decorative patterns are displayed) By configuring so that the decorative pattern displayed in the lower right or lower left) is not hidden, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a reluctant player feels that the performance is excessive.

244, 245, etc., these display methods may be employed when displaying a simulated image imitating a modeled body and decoration patterns on the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side effect display device 1600 indicates when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. It may be configured to display the waiting time shown. A plurality of display modes will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 242(A) and 242(B). FIG. 242(A) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238(A). Also, FIG. 242(B) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238(B).

As a display of the standby time, for example, in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, "1" is displayed from timing t8 to timing t9. display a number, display the number "2" from timing t9 to timing t10, display the number "3" from timing t10 to timing t11, display the number "4" from timing t11 to timing t12, A character string “GO!!” (notation is abbreviated as “GO” in FIG. 242A) may be displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. In addition to the display of such numbers and characters, the character string "What if the root vegetables fall...?" It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200 .

Alternatively, without displaying such numbers and characters, the character string "What if root vegetables fall...?" It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200 .

Images (“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “GO!!”) suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates. is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) can be visually recognized. The player can recognize the timing when the second movable decoration means operates, and by displaying a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player's line of sight is moved to the first movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person overlooks the operation of the second movable decoration means. Further, for a passive player who does not move his/her line of sight toward the first movable decoration means, the operation timing of the second movable decoration means is suggested, so that the player can move his/her line of sight from the predetermined display means. It is possible to make the operation of the second movable decoration means wait without delay.

Also, at the same timing (timing t7) as the timing of displaying the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means operates at a predetermined timing (“If the root vegetables fall, ?”), the player can simultaneously recognize that the first movable decoration means is operating and that the second movable decoration means is operating. A particularly active player moves his line of sight first to the first movable decoration means and does not notice that the display suggesting that the second movable decoration means is being operated is being performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the second movable decoration means is overlooked.

In addition, by displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates near and adjacent to the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player can enjoy the second movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user does not notice that the image suggesting the waiting time until the means operates is displayed.

An example of displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. However, the second movable decoration means operates so as to overlap one or both of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It is also possible to display an image suggesting a waiting time until the movement or an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means will operate.

By adopting such a configuration, an image suggesting the wait time until the player operates the second movable decoration means and an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means will operate are displayed. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user does not notice that the user is there.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side effect display device 1600 indicates when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. Although an example of displaying the expected waiting time has been shown, instead of or in addition to such a display, a similar suggestion may be made by sound. For example, in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, as shown in FIGS. The voice "ichi" is output from t8 to timing t9, the voice "ni" is output from timing t9 to timing t10, the voice "san" is output from timing t10 to timing t11, and the voice "san" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. It may be configured to output the voice "Yon" and output the voice "Goo" from timing t12 to timing t13. Alternatively, from the timing t7 to the timing t13, the line "Konsai gararakka ba" is output as a voice, or some melody (the melody of about 6 seconds is output at least at the timing t13) is output. may be configured.

In this way, by adopting a configuration that outputs a sound suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates, the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100) , left ear frame movable body 7200), even when the line of sight has moved to the first movable decoration means, the timing at which the second movable decoration means operates can be audibly recognized. Thus, it is possible to fully enjoy the operation of the first movable decoration means until just before the second movable decoration means operates.

Furthermore, in the case of a player who does not move his line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means, he visually recognizes predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) for performing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means. As for the action itself, the player does not necessarily continue to visually recognize the predetermined display means by operating a mobile phone or smartphone, but the timing of the operation of the second movable decoration means is audibly indicated to the player by sound. Therefore, it is possible to restore the willingness to visually recognize the predetermined display means and the second movable decorative means.

238(A) and 238(B) show an embodiment in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position overlapping the left and right ear frame movable body simulated images in a front view. After moving the frame movable body 7800 to the moving position, it may be configured to periodically move up and down at the moving position. For example, during the four seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, it may be configured to repeat such up-and-down movement four times in total by moving up once per second and then moving down. . During the movement at this time, at least part of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved to the area where the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 were displayed in a front view. may be configured to move within a range overlapping with .

Thus, the position where the simulated image simulating the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) with the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) was displayed. After moving to a moving position where the second movable decoration means overlaps with the second movable decoration means when viewed from the front, at least a part of the second movable decoration means moves so as to overlap the area where the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means was displayed when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a reluctant player feels stress due to the movement of the second movable decoration means after the movement to the movement position.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, since the player can directly touch the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the player may be injured by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 falling downward. Otherwise, there is a possibility that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is pulled downward by the player and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the like are destroyed. Therefore, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237 will be described below with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. In this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to touch the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 .

243(A) and 243(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 243(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 243(D) and 243(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 243(A), 243(C), and 243(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Shows the stowed state. FIGS. 243(B) and 243(E) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement position.

As shown in FIG. 243, in this embodiment, a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided to cover the movement area of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 . The root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided in front of the door frame base unit 100 and below the door frame top unit 570, and includes a cover unit frame 7852 having a square shape in front view and a right triangle shape in side view, A cover unit front portion 7854 that covers the square portion formed on the front by the cover unit frame 7852, a cover unit right side portion 7856 that covers the right triangle portions formed on the left and right sides by the cover unit frame 7852, and a cover unit left side. and a surface portion 7858 .

The cover unit frame 7852 is made of colored (specifically, green) opaque synthetic resin. In addition, in order to increase the strength of the cover unit frame 7852, it may be made of metal. Also, the cover unit frame 7852 has a function of holding a cover unit front face portion 7854 , a cover unit right side face portion 7856 and a cover unit left side face portion 7858 .

The cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right side surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are each formed of a flat plate-like colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The cover unit front part 7854 is configured to be attached to the cover unit frame 7852 in a tilted state so that its upper part is located on the front side in a side view. A cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and a cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are provided so as to face each other at the left and right ends of the gaming machine.

A player can visually recognize the operating state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the colorless and transparent cover unit front face portion 7854 . Also, a player who plays a game in an adjacent game machine can visually recognize the operation state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the cover unit right side surface 7856 and the cover unit left side surface 7858 . It is possible.

A game machine employing such a configuration may be configured to execute the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 238 and the like.

In this way, the protective members (cover unit front surface 7854, cover unit right side surface 7856, cover unit left side surface 7858) are arranged so as to surround the movement area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), By adopting a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to touch the second movable decoration means and that the player can visually recognize the second movable decoration means through a transparent protective member, the second movable decoration means can be viewed. While maintaining the visibility of the movable decoration means and the impact given to the player when the second movable decoration means operates, the situation that the player is injured due to the movement of the second movable decoration means, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player destroys the second movable decoration means.

154 is modified to show an example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 are provided, FIGS. 178 and 181 to 185, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 may be provided. Also, in such an embodiment, each effect mode described in this specification may be configured to be executed.

Although an example in which the cover unit frame 7852 holds the cover unit front face portion 7854, the cover unit right side face portion 7856, and the cover unit left side face portion 7858 is shown, either or both of the cover unit right side face portion 7856 and the cover unit left side face portion 7858 may be held. It may be configured so as not to be provided. For example, the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854 , or the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854 and the cover unit left side portion 7858 .

In this way, the protective member (cover unit front portion 7854; or cover unit front portion 7854 and cover unit right side portion 7856; 7854 and the left side of the cover unit 7858) to contact the second movable decoration means from the sides (right and left, left only, or right only). In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the second movable decoration means through the protective member, the visibility of the second movable decoration means and when the second movable decoration means operates A situation in which the player is injured due to the movement of the second movable decoration means while maintaining the impact given to the player, or a situation in which the second movable decoration means is impulsively destroyed by the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of Furthermore, since it is possible to touch the second movable decoration means from the side surface where the protective member is not provided, even if some kind of abnormality occurs in the second movable decoration means, maintenance such as repairs can be carried out by the amusement store staff. etc. can be performed.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 236 to 243, etc., it is possible to make the player fully feel the interest by operating the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine. Even if it is not possible to do so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the interest felt by the player is reduced.

By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 207 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-093655, the progress of the game is indicated to the player by the display contents on the predetermined display means, It is possible to excite the player by driving the modeled body provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine at a predetermined timing. However, there is room for improvement in the mode of presentation when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided in the frame.

An embodiment of a game machine capable of sufficiently stimulating the player's interest even if the frame has a plurality of drivable shaped bodies will be described below.

The game machine in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are frame movable bodies imitating the outside of the ear (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ear outer frame movable body"). Each of these four frame movable bodies can independently assume a state of being positioned at the standby position and a state of being positioned at the moving position.

244, 245, 246, and 247, a first rendering mode using the outer ear frame movable body and a second rendering mode using the inner ear frame movable body will be described below. . FIGS. 244 and 245 are time charts for the first and second performance modes, and FIGS. 246 and 247 are front views showing the states of the gaming machine at predetermined timings of these performance modes. .

The first effect mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 244(A) and 246. FIG. 244(A) and 244(B) have a movable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear frame movable body like the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 172. It shows a presentation mode that can be applied to the gaming machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper movement position. to start. At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

FIG. 246(A) shows a state in which display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at timing t8. The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started immediately after this (after 0.1 seconds or the like).

From timing t8 to timing t10, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the movement positions. Simultaneously, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame moves to the movement position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame moves to the movement position are dynamically displayed. be done.

Next, at timing t10, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete movement to the movement positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 246B shows a state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have completed movement to the movement positions at timing t10, and a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350. It shows a state in which a simulated image simulating the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continue to be positioned at the movement positions. At the same time, the display of the simulated image simulating the state in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame is located at the moving position and the simulated image simulating the state in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame is located at the moving position are also continued.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are dynamically displayed in such a manner that they start to move to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating a mode in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. .

At timing t18, the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position is completed, and they are housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state in which only the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big win, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second presentation mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 244(B) and 247. FIG. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400.

FIG. 247A shows a state in which display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at timing t5. The display of the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started immediately after this (after 0.1 seconds or the like).

From timing t5 to timing t7, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the movement position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the movement position. is displayed dynamically.

At timing t7, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 247(B) simulates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are still housed in the door frame top unit 570 at timing t7. The simulated image and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating the state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

Next, at timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to move upward from the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570. start moving.

Next, at timing t10, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 complete movement to the movement positions.

FIG. 247(C) shows a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed their movement to the movement positions at timing t10. A simulated image simulating the inner ear frame movable body 7400 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 continue to be positioned at the movement position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is positioned at the movement position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is positioned at the movement position are displayed.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are dynamically displayed in such a manner that they start to move to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. .

At timing t<b>18 , the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position is completed, and they are housed in the door frame top unit 570 . At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state in which only the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big win, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 driven and controlled in the second rendering mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 driven and controlled in the first rendering mode. Compared to the body 7450, the front view area in the state of moving to the movement position is smaller. Therefore, in the second presentation mode, after a predetermined time has passed after starting to display a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the right ear inner side By performing drive control of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, it is configured to compensate for the sense of volume as a performance.

244(A) and 244(B) can be replaced by a movable inner ear frame movable body as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. Although an example of application to a game machine having the outer ear frame movable body has been shown, it may be applied to the game machine described with reference to FIG. 173 . In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body moves from the upper waiting position to the lower moving position, the simulated image of the inner ear frame movable body is also displayed from above within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes a display mode that moves downward. Also, it may be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body move from the lower standby position to the upper moving position, the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also displayed in the game. In the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the display mode is such that it moves from the bottom to the top. Alternatively, the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are respectively moved from the upper standby position to the lower moving position, and the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also displayed on the game board side. An effect mode may be adopted in which the display mode moves from top to bottom within the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

The first effect mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 245(A). 245(A) and 245(B) can be applied to a game machine having a rotatable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear frame movable body as shown in FIGS. 178, 181, etc. It shows a directing mode.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. . At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic mode imitating a rotated state.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation states of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the door frame top unit 570 in the game board side effect display device 1600, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left The display of the simulated image simulating the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is continued.

At timing t18, the state of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ends.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second effect mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 245(B). First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic mode imitating a rotated state.

At timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 changes the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. .

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation states of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the door frame top unit 570 in the game board side effect display device 1600, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are changed. The display of the simulated image simulating the ear inner frame movable body 7400 is continued.

At timing t<b>18 , the state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state accommodated in the door frame top unit 570 . At the same time, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 driven and controlled in the second rendering mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 driven and controlled in the first rendering mode. Compared to the body 7450, the maximum area visible in front view in the rotated state is smaller. Therefore, in the second presentation mode, after a predetermined time has passed after starting to display a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the right ear inner side By performing drive control of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body, it is configured to compensate for the sense of volume as an effect.

In this way, the first molded body provided on the frame (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and the second molded body provided on the frame (the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400). It is configured to start driving the second modeled body at the timing when time has passed. As a result, even when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided in the frame, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the presentation using the second shaped body. In addition, by displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled body in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the drive control of the second modeled body. .

In addition, among the plurality of shaped bodies (first shaped body and second shaped body) provided in the game machine, the size of the shaped body itself and the amount of visual change when the shaped body is driven and controlled are relative. In order to control the drive of the second modeled body, which is relatively small and is not conspicuous to be driven and controlled, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, the second It is configured to start driving the modeled body. As a result, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the production using the second shaped body, which has a small visual change in size and is less noticeable when being driven and controlled. Become. In addition, by displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled body in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to drive the second modeled body, which is relatively small in size and so likely to be overlooked in drive control. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the control.

In addition, at the timing corresponding to the driving of the first modeled bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450), a simulated image simulating the first shaped body is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board). By displaying on the side effect display device 1600), it is possible to show the player that the first molded body is being driven and controlled.

Modified examples of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 244 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 248(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first molded object in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 244(A). In Modified Example 1, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from the first state to the second state from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, in Modified Example 2, the display of changing the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t9 to timing t11. Further, in Modified Example 3, after the display of changing the simulated image of the first modeled body from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9, the display simulating the second state is performed. ends at timing t11, and from timing t11 to timing t13, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed to change from the first state to the second state.

In this manner, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is started may be somewhat delayed with respect to the timing at which the drive control of the first modeled object is started. Alternatively, the timing for ending the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object may be the timing before the timing for the first modeled object to enter the first state. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is employed.

FIG. 248(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 244(B). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this way, as the simulated image of the second modeled body, an image simulating the second state in which the second modeled body is drive-controlled is suddenly displayed, and the drive control of the second modeled body is performed. The display may be configured to continue until the start timing. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is adopted.

Modified examples of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 245 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 249(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first molded object in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 245(A). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t7 to timing t18. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t9 to timing t18. Further, in Modification 3, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t7 to timing t13.

In this manner, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is started may be somewhat delayed with respect to the timing at which the drive control of the first modeled object is started. Alternatively, the timing for ending the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object may be the timing before the timing for the first modeled object to enter the first state. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is adopted.

FIG. 249(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 245(B). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this manner, an image simulating the second state in which the second modeled body is driven and controlled is displayed as the simulated image of the second modeled body, and the drive control of the second modeled body is started. It may be configured to continue to display until the timing to be displayed. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is adopted.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 244(A) and 245(A), a simulated image simulating the first molded object is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the first effect mode. However, it may be configured so that the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is not displayed in the first presentation mode.

By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to secure a display area in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). It is possible to keep displaying.

Alternatively, instead of displaying a simulated image simulating the first modeled object in the first rendering mode, a display may be provided to indicate that the first modeled object is being driven and controlled. For example, the game board-side effect display device 1600 may be configured to display a message "My ears may have popped out?!" or a message "Look up?!".

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the first modeled body is being driven and controlled.

Compared to the first modeled object and the second modeled object, the second modeled object has a smaller area in a front view in a drive-controlled state and is less conspicuous. Before the second modeled body is driven and controlled, a simulated image simulating the second modeled body is displayed. It may be configured so as to display a simulated image imitating the modeled body.

If the amount of movement of the second shaped body in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction when the drive is controlled is shorter than that of the first shaped body, the second shaped body is less noticeable. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 246 and 247, the first modeled body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) is driven and controlled to move upward from the standby position. 10 cm, when the second shaped body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) is controlled to move upward by 5 cm from the standby position, the drive control of the second shaped body is It is less conspicuous than the first modeled body. In such a case, by displaying a simulated image of the second modeled object, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as a presentation.

In this way, when the moving distance of the second shaped body is smaller than the moving distance of the first shaped body when the drive is controlled, prior to the drive control of the second shaped body, the second shaped body is moved. By displaying the simulated image of , it is possible to secure a sense of volume as a production.

Alternatively, if the movement speed of the second modeled body is slower when the first modeled body and the second modeled body are driven and controlled, the first modeled body and the second modeled body that are rotatable are driven. In the case where the second modeled body has a slower angular velocity when rotated by control, or in the case where the time during which the first modeled body and the second modeled body are driven and controlled is shorter for the second modeled body, etc. , a simulated image of the second shaped body may be displayed prior to the drive control of the second shaped body. In this case as well, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as the effect in the effect using the second modeled body.

A simulated image simulating the second shaped body is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the number of times of the dynamic display is used to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win. good too. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 244(B), in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, it is possible to execute a production mode in which similar dynamic display is performed from timing t3 to timing t5. can be configured to Furthermore, from the timing t1 to the timing t3, a similar dynamic display may be performed. Further, in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, it may be possible to execute a performance mode in which similar dynamic display is performed from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, from the timing t9 to the timing t11, a similar dynamic display effect mode may be configured to be executable.

In this way, the dynamic display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body is repeatedly executed before or after the drive control of the second modeled body, and a state advantageous to the player occurs depending on the number of repetitions. By adopting a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation to be made, it is possible to further increase the sense of volume as a performance of the second modeled body, and in addition, the movement of the second modeled body provided in the frame. Either the act of directly viewing the object itself, or the act of viewing a simulated image simulating the second molded object displayed on a predetermined display means and knowing the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of enjoying the game.

In addition, a plurality of simulated images with different display modes are prepared in advance as simulated images simulating the second molded body, and the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is given to the player according to the type of displayed simulated image. It may be configured as shown. For example, when a large simulated image simulating the second modeled object and a small simulated image simulating the second modeled object are prepared in advance, and a large simulated image simulating the second modeled object is displayed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is higher in the case of . Alternatively, a white simulated image imitating the second molded object and a red simulated image imitating the second molded object are prepared in advance, and the red simulated image imitating the second molded object is displayed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is higher in the case of winning.

In this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different display modes as the dynamic display mode of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the type of displayed simulated image. By adopting such a configuration, the variation of the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second modeled object increases, and in addition to being able to further increase the sense of volume as a production, the frame is provided with The action of directly viewing the movement of the second shaped body itself that is displayed, and the expectation that a situation that is advantageous to the player will occur by viewing the simulated image imitating the second shaped body displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of which action of the action of knowing the degree to enjoy.

It should be noted that when suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur by means of the display mode of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, the second modeled body is driven and controlled. Although the motions of the two shaped bodies themselves are in the same motion mode, the motion mode of the second shaped body is made different, and the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the motion mode of the second shaped body. It is good also as a structure which suggests.

In the second production mode, after displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled object, the second modeled object is driven and controlled. good. For example, from timing t5 to timing t18 in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIGS. It should be configured as follows.

In this way, the third rendering mode without displaying the simulated image of the second molded body can be executed in addition to the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode. It is possible to provide the player with an unexpected and tense performance mode in which the second shaped body, which is relatively inconspicuous compared to the shaped body, is being driven without realizing it.

When driving the first molded body, an evocation sound indicating that the first molded body is driven may be output. For example, in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIGS. may be configured to output an evocative sound indicating that the modeled body is driven. Alternatively, the evocation sound indicating that the first shaped body is driven is output from timing t6 to timing t10 so that the evoked sound is output even after the driving of the first shaped body is controlled. Good to configure. Alternatively, an evocative sound indicating that the first modeled object is being driven is output from timing t8 to timing t12 so that the evocative sound is output after drive control of the first modeled object is started. It should be configured as follows.

By adopting such a configuration, by driving the first shaped body, which has a relatively large size and movement amount, among the plurality of shaped bodies (the first shaped body and the second shaped body), the player can move. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation as Note that when the second modeled body is driven, a simulated image simulating the second modeled body is displayed, so that such an evocative sound is not output.

244(A), 245(A), etc., an example of outputting an evocation sound during a predetermined period (timing t6 to timing t8 or timing t6 to timing t10) has been shown. 200, 201, etc., may be adopted.

In order to drive the second modeled body, during either the display period of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body or the period during the drive control of the second modeled body, or both, during the change, as BGM It may be configured so as to suppress the volume of the output fluctuating effect sound. For example, in the second production mode described with reference to FIGS. 244(A) and 244(B), until timing t5, the fluctuating production sound is output in a normal mode, and a simulation simulating the second molded object is performed. In the period from timing t5 to timing t8, which is the period from when the image is displayed until the drive control of the second modeling object is started, the fluctuating effect sound is output in a mode that is more suppressed than in the normal mode. Good to configure. Alternatively, until timing t5, the fluctuating effect sound is output in a normal manner, and the simulated image simulating the second modeled object is displayed until the drive control of the second modeled object is terminated. In the period from timing t5 to timing t18, the fluctuating effect sound may be output in a more restrained manner than in a normal manner. In addition, in the suppression state, it is preferable to set the volume to half or less of that in the normal state.

By changing the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the normal state to the suppressed state in accordance with the display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled object in this way, a plurality of modeled objects (the first modeled object and the second modeled object) are displayed. The player can concentrate on the fact that the second shaped body, which is relatively smaller in size, is driven or is being driven.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 244 to 247 and the like, by providing a plurality of shaped bodies in the frame, the size of each shaped body and the movable range when each shaped body is driven can be changed. Even in the case of restriction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the interest felt by the player is reduced when each modeled body is driven alone.

By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 207 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-093655, the movable decoration means provided in the frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine is operated. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel interesting. However, if the player does not notice the movement of the movable decoration means, the player may be injured by contacting the movable decoration means with his or her head or fingers. there were.

An embodiment of a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which a player is injured by the movable decoration means will be described below.

250(A) and 250(B), a first effect mode and a second effect mode applicable to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 243 will be described below. Note that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in this embodiment is provided inside the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 as described with reference to FIGS. is difficult to construct.

A first rendering mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 250(A).

In the first effect mode, first, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative symbols at a predetermined timing before the timing t0. It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t5, the output of an evocative sound for notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 will operate is started. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved from the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. to start.

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions. At this time, the wake-up sound is also continuously output.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete movement to the movement positions. At the same time, the output of the evocative sound that has been continuously output since timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

A second presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 250(B). Note that, unlike the first effect mode, no evoking sound is output in the second effect mode. Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start their operations at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the variation of decorative patterns is started in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At the same time, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper moving position.

At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed.
From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.
On the other hand, at timing t23, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions is completed.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

Root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 possessed by the game machine explained with reference to FIG. 251(A) and 251(B), a description will be given of a first effect mode and a second effect mode that are applicable to a game machine having a movable frame body 7200 and that can be executed in the game machine to which the movable frame body 7200 is applied. do.

A first rendering mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 251(A).

In the first effect mode, first, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative symbols at a predetermined timing before the timing t0. It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t5, output of an evocative sound for notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 will move thereafter starts. Next, at timing t7, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is changed from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state. Let

At timing t9, the output of the evocative sound that has been continuously output since timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state in which the rotation is stopped and stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

A second presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 251(B). Note that, unlike the first effect mode, no evoking sound is output in the second effect mode. Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start their operations at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the variation of decorative patterns is started in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t21, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is changed from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state. Let

At the timing t21, at the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state in which the rotation is stopped and stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

In the first production mode and the second production mode described with reference to FIGS. 250(A) and 250(B), or in the first presentation mode described with reference to FIGS. The operation mode of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is common in the presentation mode and the second presentation mode. On the other hand, in the first presentation mode, after the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate with the output of an evocative sound, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates after a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start operating at the same timing as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 without outputting the evocative sound. It is configured.

Thus, when the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame operates independently, the evocative sound is output in advance, so that the game is played. Since the player pays attention to the first movable decoration means, the player's careless action (for example, standing up) can prevent the player from contacting the first movable decoration means and being injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence.

On the other hand, when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is operated together with the first movable decoration means, it is configured not to output an evocative sound. This is because the second movable decoration means moves to a position overlapping predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in a front view, so that the player's consciousness is directed to the vicinity of the predetermined display means. This is because the player is less likely to make careless movements, and the player is less likely to be injured even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame is in motion.

250(A), 251(A), etc., an example of outputting an evocation sound during a predetermined period (timing t5 to timing t9) has been shown. 201 or the like may be configured to employ the configuration relating to the special alert sound described above.

FIG. 252 shows a modification of the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. Also, FIG. 253 shows a modification of the effect mode described with reference to FIG. In these modifications, in the second presentation mode, at timing t22 when the movement of the movable root frame frame body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 move to the movement position. It is configured to initiate a move operation.

In this way, at the timing when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) starts to operate and moves to a position overlapping the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in front view, the second 1 (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) starts to move, the player's consciousness is directed toward the vicinity of the predetermined display means, and the player is prevented from being careless. Movement becomes difficult, and even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame moves, the player is less likely to get injured.

It may be configured such that the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will result in a big hit is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Also, the frequency with which the first effect mode is executed may be higher than the frequency with which the second effect mode is executed. For example, out of 100 special lotteries, the first effect mode is performed about 5 times (performed with a probability of 5%), and the second effect mode is performed about once (performed with a probability of 1%). may be configured to be performed).

In this way, in the first production mode with a high execution frequency and a low expectation of a big hit, by outputting an evocative sound, the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear The action of the frame movable body 7200) is called out to the player. In particular, since the player's level of expectation is low and the player's attention to the first movable decoration means is in a scattered state, such arousal is effective.

On the other hand, in the second performance mode in which the frequency of execution is low and the expectation of a big hit is high, no evocative sound is output, and the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates together with the first movable decoration means. I am letting In this case, since the expectation of a big hit is high, the player's line of sight is concentrated in the vicinity of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) to which the second movable decoration means moves, and careless actions ( etc.), there is no need to output an evocative sound when operating the first movable decoration means.

On the other hand, since the clerk of the amusement arcade can visually recognize the operation of the first movable decoration means from a distance, there is a high possibility that a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state) will occur. can be recognized, and it is possible to provide the player with a predetermined service (exchange of dollar boxes, processing of stopping in fixed-rate gaming machines, etc.).

In addition, if an evocative sound is output in a state of high expectation, it is conceivable that the player may become discouraged, but by not outputting the evocative sound, the occurrence of such a situation is suppressed. It becomes possible to

It is preferable to output an evocative sound at the beginning or middle of the variation of the decorative pattern, but not to output the evocative sound at the middle of the variation of the decorative pattern.

By adopting such a configuration, unnecessary sound is not output at the final stage of variation in which the variation result of the decorative pattern is displayed, and the player can concentrate on the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the predetermined display means. .

In the first effect mode, when outputting the evocative sound, the fluctuating effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the period from timing t5 to timing t9 and the period from timing t4 to timing t10 in the first production mode shown in FIGS. should be

On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, the fluctuating presentation sound is suppressed until the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward, and the suppression of the fluctuating presentation sound is released at the same time when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward. You may For example, in the period from timing t18 to timing t21 and the period from timing t18 to timing t26 in the second production mode shown in FIGS. should be

With this configuration, in the first effect mode, the evocative sound is output while the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed. will be effectively notified to

Further, in the second effect mode, the movement of the second movable decoration means is suppressed by suppressing the fluctuating effect sound for a predetermined period before the movement of the second movable decoration means is started. It becomes easier to convey to the player.

250, 251, etc., an example of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound in a predetermined period has been shown. It may be configured to employ a configuration relating to a variable effect sound or a special evocation sound.

In the first effect mode, the action of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. The display of moving the simulated image upward may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251. FIG.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 may not display such a display when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operated.

By performing such a display, it is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first movable decoration means will operate in the first presentation mode. On the other hand, in the second rendering mode, by not performing such a display when the first movable decoration means operates, excessive rendering around the predetermined display means is suppressed. can be done. In addition to the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means, another image (for example, an image of an upward arrow) is displayed on the predetermined display means in a manner suggesting the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. may be configured to be displayed in

In the first production mode and the second production mode, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has moved to the movement position is moved to the standby position based on the player's operation of a predetermined operation unit (push button, lever, etc.). It may be configured to allow For example, in the first production mode and the second production mode, when the player operates the predetermined operation unit at timing t23, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the moving position from timing t23 to timing t24. It should be moved to the standby position.

In this way, it may be configured such that the time during which the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is positioned at the movement position can be changed according to the operation by the player. As a result, it becomes difficult for other players to notice that the second movable decoration means is operating, and the degree of expectation from other players that a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) will occur is high. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person is subjected to harassment or the like based on distortion.

In the modified examples of the first production mode and the second production mode in FIGS. 252 and 253, when there is an operation to the predetermined operation unit by the player, compared to the case where there is no operation to the predetermined operation unit The first movable decoration means may be configured to be driven early. That is, in the modification shown in FIGS. 252 and 253, the second movable decoration means, which starts to operate before the first movable decoration means, is repeatedly viewed by the player who plays the game repeatedly. Therefore, the operation of the first movable decoration means becomes impatient. Therefore, the operation of the second movable decoration means is not always performed for a certain period of time before the first movable decoration means is operated, but the operation of the second movable decoration means is started by operating the button. By making it possible to drive the first movable decoration means at an appropriate timing after the display, the first movable decoration means can be quickly operated for the player who has watched the same performance many times. It is possible to give an opportunity to let the child play, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that the process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position may be started by such a predetermined operation, or even if the predetermined operation is performed, the second movable decoration means may be returned at a predetermined timing. It may be configured to start the process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 250, 251, etc., an effect based on the result of the lottery attracts the player's attention without outputting an evocative sound when the first movable decoration means is operated. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the vicinity of the predetermined display means to be performed, and to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured by the first movable decoration means.

In the above-described embodiment, by executing a predetermined effect mode out of a plurality of different effect modes, the left and right ear frame movable bodies indicate that there is a high degree of expectation that a big win, which is an advantageous state for the player, will occur. However, it is configured to notify the player of the degree of expectation for the occurrence of game content other than the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win. may

For example, it is possible to notify the content of the profit to be given to the player during the big win, even though the big win is confirmed. As for the content of profit, for example, the type of profit may be notified, or the amount of profit may be notified.

Alternatively, it may be configured to inform the content of the profit to be given to the player after the big hit. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit to be given to the player after the big win, or to notify the amount of profit to be given to the player after the big win. .

In this way, not only the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state), but also the amount of profit given to the player in a state advantageous to the player (for example, Expectations regarding the number of balls to be played and the number of openings of the big winning mouth, etc., and new favorable conditions for the player that may occur after the end of the favorable conditions for the player (for example, variable conditions and electric chew support state), the type of benefit given to the player in the game that newly occurs after the end of the state advantageous to the player (for example, the variable state and the electric chew support state) As an example, even if it is configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the probability variable state continues and the number of fluctuations in which the electric chew support continues), it is possible to achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiments.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 show that the degree of expectation that a big hit, which is an advantageous state for the player, will occur is high by executing a predetermined performance mode out of a plurality of different performance modes. , the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, etc. are operated to notify the player. , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win may include the fact that the big win is determined (the occurrence of a 100% big win). For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, a 50% jackpot is generated when the first effect mode is executed, and a 100% jackpot is generated when the second effect mode is executed. may be configured to occur.

In the above-described embodiments, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body When a simulated image simulating the body 7450 or the like is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is also displayed at the same time. A simulated image may be displayed in advance for about several seconds (for example, two seconds), and then the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be started. . For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238(A), a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t7.

In addition, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is fixedly displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 without moving, and the right ear frame is movable relative to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570. A simulated image imitating a body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves upward. It should be configured to

In this way, operable movable decorative means and drivable modeling bodies (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame A unit (door frame top unit 570) that displays a simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and stores and holds operable movable decorative means and drivable molded bodies. By displaying a simulated image simulating , the player can easily understand the operation mode and drive mode of the operable movable decoration means and the drivable modeled body.

In particular, a simulated image simulating a unit (door frame top unit 570) for housing and holding operable movable decorative means and drivable molded objects is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By fixedly displaying in a predetermined area, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the operation mode and drive mode of the operable movable decorative means and the drivable modeled body.

Also, a unit that houses and holds operable movable decorative means and drivable shaped bodies at a timing prior to the timing of displaying a simulated image simulating the operable movable decorative means and drivable shaped bodies. By displaying a simulated image simulating (the door frame top unit 570), the player's sense of expectation for the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the modeled body increases. In addition, since the player can visually recognize the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body from the timing when the movement of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body are started, the player can control the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body. can be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In each of the embodiments described above, the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be configured not to be displayed.

Instead of moving the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the rabbit character 6000 described with reference to FIG. It may be configured to Also in this case, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described effect modes.

A right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are door frame top units. An example of operation between the state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 and the state of protruding upward from the door frame top unit 570 has been shown, but it is not limited to such a state change, and other state changes may also be possible. . For example, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may move from a state in which half of them protrude from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which they fully protrude from the door frame top unit 570 .

In this way, the first movable decorative means is moved from the first position (the state housed in the door frame top unit 570, the state half protruding from the door frame top unit 570) to the second position. Even if it is configured to operate between the positioned second state (the state where the door frame top unit 570 is completely protruded), the above-described effects can be obtained.

238, 250, etc., the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is accommodated in the door frame top unit 570, and a front view of the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600. Although an example has been shown in which the operation is performed between the states located at positions overlapping with , the change in the state is not limited to such a change, and other state changes may also be possible. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps substantially the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view, and then overlaps substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. It may be configured to move to the state of being in position.

In this way, in the first state where the second movable decoration means is located at the first position (the state housed in the door frame top unit 570), it overlaps substantially the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. position) to the second position (position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view). Even when it does, it becomes possible to have the effect mentioned above.

As an effect display performed in the display area of the effect display device, there is known a look-ahead effect display that is performed over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the specific holding causing the look-ahead performance display is stopped in a manner in which the decorative symbols indicate the occurrence of a big win, compared with the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the look-ahead performance display is not performed. The probability of being displayed is set high. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect display is executed, the player has an expectation that a big win will occur.

On the other hand, in the display area of the effect display device, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and a plurality of effect displays corresponding to the decorative symbols that are being variably displayed (for example, the variable decorative symbols indicate a big hit) Effect display indicating the degree of expectation that is stopped and displayed in the form, etc.) is also performed. For this reason, the player can read the look-ahead effect display suggesting the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols several times ahead, and the variable display mode of the currently variable decorative symbols and the display contents of the effect display corresponding to the currently variable decorative symbols. At the same time, it is becoming a situation where it is necessary to visually recognize.

In such a situation, although the game can be made more interesting, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully grasp the contents indicated by these effect displays. In particular, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display of decorative symbols that are currently changing and various effects displays corresponding to the variable display, the look-ahead effect display is relatively inconspicuous. There is a problem that the player may lose consciousness of the execution and the approaching start of variation of the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display.

Therefore, when executing the look-ahead effect display, the player can easily grasp that the look-ahead effect display is being executed and that the timing of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display is approaching. and embodiment.

Below, with reference to FIG. 254, first, various images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when executing the look-ahead effect display will be described.
Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation performed when the result of the special lottery performed corresponding to the winning to the first start port 2002 is lost. 254(A) to 254(F), an example of rendering in the display area will be described. Also, FIG. 254 (A) to FIG. 254(D), FIG. 254(G), and FIG. 254(H).

FIG. 254(A) shows a state in which three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It also shows a state in which the pending image corresponding to the stopped decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which there are three holds corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "3" is placed as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "5" is placed as the middle decorative pattern at equal intervals from the left in the approximate center of the display area in the vertical direction. , and decorative patterns with the number "2" as the right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern consists of a background area (white part in the figure) consisting of an image forming the outline of the decorative pattern in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a number area consisting of an image showing any number from "1" to "9" ( black part in the figure). As shown in the figure, the number area is centered in the background area.

It is preferable that an image having a color different from the color of the background area and the color of the number area constituting the decorative pattern is used. For example, it is preferable to set the color of the background area to white and the color of the number area to black. Note that the outline of the rectangular shape that forms the outline of the background area may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the suspension display area, the first suspension display area, the second suspension display area, the third suspension display area, and the fourth suspension display area are set. A state is shown in which the reserved image is displayed in the display area, and the reserved images are displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. Although the fourth reserved display area is indicated by a dotted line in the drawing for explanation, the dotted line is not actually displayed in the display area as a display state, and the reserved image is displayed in the following drawings. In principle, such a dotted line indicating the intended position of the vehicle is not shown.

In FIG. 254(A), the pending image displayed in the pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed. Further, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends. Further, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is completed. be. Further, the pending image displayed in the third pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is completed. be.

FIG. 254(B) shows a display state at the start of variation of decorative symbols corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area described with reference to FIG. 254(A).
Specifically, the upper edge of the decorative design that is one before in the display order is below the left decorative design to the right decorative design, and the decorative design that is one after in the display order is above the left decorative design to the right decorative design. Bottom edge is displayed. Also, the display of the pending display ends.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are always displayed in front of the decorative design. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and basically white in color. Also, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.

FIG. 254(C) shows a state in which the left decorative design to the right decorative design are displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a manner of scrolling downward in the display area.

Specifically, the lower side of a certain decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable display is first displayed on the upper side of the display area, and then the decorative pattern moves downward to fill the display area. The entire decorative pattern is displayed, and after the lower end of the decorative pattern reaches the lower side of the display area, only a part of the upper side of the decorative pattern is displayed. The upper end of the decorative pattern reaches the lower side of the display area, and the decorative pattern is not displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes its display state in such a flow that it changes from a state not displayed in the display area to a state displayed in the display area and then to a state not displayed in the display area.

The display order is set for the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Specifically, following a decorative pattern with a certain number (eg, "1"), decorative patterns with the next number (eg, "2") appear in order from the upper side of the display area. will be displayed. The order of the numbers attached to the decorative patterns is the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", and "9". . After the decorative pattern with the number "9", the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 254(C), the left decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the lower side and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the upper side are displayed. , both left decorative patterns scroll downward, and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative pattern with the number "3". , appear from the upper side of the display area.

With reference to FIG. 254(B), it has been explained that the display of the reserved image that has been displayed in the reserved display area until then ends at the same time as the decorative pattern starts to change, but the display of the reserved image ends At the same time, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed so as to move to the left while being enlarged, and displayed as the pending image in the pending display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. Enlargement of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left are performed over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.67 seconds). FIG. 254(C) shows the state after such a pending image is moved.

FIG. 254(D) shows a state in which the left decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative design and the right decorative design are being variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design with the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which a new pending image is displayed in the third pending display area in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 .

Here, the temporary stop display will be described. A temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it were stopped at a display position where the decorative pattern is finally displayed stopped or in the vicinity thereof. is. Specifically, for example, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is gently moved up and down to the extent that the number attached to the decorative pattern is clearly visible, with reference to the display position where the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed. The temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed by displaying it so as to move or display it so as to sway. In this way, by performing the temporary stop display, the decorative symbols being changed are visually recognized as if they are stopped by the player, and the player can confirm the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. . It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state without such vertical movement or swinging display.

When the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is changed to the finally stopped decorative pattern, or the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is scrolled and displayed again, There is a case where variable display is performed so that decorative symbols with other numbers are finally stopped and displayed, but the details will be described later.

In FIG. 254(D), arc-shaped lines are added to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative pattern with the number "2". This line indicates that the symbol is in a state of being temporarily stopped. Also, in other drawings, such arcuate lines may be attached to the decorative design, and in this case also, it indicates that the decorative design is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 254(E) shows a state in which the right decorative design is temporarily stopped following the left decorative design, and the middle decorative design is being variably displayed. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" as the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 254(F) shows a state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design, the left decorative design and the right decorative design, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in the figure, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decoration with the number "7" attached to the middle decorative pattern As for the patterns, the decorative patterns in which the number "4" is added to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the fact that the special lottery results are lost is indicated by the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), after which the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is newly started. be. In addition, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved image ends at the same timing as the timing when the change of the new decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 254(G) shows a state in which, following the left decorative design, the right decorative design is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative design is being variably displayed from the display state shown with reference to FIG. 254(D). ing. Specifically, the left decorative pattern with the number "2" and the right decorative pattern with the number "2" are temporarily stopped, respectively, indicating that the ready-to-win state has occurred. state.

FIG. 254(H) shows a state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design, the left decorative design and the right decorative design, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decoration with the number "2" attached to the middle decorative pattern are shown in the figure. As for the patterns, the decorative patterns in which the number "2" is attached to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns indicates that the special lottery result is a big win. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. After the stop display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the left decorative design to the right decorative design are no longer displayed. After that, the jackpot game state is started, and at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is resumed, and after that, it corresponds to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The variable display of decorative patterns is newly started.

Thus, in the variable display example of the decorative symbols described with reference to FIG. 254, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 2002. After the variable display is started from the state, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped in this order, and then the middle decorative design is stopped. In addition, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are simultaneously displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design. In addition, by stopping the decorative patterns with the same number as the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a big win. In addition, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a loss by stopping at least one of the left to right decorative patterns to which a different number is attached as the decorative pattern.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 254 will be described below with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. FIG. 255 is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this example of effect. In FIG. 256, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, and the display mode of the reserved image in the first to fourth reserved display areas are The display mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 254 unless otherwise noted. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

FIG. 255 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 256(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "6", "4", and "5" from the left are stopped and displayed. From this state, at timing t0, the variable display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is newly started. FIG. 256(B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of variable display, and shows a state in which variable display of left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols is being performed. there is

In the time chart shown in FIG. 255(A), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the presentation. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 255, at the timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this starting winning as a trigger, the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Also, in response to the look-ahead effect display, a specific pending image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of the normal pending image. The color of the specific reserved image is green. FIG. 256(C) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Also, the third reserved display area shows a state in which a specific reserved image having a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of an ordinary reserved image having a circular shape.

In the look-ahead effect display, a look-ahead effect image surrounding the display area in a frame shape is displayed in such a manner as to hide a part of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed so as to scroll downward. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which a plurality (specifically, six) of shapes resembling pine branches with leaves protrude toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead effect image is slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the display of the specific pending image are performed based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball wins the first start opening 2002, and only the normal pending image with a perfect circular shape and white color is displayed. The performance execution ratio is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image are displayed than when they are displayed. For example, when a normal pending image is displayed, the probability of a big hit is 0.3%, and when a look-ahead effect image and a specific pending image are displayed, the probability of a big win is 10.0%. is configured to be

With such a configuration, the player can display the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image, and when the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image is changed, the normal pending image is displayed. Compared to the case where the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image is performed, there is an expectation that the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a stop mode indicating that a big win will occur as a result of the variation of the decorative pattern. You will feel.

From timing t2 to timing t4, while the look-ahead effect image is displayed, the left decorative design to the right decorative design are variably displayed. A look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the variable display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is performed in a state that a part of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is hidden by the look-ahead effect image. In addition, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area The specific pending image is displayed on the front side of each decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 256(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the front-to-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side. In addition, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area The specific pending image is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols positioned above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 256(D), as the left decorative pattern, only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed. On the upper side of the decorative pattern is the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2", and on the lower side of the decorative pattern with the number "1" is the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9". is displayed. By adopting such a configuration, only the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed stand out and can be visually recognized by the player.

The stop display of the decorative pattern continues from timing t4 to timing t5. Also, during this period, the display mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the front-to-back effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are switched again, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. display mode.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols positioned above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. The display of the decorative patterns positioned above and below the pattern is also resumed. For example, in FIG. 256(D), as the left decorative design, only the decorative design with the number "1" is stopped and displayed, but at timing t5, the upper side of the decorative design with the number "1" , the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed, and the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed with the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9". The downward moving display of each decorative pattern is instantaneously started.

Thereafter, in accordance with the start and stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the front-rear effect image and the left to right decorative symbols are interchanged. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued, but the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and timing t14 are continued. to timing t15, similarly, the display mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At the timing t15, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the start winning that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started. In FIG. 256(E), at a predetermined timing after timing t15 (for example, timing t16), the look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative design to the right decorative design, and the specific pending image is displayed in the pending display area. Shows the displayed state.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Also, at timing t25, the display of the prefetch effect image that has been displayed until then ends, and the prefetch effect image is not displayed. FIG. 256F shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-win state occurs and the display of the look-ahead effect image ends at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern.

FIG. 256(G) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative design with a numeral "3" attached as a middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at timing t34, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending display area ends. On the other hand, the stop display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued until the game ball newly wins the first starting port 2002. - 特許庁

On the other hand, FIG. 256(H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative design with the numeral "2" attached as a middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the display of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are finished, and the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance image is displayed closer to the viewer than the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols are displayed closer to the viewer than the look-ahead performance images while the decorative symbols are stopped. ing.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image can be displayed without confirming the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that one has approached the fluctuation display of .

In addition, the area occupied in the display area of the look-ahead effect image is larger than the area occupied in the display area of the specific reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image is closer to the stop position of the decorative pattern than the specific reserved image. Since it is displayed, even if the player concentrates on visually recognizing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, it becomes possible to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image is one step closer. .

Further, by displaying the decorative pattern and the read-ahead performance image at overlapping positions, the sizes of both the decorative pattern and the read-ahead performance image can be increased, and the utilization efficiency of the display area can be improved. Furthermore, the display can be optimized by configuring the image to be displayed on the front side to be switched between the decorative design and the pre-reading effect image according to the conditions.

Specifically, during the variation of the decorative symbols, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side, so that the player is greatly affected by the approaching timing of performing the variation display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image. It can give you hope. On the other hand, while the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped, the stopping mode of the decorative symbols is not hindered by the look-ahead performance image, and the whole of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed can be clearly shown to the player. .

By the way, in this embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted in the obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. Specifically, the obstruction nail 1201 is held by the panel plate 1110 by engaging the obstruction nail helical portion 1201c provided at the tip portion of the obstruction nail 1201 so as to bite into the panel plate 1110 . Also, the panel plate 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and through the panel plate 1110, it is possible to visually recognize the movable accessory and the light-emitting decorative portion arranged behind the panel plate 1110. However, by engaging the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail with the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is scratched or cracked, resulting in a cloudy portion (hereinafter collectively referred to as the whitened portion HKB). There is a problem that these parts become visible to the player, and the appearance deteriorates. This is a problem that cannot occur when obstacle nails are planted in a wooden game board as in the conventional art.

The applicant of the present application has studied in detail the cause and location of such whitening HKB. First, the manufacturing method and structure of the game panel 1100, which is the premise for generating the whitened portion HKB, will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258. FIG.

FIG. 257(a) is a side view showing an obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel plate 1110. FIG. FIG. 257(b) is a cross-sectional view of the panel plate 1110 and the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 viewed from the right side. FIG. 257(c) is a cross-sectional view of the state in which the obstructing nail 1201 is implanted in the obstructing nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110, viewed from the right side. FIG. 257(d) is a cross-sectional view viewed from the right side of a portion A where the whitened portion HKB may occur around the obstructing nail 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110. FIG. FIG. 257(e) is a cross-sectional view of an example of a state in which a whitened portion HKB is actually generated around the obstacle nail 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 258(a) shows the dimensions of each part constituting the obstruction nail 1201, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing the dimensions of each member shown. Note that some symbols are omitted in the drawing.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be described with reference to FIG. 257(a). The obstacle nail 1201 is entirely made of brass and has a certain elasticity. In addition, in a white light irradiation environment, the whole is visually recognized as having a metallic luster tinged with yellow. The obstructing nail 1201 is composed of, from the left side, an obstructing nail head part 1201a, an obstructing nail first body part 1201b, an obstructing nail spiral part 1201c, an obstructing nail second body part 1201d, and an obstructing nail tip part 1201e from the left side. It's becoming The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The shape of the obstructing nail head 1201a is a dome-shaped round head, and is a perfect circle when viewed from the front. The obstacle nail head 1201a has a diameter L2 of 4 mm in front view and a thickness L3 of 1 mm in side view. The shape of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201b is cylindrical. The length L4 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 2 mm. The shape of the helical portion of the obstructing nail is substantially cylindrical. The length L7 of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is 4 mm. The diameter of the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. The shape of the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d is cylindrical. The length L8 of the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d is 1 mm. The diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body portion 1201d is 2 mm, which is the same as the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b. The shape of the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e is conical. The length L9 of the obstructing nail tip portion 1201e is 1 mm.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 257(b) and 258(b), the structure of the panel plate 1110 before the obstruction nail 1201 is implanted will be described. The panel plate 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material. The front and rear surfaces of the panel plate 1110 are formed to be smooth, and through the panel plate 1110 it is possible to clearly see the members located behind. The panel plate 1110 may be made of a plate material made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like. The thickness L10 of the panel plate 1110 is 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 is provided with an obstruction nail through-hole 1110a for implanting the obstruction nail 1201 therein. The obstacle nail through-hole 1110a has a columnar shape and a diameter L11 of 2 mm. The obstacle nail through-holes 1110 a are formed by cutting the panel plate 1110 . Therefore, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly opaque and visually recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 257(c) and 258(b), a method of implanting the obstructing nail 1201 into the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 will be described. The obstructing nail tip portion 1201e of the obstructing nail 1201 is pushed into the obstructing nail through hole 1110a, and the obstructing nail helical portion 1201c, the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstructing nail tip portion 1201e are entirely inside the obstructing nail through hole 1110a. , and a force is applied backward (to the right in the figure) until a part of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is positioned in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, thereby removing the obstacle against the panel plate 1110. Implantation of nail 1201 is completed. It should be noted that the impeding nail 1201 is implanted by a nailing machine. The length L4 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 20 mm. The length L13 of the portion located on the front side of the front surface is 17 mm. FIG. 257(c) shows a state in which the installation of the obstacle nail 1201 to the panel plate 1110 is completed.

The distance L14 between the tip of the obstructing nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is 1 mm. With such a configuration, even if a game machine manufacturer or a store clerk carelessly touches the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 due to the obstruction nail tip portion 1201e, the obstruction nail 1201 may cause an injury. It is possible to prevent

The shape of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a to penetrate the panel plate 1110 is that the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a was shaved when the obstacle nail 1201 was implanted into the panel plate 1110. This is to expel the acrylic resin powder from behind the panel plate 1110 to the outside.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body 1201d are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the obstructing nail spiral 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly deformed by the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c. When the obstruction nail 1201 has been pushed in, the obstruction nail helical portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a, and the obstruction nail 1201 is firmly held against the panel plate 1110. .

Incidentally, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body 1201d, and is larger than the diameter of the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c. may also be configured to be slightly smaller. In this case, in a state where the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a There will be a small gap between the With such a configuration, when a game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is elastically deformed, the elastic deformation of the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed by this gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail 1201 from breaking when the game ball repeatedly collides with the obstacle nail 1201 .

By the way, in the step of implanting the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c moves backward in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, so that the inside of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 is damaged. There is a problem that it is visually recognized as white.

The obstacle nail through hole 1110 a is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110 and has a shape that penetrates the panel plate 1110 . By being formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through-hole is rough and visually recognized as white. In particular, since the obstruction nail tip portion 1201e is implanted while remaining in the panel plate 1110, the hindmost portion of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a itself can be seen in a whitened state.

In addition, when the obstacle nail 1201 is completely implanted, the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is elastically deformed to maintain the engagement state with the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c, but when the elastic deformation limit is exceeded. , cracks may occur outward from the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a with which the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages.

Further, in a game on a gaming machine installed in a game parlor, the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 many times, and the kinetic energy of the game ball is transferred to the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. It may be transmitted to the inner wall of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a via the portion located inside, and a crack may occur on the front side of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Further, cracks may occur around the portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages (inside the panel plate 1110).

In addition, in a game machine installed in a game arcade, an illegal act such as forcibly bending the obstacle nail 1201 is performed in order to make the winning rate of a predetermined winning hole advantageous to oneself. After cleaning the front surface of the panel plate 1110 with the door frame 3 in the open state, the store clerk moved the door frame 3 in the closing direction to close the door frame 3. 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 by mistake. Even in such a case, a large force is applied to the obstructing nail 1201, and the force passes through the obstructing nail through hole 1110a through the portion of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201b located within the obstructing nail through hole 1110a. It may be transmitted to the inner wall and crack may occur on the front side of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Further, cracks may occur around the portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages (inside the panel plate 1110).

In FIG. 257(d), A indicates a portion where the game ball YGK collides and thus a whitened portion HKB may occur. Also, FIGS. 257(e) and 258(b) show an example of a state in which the whitened portion HKB is actually generated. 257(e) and 258(b) show a state in which the force applied to the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, and a whitened portion HKB is generated on the front surface of the panel plate 1110. ing. It also shows a state in which a whitened portion HKB is generated inside the panel plate 1110 starting from a portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the spiral-shaped portion 1201c of the obstacle nail engages. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 258(b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Furthermore, the longer the operating period at the amusement arcade, the higher the possibility that the panel board 1110 will have the whitened portion HKB. In addition, once the whitened portion HKB occurs, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitened portion HKB is weakened, and the whitened portion HKB gradually expands starting from that site. A situation may also occur in which the whitened portion HKB extends outward from the center.

The shape of one whitened portion HKB generated in this manner is generally planar, and its area is approximately 1 to 2 mm square. may occur radially when viewed from the front. In addition, such a whitened portion HKB may occur in each of a plurality of obstructing nails 1201 .

Furthermore, the occurrence of such a whitened portion HKB may weaken the strength of engagement between the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a and the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c. In this case, the repulsion mode when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 is weaker than what was assumed at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 1 (even if the game ball hits the nail, it does not rebound much and absorbs momentum. ), and there is a possibility that the winning rate to the winning opening will change.

In addition, in a game on a game machine installed in a game shop, a situation may occur in which the obstacle nail 1201 is broken due to the operation in the game shop for a long period of time. will be replaced.

In this way, when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel plate 1110 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, a predetermined movable accessory and a predetermined light-emitting decorative portion located behind the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. As a result, although the appearance is improved, the vicinity of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a into which the obstruction nail 1201 is implanted appears white, thereby degrading the aesthetic appearance. Conventionally, there is known a game machine in which a pilot hole is provided in a transparent synthetic resin game board and a game nail is driven into the pilot hole (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-161638). However, it does not solve the problem that the engaging portion between the game nail and the game board and the pilot hole are visually turbid and the aesthetic appearance is deteriorated. On the other hand, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 1 has been dealt with by methods such as mixing rubber into the material of the acrylic plate (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-104622), but the pachinko machine 1 Phenomenon such as whitening part HKB occurring when is installed in amusement arcades and being used for games for a long period of time, or whitening part HKB starting from the whitened part HKB that has occurred and gradually increasing in size. However, there was room for improvement in this regard, as it was not expected to occur. Means for solving these problems are shown below.

In the embodiment shown below, the panel plate 1110 described with reference to FIG. is a modified embodiment. In addition, in this modified example, the region covering member 2600a is not provided.

FIG. 259 shows an embodiment in which the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. FIG. 259(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. In the figure, illustration of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is omitted. Therefore, the circles indicating the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 shown in the drawing are actually the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232. 1 indicates the thickness of the body portion 1201b. It can also be said that this indicates the thickness of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same for each drawing describing an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 .

FIG. 259(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 259(a). FIG. 259(b) schematically shows a cross section of the site where the life nail 1230 located on the left side in front view is implanted. It should be noted that this point also applies to each drawing describing an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 .

FIG. 259(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. The tilt angle in this cabinet view is 45 degrees. In the figure, illustration of the fine structure of the obstructing nail 1201 such as the obstructing nail head 1201a, the obstructing nail spiral shape part 1201c, the obstructing nail tip part 1201e, etc. is omitted, and the obstructing nail 1201 as a whole is shown as one cylinder. ing. In this cylinder, the solid line indicates the obstructing nail head portion 1201 a of the obstructing nail 1201 and the portion of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201 b located in front of the panel plate 1110 . In this cylinder, the portions indicated by dotted lines are the portion of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b located inside the panel plate 1110, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstacle nail. Tip 1201e indicates the rear end of obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same for each drawing explaining a modified example in which the embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 259 is changed.

Note that in FIG. 259(a), illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted. Also in FIG. 259(c), although the illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted, the whitened portion HKB occurs around the portion indicated by the dotted line of the obstacle nail 1201. FIG. 259(a) to 259(c), illustration of the first starting port 2002 is omitted. Note that these points are the same for each drawing explaining a modified example in which the embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 259 is changed.

The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 to a thickness of about 1 mm. As the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, a lens cut shape or a satin finish may be employed. The light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light installed in the amusement parlor from the front or rear of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b thus formed. When the light from another gaming machine is incident, the light is irregularly reflected at the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board, and is visually recognized as whitish.

As shown in FIGS. 259(a) and 259(c), the portion of the panel plate 1110 where the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a is provided is viewed from the front or obliquely above the left with respect to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, it is visually recognized by the player in a state where it overlaps with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate.

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), the bright color visible portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b), it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the implantation site of the obstructing nail 1201 inconspicuous by the bright color visually recognized portion visually recognized in white.

In addition, white is visible when visible light of all wavelengths of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is diffusely reflected almost uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) regardless of the wavelength range of the predetermined object. It refers to the color that is supposed to be. In addition, light color means that light in a specific wavelength region of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is partly absorbed by the predetermined object and light in the remaining wavelength region is roughly reflected diffusely. , creams, light grays, and bright yellows that are considered visible. On the other hand, black means that the surface of a given object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of the natural light irradiated to the given object, and part of the irradiated natural light (20 to several %) This refers to the color that becomes visible when diffusely reflected. In addition, dark color means that most of the wavelength range of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is uniformly absorbed, and only a part of the irradiated light (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. However, in a specific wavelength region, it refers to a color close to black, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as a dark blue color due to the difference in light absorption. These definitions may be adopted as the definition of each color in this specification. In addition, in the embodiment described in the specification of the present application, the white portion may be light-colored, or the light-colored portion may be white. For example, instead of irradiating white light from a predetermined light emitting member, bright light may be emitted. Alternatively, the black portion may be darkened, or the dark portion may be blackened.

FIG. 259(d) is a diagram showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(a). In the example shown in FIG. 259(d), a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110, white light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel plate 1110, and the panel The plate back rough surface portion 1110b is configured to diffusely reflect the introduced white light. In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized by the player with white light. The panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, instead of below the panel plate 1110, a light emitting part similar to the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided on the side or above the panel plate 1110 instead of or in addition to the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, The light-emitting portion provided in this way may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the panel plate lower light-emitting substrate 2400 .

With such a configuration, the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed in the amusement arcade is weak, and the light from the gaming machines installed in the amusement arcade is weak (for example, when a game is played). Machines that are not turned on automatically go into power saving mode, reducing the amount of light emitted by the machine. Even in this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visible together, and the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the implanted portion of the obstructing nail 1201 is visible. It is possible to make it inconspicuous. In this state, the whitened portion HKB itself also diffusely reflects the introduced white light and is visually recognized as white. Since a large amount of light is irregularly reflected behind the whitening portion HKB, it is possible to prevent the whitening portion HKB from being conspicuous.

Although a plurality of modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 will be described below, the technical contents shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical contents shown in other embodiments.

Although an example in which white light is introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 toward the side of the panel plate 1110 is shown, yellow light may be introduced instead of the white light. . In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized in yellow by the player due to the introduced light. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visible in yellow due to the introduced light. By the way, as described above, the obstructing nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the color of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually similar to each other, and the existence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In the pachinko machine 1, since the obstruction nail 1201 has been used for several decades, the portion of the obstruction nail 1201 located in front of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the obstruction nail head 1201a and the obstruction nail No. 1201a). This is because the player rarely feels uncomfortable with the color and shape of the part of the body part 1201b that is not embedded in the panel plate 1110).

Although the obstruction nail 1201 is shown to be made of brass, other metal obstruction nails 1201 may be configured to be implanted in the panel plate 1110 . For example, a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 with a grayish-white metallic luster or a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 with a reddish metallic luster may be planted in the panel plate 1110 .

When the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 should be white. In this case as well, the color of the whitened portion HKB and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually similar to each other, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. .

Similarly, when the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 should be red or orange. In this case as well, the color of the whitened portion HKB and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually similar to each other, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. . In addition, in the obstruction nail 1201 made of pure copper, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be white.

In this way, the color of the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201 and the color of the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201 are obtained from the light emitting means (the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) for the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110). By introducing a similar color and irradiating the irregular reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitening portion HKB located behind the obstacle nail 1201, the irregular reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and whitening Since the portion HKB and the obstructing nail 1201 are visually recognized in similar colors, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

259(a) to 259(d), the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are all made of the same metal. In this embodiment, a metal having a metallic luster color is used, and the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is configured so that the color changes from a predetermined one color at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, in FIGS. 259(b) and 259(c), a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is used as the left guide nail 1232, a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is used as the jump nail 1231, and a brass nail is used as the life nail 1230. 1201 are adopted. In addition, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 changes from the off state to white, green, red, and yellow in this order at a predetermined timing.

In this case, the light that is introduced from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and irradiated onto the obstacle nail 1201 by the irregular reflection of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b causes the obstacle nail 1201 to be visually recognized under the ambient light in the amusement arcade. The amount of light is such that the change in the visually recognized hue of the obstructing nail 1201 becomes a slight difference compared to the color of the obstacle nail 1201 . For example, even if the light introduced from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 is red, the obstacle nail 1201 is yellow even if the obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized as yellowish metallic luster under the ambient light in the amusement arcade. It is visually recognized as a tasteful metallic luster.

With such a configuration, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 introduces white light to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110 by turning on the white light from the unlit state to the light emitting state. In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as white. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized as white by the introduced light. As described above, the left guiding nail 1232 employs the stainless steel obstructing nail 1201, so that the white light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects diffusely reflected white light and is visually recognized as grayish white metallic luster similar to the color of the panel plate 1110 and the whitened portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232 and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visible with a reddish metallic luster due to the use of the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 . Also, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster because the brass obstacle nail 1201 is used. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are caused by the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, respectively. Then, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 in a conspicuous state as an obstacle nail 1201 with a metallic luster tinged with yellow. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a predetermined time has passed, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 changes its light emission state from white to green, thereby introducing green light to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110 . In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as green. Also, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized in green by the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 employs the stainless steel obstruction nail 1201, so that the green light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects the diffusely reflected green light and is visually recognized as a greenish metallic luster similar to the color of the panel plate 1110 and the whitened portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232 and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visible with a reddish metallic luster due to the use of the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 . Also, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster because the brass obstacle nail 1201 is used. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are caused by the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, respectively. Then, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 in a conspicuous state as an obstacle nail 1201 with a metallic luster tinged with yellow. In particular, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster, which is a complementary color to the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate located on the periphery when viewed from the front, which is visually recognized in green. state. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a predetermined time has passed, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 changes its light emission state from green to red, thereby introducing red light to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110 . In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as red. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visible in red due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guiding nail 1232 employs the stainless steel obstructing nail 1201, so that the red light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects diffusely reflected red light and is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster. In addition, the jump nail 1231 adopts the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper, so that the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the light irregularly reflected by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. Reflected, it is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster similar in color to the panel plate 1110 , the whitened portion HKB and the left guide nail 1232 . Therefore, the existence of the left guide nail 1232, the jump nail 1231, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the life nail 1230 is visible with a yellowish metallic luster due to the use of the brass obstacle nail 1201 . Light introduced to the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light-emitting substrate 2400 and light diffusely reflected by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are visible to the player as an obstacle nail 1201 with yellowish metallic luster in a conspicuous state. It is possible to Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a predetermined time has passed, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 changes its light emission state from red to yellow, thereby introducing yellow light to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110 . In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as yellow. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visible in yellow due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 employs the stainless steel obstruction nail 1201, so that the yellow light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects diffusely reflected yellow light and is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster. In addition, the life nail 1230 adopts the brass obstacle nail 1201, so that the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light irregularly reflected by the panel board back rough surface part 1110b are separated. It is reflected and visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster similar in color to the panel plate 1110 , the whitened portion HKB and the left guide nail 1232 . Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232, the life nail 1230, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visible with a reddish metallic luster due to the use of the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 . The light introduced into the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light irregularly reflected by the panel plate back rough surface part 1110b are made visible by the player as an obstacle nail 1201 with a reddish metallic luster in a conspicuous state. becomes possible. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

In this way, a predetermined light that is switched to a different color at a predetermined timing is introduced from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), and is emitted behind the obstructing nail 1201. By irradiating the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitened portion HKB located there, the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized in a color similar to the color of the predetermined switched light. It will continue.

In addition, by configuring the plurality of obstacle nails 1201 with metals of a plurality of colors, light of a predetermined color is introduced into the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) at a predetermined timing. The obstacle nail 1201 of the first predetermined color is visually recognized by the player as a similar color to the predetermined color of light and is inconspicuous, and the obstacle nail 1201 of the second predetermined color is conspicuous as a different color to the predetermined color of light. The state is visually recognized by the player.

Further, the predetermined light introduced into the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) at a predetermined timing becomes different predetermined light, and the color of the light irradiated to the obstructing nail 1201 changes, thereby changing the color of the light to the first predetermined color. The second obstacle nail 1201 is conspicuous as a different color for different predetermined light colors, and the second predetermined color obstacle nail 1201 is inconspicuous as a similar color for different predetermined light colors. is visually recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the color of the light irradiated to the irregular reflection portion (the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) located behind the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 is switched between a conspicuous state and an inconspicuous state. Since the obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the player with respect to the obstacle nail 1201 .

In this way, as the color of the predetermined light introduced to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) changes, the light is visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state due to the color different from the predetermined color. Since the obstacle nail 1201 to be displayed changes fluidly, the player can obtain a visual interest of following the obstacle nail 1201 that is made conspicuous with his/her eyes, and along with this, the player's attention is diverted. Thus, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

An example has been shown in which the whitened portion HKB and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are visually recognized in a predetermined color by light of a predetermined color introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110, but the panel plate It is preferable that the lower light emitting substrate 2400 is configured to emit light of a predetermined color so as to maintain the lighting state from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off.

By adopting such a configuration, the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitened portion HKB, or the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitened portion HKB, and the obstructing nail 1201 have the same color. , the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

An example is shown in which the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 is kept lit in a predetermined color while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It may be configured as For example, at a predetermined timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be changed from lighting in a predetermined color to blinking in a predetermined color. Alternatively, the light intensity may be increased or decreased while the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is lit in a predetermined color. With such a configuration, it is possible to use the light introduced from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 for decoration and indication of the game state. In addition, when the player starts the game and the main control board 1310 detects that the game ball has won the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the second starting opening 2004, the first starting opening 2002, the special lottery result drawn by winning the game ball in the second starting port 2004 is a big hit, and the time when the big winning game state in which the big winning port 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times is started may be the predetermined timing. . In addition, it is preferable to return to the original light emission state at the timing when the player ends the game or the timing when the jackpot game state ends. Alternatively, the special lottery result may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for a big win by such a change in light emission mode.

In this way, by changing the light emitting mode of the light introduced from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) to a different light emitting mode according to the game state, The light introduced into the transparent plate portion can be used as light for decorating the irregular reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) and the whitening portion HKB, while making the presence of the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous. .

As the color of the light introduced into the panel plate 1110, light of a predetermined color other than white or a color similar in color tone to the obstructing nail 1201 may be employed. For example, any one of blue, green, and red light may be selectively introduced into the obstructing peg 1201 made of brass. Alternatively, any one of blue, green, and gold light may be selected and introduced into the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper. In these cases, although the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized by the color of the introduced light, the color of the light visually recognized in the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 Since the colors are not the same, the effect of making the existence of the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous is limited. On the other hand, since it is possible to introduce a plurality of different colors to the panel plate 1110, it is possible to increase decorative diversity.

On the other hand, blue, green, red, and gold lights may be introduced into the obstacle nail 1201 made of stainless steel. In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized by the color of the introduced light. , the color of the light visually recognized in the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually recognized in the same color. can be introduced, it is possible to increase decorative diversity.

Light of one color among a plurality of colors of light is introduced to the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, and a special lottery is drawn according to the color of the light introduced to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB. It may also be configured to execute a lighting effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the above will be a big win. It is preferable that this light emitting effect is started at a timing before the result of the special lottery is indicated to the player by stopping the variation of the decorative symbols.

For example, when the brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, as the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110, as the first expected color indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low (for example, 10%) Blue light is used as the second expected color with a medium expectation of a big hit (eg 30%), and green light is used as the third expected color indicating a high expectation of a big hit (eg 70%) Gold light is used. It may be configured to

In addition, when the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 from the panel plate 1110 is blue as the first expected color indicating that the probability of a big hit is low (for example, 10%). For the light, green light is used as the second expected color indicating a medium level of expectation for a big hit (for example, 30%), and red light is used as a third expected color for indicating a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, 70%). can be configured to

In addition, when the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, as the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110, the first expected color indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low (for example, 10%) Adopt blue light as the second expected color with medium expectation of big hit (eg 30%) and white light as the third expected color indicating high expectation of big hit (eg 70%). It may be configured to

In this way, when the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized in a predetermined color based on the result of the special lottery, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is displayed in a light emitting color with a relatively low probability of a big hit. When the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 is caused to emit light in an emission color with a relatively high probability of winning a big hit, the color of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstacle nail 1201 are used. and are visually recognized in similar colors.

In this way, when the light emitting means (panel board lower light emitting board 2400) emits light in a color expected to be a big hit, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the irregular reflection part (the panel board back rough surface part 1110b) are used. ) and the color of the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized in a similar color, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices it and puts a damper on the player's interest, which has been heightened by the high-expectation lighting performance.

In addition, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is normally turned off, and at the timing indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit (for example, the timing of occurrence of the ready-to-win state), any one of the first expected color to the third expected color is selected. light of any one of the first to third expected colors may be introduced to the panel plate 1110 by emitting light for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds).

The color of the light emitted by the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be changed from the first expected color to the second expected color at the timing before the special lottery result is suggested by the stoppage of the decorative pattern. . Alternatively, after changing from the first expected color to the second expected color, the color may be further changed to the third expected color. Alternatively, the first expected color may be changed to the third expected color, or the second expected color may be changed to the third expected color. Moreover, it is preferable that such a change in the expected color actually increases the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win.

It is preferable that the light emitting effects of the first expected color to the third expected color are executed until the variable display of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery is completed. Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, until the variable display of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery is stopped, or the variable display corresponding to the next special lottery result. Until is started, it may be configured to continue the light emission effect. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, the light-emitting performance is continued even at the timing when the variable display indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the big win game state is established. It may be configured to continue the light emitting effect even after is started. In this case, the start of a predetermined round during the big win game state and the end of the big win game state may be set as the timing for ending the light emitting effect.

When the result of the special lottery is a big win, the fact that the result of the special lottery is a big win is indicated to the player (for example, a special character is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, At a timing such as when a special sound effect is output, the light emission state of the first expected color or the second expected color may be changed to the light emission state of the third expected color. In this case, the start of a predetermined round during the big win game state and the end of the big win game state may be set as the timing for ending the light emitting effect.

In this way, at the timing when it is determined that the state is advantageous to the player (jackpot game state), the light emitting effect of the third expected color is executed, and even during the state that is advantageous to the player (jackpot game state). By executing the light emission performance with the third expected color, the whitening part HKB is made less conspicuous and the player hardly notices its existence, thereby generating a state advantageous to the player (big win game state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that puts a damper on the player's heightened interest at the timing when the fact is confirmed or during the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state).

The state of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 can be changed from the light-emitting state to the light-emitting state or from the light-emitting state to the light-emitting state in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the game store clerk. You may Alternatively, the intensity of the light emitted from the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be set in a plurality of levels, and the light emitted from the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be adjusted according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk. The strength may be configured to be changeable. Alternatively, a plurality of colors of light emitted from the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be provided, and the color of the light emitted from the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be changed according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk. It may be configured to be changeable. Yellow, white, red, or the like may be adopted as the luminescent color that can be selected at this time. Moreover, you may combine these. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB with an appropriate color and an appropriate amount of light that makes the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

This is because the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed inside the amusement parlor and the amount of light from other gaming machines installed inside the amusement parlor (especially the gaming machines installed back-to-back with respect to the pachinko machine 1). This is because the amount of light is not always sufficient to illuminate the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate and the whitened portion HKB. For example, when the amount of light from lighting equipment or other game machines is sufficient, and the light from a plurality of light sources is mixed to illuminate the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB. If so, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous even when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in the off state. Also, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, the color of the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the amusement parlor, and the light from other gaming machines installed inside the amusement parlor (particularly, the gaming machines installed back-to-back with respect to the pachinko machine 1) is not necessarily a color close to white. For example, a phenomenon may occur in which the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are illuminated by blue or green ambient light. In this case, by operating the operation button 410 so as to cause the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to emit light in a color similar to the color of the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion are illuminated. It is possible to visually recognize the HKB and the obstructing nail 1201 in similar colors. For example, yellow light is emitted when brass obstacle nails 1201 are used, and red or orange light is emitted when pure copper obstacle nails 1201 are used. do it. By adjusting the amount of light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to such an extent that the color of the light from the lighting equipment and other game machines is not noticeable, the consumption of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Electric power can be saved.

It should be noted that such changes in the light emitting state, light emitting color, and light intensity may be configured to be executable while the player is playing the game. For example, by operating the operation button 410, it is possible to change the lighting state, the lighting color, and the amount of light while the decorative symbols are changing or during the jackpot game state. Also, although the operation button 410 is an operation button for presentation, a dedicated button for changing the color or amount of light may be provided on the front surface of the plate unit 320 . Further, it is preferable to configure the button so that it can be operated without opening the door frame 3. - 特許庁

In this way, it is possible to adjust the color and amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (lower panel light emitting substrate 2400) by operating the operating means (operation button 410, etc.) that can be operated by the store clerk. Thus, the light emission state of the diffused reflection portion (the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate) can be made into a light emission state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous.

While the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 emits light in a predetermined color during the variation of the decorative pattern, etc., the light emitting effect is performed as an example, but such light emitting effect can be executed during the jackpot game state. good too. For example, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, the light emission effect may be started, and at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, the light emission effect may be terminated. In the light emitting effect, for example, it is preferable to suggest the degree of expectation regarding the game state that occurs after the end of the big win game state (for example, the degree of expectation that the probability change state will occur after the big win game state).

In this way, the light emitting means (panel By causing the lower light emitting substrate 2400) to emit light, it is possible to make the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the heightened interest of the player due to the execution of the light emission performance with the degree of expectation is spoiled.

By providing the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b behind the obstacle nail 1201 or by introducing light of a predetermined color from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b can be visually recognized in a predetermined color. However, there is a problem that the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a (a portion forming a hemispherical spherical surface) is visually recognized as it is in the color of the metal that constitutes the obstructing nail head 1201a. In particular, when the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed in the arcade or from other game machines is weak, the back of the obstructing nail 1201 is visually recognized in a bright color, so that only the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a is visible. There is a risk that the player will feel a sense of incongruity because it will be visually recognized in a darker color than in a bright color and become conspicuous.

An embodiment in which the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is made inconspicuous by irradiating the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with light from the side, above, below, or in front will be described below.

The door-frame right-side unit 550 shown in FIG. 6 and the like may be placed in a light-emitting state so that the light emitted from the door-frame right-side unit 550 illuminates the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the off state, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light. should be the same color as the light emitted from the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the light emitting state, the door frame right side unit 550 is set in the light emitting state. should be In this way, by matching the emission color and timing of the emitted light between the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a inconspicuous. .

In this way, an irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front is provided, and white or bright light emitted from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) is provided. In a state where the irregularly reflecting portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel board) reflects light irregularly, the irradiating means irradiates the obstructing nail 1201 with white or bright light from the front, thereby making the obstructing nail head 1201a conspicuous. can be made difficult.

By the way, when the door frame right side unit 550 is in a light-emitting state, only the right side of the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a is irradiated with light when viewed from the front, and the left side of the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a is: It is still visible in a dark color and stands out. Therefore, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 may be configured to be symmetrical with the door frame right side unit 550 and controlled to be in the same light emitting state as the door frame right side unit 550 . With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the entire front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with light, thereby making the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a more inconspicuous. It is desirable that the door-frame left-side unit 530 and the door-frame right-side unit 550 have the same emission color and timing of emitted light.

In this way, a plurality of irradiating means (door frame right side unit 550, door frame left side unit 530, etc.) capable of irradiating light from the front onto the obstructing nail 1201 are provided, and light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) are provided. In a state in which the irregularly reflecting portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) reflects light irregularly due to the light from the above, the plurality of irradiating means irradiate the obstacle nail 1201 with light from different angles in front of the obstacle nail 1201, thereby removing the obstacle nail head. The portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

Although an embodiment has been described in which the door frame right side unit 550 is in a light emitting state, the obstructing nail head 1201a can be illuminated by light from another member capable of emitting light instead of or in addition to the door frame right side unit 550. may be configured to irradiate the front surface of the . In these other members as well, it is preferable to match the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 with the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light.

Further, when light is emitted from the door frame right side unit 550 toward the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may remain in the off state instead of the light emitting state. This is because when the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is irradiated with light from the front, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are also irradiated with the light at the same time. In this case, it is preferable to irradiate the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with white light from the front, or irradiate the obstructing nail head 1201a with light of the same color as the metal color of the obstructing nail 1201a. In addition, when the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is irradiated with light not only from the door frame right side unit 550 but also from other members capable of emitting light, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 can be used in the same manner. may remain in the off state instead of being in the light emitting state.

In this way, an irradiating means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating light from the front to the obstacle nail 1201 is provided, and when the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) is turned off, the irradiating means By irradiating the nail 1201 with white or bright light from the front, the white or bright light from the irradiating means is also radiated to the irregular reflection part (the panel board back rough surface part 1110b), and the irregular reflection part emits the light. Even in the case where the light is diffusely reflected, it is possible to make the obstructing nail head portion 1201a inconspicuous.

In addition, a light emitting part capable of emitting light downward is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 described with reference to FIG. may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate light above the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a, and it is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a inconspicuous. In addition, the light emitted from the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the effect operation unit 400 described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to irradiate light toward the obstructing nail head portion 1201 a through the frame top lens 418 . It should be noted that the frame top lens 418 is preferably made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the lower front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with light, thereby making it possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a inconspicuous. It is desirable that the door frame top unit 570 and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the production operation unit 400 match the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light.

In this way, an irradiation means (such as the door frame right side unit 550) capable of irradiating the obstructing nail 1201 with light from the front is provided above or below the obstructing nail 1201, so that the obstructing nail 1201 can be illuminated from the front. Even when configured to irradiate light, the obstructing nail head portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

24 and 37, the door frame top unit 570 and effect operation unit 400 described with reference to FIG. A similar configuration may be employed in a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to illuminate the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a. In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 154, the operation button 410 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a light emitting means is provided in the operation button 410 so that the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a can be illuminated. It may be configured to irradiate.

A configuration may be adopted in which light is emitted from the movable frame body provided in the door frame top unit 570 to the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a. For example, the rear surface of the printed circuit board that constitutes the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 described with reference to FIGS. Light emitting diodes are mounted on the rear surface of the printed circuit board that constitutes the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430 of the body 7400, and the rear surface of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body The rear surface of the body 7400 is made of a colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin, and the light from the light emitting diode mounted on the printed circuit board constituting the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330 and the left ear inner frame movable body. The light from the light emitting diode mounted on the rear surface of the printed circuit board that constitutes the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430 of the body 7400 may illuminate the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. . Also, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIG. It can be made to emit light.

In this way, movable bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, etc.) and operable operation means (operation button 410, etc.) are employed to irradiate obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front. Even when configured, the obstructing nail head portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

Also, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIGS. The light from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit provided in the door frame top unit 570 so as to irradiate the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. It may be configured as

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 181(B) and 181(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, after the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body is stopped facing the front (third state), the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are turned on. It should be illuminated. Of the lights emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body, the left Part of the light that has not been irradiated to either the inner ear frame movable body first surface 7410 or the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is irradiated to the lower part of the game area 5a.

With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame in a state (third state) stopped facing the front. The movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 can be decorated by irradiating light, and the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a planted in the lower part of the game area 5a. It is possible to irradiate light upward from the left and right directions, and it is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a inconspicuous without providing a new light source.

In addition, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is turned off, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color. The color of light emitted from the light emitting portion 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light. The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head can be detected. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a less conspicuous.

181(A), 181(C), and 181(D) from the standby position (first state) to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear The inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated 10 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side and stopped, and then the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part in the door frame top unit are turned. The portion 7052 may emit light. Most of the light emitted downward from the door frame top unit 570 of the light emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is The entire play area 5a is irradiated without being blocked by the body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to irradiate the upper front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted in the entire game area 5a with light from the left and right directions, without providing a new light source. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a inconspicuous.

In addition, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is turned off, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color. The color of light emitted from the light emitting portion 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light. The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head can be detected. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a less conspicuous.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are set to the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. After the ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stopped facing the front shown in FIGS. The right light emitting portion 7050 and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit may be caused to emit light.

Of the light emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body A part of the light that has not been irradiated to either is irradiated to the upper part of the game area 5a and the lower part of the game area 5a.

With such a configuration, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 in a state (third state) stopped facing the front are irradiated with light for decoration. In addition, it is possible to irradiate light from the left and right to the upper front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted in the upper part of the game area 5a and the lower part of the game area 5a, and a new light source is provided. It is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a inconspicuous. In addition, in the central part in the vertical direction of the game area 5a, the light from the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit is emitted from the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body, Since it is blocked by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body, it is hardly irradiated. As a result, the light is reflected on the surface of the front side and the back side of the glass unit 190 and the surface of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the amount of light that feels "dazzling" is incident on the eyeballs of the player. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's visibility of the game board side effect display device 1600 is obstructed.

In addition, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is turned off, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color. The color of light emitted from the light emitting portion 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light. The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head can be detected. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a less conspicuous.

Further, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. In this case, a light emitting diode is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 made of a white printed circuit board, and is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 positioned at the movement position. The front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a may be illuminated with light from the light emitting diode. In this case, in order to protect the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810, a cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin may be provided on the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

A light-emitting diode is not mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810, and only a cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin is provided to protect the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810. good too. In this case, the back of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 located at the movement position and the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 made of a white printed circuit board emit light forward from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The light diffusely reflected backward illuminates the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. In this case, the display color used for the background image and the character image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be white or a color similar to the color of the obstacle nail. Alternatively, as the background image or character image displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, an image that is painted so that the proportions of red, green, and blue are equally divided may be used. This is because these lights are irregularly reflected and mixed at the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting part 7810 made of a white printed circuit board, so that the color of the light illuminating the obstructing nail 1201 becomes white. Because it becomes

In this way, irradiation means (such as the game board side effect display device 1600) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from behind is provided behind the obstacle nail 1201, and light can be reflected to the obstacle nail 1201. Even when a reflecting means (root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting part 7810, etc.) is provided in front of the obstructing nail 1201 to irradiate the obstructing nail 1201 with light from the front, the obstructing nail head 1201a is made inconspicuous. be able to.

The shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b represents a snowy mountain. In this way, by adopting a shape imitating the shape of an article or a geometric shape as the shape of the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b also functions as a part for decoration. It is possible to It should be noted that, in this specification, members and parts that have a similar shape and are white or diffusely reflect light represent snowy mountains. In addition, similar shaped members and portions with metallic luster represent glaciers. Other colors indicate plants growing in the mountains and rocks exposed as the surface of the mountains.

In this way, the obstacle nail head portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous by making the external shape of the irregular reflection portion (the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate, etc.) into a decorative shape.

Although the method of implanting the obstruction nail 1201 into the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 has been shown, when a plurality of obstruction nails 1201 are implanted adjacently, there is a gap between the adjacent obstruction nails 1201. In the area of , both the effect of the elastic deformation of the panel plate 1110 caused by one of the implanted obstructing nails 1201 and the effect of the elastic deformation of the panel plate 1110 caused by the other implanted obstructing nail 1201 are will join. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB is likely to occur between the adjacent obstacle nails 1201 . In particular, like the left guide nail 1232, when the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 are provided adjacently so that the game ball does not pass between them, such a whitened portion HKB is likely to occur. It should be noted that there is a high possibility that the whitened portion HKB will also occur in the right guide nail 1233 as well.

Therefore, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, the entire left guide nail 1232 is configured to be located in one panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. By adopting such a configuration, even if the whitened portion HKB is generated in a portion where the whitened portion HKB is particularly likely to be generated, the generated whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Regarding the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as the life nails 1230 and the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as the jump nails 1231, the rough surface part 1110b on the back of the panel board is attached to each of the obstacle nails 1201. You may comprise so that each may be provided.

It should be noted that the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side effect display device 1600 should preferably be configured so as not to overlap each other when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, the visibility of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not hindered. On the other hand, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side effect display device 1600 may overlap each other when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, at least a part of the periphery of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized decoratively.

A configuration in which the technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 are combined may be used. For example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in one embodiment may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in another embodiment. Also, the technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 may be adopted in other embodiments described later. In addition, in the case of the embodiment having the panel board rear substrate 2420 instead of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, the panel board rear board 2420 is replaced with the panel board lower light emitting board 2400. It is preferable to configure so as to emit light in the following manner.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, in the panel plate 1110, the boundary between the portion provided with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the portion not provided with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is formed by a combination of a plurality of straight lines. It is configured as follows. Specifically, a plurality of linear portions having a length approximately equal to the length of the obstructing nail 1201 is used to form a boundary between a portion provided with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and a portion not provided with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. It is

In this way, the boundary between the irregular reflection portion (the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, etc.) and the rearward visible portion (the portion where the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, etc. is not provided) where the rear can be easily visually recognized is formed by a plurality of straight lines. By constructing such that the bar-shaped obstacle nail 1201 and the boundary between the irregular reflection part and the rearward visible part are visually similar, the obstacle nail 1201 and the irregular reflection part are further integrated. It is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous by making it visible to the player. It should be noted that at least some of the boundaries may be linear instead of all the boundaries being linear.

Also, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed in a mesh shape. FIG. 260 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 259 is modified into a mesh shape. FIG. 260(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 260(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 260(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the second from the right among the obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side and the left guide nail 1232 The obstacle nail 1201 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate when viewed from the front. In addition, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided at positions partially overlapping the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b in a front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 260(b), the portions of these obstructing nails 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized as overlapping at least a portion of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this way, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member positioned behind.

Also, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 261 shows an embodiment modified to form the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 259 from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 261(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 261(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b has a decorative shape that imitates a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 261(a), among the obstructing nails 1201, the first obstructing nail 1201 from the right among the left guide nails 1232 and the two obstructing nails 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 are attached to the back of the panel board. It is provided at a position that does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261(b), the portions of these obstructing nails 1201 embedded in the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized as overlapping at least a portion of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this way, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member positioned behind.

Also, instead of the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, a panel board back first rough surface part 1110c and a panel board back second rough surface part 1110d having different roughnesses provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110 may be provided. In FIG. 262, instead of the panel board back rough surface part 1110b described with reference to FIG. Fig. 4 shows an embodiment; FIG. 262(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 262(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c with relatively fine roughness is provided with second rough panel back surface portions 1110d with relatively coarse roughness above and below. The appearance of the panel board back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel board back second rough surface portion 1110d are different. The boundary between the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d has a decorative shape that imitates a mountain range. As shown in FIG. 262(a), among the obstructing nails 1201, the first to third obstructing nails 1201 from the left side of the left guide nail 1232 are positioned so as to overlap the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d in front view. is provided in In addition, the obstruction nail 1201 functioning as the left jump nail 1231 and the obstruction nail 1201 functioning as the left life nail 1230 are provided at positions overlapping the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c in a front view. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the first to third obstacle nails 1201 from the left among the left guide nails 1232 are planted in the panel board 1110 at the first rough surface portion on the back of the panel board. It can be visually recognized so that at least a part thereof overlaps with 1110c. In addition, the portion of the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the left jumping nail 1231 and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the left life nail 1230 implanted in the panel plate 1110 is the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d. It can be visually recognized so that it overlaps with at least a part.

Instead of providing the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c and the panel board back second rough surface part 1110d according to the difference in roughness, the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c and the panel board are formed according to the difference in roughness. It may be configured to provide a plate back second rough surface portion 1110d. For example, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c may be formed by satin finishing, and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d may be formed by lens cutting. Even in this case, it is possible to make the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d look different.

In this way, a plurality of diffuse reflection portions (the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d) with different visual appearances are provided, and the decorative shape can be visually recognized at the boundary between the plurality of diffuse reflection portions. Even in such a case, the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board can be visually recognized by the player in an integrated manner, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d), the embodiment in which the white light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel board 1110 has been described. In the modified example described with reference, white light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be introduced to the panel plate 1110 .

Referring to FIG. 259, an example in which panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of panel plate 1110 is shown. A modified example in which a panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e is provided will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 263(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 263(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 263(a). FIG. 263(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method. FIG. 263(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

The panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e is preferably formed by plating the back surface of the panel board 1110 . As the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, it is preferable to provide a plated layer having a grayish-white metallic luster and being visually recognized as silver by a plating process using aluminum as a material. Alternatively, the panel plate back side metallic luster portion 1110e having a reddish metallic luster is provided by a plating process using pure copper as a material, or a yellowish metallic luster is provided by a plating process using brass as a material. , a panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e visually recognized in gold may be provided. As for the shape of the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, it is preferable to adopt the same shape as the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. The thickness of the plated thin film formed by the plating process is about 0.2 mm, which is exaggerated in the drawing. This point also applies to other embodiments and drawings showing other embodiments to be described later.

In this way, by providing a metallic luster portion (a metallic panel plate rear metallic luster portion 1110e also made of metal) behind the metallic obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic lustrous portion are arranged to have a metallic luster. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB located between the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion can be made inconspicuous in the front-rear relationship.

As shown in FIG. 263(d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be configured to introduce light into the panel plate 1110 and reflect the introduced light at the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e. Further, the light emission mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, it is possible to visually recognize the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e and the obstructing nail 1201 with metallic gloss, and as a result, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

Further, the panel board back metallic glossy portion 1110e may be formed in a mesh shape. FIG. 264 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 263 is modified into a mesh shape. FIG. 264(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 264(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 264(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the second from the right among the obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side and the left guide nail 1232 The obstacle nail 1201 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e when viewed from the front. Also, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided at positions partially overlapping the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e in a front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 264(b), these obstructing nails 1201 can be visually recognized so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e. In this way, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e in an integrated manner while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member positioned behind.

Further, the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 265 shows an embodiment modified to form the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 263 from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 265(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 265(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e has a decorative shape that imitates a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 265(a), among the obstructing nails 1201, the first obstructing nail 1201 from the right among the left guide nails 1232 and the two obstructing nails 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 are attached to the back of the panel board. It is provided at a position that does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 265(b), these obstacle nails 1201 can be visually recognized so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. In this way, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the obstructing nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member positioned behind, and as a result, whitening occurs. It is possible to make the portion HKB inconspicuous.

An example in which the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e is provided in a planar shape has been shown, but if the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e mirror-reflects light, only the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e stands out. , there is a possibility that the sense of unity between the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 may be lost. This tendency becomes more conspicuous as the area of the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e increases. Therefore, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 264, a mesh pattern may be formed on one panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. Alternatively, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 265, a plurality of panel plate back metallic luster portions 1110e may be provided to reduce the area of each panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. For example, an independent panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be provided for each obstacle nail 1201. FIG. Alternatively, the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e may be configured to diffusely reflect light more by removing a part of the panel plate back metallic lustrous portion 1110e generated by the plating process. With such a configuration, the visual sense of unity between the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 can be improved.

Instead of the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, a panel plate back first metallic glossy portion 1110f and a panel plate back second metallic glossy portion 1110g, which are visually recognized with mutually different metallic lusters, are provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110. can be configured to FIG. 266 shows a panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f and a panel board back second metallic luster part 1110g which are visually recognized with mutually different metallic lusters instead of the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e described with reference to FIG. 10 shows an embodiment modified to provide FIG. 266(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 266(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board back second metallic luster part 1110g is provided above and below the panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f. The boundary between the panel board back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel board back second metallic luster portion 1110g has a decorative shape resembling a mountain range.

For the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110g, the plated portion made of aluminum and visible in silver, the plated portion made of pure copper and visible in reddish color, and brass It is possible to adopt an aspect in which the plated portion visually recognized in gold is appropriately combined with both the panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f and the panel board back second metallic luster part 1110g. Specifically, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is formed of a plated portion visible in silver, and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is a plated portion visible in reddish color or gold. It may be configured by a plated portion that Alternatively, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is formed of a plated portion visible in gold, and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is a plated portion visible in silver or a plated portion visible in a reddish color. It may be configured by Alternatively, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is formed of a plated portion that is visible in a reddish color, and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is a plated portion that is visible in silver or a plating portion that is visible in gold. It may be configured by

A combination may be employed in which the metallic luster of the back panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e obtained by a predetermined plating process and the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 have similar colors. For example, when a stainless-steel obstruction nail 1201 that is visible in silver is used as the obstruction nail 1201 , the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 may be plated to be visible in silver. Further, when a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is employed as the obstacle nail 1201, the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is preferably plated with a reddish metallic luster. In addition, when the obstruction nail 1201 made of brass is adopted as the obstruction nail 1201, the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is preferably plated in gold so as to be visible. In this manner, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the color of the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e are configured to match each other, so that the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e form an integral decorative portion. Since it is visually recognized by the player, the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

Similarly, the metallic luster of one of the panel board back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel board back second metallic lustrous portion 1110g and the metallic luster of the obstructing nail 1201 have similar colors. A combination may be employed. For example, when a stainless steel obstacle nail that is visible in silver color is used as the obstacle nail 1201, the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated so that the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is visually visible in silver color. One of the portion 1110f and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is formed so that it can be visually recognized with the same silvery metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel and the panel. The other of the plate back second metallic luster portions 1110g may be plated so as to have a metallic luster other than silver (reddish metallic luster or gold).

In addition, when a brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted as the obstacle nail 1201, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated in gold so that the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel One of the plate back second metallic luster portions 1110g is formed so as to be visually recognized with the same golden metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the panel plate back first metallic lustrous portion 1110f and the panel plate back second metallic luster are formed. It is preferable that the other of the metallic luster portions 1110g is plated so as to be visible with a metallic luster other than gold (reddish metallic luster or gold).

In this way, the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201, the first metallic luster portion (for example, the panel board back first metallic luster portion 1110f) and the second metallic luster portion (for example, the panel board back second metallic luster portion 1110g) ), the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and either one of the first metallic luster portion and the second metallic luster portion are integrated. The whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous by being visually recognized by the player as a decoration mode. In addition, since the metallic luster of the other of the first metallic lustrous portion and the second metallic lustrous portion is still visible, the other metallic lustrous portion is also the obstacle nail 1201 . The whitened portion HKB can be made more inconspicuous by visually recognizing it as a whole.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263(d), the embodiment in which the light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel board 1110 was shown, but with reference to FIGS. In the modified example described above, the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be introduced to the panel plate 1110 .

259 to 262 show an embodiment in which diffuse reflection portions (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d) are provided on the rear surface of panel plate 1110. FIG. However, the diffused reflection portion in these embodiments is subjected to the plating processing described with reference to FIGS. A glossy portion 1110f and a panel board back second metallic glossy portion 1110g) may be provided. 261 and 262, in an embodiment having a plurality of irregular reflection portions, a metallic luster portion may be similarly provided for at least one irregular reflection portion. good. It should be noted that the other irregular reflection portion (rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member) may also be plated in the same manner. Alternatively, another metallic luster portion may be formed by such a method to have an uneven shape.

In the case of such a configuration, the metallic glossy portion is not flat but has an uneven shape, so that ambient light and light from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, etc.) are reflected in the metallic glossy portion. Since the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion can be visually recognized more integrally, the whitened portion HKB can be made even less conspicuous. In addition, since both the irregular reflection portion and the metallic luster portion are provided, the irregular reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized as one, and the metallic luster portion and the metallic obstacle nail 1201 are visually integral. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

By the way, a charged game ball may roll on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . Such a phenomenon occurs when game balls are lifted and polished on a game machine island, which is composed of a plurality of pachinko machines, and other members (such as the polishing cloth used for polishing, the The game ball is charged with static electricity due to friction with the synthetic resin etc. constituting the flow path, and the game ball charged in this way is shot into the game area 5a. A discharge phenomenon may occur from a charged game ball toward the surroundings, but when a discharge phenomenon occurs, a high-frequency electromagnetic pulse is generated centering on the position where the discharge phenomenon occurred, and electrons located in the surroundings are generated. It may damage parts or cause electronic parts to malfunction.

In order to prevent such a problem from occurring, it is arranged behind the panel board back metallic glossy part 1110e, the panel board back first metallic glossy part 1110f, and the panel board back second metallic glossy part 1110g, and in a front view. Electronic parts and electronic elements may be arranged at overlapping positions, and these metallic luster portions may be used as shield members for protecting the electronic parts and electronic elements. For example, sensors such as the vibration sensor 2405, the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the general winning sensor 4020, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, etc. It is preferable to arrange them in positions where they visually overlap.

In this way, an electronic component or an electronic component is provided at a position overlapping the metallic glossy portion (the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic glossy portion 1110f, and the panel plate back second metallic glossy portion 1110g) in a front view. By arranging at least one of the elements, it is possible to give the metallic luster portion used as decoration a function of protecting electronic parts and electronic elements.

In addition, the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic glossy portion 1110f, and the panel plate back second metallic glossy portion 1110g are connected to the ground of the electric circuit provided on the game board 5' by a predetermined metal cable (for example, , circuit ground of the peripheral control board 1510). When the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110g are electrically connected, only one of them is connected to the electric circuit provided on the game board 5′. may be configured to be electrically connected to the ground of

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, the example of providing the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b by cutting the back surface of the panel board 1110 was shown. By printing a predetermined white or bright color pattern or pasting a sticker with a predetermined white or bright color pattern on it, the back of the panel plate can diffusely reflect light. It may be configured to provide a portion 1110h. As for the shape of such patterns and seals, it is preferable to employ the same shapes as the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263, an example was shown in which the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated to provide the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. A metallic luster portion 1110e on the rear surface of the panel plate is provided by printing a predetermined pattern that can be visually recognized with metallic luster or attaching a sticker with a predetermined pattern that can be visually recognized with metallic luster. It may be configured as

Referring to FIG. 259, an example in which panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of panel plate 1110 is shown. A modified example in which a visual recognition portion 1110h and a panel plate rear metallic glossy portion 1110e capable of specularly reflecting incident light are provided will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263 may be adopted for the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e.

FIG. 267(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 267(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 267(a). FIG. 267(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 267(d) is a sectional view showing a state in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

According to such a configuration, the irregular reflection portion (panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h) and the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized as one, and the metallic gloss portion (panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e) and the metal The whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous because the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized integrally with the obstacle nail 1201 made of the whitened portion.

It should be noted that the metal obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e may be configured to have similar metallic luster. For example, when a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is employed, it is preferable to employ a panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e that is visible in silver. Alternatively, when the obstruction nail 1201 made of brass is adopted, it is preferable to adopt the panel board back metallic gloss portion 1110e visually recognized in gold. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the panel board back metallic glossy portion 1110e and the metal obstructing nail 1201 more visually as one.

It should be noted that the metal obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e may be configured so as not to have similar metallic luster. For example, when the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is employed, the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e that is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster may be employed. Alternatively, when the brass obstruction nail 1201 is employed, the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e that is visible in silver may be employed. Even in this case, since the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e match in terms of metallic luster, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e can be visually recognized as one. can be done.

In addition, it may be configured such that the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is caused to emit light in a predetermined color, and the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced from below the panel plate 1110 . FIG. 267(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided. For example, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may emit white or yellow light. Further, the light emission mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, it is possible to visually recognize the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e and the obstructing nail 1201 with metallic gloss, and as a result, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

An example in which the light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced from below the panel board 1110 has been shown, but the light is directed forward behind the panel board back bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel board back metallic glossy portion 1110e. A predetermined light-emitting means may be arranged to illuminate the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e from behind. The panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e are formed thin by thinning the thickness or by increasing the amount of light emitted forward from a predetermined light emitting means. Light emitted from the back of the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e is allowed to pass forward, so that the bright color of the panel plate back is visually recognized by the light emitted from the predetermined light emitting means. It is possible to bring the portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e into a decorative state.

The embodiments and technical matters related to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIGS. may be adopted. Similarly, the embodiments and technical matters relating to the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e described with reference to FIGS. It may be employed in the gloss portion 2410b). Further, the embodiments and technical matters related to the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h described with reference to FIG.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 263 and 267, the manufacturing method is adopted in which the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is subjected to plating processing, printing processing, etc., and then the obstacle nail through-holes 1110a are provided in the panel plate 1110. good. This is because when the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated or printed after the obstacle nail through-holes 1110a are provided in the panel plate 1110, the inner walls of the obstacle nail through-holes 1110a are plated, This is because the appearance of the panel plate 1110 deteriorates due to the ink used for printing adhering to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. By the way, after the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is subjected to plating processing, printing processing, etc., the panel plate 1110 is provided with an obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. light leaks forward from the gap between the rear end of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a and the leading end portion 1201e of the obstructing nail. The leaked light may be viewed by the player in an annular shape, resulting in deterioration of the aesthetic appearance. Means for solving such problems are shown below.

FIG. 268 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 267, in which a panel board rear board 2420 is installed behind the panel board 1110, and a panel board rear board is provided in front of the panel board rear board 2420. This embodiment employs a configuration in which the light emitting portion 2425 illuminates the panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h from behind.
FIG. 268(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 268(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 by oblique projection. FIG. 268(c) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 268(a). FIG. 268(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

The panel board rear substrate 2420 is composed of a printed circuit board with white front and rear surfaces. A plurality of panel board rear board light-emitting portions 2425 are provided on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 . The panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes surface-mounted as a light source on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 . The direction of the light emitted from the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 is the normal direction of the panel board rear substrate 2420, and the light is emitted vertically toward the front.

As shown in FIG. 268, in the present embodiment, a decorative panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and behind the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, A panel plate rear substrate 2420 having the same outer shape as the panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h is provided. In addition, by causing the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 to emit light, it is possible to decorate the panel board back bright color visual recognition part 1110h from the rear. The life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, the left guide nail 1232, and the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 are provided at positions that do not overlap when viewed from the front.

With such a configuration, the bright color visible portion (for example, the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h) is decorated with the light from the light source (for example, the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425) provided behind. can do. Furthermore, the amount of light leaking forward from the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a can be reduced, and the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is visually recognized as an annular shape by the player. It becomes possible to suppress deterioration of aesthetic appearance.

A light-emitting diode that emits light toward the side of the mounting surface may be employed as the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 . In this case, since the light emitted from the panel rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 is emitted in a direction parallel to the panel rear substrate 2420, it is possible to irradiate the entire panel substrate 2420 with light. , the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 can be prevented from being uneven in the irradiation amount of light.

The embodiment relating to the panel board rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIG. 268 may be employed in the panel board rear substrate 2420 in other embodiments and the white board on which the light emitting diode is mounted.

Although an example of the bright color visible portion 1110h on the back of the panel plate has been shown, this configuration is not limited to decoration visible in a bright color, and such a configuration may be adopted for a decorative portion provided in the form of a thin film on the back surface of the panel plate. . In particular, in the case of a black or dark colored decorative part, the degree of conspicuousness when light leaks forward is more remarkable than that of a white or light colored decorative part. becomes possible. If a plurality of decorative portions are provided, and the decorative portions have a relatively bright decorative portion and a relatively dark decorative portion, the decorative portion having a brighter color is provided at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. Good. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further suppress deterioration in appearance caused by the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a being viewed by the player in an annular shape.

On the back surface of the panel plate 1110, a diffused reflection portion that diffusely reflects light (for example, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) is provided, or a metallic glossy portion that is visible with metallic luster (for example, the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e) is provided. An example of making the whitened portion HKB around the obstacle nail 1201 less conspicuous by providing a bright color visible portion (for example, the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h) that is visually recognized in a bright color is shown below. 259, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided close to the back surface of the panel plate 1110 to diffusely reflect light, be visually recognized with metallic luster, or be visually recognized with a bright color. will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 269(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 269(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 269(a). FIG. 269(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 269(d) is a sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by subjecting the front side to lens cutting or satin finishing. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects ambient light, and is visually recognized in a whitish color. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 because the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member is arranged closer to the whitened portion HKB than when provided on the rear surface. This is because the whitening portion HKB can be viewed more integrally with the whitening portion HKB.

Behind the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the left guide nail 1232, the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member is positioned. there is

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), the irregular reflection portion (panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, etc.), the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the planting site of the obstructing nail 1201 can be made inconspicuous by the irregular reflection portion visually recognized in white. It becomes possible. Further, by providing the irregular reflection part on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the irregular reflection part and the whitening part HKB can be made closer, and the irregular reflection part and the whitening part HKB can be visually recognized more integrally. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the front surface of the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member, etc.) included in the decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) is plated with metal to form unevenness. It may be configured to form a certain metallic luster.

As shown in FIG. 269(d), the panel plate lower light-emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 with light of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow), and the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is irradiated. It may be configured to reflect light. Further, the light emission mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member can be visually recognized whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

Referring to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind panel plate 1110. An embodiment modified to have a panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b instead of the plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 270(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 270(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 270(a). FIG. 270(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 270(d) is a sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b formed by plating on the front side. The metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects the ambient light and is visually recognized with metallic luster. Even with such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 270(d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the introduced light is reflected at the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. good too. Further, the light emission mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member and the obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

Referring to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind panel plate 1110. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to have a panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b in addition to the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 271(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 271(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 271(a). FIG. 271(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 271(d) is a sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and includes a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by lens cutting and a panel plate formed by plating. It has a rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on the front side. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects ambient light, and is visually recognized in a whitish color. In addition, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects the ambient light, so that the metallic luster is visually recognized.

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201, a decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member) provided with a diffused reflection portion (panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, etc.) and a metallic luster portion (panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b). 2410, etc.) are positioned, the diffused reflection portion and the whitening portion HKB are visually recognized as one, and the metallic luster portion and the metal obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized as one. The portion HKB can be made less conspicuous. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) is subjected to lens cut processing, and a part thereof is subjected to plating processing so that the uneven metallic luster portion (panel It may be configured to form the plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b).

As shown in FIG. 271(d), the panel plate lower light-emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b are irradiated with light. It may be configured to reflect the reflected light. Further, the light emission mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the metallic luster portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and the irregular reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a ) can be visually recognized whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b were provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. A modified embodiment in which at least one of the rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 will be described with reference to FIG. .

272(a) to 272(c) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA showing modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271(b). FIG. 272(a) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the rear side and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b on the front side. ing. FIG. 272(b) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front side and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b on the rear side. ing. FIG. 272(c) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed to have both the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b on the rear surface side. . 272(a) to 272(c) show only cross-sectional views, but when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 271(a), it has a decorative shape. . Moreover, this point also applies to other embodiments in which embodiments are shown with reference to cross-sectional views.

In this way, by providing the irregular reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) and the metallic luster portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) at a distance in the front-rear direction, the decorative member ( For example, since the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) is visually recognized in a three-dimensional shape with a sense of depth, the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, the portion where the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is formed is defined as the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion. The portion where 2410b is formed may be configured to be the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 272(a) and 272(b), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b are each a panel plate rear decorative member. 2410, but a plurality of panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portions 2410a or a plurality of panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portions 2410b are provided, and the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 An embodiment modified so as to be provided on both the and rear side will be described with reference to FIG.

273(a) to 273(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA showing modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 272(a). FIG. 273(a) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed so as to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on both the front side and the rear side. FIG. 273(b) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed so as to have the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on both the front side and the rear side.

In this way, by providing a plurality of diffused reflection portions (the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member) at a distance in the front-rear direction, the plurality of diffused reflection portions visually recognized in white are visually recognized three-dimensionally. A sense of visual unity between the irregular reflection portion and the whitening portion HKB can be enhanced, and the whitening portion HKB can be made less conspicuous. In addition, by providing a plurality of metallic luster portions (panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) with a distance in the front-rear direction, the plurality of metallic luster portions can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. The visual sense of unity with the obstructing nail 1201 can be enhanced, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. The panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b provided on the rear surface of the plate rear decorative member 2410 are provided so as not to overlap when viewed from the front. may be deformed so that they overlap when viewed from the front, and such a deformed embodiment will be shown below.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a was provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment modified to provide the plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b will be described with reference to FIGS. 274(a) to 274(e).

FIGS. 274(a) to 274(e) are AA sectional views showing modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269A(a). In FIG. 274(a), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided on the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. 4 shows an embodiment modified to . In FIG. 274(b), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and only a part of the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a metallic luster portion of the panel plate rear decorative member. 2410b shows a modified embodiment. In FIG. 274(c), the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided only on a part of the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion is provided on the rear surface side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. 2410b shows a modified embodiment. In FIG. 274(d), the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided only on a part of the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion is provided on the rear surface side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. 2410b shows a modified embodiment. FIG. 274(e) shows a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion only on a part of the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. 2410b shows a modified embodiment.

With such a configuration, a diffused reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) or a metallic luster portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) is located behind the whitened portion HKB in a front view. is positioned, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 274(a), 274(d), and 274(e), a metallic luster portion (for example, a panel plate rear decoration member) is behind a diffused reflection portion (for example, a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a). When configured so that the member metallic luster portion 2410b) is positioned, the game board side effect display device 1600 or other luminous decoration is placed from behind the irregular reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a). Since there is no longer any light emitted from the member that performs the cleaning, it is possible to visually recognize the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member in a whiter color.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 272 to 274, only cross-sectional views are shown, but the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member and the metallic glossy portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member in these embodiments are shown. As the shape in front view of , the shape in front view in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271 may be adopted. In this case, the boundary between the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member and the metallic glossy portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member is visually recognized as a decorative shape resembling a mountain range.

Referring to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind panel plate 1110. An embodiment in which the board rear decorative member 2410 itself is made of milky white resin will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 275(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 275(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 275(a). FIG. 275(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 275(d) is a sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of a milky white synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is visually recognized as milky white.

In this way, when the bright color visible part (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) is arranged behind the transparent plate part (panel plate 1110), the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be cut with a lens or the like. The whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous without performing processing such as plating.

It should be noted that the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be provided with the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a shown in the other embodiment. With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

Further, instead of arranging the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of milky white synthetic resin behind the obstructing nail 1201, a translucent or opaque panel plate made of light colored (white, yellow, skin color, etc.) synthetic resin can be used. The rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged behind the obstructing nail 1201 .

As shown in FIG. 275(d), the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 reflects the irradiated light forward. may Further, the light emission mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be visually recognized whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of a synthetic resin of a dark color (black, navy blue, etc.), which is translucent or opaque and visually recognized, a light-colored printed portion may be provided or a light-colored seal may be affixed. can be configured to Further, it is preferable to arrange such a bright-colored printed portion or a bright-colored sticker so as to be positioned behind the obstructing nail 1201 . Further, a predetermined decorative shape (for example, a plurality of rows of chevron-shaped decorative shapes as shown in FIG. 271) may be provided by such bright-colored printed portions or stickers. Alternatively, a part of the predetermined decorative shape may be provided by a printed portion or sticker having metallic luster.

Referring to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind panel plate 1110. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 is made of metal itself will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 276(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 276(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 276(a). FIG. 276(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 276(d) is a sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of a metal plate material is arranged behind the panel plate 1110 . The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is visually recognized with metallic luster. Metal such as stainless steel, pure copper, and brass may be used as the metal forming the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 . As the metal forming the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to adopt a metal that is visually recognized in a color similar to that of the material of the obstructing nail 1201. FIG.

again. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be formed by bending a metal plate into a bellows shape or by deforming it into a predetermined decorative shape using a mold. At this time, it is preferable to process the metal plate so that the depth is increased in the front-rear direction. With such a configuration, the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) that is visually recognized with metallic luster is visually recognized by the player with a feeling of unevenness, and the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) ) and the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized more integrally. In addition, by providing a transparent top coat portion in a predetermined color (for example, red or yellow) on the front surface of the stainless flat plate, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can have a metallic luster (for example, copper) with a predetermined color. color, gold) may be configured to be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 276(d), the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 reflects the irradiated light. may Further, the light emission mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259(d) may be adopted as the light emission mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) and the obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 268, the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 provided on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 illuminates the panel board rear bright color visual recognition section 1110h from behind. However, an embodiment modified so as not to have the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 277(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 277(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 by the oblique projection method. FIG. 277(c) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 277(a). FIG. 277(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 made of a white printed circuit board is configured to be directly visible through the panel plate 1110 . Even with such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the panel plate rear substrate 2420 which is visually recognized in white. It should be noted that the light-emitting diodes mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 are preferably light-colored ones. In addition, a dark element (an IC for controlling a light-emitting diode, a driver for driving the light-emitting diode, etc.) is mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420, or an obstacle nail 1201 on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420. It is better to mount them in positions that do not overlap. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the whitened portion HKB is conspicuous due to the dark-colored element and the whitened portion HKB being viewed close to each other.

In this embodiment, a light-emitting diode that emits light to the side may be employed as the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 . In this case, the entire front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 can be irradiated with light from the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 .

An embodiment combining the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 277 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 278(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 278(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 278(a). FIG. 278(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, behind the obstacle nail 1201, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a front surface subjected to lens cut processing is arranged. A white panel board rear substrate 2420 with 2425 is disposed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous especially when the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is turned off.

In the present embodiment, the panel board rear board 2420 consists of a panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a capable of diffusely reflecting light emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 and a white printed board. Since the light is reflected between and, the entire rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member is uniformly irradiated with light, and the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is improved. is also possible.

An embodiment combining the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 279(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 279(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 279(a). FIG. 279(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the obstacle nail 1201, and a white panel plate having a panel plate rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 further behind it. A rear substrate 2420 is provided. The front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is composed of a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and a panel board rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. The light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is emitted forward through the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. On the other hand, when the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is irradiated with the light emitted from the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425, the light is emitted rearward on the rear surface of the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. The light is reflected and returns to the white panel plate rear substrate 2420, and finally radiates forward through the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a.

By adopting such a configuration, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally, and the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a located behind the whitened portion HKB and the white colored portion can be seen. The panel plate rear substrate 2420 can make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

As the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 279, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment explained with reference to FIGS. 271 to 274 may be adopted.

Further, as the light emitting mode of the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the light emitting mode of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be employed.

In addition, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be integrated as a decorative unit.

On the panel board rear substrate 2420, an element for controlling or driving the panel board rear substrate light emitting section 2425 (an IC for controlling a light emitting diode, a light emitting diode) is placed at a position overlapping the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b in a front view. (Driver, etc.) may be mounted. In this case, these elements are positioned behind the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. A dark-colored element may be employed as such an element.

By adopting such a configuration, even when statically charged game balls flow in on the board surface of the game board 5 and discharge occurs at a predetermined position to generate an electromagnetic pulse, the decorative member at the rear of the panel board is prevented. It is possible to reduce the influence of the electromagnetic pulse on these elements located behind the metallic luster portion 2410b. In addition, since it is no longer visible adjacent to the obstructing nail 1201, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Instead of mounting these elements on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420, these elements may be mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420. FIG. Also in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 277-279, the panel board rear board 2420 with the panel board rear board light emitter 2425 is positioned behind the obstructing nail 1201 . Therefore, it is possible to directly illuminate the periphery of the obstructing nail 1201 with a stronger amount of light than the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 described with reference to FIG. 259 and the like.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 279, when the panel board rear board light-emitting portion 2425 emits a predetermined color (for example, white, red, and yellow) with a strong amount of light, the panel board rear board 2420 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 can be made visible in a predetermined color, and the whitened portion HKB can also be made visible in a predetermined color. Also, for the obstacle nail 1201 having a metallic luster, the light from the panel board rear substrate 2420 located behind is mirror-reflected (especially at the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b), so that the original metal constituting the obstacle nail 1201 is removed. is visually recognized in a predetermined color instead of being visually recognized in a specific color. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous. When the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 is caused to emit a strong amount of light as described above, each embodiment applied to the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 is applied to the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 to obtain a predetermined amount of light. may be caused to emit light with different emission colors or emission timings.

Note that light of a predetermined color from the panel board rear substrate 2420 does not reach the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a, which is a part of the obstructing nail 1201. In that case, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. It is preferable to irradiate the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with the light of the same color as the predetermined color by means of a member located in front of the obstructing nail 1201a. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is conspicuous.

The color of the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b and the light emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emission portion 2425 may be made to correspond to perform light emission effects, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the light emission mode. At this time, in the case of an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear substrate light emitting part 2425 to emit light in a color similar to the color of the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster part 2410b. Further, in the case of an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear substrate light emitting part 2425 to emit light in a color different from the color of the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster part 2410b.

For example, when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b that is visually recognized in gold is provided, yellow light is emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 as an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation. do it. Also, as an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, it is preferable to irradiate blue light from the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 . By adopting such a configuration, in an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, a predetermined color (panel plate rear decorative member metal The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member, which is decorated with light of the same color as the glossy portion 2410b, is integrally visible to the player, and the whitened portion HKB is also the metallic luster of the panel plate rear decorative member. Since they are decorated with the same color as the part 2410b, they are visible to the player as one. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the whitened portion HKB is visually recognized and the player's expectations for the big win, which are excited by the relatively high expectations, are diminished. Furthermore, since the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member and the metallic glossy portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member are visually recognized as one with the same color, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player. . Specifically, areas that were perceived as separate areas are perceived as a single area, and the area is visually felt to be larger.

Note that when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b that is visually recognized with a silver metallic luster is provided, the emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 in an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is not yellow. It may be configured to adopt white. Similarly, when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b that is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster is provided, yellow is the emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 in a production with a relatively high degree of expectation. Alternatively, the red color may be adopted instead.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 277 and 278, the panel board rear board light-emitting part 2425 provided on the panel board rear board 2420 is arranged around the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front. good too. For example, two panel board rear board light emitting parts 2425 are arranged at positions facing each other across the obstacle nail 1201 (position of 180 degrees), or three panel board rear boards are arranged at angles of 120 degrees around the obstacle nail 1201 . It is preferable to configure so that the substrate light emitting portion 2425 is arranged. In FIGS. 277(a) and 278(a), three panel board rear substrate light-emitting portions 2425 are provided around the jump nail 1231 on the left side in front view and the obstacle nail 1201 on the rightmost side among the left guide nails 1232. provided so that it is illuminated evenly from the surroundings.

By adopting such a configuration, light of a predetermined color is emitted from the surroundings of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, and the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, which constitute the obstacle nail 1201. It is possible to irradiate without On the other hand, when only one panel board rear board light-emitting section 2425 is arranged around the obstacle nail 1201, the part where the light from the panel board rear board light-emitting section 2425 is difficult to reach is placed on both sides of the obstacle nail 1201. It occurs on the side opposite to the side where the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is provided, and the appearance of the obstacle nail 1201 is spoiled. This tendency is particularly pronounced when the members (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear substrate 2420) positioned at the rear are visible in white as in the present embodiment. In addition, when irradiating the light from the plurality of panel board rear board light emitting parts 2425, it is preferable that the light emission mode of each panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 is the same. For example, the plurality of panel board rear substrate light emitting portions 2425 may all be configured to light up in the same predetermined color (white, red, yellow, etc.).

259 to 279, behind the panel plate 1110 are a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, a panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410, a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, and a panel plate rear. An example in which the decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, and the like are arranged has been shown. , the area covering member 2600a is provided with at least one of a diffuse reflection portion similar to the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, a bright color visible portion, and a metallic luster portion similar to the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. may be configured. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous. In addition, in order not to obstruct the rolling of the game ball, these rough surface parts and metallic luster parts are formed in a strip shape, and the width thereof is less than the diameter of the game ball. The game ball should be constructed so as not to be completely hidden by these rough surface portions and metallic luster portions.

It may be configured such that the irregular reflection portion and the metallic luster portion are provided on the rear surface of the glass plate 192 instead of the area covering member 2600a. Alternatively, in an embodiment having a plurality of glass plates 192 , the rough surface portion or metallic luster portion may be provided between the glass plates 192 .

By hiding the vicinity of the tip portion of the obstructing nail 1201 with these irregular reflection portions and metallic luster portions, the vicinity of the tip portion of the obstructing nail 1201 is difficult to be visually recognized when the vicinity of the tip portion of the obstructing nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle. Or you may comprise so that it may become invisible.

By providing the irregular reflection portion, the bright color visible portion, and the metallic glossy portion in front of the whitened portion HKB in this way, the obstacle nail 1201 is sandwiched between the metallic glossy portion located in front and the metallic glossy portion located behind. It is possible to further enhance the sense of unity between the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion. In addition, when the whitened portion HKB is viewed from a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB is hidden by the metallic luster portion and the irregular reflection portion. Furthermore, even if the whitening portion HKB is in a visible position, it will be sandwiched between the diffuse reflection portion and bright color visible portion located in the rear and the diffuse reflection portion and bright color visible portion located in front. HKB can be made less conspicuous.

268 to 279, an embodiment in which one or both of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are arranged behind the panel plate 1110 to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Although shown, as an effect, one or both of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be movable or pivotable. Further, it is preferable that this movement effect is executed under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by this moving effect. A driving mechanism for moving and rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 may be driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 .

By the way, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are configured to be movable in this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 positioned at the standby position The whitened portion HKB, which has been inconspicuous until then, may become conspicuous when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move to the moving positions. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming conspicuous, the following embodiments may be adopted.

FIG. 280 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269 in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is vertically movable. FIG. 280(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the standby position. FIG. 280(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the first movement position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (10 mm). It is located at a position overlapping with the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. FIG. 280(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 at the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the second movement position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm). The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is positioned so as not to overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, when a decorative member having an irregularly reflecting portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) moves from the standby position to the first movement position in the movement effect, the obstructing nail 1201 is positioned behind the panel plate in a front view. By being positioned so as to overlap with the decorative member 2410, a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous can be maintained.

In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved to the first movement position, it is desirable that all the obstructing nails 1201 overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. Even when only the nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in a front view, the whitened portion HKB can be kept inconspicuous.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position, which is a position farther than the first movement position, the impact on the player increases due to the large amount of movement. The obstacle nail 1201 shown in 280(c) and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 do not overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, the execution frequency of moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the first movement position and then returning to the standby position without moving to the second movement position, and the panel board rear decoration member As for the execution frequency of the effect of moving the 2410 from the standby position to the second movement position and then returning to the standby position, it is preferable to increase the execution frequency of the former effect. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence frequency of situations in which the whitened portion HKB is conspicuous while realizing diversification of presentation modes in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is moved.

When moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to move the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 integrally. Alternatively, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved integrally. Then, in a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position or the second movement position, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be brought into the light emitting state.

Further, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is at the first movement position and when it is at the second movement position, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel board rear board 2420 is made to emit light in different states, thereby The decorative member 2410 may be configured to be in a light emitting state in which the decorative member 2410 is visually recognized in different light emitting states. Also, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed simultaneously corresponding to this light emitting effect state. Also, different effect images may be displayed when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the first movement position and when it is at the second movement position. A single character or an integrated effect can be achieved by the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the first movement position or the second movement position and the special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. may be configured to represent For example, as a special effect image, it may be configured to display a raining state or a snowy state as a special effect image on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 representing a mountain range. In addition, it may be configured such that a different degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by such a plurality of presentation modes.

With this configuration, the player's attention is focused on the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the game board side effect display device 1600 positioned in the direction in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves. Even if the decoration member 2410 moves to the second movement position and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 in a front view, the player's consciousness can be diverted from the whitened portion HKB. becomes.

Although an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269 has been shown, it is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269, and the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. may be similarly modified. Also, the embodiment may be applied between modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. Also, the modified example of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be applied to the panel board rear substrate 2420 as well. Also in these cases, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

FIG. 281 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are modified to be vertically movable in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 281(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 278(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the standby position.

FIG. 281(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 278(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves upward by a predetermined distance (20 mm) in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110. Although the decorative member 2410 is positioned to overlap in front view, the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned to overlap in front view.

FIG. 281(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 278(a), showing the panel board rear substrate 2420 at the moving position. When the panel board rear board 2420 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm). 2420 are positioned so as not to overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are positioned to overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is moved from the standby position to the moving position at a certain timing, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board are moved. 2420 may not move to the moving position at the same time. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved so as to appear and disappear alternately in the vertical direction.

By adopting such a configuration, even when the movement effect of moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 to the movement position is executed, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear are Since it is positioned so as to overlap with one of the substrates 2420 that has not moved in a front view, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous. An embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are respectively moved from the standby position to the moving position has been shown, but the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is provided instead of the panel board rear substrate 2420 and overlaps in the front-rear direction. The two panel board rear decorative members 2410 may be moved in the same manner. Alternatively, a panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided instead of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the two panel plate rear substrates 2420 overlapping in the front-rear direction may be similarly moved. Also, the positions of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be reversed in the front-rear direction, and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be arranged in the front and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged in the rear, and they may be moved in the same manner. . Also, a plurality of decoration units each composed of the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be stacked and arranged and moved in the same manner.

FIG. 281(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 278(a), showing a state in which both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved upward in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm) by moving from the standby position to the moving position. Both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned so as not to overlap with the nail 1201 when viewed from the front. In this case, the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 may become conspicuous.

Therefore, in a state in which both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved by causing the panel board rear substrate 2420 to emit light of a predetermined emission color. You may comprise so that it may be in a light emission production|presentation state. Also, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed simultaneously corresponding to this light emitting effect state. A single character or the like may be represented by the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the moving position and a special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . Note that the same aspect as the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 280 may be adopted.

With such a configuration, the player's interest is focused on the side of the game board located in the direction in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear board 2420, or the panel board rear board 2420 moves. Since the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved to the movement position to face the effect display device 1600, the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 in a front view. Even in such a state, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

Although an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278 is shown, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 279 is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. may Also, the embodiment may be applied between modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. In this case also, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

A predetermined pattern or the like is applied to the front surface of the movable panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel plate rear base plate 2420 at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. A decorative member that is visually recognized in a bright color or metallic luster is provided, and the decorative member is visually recognized in a state in which both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It may be configured to be possible. Even when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided, the same decorative means may be employed. With such a configuration, even when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position, the whitened portion HKB can be kept inconspicuous.

Behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410 configured to be movable and the panel board rear board 2420 configured to be movable, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, not the decorative member, is placed at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. or a drive mechanism (arm, pinion, rack, etc.) for driving the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided. In this case, the drive mechanism is made of colorless transparent or white opaque synthetic resin, and when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position and stopped, the obstructing nail 1201 and the drive mechanism It is preferable to configure so that it overlaps with a portion of a predetermined shape (preferably a non-planar shape such as having unevenness) when viewed from the front. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to keep the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Incidentally, if the drive mechanism were formed of a black/dark synthetic resin, the whitened portion HKB would be very conspicuous. In this case, characters or patterns may be printed in white on the front surface of the drive mechanism so that these overlap the obstructing nail 1201 when viewed from the front. The flat cables and flexible boards that transmit control signals and power from the peripheral control board 1510 to the panel board rear board 2420 are made white, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved to the movement position. It may be configured such that the obstacle nail 1201 and the flat cable or the flexible substrate overlap each other when viewed from the front. A similar configuration may be employed when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided.

FIG. 282 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269 in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is movable in the front-rear direction. FIG. 282(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear base plate 2420 are at the front standby position. FIG. 282(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the rearward movement position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves backward from the panel plate 1110 by a predetermined distance (5 mm). located in an overlapping position.

In this manner, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction so that it can be separated from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 and moved closer thereto. When the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are approaching each other, the panel plate 1110 is separated from the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420. It is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous than the state.

For example, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be moved to a rearward movement position so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are separated from each other. In a predetermined period during which the player is playing the game, the time during which the movement effect indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is high (the time during which the player is at the movement position) indicates that the degree of expectation for the big win is high. It is preferable to configure the movement performance to be shorter than the time (not positioned at the movement position) during which the movement effect shown is not executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous during the time during which the performance indicating the high expectation of the big win is not executed, which occupies a large part of the game time.

On the other hand, the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 282(b) may be the standby position, and the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 282(a) may be the movement position. In a predetermined period during which the player is playing the game, the time during which the effect indicating the high expectation of the big win is being executed (the time the player is at the moving position) indicates the high expectation of the big win. Shorter than the time during which the performance is not executed (not positioned at the movement position). In this case, it is preferable to move the panel board rear decorative member 2410 to a forward movement position to change the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are closer to each other as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. . By adopting such a structure, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the player will notice the presence of the whitened portion HKB when a moving performance with a high expectation of a big win is being performed, and the expectation of a big win will not be noticed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest, which has been heightened due to the high degree of movement presentation, is spoiled.

FIG. 283 shows that in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269, the shape of the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is made deep in the front-rear direction, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is made vertically movable. Fig. 4 shows a modified embodiment;

FIG. 283(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position. FIG. 283(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, it moves upward by a predetermined distance (10 mm) in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110. Even in this state, the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member are moved. 2410 is closer in the front-rear direction than when it is in the standby position, and overlaps in front view. It should be noted that the portion having a deep shape may be configured so as to be visually recognized as a decorative shape that imitates a mountain range when viewed from the front.

In this way, the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is formed to have a recessed portion and a projecting portion in the front-rear direction, and when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves horizontally with respect to the panel board 1110, The obstacle nail 1201 and the protruding part are configured to move to a position where they overlap when viewed from the front, and the distance between the obstacle nail 1201 and the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is reduced by the movement of the panel board rear decorative member 2410.例文帳に追加can be configured to The moving direction of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be configured to move horizontally in the left-right direction or oblique direction when viewed from the front.

In addition, the time during which the effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high (the time when the player is at the moving position) is the time when the effect indicating the high expectation of the big hit is not being performed (the time when the player is at the moving position). not). In this case, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to an upward movement position to change the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are closer to each other as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. . By adopting such a structure, the whitened part HKB can be made inconspicuous, and when a moving performance with a high expectation of a big win is performed, the player will notice the existence of the whitened part HKB, and the expectation of a big win will not be noticed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest, which has been heightened due to the performance of the high movement performance, is undermined.

On the other hand, the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 283(b) may be the standby position, and the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 283(a) may be the movement position. For example, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be moved to a downward movement position to change the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are separated. It should be noted that the time during which the movement effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high (time at the movement position) is the time when the movement effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high (at the movement position) is not executed. not located). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous during the time during which the performance indicating the high expectation of the big win is not executed, which occupies a large part of the game time.

282 and 283, an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is movable in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction is shown. It may be configured so as to execute a vibration effect of vibrating finely in the direction or in the front-rear direction. In addition, it is preferable to configure so as to indicate that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high by means of vibration presentation. In addition, when vibrating, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 should be configured to vibrate within a range of about 3 mm to 5 mm. In addition, in the vibration range, it is preferable to configure so that the state of overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view is maintained. With such a configuration, the state of reflection of light on the panel board rear decorative member 2410 continues to change, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous. It should be noted that not only the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283, but also other embodiments may be configured to be able to execute similar vibration effects.

FIG. 284 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is shown in the standby position. FIG. 284(b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. It shows a state where the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is rotated about 45 degrees clockwise from the standby position.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise around a panel plate rear decorative member rotating shaft 2410c provided in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that it is preferable to configure so as to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big win is high by the effect of rotating in this way. Also, it is possible to stop at a predetermined rotation angle, and the angle at which the game is stopped may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for a big win. In this embodiment, even when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is rotated, the obstruction nail 1201 functioning as the left jump nail 1231 and the obstruction nail 1201 functioning as the left life nail 1230 remain unchanged. The state of being always superimposed on the member 2410 in a front view is maintained.

With such a configuration, even when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the obstructing nail 1201 continue to be in an overlapping positional relationship when viewed from the front. With respect to the obstacle nail 1201, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. As an effect, it is preferable to keep the panel board rear decorative member 2410 rotated, instead of turning the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position by a predetermined angle and stopping. In such a configuration, when viewed from the front, the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is located behind the obstructing nail 1201 and the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not located behind the obstructing nail 1201 alternately. As a result, a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not positioned behind the obstructing nail 1201 temporarily appears, but a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous can be maintained. In this case, the rotation speed and the rotation direction of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be used to indicate the degree of expectation for the big win.

FIG. 285 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 285(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position. FIG. 282(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 269(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotates from the standby position to the moving position, it rotates clockwise by about 30 degrees when viewed from the right side. They are located at overlapping positions when viewed from the front. FIG. 282(c) is a modification of the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 282(b), showing a state where the game board side effect display device 1600 is positioned behind the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. FIG.

In this way, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable about the panel plate rear decorative member rotating shaft 2410c, and can take a standby state parallel to the panel plate 1110 and a moving state not parallel to the panel plate 1110. may be configured to allow In addition, it is preferable that the action of moving to the moving state can be executed as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of rotation angles at the movement position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested by the rotation angles. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not parallel to the panel board 1110, the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is shown in FIG. 285(c). It is preferable that the light from the area is directly incident on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 . In this case, the light emitted from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is irregularly reflected by the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In addition, when the display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is to flash a predetermined image at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to further make the presence of the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

It should be noted that not only the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 but also other members capable of irradiating light irradiate the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotated by a predetermined angle. It may be configured to

In this way, with respect to the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 which is originally provided at an angle or is in an inclined state, the game board side effect display device 1600 and other light-emitting decorative members have a high degree of expectation for a big hit. may be directly irradiated with white light that indicates In this case, since the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated in white, the whitened portion HKB is less conspicuous than when illuminated in other colors. In addition, when the obstruction nail 1201 made of brass is adopted, it may be illuminated in yellow instead of white.

FIG. 286(a) shows that a light guide plate 2460 is provided between the panel plate 1110, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 285(c). It is a cross-sectional view for explaining an embodiment that is deformed into. Also, FIG. 286(b) is a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown in FIG. It is a cross-sectional view.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel plate 1110 . The light guide plate 2460 is a plate-like member made of colorless and transparent resin, and has a light guide plate uneven portion 2460a formed of fine unevenness on a part of either the front surface or the rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 2460 is 2 mm. In addition, the light guide plate concave-convex portion 2460a as a whole is visually recognized in a predetermined decorative shape such as a predetermined character, pattern, or pattern. Further, a predetermined light emitting portion is provided for introducing light from the side of the light guide plate 2460 . A peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emitting unit.

In a state in which light is not introduced from a predetermined light emitting portion to the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 is visually recognized as colorless and transparent, and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 positioned behind the light guide plate 2460 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are visible. can be visually recognized. In addition, since the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is minute, the predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when light is introduced from the side of the light guide plate 2460, the introduced light is diffusely reflected at the concave and convex portions. It becomes visible to the player in a mode of emitting light in color.

In this embodiment, the obstructing nail 1201 and the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a which is visually recognized in a predetermined shape when viewed from the front are provided so as to overlap each other when viewed from the front. When white light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the whitened portion HKB can be viewed together, making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Further, when yellow light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the brass obstruction peg 1201 can be seen together, making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, an effect in which light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460 may be executed.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged behind the light guide plate 2460 . In this case, even when light is not introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 positioned behind can make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Furthermore, when light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, a position closer to the obstructing nail 1201 can be made to emit white or yellow light, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

In addition, in a state where light is not introduced from a predetermined light emitting portion to the light guide plate 2460, the predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a may be visually recognized by the player. In this case, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a should be configured so that ambient light is diffusely reflected and visually recognized as white. With such a configuration, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a provided in the light guide plate 2460 and visible in a predetermined shape can make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 286(b), the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be positioned behind the panel plate 1110 at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. A white image may be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a position overlapping the site where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a front view. With the white image, the white image and the whitened portion HKB can be viewed together, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Alternatively, it may be configured to display a yellow image. When configured so as to display a yellow image, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the brass obstacle nail 1201 can be viewed integrally, making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, it is preferable that an effect of displaying a white image or a yellow image is executed.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is positioned behind the light guide plate 2460. The light guide plate concave/convex portion 2460a, which is provided in the light plate 2460 and is visually recognized in a predetermined shape, and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be arranged to overlap each other when viewed from the front.

When the light guide plate 2460 is in a non-luminous state, it is preferable to display a yellow or white image at a position overlapping the brass obstacle peg 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in a light emitting state, white is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and overlaps the brass obstacle peg 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. A white image should be displayed at the position. Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in a light emitting state, yellow is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. A yellow image should be displayed at the position.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in the light emitting state, yellow or white is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is viewed from the front. It is preferable to display a black image in the overlapping position with .

Even when these configurations are adopted, the light guide plate 2460, the game board side effect display device 1600, and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 286, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a may be transformed into the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b. 280 to 286 are applied to the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 277. may apply. In addition, various members capable of displaying, moving, and emitting light, such as the game board side effect display device 1600, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, the light guide plate 2460, etc. Effects such as movement and light emission may be configured to be executed by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of the special lottery. Also, based on the result of the special lottery, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win executed by the peripheral control board 1510 should be configured to start at least before the stop of all decorative symbols. The effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit may end at a timing before all the decorative patterns stop, or after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed after all the decorative patterns stop. It may be configured to

As described above, when the brass obstacle nail 1201 is implanted in the panel plate 1110, whitening HKB occurs around the obstacle nail 1201 and gradually An event that expands to A state in which the whitened portion HKB is generated deteriorates the aesthetic appearance, and hinders improvement of interest of the player.

On the other hand, there is a demand for knowing the long-term operation status of the pachinko machine 1 in advance in the game parlor. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is operated in the game parlor for a long period of time, the possibility of failure or damage occurring in various parts constituting the pachinko machine 1 increases. A game machine may be equipped with dedicated hardware for measuring the operating time (for example, JP-A-2012-200434), but in this case, there is a problem that the price of the game machine becomes high. In addition, although it is possible to grasp the accumulated operating time by installing a hall computer that aggregates the operation status of the pachinko machine 1 in the amusement arcade, it is necessary to introduce an expensive hall computer and operate the hall computer. It was necessary to acquire the operation history of the game machine. In addition, when a game store purchases a second-hand game machine, it is difficult to know the cumulative operation time up to that point.

Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, it is made difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the whitening portion HKB, and the clerk of the game parlor can easily grasp the operation status of the pachinko machine 1 by means of a low-cost configuration. The pachinko machine 1 capable of

FIG. 287 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, a panel plate front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

FIG. 287(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 287(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 287(a). FIG. 287(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 287(d) is a sectional view showing a modification of the panel board front decorative member 2450. FIG.

In this embodiment, a panel board front decoration member 2450 made of colored (specifically, blue) opaque synthetic resin is provided in a shape surrounding the obstacle nail 1201 on the front surface of the panel board 1110 . Specifically, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 , and then the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110 a provided in the panel plate 1110 . The obstacle nail 1201 may be made of stainless steel, pure copper, or brass. The panel front decorative member 2450 is provided in advance with a panel front decorative member through-hole 2450a through which the obstructing nail 1201 is passed. Also, the panel board front decorative member 2450 has a decorative outer shape.

As shown in FIG. 287(a), when viewed from the front, the parts located inside the panel plate 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 287(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle (obliquely from the upper right in the figure; the same applies to other embodiments), a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, of the left guiding nails 1232, the first to third obstructing nails 1201 from the left can be visually recognized from the inside of the panel plate 1110. FIG. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel plate 1110 .

By adopting such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB generated on the panel plate 1110 is hard to be visually recognized by the player, so that the whitened portion HKB is generated or the generated whitened portion HKB is enlarged. Even if it does, it is difficult for the player to notice that the whitened portion HKB has been generated, and it is possible to prevent it from hindering the improvement of interest.

On the other hand, through the panel plate 1110, the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is configured to be visible from a predetermined direction. As a result, the amusement arcade can open the door frame 3 or remove the game board 5' from the predetermined angle with the game board 5' attached to the main body frame 4 and with the door frame 3 closed. It becomes possible to visually recognize the vicinity of the tip portion of a specific obstructing nail 1201 through the glass plate 192 from the front. Then, the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201, specifically whether or not the whitened portion HKB has occurred, and if the whitened portion HKB has occurred, its size and the like are determined. It becomes possible to check the pachinko machine 1, and if the pachinko machine 1 fails or is damaged, it is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance actions for the pachinko machine 1, ordering replacement parts, and preparing a pachinko machine 1 to be installed instead. It is possible to do it in advance before doing it. Although it is possible to observe the specific obstacle nail 1201 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is preferable to observe the pachinko machine 1 while the power is off.

The value of the kinetic energy of the game ball shot from the ball launching device 680 gradually decreases while the game ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and rises. , the value of potential energy gradually increases. When the game ball passes through the part provided with the backflow prevention member 1007 and reaches the upper part of the game area 5a, the value of the kinetic energy of the game ball is smaller than that at the time of launch, while the value of the game ball is increased. The value of the potential energy is larger than at the time of launch. From this state, the game ball falls through the area where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the game area 5a. Therefore, the value of the kinetic energy of the rolling game ball increases again while the value of the potential energy decreases toward the bottom of the board surface. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB is likely to occur particularly near the obstacle nail 1201 planted near the lower portion of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, as for the obstacle nail 1201, there is a possibility that an illegal adjustment is made to change the winning rate of game balls entering the winning opening. In this case, the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the vicinity of the winning opening is particularly likely to be subject to an illegal adjustment act. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB is likely to occur around the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 planted in the vicinity of the winning opening.

In this embodiment, when the vicinity of the tip portion of the obstruction nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 provided close to the first start opening 2002 located at the bottom of the board surface is viewed from a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB is observed. It is configured so that the occurrence status can be checked. The obstacle nail 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the right guide nail 1233 is not limited to the left guide nail 1232. The same configuration is adopted so that when viewed from a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB is visible. It may be configured so that the occurrence status can be checked.

In addition, in the left side guide nail 1232, the game ball does not fall downward between the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232, and the upper surface of the left side guide nail 1232 is directed to the lower right so that the game ball slides. rolling around. Then, the game ball rolled in this manner can collide with the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side in a state of increased momentum. For this reason, it is desirable that the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side in particular be configured so that the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a predetermined angle.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 225, a guide nail composed of a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 is provided on the upper left of the left guide nail 1232 in the same manner as the left guide nail 1232 . In this guide nail as well, the game ball slides on its upper surface and rolls toward the lower right (the game ball does not fall between the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the guide nail. A game ball can fall between the nail and the left guide nail 1232). Therefore, among the obstructing nails 1201 forming the left guide nail 1232, the game ball in a state of increasing momentum can collide with the obstructing nail 1201 located on the left side. Among them, the obstacle nail 1201 provided on the leftmost side can be collided with by a game ball in a state of increased momentum. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 is configured so that the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a predetermined angle. As described above, the site where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted close to the left guide nail 1232 is a site where the whitening portion HKB is likely to occur.

With reference to FIG. 287(c), an example of visually recognizing the specific obstructing nail 1201 from an oblique upper right direction is shown. and the shape of the panel board front decorative member 2450 . For example, the second obstructing nail 1201 from the right side among the obstructing nails 1201 forming the left guiding nail 1232 can be easily visually recognized around the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 when viewed obliquely from the upper left.

As for the angle at which the obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized, the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized from an angle of about 30 degrees to 60 degrees (incidence angle when the glass plate 192 is viewed from the front). It is desirable to provide a panel plate front decorative member 2450 . This is because, when an attempt is made to view the glass plate 192 from an angle close to the horizontal, ambient light is totally reflected and reflected on the glass plate 192, making it difficult to view the periphery of the tip of a specific obstacle nail 1201. This is because it may be difficult to Moreover, on the panel plate 1110, the specific obstacle nail 1201 to be observed is reflected in addition to the ambient light, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201. FIG.

Although it is somewhat complicated, when the game board 5' attached to the main body frame 4 is visually recognized with the door frame 3 opened and the main body frame 4 closed, the door frame 3 is closed. Visibility is not hindered by the glass plate 192 at a position closer to the panel plate 1110 than in the above state, and the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized.

When the door frame 3 is closed, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is invisible through the panel plate 1110, and when the door frame 3 is open, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is visible through the panel plate 1110. A panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be provided so that it can be visually recognized by the user. Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is closed, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is difficult to see through the panel plate 1110, and when the door frame 3 is open, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is not visible through the panel plate 1110. A panel board front decoration member 2450 may be provided so as to facilitate visual recognition through the panel.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to notice that the whitened portion HKB has occurred. In addition, it is possible to check the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB simply by opening the door frame 3 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 287(d), the edge of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be chamfered obliquely. By adopting such a configuration, the strength of the panel front decorative member 2450 can be increased, and the occurrence of a situation in which the panel front decorative member 2450 is damaged due to collision of game balls with the panel front decorative member 2450 is suppressed. becomes possible.

Referring to FIG. 287, an example in which panel front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of panel plate 1110 is shown. An embodiment modified to configure is described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 288(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 288(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 288(a). FIG. 288(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colorless and transparent panel front decorative member 2452 that allows the rear side to be visually recognized, and a colored (specifically, blue) opaque synthetic resin. is composed of an invisible panel plate front decorative member opaque portion 2454 . In addition, the upper end of the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the boundary between the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454 have a decorative shape.

As shown in FIG. 288(a), when viewed from the front, the parts positioned inside the panel plate 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 288(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, the specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the left guide nail 1232 Among them, for the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, the portion positioned inside the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel plate 1110 .

Referring to FIG. 287, an example is shown in which panel front decoration member 2450 made of colored opaque synthetic resin is provided on the front surface of panel plate 1110. Panel front decoration member 2450 is made of colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin. An embodiment modified in this way will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 289(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 289(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 289(a). FIG. 289(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin.

As shown in FIG. 289(a), when viewed from the front, the parts located inside the panel plate 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. It is difficult.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 289(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, among the left guide nails 1232, the first to third obstacles from the left) As for the nail 1201), it is possible to visually recognize the portion located inside the panel plate 1110. FIG. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel plate 1110 .

Referring to FIG. 287, an example in which panel front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of panel plate 1110 is shown. An embodiment modified to consist of is described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 290(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 290(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 290(a). FIG. 290(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colorless and transparent panel front decorative member 2452 that allows the rear to be visually recognized, and a colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin that allows the rear to be visually recognized. It is composed of a panel plate front decorative member colored transparent portion 2456 which is difficult to remove. In addition, the upper end of the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the boundary between the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel front decorative member colored transparent portion 2456 have decorative shapes.

As shown in FIG. 290(a), when viewed from the front, the parts located inside the panel plate 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 290(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, the specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the left guide nail 1232 Among them, for the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, the portion positioned inside the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel plate 1110 .

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, the shape of the panel board front decorative member 2450 may be a perfect circle, and the specific obstacle nail 1201 may be positioned at the center of the perfect circle.

FIG. 291(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. A panel board 1110 in FIG. 291(a) is provided with a circular panel board front decorative member 2450, and a life nail 1230 is positioned at the center of the panel board front decorative member 2450. As shown in FIG.

The shape of the panel board front decorative member 2450 may be a right-angled triangle or a star shape. The panel board 1110 in FIG. 291( a ) is provided with a star-shaped panel front decorative member 2450 and a right-angled triangle-shaped panel front decorative member 2450 . Nail 1231 is located. In addition, the right jump nail 1231 is positioned at the center of the panel board front decorative member 2450 in the shape of a right triangle. In this manner, one panel board front decorative member 2450 may be provided corresponding to one obstructing nail 1201 .

In addition, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be provided for the plurality of obstructing nails 1201 . The left guide nail 1232 shown in FIG.

287, the shape of the panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454 described with reference to FIG. 288, the shape of the panel front decorative member 2450 described with reference to FIG. 289, and FIG. These shapes may be employed for the shapes of the colored transparent portion 2456 of the panel front decorative member described with reference to , or modifications thereof.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the angle at which the periphery of the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized. It becomes possible to visually recognize even from various directions.

An example in which the panel front decorative member 2450 adopts a shape such as a perfect circle, a right triangle, a star shape, etc., and the specific obstacle nail 1201 is arranged at the center of them is shown. It may be configured to place a particular obstruction nail 1201 at an offset position.

FIG. 291(b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 291(a). It is a diagram.

In FIG. 291(b), the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the left life nail 1230 is located below the center of the circular panel board front decorative member 2450. In FIG. The obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the right life nail 1230 is located below the center of the circular panel front decorative member 2450 and protrudes downward from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. are doing. Further, the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the left side is located below the center of the star-shaped panel front decorative member 2450 and protrudes downward from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. are doing. The obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the right side is located below the center of the right-angled triangular panel front decorative member 2450 and in contact with the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. there is Further, the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the left guide nail 1232 is positioned so as to protrude obliquely to the lower left from the end of the panel board front decorative member 2450 .

As described above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are located at the bottom of the board. Therefore, the player during the game visually recognizes these nails and the panel board front decoration member 2450 from obliquely above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the panel board front decorative member 2450 is provided biased upward with respect to the specific obstructing nail 1201 . By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to dispose the panel front decorative member 2450 at a more free position while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Note that the player views the left guide nail 1232 obliquely from above and from the right side. Therefore, with respect to the left guide nail 1232, the panel board front decorative member 2450 is provided biased to the upper side and right side. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to dispose the panel front decorative member 2450 at a more free position while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

A member visible in a color other than a bright color is placed behind the specific obstacle nail 1201, and when the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and It may be configured so that the member visually recognized in a color other than the light color overlaps and is visually recognized. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 . It is desirable to use a dark color or black as a color other than white or bright color.

Although it has been shown that it is desirable to place a visible member in a color other than white or light behind a particular obstructing peg 1201, it is desirable that this member be flat without irregularities. At least, when the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle, it is preferable that a flat portion without unevenness is positioned behind the entire vicinity of the tip portion of the particular obstructing nail 1201 .

A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is visually recognized in a dark color when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off may be positioned behind the specific obstacle nail 1201 . Then, when the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 are viewed from a predetermined angle, the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and the display game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. may be configured so that the display area of . By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 .

Modifications have been shown in which light-colored or metallically lustrous members such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIGS. The embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 292 may be applied to the modified example. Specifically, behind the specific obstacle nail 1201, a bright-colored or metallic luster member such as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to be movably arranged.

In this case, during the game, members visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, are positioned behind the specific obstacle nail 1201 in a standby state, and a big hit is expected. At the time of effect suggesting the degree, it is preferable to configure so that members visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, move to the movement position. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the fact even if the whitened portion HKB occurs at the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 .

On the other hand, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, members visible in bright colors or with metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, are placed in the state in which the door frame 3 is open and the main body frame 4 is closed. In this state, the panel board 1110 may be configured so that a clerk of the amusement arcade can directly touch the panel board 1110 and move the panel board 1110 by inserting a hand into the opening provided in the center of the panel board 1110 . In addition, in a state in which members visible in a bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 , are moved, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2410 and the panel board rear board 2410 are positioned behind the specific obstacle nail 1201 . It is preferable to configure so that members other than members that are visually recognized with a bright color or metallic luster, such as the substrate 2420, can be visually recognized. In this case, as the visually recognizable member, it is preferable to employ a brightly colored member that is not visually recognized or a member that is visually recognized with a color tone that does not have metallic luster. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a member that is visually recognized in a dark color.

By adopting such a configuration, when an amusement store clerk attempts to visually confirm the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB near the tip of a specific obstructing nail 1201, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate By manually moving a bright-colored or metallically lustrous member such as the rear substrate 2420, the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized well.

Depending on the amount of light emitted by the lighting equipment installed in the amusement arcade and the position of the lighting equipment, there is a possibility that the amount of light that reaches a specific obstacle nail 1201 may be insufficient. In particular, such a situation may occur when the panel board front decorative member 2450 is made of an opaque material. Therefore, according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the clerk of the amusement arcade, a specific obstacle nail 1201 may be illuminated from behind. As a light source for irradiating light, the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 mounted on the panel plate rear substrate 2420, the game board side effect display device 1600, the above-described light guide plate 2460, etc., are used. These light sources can be changed from the off state to the on state according to the operation of , and these light sources can be changed from the on state to the off state according to the operation of the operation button 410. It should be configured as follows. Further, it may be configured such that the light amount of these light sources can be changed according to the operation of the operation button 410 . For example, the intensity of light emitted from these light sources may be set in a plurality of stages (for example, three stages) so that the intensity of light is sequentially switched according to the number of times the operation button 410 is operated by the store clerk. may be configured. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to obtain an appropriate amount of light around the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201, and it is possible to confirm the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB satisfactorily.

It should be noted that the light source that has been turned on or adjusted in this manner should preferably be configured to maintain the lighting state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) instead of blinking. Alternatively, it is preferable to configure so that the color of light (for example, white) emitted by the light source that is turned on or adjusted is not changed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, these may be configured to be performed at the same time. Alternatively, the light may be turned off after the lighted state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In this way, by maintaining the lighting state for a predetermined period of time, or by maintaining the light emitting state in a predetermined color for a predetermined period of time, compared to the case where the light source is blinked or the light emission color is changed, the obstacle nail can be prevented. Visibility around the tip of 1201 can be improved.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, the panel front decorative member 2450 made of synthetic resin made it difficult for the player to visually recognize the tip of the obstructing nail 1201, but instead of the panel front decorative member 2450, 292, a modified embodiment in which a panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 will be described. Note that the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 291 may be applied to this embodiment.

FIG. 292(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 292(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 292(a). FIG. 292(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 292(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 292(a) in a modification of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 has a panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided on the front surface thereof. The panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m is blue and has a decorative shape that imitates a mountain range. After affixing an opaque sheet having a predetermined pattern and external shape to the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is cut together with this sheet to form an obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, and an obstacle nail 1201 is implanted in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. should be set.

Even in such a configuration, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, it is difficult for the player to notice that the whitened portion HKB has occurred, and the staff of the game parlor can It is possible to easily visually recognize the occurrence of

The embodiment of the panel front decoration member 2450 described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 290 may be applied to the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m. For example, the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m may have a decorative shape as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 291, or the panel front decoration as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. A part of the opaque thin layer portion 1110m may be made transparent, or the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m may be made not opaque but colored (blue) translucent as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. good.

When a game ball touches the edge of the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m in front of the panel many times, the thin opaque thin layer decorative opaque layer portion 1110m in front of the panel may be damaged from the end. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 292(d), it may be constructed so that the game ball in contact with the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board 1110 does not come into contact with the edge of the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m. By configuring the end portion of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m in this manner, it is possible to prevent damage to the end portion of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m while hiding the whitened portion HKB.

By the way, there is a case where a predetermined decorative member is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this case, a predetermined decorative member is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses projecting rearward. Further, a predetermined decorative member is provided with a hole for inserting a screw for attaching the decorative member to the panel plate 1110 . On the other hand, the panel plate 1110 is provided with insertion holes for inserting bosses and attachment holes for attaching screws.

When attaching the decorative member, a positioning boss is inserted into the attachment hole provided in the panel plate 1110 . Next, the decorative member is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by passing the screws through the insertion holes for inserting the screws of the decorative member and the mounting holes provided in the panel plate 1110 and rotating the screws. Also, the decorative member can be removed by rotating the screw in the opposite direction.

By adopting such an attachment method, it is possible to shorten the time required for positioning the decorative member with respect to the panel plate 1110 and to attach the decorative member to the panel plate 1110 at an accurate position. Such a positioning method is described, for example, in the CD-ROM of Japanese Utility Model Application No. 05-059197 (Japanese Utility Model Application Laid-Open No. 07-022791).

By the way, when both the panel plate 1110 and the decorative member are made of transparent synthetic resin, the mounting hole provided in the panel plate and the boss provided in the decorative member are visible through the transparent decorative member. As a result, there is a problem that the appearance of the decorative member is spoiled. Specifically, the inner wall of the mounting hole provided in the panel plate 1110 and the boss located in the mounting hole are visible from the front of the decorative member as a cloudy columnar shape, which spoils the aesthetic appearance. there were.

Further, when a decorative member made of a transparent synthetic resin is attached to the wooden panel board 1110, the mounting hole provided in the wooden panel board is visually recognized as a black opening through the decorative member. There was a problem of putting it away. In particular, when the pattern of the cell plate provided on the front surface of the wooden panel plate is close to white, there is a problem that such black openings stand out.

Means for solving these problems will be described below with reference to FIG.

293(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. FIG. 293(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 293(a). FIG. 293(c) is a cross-sectional view along BB in FIG. 293(a). FIG. 293(d) is a front view showing a state in which the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110. FIG. FIG. 293(e) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 293(d) when a colorless and transparent synthetic resin panel plate 1110 is employed. FIG. 293(f) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 293(d) when a wooden panel plate 1110 is used.

As shown in FIG. 293(a), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Also, the decorative member 2470 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The decorative member 2470 has a plate shape, and when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, it has a horizontally long rectangular decorative member front surface portion 2470a positioned in front and a horizontally long rectangular decorative member rear surface portion positioned in the rear. 2470b. The decorative member 2470 has a thickness of 4 mm, and through the decorative member 2470, it is possible to visually recognize the member located behind. The decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is provided with two cylindrical decorative member bosses 2470c vertically protruding rearward from the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. The diameter of the decorative member boss 2470c is slightly less than 2 mm. Also, the length of the decorative member boss 2470c is 3 mm. The area of the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is larger than the area of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, and is formed obliquely as if chamfered from the end of the decorative member front surface portion 2470 toward the end of the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. Four decorative member ramps 2470d are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 293(b) and 293(c), the angle formed between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is 135 degrees, and the angle formed between the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. is 45 degrees. A game ball rolling in the game area 5a comes into contact with the front surface of the decorative member 2470, but the rolling game ball collides with the decorative member 2470 because the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is chamfered. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of damage to the ends of the decorative member 2470 . The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where the decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d can be visually recognized in a state where they partially overlap each other when viewed from the front. The decorative member 2470 has two decorative member screw insertion holes 2470 e for inserting decorative member mounting screws 2471 for mounting the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 .

In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110 is provided with two panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p. The panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p has a diameter of 2 mm, which allows insertion and removal of the decorative member boss 2470c. In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with two panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q. The diameter of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q is 2 mm. The panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q are each cylindrical and pass through the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 293(d) and 293(e), how to attach the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 will be described. The decorative member 2470 is brought close to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front, the decorative member boss 2470c is inserted into the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p provided in the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and the decorative member are inserted. By bringing the rear surface portion 2470b into contact with the decorative member 2470, the decorative member 2470 is positioned. Next, the decorative member mounting screw 2471 was inserted into the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q, and the decorative member mounting screw 2471 was rotated clockwise to attach the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110. state. The decorative member mounting screw 2471 can be removed by rotating the decorative member mounting screw 2471 counterclockwise. Further, by removing the decorative member mounting screws 2471 in this way, the decorative member 2470 can be removed from the panel plate 1110 .

By adopting such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the decorative member boss 2470c is visually recognized as partially overlapping the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 2470, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous. Moreover, with such a configuration, the damaged decorative member 2470 can be easily replaced with a new decorative member 2470 .

293(d) and 293(e), an embodiment in which the panel plate 1110 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is shown. An embodiment modified so as to be composed of plywood will be described.

FIG. 293(f) is a CC sectional view of FIG. 293(d) when a wooden panel plate 1110 is employed. In this embodiment, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q of the panel plate 1110 are cylindrical, but do not penetrate the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110, a decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m in front of the panel plate is provided so that the plywood constituting the panel plate 1110 is not visible. The method of attaching and detaching the decorative member 2470 to and from the panel plate 1110 configured in this manner is the same as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 293(d) and 293(e).

In this embodiment, a panel board boss insertion hole 1110p is provided in a manner penetrating through the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m. Therefore, when the colorless and transparent decoration member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the circular panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p provided to penetrate the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m is A black circle with a diameter of 2 mm is visible from the front and spoils the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, in this embodiment, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p visually recognized as a black circle and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d are configured so as to be partially overlapped when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the existence of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous.

As the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110, a predetermined character or pattern may be provided by a method such as printing or pasting. In this case, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p may be provided in a dark or black portion of the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided as a character or pattern. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous.

In addition, when the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided as a character or pattern may be white or bright. It is preferable that the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p is provided at the position of . This is because light from a predetermined light emitting means or the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 reaches the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c from behind the panel board 1110, thereby inserting the panel board boss. This is because the holes 1110p and the decorative member bosses 2470c are visible in a state of diffusely reflecting light. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous. Although an example in which two decorative member bosses 2470c are provided has been shown, two or more decorative member bosses 2470c may be provided. In addition, although the embodiment in which the two decorative member bosses 2470c of the decorative member 2470 are positioned on the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d has been described, all of the decorative member bosses of the decorative member 2470 2470c need not be located at the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member sloped portion 2470d, and at least one decorative member boss 2470c is positioned at the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member sloped portion 2470d. All you have to do is

FIGS. 294(a) and 294(b) show examples of attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110, respectively. FIG. 294(a) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is attached sideways. On the other hand, FIG. 294(b) shows an embodiment in which a decorative member 2470 is obliquely attached. In this embodiment, the inclination of the long side of the rectangular decorative member 2470 and the angle of the left guide nail 1232 are horizontal. In addition, since the decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the left guide nail 1232 are provided close to each other, the rolling game ball does not come into contact with the panel plate 1110 in the area sandwiched between the left guide nail 1232 and the decorative member 2470. is configured to

By adopting such a configuration, in the area above the left guide nail 1232 where the game ball may collide with force, the game ball that collides with the left guide nail 1232 and bounces directly collides with the panel plate 1110, It is possible to prevent the panel board 1110 from being damaged, and the panel board front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided in front of the panel board 1110 from being damaged. As for the decorative member 2470, the game ball that collides with the left guiding nail 1232 and bounces back may collide directly, and a partially clouded portion may occur. Better to replace. In this embodiment, the decorative member 2470 can be replaced with a new decorative member 2470 simply by removing the decorative member mounting screw 2471 while the door frame 3 is open.

With reference to FIGS. 295 and 296, an embodiment in which the position of the decorative member boss 2470c and the shape of the decorative member boss 2470c are modified will be described. 295(a), 295(b), 295(c), 296(a), 296(b) and 296(c) are front views of the decorative member 2470. FIG.

FIG. 295(a) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping a decorative member front face portion 2470a and two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and one decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. There are three boundary lines, ie, a boundary line and a boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, since these three boundary lines overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

FIG. 295(b) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that does not overlap the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in front view, but overlaps two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. Even with such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous.

FIG. 295(c) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that does not overlap the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in front view but overlaps the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in front view. Even with such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous.

295(b) and 295(c), when the position where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is close to the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the panel plate When the decorative member 2470 is positioned with respect to 1110, the decorative member boss 2470c contacts another member provided on the panel plate 1110 and is formed thinner than the decorative member front surface portion 2470a. Unintentional force is applied to the end of the portion 2470d, and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d may be bent or cracked.

In this regard, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 293 and 295(a), the decorative member 2470 is properly positioned while partially recognizing the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view. Since it is possible to position the decorative member 2470 at a certain position, it is possible to reduce the probability of the decorative member 2470 accidentally contacting another member. Furthermore, since the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position slightly separated from the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, even if the decorative member boss 2470c contacts another member, the entire decorative member inclined portion 2470d can Since the force is received, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is less likely to bend, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d being bent or cracked.

296(a) to 296(c) show an embodiment in which the shape of the decorative member 2470 is changed from a horizontally long rectangular shape to a cross shape. FIG. 296(a) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping a decorative member front face portion 2470a and two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and one decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. There are three boundary lines, ie, a boundary line and a boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, since these three boundary lines overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

FIG. 296(b) is an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position adjacent to the end of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in front view and overlapping two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. is. With such a configuration, the end of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a is adjacent to the decorative member boss 2470c, and one of the decorative member inclined portions is positioned to overlap the decorative member boss 2470c in front view. A boundary line between 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

FIG. 296(c) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned at a position overlapping the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 293 and 295, the decorative member front portion 2470a is positioned between the decorative member bosses 2470c and 2470c. By providing the decorative member bosses 2470c and the decorative member bosses 2470c at separate positions in this way, it is possible to quickly position the decorative member bosses 2470c with respect to the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, the portion of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that overlaps with the decorative member boss 2470c in front view has a linear shape, but other shapes than the linear shape may be adopted. For example, it may have an arc shape or a zigzag shape. If such a shape is adopted, the appearance of the front side of the decorative member boss 2470c becomes complicated, so the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous. Become. Further, the shape of the decorative member 2470 may be a perfect circle when viewed from the front, and the shape of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d may also be a shape of a perfect circle when viewed from the front. Further, in this case, the boundary between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is arc-shaped, and is similar in shape to the arc-shaped decorative member boss 2470c. The insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 293, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d was provided from the decorative member front surface portion 2470a toward the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. An embodiment modified to provide a first inclined portion 2470f and a decorative member second inclined portion 2470g will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 297(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. FIG. 297(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 297(a). FIG. 297(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 297(a).

As shown in FIGS. 297(a) and 297(b), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment has a decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and a decorative member second inclined portion 2470g. The angle between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is 155 degrees. The angle formed by the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g is 160 degrees. The angle formed by the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is 45 degrees. The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view.

In this embodiment, since the boundary between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g is visually recognized by the player in a straight line, the decorative member It is possible to make the presence of the boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 297(a) and 297(b), the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is flat, but may be curved. FIG. 297(c) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is configured to have a curved surface. In this embodiment, the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping the curved decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view. With such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p are bent and visible, so that the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p becomes less noticeable. It becomes possible to

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 297(a), the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view. An embodiment modified to provide is described with reference to Figure 298(a).

FIG. 298(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. FIG. 298(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 298(a). FIG. 298(c) is a BB cross-sectional view of an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 298(a). FIG. 298(d) is a front view of the decorative member 2470 in an embodiment in which the position of the decorative member boss 2470c is modified.

As shown in FIG. 298(b), the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the lower left side of the decorative member 2470 is positioned with respect to the boundary formed by the decorative member first sloped portion 2470f and the decorative member second sloped portion 2470g when viewed from the front. It is provided in a position overlapping with. Also, as shown in FIG. 298(c), a decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper right side of the decorative member 2470 is positioned with respect to the boundary line formed by the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f when viewed from the front. It is provided in a position overlapping with.

Also, as shown in FIG. 298(d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the lower left of the decorative member 2470 is located at the boundary between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f. The boundary line between the first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the boundary line between the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g overlap each other in a front view. is provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 298(d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper right of the decorative member 2470 is located at the boundary between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f. It is provided at a position where it overlaps with each of the boundary lines formed by the first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g when viewed from the front.

In this way, a first plate portion (eg, panel plate 1110) having a positioning hole portion (eg, panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p) and a positioning projection portion (eg, decorative member boss 2470c) inserted into the positioning hole portion. and a chamfered portion (for example, a decorative member inclined portion 2470d) provided from the front to the rear (for example, a transparent second plate portion (for example, a decorative member 2470),
To make the presence of a positioning protrusion and a positioning hole less conspicuous by making at least a part of the positioning protrusion overlap a chamfered part in a front view in a state where the positioning protrusion is inserted into the positioning hole. becomes possible.

An example in which the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q pass through the panel plate 1110 has been shown, but the panel plate boss insertion hole and the panel plate screw insertion hole do not pass through the panel plate 1110. Instead, it may be configured such that it is provided only halfway through the panel plate 1110 . For example, the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p may be set to the same length as the decorative member boss 2470c, and the length of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q may be set to the same length as the decorative member mounting screw 2471.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q that are visible from the front through the transparent panel plate 1110, so that the panel plate boss can be inserted. It is possible to make the presence of the holes 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q less conspicuous.

A colored transparent synthetic resin may be employed as a material for forming the decorative member 2470 . In this case, the thickness of the portion provided with the decorative member boss 2470c is 7 mm to 8 mm, and the thickness of the portion not provided with the decorative member boss 2470c is 4 mm. Therefore, the portion provided with the decorative member boss 2470c appears darker than the portion not provided with the decorative member boss 2470c. For example, even if a blue colored synthetic resin is used as the decorative member 2470, the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is not provided is relatively light blue, and the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is relatively dark blue. It will be visible in blue. Although the decorative member boss 2470c is visually conspicuous in this manner, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. 2470c can be made inconspicuous.

The decoration member 2470 may be partially or wholly formed with a rough surface portion capable of diffusely reflecting light by satin finishing, texturing, or the like, and configured so that the rough surface portion and the decoration member boss 2470c overlap when viewed from the front. good. For example, at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g may be provided with a rough surface portion. Good to configure. A plurality of decorative member inclined portions 2470d, decorative member first inclined portions 2470f, and decorative member second inclined portions 2470g are provided, and at least one of them should be provided with a rough surface portion. It should be noted that the entire surface of each of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g may be roughened. Instead, only a part of the surface may be roughened.

By adopting such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be secured while maintaining the transparency of the decorative light and the visibility of the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m located behind the decorative member 2470. It can be made inconspicuous.

Although an example in which the decorative member 2470 is provided with the rough surface portion is shown, the decorative member 2470 may be provided with a metallic luster portion by plating or the like instead of the rough surface portion. In this case, the entire decorative member 2470, or at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, may be a metallic luster portion. Alternatively, the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b may be configured so that only a portion of the surface thereof has a metallic luster instead of the entire surface thereof. Further, it is preferable that the metallic luster portion surrounds the periphery of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q. Also, the color of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the metallic luster portion should be similar in color. For example, if a decorative member mounting screw 2471 made of stainless steel and visually recognizable in silver is used, the color of the metallic luster portion should be silver. In addition, when the decorative member mounting screw 2471 made of brass and visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster is adopted, the color of the metallic luster portion should be gold. The portion where the metallic luster portion is provided is limited to the periphery of the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, and the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is not provided with the metallic lustrous portion, but by adopting the above-described method. 2470c should be less conspicuous.

Such a configuration makes it possible to make the decorative member mounting screw 2471 inconspicuous when the decorative member 2470 is mounted on the panel plate 1110 by the decorative member mounting screw 2471 .

Although the embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 itself is provided with the rough surface portion and the metallic luster portion has been shown, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the panel plate in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. Back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel board back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel board back metallic glossy part 1110e, panel board back first metallic glossy part 1110f, panel board back second metallic glossy part 1110g, panel board back bright color visible Part 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc. It may be configured such that a member visible in white or bright color or a member emitting light is positioned.

Specifically, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, and the panel Plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, and other members that diffusely reflect light, members visible with metallic luster, members visible in white or bright colors, and members that emit light are positioned. It should be configured to

It should be noted that the obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative member boss 2470c may be provided at positions overlapping each other in a front view with respect to one panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. Alternatively, each of the obstructing nail 1201 and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e may be provided at a position where it overlaps with one panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the obstacle nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e may be provided at positions overlapping each of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b in front view.

Not limited to the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, the panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e, the panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f, the panel board back second 2 Metallic glossy portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc. The same configuration may be adopted for members that diffusely reflect, members that are visible with metallic luster, members that are visible in white or bright colors, and members that can emit light.

With such a configuration, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, the panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e, and the panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b, panel plate rear A member that diffusely reflects light such as the substrate 2420, a member that is visually recognized with metallic luster, a member that is visually recognized in white or bright color, and a member that emits light is used not only for decoration, but also by the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member screw. It can also be used to make the insertion hole 2470e and the decorative member mounting screw 2471 inconspicuous. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the decorative member boss 2470c at the boundary between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. 2470c may be provided.

Rabbit role 6000, stump role 6100, stump part 6200, stump box part 6300, grass role 6400, mountain role 6500, first big tree role 6600, first The members constituting the cloud component 6700 and the back grass component 6800 include members that diffusely reflect light, members that are visible with metallic luster, members that are visible in white or bright colors, and members that can emit light. , panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate back second metal Glossy portion 1110g, panel plate rear bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc. It may be provided at a position overlapping with the nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, or the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470 when viewed from the front.

A decorative member 2470 may be attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . In this case also, a similar mounting structure using the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q may be adopted. In this case, the head of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is difficult to see from the front, and the helical portion of the body portion of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q provided in the panel plate 1110 is engaged with is visible from the front as the whitened portion HKB. When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110 by inserting the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from behind in this way, the portion where the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is inserted is visually recognized as the whitened portion HKB. Become. For the whitened portion HKB that is visually recognized in this way, a configuration that makes the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous as described above may be adopted. For example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be arranged behind the decorative member 2470 . Alternatively, the entire decorative member 2470 may be made of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin that is visible in bright color or white. Further, the surface of at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g is subjected to satin finishing, texturing, or the like. A rough surface portion that can diffusely reflect light may be formed.

With such a configuration, even when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the whitened portion HKB generated in the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous. .

When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q should be configured to a length that does not allow the panel plate 1110 to pass through.

By adopting such a configuration, the lengths of the panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q can be shortened, and the whitening portion HKB generated in the panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q and the panel plate boss insertion can be reduced. The hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous. Furthermore, from the front surface of the game area 5a where the game ball rolls, cigarette ash and dust enter the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q, and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q enter. It is possible to prevent the inner wall of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from being soiled. Cigarette ash and dust mainly adhere to the game ball when the game ball is positioned in the upper tray 321, and move together with the game ball into the game area 5a.

Although the decorative member 2470 attached to the panel plate 1110 has been described as an example of the embodiment, it is not limited to the decorative member 2470, and other plate-like colorless transparent or colored transparent members attached to the panel plate 1110 can be used in the same way. configuration may be adopted. Further, the same configuration may be adopted when a plate-like colorless transparent or colored transparent decorative member is attached to a predetermined colorless transparent plate-like member, not limited to the panel plate 1110 . Moreover, when attaching a plate-shaped colorless and transparent member to a plate-shaped and colorless and transparent member, the same configuration may be adopted.

Also, a similar configuration may be adopted as a structure for attaching a predetermined transparent member to a predetermined transparent member. For example, a similar configuration may be employed when attaching a specified portion of a first member made of a transparent material and a specified portion of a second member made of a transparent material. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a boss in one specific portion and an insertion hole into which the boss is inserted in the other specific portion.

2. Description of the Related Art A molding method using an ejector pin for separating a molded product from a mold is known when molding a member made of synthetic resin with a mold. However, there is a problem that the shape of the tip of the ejector pin is attached to the molded product at the place where the ejector pin is used. The shape of the tip of the ejector pin is generally circular. For this reason, the molded product has a circular recessed or protruded trace of, for example, a decorative member having a diameter of 3 mm and a thickness of 0.1 mm. When the decorative member 2470 of the present embodiment is formed using a metal mold using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin as a material, a trace of the ejector pin is left in a circular shape on the decorative member. is not aesthetically pleasing.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the decorative member 2470 such that the circular mark formed by the ejector pin is positioned on the rear surface of the decorative member 2470 . Further, it is preferable that a part or all of the circular mark formed by the ejector pin overlaps the decorative member inclined portion 2470d when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the decorative member 2470 may be provided with a rough surface portion so that the rough surface portion and the circular mark overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, by providing the traces produced by molding using a mold on the decorative member 2470 at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, or by adopting a configuration that makes them difficult to visually recognize, the traces of the ejecting pins of the decorative member 2470 can be eliminated. can be made inconspicuous. The embodiment applied to the whitened portion HKB, the decorative member boss 2470c, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, etc. may also be applied to the mark of the ejector pin that the decorative member 2470 has. In this case as well, the same effects as in the embodiment with respect to the whitened portion HKB and the decorative member boss 2470c are obtained.

By the way, among game machines, for example, a pachinko machine, generally, each player sits on a seat facing the front of the pachinko machine and plays a game. At this time, the position of the player's eyes and the distance in front of the game machine are close, and the player's eyes are positioned almost in front of the center position of the pachinko machine, although there are considerable differences in height due to age, gender, etc. Become. Then, depending on the movement of the game ball rolling in the game area about the center position of the pachinko machine, the decoration state such as the light emission and movement of the decorative member, or the game state, the line of sight is directed vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. It is shifted in a predetermined direction such as up. Therefore, when the central position of the game machine is the center, the member provided at the point where the player shifts the line of sight in this manner may be used as a member for hiding the whitened portion HKB.

For example, when the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 or the jump nail 1231 is viewed obliquely from above by the player's line of sight, a member constituting the first starting port 2002 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin; The whitened portion HKB caused by the implantation of the obstructing nail 1201 may overlap and be visually recognized. Similarly, when the obstruction nail 1201 planted as the left guide nail 1232 is viewed obliquely from above with the player's line of sight, the members constituting the general winning opening 2001 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and the obstruction nail 1201 It may be configured so that the whitened portion HKB caused by implantation is superimposed and visually recognized. As described above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are preferably provided at positions overlapping with the bright color visible portion, diffused reflection portion, and metallic luster portion when viewed from the front. In addition, in order to insert the members constituting the general winning opening 2001 and the members constituting the first starting opening 2002, and to pass the winning game ball from the front surface to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is penetrated. The cut hole provided by the cutting hole is visually recognized with the inner wall whitened similarly to the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. can be configured to

In this way, when viewed from a predetermined angle (for example, obliquely above) different from the front view, the winning opening member (for example, the member constituting the general winning opening 2001, the member constituting the first starting opening 2002) and the obstacle Even in a configuration where the implanted portion of the nail 1201 overlaps and is visually recognized, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. It should be noted that, when viewed from a predetermined angle, it may be configured such that the bright color visual recognition portion, the irregular reflection portion, or the metallic luster portion and the implanted portion of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually recognized. In addition, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous in both cases of viewing from the front and from a predetermined angle different from the viewing from the front.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 294, the decorative member 2470 is provided above the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 . By adopting such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB and the decorative member generated by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 are observed obliquely from above with the player's line of sight. 2470 are superimposed and visually recognized, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Specifically, the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, etc. Since it is visually recognized on the front side, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous as a result. Moreover, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q for attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 are also visible overlapping the whitened portion HKB, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. .

The decorative member 2470 may be provided below the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 . In this case, when viewed obliquely from above by the player's line of sight, the whitened portion HKB generated by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 is located near the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member attachment. The decorative member 2470 may be provided at a position where it can be seen overlapping with the screw 2471, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q. With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

By the way, game machines may be installed in game shops for several years. On the other hand, the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in transparent panel boards is shorter than the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in wooden panel boards. It is only in the last 10 years or so that game machines installed on simple panel boards have been installed in amusement arcades in earnest. Furthermore, the playability of the game machine itself is constantly evolving. For this reason, the construction of the gauge formed by driving the obstacle nails and the device provided on the game board change each time, and the number of obstacle nails planted in the transparent panel plate and the number of obstacle nails implanted are changed accordingly. The position, spacing between obstructing nails, etc. also change. For this reason, it is necessary to verify whether the pattern of the gauge configuration that can be generated in various ways is likely to cause the whitening portion HKB or whether the whitening portion HKB is less likely to occur. It is in the current situation that it takes a month.

Until now, as obstacle nails that receive an impact due to collision from a game ball, especially immediately after launching, for example, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the game area 5a, and a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the right side of the game area 5a. There is a predetermined blocking nail 1201 of the plurality of blocking nails 1201 . Further, after that, as an obstacle nail 1201 on which game balls flowing down and rolling in the game area concentrate according to the game state, for example, a game ball rolling from the upper left of the game area 5a, which concentrates during a normal game, is predetermined. A plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted on the left side of the game area 5a that collide with each other with probability, and an obstacle nail 1201 (jump nail) provided corresponding to the rolling path from the upper left of the game area 5a to the first start opening 2002 1231, a life nail 1230, a left guide nail 1232), and an obstruction nail 1201 provided near the big winning opening 2005, which is concentrated during a big win game, is presumed to deteriorate the whitened portion HKB.

In the embodiment described below, before a quality problem that may affect the progress of a game or the aesthetics perceived by a player occurs in the operation of a certain gaming machine in a gaming parlor, such a An embodiment is described that allows a store clerk to determine whether a quality problem is likely to occur.

In order to make the whitened part HKB inconspicuous, a bright color visible part, a diffused reflection part, and a metallic luster part are provided behind the planted part of the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front. Although an example has been shown, in order to solve the above problem, a configuration may be employed in which the whitened portion HKB is intentionally implanted in a conspicuous position for a predetermined obstructing nail 1201 among the obstructing nails 1201 .

Specifically, among the obstructing nails 1201 constituting the left guiding nail 1232, the first obstructing nail 1201 and the second obstructing nail 1201 from the left are decorative members that are not bright in front view (preferably dark decorations). member).

By adopting such a configuration, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB of some predetermined obstructive nails 1201 can be clearly visually recognized while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous for many of the obstructive nails 1201 . Therefore, it is possible to easily estimate the accumulated operating time of the game machine, and to use it as an index of whether or not the game machine is likely to have a quality problem.

As the dark-colored decorative member, it is desirable to employ a decorative member having a black-based decoration, for example, in order to make the whitened portion HKB more conspicuous. Alternatively, a liquid crystal display device or the like, which is often used as a performance display device, may be used as a basic device that constitutes a game machine. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125 is visually recognized as a black plane on the front surface when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.

FIG. 299 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 299 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. In this embodiment, a game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind a colorless and transparent panel plate 1110, and a life nail 1230, a jump nail 1231, a left guiding nail 1232, and other obstacles planted in the panel plate 1110 are displayed. A part of the nail 1201 is provided at a position overlapping the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front surface of the display area 1600a is visually recognized as a black plane.

In this way, the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is visually recognized as a dark decorative member or a black surface, overlaps in a front view, or in a predetermined direction centered on the center position of the pachinko machine as described above. If a prescribed obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a position overlapping with a dark decorative member or a display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted at a prescribed angle, a whitened portion HKB in the prescribed obstacle nail 1201 is formed. It becomes easy to confirm the occurrence state of

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to determine the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB for the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 planted at a position overlapping the dark colored decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It becomes easy to confirm. It should be noted that, instead of viewing from the front, as described above, a dark-colored decorative member or a game board side is placed at a position overlapping the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction about the center position of the pachinko machine. It may be configured such that the display area 1600a of the effect display device 1600 is positioned. Also, this configuration may be adopted for the obstructing nail 1201 in another embodiment to improve the visibility of the whitened portion HKB.

The predetermined obstacle nail 1201 that allows the whitened portion HKB to be visually recognized may be planted in such a manner as to penetrate the panel front decoration member 2450 or the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m. Alternatively, it may be planted in such a manner that neither the panel front decoration member 2450 nor the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m penetrates.

FIG. 300 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. In this embodiment, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. The life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the part of the left guide nail 1232 implanted in the panel plate 1110 are provided at positions overlapping the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, which is visually recognized in bright color, when viewed from the front. On the other hand, some of the left guide nails 1232 (the upper left two obstacle nails 1201) and the other obstacle nails 1201 do not overlap the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate when viewed from the front. It is provided so as to overlap with the display area 1600a.

With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstacle nails 1201 can be made inconspicuous at all times, and the other obstacle nails 1201 can be prevented when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. By displaying a bright color or yellow effect image in the display area 1600a in the manner described above according to the game state, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. , it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 300, by applying the above-described embodiment in place of the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate, the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstructing nails 1201 is configured to be inconspicuous. You may For example, instead of or in addition to the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, a panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, a panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, a panel board back metallic luster part 1110e, and a panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f. , panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and panel plate rear substrate 2420. can be configured to The shape of these members when viewed from the front is preferably the same as the shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front.

267 and 268, etc., the embodiment in which the panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h is provided on the back side of the panel plate 1110 has been described. While adopting the same configuration, the dark color visible part on the back of the panel board with only the color being dark is viewed from the front with the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 as described above, or the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction centering on the center position of the pachinko machine. It may be configured so as to be provided at a position where it overlaps when it is closed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easy to confirm the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB for the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 as described above.

An example of mounting a plurality of light emitting diodes as the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 on the white panel board rear board 2420 has been shown, but a method such as printing on the panel board rear board 2420 adjacent to each light emitting diode can be used. The color of the character strings (for example, “LED01”, “LED02”, etc.) for confirming mounted components provided in 1 may be set to a light color (specifically, cream color or yellow). By adopting such a configuration, when adopting the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass, or when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b provided on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is adopted, a gold metallic luster portion can be used as the metallic lustrous portion. When this is adopted, or when yellow is adopted as the emission color of the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425, it is possible to make these character strings inconspicuous.

294 to 298, the decorative member 2470 has two decorative member bosses 2470c. As such, it is preferable to employ a decorative member inclined portion 2470d in which the surface forming the decorative member inclined portion 2470d faces obliquely upward.

By adopting such a configuration, stains such as cigarette ash, dust, dust, dirt on the player's hands and cigarette tar adhering to the game ball adhere to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing obliquely upward. In this case, it is possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c difficult to see due to these stains. Although dirt (particularly highly sticky stains such as cigarette tar and dirt from hands) adheres to the inclined portion 2470d of the decorative member facing diagonally downward, the decorative member facing diagonally upward relatively does not adhere to the inclined portion 2470d. Dirt adheres more easily to the inclined portion 2470d.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 294(b), of the two decorative member bosses 2470c, the upper left decorative member boss 2470c is more difficult to see due to dirt than the lower right decorative member boss 2470c. It is possible to create a desired state.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 296(a) to 296(c), dirt tends to adhere to the portion where the valley-like boundary is formed by the two decorative member inclined portions 2470d. Therefore, it is possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper left shown in FIGS. In addition, in the amusement arcade, the game area 5a and the decoration member 2470 are periodically cleaned to remove adhering stains. However, when such cleaning is performed, there are cases in which dirt collects in the areas where boundaries such as valleys are formed in such embodiments. If such an event were to occur, not only the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper left but also the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the lower right would become difficult to see due to dirt. becomes possible.

When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, among the plurality of decorative member inclined portions 2470d of the decorative member 2470, at least the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing diagonally upward rolls in the game area 5a. It is good to constitute so that the game ball which carries out can contact. With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently stain the decorative member inclined portion 2470d by the rolling game ball. In addition, the game ball may contact all the decorative member inclined portions 2470 d of the decorative member 2470 . With such a configuration, the game ball comes into direct contact with the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, so that when the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is stained, the decorative member boss 2470c is difficult to see. It becomes possible to

Note that in these embodiments, not only one decorative member boss 2470c, but also a plurality (for example, two) or all of the decorative member bosses 2470c are placed at a position where they overlap the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that faces obliquely upward in a front view. may be configured to be placed in With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the number of decorative member bosses 2470c that are difficult to visually recognize.

Conventionally, game machines provided with operating means have been studied. Hereinafter, a game machine which is provided with a plurality of operating means and effectively utilizes the plurality of operating means in production will be described. 301, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a mission button 3700, an attack button 3710, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, and a defense button 3740 which can be operated by the player under the door frame 3. .

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is capable of performing an effect of displaying the own tank by image display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 during the variable display of decorative symbols. In this production, the self-tank moves along various paths, and during the movement to the destination, it goes through battles with enemy tanks, etc., and the result of the battle etc. is structured so that the result of the change in the decoration pattern is suggested. ing. Also, during the movement of the own tank or during the battle between the own tank and the enemy tank, the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, the defense button 3740, etc. By receiving the player's operation on the operating means, it is possible to change the content of the performance such as the mode of suggesting the variation result of the decorative symbols.
In this specification, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various manners in the display of the own tank. The attack button 3710 is a button that can mainly attack the enemy unit in the display of the own tank. The defense button 3740 is a button that can mainly defend against attacks from enemy tanks in the display of the own tank. Each button can be pressed downward by a predetermined distance. The pachinko machine 1 can detect each button pressing operation by the player with a sensor (not shown), input the information to the peripheral control board 1510, and use it for production. When the button is not pressed by the player, it is moved upward by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like.

The left lever 3720 is a bar-shaped operating means that can be used for direction input. The base of the left lever 3720 is pivotally supported and can be tilted in any direction of 360 degrees. The maximum tiltable angle is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 is structured to return to a vertical state (not tilted in any direction) by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like when the player releases the left lever 3720 . The pachinko machine 1 can detect the tilted direction and the tilted angle of the left lever 3720 with a sensor (not shown), input them to the peripheral control board 1510, and use them for performance. The player can perform an operation input by gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting it in a predetermined direction by a predetermined angle.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibration is incorporated below the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured by a stepping motor having an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft or a reciprocating solenoid. The left lever vibration source 3722 can generate vibration by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . Vibration generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 is transmitted to the palm of the player holding the left lever 3720, so that the vibration can be used as an effect. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration mode in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720 . Also, the vibrating mode may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for an event that is advantageous to the player, such as a big win.

A plurality of left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided within the left lever 3720 . For example, left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided in the upper half of left lever 3720 and the lower half of left lever 3720, respectively. Only one of them may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated simultaneously.

A left lever light emitting source 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color is built in above the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever 3720 is made of a milky white synthetic resin, and the entire left lever 3720 can be decorated with light according to the color of the light emitted from the left lever light source 3724 . The left lever light emitting source 3724 is specifically composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs and a driving circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the driving circuit by the peripheral control board 1510 . Mainly the upper half of the left lever 3720 can be decorated with light emission by the left lever light emission source 3724, and it is possible to use light emission modes such as light emission colors and flashing/lighting as effects. For example, light may be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode when an operation is performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720 . Further, it may be constructed such that the degree of expectation for an event that is advantageous to the player, such as a big win, is indicated by the light emission mode. It should be noted that the left lever 3720 may be formed using other material as long as it can transmit light, for example, it may be formed using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut.

Right lever 3730 has a structure and function similar to left lever 3720 . For example, the right lever 3730 can accept operational input. Further, similarly to the left lever 3720, a right lever vibration source 3732 and a right lever light emission source 3734 are provided in the right lever 3730, and can be used for effects similar to those of the left lever 3720.

The layout of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 302 shows an embodiment in which an attack button 3710 is placed on the upper end of the left lever 3720 and a defense button 3740 is placed on the upper end of the right lever 3730 . In this case, it is possible to press the attack button 3710 at the upper end of the left lever 3720 with the thumb while gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting the left lever 3720 . Similarly, while gripping the right lever 3730 and tilting the right lever 3730, it is possible to press the defense button 3740 at the upper end of the right lever 3730 with the thumb.

The attack button 3710 is made of a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light source 3724 is set to a predetermined light emission mode according to the operation of the attack button 3710. good too. Similarly, the defense button 3740 is made of a milky-white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light source 3734 is set to a predetermined light emission mode according to the operation of the defense button 3740, thereby causing the defense button 3740 to emit light in a predetermined light mode. may be

Instead of installing the attack button 3710 on the upper end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 on the upper end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 is installed on the upper end of the left lever 3720 instead of the attack button 3710. good too. Alternatively, the defense button 3740 may be replaced with the upper end of the right lever 3730 . Alternatively, two or three of these buttons may be arranged at the upper end of one lever.
With such a configuration, the tilting operation of the lever and the pressing operation of one or more buttons can be performed with one hand.

FIG. 303 shows an embodiment configured to execute an effect of displaying own tank as a ready-to-win effect while the decorative symbols are changing. FIG. 303(a) shows a state in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the start winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 occurs, the left, middle and right decorative patterns start to change.

FIG. 303(b) shows a state in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed in such a manner that they appear from above the display area and disappear below. The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a loss without forming a ready-to-win state, and when a ready-to-win state is formed and a pattern indicating losing is stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state is formed and a big win is achieved. There are cases where it is stopped and displayed with a symbol representing .

FIG. 303(c) shows a state in which the right and left "3" symbols are temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win state is formed. In this embodiment, as the ready-to-reach effect, it is possible to execute a tank ready-to-reach effect in which the own tank is displayed in the display area and moves forward.

FIG. 303(d) shows a state in which display of an effect for displaying own tank has started as a tank ready-to-reach effect. Specifically, the own tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left of the display area.

FIG. 303(e) shows a state in which the own tank and the enemy tank are fighting. FIG. 303(f) shows a state in which the own tank has arrived at its destination. These function as effects that suggest the result of the special lottery. For example, as shown in FIG. 303(e), an effect display is executed to indicate whether or not the own tank can defeat the enemy tank, or whether or not the own tank is defeated by the enemy tank. is suggested. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 303(f), an effect display is executed to indicate whether or not the own tank can reach its destination without being beaten by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the result of the special lottery. .

FIG. 303(g) shows a change display stop mode of decorative symbols when the result of the special lottery is a loss. Also, FIG. 303(h) shows a mode of stoppage of the variable display of decorative symbols when the result of the special lottery is a big win. The display of the images of own tank, enemy tank, road, etc. ends just before the variation of the decorative pattern stops.

With reference to FIG. 303, an example of displaying the self-tank is shown as the ready-to-win effect in the display area. can be configured to For example, by foreseeing the special lottery result related to the hold caused by the game ball winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the execution of the effect of displaying the own tank is started, and multiple times It may be configured to run across symbol variations and suggest variation results of decorative symbols corresponding to prefetched holds. Alternatively, an effect of displaying the own tank is executed from the start to the end of the big win, or an effect of displaying the tank is performed from the end of the big win until the decorative pattern is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). By executing it, it is suggested what kind of game state the game state changed at the end of the big win (for example, whether the probability of being judged as a big win in the special lottery is a high probability state or a low probability state). It may be configured to In this way, the target suggested by the effect of displaying one's own tank is not limited to the special lottery result (for example, the degree of expectation that a big win will occur). good.

FIG. 304 shows an effect situation that requires a mode in which either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 is operated with the left hand, and the steering wheel 302 is rotated with the right hand. During the display of the own tank, the own tank basically advances forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank or move it in the left and right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as seen from the player, it is possible to increase the speed of the own tank. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the own tank. In addition, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the right. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as seen from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the left.

An embodiment in which one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move one's own tank has been shown, but it may be possible to perform an effect in which the left lever 3720 is operated with the left hand and the right lever 3730 is operated with the right hand. . In addition, since there is a ready-to-win effect, in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is higher than the variation of ordinary decorative patterns, the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, and can use both hands to operate the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3720. Since various buttons such as the lever 3730 and the mission button 3700 can be operated, it is possible to enhance the entertainment as a production.

During the display of the own tank, the own tank basically advances forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the tank and move it in the left and right directions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 305, the speed of the tank can be increased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as seen from the player. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen from the player, the speed of the tank can be reduced. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the right. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as seen from the player, the tank can be moved to the left.

In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted forward at the same time as seen from the player, the speed can be greatly increased as compared with the case where only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted backward as viewed from the player, the speed can be greatly reduced compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. . In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the right side as viewed from the player, the tank can be moved to the right side more greatly than when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. is. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted to the left at the same time as seen from the player, the tank can be moved to the left by a large amount compared to the case where only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. It is possible.

In this way, when the tank moves forward, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can be used to change the movement direction of the tank, thereby avoiding attacks from enemy units and setting up in the field. It is possible to execute effects such as avoiding obstacles such as mines and rocks and moving forward.

A basic mode of use of the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, and the defense button 3740 in tank reach will be described. By operating the mission button 3700, it becomes possible to fire a bullet forward from the machine gun mounted on the own tank. Further, by operating the attack button 3710, it becomes possible to fire a cannonball forward from the battery mounted on the own tank. Also, by operating the defense button 3740, it is possible to provide a defense shield in front of the own tank to defend against attacks from enemy tanks. It should be noted that the function applied to each button may be different depending on the situation of production.

By the way, in this embodiment, a new condition is employed as the condition for changing the game state. New conditions for changing the game state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. FIG.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the first special lottery result is displayed. Also, in the display area of the game board side effect display device, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the variable display of the special symbols.
Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second special symbol display device 1405 displays the special symbols in a variable manner, and displays the second special lottery result. Also, in the display area of the game board side effect display device, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the variable display of the special symbols.
In addition, when the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball through the gate part 2003 is "win", the second start port 2004 accepts the game ball from the state where it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball. It is possible to change to a possible state.

In the present embodiment, regarding the lottery mode of the special symbols, there is a low probability (probability: 1/300) that the lottery result of the special symbols will be a ``big win'', and a lottery in which the lottery result of the special symbols is a ``big hit''. It is possible to have a state with a high probability of being the result (probability: 1/30).
In addition, regarding the lottery mode of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is long (30 seconds on average), and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a “hit” lottery result is low (probability: 1/100). It is possible to take a state in which the variation time is short (average 2.0 seconds) and the probability that the normal symbol lottery result will be a "win" lottery result is high (probability: 1/1.2).
Then, it is possible to take the following four game states by combining these.
1: A normal state in which the special pattern lottery result has a low probability of becoming a "big hit" lottery result, the normal pattern variation time is long, and the normal lottery result has a low probability of becoming a "hit" lottery result.
2: A short-time state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern will be a "big hit" lottery result is low, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is short, and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "hit" lottery result is high.
3: A non-time-saving variable state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern will be the lottery result of "big hit" is high, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is long, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal lottery result will be the lottery result of "hit" is low. .
4: A variable state in which the special pattern lottery result has a high probability of becoming a "big hit" lottery result, the normal pattern fluctuation time is short, and the normal lottery result has a high probability of becoming a "hit" lottery result.
Also, apart from these game states, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit", the following states are taken.
5: A big win state in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. It should be noted that the variable display of special symbols is not performed during the jackpot state.
FIG. 306 is a table showing these five game states.
Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to take five game states. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game, the game state changes from one of these game states to another game state. FIG. 307 is a diagram showing transition conditions for game states.

The time saving state shifts to the normal state on the condition that the number of occurrences of the special lottery result of losing after entering the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times. For example, when the jackpot state ends, the state shifts to the time saving state, and in the time saving state, when the number of variations of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal state.
The non-time-saving definite variable state and the definite variable state are continued until a big hit game state occurs.

In this embodiment, as the special lottery results, three lottery results of "losing", "losing with time saving", and "big win" are provided.

When the special lottery result is "losing", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the large prize winning opening 2005 is not opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the ordinary lottery result is "win". In addition to increasing the probability of becoming ", there is no occurrence of a "time saving state" in which the time until the ordinary lottery result is displayed is short.

When the special lottery result is "losing with time saving", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the general lottery result is "hit" without opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. The game state shifts to a "time saving state" in which the probability of becoming is increased and the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short. Even if the special lottery result is "losing with time saving", if the game state is the time saving state, the non-time saving variable state, or the probability variable state, the shift to the time saving state is not performed. It should be noted that it is preferable to generate the "loss with time saving" with a predetermined probability. For example, among the special lottery results, the probability of occurrence of "big hit" may be 1/300, the probability of occurrence of "loss" may be 298/300, and the probability of occurrence of "loss with reduced time" may be 1/300.

When the special lottery result is a "big win", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. After the big win state is finished, the game state shifts to any one of the normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving definite variable state, and definite variable state based on a predetermined big win breakdown. In addition, the ratio of shifting after the big win state may be appropriately set, and the number of game states to which the game state can shift after the big win may be set to less than four. For example, after the jackpot state, the ratio of shifting to the probability variable state may be 50%, the ratio of shifting to the time saving state may be 50%, and the ratio of going to the normal state and the non-time saving probability variable state may be 0%.

On the other hand, without adopting "time-saving loss", the number of times the special lottery results have been consecutively lost in the normal state is counted, and the number of times the special lottery results have been consecutively lost is specified in advance. (for example, 500 times), after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the game state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state without opening and closing the big winning port 2005.例文帳に追加
In addition, even if the number of times that the special lottery result has been lost during the time saving state, non-time saving variable state, and probability variable state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the transition to the time saving state is performed. do not have.

Either one of the transition from the normal state to the time saving state based on the loss with time saving and the transition from the normal state to the time saving state based on the execution of a specific number of special lotteries may be adopted, or both may be adopted. good too.

By adopting "loss with reduced working hours" as a result of the special lottery, the game state can be shifted from the normal state to the reduced working hours state without any balls being output. In addition, it is possible to receive the special lottery results in a time-saving state in which the number of game balls is less likely to decrease than in a normal state.

In addition, when the special lottery is executed a certain number of times, the game state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state, so if the normal state continues for a certain period of time, the time-saving state in which the game balls are less likely to decrease than in the normal state It is possible to receive a special lottery result at.

The details of the big win when the result of the first special lottery results in a big win and the details of the big win when the result of the second special lottery results in a big win may be the same.
Alternatively, the details of the big win when the result of the first special lottery results in a big win may be different from the details of the big win when the result of the second special lottery results in a big win. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result is a big hit is 50% for the normal state and 50% for the time-saving state, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a big hit. , The time-saving state jackpot may be 20%, and the probability variable state jackpot may be 80%.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a ready-to-win effect executed using such an operation unit and conditions for changing the game state will be described together with display contents displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

Conventionally, by displaying an image of a character or the like on a display means, an effect has been performed that suggests a variable display result of decorative patterns (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2016-179063 and 2010-022544). For example, by displaying an image of a predetermined character before the stoppage of the variation of the decorative symbols, the player is informed that the probability that the variable display result of the decorative symbols will result in a big hit is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). The suggested rendition was being carried out.
However, some players do not necessarily like to see such suggestive effects. For example, although a certain suggestive effect is displayed multiple times, if the results of the most recent multiple variable displays in which the suggestive effect was displayed were all variable display results indicating a loss, the suggestive effect Therefore, there are cases where the player feels distrust, such as "I'm going to fail again...", or feels that the suggestive performance is bad, and doesn't want to see the suggestive performance. Such a tendency is conspicuous in a suggestive effect in which a player is requested to operate a predetermined operation unit, and a display indicating a predetermined degree of expectation is displayed based on the reception of the operation. In such a case, the player may lose interest in the game by being forced to visually recognize a suggestive effect that he/she does not want to see even though he/she has deliberately operated the operation means.

Also, there are players who prefer that the result of the variable display be clearly announced, rather than being suggested with half-hearted expectations. For such a player, there is a risk that showing a suggestive effect with a low expectation level (for example, 10%) may lead to a decrease in interest.

However, the presence of such a player has not been considered conventionally, and there is room for improvement in the mode of execution of the suggestive effect. In the following embodiments, taking into account the presence of such players, an embodiment configured to suppress a decline in interest will be described.

308 and the like, in a battle scene between a self-tank and an enemy tank, a shield bullet is displayed by firing shield bullets from a newly developed self-tank capable of firing shield bullets. Explain reach.

FIG. 308 is a time chart showing the progress of "shield bullet reach" in this embodiment. In this time chart, when it is determined in the main control board 1310 to execute the effect pattern of executing the variable display of the special symbol over 34 seconds corresponding to one start winning, the game is played by the control by the peripheral control board 1510. In the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the progress of the effect mode in which the variable display of decorative symbols is executed for 34 seconds is shown. After the end of the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols, the stop display of the special symbols and the stop display of the decorative symbols are executed over one second. In the display area, in addition to the variable display of decorative patterns, the image of the own tank, the image of the enemy tank, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, a simulated image imitating the defense button 3740, etc. are displayed. Details will be described later.
309 and 310 show the display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing of the time chart explained with reference to FIG. 308. FIG.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 308, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

Further, each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 313-360 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 308-312. Therefore, in the description of each embodiment shown in FIGS. The embodiments in the embodiments shown in are applicable.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 308, at timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. From the timing t0 to the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303(b), left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed. At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303(c), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same pattern (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the self-tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. Also, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, acceptance of operation of defense button 3740 is enabled.

FIG. 309(a) shows a state in which the image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Reached decorative patterns (“3”, “↓”, “3”) are displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of the tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, and the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. The image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, the image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and the dialog image of the character "Colonel Dinah" and the window image surrounding the dialog image are displayed at the bottom left of the display area. It shows a state in which a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", which is a character for presentation, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed. In addition, the player himself is set as a second lieutenant who controls his own tank, and moves on the battlefield with his own tank with "Colonel Dyna", which is higher than the second lieutenant, and "Sergeant Might", who is lower than the second lieutenant. A production that goes on is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of immersion in the virtual reality ready-to-win effect.

By pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time, as shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dina" in FIG. 309(a), an effect is performed in which a shield image is displayed in front of the player's own tank, which will be described later in detail.

At timing t9, a white enemy tank image starts to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area and moves leftward. FIG. 309(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving leftward toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, a white image of an enemy tank moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At this timing, the image of the enemy tank in white may be replaced with the image of the enemy tank in red. At the same time, the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might". The operation effective period of attack button 3710 continues for three seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.
There are two types of enemy tank images displayed on the road: a white enemy tank image and a red enemy tank image. The display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that when the image of the enemy tank in red is displayed, the special lottery result is more likely to be a big hit.
Two types of simulated images simulating the attack button 3710 are prepared: a white simulated image and a red simulated image. The display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a big hit when the player is selected.

A combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.
For example, if the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are both white, the expectation level is 10%. The appearance ratio may be set so that the expectation level is 20% when the color of is red, and the expectation level is 30% when both the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are red.
Note that the color of only one of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be changed from white to red to indicate the degree of expectation. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the expectation of the big win is 100%. You may prepare.

FIG. 309(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

On the other hand, FIG. 309(e) shows a state in which a red simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a red image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t11 to timing t12. .

When the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 (timing t11 to timing t14), an image of a shell flying out from the battery of the own tank is displayed, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. is transformed into a destroyed image. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. Also, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 308(b) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710. FIG. FIG. 308(c) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.

The display of the destruction image of the enemy tank and the display of the explosion image of the cannonball continue for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t13, the display of the destroying image of the enemy tank and the display of the explosion image of the cannonball continue until timing t16.

There are two types of images of cannonball explosions: one with a moderate explosion and one with a large explosion. Display ratio is set. For example, when an image of a shell exploding to a moderate degree is displayed, the expectation level is +10 compared to the expectation level indicated by the image of the enemy tank and the image simulating the attack button 3710 that have been displayed up to that point. %, and the production rate may be set so that the expectation level increases by +20% when an image in which a cannonball explodes greatly is displayed.

FIG. 309(d) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a moderate explosion of a cannonball are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, FIG. 309(f) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a large explosion of a cannonball are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. It should be noted that even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown in FIG. Either the image of the explosion or the image of a large explosion of the cannonball is displayed on the road. Thus, the color of the moving tank image and the color of the destroyed tank image are the same.

FIG. 308(c) is a time chart showing what is displayed in the display area when the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid operation period. If the attack button 3710 is not operated within the effective period of operation, at timing t14, which is the timing at which the effective period of operation ends, an image effect in which shells fly out of the own tank is displayed, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. transforms into a destroyed image. In addition, either an image in which the cannonball explodes moderately or an image in which the cannonball explodes greatly is displayed. Moreover, the display of the destruction image continues for three seconds from timing t14 to timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In this way, the player sees the same display effect regardless of whether or not the attack button 3710 is operated, except for the display timing and the lateral position of the enemy tank. Then, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is recognized by the performance mode of the visually recognized display performance.

After this display effect is performed from timing t9 to timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, from timing t17 to timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), The same performance is performed again. In addition, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is similarly suggested in the effect performed again.

In addition, from timing t9 to timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, and from timing t17 to timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, the enemy tank moves and is destroyed. However, it is possible to execute a production pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the former timing, or the enemy tank is moved and destroyed only at the latter timing. An effect pattern in which an effect is executed may be executed. Also, at two timings, an effect pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed may be executed. In this case, the player does not operate the attack button 3710, and the “shield bullet reach” effect ends.

It is preferable to set the appearance ratio of the production pattern so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the production pattern in which the enemy tank is displayed than in the production pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed. Also, it is better to set the appearance rate of the production pattern so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the production pattern in which the enemy tank moves twice and is destroyed than in the production pattern in which the enemy tank moves only once and is destroyed. . With such a configuration, when this suggestive effect is executed, the enemy tank can be moved and destroyed 0 to 2 times. The player's expectations for the destruction mode will increase. Note that an effect pattern in which the enemy tank is moved and destroyed three times or more may be configured to be executable.

FIG. 308(d) is a time chart showing what is displayed when the defense button 3740 is not operated. As shown in FIG. 308(d), when the defense button 3740 is not operated, the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed. FIGS. 309(c) to 309(f) show display modes in the display area when the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed.

Next, the display mode in the display area when the defense button 3740 is operated will be described.

By pressing and holding the defense button 3740 for a long time during the effective period of operation of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27), a setting is made to block attacks from the enemy tank between the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank. Shield image is displayed. The condition for determining that the long press has started may be that the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for 0.5 seconds. Also, as long as the long press of defense button 3740 continues, the display of the shield image continues.
Although the shape of the shield image is a horizontally long oval in the drawing, the shape of the shield image may be configured to change dynamically during display. Also, the shield image may be displayed intermittently. For example, when the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for a long time, the shield image gradually becomes smaller after the shield image starts to be displayed. A display effect may be repeatedly performed in which a shield bullet is fired at a target to explode and a new shield image is displayed. Continuing the display of the shield image includes such a display mode.

FIG. 308(e) is a time chart showing a display mode when the defense button 3740 is long-pressed during the effective period of operation of the defense button 3740. FIG. As shown in this time chart, the shield image is displayed from timing t7 when it is determined that the player has pressed the button for a long time to timing t24 when the player releases the defense button 3740 and the long pressing ends. is displayed. By displaying the shield image based on the player's operation of the defense button 3740 in this way, it is possible to hide the color of the image of the enemy tank, the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank. is.

For example, FIG. 310(a) shows the timing after the display shown in FIG. It shows a display state displayed when the long press of the defense button 3740 by is operated. As shown in the drawing, a shield image is displayed based on detection of a long press of defense button 3740 . In addition, the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" also corresponds to the display of the shield image.

FIG. 310(b) shows a state in which the shield image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t9 to timing t11) while the image of the enemy tank is displayed and the tank is moving toward the road. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 309(b), the display state shown in FIG. 310(b) is obtained.

FIGS. 310(c) and 310(e) show an image of an enemy tank displayed on the road and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 (for example, timing t11 to timing t14). The display mode in which the image is displayed is shown. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 309(c), the display state shown in FIG. 310(c) is obtained. Similarly, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 309(e), the display state shown in FIG. 310(e) is obtained.

At this time, although the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 suggest the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, these images are hidden by the shield image. , it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation for a big hit.

FIGS. 310(d) and 310(f) show a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, timing t12 to timing t15 when there is an operation, and timing t14 to timing t17 when no operation is performed), and the shield image is displayed. An example of the displayed state is shown. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 309(d), the display state shown in FIG. 310(d) is obtained. Similarly, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 309(f), the display state shown in FIG. 310(f) is obtained.

At this time, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is suggested by the explosion mode of the cannonball and the color of the destroyed image of the enemy tank. It is designed to be able to make the degree difficult to recognize.

In order to hide the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the explosion mode of the shell with the shield image, the display priority of the shield image is changed to the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the shell. should be higher than the display priority of the image. Also, it is preferable to set the display priority of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" higher than the display priority of the shield image.

It should be noted that the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is from timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect starts to timing t27 after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Also, even if the defense button 3740 has been pressed for a long time, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the operation effective period of the defense button 3740 expires.

According to such a configuration, the effect display suggesting the degree of expectation can be made difficult to be visually recognized according to the player's preference, so that the player who does not want to know the degree of expectation is free from stress. It is possible to provide a game environment.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when the image of the enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area as shown in FIG. It can be made difficult to visually recognize depending on the taste of the person or the mood of the day.

With reference to FIGS. 309(a) to 309(f) and FIGS. 310(a) to 310(f), an image of an enemy tank and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 are colored white or red. In addition to these, it is configured to execute a production pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank or a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 in gold with an expectation level of 100%. good too. In particular, it is preferable that the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are displayed first in a pattern in which they are displayed twice. In this case, the player cancels the long press of the defense button 3740 for the second display of the image of the enemy tank. You can enjoy the "Reach" performance.

It should be noted that the player may operate the defense button 3740 by mistake for the attack button 3710 . In this case, it is difficult to visually recognize simulated images imitating the attack button 3710, images of moving enemy tanks, images of destroyed enemy tanks, and images of exploding artillery shells. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed not only when the defense button 3740 is simply pressed, but also when the defense button 3740 is long pressed. With such a configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, the shield image is not displayed immediately, so the player who wants to see the suggestive effect feels stressed. can prevent the occurrence of

Although the display of the shield image ends when the long press of the defense button 3740 ends, the display of the shield image may continue for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the long press ends.

When the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 for a long time, the shield image concentrically increases step by step, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image concentrically decreases step by step. can be configured to For example, the shield image may concentrically increase in steps over 2 seconds, and the shield image may concentrically decrease in steps over 2 seconds. With such a configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, by quickly releasing the defense button 3740, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or an enemy tank image can be displayed. Since the visibility of is restored, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player who wants to see the suggestive effect feels stressed. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation can be changed from one display mode of not hidden at all, partly hidden, or completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed.

Although an example in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the player's operation has been shown, the display mode of the shield image being displayed can be changed independently of the player's operation. may be configured. For example, the size of the shield image can be automatically increased or decreased, the shape of the shield image can be changed periodically, or the transparency of the shield image can be changed. You may Moreover, you may combine these display modes. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation (simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the image of the enemy tank) is completely hidden or partially hidden by the shield image. The configuration may be such that the display mode can be changed from one of the display mode and the all-hidden mode to another display mode.

Instead of pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time, or in addition, when it is detected that the defense button 3740 has been repeatedly hit by the player, the shield image may be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds. FIG. 308(f) is a time chart showing such a transformed effect mode. In this time chart, the shield image was displayed in the period from timing t10 to timing t16 and in the period from timing t18 to timing t24, based on the detection of repeated hits of the defense button 3740 by the player. is shown. It should be noted that the condition for determining that the key has been hit four times or more in one second may be set as a condition for determining that the key has been repeatedly hit. Note that after the shield image is displayed, there is no need to continue hitting repeatedly, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds).
Instead of pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time or repeatedly hitting it, when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery may be held and the shield image may be displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Also, the shield image may be displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed at the same time. Alternatively, when the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 302 is employed, the shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while tilting the right lever 3730 forward.

In this way, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when a specific condition regarding the defense button 3740 is satisfied based on the operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the shield image is immediately displayed, and the visibility of the suggestive effect is not hindered.

Operation of the defense button 3740 when the result of the variable display in which only the attack button 3710 is activated and the tank ready-to-reach effect is executed shows a failure for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 or 5 times) in succession. It may be configured so that reception is enabled and "shield bullet reach" in which a shield image is displayed can be executed. In addition, on the condition that the result of the variable display in which the "shield bullet reach" is executed indicates a big hit, the acceptance of the operation of the defense button 3740 is disabled, and only the attack button 3710 is enabled to operate the tank reach effect. until the result of the variable display performed by is consecutively showing a failure for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or 5 times), the display of the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to invalidate the erroneous operation of the defense button 3740 and reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the special lottery results of losing consecutively occur.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 should be set longer than the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . For example, in the present embodiment, the movement time of the enemy tank before the operation valid period is 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is 3 seconds. It is preferable to set the display time of the shield image to 6 seconds. With such a configuration, once the display of the shield image is started, the hidden state of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is maintained until the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends. It is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

After the attack button 3710 is operated or when the effective period of the attack button 3710 expires, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed and an image of the shell exploding are displayed, but these images are also hidden by the shield image. A display time of the shield image may be determined. For example, in this embodiment, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 is set to 6 seconds. do it. With such a configuration, the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding can be hidden by the shield image.

In this embodiment, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds. A time longer than the total time (for example, 10 seconds) may be used. With such a configuration, by displaying the shield image while the enemy tank is moving, both the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding cannonball are shielded. Can be hidden by an image.

The display of the shield image that has been displayed for a predetermined time may be configured so that the player can stop the display. For example, by pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 while the shield image is being displayed, the display of the shield image may be terminated. By adopting such a configuration, by visually recognizing a part of the effect suggesting the degree of expectation, the player who has noticed that the effect indicating the degree of expectation is actually being executed is notified of the effect. can quickly provide a visible situation. Alternatively, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when the suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation higher than a predetermined level is started. For example, when an image of a golden enemy tank with an expectation level of 100% or a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped.

On the other hand, if the display of the shield image is stopped by satisfying a simple condition such as pressing a button, the effect can be easily visually recognized by the player's erroneous operation of the button. state. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied based on the pressing of the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740, it is preferable to stop the display of the shield image. Specifically, the same conditions as those for starting the display of the shield image as described above may be adopted as the conditions for stopping the display of the shield image.

An operation method for stopping the display of the shield image may be displayed while the shield image is being displayed. For example, in the dialog window of "Colonel Dina", the line "This weakling! Press the mission button to release the shield!" !” should be displayed. With such a configuration, even if the player displays the shield image by mistake, the display of the shield image can be quickly terminated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 308(e), it is possible to display the shield image multiple times by allowing multiple operations of the defense button 3740 to be accepted during the valid period. . Also, as long as the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for a long time, the shield image is displayed for an extended period of time and is displayed continuously. As a result, the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding cannonball can all be made invisible.

It may be possible to execute a display effect in which the shield image cannot be displayed or the display of the shield image being displayed is terminated. For example, at the timing when an image suggesting high expectations (for example, a red or gold image) is displayed, the display of the shield image is terminated, and the image suggesting high expectations is displayed for a predetermined period, or The display of the shield image may be disabled by the player until the variable display of the decorative symbols suggesting the degree of expectation is completed. Alternatively, during the display of the shield image, the start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball Depending on the result of prefetching , At the timing when it is decided to perform a high-expectation production, the display of the shield image ends, and the “shield bullet reach” production continues until the variable display of the decorative pattern targeted for reading ends. In addition, the shield image may be configured so as not to be displayed by the player. Also, as a display effect in this case, an image of an enemy tank that is larger than the shield image may be displayed.
In this manner, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Also, by displaying a predetermined image that is larger than the shield image, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation that an advantageous state will occur.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at the timing t0, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 309(a).

In this embodiment, the period for accepting the operation of the defense button 3740 ends before the variable display of the decorative symbols stops. 3740 operation acceptance may be continued. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the stop mode of the decorative symbols indicating the special lottery result difficult to see by the shield image according to the intention of the player.

By combining these embodiments, the shield image may be displayed from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of the variation display (timing t35).

An embodiment has been described in which the shield image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (such as 6 seconds) under conditions such as repeated hits of the defense button 3740 and a 1/3 lottery performed when the defense button 3740 is operated. It may be configured so that it can be set by the user. For example, during the demonstration period when the variable display of decorative symbols is not being performed and the jackpot game is not being played, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, the display time of the shield image can be reduced, for example, from 5 seconds to 60 seconds. It may be configured so that it can be set between By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to display the shield image in a manner that suits the mood of the player.

The period during which the shield image can be displayed may be set by the player based on the number of variations of the decorative symbols. For example, when 20 times is set as the number of variations of the decorative pattern, the defense button 3740 is pressed in the tank ready-to-win effect that occurs during the period from when the player makes the setting until the number of times of variation of the decorative pattern reaches 20. By operating it, the shield image can be displayed. On the other hand, if the player does not make the setting, the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during the tank ready-to-win effect.

Even if the condition for displaying the shield image again is met during the display of the shield image, no new shield image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive performance from being executed. On the other hand, if the condition to display the shield image again is met while the shield image is being displayed, the display time of the shield image being displayed will be postponed starting from the timing when the condition to display the shield image is met. may be configured to be According to such a configuration, it is possible to continue to hide the suggestion effect with the shield image while suppressing excessive effect.

On the other hand, if the condition for displaying the shield image again is met during the display of the shield image, a new shield image may be displayed immediately. In this case, the display of the shield image being displayed may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or a new shield image may be displayed in addition to the shield image being displayed. With such a configuration, the time during which the shield image is not displayed can be shortened, and the time during which the shield image is displayed can be easily extended.

Further, it may be configured to output sound effects corresponding to the type of image of the enemy tank, the type of simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the type of the explosion image of the cannonball. In this case, the degree of expectation is indicated to the player by the output sound as well.
On the other hand, for a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation, output of such effect sound is not preferable. Therefore, when displaying the shield image, the output of the special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. Then, the output of the special sound is preferably continued until the display of the shield image ends.
Also, when outputting the special sound, the volume of the effect sound may be suppressed. It is preferable to continue suppressing the volume of the effect sound until the display of the shield image ends. Also, the volume of the special sound may be higher than the volume of the effect sound. Alternatively, both of these may be adopted.
With such a configuration, the effect sound becomes difficult to hear due to the volume reduction, and the effect sound becomes difficult to hear due to the special sound. can be obfuscated.
It should be noted that it may be configured to output a predetermined effect sound that does not indicate the level of expectation when an enemy tank appears. In this case, a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation can display a shield image and start outputting a special sound by operating the defense button 3740 promptly at the timing of hearing the predetermined effect sound. can.

Even in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state in which the variation time of decorative symbols is short, or a probability variation state in which the probability of a special lottery result being a big win is high, the suggestive performance may be executed. In this case, the shield image may not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. By adopting such a configuration, in a game state in which a big win is more likely to occur than usual, if the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, or an enemy tank is displayed. It is possible to prevent the destroyed image from becoming difficult to see, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the highly anticipated presentation.

On the other hand, when the suggestive effect can be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state or a variable probability state, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to hide the suggestive effect even in a game state in which a big win is more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a game state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image is reduced or the display time of the shield image is shortened compared to the normal state, so that the suggestive effect hidden by the shield image is displayed. You may make it improve visibility a little.

In addition, the suggestive effect may be made executable during the jackpot game state. In the suggestive effect in this case, the degree of expectation that the big win will occur again after the big win game state ends is reported by performing a pending look-ahead, or the time saving state and the probability change state that are more advantageous than the normal state after the big win end. It is preferable to notify the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to . For example, when the 10-round big win is being executed, such a suggestive effect may be performed from the 3rd round to the 5th round. With such a configuration, the defense button 3740 is erroneously operated at the timing when the game state that occurs after the big win can be known, and the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the enemy tank are destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image that has been processed from becoming difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the suggestive effect can be executed during the big hit, the shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 . With such a configuration, it is possible to hide the suggestion effect even during the big win. To make it difficult for a player who does not want to know the game state after the big win to recognize the degree of expectation of the game state after the big win.

An effect similar to the "shield bullet reaching" effect in which the own tank moves on the road may be executed over a plurality of times of variation of the decoration pattern as a prefetch effect based on the prefetch of the suspension in the normal state.
In this case, it is preferable that the display effect of the own tank moving on the road is continuously performed a plurality of times from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation. In addition, while the decorative pattern is changing, the degree of expectation of the big hit for the prefetched hold is indicated by the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the explosion of the cannonball, etc., as described above. Alternatively, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 to make it difficult to visually recognize these images. Then, it is preferable that the display of the shield image is displayed over a plurality of times of variable displays of the decorative symbols.
It should be noted that the pending image to be prefetched may be configured to be hidden by the shield image.
In this way, a sense of unity can be produced by performing a suggestive effect that the own tank moves on the road across the variations of a plurality of decorative patterns.

When a big hit occurs due to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which your tank moves on the road, if a big hit occurs, the display effect of your tank moving will continue until after or during the big hit. may In addition, after the occurrence of the big win game state, the degree of expectation that the big win will occur again after the big win game state ends is reported by performing a pending prefetch, or the time saving state and probability of being in a state more advantageous than the normal state after the big win end. It is preferable to notify the degree of expectation as to whether or not the vehicle will shift to the variable state by means of a suggestive effect that the own tank moves on the road. Furthermore, after a big hit, when the time saving state or the probability changing state is reached, the suggesting effect that the own tank moves on the road may be continued until the time saving state or the probability changing state ends. In this case as well, the shield image displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 should be configured so that the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the explosion image of the cannonball, etc., are difficult to see. .
In addition, the display of the shield image may be configured to be displayed across the variable display state of the decorative patterns, the stop display state of the decorative patterns, the big win game state, and the variable state of the decorative patterns after the big win game state.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the performance.

Although the shield image renders part of the image of the enemy tank invisible in this example, the shield image may render the entire image of the enemy tank invisible.
FIG. 311(a) shows a modification of the production shown with reference to FIG. 310(e). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 311(a), the entire image of the enemy tank and part of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

An example has been shown in which a portion of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is rendered invisible by the shield image, but the shield image may be configured so that the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is entirely invisible. good too.
FIG. 311(b) shows a modification of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 310(e). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 311(b), part of the image of the enemy tank and all of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

The shield image shows an example in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and part of the explosion pattern of the shell cannot be seen. It may be configured to be disabled.
FIG. 311(c) shows a modification of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 310(d). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 311(c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of the cannonball are all hidden by the shield image.

An image of an enemy tank whose display priority is lower than that of the shield image because the shield image is opaque, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank, and an explosion mode of the cannonball are rendered invisible by the shield image. However, the shield image may be translucent, and these images with low display priority may be visible through the shield image.

In this way, the simulated image simulating the first operation unit and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation unit are displayed in a manner hidden by the image displayed based on the operation of the second operation unit. These images can mask the expectations implied by the
Also, part of the simulated image simulating the first operation unit and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation unit can be displayed in a manner hidden by the image displayed based on the operation of the second operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the image while recognizing that the image indicating the degree of expectation is being displayed.
In addition, only a part of these images suggests the degree of expectation, and it is possible to hide part or all of the part that suggests the degree of expectation with the shield image. good too.

Although the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is used to indicate the degree of expectation, the shape and size of the simulated image itself may be different instead of or in addition to the color of the simulated image. Then, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the shape of the simulated image itself or the size of the image. Here, it is preferable to configure such that the area protruding from the shield image is larger when the degree of expectation is high. A similar configuration may also be adopted for the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the mode of explosion of the shell. With such a configuration, when the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to make it difficult for the image indicating the degree of expectation to be hidden by the shield image.

In the state where the shield image is displayed, a larger shield image is displayed by performing a more difficult operation (for example, pressing the defense button 3740 for a longer period of time or repeatedly hitting it). good too. In addition, the large shield image hides the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion of the cannonball more than the normal shield image. may
By adopting such a configuration, the player can be involved in the ratio of hiding the image suggesting the degree of expectation, so that the interest can be further improved.

FIGS. 312(a) to 312(d) show modifications of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 309(c). FIG. 312(a) shows an effect example in which a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. FIG. FIG. 312(b) shows an effect example in which a small-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 . FIG. 312(c) shows an effect example in which a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . FIG. 312(d) shows an effect example in which a large-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 .
The degree of expectation for a big win is higher when a large-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed than when a small-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. configured to be high.
With such a configuration, when a simulated image with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image is increased, so that the player is informed that the degree of expectation is high. can be recognized.
In addition to the simulated image, the image of the enemy tank or the image of the destroyed enemy tank may be configured to have different shapes and sizes to similarly indicate the degree of expectation.

Although the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding artillery shell are used to suggest the degree of expectation, the embodiment applied to a certain image will be described in other examples. It may also be applied to embodiments in images. Alternatively, embodiments applied to one plurality of images may be applied to embodiments applied to other plurality of images.

A simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an explosion of artillery shells have been shown to suggest the level of expectation. may be configured as suggested. In this case, it is preferable that at least this portion is hidden by the shield image. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the degree of expectation unrecognizable or difficult to recognize while making it possible to grasp the progress of the presentation.

As described above, according to the "shield bullet reach" in the present embodiment, the predetermined image indicating the degree of expectation related to the first operation unit is made difficult to be visually recognized by the image displayed by the operation of the second operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who does not want to know the degree of expectation with the option of hiding the degree of expectation, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a plurality of operation units has been known (for example, JP-A-2011-087638). In addition, the effective period during which the operation to the operation unit can be accepted is limited to a part of the period during which the decorative pattern changes. Therefore, even if the desire to operate the operation unit increases, some players feel frustrated that they cannot operate the operation unit. In addition, when an operation is performed during the effective period, a display effect corresponding to the operation is always performed, so the operation of the operation unit sometimes feels rutted. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, considering that there are players who think like this, an operation means that can be operated for a long period of time while the decorative symbols are changing is provided, and the operation to the operation unit is supported. Therefore, a change in display is not necessarily given, but a special change in display is given on the condition that a specific condition is satisfied.

313 to 316, display examples shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, and the like. In the "special machine gun reach" production in this embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the "special machine gun reach" effect, the effect pattern is executed in which operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 instead of the defense button 3740 is valid. The decoration pattern of the mission button 3700 is in the ready-to-reach state, and operation reception becomes effective at the timing (timing t5) when the ready-to-reach effect in which the own tank moves is started. The acceptance of operation ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank is displayed twice.

The period during which operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid (timing t11 to timing t14). includes a period during which operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid. Also, as described above, the attack button 3710 is always given a display change in response to an operation accepted during the operation valid period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not necessarily performed. is granted. For example, every time the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery with a probability of 1/3 of winning is performed, and when a winning result is obtained, a bullet fired from a special machine gun appears in the display area as an enemy tank. An image of an explosion occurring upon hitting is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period (timing t5 to timing t27) during which the operation reception of the mission button 3700 is valid, indicating that the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. be

The time chart in FIG. 313 shows an example of an effect when neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 313, at timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. From the timing t0 to the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303(b), left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed. At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303(c), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same pattern (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the self-tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. Also, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, acceptance of operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled.

FIG. 317(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Reached decorative patterns (“3”, “↓”, “3”) are displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of the tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, and the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. The image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, the image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and the dialog image of the character "Colonel Dinah" and the window image surrounding the dialog image are displayed at the bottom left of the display area. A window image surrounding the speech image of "Sergeant Might", who is a character in the production, and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the window image displaying the speech image of "Colonel Dinah". is shown.

By operating the mission button 3700, bullets are fired from the own tank's special machine gun and displayed moving, as shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dinah" in FIG. 317(a). do.

At timing t9, a white enemy tank image starts to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area and moves leftward. FIG. 309(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, a white image of an enemy tank moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At the same time, the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might". The operation effective period of attack button 3710 continues for three seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.

FIG. 317(b) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t11. FIG. 317(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image of the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank reaches the left edge of the road. Also, the valid period of operation for the attack button 3710 expires. FIG. 317(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves off the screen and is not displayed.

The operation effective period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are continued until timing t27. At timing t27, the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 end.

After that, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display mode becomes as shown in FIG. 303(f), and at timing t34, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. If the special lottery result is a loss, the display state shown in FIG. 303(g) is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, FIG. becomes the display state shown in .

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 313, an example of the effect when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 314, an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is operated by the player will be described.

The time chart in FIG. 314 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t12. In this case, the movement of the cannonball is displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 317(e) shows a display example when the cannonball is moving. Also, at timing t12 when attack button 3710 is operated, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 317(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 315, an example of an effect when the player operates the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 315 shows an example of an effect when the mission button 3700 is operated at timing t12. FIG. 315(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from a special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. FIG. 315(b) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 315(a), the bullet shot from the special machine gun is displayed to move from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 318(a) shows a display example when the bullet is moving. At timing t14, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 315(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 318(b) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 315(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is lost (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. For example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move leftward. Also, the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. FIG. 318(c) is a display example in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 316, an example of an effect when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 316 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are simultaneously operated at timing t12. FIG. 316(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated and an image of a bullet exploding is displayed. Also, FIG. 316(b) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the mission button 3700 is operated but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 316(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving display of the bullet fired from the battery and a moving display of the bullet fired from the special machine gun are performed. FIG. 318(d) shows a display example in which the cannonball and the bullet are moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 316(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploded cannonball and an image of an exploded bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the exploding cannonball, and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 318(e) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding artillery shell are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 316(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is a production example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 318(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 318(e), the size of the image of the exploded bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the image of the exploded shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. is also big. Also, the image of the exploded cannonball displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 has a higher display priority than the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Further, the image of the exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 has a higher display priority than the image of the exploding cannonball displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 .
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make a display change that is not necessarily given based on the operation of the mission button 3700 stand out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display change imparted in this way.

When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted, an image of an enemy tank destroyed in response to the operation accepted by the player is displayed. Therefore, the player operates the attack button 3710 during the effect of moving the tank to display an explosion image, and after displaying the image of the enemy tank in a destroyed display mode, operates the mission button 3700. , a further explosion image can be applied to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. On the other hand, the player can operate only the mission button 3700 without operating the attack button 3710 to change the image of the enemy tank to the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

Image of destroyed enemy tank, simulated image of mission button 3700, simulated image of attack button 3710, image of exploding cannonball, image of exploding bullet (color, size, shape, etc.) At least one of them may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt the same method (color, size, shape, etc. of each image) as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 308 and the like. It should be noted that these images do not have to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win.

According to such a configuration, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition (a 1/3 lottery is awarded) is satisfied, the image of the enemy tank is changed to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. can be changed. Also, an image of an exploded bullet can be added to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. By giving such a display change, the player feels that the operation of the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and feels great pleasure in making the display change appear with great difficulty. Interest can be improved.

The explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 has a higher display priority than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 . With such a configuration, in addition to the operation of the mission button 3700, the visibility of the image that is displayed only when a specific condition (1/3 lottery wins) is achieved is ensured. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the image displayed by the operation of 3700 is obstructed and the player feels dissatisfied.

A plurality of modes with different appearance rates may be displayed as modes of display changes performed in the display area in accordance with the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 . For example, there are three destruction images of enemy tanks with different degrees of destruction. Destructive images to be displayed may be selected and displayed such that the probability of displaying a destructive image with a low degree of destruction is 30% and the probability of displaying a destructive image with a low degree of destruction is 60%. Also, a destruction image of an enemy tank with a very large degree of destruction, which is displayed at an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated, may be provided. According to this, when the display change effect is made to appear with difficulty, the player is presented with a rarer display change effect. Instead of or in addition to the destruction image, a similar display may be performed in the explosion image.

If the player does not operate the attack button 3710, at the end of the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 (timing t14), the cannonball is automatically fired, and even if the player does not operate it, the shell is automatically fired. It may be configured such that a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can concentrate on operating the mission button 3700 .

In this embodiment, when the enemy tank is not displayed, the mission button 3700 is operated to fire a bullet from the special machine gun possessed by the own tank, and a display is made in which the fired bullet hits the road and explodes. Is possible. For example, at timing t5, by operating the mission button 3700, display is performed in which the bullets fired from timing t5 to timing t6 move. Further, when the 1/3 lottery is won, an image display is performed for three seconds from timing t6 to timing t9, in which the shot bullet hits the ground and explodes.
The operation timing at which the moving enemy tank is destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the movement period of the enemy tank. The operation effective period of the attack button 3710 may be from timing t11 to timing t14.

On the other hand, before the attack button 3710 is operated, the player operates the mission button 3700, wins the 1/3 lottery, and displays a mode in which the bullet fired from the special machine gun of the own tank hits the enemy tank and explodes. In this case, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710, the display of the image of the cannonball moving or the image of the cannonball exploding corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 will not be displayed. It may be configured not to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect in which the player feels as if he defeated the enemy tank with his own strength. can increase the satisfaction of In addition, since the image of the exploding shell is not displayed, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 to ensure the visibility of the image of the exploding bullet, which is the effect that has been made to appear with great effort.
In addition, when the mission button 3700 is operated in a situation where the image of the exploded cannonball corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 and the image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed, the operation of the mission button 3700 is performed. add an image of the bullet exploding. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction as if the enemy tank had been destroyed.

Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 308 and the like, the color of the enemy tank and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank may be used to indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the color of the enemy tank and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank be visually recognized by the image of the bullet exploding displayed by operating the mission button 3700 . With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the visibility of the indicated degree of expectation.
Further, in the case of a suggestive effect with a low degree of expectation, the bullet explodes by operating the mission button 3700 in a predetermined period after the suggestive effect ends (for example, the period from timing t16 to timing t27). Since the displayed image can be displayed once or a plurality of times, it is possible to recover the interest in the game that has decreased due to the execution of an effect with a low degree of expectation.

Although an embodiment in which the mission button 3700 is operated has been shown, in addition to the mission button 3700, a right lever 3730 and a left lever 3720 can be operated, and the direction of the special machine gun can be changed in the left and right directions by the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720. may be made available. When the special machine gun is facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated is set to 1/2, which is easier than 1/3. If the player is not facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated may be set to 1/10, which is less than 1/3. Furthermore, if the operation modes of the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 are very appropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be 100%. Conversely, if the operation mode of the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is extremely inappropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 0%.
In this case, the player operates the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, aiming to display the enemy tanks in a destroyed mode, thereby making the game more immersive. can be obtained. Also, when an image of destroying an enemy tank is displayed, a great sense of accomplishment is felt.

It should be noted that the amusement arcade may be configured so that when the mission button 3700 is operated, the probability of winning the lottery can be changed. Alternatively, the real-time clock function may be used so that the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated changes every week. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set the appearance ratio of the effects according to the tendency of the players who visit the store. For example, the probability of winning the lottery may be cyclically switched to 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, and so on every day.

Mission button 3700 may be configured to have a situation in which operation instructions are displayed and a situation in which operation instructions are not displayed during a period in which operation reception is valid. For example, an effect pattern in which a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed and an effect pattern in which a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed may be executable.

Such selection of effect patterns may be configured so that the store clerk can select which effect pattern is to be executed, or which effect pattern is to be executed using a real-time clock function. may be configured to change monthly. For example, for one month from the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, only a performance pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed can be executed, and after one month from the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, a performance pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed is allowed. It is preferable to configure so that both of the effect patterns for performing the operation instruction display can be executed. Alternatively, when executing "Special Machine Gun Reach", it is preferable to select one of an effect pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed and an effect pattern in which the operation instruction display is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50/50).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the display contents in the display area in the case of the production pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player unfamiliar with the game is confused by a plurality of operation instructions. On the other hand, a player accustomed to the game operates the mission button 3700 even in a situation where the operation instruction display is not displayed, fires a bullet from the special machine gun possessed by the own tank, and the fired bullet hits and explodes. It is possible to display the mode to be used.

An example has been shown in which a ⅓ lottery is performed in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700, but in this case, the player who expects to receive a display change hits the mission button 3700 repeatedly. On the other hand, if the operation of the mission button 3700 is simply repeated hits, there is also a problem that the player gets bored. Therefore, another operation mode, for example, may be configured such that the ⅓ lottery is performed by long-pressing the mission button 3700 . In this case, for example, the lottery may be drawn once every time the mission button 3700 is kept pressed for one second.

Also, at the timing when the operation of the mission button 3700 can be accepted, it is preferable to instruct the player which operation pattern is required. For example, in the case of an effect pattern requiring continuous pressing of the mission button 3700, the line "Colonel Dyna" is displayed as "Hit the mission button 3700 repeatedly!" In such a case, it is preferable to display "Press and hold the mission button 3700!" as the lines of "Colonel Dyna".

By adopting such a configuration, the player does not carelessly operate the mission button 3700, but feels a sense of tension as to which production pattern is executed and which operation instruction is presented. Also, since the number of times you can receive the lottery is smaller when you press and hold than when you press repeatedly (since you can generally press repeatedly several times per second), in the effect pattern that requires long press If the mode display in which the enemy tank explodes is realized, the player will have a greater sense of accomplishment. By providing a plurality of effect patterns with different degrees of image display difficulty in this way, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
The appearance ratio of the production pattern requiring repeated hits and the production pattern requiring long pressing may be configured to be selected by the store clerk, or may be set using the real-time clock function. may be configured.

Furthermore, when the player executes an operation mode different from the operation instruction mode for the mission button 3700, an effect pattern in which bullets are shot from a special machine gun may be executed.

For example, if the mission button 3700 is repeatedly hit according to the operation instruction in the effect pattern displayed as "Keep hitting the mission button 3700!" When a long press is performed, which is a different operation, a lottery is performed with a probability of 1/2 each time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second. be configured to do so.

On the other hand, if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held according to the operation instruction in the effect pattern that displays "Press and hold the mission button 3700", the display for firing the special machine gun is not displayed, and the operation instruction and the operation instruction are not displayed. is a different operation, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 is performed each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if the lottery is won, a special machine gun is fired. should be configured so that

It may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding in different manners (preferably with different colors or shapes) when the button is pressed for a long time and when the button is hit repeatedly.

Furthermore, as the line of "Colonel Dyna", a production pattern is executed that does not indicate the operation mode of the mission button 3700 that displays the line "I wonder what I should do with the mission button to shoot the special machine gun." may be configured as possible. Internally, as the effect pattern, either the effect pattern requiring a long press of the mission button 3700 or the effect pattern requiring repeated hitting of the mission button 3700 may be executed. Furthermore, if the operation mode by the player is different from the required operation mode, the line of "Colonel Dyna", "I remembered! To shoot the special machine gun, hit the mission button repeatedly!" or "I remembered! To shoot the special machine gun, press and hold the mission button!" In this way, when the operation performed by the player by estimating the operation mode is an appropriate operation mode, or when the operation performed by the player by estimating the operation mode is not appropriate, the appropriate operation mode is performed. When the player performs an appropriate operation mode after the instructions are displayed, an image is displayed in which the bullet explodes in a special mode different from when the instruction display of the operation mode has been performed in advance. may Also, different special sound effects may be output corresponding to the exploding images.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the rebelliousness against the gaming machine in the player who feels as if he or she is constantly being commanded by the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to give surprise and satisfaction to the player who accidentally or intentionally performed an operation different from the instruction. In addition, since the game is played while guessing the mode of operation for the operation unit, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game. Furthermore, the second operation unit may be displayed in a manner in which the operation instructions are not necessarily clearly displayed.

An example has been shown in which a lottery is performed by long-pressing or repeatedly hitting the mission button 3700 to satisfy a specific condition, and a display to fire a special machine gun is performed, but the specific condition can be achieved by other methods. It may be configured as For example, in an effect pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, if the mission button 3700 is held down for 10 seconds, a display of bullets being fired from a special machine gun may be displayed. Alternatively, in an effect pattern that requires repeated hitting of the mission button 3700, if the mission button 3700 can be repeatedly hit 16 times or more in 1 second, a display that bullets are fired from the special machine gun is displayed. good too.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation mode in terms of pressing. Therefore, instead of using the mission button 3700, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by one rotation, whereby the lottery is performed and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun with a probability of 1/3. It may be configured so that the display to be performed is performed. Alternatively, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise a plurality of times (for example, three rotations) to display a bullet being fired from the special machine gun. .

It may be configured such that it is always possible to accept an operation to the mission button 3700 while the decorative pattern is changing. By adopting such a configuration, the mission button 3700 can be operated by the player who feels unreasonable anger because the variable display result is a failure even though the variable display result is a highly expected reach. By doing so, such resentment can be alleviated. For example, it is possible to get rid of the frustration by attacking the decorative design while the decorative design that has been stopped due to failure is being displayed.
Further, it is preferable to configure so that the given display change is not terminated even if the variable display subsequent to the variable display that has failed is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling further dissatisfaction due to forced interruption of the display of the image of the exploding bullet displayed for relief. In this way, when it is determined that the display of the image of the exploding bullet crosses over the variation of the decorative pattern, the "special machine gun reach" is executed again at the timing t0 when the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. It may be configured as By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unnatural state in terms of presentation.

It should be noted that whether or not a bullet is fired may also be determined by lottery by operating the mission button 3700 . For example, it may be configured such that the bullet is fired with a probability of 1/2 and the bullet is not fired with a probability of 1/2.

According to this embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition is satisfied, the display content of the display area is changed. A sense of satisfaction is felt that the display has been performed. In addition, even if the display result by operating the attack button 3710 is disappointing to the player and the player feels dissatisfied with the display result, the display is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700. This alleviates the dissatisfaction felt by the player. In particular, since the mission button 3700 is allowed to be operated a plurality of times, display corresponding to the operation is eventually performed, which is effective in relieving the player's dissatisfaction.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a plurality of operation units has been known (for example, JP-A-2011-087638). In addition, at the timing when the operation on the operation unit becomes valid, it outputs a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted or the operation can be accepted, and the operation is accepted at the timing when the operation is performed. There has been known a gaming machine that outputs a sound effect indicating However, there is still room for further improvement in production. Below, when operation reception for the operation unit is enabled, no sound effect is output even if an operation is performed on the operation unit, and furthermore, when a specific condition is met, an operation reception reception display is displayed. , shows an embodiment in which a special sound is output.

Hereinafter, an embodiment related to "silent machine gun reach", which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 319 and the like. Except for the output of sound effects such as voice, substantially the same display as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 and the like is performed in the display area. Various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 and the like can be applied to the present embodiment. The "silent machine gun" in this embodiment is an improvement over the "special machine gun" in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

The time chart in FIG. 319 shows a situation in which neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 319, in this embodiment, it is possible to accept the operation of the attack button 3710 during a predetermined period (timing t9 to timing t11) immediately before the timing at which the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is validated. A sound effect "preparing to fire a cannon", which is an indication sound, is output. Also, at the timing t11 when the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, the output of the sound "OK", which is the effective sound indicating that the acceptance of the operation has become valid, starts. The voice "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. The operation effective period of attack button 3710 ends at timing t14. At timing t14, when the period for accepting the operation of the attack button 3710 ends, the end sound indicating that the period for accepting the operation of the attack button 3710 has ended is output from timing t14 to timing t16. will be
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, the effective operation period starts at timing t5 and ends at timing t27. Not done.

FIG. 323(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5.
By operating the mission button 3700, as shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dinah" in FIG. will be described later.

FIGS. 323 and 324 show display examples in the display area, and the type of sound output (or being output) when the display state is reached is shown in the upper right portion of each figure. ing. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 323(c), the character string "\OK/" is written in the upper right corner. This indicates that the voice is (or is being output) output.

At timing t9, a white image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Also, from timing t9 to timing t11, a voice saying "cannon firing preparation" is output. FIG. 323(b) shows a state in which a white image of an enemy tank is displayed at the upper right of the display area at timing t9.

At timing t11, the image of the enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 is started. In addition, a sound "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 323(c) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

FIG. 323(c) shows the display state at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank reaches the left edge of the road. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 expires. Also, from timing t14 to timing t16, a voice saying "Stop preparing the cannon~" is output. FIG. 323(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

The time chart in FIG. 320 is a diagram showing an effect example in which the attack button 3710 is operated and the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 320, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this production example) during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710, the sound of firing a shell from the cannon A certain sound effect "boom" is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), and then a sound effect "boom", which is the sound of a shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing t12-timing t13). t13 to timing t15) is performed.

From timing t12 to timing t13, display of the movement of the cannonball is performed. FIG. 323(f) shows a display example when the cannonball is moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of an explosion of a cannonball, is output. FIG. 323(g) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

The time chart in FIG. 321 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is not operated and the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 321(a) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank is destroyed, and FIG. 321(b) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank is not destroyed. As described above, the probability of destroying the enemy tank is 1/3, and the probability of not destroying the enemy tank is 2/3. When the enemy tank is destroyed, the destroyed image of the enemy tank is displayed, and at the same time, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding, is output. On the other hand, if the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect is output.
In the production example shown in FIG. 321, since the attack button 3710 is not operated, the same effect sound as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 319 is output.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 321(a), a display is made in which the bullet fired from the silent machine gun moves from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 324(a) shows a display example when the bullet is moving. At timing t14, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 321(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 324(b) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 321(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. For example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank continues to move leftward without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. Also, sound output corresponding to bullet firing is not performed. FIG. 324(c) is a display example in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

The time chart in FIG. 322 shows a situation in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, according to the operation of the attack button 3710, a sound effect similar to that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 320 is output. Also, according to the operation of the mission button 3700, the same effect sound as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 321 is output.

The time chart in FIG. 322 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are simultaneously operated at timing t12. FIG. 322(a) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the mission button 3700 is operated and an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. FIG. 322(b) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the mission button 3700 is operated but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 322(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving display of a bullet fired from a battery and a moving display of a bullet fired from a silent machine gun are performed. In addition, a sound effect "sound", which is the sound of firing a shell from a cannon, is output. FIG. 324(d) shows a display example in which the cannonball and the bullet are moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 322(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploded cannonball and an image of an exploded bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the exploding cannonball, and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. At the same time, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the shell hitting the enemy tank and the shell exploding, is output. FIG. 324(e) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 322(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is a production example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound "boom", which is the sound of an enemy tank being hit by a cannonball and exploding, is output. FIG. 324(f) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

The volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 should be higher than the volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Note that in FIGS. 324(b) and 324(e), the fact that the volume of the sound effect "Boom" is high is indicated by increasing the font of the letters "\Boom/".
Also, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) during which the effect sound "BOOM" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound such as BGM may be suppressed. .
In addition, when the sound effect "boom" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the sound effect "boom" that is originally output when the attack button 3710 is operated is not output. Alternatively, if the output is already in progress, the output may be interrupted and the output of the effect sound “boom” based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be started.
Also, the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output should be longer than the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period for outputting the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is three times the period for outputting the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the attack button 3710. It may be a certain 6 seconds. In addition, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 (sound effect "boom") may be output multiple times. For example, a sound effect "Boom" may be output three times in six seconds. Alternatively, the image of the bullet exploding may be displayed a plurality of times. For example, it may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding three times in six seconds.
Also, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 and the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 may be different. For example, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect "bokhan" may be output.
In addition, the display displayed and the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 can be seen or heard by the player once for each player operation that satisfies the conditions. However, the display displayed and the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be seen and heard by the player two or more times for one player operation that satisfies the conditions. may

Thus, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, and a sound effect indicating that the operation has been accepted are output. .
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, no sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted or the sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted is output. Furthermore, even when an operation is performed, a sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) after a predetermined time (one second) after the operation is performed.
As described above, the operation of the mission button 3700 does not necessarily output a sound effect, and thus the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, the sound effect output and the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be output or displayed multiple times, thereby further enhancing interest.
Furthermore, the explosion image displayed based on operation of mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed based on operation of attack button 3710 . Further, it is desirable that the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is easier to hear than the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710, as described above.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize sound effects and special displays associated with the operation of the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to appear.

In this embodiment, the period for accepting operation of the mission button 3700 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at the timing t0, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 323(a).

In the present embodiment, the period for accepting the operation of the mission button 3700 ends before the variable display of the decorative symbols stops. 3700 operation acceptance may be continued.

By combining these embodiments, it is possible to continue acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of the variation display (timing t35). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to make sound effects and special displays associated with the operation of the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to make appear, appear.

When the display of the image of the exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect of the exploding bullet, which is the sound of the exploding bullet, “Boom”, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, are performed once, after these displays and the output of the sound are finished, It is preferable to configure so that images can be displayed and sound effects can be output.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 321(a), at timing t15, the output of the sound effect "Boom" is terminated, and at timing t16, the display of the image of the bullet exploding is terminated. In this case, the period from timing t16 to timing t17 is a period during which the image of the exploding bullet is not displayed and the sound effect of the exploding bullet is not output, and these images are displayed after timing t17. and output of sound effects.
Further, even if the operation of the mission button 3700 satisfies the output condition of the sound effect "boom" and the display condition of the image of the exploding bullet between timings t15 and t16, these sounds and displays are executed. During the period, no sound is output or displayed, and if an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after timing t16 when these sounds and displays end, output of sound effects and display of images are resumed. You may start.
By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize the display of images and the output of sound effects each time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be recognized by

In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 319 and the like, the effective period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated occurs only once from timing t11 to timing t14, but it can be configured to occur multiple times. You may For example, the same display may be performed from timing t19 to timing t22. Also, the number of occurrences may be determined based on the result of the special lottery, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the number of occurrences and the contents of each performance. In addition, it is preferable to generate the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 multiple times during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 .
The number of times the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period, that is, the number of times the image of the shell exploding is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 can be determined based on the special lottery result. On the other hand, the display of the image of the exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect of the exploding bullet, which is the sound of the exploding bullet, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, are not based on the result of the special lottery. can be run multiple times.
With such a configuration, it is possible to successfully display the image of the bullet exploding by performing the operation on the mission button 3700 a plurality of times, thereby enhancing the player's sense of accomplishment.

It should be noted that the own tank may be configured to be equipped with an additional machine gun. In this case, it is possible to employ an intermediate rendering mode between the bullets fired from the battery in this embodiment and the bullets fired from the silent machine gun. For example, a further machine gun basically takes the same operation reception mode and production mode as the silent machine gun in this embodiment, but when the operation is performed, it makes a reception sound indicating that the operation has been accepted (for example, a bullet flying) It may be configured to always output a sound). It should be noted that the defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit in this case. Also, the size of the bullet explosion image should be set to an intermediate size between the cannonball explosion image and the silent machine gun explosion image.

As shown in FIG. 323(a), etc., the fact that the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective is indicated by a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dyna", and the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective. It is good also as composition which does not report that it is.
For example, in the first half of the operation effective period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 is not performed, and in the latter half of the operation effective period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 may be performed. good. It should be noted that the operation of the attack button 3710 may be enabled when the enemy tank moves from the right side of the display area in the first half and the second half of the effective period of the operation of the mission button 3700 . In this case, when the enemy tank is displayed for the first time, the user can concentrate on operating the attack button 3710. When the enemy tank is displayed for the second time, in addition to operating the attack button 3710, the mission button 3700 can be operated. It is possible to operate.
In this way, even when the display based on the acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid, the configuration may be such that the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed and not performed.
Note that the special sound and display content based on the reception of the operation of the mission button 3700 may differ depending on whether the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed or not. For example, when the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is not performed, compared with the case where the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed, a louder special sound is output or a larger explosion image is displayed. may be performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the amusement felt by the player.

It may be possible to switch between when the operation instruction display is performed and when it is not performed by the above-described real-time clock function or the operation by the player or the store clerk.

As described above, according to the "silent machine gun reach" according to the present embodiment, the special sound is output when the second operation unit is operated and a specific condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, even if the second operation unit is operated, the special sound may or may not be output, so the special sound can be output fortunately. The player will feel great pleasure.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which operation instructions for an operation unit are displayed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-046210). In such a game machine, the player simply follows the contents of the instruction, and there is room for improvement in terms of enhancing the entertainment. For example, when the operation instruction is not followed, the same display as when the operation instruction is followed after a predetermined time has passed, or when the operation instruction is not performed, no display is performed. It is general and the intention of the player who does not want to follow the operation instructions is not respected. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which a special display is performed when an operation is performed on the operation unit in an operation mode contrary to the contents of the instruction.

Hereinafter, "bomb character reach" in which the own tank and the bomb character fight while accelerating or decelerating the own tank will be described with reference to FIG. 325 and the like.

FIG. 325 is a table showing effect patterns to be selected in "bomb character reach". Also, FIGS. 326 to 328 are time charts showing example effects when one of the effect patterns is executed. 329 to 334 show display examples at predetermined timings in these time charts.

In the "bomb character reach", the decorative symbols are variably displayed for 34 seconds, and the decorative symbols are statically displayed for 1 second. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are in the reach state at timing t5. Further, a period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first period"), a period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second period"), during display In addition to the own tank, an effect is performed in which the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed.

In the "bomb character reach", a bomb character appears on the road on which the tank is traveling, and an effect is executed asking whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 so as to advance the tank toward the bomb character. .

As the bomb characters, a bomb character A, which is a bomb character wearing sunglasses, and a bomb character B, whose sunglasses are upside down and opposite to the bomb character A, are displayed. When the bomb character A is displayed, the own tank will be partially destroyed if the own tank rams into it, and when the bomb character B is displayed, the own tank will not be destroyed even if the own tank rams into it, and it will move forward. can proceed.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the own tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might") indicate whether or not the own tank should be rammed into the bomb character. For example, as the line of "Colonel Dinah", a line such as "Determinedly fake! Forward!" is displayed to instruct the player to push the left lever 3720 forward (on the game machine side, the same shall apply hereinafter). In addition, as the line of "Sergeant Might", a line such as "Enemy bomb found ahead! Please slow down!" is displayed, instructing the player to push the left lever 3720 backward (to the player's side, the same shall apply hereinafter). In addition, instead of indirect expressions such as "forward" and "backward", more direct expressions such as "Push the left lever forward" or "Push the left lever backward" may be adopted. .

In addition, on the left side of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dinah", there is a vertically long rectangular simulated image of the left lever 3720, and an image instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720 ("tilt forward", " "rear tilt") is displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window displaying the words “Sergeant Might”, a vertically long rectangular simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 and an image instructing how to operate the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", if the line of "Colonel Dina" is to give an operation instruction, the instruction is basically a line that indicates an operation instruction that is 100% wrong. Further, the image for instructing the operation mode of left lever 3720 is also an image for instructing an incorrect operation mode. On the other hand, if the dialogue of "Sergeant Might" is to give an operation instruction, the probability that the dialogue that gives the wrong operation instruction will be displayed is 20%, and the probability that the dialogue that will give the correct operation instruction will be displayed is 80%. be. Also, as the image for instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720, an image matching the contents of the instruction indicated by the dialogue is displayed.
For this reason, the player can operate the lever in the opposite direction to the command contents for the dialogue of "Colonel Dinah" and the instruction to operate the left lever 3720. You just have to be a little careful when operating the lever.
It should be noted that once the player gets used to it, it is possible to distinguish the type of the bomb character from the shape of the sunglasses. can be manipulated.

When the bomb character A is displayed, the self-tank will be partially destroyed when the self-tank collides with it. When the self-tank does not crash into the bomb character A, it is possible to prevent the self-tank from being destroyed by the explosion of only the bomb character A before the self-tank collides. When the bomb character A collides with the self-tank, in the first collision, the gun battery of the self-tank is destroyed (state of the self-tank shown in FIG. 330(c)). In addition, in the second collision, the machine gun of the self-tank is also destroyed (state of the self-tank shown in FIG. 330(f)).
On the other hand, when the bomb character B is displayed, even if the bomb character B collides with the own tank, the own tank is not destroyed and the player can proceed. The bomb character B is actually a huge balloon disguised as a bomb, and even if the own tank crashes into it, the own tank will not be destroyed.
When the own tank advances, a giant bomb character appears, and an effect using the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be executed, the details of which will be described later.

The effect pattern shown in the table of FIG. 325 is determined whether or not the bomb character is displayed at times t6 to t11 and at times t16 to t21 in the time charts shown in FIGS. , it indicates whether the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A or the bomb character B. Also, at timing t26, the state that the image of the own tank can take is shown.

Effect pattern 01, effect pattern 03, effect pattern 07, and effect pattern 09 are effect patterns in which bomb character A does not appear. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is in a state where it cannot be destroyed.
Effect pattern 02, effect pattern 04, effect pattern 06, and effect pattern 08 are effect patterns in which bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at the timing t26, the self-tank is either not destroyed or the battery of the self-tank is destroyed.
The production pattern 05 is a production pattern in which the bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at timing t26, the vehicle is in one of the following states: the tank is not destroyed, the battery of the tank is destroyed, and the battery and machine gun of the tank are destroyed.

Peripheral control board 1510 determines which of the effect patterns 01 to 09 is to be executed. For example, it may be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 326, 329, and 330, the mode of presentation using the explosion character A will be described.
FIG. 326(a) is a time chart showing the state of variable display of decorative symbols executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 326(b) and 326(c).
FIG. 326(b) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the first period. The effect state when the effect pattern 04, which is the effect pattern for displaying the bomb character A, is executed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t15) will be described below.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 329(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character A is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, one of the lines of "Colonel Dinah" is displayed as "I'm sure it's fake! Go forward!" On the other hand, as a line of "Sergeant Might", one of "Enemy bomb found ahead! Slow down!", "That guy is fake. Forward!" be. In addition, when the dialogue indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the lever with the words "tilt forward" is displayed together with the dialogue. In addition, when the dialogue indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt backward" is displayed together with the dialogue. Further, when the dialogue does not indicate the operation mode of left lever 3720, the simulated image of left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 329(b) to 329(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As described above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dina" and three types for "Sergeant Might", and a total of six combinations can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 329(b) to 329(g).

For example, FIG. 329(b) shows the erroneous operation instruction "Colonel Dina" saying "I'm sure it's fake! Forward!" This is a display example showing a state in which the line "Bomb found! Slow down!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with the bomb character A by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 backward) opposite to the operation mode instructed by the line of "Colonel Dinah". Further, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 backward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the collision with the bomb character A can be avoided. In addition, the player can avoid collision with the bomb character A by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A and tilting the lever backward, regardless of the instruction content of the lines.

Also, FIG. 329(e) shows the display of the line of "Colonel Dinah", "Um, mumble." It is a display example showing a state in which is displayed.
In this case, the mode of operation is not indicated by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". Also, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the robot collides with the bomb character A. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A regardless of the instruction content of the lines, and then tilts the left lever 3720 backward, the bomb character A is displayed. avoid collisions with

As for the operation period for tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction, it is determined that an operation input has been performed by tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction for a predetermined period of time within a period from timing t6 to timing t11. For example, it is determined that the operation has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9.

When the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, an effect display in which the bomb character A collides with the own tank is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15.
Specifically, from timing t11 to timing t12, an image in which the own tank and the bomb character A collide is displayed. FIG. 330(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image is displayed in which the battery of the own tank is destroyed. FIG. 330(c) is a display example from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character A is displayed, the bomb character A explodes in front of the own tank from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 330(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, display as shown in FIG. 329(a) may be performed.

FIG. 326(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the second period. FIG. 326(c) shows an example of an effect when the effect pattern 02, which is an effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of effect, the same effect display as the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 326(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

When either the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed in both the first period and the second period like the production pattern 05, the production pattern 06, the production pattern 08, and the production pattern 09, FIG. 326(c) with the effect mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in (b) or the effect mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 327(c) or a combination of the presentation modes related to the timings t16 to t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 327(c) is executed.

For example, when the production pattern 05 is selected, the production mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. An effect mode in which such effect modes are combined is executed.
In this case, there is a possibility that the own tank will crash into the bomb character A during both the first period and the second period.
For example, when the self-tank crashes into the bomb character A in the first period, the self-tank has its turret destroyed. By thrusting in, the self-tank will be in a state where the machine gun has been destroyed.
FIG. 330(d) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the bomb character A is hit by the self-tank whose turret has been destroyed in the second period. In addition, from timing t22 to timing t25, the display example shown in FIG. 330(f) is displayed.
On the other hand, in the second period, if the self-tank whose turret has been destroyed does not run into the bomb character A, the display example shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 327, 331, and 332, the mode of presentation using the explosion character B will be described.
FIG. 327(a) is a time chart showing the state of variable display of decorative symbols executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 327(b) and 327(c).
FIG. 327(b) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the first period. The effect state when the effect pattern 07, which is the effect pattern for displaying the bomb character B, is executed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t11) will be described below.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 331(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character B is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, as the line of "Colonel Dinah", either "Enemy bomb ~ slow down ~~!" On the other hand, as a line of "Sergeant Might", either "He's a fake. Forward!", "Enemy bomb found ahead! Please slow down!" be. In addition, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt forward" is displayed together with the line. In addition, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "back tilt" is displayed together with the line. Further, when the dialogue does not indicate the operation mode of left lever 3720, the simulated image of left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 331(b) to 331(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As described above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dina" and three types for "Sergeant Might", and a total of six combinations can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 331(b) to 331(g).

For example, FIG. 331(b) shows the display of the erroneous operation instruction “Colonel Dina” saying “Enemy bomb! Slow down!” and the correct operation instruction “Sgt. This is a display example showing a state in which the line "It's a fake. Forward!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can plunge into the bomb character B by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 forward) opposite to the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dinah". Also, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the bomb character B can be thrust into. In addition, regardless of the instruction content of the dialogue, it is possible to plunge into the bomb character B by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B and tilting the left lever 3720 forward.

In addition, Fig. 331(e) shows the display of "Colonel Dina"'s line "Um, mumbling." ] is a display example showing a state in which the words "" are displayed.
In this case, the mode of operation is not indicated by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". Further, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the bomb character B cannot be thrust into. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B regardless of the instruction content of the lines, and then tilts the left lever 3720 forward, the bomb character B is displayed. can plunge into.

When the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, an effect display is performed in which the own tank crashes into the bomb character B from timing t11 to timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the own tank crashing into the bomb character B is displayed. FIG. 332(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, display as shown in FIG. 329(a) may be performed.

On the other hand, when the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character B is displayed, the bomb character B positioned in front of the own tank is displayed as it is from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 332(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, display as shown in FIG. 329(a) may be performed.

FIG. 327(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the production pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period. FIG. 327(c) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern 03, which is the effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of effect, the same effect display as the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 327(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 328, description will be given of the effect modes at timings t26 to t35 when effect pattern 01 to effect pattern 09 are executed.
As described above, based on the selected effect pattern and the operation mode of the left lever 3720 by the player, at timing t26, the own tank is in the intact state, the turret destroyed, and the turret and machine gun destroyed. It is displayed in one of two states.

As shown in FIG. 328(a), at timing t26, bomb character A or bomb character B starts to be displayed. Also, from timing t26 to timing t28, operation of either attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is enabled.
The attack button 3710 is active when your own tank is intact. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 becomes effective when the battery of the own tank is destroyed. It should be noted that neither the operation of the attack button 3710 nor the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid when the turret and the machine gun are destroyed. It should be noted that an effect mode when the operation of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not valid will be described later.

At timing t26, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area at the same time that the attack button 3710 is activated. Also, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might".
333(a) is from timing t26 until attack button 3710 is operated (until t28 in FIG. 328(a)), or until the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 expires (t29 in FIG. 328(a)). ) is a display example during the period.

If the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character A explodes three times from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. seconds. FIG. 333(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation of the attack button 3710 or after the expiration of the effective period of operation when the special lottery result is a big win. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A becomes the own tank from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. The display of moving toward you is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 333(c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the operation of the attack button 3710 or after the expiration of the effective period of operation when the special lottery result is a loss. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
Based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the end of the valid period of operation, a display effect is executed in which a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, as in the example effect shown with reference to FIG. 317 .

At timing t26, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area at the same time that the mission button 3700 is activated. Also, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dina".
333(d) is from timing t26 until mission button 3700 is operated (until t28 in FIG. 328(a)), or until the operation valid period of mission button 3700 expires (t29 in FIG. 328(a)). until) is a display example in the period.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character A explodes 3 times from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. seconds. FIG. 333(e) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or after the effective period of the operation ends when the special lottery result is a big win. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A becomes the own tank from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. The display of moving toward you is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 333(f) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the operation of the mission button 3700 or after the expiration of the effective period of operation when the special lottery result is a loss. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
Based on the operation of the mission button 3700 or the end of the effective period of operation, a display effect in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank is executed, as in the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 318 .

Effect pattern 05 is executed, and in both the first period and the second period, when own tank crashes into bomb character A, at timing t26, the own tank with its battery and machine gun destroyed is displayed. The Rukoto.
FIG. 328(b) is a time chart showing the effect state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 334(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of the bomb character A moving toward the own tank is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 334(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A is moving toward its own tank. After that, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character B starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 334(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of the bomb character B moving toward the own tank is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 334(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character B is moving toward its own tank. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
In either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 are enabled to accept operations.

In this way, the player is not confused by the wrong operation instructions for the left lever 3720 and gives the appropriate operation instructions. Special operation units (attack button 3710 and mission button 3700) can be operated, and special images (image of bomb character A exploding, image of tilting sunglasses worn by bomb character A, and “Dyna It is possible to see the lines of "Colonel" and "Sergeant Might"). On the other hand, when the player obediently follows the operation instructions, as shown in FIGS. I can't.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 333(a) and (d), or FIGS. 333(b) and (e), the player can visually recognize a special effect display according to the state of destruction of the own tank. .

It should be noted that if the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the operation instruction indicated by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be automatically executed. Also, at this time, the image displayed when the player issues the operation instruction may be automatically displayed. If "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" does not issue an operation instruction and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either the forward leaning operation or the backward leaning operation is automatically selected by lottery. may be displayed in For example, the forward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2, and the backward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2, and the display corresponding to the selected operation may be performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the player is required to perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction during at least one of the first period and the second period. In addition, by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, it is possible to generate an effect state in which an operation to a specific operation unit becomes effective immediately before the decorative symbols are stopped and a special image is displayed.
In this way, since the player is presented with an operation instruction in a mode different from or inconsistent with the operation instruction that should be performed, the player is asked what kind of operation is appropriate for the operation unit. The tilting operation of the left lever 3720 is performed by estimating whether it is. Then, when the player is able to perform an appropriate operation against the operation instruction, the player can operate a special operation section or view a special image or effect display. becomes possible.
In addition, a special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, successful operations contrary to the operation instruction are performed multiple times) is satisfied in addition to performing an operation contrary to the operation instruction. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the special display visible only to the player who has properly performed the operation, rather than being accidentally displayed by appropriately operating the operation unit. .

The player may operate the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction so that the forward-moving self-tank avoids the minefield provided on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield are displayed on the right or left side of the road, and the player operates the left lever 3720 in the horizontal direction to execute an effect of avoiding the minefield. do it. Then, if the own tank rushes into a real minefield, it is preferable to configure so that the battery and machine gun of the own tank are destroyed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might" are also configured to give wrong operation instructions regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720. FIG. It is preferable to configure such an effect to be executable in the first period and the second period.

In this way, even if the left lever 3720 is properly operated to move the own tank while avoiding the minefield to the left and right, and the operation contrary to the operation instruction is successfully performed, it will be explained with reference to FIGS. As in the embodiment described above, it is possible to allow the player to operate a special operation unit, or to visually recognize a special image or effect display.

Although the effect table shown in FIG. 325 has the first period and the second period, it is configured to have only the first period, and the bomb character does not appear in the first period. It is also possible to adopt a table from which one of the production pattern, the production pattern in which the bomb character A appears, and the production pattern in which the bomb character B appears is selected.
In this case, if the self-tank crashes into the bomb character A, both the battery and the machine gun of the self-tank may be destroyed.

Although the effect table shown in FIG. 325 has the first period and the second period, the effect can be changed by using the effect table configured to provide three or more periods during which the bomb character can be displayed. may be executed.
In addition, a pending look-ahead is performed, and based on the look-ahead result, a plurality of periods in which the bomb character can be displayed are provided over a plurality of decorative pattern variations (a bomb character can be displayed in one decorative pattern variation). One period may be provided one by one, or a period may be provided in which any number of bomb characters can be displayed in one variation of the decorative pattern), Stopping the variable display corresponding to the prefetch target hold 328, 333, and 334 may be executed just before the game.

In addition, although three levels of display mode are provided for own tanks, two levels may be provided, or four or more levels may be provided. Also, as an example of changing the display mode, an example of the staged destruction of the own tank was shown, but the stage of destroying the own tank returns to the relatively undestroyed stage after repairing the own tank. may be configured to be executable.

An example has been shown in which the bomb character does not appear, the bomb character A appears, and the bomb character B appears in the first period or the second period. , either one of the bomb character A or the bomb character B may always be displayed. For example, the table shown in FIG. 325 may be modified to employ a table consisting only of effect pattern 05, effect pattern 06, effect pattern 08, and effect pattern 09. By adopting such a configuration, one of the bomb characters is displayed in each period of the production pattern, so that the feeling of tension in operating the left lever 3720 can be increased.

In addition, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334, the example of the display when the bomb character is displayed is mainly illustrated. As shown in a), it is preferable to display the own tank character moving forward.

A special image may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, a special display may be performed only when an operation that does not follow an operation instruction is successfully performed multiple times. Also, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, a predetermined lottery may be conducted and a special display may be performed with a predetermined probability (eg, 1/5). With such a configuration, the special image is not displayed by chance just by operating the operation unit, and the difficulty of displaying the special image can be increased. It is possible to increase the surprise and joy felt by the player when is displayed.

When a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, at least during the period during which the special image is displayed, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound may be lowered.
Also, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (for example, a special explosion sound, etc.) is output at least during the period when the special image is displayed. may
Furthermore, the suppression of the fluctuating effect sound and the output of the special sound may be performed at the same time.
By suppressing the variable effect sound or outputting the special sound in response to the display of the special image, the display of the special image is prevented from being disturbed by the variable effect sound. Also, the display of the special image can be made more conspicuous by the output of the special sound.

It should be noted that the variable performance sound is a sound that is recognized as background music by the player, when a predetermined musical piece is reproduced in accordance with the variation of the decoration pattern. For example, a piece of music consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the variation of decorative patterns seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and a configuration may be adopted in which playback of a different song is started at the timing when playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with the change of the game state, the music that has been reproduced so far may be faded out in the middle of reproduction, and another music different from the music that has been reproduced so far may be reproduced.

A game state is generated in which a special image is displayed when the left lever 3720 is properly operated without being deceived by the operation instruction. The display period of the simulated image simulating the button 3710 is constructed so as to overlap, and the special image (such as an image of a bomb exploding) and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are displayed at the same time. Examples are shown below.

FIGS. 335(a) to 335(c) show other display examples that can be displayed at the timing when the diagram shown in FIG. 333(a) is displayed.
In each of FIGS. 335(a) to 335(c), the display priority of the obliquely tilted translucent sunglasses image is set to the window displaying the dialogue of "Colonel Dina" and the dialogue of "Colonel Dina". The display priority is higher than that of the image, the image of own tank, the image of bomb character A, and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . Also, the image of semi-transparent sunglasses is displayed when one image is displayed as shown in FIG. 335(a), when two images are displayed as shown in FIG. There are cases where three are displayed as shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 333(a), when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed, the expectation for the big win is higher when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed than when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is not displayed. A decision is made whether to display the image. In addition, the display mode of the semi-transparent sunglasses image is determined so that the greater the number of semi-transparent sunglasses images, the higher the expectation of the big win.

For example, if the display state shown in FIG. 333(a) is displayed, the degree of expectation is 10%, and the display state shown in FIG. 335(a) is 30%, and the display shown in FIG. It is preferable to display a semi-transparent sunglasses image so that the degree of expectation in the state shown in FIG.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image starts at timing t26 and continues until the attack button 3710 is operated or until the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 ends. If the bomb character A can be exploded (that is, if the special lottery result is a big hit), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may be continued until the display of the explosion image ends.

With such a configuration, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. In addition, since the translucent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed in front of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the special image that can be visually recognized is the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. can be prevented from being hidden by

FIG. 335(d) is a modification of the display example shown with reference to FIG. 335(c). As in this display example, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be configured to be displayed closer to the viewer than the translucent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in FIG. 335(c) and the display mode shown in FIG. 335(d) may be alternately displayed. For example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds from timing t26 to timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, both the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the translucent sunglasses image can be highlighted.
Note that the bomb character A before or after the explosion may also be displayed in the same manner as the simulated image of the attack button 3710 .

It should be noted that the image of translucent sunglasses does not have to indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, a difference may be provided in the appearance rate of the displayed images.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 328 and 333, one operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be accepted from timing t26 to timing t29. 336, an embodiment in which operations on the , mission button 3700 can be received multiple times will be described.

FIGS. 336(a) to 336(c) are display examples when the attack button 3710 is configured to be operable a plurality of times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, a plurality of (for example, five) simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed according to the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. Moreover, each time the attack button 3710 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed on the front side among the simulated images simulating the attack button 3710 ends. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, an image of the bomb character A being hit by a cannonball and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). It is recommended that you do so. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, if the fifth operation is performed, the image of the explosion may be displayed with a probability of 100%. If the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A is not hit by the cannonball and the image of the explosion is not displayed.
FIG. 336(a) shows a display example at timing t26.
Also, FIG. 336(b) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed when the attack button 3710 is operated for the third time, and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. state.
When the explosion image is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and in response to this operation, the explosion image is displayed. The aspect may be configured to be displayed in an even more explosive aspect.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not always necessary to operate the attack button 3710, so the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion. FIG. 336(b) shows a display example in which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

FIGS. 336(d) to 336(f) are display examples when the mission button 3700 is configured to be operable a plurality of times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, a plurality of (for example, five) simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. Moreover, each time the mission button 3700 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed on the front side among the simulated images simulating the mission button 3700 ends. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, an image of the bomb character A being hit by a cannonball and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). It is recommended that you do so. Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the explosion image is not displayed.
FIG. 336(d) shows a display example at timing t26.
Also, FIG. 336(d) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated for the third time, and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. state.
When the explosion image is displayed, if the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and the explosion image is displayed in response to this operation. The aspect may be configured to be displayed in an even more explosive aspect.
Since it is not always necessary to operate the mission button 3700 when the explosion image is displayed, the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion. FIG. 336(e) shows a display example in which the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

It should be noted that in the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 336(d) to 336(f), the line of "Colonel Dinah" is "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" It is instructed. For this reason, the player needs to carefully observe the presentation situation and operate the mission button 3700 . And when the mission button 3700 can be operated, a special image of a bomb exploding can be visually recognized.

336(a) to 336(c) and FIGS. 336(d) to 336(f). 337 for explanation. In the present embodiment, when timing t26 has come without destroying the battery of the own tank, acceptance of the operations of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are enabled at the same time. At this time, each of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can receive operations a predetermined number of times (for example, five times each). Also, a predetermined number of simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 and simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed.

FIG. 337(a) shows a display example in which five simulated images representing attack buttons 3710 and five simulated images representing mission buttons 3700 are displayed. It should be noted that, as described above, the operation valid period should start from timing t26.
In this state, when the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated, the special lottery result is determined as a jackpot as described above, and a lottery with a predetermined probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, As for the mission button 3700, an image of an explosion is displayed depending on whether or not 1/3) has been hit.

FIG. 337(b) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed in response to the third operation of the attack button 3710. FIG. Also, FIG. 337(d) shows a state in which an image of an explosion is displayed in response to the third operation of the mission button 3700. FIG. The display examples shown in FIGS. 337(b) and 337(d) can be displayed when the special lottery result is a big hit. When the image of the explosion is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and the image that explodes according to the operation is accepted. , may be configured to be displayed in a more explosive manner.
For example, in the display state shown in FIG. 337(b), if a predetermined lottery (1/3) is won based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the explosion mode in the display state shown in FIG. You may change the display mode to Alternatively, in the display state shown in FIG. 337(d), if a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the display mode will be the explosion mode shown in FIG. 337(b). may be changed.
In addition, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, even if the mission button 3700 and the attack button 3710 are operated and the predetermined lottery continues to be lost, if the operation is performed a total of 10 times, 100%. It is preferable to display an exploded image in a mode corresponding to the last operated button with a probability of .
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not always necessary to operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700. Therefore, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are given priority over the image of the explosion. It should be displayed at a lower frequency. 337(b) and 337(d) show display examples in which a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion. ing.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, the timing of operating the attack button 3710 5 times and the mission button 3700 5 times during the valid operation period, or for 3 seconds from the timing when the valid operation period ends. The display state shown in (c) is obtained.
It should be noted that in the production example shown with reference to FIG. 337(a), the line of "Colonel Dina" is an erroneous operation instruction such as "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!". For this reason, the player needs to carefully observe the presentation situation and operate the mission button 3700 .

In the production example described with reference to FIG. 333(d), the line of "Colonel Dina" instructs the operation of the mission button 3700, but "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the mission button! instead of the line "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" may be displayed.
333(a), the production example explained with reference to FIG. 335(a), the production example explained with reference to FIG. 336(a), and the production example explained with reference to FIG. In the production example described with reference, the line "Sergeant Might" instructs the operation of the attack button 3710. Instead, it may be configured to display an erroneous line saying "It's a large bomb~! Please attack with the defense button!".
By adopting such a configuration, the player needs to carefully observe the performance situation, so that it is possible to further improve the game interest. It should be noted that the player can recognize the operation unit to be operated by the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 .

Also, the simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 show the operation parts to be operated, but these also show the words of "Colonel Dina" and the words of "Sergeant Might". case), a simulated image may be displayed to indicate an operation unit different from the operation unit that should be operated. It should be noted that in this case, when an appropriate operation is performed, a display of firing a cannonball or a bullet may be displayed to suggest to the player that an appropriate display has been performed.

Although a display example of displaying simulated images of the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, and the mission button 3700 has been shown, these displays do not have to be performed. In this case, the player is required to operate the operation unit in a manner contrary to the operation instruction or in a manner different from the operation instruction based on the type of bomb character, the state of destruction of the own tank, etc. Therefore, the player must perform an appropriate operation. Since the degree of difficulty of performing the operation increases, it is possible to improve the interest felt when an appropriate operation is performed.

336 and 337, even after timing t26, if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, a special image (explosion image, tilted sunglasses image, etc.) is displayed. An example of a production that generates a production state that is set is shown. Such an embodiment also has the same effect as the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 325-335.

It should be noted that the time during which the special image is displayed should be longer than the time during which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can enjoy a special image.

The special image displayed when an operation contrary to the operation instruction or different from the operation instruction is performed should preferably be displayed as an image larger than the operation instruction. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 335, an image (large translucent sunglasses shown in FIG. image) can be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the display of a more special image.

In addition, although the operation instruction display such as "tilt forward" and "tilt backward" is performed as the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 in this embodiment, when the operation instruction is not performed (Fig. 329(g), Fig. 331(g) 2), the content of the operation can be estimated from the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only when the player can properly operate the left lever 3720 in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. It is preferable to configure such that an image (special image) in which the sunglasses are tilted is displayed with a predetermined probability (1/10) when it is performed.

Note that when the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above are operated, an operation acceptance sound that directly corresponds to the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above is not output. It may be configured such that a special sound corresponding to the operation is output only when the special condition as described above is satisfied and a special image is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can feel that the special image is displayed in a special way. It should be noted that a similar configuration may be employed in the display of special images in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 335-337.

As the operation contrary to the operation instruction, the example of the effect of tilting the left lever 3720 in a different direction and the example of the effect of operating a button different from the instructed button are given, but other modes are also possible. For example, when the player is instructed to press and hold the attack button 3710, repeatedly hitting the attack button 3710 may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction. Alternatively, operating the defense button 3740 when the operation of the attack button 3710 is instructed may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction.

It should be noted that, when an operation is performed that does not follow the operation instruction display, a special display change is given, but the degree of expectation for a big hit is indicated by the provision of such a special display change. It may be configured as Alternatively, it may be constructed so as not to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. Alternatively, among the special display changes described above, some display changes indicate the degree of expectation of a big win, and other display changes do not indicate the degree of expectation of a big win. good too.

In this embodiment, the operation reception period of the left lever 3720 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at timing t0, the mode shown in FIG. 329(b) may be displayed to start the "bomb character reach".

Also, based on the pending look-ahead, an effect similar to the "bomb character reach" shown with reference to FIGS. In this case, it is preferable to display the bomb character A and the bomb character B once in the variable display of the decorative symbols executed before the variable display of the decorative symbols to be read ahead. Over the entire period during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, an effect is performed to accept the operation of the left lever 3720 corresponding to the displayed bomb character. It is preferable to perform corresponding display effects. 326 and 327. For example, the example of the effect executed from the timing t6 to the timing t11 in FIGS. you should do it. Then, during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to be read ahead to the end of the stop display, it is preferable to execute the effect performed from the timing t26 to the timing t35 in FIG.

It should be noted that the destroyed gun battery may be revived by the player performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display when the gun battery of the own tank has been destroyed.
Also, in a state in which the machine gun of the own tank is destroyed, the destroyed machine gun may be revived by the player performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display.
In addition, in a state in which the gun battery of the own tank is not destroyed, the player may perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display, so that the own tank is upgraded. For example, the number of turrets may increase one by one, the color of the turret may change, or the turret may change to an oversized turret.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 325, the timing at which the bomb character can appear is not limited to two times, but is set to a greater number of times, such as five times, to further improve the interest of the presentation. can be done. In addition, the player can be made to visually recognize a special effect display such as the resurrection of the destroyed machine gun or the upgrade of the self-tank.

The degree of expectation for a big win may be indicated by giving a change in display, or the change in display may be given as a mere effect and not to show the degree of expectation.
For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the current game state or the game state to be generated may be suggested or notified according to the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets.

The bomb character A or the bomb character B may always be displayed in the first period, the second period, and the variable display in the look-ahead effect. By adopting such a configuration, the operation instructions are always shown to the player, and the player can be made to feel tense, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement.

Although an example in which a special display change is given by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation content has been shown, an operation contrary to the instructed operation content or an operation different from the instructed operation content has been shown. may be configured to give a special display change.

An example is shown in which both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" may give operation instructions, but in a series of "bomb character reach", only one character may give operation instructions. . In this case, for the other character, it is preferable to display a line such as "Hmm, mumble".

In this way, in "Bomb Chara Reach", a special display change is given when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is intentionally performed, and it is possible to give the player a special sense of satisfaction. Become.

Conventionally, in order to suggest the result of a special lottery, there have been cases where a predetermined image is displayed based on an operation by a player to suggest the result of the special lottery (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-046210). By the way, the number of times such operations are accepted and the number of times of display performed in response to the acceptance of operations are predetermined. Also, the period during which the player can operate is limited to a predetermined period, and the display mode cannot be freely changed by the player's free operation. In addition, the display time of the effect displayed in this way is constant, and there is room for improvement in this respect as well. In the embodiments described below, it is possible to accept operations multiple times during the operation valid period, and the display time of the image displayed based on the operation is set to be long or short, and depending on the length of time displayed, special An embodiment that makes it possible to suggest the result of the lottery will be described.

The “suddenly tank effect” that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern will be described below with reference to FIG. 338 and the like. It should be noted that whether or not to perform the “suddenly tank effect” is determined based on pre-reading of the pending contents in the peripheral control board 1510 .
Fig. 338 shows the types of production patterns that can be selected, the conditions for selecting the production patterns, and the period during which the look-ahead production is executed (specifically, how many times the decorative symbols are displayed in variable display in the "suddenly tank production"). This is a table showing whether the

The look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the pending number is 1 to 4 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 01 is a effect pattern in which a “suddenly tank effect” is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display. Since the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is executed only in one variable display period, it is not strictly a look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the pending number is 1 to 3 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display and the variable display related to the first suspension.

The look-ahead performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the pending number is 1 to 2 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 03 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first suspension, and the variable display related to the second suspension.

The look-ahead performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. In the look-ahead effect pattern 04, a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first suspension, the variable display related to the second suspension, and the variable display related to the third suspension. It is a production pattern that

In addition, in the performance patterns in which the variable display is performed multiple times, such as the look-ahead performance pattern 02 to the look-ahead performance pattern 04, the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a loss for the last variable display in which the "sudden tank performance" is executed. Any of them is fine, but if all the special lottery results of the intermediate variable displays other than the final variable display in which the ``suddenly tank performance'' is executed are lost, the prefetch performance is based on the prefetch performance pattern 02 to the prefetch performance pattern 04. should be executed.

FIG. 339 is a table showing three display effect patterns displayed in the "suddenly tank effect". Also, FIG. 340 is a time chart showing an effect mode when the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 340(a), in the "suddenly tank effect", the time during which the variable display of decorative symbols is performed is 14 seconds from timing t0 to timing t14. Moreover, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is one second. At timing t0, operation acceptance of attack button 3710 becomes valid, and operation acceptance of attack button 3710 becomes invalid at timing t14 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. A simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area during a period (timing t0 to timing t14) in which the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid. Below, with reference to FIG. 341, a description will be given of the effects displayed in the display area based on the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player.

341 is a diagram showing a display mode in the display area at a predetermined timing in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 340. FIG.

FIG. 341(a) shows a state in which the image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t0. Reached decorative patterns (“3”, “↓”, “3”) are displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and an image of the tank facing forward is displayed in the lower center of the display area. The image of the enemy tank facing the direction, the image of the road along which the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction, the image of the horizon and the sky in the upper part of the display area, and the character in the production in the lower right of the display area. A dialogue image of a certain "Colonel Dina" and a window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed in the lower left of the display area. A simulated image representing an attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the enclosing window image.
In this way, in the “suddenly tank effect”, at timing t0, the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed, and operation reception for the attack button 3710 is enabled.

As shown in FIG. 340(a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated during the valid operation period, the image of the enemy tank continues to be displayed until timing t14. Also, at timing t14, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, after the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed. FIG. 339 is a table showing production patterns executed based on the operation of attack button 3710. FIG.
Also, FIGS. 340(b) to 340(d) are time charts showing states in which an effect pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation of attack button 3710 at timing t3.
Also, FIGS. 340(e) to 340(g) show a state in which an effect pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 at timings t3 and t8. is a chart.

FIG. 339 shows an effect pattern selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
When the smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When the smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for two seconds on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When the smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.

Appearance ratios are determined in advance by the smoke display effect pattern 01 to the smoke display effect pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. The degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is 30%, the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed is 50%, and the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed is 100%. is.

FIG. 340(b) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 340(c) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 340(d) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.

FIG. 341(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 340(b) to 340(d). FIG. 341(b) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank being fired and an image of the bomb exploding and an image of a destroyed enemy tank being displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 341(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 second), and becomes the display state shown in FIG. 341(c). In this display state, the battery of the enemy tank is destroyed, and a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340(b), the smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, and the smoke image shown in FIG. 341(d) is displayed one second after the display state shown in FIG. becomes a display state in which is not displayed. In addition, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340(c), because the smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, the display state in which the smoke image is not displayed two seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 341(c) is entered. (illustration omitted). As the line of "Colonel Dyna" displayed two seconds later, a display of "Is the power of the new gun so good..." is displayed. Here, the line of "Colonel Dinah" indicates moderate expectations.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340(d), the smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, so that the smoke image shown in FIG. 341(e) is displayed three seconds after the display state shown in FIG. becomes a display state in which is not displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is high.

Thus, it is suggested that the longer the smoke image is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big win.
Therefore, the player views the display area expecting that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the display of the smoke image ends are displayed corresponding to each smoke display effect pattern. Therefore, the line of "Colonel Dinah" also suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. The lines of "Colonel Dyna" correspond to the display time of the smoke image. It is possible to make even a player who has a low degree of concentration on a game, who does not play the game, feel interest in the game.

One second after the smoke image is no longer displayed, a new enemy tank image is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 340(b), the image of the new enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 340(c), the image of the new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 340(d), at timing t7, the image of the new enemy tank is displayed. FIG. 341(f) is a rendering example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 340(b) to 340(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated after that, and the variable display of decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 342(a) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 340(b) to 340(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a mode of notifying that the game is a big hit.
FIG. 342(b) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 340(b) to 340(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner to notify that they are lost.

340(b) to 340(d) show examples of effects when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3. It is possible to receive an operation from and execute any smoke display effect pattern.

In this way, the smoke display effect pattern can be executed a plurality of times by accepting the operation from the player not only once but a plurality of times from the timing t0 to the timing t14.

FIGS. 340(e) to 340(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at two timings of timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 340(e) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at time t8.
FIG. 340(f) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at time t8.
FIG. 340(g) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at time t8.
Note that even if the smoke display effect pattern is executed a plurality of times, the display similar to the effect example described with reference to FIGS. done.

If it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated by the player during the execution of a certain smoke display effect pattern, after the smoke display effect pattern being executed is completed, FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 341B is continued for one second, one of the smoke display effect patterns is automatically executed, and the display state after FIG. 341(b) may be obtained. For example, when the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, the smoke display effect pattern is automatically executed three times. will be

An example of executing the "suddenly tank effect" in one time variable display when the prefetch effect pattern 01 is selected is shown below. A description will be given of the manner in which the "tank presentation" is executed.
In addition, in the "suddenly tank effect", the effect is executed for up to four times of variable display, and the variable time required for each variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

343 and 344, an effect example when the look-ahead effect pattern 02 is executed will be described below. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose degree of expectation is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second time is a loss. This point is the same for the look-ahead effect pattern 03 and the look-ahead effect pattern 04 as well.
Also in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, when the display of the smoke image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decoration pattern, refer to FIGS. 340 and 341. A display similar to the example of effect described above is performed.

The display mode of the smoke image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative symbols are still displayed will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 343(a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 344(a) occurs from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 343(b), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the effect of the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at the time t14, and the effect by the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at the time t14. From time t15 to timing t15, the display state shown in FIG. 344(b) is reached.
As shown in FIG. 343(c), when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank appear at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 344(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 343(d), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank appear at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 344(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 343(e), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 344(d) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 343(f), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 344(e) from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the decorative pattern is also started in a display mode forming a ready-to-win state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 343, the display mode of the smoke image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the target of the look-ahead effect stops has been described. 345, the display mode of the smoke image and the destroyed image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension targeted for the look-ahead effect stops will be described.

FIGS. 345(b) to 345(f) show examples of effects in which the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern overlaps with the stop display period (timing t29 to timing t30) of the decorative symbols. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 345(b) to 345(f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern, the smoke display effect pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29 and decorated. It shows an example of effect for performing stop display of symbols. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in FIG. 342(a) or FIG. 342(b) is displayed based on the result of the special lottery.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the big win game state is started from timing t30, timing t30 to timing t35 is set to the opening state of the big win game, and the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 is started from timing t35. FIGS. 346(b) to 346(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the next variable display is started at timing t30, the tank presentation may be continued abruptly in the next variable display, and the "suddenly tank presentation" may be terminated in the middle of the variable display. good.
FIGS. 346(b) to 346(f) show an example of a presentation in which an image of smoke or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of the decoration pattern is stopped or when the next variation display is started. .

Thus, in the "suddenly tank effect" according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept the operation of the attack button 3710 (operation unit) at the same time when the decorative pattern starts to change, and the display effect based on the operation of the operation unit can be performed. The number of times of execution is not predetermined, and the display effect can be executed any number of times based on the player's intention, so that the player is strongly interested in the operation of the operation unit. can be done. In addition to simply operating the operation part, pay attention to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) displayed in response to the operation (the longer the display time, the higher the expectation of the big win. Because it is necessary), it can be more interesting. Furthermore, since the variation time of the decorative pattern is set to be short, it is possible to create a sense of tension regarding the operation of the operation unit and the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation. In addition, as a look-ahead effect, by configuring the display effect to be executable over variations of a plurality of decorative patterns, the degree of expectation indicated by the display time of the smoke image is the degree of expectation for the variation of any decorative pattern. It can increase the player's interest in whether there is.

Although three smoke display effect patterns are shown in FIG. 339, the "suddenly tank effect" may be executed using a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 01 and the smoke display effect pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, the "suddenly tank effect" is executed using a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 01 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 02 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed. good too.

Furthermore, as the smoke display effect pattern 04, the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 4 seconds, and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. Either one or both of the production patterns with 100% jackpot expectation may be employed in a production mode in which the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 5 seconds and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. In this way, by adopting an effect pattern with a long effect execution period, the player can almost certainly notice that the degree of expectation is 100%, and the interest can be improved.

With reference to FIGS. 338 to 346, an embodiment in which the longer the smoke image (specific display) is displayed, the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit has been shown. An embodiment modified so that the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank in the embodiment, the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win, will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 354. . It should be noted that the description of the same processing, display, etc. as before deformation may be omitted.

FIG. 347 shows an effect pattern selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
When the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.
When the white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.
When the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.

The white flag display effect pattern 01 to white flag display effect pattern 03 determine the appearance rate in advance so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit. The expectation level is 30% when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed, the expectation level is 50% when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is executed, and the expectation level is 100% when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is executed. is.

FIG. 348(b) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 348(c) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 348(d) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.

FIG. 349(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 348(b) to 348(d). FIG. 349(b) shows a state in which an image of a shell being fired at an enemy tank and the shell exploding and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 349(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 second), and becomes the display state shown in FIG. 349(c). In this display state, the battery of the enemy tank is destroyed and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Note that the white flag image is not yet displayed at this stage.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348(b), the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, so that the white flag image shown in FIG. 349(d) is displayed three seconds after the display state shown in FIG. is displayed. In addition, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348(c), by selecting the white flag display effect pattern 02, the display state where the white flag image is displayed two seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 349(c) is displayed. (illustration omitted). As the line of "Colonel Dinah" displayed two seconds later, "Is the morale of the enemy army so good..." is displayed. Here, the line of "Colonel Dinah" indicates moderate expectations.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348(d), the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, so that the white flag image shown in FIG. 349(e) is displayed one second after the display state shown in FIG. is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is high.

In this way, it is suggested that the longer the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed without the white flag image (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big hit. be done.
Therefore, the player views the display area expecting that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the display of the white flag image is started are displayed corresponding to each white flag display effect pattern. Therefore, the line of "Colonel Dinah" also suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. The line of "Colonel Dyna" corresponds to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, so the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Even if you don't know exactly when will be displayed, you can know your expectations and don't bother to check the time when the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed. It is possible to make even a player who has a low degree of concentration on a simple game feel the interest in the game.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, a new enemy tank image is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 348(b), the image of the new enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 348(c), the image of the new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 348(d), at timing t5, an image of a new enemy tank is displayed. FIG. 349(f) is a rendering example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 348(b) to 348(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated after that, and the variable display of decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 350(a) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 348(b) to 348(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a mode of notifying that the game is a big hit.
FIG. 350(b) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 348(b) to 348(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner to notify that they are lost.

348(b) to 348(d) show examples of effects when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3. It is possible to receive an operation from and execute any white flag display effect pattern.

Further, by accepting the operation from the player not only once but a plurality of times from timing t0 to timing t14, it is possible to execute the white flag display effect pattern a plurality of times.

FIGS. 348(e) to 348(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at two timings of timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 348(e) shows an effect example in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at time t8.
FIG. 348(f) shows an effect example in which white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at time t8.
FIG. 348(g) shows an effect example in which white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at time t8.
Even if the white flag display effect pattern is executed a plurality of times, a display similar to the effect example described with reference to FIGS. done.

If it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated by the player during the execution of a certain white flag display effect pattern, after the white flag display effect pattern being executed ends, FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 349B is continued for one second, one of the white flag display effect patterns is automatically executed, and the display state after FIG. 349(b) may be obtained. For example, when the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, the white flag display effect pattern is automatically executed three times. will be

An example of executing the "suddenly tank effect" in one time variable display when the prefetch effect pattern 01 is selected is shown below. A description will be given of the manner in which the "tank performance" is executed.
In addition, in the "suddenly tank effect", the effect is executed over a maximum of four variable displays, and the variable time required for one variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

351 and 352, an effect example when the prefetch effect pattern 02 is executed will be described below. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose degree of expectation is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second time is a loss. This point is the same for the look-ahead effect pattern 03 and the look-ahead effect pattern 04 as well.
Also in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, when the display of the white flag image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decoration pattern, refer to FIGS. 348 and 349. A display similar to the example of effect described above is performed.

The display mode of the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative symbols are still displayed will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 351(a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 352(a) occurs from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 351(b), when white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of attack button 3710, the effect of white flag display effect pattern 03 ends at time t14 and timing t14. From time t15 to timing t15, the display state shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 351(c), when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 352(c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 351(d), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed at timing t14 to timing t15. 352(c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 351(e), when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 352(d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 351(f), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 352(e) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the decorative pattern is also started in a display mode forming a ready-to-win state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 351, the display mode of the white flag image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension that occurred before the suspension that was the target of the look-ahead effect stops has been described. , and FIG. 353, description will be given of the display mode of the white flag image and the enemy tank destruction image when the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension targeted for the look-ahead effect stops.

FIGS. 353(b) to 353(f) show examples of effects in which the execution period of the selected white flag display effect pattern overlaps with the stop display period (timing t29 to timing t30) of the decorative symbols. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 353(b) to 353(f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display production pattern, the white flag display production pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29, and decoration is performed. It shows an example of effect for performing stop display of symbols. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in FIG. 350(a) or FIG. 350(b) is displayed based on the result of the special lottery.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the white flag display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the big win game state is started from timing t30, timing t30 to timing t35 is set to the opening state of the big win game, and the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 is started from timing t35. FIGS. 354(b) to 354(f) show examples of effects in which a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the white flag display performance pattern being executed is configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the white flag display during execution. The effect pattern may be configured to be interrupted without being executed for a predetermined execution period. This prevents the player from feeling dissatisfied that the result of the special lottery was a loss, even though the highly anticipated performance was executed if the display of the destroyed enemy tank image was interrupted. It is for
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a loss and there are one or more pending, the next variable display will start at timing t30, but the "suddenly tank effect" will continue even in the next variable display, It is preferable to configure so that the "suddenly tank presentation" is ended in the middle of the variable display. With such a configuration, the "suddenly tank presentation" can be ended in a natural manner without making the player feel uncomfortable.
FIGS. 354(b) to 354(f) show an example of a presentation in which an image of smoke or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of the decoration pattern is stopped or when the next variation display is started. .

The embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 347-354 can also provide the same effects as the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 339-346. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 347 to 354, the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Expecting that the display time of the tank will be short, you will have to watch the display effect.

338 to 354, an embodiment of "suddenly a tank effect" has been shown, but the embodiment may be modified as follows. An embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of smoke are displayed will be described as an example. good too.

As shown in FIGS. 339 and 347, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is either 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A predetermined sound effect may be output while the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, sound effects of 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds are prepared in advance, and at the same time when the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts to be displayed, the output of the sound effect of the same seconds may be started. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effect may be started at the same timing and finished at the same timing.

On the other hand, it may be modified so that the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output time of the sound effect are different. For example, only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds is prepared, and this sound effect is output regardless of whether the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2, 3, or 4 seconds. It should be configured as follows. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes impossible to know the degree of expectation unless the player is watching the display mode of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the game can be given a sense of tension. It is also possible to employ only sound effects with an output time of 3 seconds or only sound effects with an output time of 2 seconds.

A predetermined sound effect may be looped to output the sound. For example, a sound effect with a length of one second may be reproduced multiple times (2 times, 3 times, 4 times) in accordance with the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, a sound effect having a length of 1 second may be reproduced four times in succession to output the sound effect for 4 seconds. In this case, as above, the display time is different, but the sound effect is output a certain number of times (for a certain period of time), so that the expectation level cannot be understood unless the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed carefully. , and the game can be made to have a sense of tension.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 339, the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 347, the degree of expectation when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

339 and 347, based on the player's operation, the effect pattern for displaying an image of an enemy tank being destroyed can be executed multiple times. However, a limit may be set on the number of executions of highly anticipated effect patterns. For example, the number of times the smoke display effect pattern 03 or the white flag display effect pattern 03, which has a 100% chance of winning a big hit, is executed during one "suddenly tank effect" may be limited to once. Also, the number of times the performance pattern with the expectation level of 0% as described above is executed may be similarly limited to one time. With such a configuration, the player carefully observes whether or not the high-expectation (or low-expectation) effect pattern is executed, so that the game can be made tense.

As shown in FIGS. 341 and 349, in this embodiment, decorative patterns (during variable display and during stop display), a simulated image imitating an attack button 3710, an image of an undestroyed enemy tank, and an image of a destroyed enemy The tank images are displayed relatively small in the display area, but at least one of them may be displayed larger. For example, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed in sizes shown in FIGS. 303(b) and 303(c). In this case, a display mode in which these images overlap may be adopted. In this case, the display priority is given to the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed and the image of the enemy tank that has been destroyed. ), should be in that order. In addition, it is preferable to lower the display priority of the image of the own tank, the serif image, and the background image such as the road.

With such a configuration, the decorative pattern (during variable display and during stop display), the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the image of the undestroyed enemy tank, or the image of the destroyed enemy tank are superimposed on each other. Even if displayed, the visibility of the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed or the enemy tank that has been destroyed is not hindered by the decorative pattern or the simulated image of the attack button 3710 . Therefore, the timing of starting and ending the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is clarified, preventing the player from misunderstanding the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, that is, the degree of expectation. can.

An embodiment in which the image of the enemy tank is always destroyed and displayed by operating the attack button 3710 has been described, but the difficulty level is increased to display the image of the enemy tank in a destroyed state. may In this case, the display conditions for the operation of the operation unit in the above-described embodiment may be adopted. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated, a lottery is held, and if the player wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2), the image of the enemy tank is destroyed and displayed. good too. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when a specific condition is met, the difficulty of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank can be increased. Even if the player is operating , the player can have a sense of tension that they do not know when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the expectation of a big hit is 100%, that is, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the image of the tank being destroyed in the "suddenly tank effect" is displayed at a different time than usual (smoke An example of the effect when the display effect pattern 03 or the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected has been shown, but it not only suggests that it is a big win, but also suggests other game values that are profitable for the player. may be performed. For example, as described above, by winning the symbol to which the time saving is given, or by executing a predetermined number of losing fluctuations from the time of turning on the power or from the previous hit, the time saving is given from the normal game state The “suddenly tank effect” may be executed in the loss variation that triggers the switch to the game state. In this case as well, since it is common that a time-saving game state is given instead of winning as an advantage advantageous to the player, the various effects described in the above-described embodiments can be produced in the same manner.

In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is indicated by the "suddenly tank effect", but the "suddenly tank effect" may be configured to indicate the type of profit given to the player. For example, as a benefit given to the player, after the variable decorative pattern becomes a big hit, which of the time-saving state or the variable probability state is given, or whether it is likely to be given (for example, the expectation that it will be a variable state percentage) may be indicated. Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can shift to the time saving state or the probability changing state after the variation of the decorative pattern without going through the jackpot state, which of the time saving state or the probability changing state is given after the variation of the decorative pattern, or is given. It may indicate whether it is easy (for example, what percentage is expected to be in a probability variable state).

Thus, according to the “suddenly tank effect”, it is possible to enhance the interest of the gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been an effect in which a player is requested to operate an operation unit (for example, JP-A-2010-046210). In such an effect, the predetermined effect display is displayed regardless of whether the player operates the operation unit or not, so that the operation of the operation unit gives a sense of tension. It was blurry. In particular, even if a complicated operation mode is requested, it is only a pretense after all, and the predetermined effect is performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player on the operation unit. However, by executing such an effect, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the effect display may be lowered. As described above, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in terms of effectively using the operation to the operation unit to improve the amusement of the game. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, it is possible to make the player feel nervous about the operation mode of the operation unit by the player, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. will be explained.

In the embodiments described below, the operation of the left lever 3720 is requested to the player, and depending on whether the player can tilt the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction and angle and maintain that state, Therefore, it is configured so that there are cases where viewing the special effect display is not hindered and when viewing is hindered (when it is impossible to see or when it is difficult to see). there is

355, display examples shown in FIGS. 356 and 357, etc., the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 within a predetermined range. ” will be described. FIG. 356 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is performed as shown in FIG. 355(a). Also, FIG. 357 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is not performed as shown in FIG. 355(b).

At timing t5, a ready-to-win effect state occurs. In "Full Breakthrough Reach", a speed display window showing the speed of your own tank is displayed above the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna". The display in the speed display window changes depending on how the player operates the left lever 3720 . Decorative patterns, roads, and self-tank images are displayed in the same manner as in other embodiments. FIGS. 356(a) and 357(a) show display examples at timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect state occurs.

At timing t5, an operation effective period of left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 304, by operating the left lever 3720, it is possible to change the lateral position and speed of the own tank. The operation effective period of the left lever 3720 continues until the timing t34, which is the variation stop timing of the decorative symbols.

At a timing t7, a state is created in which a cannonball is fired from behind the own tank. This effect state continues for four seconds until timing t11. Also during this period, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed to the left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dinah". In addition, the simulated image is labeled with the character “tilted forward” indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 .
FIGS. 356(b) and 357(b) show display examples at timing t7.

An example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 355(a), the display example shown in FIG. 356, and the like. Further, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 355(b), the display example shown in FIG. 357, and the like.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period. Specifically, the left lever 3720 should be maintained between 10 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 2 seconds. By performing such an operation, a display in which the self-tank is accelerating and moving is displayed in the display area. FIG. 356(c) shows a display example when the own tank is sufficiently accelerated at timing t9.

The time chart shown in FIG. 355(a) shows a state in which the player can tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At timing t11, the operation instruction display for left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 356(d) shows a display example from timing t11 to timing t15 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not properly operated, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient or the angle to operate it is insufficient, the shell fired from the enemy tank hits the own tank. , the display that the shell explodes is performed.

The time chart of FIG. 355(b) shows an effect example in which the operation of the left lever 3720 is performed for only one second from timing t8 to timing t9 during the effective period of operation of the left lever 3720. FIG. In this case, your tank is not fast enough. Therefore, at timing t11, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, the display of the smoke image generated by the explosion of the shell around the image of the own tank starts.

The display state shown in FIG. 357(c) shows a display example when the speed of the own tank is not sufficient at timing t9. Also, FIG. 357(d) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15 because the vehicle's speed was not sufficient.

It should be noted that FIGS. 356(c) and 356(d) show a state in which characters "30 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. Also, in FIGS. 357(c) and 357(d), a state is shown in which characters "20 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. In this manner, when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720 while the operation instruction is being displayed, the display in the speed display window is set to 30 km/h or more, and an appropriate operation is being performed while the operation instruction is being displayed. If not, or if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instruction is being displayed, the display in the speed display window is less than 30 km/h. Specifically, the time after the left lever 3720 reaches an appropriate angle is measured, and the speed display of the own tank is increased by 1 km/h every 0.1 seconds. According to such a configuration, by looking at the display of the speed display window, the player can check whether the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is properly performed and whether the operation of the left lever 3720 is properly performed. recognizable.

From timing t15 to timing t24, a display effect is performed in which the own tank advances forward. Even if the smoke image was displayed due to the explosion of the shell from the enemy unit, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t15. FIGS. 356(e) and 357(e) show examples of display effects in which the own tank moves forward from timing t15 to timing t24. Note that the speed in the speed display window that has been changed according to the operation of the left lever 3720 changes from the timing (timing t15) when the display of the smoke image ends to the timing (timing t15) when the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed again. The speed may be set to "10 km/h" at a predetermined timing up to timing t24).

In this embodiment, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank according to the operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from timing t5 to timing t34. Therefore, by operating the left lever 3720 during the period when the operation instruction display is not performed, it is possible to practice changing the speed of the own tank. In this case, it is preferable to display "10 km/h" in the speed display window at the timing when the speed indication display is started.

At timing t24, images of a plurality of enemy tanks are displayed in the upper part of the display area. Images of a plurality of enemy tanks are moved leftward in the upper part of the display area and displayed until timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and an operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is started. The operation instruction display for left lever 3720 is performed until timing t32.

From timing t24 to timing t32, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period. Specifically, the left lever 3720 should be maintained between 30 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 4 seconds. By performing such an operation, a display in which the own tank is accelerated to a maximum speed of 50 km/h is displayed in the display area.

The time chart shown in FIG. 355(a) shows a state in which the player can tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At timing t32, the operation instruction display for left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 356(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 356(h) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not properly operated, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient, the tilting angle is insufficient, or the tilting direction is wrong, the own tank and the enemy tank are separated. A display that the self-tank exploded due to the collision is performed.

The time chart of FIG. 355(b) shows a state in which the left lever 3720 is properly tilted for only two seconds from timing t25 to timing t27 during the effective period of operation of the left lever 3720. FIG. In this case, your tank is not fast enough. Therefore, from timing t32, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, the display of the smoke image generated by the collision with the enemy tank around the image of the own tank starts.

FIG. 357(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the own tank is not sufficiently accelerated. Also, FIG. 357(h) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t34 when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to timing t35.

Although the display examples shown in FIGS. 356 and 357 show the display examples when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the same display is performed when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, it is preferable to stop display the decorative pattern with the number "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, when the player cannot operate the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size is reduced. Obstructed by smoke images. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to confirm the stationary display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size, and the player will be conscious of performing appropriate operations from the next time onwards. On the other hand, when the player operates the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the player can visually recognize the stop display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size without impeding visibility. You will feel a sense of satisfaction that you have completed the tense operation.

In the present embodiment, the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed twice during the period from timing t7 to timing t11 and the period from timing t24 to timing t32. done.
At this time, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is such that the time required for the operation is longer and the operation angle is narrower at the later timing than at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more tense operation mode.

FIG. 355(c) is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 355(a) and 355(b). In this embodiment, the display time of the smoke image is lengthened when the smoke image is displayed due to the shell of the enemy tank, and the smoke image is displayed until the timing when the enemy tank group is displayed. there is
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed until timing t27. In such a configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) and part of the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) during which the second operation instruction is displayed overlap. Become.
At this time, the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 may be partially or entirely hidden by the smoke image. Similarly, a part or all of the speech of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and the speed display window may be hidden.
With such a configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) in which the first operation instruction display is performed, the display period in which the second operation instruction display is performed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the operation mode during (timing t24 to timing t31), the sense of tension in the operation of left lever 3720 can be increased.

Alternatively, the length of the smoke image to be displayed when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated may be determined by lottery. For example, the display time may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image is displayed for 4 seconds from timing t11 to timing t15 at the shortest and for 24 seconds from timing t11 to timing t35 at the longest. Especially when the longest display period is selected, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area becomes difficult or invisible due to the smoke image regardless of the operation mode of the left lever 3720 for the second time. .

Incidentally, the technical idea related to the "suddenly tank effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 338 to 354 may be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the "full breakthrough reach". For example, it may be configured such that the display time of the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach" is different depending on whether or not the big hit state or the time saving state occurs.

Although an example of displaying a smoke image is shown when the player is unable to perform an appropriate operation while the operation instruction is being displayed, it is possible to perform an appropriate operation instead of always displaying these images. If not, these images may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2).
When the special lottery result is a loss, the smoke image is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 3/4), and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the smoke image is not displayed. It may be configured as
Further, a plurality of modes may be provided for the color and shape of the smoke image, and the degree of expectation for the special lottery result may be suggested by the display mode of the displayed smoke image.

Another embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 355 etc. will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359. FIG. FIG. 358 is a time chart in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 359 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, instead of displaying a group of tanks, an effect is executed from timing t24 to timing t29 in which a minefield is displayed on the road on which one's own tank travels. FIG. 359(a) shows a display example at timing t29, which is the timing when the display of the minefield is started. From timing t24 to timing t29, a display is made in which the own tank approaches the minefield.

At timing t26, acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid. The operation valid period of the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, the process continues until timing t29. In addition, during the operation valid period of the mission button 3700, a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dina". FIG. 359(b) shows a display example at timing t26 when the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 358(c), when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period (timing t28), the own tank jumps and jumps over the advancing minefield. is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 359(c) shows a display example at the timing (for example, timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period and the display of jumping the own tank ends. This display continues until timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 359(d) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped.

FIG. 358(d) shows an effect example when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. In this case, from timing t29, which is the timing at which the valid operation period ends, to timing t35, a smoke image with a higher display priority than the own tank is displayed, and the own tank enters the minefield and is enveloped in smoke. A performance display is performed. FIG. 359(e) shows a display example from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 359(f) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area is hidden by the smoke image.

In this way, when the mission button 3700 is properly operated, the visibility of the stationary decorative pattern is not hindered. The visibility of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed by the image is obstructed. Therefore, the player will be more nervous about operating the mission button 3700 .

Note that the modification shown with reference to FIG. 355(c) may also be applied to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. In this case, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700, and the display mode of the tank jumping are difficult to see due to the smoke generated by the shells of the enemy tank group. or become invisible. As a result, the feeling of tension with respect to the operation of left lever 3720 is increased.

Thus, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within a predetermined operation range, the decorative pattern stop display mode (or The visibility of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700, and the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be hindered by the smoke image. The player will feel nervous about the operation of the left lever 3720, and will be motivated to operate the left lever 3720 positively, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

An example of displaying a smoke image with a predetermined probability (probability of 1/2) when the operation of the left lever 3720 is inappropriate has been described. , the probability of displaying a smoke image may be different. For example, when the tilting direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operation time is shorter than a predetermined time, the shorter the operation time, the more easily the smoke image is displayed. In addition, the smoke image may be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100% when no operation is performed or when an operation in the direction opposite to the direction indicated by the operation is performed.

It should be noted that the visibility mode of the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, and the like may be completely invisible by the smoke image, or may be partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a semi-transparent image may be used as the smoke image so that the operation instruction image, the decorative pattern, and the like may be vaguely visible through the semi-transparent smoke image. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the operation instruction image and the decorative pattern is ensured to a certain extent.

A display effect (such as displaying a predetermined character image) with an expectation level of 100% and a very low appearance probability can be executed, and the timing at which this display effect is executed is set to the timing at which a smoke image can be displayed. good too. In addition, it may be configured such that part or all of this display effect is invisible or difficult to see due to the smoke image. In this case, this display effect may be hidden by the smoke image, which is a very unfortunate game situation for the player. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to keep the player more nervous when operating the operating means.

Although the visibility of the reach mode of the decorative pattern is hindered by the smoke image, the display time of the smoke image may be set so that the display of the smoke image ends before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. good. For example, the display of the smoke image may end at timing t34, and the smoke image may not be displayed during the period from timing t34 to timing t35. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern is not hindered by the smoke image, so that the result of the special lottery is a loss even though the statically displayed decorative pattern indicates a big win. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands, or the player misunderstands that the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed indicates a loss, but that it is a big hit.

Alternatively, even when the smoke image is displayed, it may be configured such that the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern may or may not be hindered. For example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 may be executed so that the statically displayed decorative pattern may or may not be hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, if the time the left lever 3720 was tilted was less than half of the required operating time, then the stationary decorative symbols remain hidden by the smoke image and the time the left lever 3720 was tilted. is more than half of the required operation time, the statically displayed decorative pattern may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t34). With such a configuration, the player can operate the left lever 3720 with more tension.

The variable display of the decorative pattern may be made invisible or difficult to be visually recognized over a plurality of times of variable display by the smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be set to 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns. Alternatively, the display time of the smoke image may be modified from the lottery mode described above and the display time of the smoke image may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds. is ignored twice (timing t7 to timing t11, timing t24 to timing t32) and the left lever 3720 is not tilted, such a smoke image is displayed with a high probability (probability of 99/100). It should be configured as follows.
In this case, during the period (timing t32-timing t34) in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed and the period (timing t34-timing t35) in which the decorative pattern is statically displayed, the decorative pattern is hidden by the smoke image to improve visibility. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the stationary display of the decorative symbols starting after the timing t35 are performed multiple times, respectively, and the visibility may be obstructed by the smoke image.
In this case, for the purpose of consistency as an effect, it is preferable to continue the "full-strength breakthrough reach" even after timing t35. In this case, the player is requested to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Further, when the display of the smoke image straddles the variable display of the decorative pattern in this way, the operation of the left lever 3720 is disabled even during the stoppage of the variable display of the decorative pattern or immediately after the start of the variable display (between the timing t0 and the timing t5). First, the effective operation period is set to 7, which continues over a plurality of variable displays, so that an effect display (such as a change in the speed display in the speed display window) based on the reception of the operation of the left lever 3720 can be performed at any time. may be configured.

In the drawing, the speed of the own tank is displayed in the display area, but the tilted direction or tilted angle of the left lever 3720 may be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the elapsed time after the left lever 3720 is tilted at the required angle under the condition that the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is being performed. With such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is operated within an appropriate range and how many seconds the left lever 3720 is operated within an appropriate range.

A simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and an operation instruction is displayed by the words "Colonel Dyna". An effect pattern requiring tilting operation of the left lever 3720 may be executed without displaying a clear operation instruction display by image display. For example, the fact that an enemy tank is approaching from behind can be indicated by displaying a state in which a shell is fired from behind, and the player can voluntarily tilt the left lever 3720 without displaying an operation instruction. may be configured to allow By constructing the game so that a game situation with a higher degree of difficulty can occur in this way, it is possible to further heighten the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720 .

The player may not be able to properly recognize whether the left lever 3720 is properly maintained within a predetermined operating range. Therefore, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built in the left lever 3720 . For example, the vibration source may be vibrated for 0.5 seconds when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is moved within the appropriate operation range by the player's operation. Alternatively, left lever vibration source 3722 starts vibrating when the operation range of left lever 3720 moves into the appropriate operation range, and during the period in which the operation range of left lever 3720 is within the appropriate operation range, Vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued, and vibration of the vibration source may be terminated when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is out of the appropriate range.

Also, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is being performed appropriately) is indicated by the display contents in the speed display window. It may be configured so that there is For example, the smoke image may be configured to obscure the speed of the own tank within the speed display window. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player operates the left lever 3720 with more tension.

An example of tilting the left lever 3720 forward has been shown, but in order to make the operation more difficult, the range in which the lever should be operated is limited to around 30 degrees forward (for example, the range from 25 degrees to 35 degrees), If it is completely tilted forward 45 degrees, smoke will come out of the tank's engine with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability), and the smoke image shown in FIG. 357(d) or FIG. 357(g) will be displayed. It may be configured such that the image of the own tank and the operation instruction display are hidden by this smoke image. In this case, the player is required to perform operations with a higher degree of difficulty, making it possible to heighten the sense of tension. In addition, when such an embodiment is adopted, it is possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to an appropriate range at any time during the period in which the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359, if the left lever 3720 cannot be properly operated, a smoke image is displayed, impeding the visibility of the operation instruction of the mission button 3700. It is configured as follows. Further, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the smoke image obstructs the visibility of the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (the display mode in which the own tank jumps). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of tension with respect to the operation of left lever 3720 .

Further, the type of display mode of a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, the display mode and type of the dialogue itself of “Colonel Dina” that instructs the operation mode of the mission button 3700, and the type of dialogue itself when the mission button 3700 is operated. Depending on the type of display mode in which the tank jumps, an operation corresponding image may be displayed that indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within an appropriate operating range, the visibility of the display indicating the degree of expectation may or may not be hindered by the smoke image. It will happen. Therefore, the player who wants to know the degree of expectation naturally operates the left lever 3720 with a sense of urgency, thereby realizing an improvement in interest.
It should be noted that the technical idea suggesting the degree of expectation in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIGS. It may be applied to a display mode of a simulated image, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, an image of an enemy tank group, an image of a minefield, and the like. For example, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state or the time saving state may be indicated by the display mode of these images in the "full power breakthrough reach". Also, the technical idea related to the shield image in the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to the smoke image in the "full breakthrough reach".

Although the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested after the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is completed, the operation of the mission button 3700 may be requested while the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is being requested. With such a configuration, the operation difficulty of the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700 is increased, and the tension of the player can be increased. It should be noted that when both operation instruction displays are performed at the same time, it is preferable to display the operation instruction displays in such a manner that they do not overlap each other. For example, the display form shown in FIG. 356(b) and the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 in the display form shown in FIG. If the area available for display in the display area is insufficient, one of the simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 may be placed on the front side and one of the simulated images may be placed on the back side. are superimposed and displayed so that part of the simulated image displayed behind is visible.

By the way, if the degree of difficulty is increased too much, there is a risk that players who are not good at complicated operations will shy away from playing the game. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player, an auto reception mode is adopted in which the same effect display as when there is an appropriate operation by the player is performed, and the operation of the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700 are not performed. Even in such a case, the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation may be executed. In this case, the player only has to concentrate on operating the operation unit that has not been set to the automatic reception mode.
It should be noted that it is preferable that only the operation of the left lever 3720 can be set to the auto reception mode, only the operation of the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto reception mode, or both the operations of the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto reception mode.
In particular, when only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only has to concentrate on operating the left lever 3720 well, which may confuse the player who is not accustomed to the "all-out reach". can prevent the occurrence of Also, when both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 are set to the auto reception mode, the player can concentrate on visually recognizing the effect without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700. .

In addition to left lever 3720, right lever 3730 may be configured to be operable. For example, in the operation of the right lever 3730, it is preferable to make it a condition for executing the effect mode that the right lever 3730 is tilted within a predetermined tilting range for a predetermined period of time, similarly to the left lever 3720. For example, it is preferable to perform an effect display in which dust appears from caterpillars that represent the manner in which the own tank is accelerating. In this case, it is preferable that an image (simulated image or the like) for instructing the operation of right lever 3730 is not displayed.
In this manner, the right lever 3730 may be set to a presentation mode in which the presentation display based on the operation of the left lever 3720 looks gorgeous. Therefore, the operation instruction is not displayed, and the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730 does not suggest the degree of expectation.
It is preferable that the operation effective period of the right lever 3730 is matched with the operation effective period of the left lever 3720 .
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a higher sense of tension for the player who is tired of operating the left lever.

Furthermore, it is difficult to operate the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 with one hand at the same time. It should be installed in a position where it is not possible to That is, since one operation part is operated with one hand, the tension of the game can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the three operating sections, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and mission button 3700, can be operated simultaneously. It can make you feel nervous.
In the operating section shown in FIG. 301, since the attack button 3710 is provided between the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720 and the distance is large, it is extremely difficult to operate both operating sections with one hand. Impossible. On the other hand, left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions where the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 are provided may be exchanged. In this case, since the defense button 3740 is positioned between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operating sections with one hand.

Although an embodiment in which the left lever 3720 is used for a predetermined effect has been shown, a right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720 . Both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be configured to be capable of accepting operations, and the above-described display effects and the like may be executed when the operation of either lever satisfies the above-described conditions.

In this way, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the tension of operating the operation unit.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, an effect of pressing one operation unit in a game machine has been known. In this case, by providing a plurality of operation units and using the operation units for presentation, the game interest can be improved (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-087638). Furthermore, when the operation to a plurality of operation units is enabled at the same time, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced. On the other hand, a player who wants a simple game may feel troublesome or stressed by the requirement of such a complicated operation mode, and may rather lose interest in the game. A gaming machine that satisfies each of the players having different tastes in this way and prevents the interest from being lowered in any case will be described below.

In the "AI tank reach" of this embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may be enabled at the same time at a predetermined timing during the display effect. The player can set whether or not to display the simulated image and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 indicating the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 .
The player sets in advance a first setting (first effect situation) for displaying both a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, and displays only the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. a second setting (second rendering situation) to display only a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 (third rendering situation); a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700; The player can select and set any one of the four settings (production situations) of the fourth setting (fourth production situation) in which both of the simulated images are not displayed. .
Selection by the player is configured to be performed using the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, etc. during the demonstration during which the decorative symbols are not changing. Also, when the power is turned on when no selection is made by the player, the first setting is selected by default.

When the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 occurs during the variable display of the decoration pattern, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulation simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed in a mode corresponding to the setting selected by the player. An image is displayed. For example, when the player selects the third setting, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

360 to 365 for "AI tank reach", depending on whether or not the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is operated when the first to fourth settings are made. A display example will be described.

FIG. 360(a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which a first setting (first rendering situation) is made and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed.
FIG. 362 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 360(a) and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed. It is a diagram.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 360(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 362(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might" that instruct the operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11). FIG. 362(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. At the timing when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 also ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 362(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 362(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image is displayed in which a cannonball hits an enemy tank and explodes. The display of movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 362(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 362(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation valid period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 360(b) shows an embodiment in which the second setting (second rendering situation) is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. Chart.
FIG. 363 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 360(b), in which the second setting is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a figure which shows a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 360(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 363(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the words "Sergeant Might" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 are displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. can't break FIG. 363(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 363(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. FIG. 363(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image is displayed in which a cannonball hits an enemy tank and explodes. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 363(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 363(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and the bullet exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 361(a) shows an embodiment in which a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. Chart.
FIG. 364 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 361(a), in which the third setting is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a figure which shows a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 361(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 364(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the line "Colonel Dina" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700 is displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. will be FIG. 364(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 364(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 364(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 364(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 364(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 361(b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth rendering situation) is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
FIG. 365 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 361(b) and shows a display state in which the fourth setting is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. is.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 361(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 365(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), display of a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and display of a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are not performed. FIG. 365(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 365(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. FIG. 365(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image is displayed in which a cannonball hits an enemy tank and explodes. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 365(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 365(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

The operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 are the same. At this time, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the setting selected by the player. In addition, corresponding to the display of these simulated images, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" also change to indicate the manner of operation instructions. When the operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the operation valid period ends. Therefore, when the operation of one of attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 is accepted, the effect display corresponding to the operation of the other operation unit is not performed.

An image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, an image of an exploding cannonball, or the like may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. In this case, it is preferable to apply various modes of suggesting degree of expectation in the “shield bullet reach” shown with reference to FIGS. 308 to 312 to the display effect in this embodiment.
As for the display mode of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the image of the exploding bullet, it is preferable to adopt the same mode of displaying the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the image of the exploding shell.

As described above, according to the "AI tank reach" of the present embodiment, the effect situation in which a simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed and the simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed based on the intention of the player. Since an effect situation in which the game is not performed is realized, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

An example in which the player can select the first to fourth settings has been shown. The setting may be changed while the door of the door frame 3 is open. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the settings according to the customer base of the amusement arcade, the location situation, the number of days that have passed since the introduction, and the like, thereby providing the player with the optimum gaming environment. It should be noted that the settings made by the game arcade may be effective only when power is turned on to the game machine, and the settings may be changed by the player thereafter.

A first setting in which display of a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not restricted by the operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the defense button 3740) operable by the player; Any one of the second to fourth settings, in which the display of the simulated image imitating the button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is restricted, is alternately switched. good too. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, by operating the defense button 3740 once, the setting is switched to the first setting, and the player can operate the defense button 3740 again. , may be configured to be the second setting again. Note that when the player has selected the first setting, even if the defense button 3740 is operated, the state in which the first setting is selected continues. For example, when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t14) during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the setting may be switched. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the setting cannot be switched during the operation valid period (the period during which the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly switch to a setting in which both simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed.

If the setting can be switched by the player with a simple operation, the player may be dissatisfied, for example, if the setting is switched just by pressing a button by mistake. Therefore, a configuration may be employed in which switching of settings is not easily executed. For example, it may be configured such that the setting is switched when a specific condition regarding operation such as holding down the defense button 3740 for 3 seconds is satisfied.

When the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), if the setting is the second setting to the fourth setting, the setting is automatically changed to the first setting, which is the default setting. You may make it By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who has started playing a game from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in settings.

An example has been shown in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated at the same time, and when one of the buttons is operated, the operation valid period of the other button ends. may be configured so that the operation effective period of the other button is not terminated even when is operated. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, after the effect display corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 (shooting, moving, and exploding shells) is started, , the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (bullet shooting/movement/explosion display) may be started.

It may be configured such that only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid and the case of only the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display the simulated image of the button whose operation is valid based on the setting. Alternatively, without being limited to the setting, it may be configured to display a simulated image of the operation means whose operation is valid. If there is only one operating unit for which the operation is valid, it is assumed that the player will not find it difficult to operate the buttons, so it is useful to adopt such a method.

Instead of activating the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 at the same time, for example, in a situation where one operation unit is valid, the other operation unit may be valid. In this case as well, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image simulating the operation unit based on the settings.

The attack button 3710 may be enabled after the mission button 3700 is enabled. Here, when the attack button 3710 is activated while the image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (the image in which the bullet is moving) is displayed, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed. It may be configured not to display. By adopting such a configuration, information can be prevented from being excessive, and the stress felt by the player can be reduced.

Before or at the same time as the valid operation period occurs, a sound effect indicating that the valid operation period has started or is in the valid operation period may be output. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output at timings (from timing t7 to timing t8 and from timing t22 to timing t23) before the operation valid period starts. Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the operation valid period occurs (timing t8 to timing t9, timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, even if the effective period of operation occurs, if the simulated image of the operation part is set not to be displayed, it is preferable that the effect sound indicating that the effective period of operation has occurred is not output for the operation part. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling confused. On the other hand, when an operation is performed, it is preferable to configure so that a predetermined sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being lowered.

Depending on the selected settings, a rendering situation in which one simulated button-like image is displayed, and an rendered situation in which two button-like simulated images are displayed can occur. At this time, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than when two simulated images are displayed.
With such a configuration, the display area can be effectively used. In addition, a player who does not select to display a plurality of simulated images may not notice that the simulated images are displayed due to their age. It is possible to notice the fact that it has not happened, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the third operation unit (defense button 3740) is used, and both the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and the second operation unit (mission button 3700) can accept operations, and the first operation unit can be simulated. In a first effect situation in which both an image (display related to operation of the first operation section) and a simulated image of the second operation section (display related to operation of the second operation section) are displayed, the player operates the third operation section. is operated, a special display may appear that makes it difficult to visually recognize both the displayed simulated image of the first operating section and the simulated image of the second operating section.
This special display notifies the player who operates the third operation part in a situation where the operation of the first operation part or the second operation part is actually performed that the operation is erroneous. It is possible to suggest In addition, it is considered that the player who operates the third operation part intentionally performs such an action in a situation where the simulated image of the first operation part and the simulated image of the second operation part are clearly displayed. Therefore, in order for a special display to be displayed to such an intentional player, the condition for the appearance of the display is not limited to the fact that the third operation section is simply operated. It is desirable that the above special display is performed when the third operation unit is operated and the operation time of the third operation unit satisfies a special condition of a predetermined number of seconds or more.

As described above, according to the “AI tank reach” of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the effects related to the display mode of the simulated image.

Conventionally, at the timing before the operation to the operation part becomes effective, after performing a special premonition effect suggesting that the operation will be effective, the operation part is effective during the period when the operation to the operation part is effective. A simulation image of the operating part showing that the operation part is simulated is displayed, the player is urged to operate the operating part, and based on the operation of the operating part, the special lottery result is expected to be a big win. A game machine that suggests degrees has been known (for example, JP-A-2011-125549).

By performing the special premonition effect in this way, it is shown to the player that the operation to the operation unit can be effective.
However, some players may be distracted by the precursor effect by performing such a precursor effect, and may not be able to display the simulated operation part image indicating that the operation of the operation part is effective, or There is a possibility that the user will be distracted by the operation itself, and will not be able to see the simulated image of the operation unit and operate the operation unit with sufficient time.
For example, among skilled players, there are some players who want to concentrate on operating the operation unit rather than visually recognizing the precursor effect and enjoying it as a effect. This is because the player only visually recognizes the premonition effect, but the player concentrates on operating the operation unit with the hope that the player will make a big win. . However, there is a risk that such a concentration of consciousness will be disturbed by the portent effect performed before the effective period occurs.
On the other hand, players with little game experience may not understand the implications of various effects including the precursor effects, and may not be aware that the simulated operation part image indicating that the operation to the operation part is valid has been displayed. There is a risk that a situation may occur in which the operation unit cannot be operated immediately, and the opportunity to intervene in the performance is lost.

In this way, the premonition effect, which is relatively unimportant for the player, prevents the player from concentrating on the act of operating the operation unit, which is relatively important for the player, or indicates that the operation of the operation unit is effective. There is a risk that the user may not be able to notice the display of the operation unit simulated image shown.
In the embodiments described below, the visibility of the precursor effect can be lowered according to the player's own intention, and a simulated operation part image indicating that the operation of the operation part is valid is displayed. 4 shows an example in which the user can concentrate on the operation of the operation unit.

366, 367, 368, etc., modified embodiments of the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIG. 308 and the like will be described below.
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing a time chart in this embodiment. 366 and 368 are diagrams showing display examples in the display area.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set the display mode of the precursor effect during the demonstration. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes) has passed without the decorative symbols shown in FIG. Control is performed to shift to the indicated display state. FIG. 366(a) shows a display example during the demonstration. When the attack button 3710 is pressed from the display state shown in FIG. 303 or the display state shown in FIG. 366(a), the display state changes to that shown in FIG. 366(b). As shown in FIGS. 366(a) to 366(c), the decoration pattern in this case is displayed in the upper left of the display area in the state of being displayed in a stationary state, in a smaller size than during the variable display.

FIG. 366(b) shows a display state in which the display mode of the precursor effect can be set. In this state, by operating the left lever 3720 in the horizontal direction, it is possible to select one of the settings of "normal display", "small display", and "no display". The frame corresponding to the selected setting is displayed thick. Also, the dialogue displayed in the dialogue window of "Sgt. Might" shows the player how to select the settings. It should be noted that "normal display" is automatically selected when the game machine is powered on.

FIG. 366(c) shows a display state in which the left lever 3720 is tilted rightward to change from the state in which "normal display" is selected to the state in which "small display" is selected. By operating the attack button 3710 again in this state, the display state shown in FIG. 366(a) is restored. At the same time, the setting content selected by the player (in this case, the setting content of displaying the precursor effect in a small size) is stored in the peripheral control board 1510 . In this way, the player can select one of the display settings with different visibility of the precursor effect.
Note that when the player selects "do not display", similar display and storage processing of the selected setting contents are performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 367 and 368, a description will be given of the display mode when the portent effect is executed. FIG. 367(a) shows the changing state of the decorative pattern and the state of accepting the operation of the attack button 3710 (whether the acceptance of the operation is valid or invalid). FIGS. 367(b) and 367(c) show the display state of the cheering dialogue image, the simulated attack button image, the enemy tank image, etc. when "normal display" is selected. Note that, in the present embodiment, the display of the cheering speech image functions as an omen effect. FIGS. 368(a) to 368(d) are display examples of the display area when "normal display" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 367, the cheering speech image is displayed for six seconds from timing t13 to timing t19. As the images of cheering words, four images of cheering words of "<get lost~", "<do your best~", "get lost~>", and "do your best~>" are displayed. The two cheering dialogue images, "<Hazero~" and "<Ganbare~", appear from the left end of the display area, move horizontally to the right within the display area, and exit the display area at the right end of the display area. and move. On the other hand, the two cheering lines images, "Let's get away~>" and "Ganbare~>", appear from the right end of the display area, move horizontally to the left within the display area, and reach the left end of the display area. move outside. Also, from timing t13, the image of the enemy tank is displayed moving from the right end to the left end of the display area.

FIG. 368(a) shows a display example at timing t14, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image has just started. FIG. 368(b) shows a display example at timing t16, which is the timing when the cheering speech image is displayed in the middle stage. FIG. 368(c) shows a display example at timing t18, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering words image has reached its final stage. As shown in the display example, the cheering speech image moves horizontally to the right or left.

Simultaneously with the end of the display of the cheering dialogue image at timing t19, an operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 368(d) shows a state (for example, a display state at timing t20) in which an operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. After the end of the display of the cheering dialogue image, as in the embodiment shown for "shield bullet reach", display of the simulated operation part image simulating the attack button 3710, the start of the operation valid period, the operation of the attack button 3710 and the operation valid A destruction image is displayed based on the end of the period, and the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested. FIG. 367(b) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t21. Also, FIG. 367(c) shows a display state when the valid operation period ends at timing t22.

Next, a display example when "small display" is selected will be described. FIG. 367(d) is a time chart when "small display" is selected. FIGS. 368(e) to 368(g) are display examples when "small display" is selected.
FIG. 368(e) shows the display state at timing t14. FIG. 368(f) shows the display state at timing t16. FIG. 368(g) shows the display state at timing t18.
As shown in FIGS. 368(e) to 368(g), when "small display" is selected, the cheering dialogue image is displayed smaller than when "normal display" is selected, and is visually recognized. considered a difficult situation.

Next, a display example when "do not display" is selected will be described. FIG. 367(e) is a time chart when "do not display" is selected. When "not display" is selected, only the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the display area, and the cheering dialogue image is not displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19.
When "do not display" is selected in this manner, the cheering dialogue image is not displayed unlike when "normal display" or "small display" is selected.

In this way, the setting by the player during the demonstration can take three states: a state in which the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) is displayed, a state in which it is displayed in a small size, and a state in which it is not displayed. , it is possible to execute an effect mode that suits the taste of the player. For example, a player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display can make the special precursor display difficult or invisible to display and operate the simulated operation unit image simulating the first operation unit (attack button 3710). You can concentrate on the operation of the part.

By the way, in the above-described embodiment, it was limited to during the demonstration that the visual recognition mode of the omen effect could be changed. Therefore, when trying to change the visual recognition mode of the omen effect, it is necessary to temporarily set the number of reservations to 0 so that the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner. There was a possibility that the tempo of the game would be spoiled by feeling troublesome or setting the number of reservations to 0.

Therefore, an embodiment modified so as to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the omen effect during the variable display of the decorative symbols will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 369 and the like.

FIGS. 369(a) to 369(c) are time charts showing effects similar to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 367(a) to 367(c). In other words, the variable display of decorative patterns, simulated image of the operation part of the attack button 3710, image of destroying the enemy tank, and effective period of operation are performed in the same manner.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 369(d), the defense button 3740 is pressed from the timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect is started to the timing t27 after the destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. operation is valid. Then, when a specific condition regarding the operation of the defense button 3740 is satisfied (details of which will be described later, when a long press or repeated hits are detected), the normal display of the cheering dialogue image is changed to a small display state. Alternatively, it is possible to change to a non-display state.

FIG. 369(e) is a time chart when "small display" is selected in the setting during demonstration. At timing t13, after the cheering dialogue image is displayed, the player long presses the defense button 3740, and the cheering dialogue image is displayed in a small size on condition that the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering words image is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 368(a) to the display state shown in FIG. 368(e) while the cheering words image is being displayed.

FIG. 369(f) is a time chart when "do not display" is selected in the setting during demonstration. At timing t13, after the cheering words image is displayed, the player long presses the defense button 3740, and the cheering words image is not displayed on condition that the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering words image is changed from the normal display state shown in FIG.

The display state in which the cheering dialogue image is displayed in a small size and the display state in which the cheering dialogue image is not displayed are configured to continue while the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected.
Alternatively, once the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, even if the player releases the defense button 3740, the cheering dialogue image is displayed in a small size until timing t19, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image ends. The state where the cheering dialogue image is displayed or the state where the cheering dialogue image is not displayed may be continued.

In addition, by pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time in advance during the period from timing t5 at which the operation effective period of the defense button 3740 is started to timing t13 at which the display of the cheering dialogue image is started, the cheering dialogue can be displayed. From timing t13, which is the timing at which the display of the image is started, it is possible to display the cheering dialogue image in a small size or not to display the cheering dialogue image in the first place.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the special sign display (supporting dialogue image) is set in advance during the demonstration, and the ready-to-win effect is generated during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the first operation unit ( The second operation unit (defense button 3740) is operated at any timing when there is a possibility that a special warning display (supporting dialogue image) will be displayed to suggest that the attack button 3710) will be operable. Then, the player can select the display mode of the special omen display during the variable display of the decorative symbols. For example, when the player does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display, the visibility of the special precursor display is reduced to make it difficult to see or to make it invisible. You can concentrate your attention on the display and operation of the operation unit.

The display mode of the cheering dialogue image may be changed when the defense button 3740 is repeatedly hit, instead of when the defense button 3740 is pressed for a long time.

Instead of providing a function for setting the display mode of the cheering dialogue image during the demonstration as shown in FIG. good too. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the cheering words image is not displayed.

308 and the like, an embodiment in which a shield image is displayed by operating the defense button 3740 is shown. An embodiment modified to be hidden is shown below.

With reference to FIGS. 369(a) to 369(d), 369(g) to 369(h), and 370, an image (first shield image) hiding the special sign display (supporting dialogue image) is displayed. An embodiment modified to display will be described. In this embodiment, based on the operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), an image (first shield image ) is displayed to hide the cheering words image, thereby lowering the visibility of the cheering words image and making it difficult or invisible.

FIG. 369(g) is a time chart showing the display state of the first shield image when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this production example). The display period of the first shield image is predetermined to be 6 seconds. In this production example, it is displayed for 6 seconds from timing t14 to timing t20. In addition, it is not necessary to continuously press the defense button 3740 for a long time. After the long press is detected and the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image will not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is released. Continued.

FIG. 370(a) shows a display example at timing t14, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image has just started. FIG. 370(b) shows a display example at timing t16, which is the timing when the cheering speech image is displayed in the middle stage. FIG. 370(c) shows a display example at timing t18, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering dialogue image has reached its final stage. FIG. 370(d) shows a display example from timing t19 when the attack button 3710 is activated to timing t20.

FIG. 370(e) shows a display example when the first shield image is displayed at timing t14. FIG. 370(f) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t16. FIG. 370(g) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t18. FIG. 370(h) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIGS. 370(e) to 370(h), the size and display position of the first shield image do not change. Therefore, the precursor effect can be hidden without making the first shield image itself conspicuous, and the player can carefully wait for the timing when the simulated operation part image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. The color of the first shield image should be an inconspicuous color such as gray. Also, it is preferable that the display mode of the first shield image does not suggest the degree of expectation for the special lottery result. It should be noted that, similarly to the embodiment relating to the "shield bullet reach", it is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation is indicated by the simulated image of the operation unit or the destruction image of the enemy tank. At this time, a plurality of different expectations may be displayed depending on the color of the simulated image of the operation unit and the destroyed image of the enemy tank. Also, the display priority of the destruction image may be higher or lower than the display priority of the first shield image. If the display priority of the destructive image is set higher than the display priority of the first shield image, even if part or all of the destructive image overlaps the first shield image, it will be displayed in front of it. . When the display priority of the destructive image is set lower than that of the first shield image, part or all of the destructive image may be displayed without being hidden by the first shield image.
These points about the first shield image may be adopted in the second shield image described later.

As shown in FIG. 370(h), between the first shield image and the simulated operation unit image imitating the attack button 3710, the simulated operation unit image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the first shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the simulated operation part image is not hindered, and rather the visibility of the simulated operation part image is improved.

In this way, by displaying an image (first shield image) that hides the special precursor display (cheering speech image) at the player's will, and by configuring the special precursor display to be partially or wholly hidden, A player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display lowers the visibility of the special precursor display to make it difficult to see or to make it invisible. You can concentrate on the display of and the operation of the first operation unit.
In addition, since the simulated operation part image imitating the first operation part (attack button 3710) does not become difficult or invisible, it does not interfere with the progress of the game using the first operation part.

An embodiment in which the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 has been shown with reference to FIG. 369(g). It may be configured as FIG. 369(h) shows an effect example in which repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected at timing t14 and the first shield image is displayed until timing t20. Note that in this case also, the display examples shown in FIGS.

The size of the first shield image may be different. 371(a) to 371(d) refer to FIGS. 369(a) to 369(d), 369(g), 369(h), 370(e) to 370(h) 10 is a display example in an embodiment in which the size of the first shield image is modified in the embodiment shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the size of the first shield image is reduced. Also, the display position is slightly higher. FIGS. 371(a) to 371(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. In the present embodiment, the cheering words images "<get lost~" and "get lost~>" are rendered invisible or invisible by the first shield image. On the other hand, the cheering words images "<Do your best~" and "Do your best~>" are not rendered invisible or invisible by the first shield image.

In this way, the visibility of a portion of the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) is reduced by the first shield image, making it difficult or invisible, and the visibility of the other portion of the special precursor display is reduced. It may be configured so that it is not made visible or invisible.

A plurality of shield images may be configured to be displayable. 369(i), 371(e) to 371(h) are shown in FIGS. 369(a) to 369(d), 369(g), 369(h), and 371(a) to 371(d) is a time chart and a display example showing an embodiment modified so that a plurality of shield images can be displayed in the embodiment shown with reference to 371(d). In this embodiment, after the first shield image is displayed when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, the second shield image is displayed when the long press of the defense button is detected again. It is configured as follows. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.
In the drawing, the first shield image is indicated by diagonal lines sloping to the right, and the second shield image is indicated by slanting lines ascending to the right.

FIG. 369(i) is a time chart showing a display state in which a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15, and shows a state in which the second shield image is displayed for six seconds until timing t21. FIGS. 371(e) to 371(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In FIG. 371(e), although the images of the cheering lines "<Let's go~" and "Let's go~" are made invisible by the first shield image, "<Let's do our best~" and "Let's do our best~>" The cheering dialogue image is shown in a state in which it is easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In FIG. 371(f), in addition to the first shield image, the display of the second shield image is started, and the images of cheering words "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~>" are invisible due to the second shield image. is shown.
In FIG. 371(g), the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the cheering words "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~>" are rendered invisible by the second shield image. It is shown.
FIG. 371(h) shows a state in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and a simulation image of an operation section simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. ing. As shown in FIG. 371(h), between the second shield image and the simulated operation unit image imitating the attack button 3710, the simulated operation unit image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the simulated operation unit image is not hindered.

The width of the second shield image is slightly longer than that of the first shield image. Also, the second shield image does not move like the first shield image. Also, the color of the second shield image should be gray like the first shield image. Furthermore, the colors of the first shield image and the second shield image may be gray with the same brightness, or may be gray with different brightness.

After the first shield image is displayed by long-pressing the defense button 3740, the second shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for a predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to display both the first shield image and the second shield image simply by continuing to press the defense button 3740 .
On the other hand, after the defense button 3740 is long-pressed to display the first shield image, the player temporarily releases the defense button 3740 so that it is not pressed, and then the defense button 3740 is pressed again for a predetermined period. A second shield image may be displayed if the shielding continues. With such a configuration, the degree of difficulty in displaying the second shield image increases. It becomes easy for the player to intentionally create any of

In this way, a plurality of images (first shield image, second shield image) for concealing the special sign display (supporting speech image) are prepared, and these are stepped by the operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740) as a trigger. By displaying it, the special precursor display is not suddenly hidden, so even if the player mistakenly operates the second operation unit, part of the special precursor display can be maintained in an easy-to-recognize state. . In addition, it is possible to realize a display mode that matches the preferences of the player.

Although the embodiment in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed by one operation unit (defense button 3740) has been described, a plurality of shields corresponding to a plurality of operation units (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700) can be displayed. A modified embodiment in which images (a first shield image and a second shield image) are displayed is described below. 369(j), 369(k), 371(e) to 371(h) are shown in FIGS. 369(a) to 369(d), 369(g), 369(h) and FIG. 371( a ) to 371 ( d ) are time charts and display examples showing modified embodiments of the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS.
In the present embodiment, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, in addition to the defense button 3740, operation reception of the mission button 3700 is enabled. Also, when a pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is detected, a second shield image is displayed. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.

FIG. 369(j) is a time chart showing the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 and the display state when the operation of pressing the mission button 3700 is not detected.
FIG. 369(k) shows a state in which the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is detected at timing t15, and the second shield image is displayed for six seconds until timing t21. FIGS. 371(e) to 371(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In FIG. 371(e), although the images of the cheering words "<Let's go~" and "Let's go~" are made invisible by the first shield image, "<Let's do our best~" and "Let's do our best~>" The cheering dialogue image is shown in a state in which it is easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In FIG. 371(f), in addition to the first shield image, the display of the second shield image is started, and the images of cheering words "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~>" are invisible due to the second shield image. is shown.
In FIG. 371(g), the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the cheering words "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~>" are rendered invisible by the second shield image. It is shown.
FIG. 371(h) shows a state in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and an operation section simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. ing. As shown in FIG. 371(h), between the second shield image and the simulated operation unit image imitating the attack button 3710, the simulated operation unit image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the simulated operation unit image is not hindered.

Triggered by the operation of the plurality of operation units, that is, the second operation button and the third operation button (the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700), a plurality of images that hide different positions in the special sign display (supporting dialogue image) are displayed. (the first shield image and the second shield image) are configured to be displayable, so that the degree to which the special precursor display is hidden and the position of the special precursor display to be hidden can be selected according to the player's preference. can.
In addition, by displaying the simulated operation unit image that simulates the first operation unit (attack button 3710) in front of the second shield image, the simulated operation unit image does not become difficult or invisible. It does not hinder the progress of the game using.

With reference to FIGS. 369 to 371 and the like, an embodiment has been described in which the special precursor display (supporting speech image) can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image. An embodiment in which these images and the like are transformed will be described below with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373. FIG. The behavior of the game machine other than the image display is the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 369 to 371 and the like.

FIGS. 372(a) to 372(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, the first shield image has a horizontally long rectangular shape and has a hole in the center through which an image displayed behind can be visually recognized. Also, the second shield image has a laterally long donut shape.
FIG. 372(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the drawing, the cheering dialogue image becomes invisible or invisible due to the first shield image. The display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the first shield image.
FIGS. 372(b) and 372(c) are display examples showing a state in which the second shield image is displayed in addition to the first shield image.
FIG. 372(d) is a display example showing a state in which the valid operation period has occurred while the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the drawing, an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area.

The second shield image may have an elliptical shape instead of a donut shape, and may be deformed so that the area behind the hole in the center of the first shield image is invisible. FIGS. 372(e) and 372(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in FIG. 372(f), a simulated image of an operation unit simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the second shield image.

FIGS. 373(a) to 373(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, each of the first shield image and the second shield image has a vertically long rectangular shape. Two of each of the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed.
FIG. 373(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the drawing, the cheering dialogue image becomes invisible or invisible due to the first shield image. The display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the shield image.
FIGS. 373(b) and 373(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the shield image.
FIG. 373(d) is a display example showing a state in which an operation effective period has occurred while the shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation unit simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in a region sandwiched between two second shield images.

Although a gap is provided between the two second shield images, it may be modified so that the gap is not provided. FIGS. 373(e) and 373(f) show display examples from timing t18 and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in FIG. 373(f), a simulation image of an operation unit simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the two second shield images.

Thus, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the simulated operation section image imitating the attack button 3710. It is configured so that the second shield image can be displayed at a close position.
The player can display only the first shield image, display only the second shield image, or display both the first shield image and the second shield image according to his/her preference.

An embodiment has been described in which a cheering dialogue image is displayed as an image to be displayed as a special omen display. A modified embodiment is shown below.

FIG. 374 is a time chart in this embodiment, and more specifically, it is a time chart modified from FIG. As the precursor effect, instead of displaying the cheering speech image, a simulated image in the shape of the attack button 3710 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “simulated precursor image”) is deformed to be displayed in a predetermined manner. However, the operation timing and the like are the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 369 and the like.

FIGS. 375 to 377 are display examples of the precursor effect in this embodiment, and more specifically, are display examples obtained by modifying FIGS. 370 and 371. FIG.
Figures 375(a) to 375(d), Figures 376(a) to 376(d) and Figures 377(a) to 377(d) are shown in Figures 370(a) to 370(d) respectively. It is a display example corresponding to the display example at each of the shown timings (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20).
Similarly, FIGS. 375(e) to 375(h), FIGS. 376(e) to 376(h), and FIGS. 377(e) to 377(h) correspond to FIGS. It is a display example corresponding to the display example at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in h).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 375, an omen simulated image imitating an attack button 3710 is first displayed in 5 rows and 5 columns (FIG. 375(a)). The omen simulated image is opaque, and the image located behind (image of the road, etc.) is invisible. Some simulated precursor images are hidden in serif windows and tank images. Next, as shown in FIG. 375(b), the precursor simulated images are displayed in 3 rows and 3 columns. Then, as shown in FIG. 375(c), only one precursor simulated image is displayed. Simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period of the attack button 3710, as shown in FIG. A simulated image of the operation unit is displayed.

FIGS. 374(e) and 375(e) to 375(h) show that in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. A time chart and a display example when it is detected are shown. In this case, the simulated precursor image is translucently displayed from timing t14 to timing t19. At timing t19, the simulated precursor image becomes opaque at the timing when the valid operation period starts, and the characters "attack" are added, and the simulated operation unit image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed. be done.

Note that, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 374(f), the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 may be configured not to be displayed.

FIGS. 374(g) and 376 show, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 375, that the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 is translucently displayed as the first shield image instead of displaying the simulated precursor image as the first shield image. It is a time chart and a display example showing an embodiment modified to hide with .

FIGS. 376(a), 376(b), 376(c), and 376(d) show timing t14 when the defense button 3740 is not operated and the first shield image is not displayed. , timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 374(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in the case of this production example), a simulated omen image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the front side. 1 shield image is displayed, and part of the precursor simulated image becomes invisible or invisible. FIG. 376(e) shows a display example when the display of the first shield image is started at timing t14. FIGS. 376(f), 376(g), and 376(h) show display examples at timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

Instead of long-pressing defense button 3740, deformation may be made such that the first shield image is displayed when defense button 3740 is repeatedly hit.
FIG. 374(h) shows an example of an effect when repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected instead of the long press of the defense button 3740 .

FIG. 377 is a display example showing an embodiment in which the precursor simulated image shown in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 374(g), 374(h), and 376 is transformed into another precursor simulated image.

As shown in FIGS. 377(a) to 377(c), nine simulated precursor images imitating the attack button 3710 gradually gather slightly left of the center of the display area, and finally, as shown in FIG. 377(d). , and the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 becomes valid. FIG. 377(a) is a display example at timing t14. At this time, each precursor simulated image is displayed at a distant position. FIG. 377(b) is a display example at timing t16, in which each precursor simulated image gradually approaches. FIG. 377(c) is a display example at timing t18. At this time, each of the precursor simulated images is superimposed and displayed on the right side of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might". Each precursor simulated image is displayed with three protrusions like afterimages indicating the direction of movement. At timing t19, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective, the display of each protrusion ends, and the character "attack" is attached to the precursor simulated image, which is displayed as the operation unit simulated image. FIG. 377(d) shows a display example from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 374(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in the case of this production example), a simulated omen image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the front side. 1 shield image is displayed, and part of the precursor simulated image becomes invisible or invisible. FIG. 377(e) shows a display example when the display of the first shield image is started at timing t14. FIGS. 377(f), 377(g), and 377(h) show display examples at timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In this way, even when the simulated precursor image imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is displayed as the special precursor display instead of the cheering dialogue image, the visibility of the special precursor display is reduced. Therefore, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained by making it difficult to see or to make it invisible.

374(a) to 374(h) and FIGS. 375 to 377 (embodiment in which a precursor simulated image is displayed), see FIGS. 369(i) and 371. 374(i) and a display example shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the precursor effect can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.

FIGS. 378(a) to 378(d) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 376(a) to 376(h) modified so as to display the second shield image. showing.
FIG. 374(i) is a time chart when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
FIGS. 378(a), 378(b), 378(c), and 378(d) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

FIGS. 378(e) to 378(h) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 377(a) to 377(h) modified so as to display the second shield image. showing.
FIG. 374(i) is a time chart when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. Note that the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
FIGS. 378(e), 378(f), 378(g), and 378(h) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16 are respectively displayed. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of display in the state where the

374(a) to 374(h) and FIGS. 375 to 377 (embodiment in which a precursor simulated image is displayed), FIGS. ), and an embodiment to which the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 378 and the display example shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, the simulated precursor image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the precursor effect can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.
Also, the second shield image is configured to be displayed when the mission button 3700 is detected to be pressed.

FIGS. 378(a) to 378(d) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 376(a) to 376(h) modified so as to display the second shield image. showing.
As shown in FIGS. 374(j) and 374(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700. FIG.
FIGS. 378(a), 378(b), 378(c), and 378(d) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

FIGS. 378(e) to 378(h) show display examples in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 377(a) to 377(h) modified so as to display the second shield image. showing.
As shown in FIGS. 374(j) and 374(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700. FIG.
FIGS. 378(e), 378(f), 378(g), and 378(h) are display examples in which the first shield image at timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16 are respectively displayed. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of display in the state where the

375, 377, etc., in which the simulated omen image is displayed as the omen effect, the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373 may be adopted.

The embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 374(i) to 374(k) and 378 can also provide the same effect as the embodiment described above.

369 and 374, an embodiment has been shown in which the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed by operating the defense button 3740 and mission button 3700, but the defense button 3740 and mission button 3700 The operation effective period of is from timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect state occurs to timing t27 which is the final stage of the ready-to-win effect state.
Triggered by the operation of the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 by the player, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed at any timing during this period. Also, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds). It is possible to display the first shield image and the second shield image.

For example, although the ready-to-win effect state has occurred at timing t5, a player who does not want to visually recognize the precursor effect can press the defense button 3740 or By operating the mission button 3700, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed, and the premonition effect can be displayed in advance in a state in which it is difficult to see or cannot be seen.

Further, for example, from timing t16 to timing t22, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and at the same time as the operation unit simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 indicating that the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid. can be displayed.
In addition, the display of the first shield image and the second shield image can be continued even after the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 is completed or the effective period of the operation is completed. When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted or when the effective period of operation ends, the degree of expectation for the result of the special lottery is indicated by the mode of the enemy tank destruction image. may be set high so that part or all of the destruction image is hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image.
In this case, the player needs to pay attention to the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image and the timing of starting the display. For example, if the player randomly operates the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 regardless of the progress of the presentation, a display state in which the visibility of the destroyed image is impeded as a penalty may occur. The player seriously operates the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700, and the decrease in interest is suppressed.

Prepare a plurality of simulated images of the operation part according to the degree of expectation, and do not hide the image when the operation is accepted or when the effective period of the operation expires, but continue to display it for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). good too.
For the player who has made at least a part of the precursor display invisible or invisible by means of the first shield image and the second shield image in order to concentrate on the operation of the operation part, the display status of the simulated image of the operation part is that important. By leaving this effect situation after the operation, it is possible to give the player a reverberation of interest in the operation effect.

The time for displaying the first shield image and the second shield image, and the time for displaying the cheering dialogue image and the simulated omen image that imitates the attack button 3710 functioning as a special omen display were set to 6 seconds each. The time for displaying the first shield image or the second shield image may be longer. For example, the first shield image and the second shield image may be displayed for 10 seconds. Alternatively, once the display of the first shield image or the second shield image is started, until the operation valid period starts or until the display of the destruction image starts (that is, until the attack button 3710 by the player is activated). The first shield image and the second shield image may continue to be displayed until the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation valid period ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the special precursor display and keep it in a visually difficult or invisible state with a small number of operations.

On the other hand, the time during which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed may be shorter than the time during which the special precursor display is displayed (for example, 3 seconds). In this case, a player who does not want to view the special precursor display is required to perform multiple operations, but a player who mistakenly displays the first shield image or the second shield image will see the special precursor display. During at least a part of the period during which the first shield image and the second shield image hinder the visibility, the special precursor display can be visually recognized, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

While the first shield image is being displayed, if the condition for displaying the first shield image is met by the operation of the defense button 3740, the display of the first shield image is continued again from the timing when the condition is met. You may let For example, when the first shield image is displayed for 4 seconds and the conditions for displaying the first shield image are satisfied, the first shield image is displayed for another 6 seconds, and the first shield image is displayed for a total of 10 seconds. An image may be displayed.
Similarly, with regard to the second shield image, if the conditions for displaying the second shield image are met by the operation of the mission button 3700, the display of the second shield image is continued again from the timing when the condition is met. You may let For example, when the second shield image is displayed for 4 seconds and the conditions for displaying the second shield image are satisfied, the second shield image is displayed for another 6 seconds, and the second shield image is displayed for a total of 10 seconds. An image may be displayed.

During the valid period of the defense button 3740, the first shield image is displayed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses. When the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image can be displayed again. The same applies to the second shield image.

According to such a configuration, it is possible for a player who hesitates whether or not to see the special precursor display and does not want to see it to extend the display time of the first shield image and the second shield image. . On the other hand, a player who wants to see the special precursor display mistakenly operates the second operation unit (defense button 3740) or the third operation unit (mission button 3700), resulting in poor visibility of the special precursor display. It is possible that the visibility of the special sign display is lowered and becomes difficult to see or invisible, but when the player does not operate the second operation unit any more, the visibility of the special sign display is lowered and becomes difficult to see or invisible. will end promptly. In addition, since the display of the first shield image and the second shield image can be performed at any desired timing (for example, before the start of the special precursor display or after the expiration of the operation valid period), the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed. It is possible to practice displaying the

FIGS. 379(a) to 379(d) show modified display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 378(a) to 378(d). 4 shows a display example in the form.
As shown in FIGS. 374(j) and 374(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700. FIG.
FIGS. 379(a), 379(b), 379(c), and 379(d) are display examples in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

FIGS. 379(e) to 379(h) show modified display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 378(e) to 378(h). 4 shows a display example in the form.
As shown in FIGS. 374(j) and 374(k), also in this embodiment, it is possible to display the second shield image in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700. FIG.
FIGS. 379(e), 379(f), 379(g), and 379(h) are display examples in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, and the first shield image and the first shield image at timing t16, respectively. A display example in which two shield images are displayed, a display example in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20. 4 shows an example of a display in the state of being set.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 379(a) to 379(d) and the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 379(e) to 379(h), the display priority of the first shield image is is set higher than the display priority of the second shield image, and the first shield image is displayed in front of the second shield image. Also, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to the position where the operation unit simulated image is displayed, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively far away. Also, the size of the first shield image (specifically, the area it occupies in the display area) is larger than the size of the second shield image.
In addition, as described above, a special operation (a long press operation or repeated hitting operation) on the defense button 3740 is required to display the first shield image, but the mission button 3700 is required to display the second shield image. It is only necessary to perform the pressing operation of . That is, the second shield image is displayed at the operation start timing of the mission button 3700 (operation start reception timing), while the first shield image is not displayed at the operation start timing of the defense button 3740 (operation reception reception timing).

According to such a configuration, the display of the first shield image is performed by the player operating the second operation unit (defense button 3740) in a complicated operation mode with a clear intention.
On the other hand, the second shield image is displayed when the player operates the third operation section (mission button 3700) in a simple operation mode. Therefore, the second shield image is displayed not only when the player intentionally operates the third operation unit but also when the player unintentionally operates it or operates it by mistake.
As described above, in the present embodiment, instead of making the difficulty level of the operation mode required for displaying the first shield image relatively higher than the difficulty level required for displaying the second shield image, The first shield image can hinder the visibility of the special precursor display more than the image.

In this way, by displaying the first shield image, which is not displayed unless it is operated with a clear intention, the player can use the simulation image of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) or the simulated operation unit image. It is possible to concentrate on the operation of the first operation unit.
Further, even when the second shield image, which can be displayed by a simple operation, is displayed, the player can concentrate on the simulated operation part image and the operation of the operation part. On the other hand, when the second shield image is displayed compared to when the first shield image is displayed, the visibility of the special precursor display is relatively high, so that even if the player makes a mistake, Even if the second shield image is displayed due to the second shield image, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest felt by the player who wants to see the special precursor display.

Also, the first shield image may be displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed after a special operation (a long press operation or repeated hit operation) on the defense button 3740 is detected. Also, the display time of the first shield image is preferably longer than the display time of the second shield image.
Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is employed.

The first shield image displayed when the defense button 3740 is operated and the second shield image displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated may differ in image size and display time. For example, in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 371 and 378, the size of the second shield image is larger than that of the first shield image, and the large area of the special precursor display is made invisible.
Alternatively, the display times of the first shield image and the second shield image may be different. For example, the first shield image may be displayed for 6 seconds, and the second shield image may be displayed for 9 seconds. Conversely, the first shield image may be displayed for 9 seconds, and the second shield image may be displayed for 6 seconds.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the special precursor display a viewing mode that suits the player's taste.

The first shield image and the second shield image may be dynamically displayed instead of simply appearing at predetermined positions. When displaying as dynamic display, for example, it is displayed so as to appear dynamically in a so-called cut-in mode from either the top, bottom, left, or right of the display area, or dynamic display such as wipe-in, wipe-out, fade-in, or fade-out is performed. You may adopt it.
The movement of the first shield image and the second shield image appearing while moving in this manner may be continued and stopped at the center of the display area. Alternatively, the movement of the first shield image and the second shield image, which appeared while moving at one end of the display area in this way, is continued, moved at the other end of the display area, and displayed so as to disappear outside the display area. good too.
As a result, the first shield image and the second shield image not only hide the special sign display, but also the appearance and disappearance of the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed in a dramatic manner, which reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Triggered by the operation of the defense button 3740, a cheering dialogue image and a simulated omen image of the attack button 3710 are translucently displayed. The image or the precursor simulation image of the attack button 3710 may be made invisible or invisible.
In this way, by making it possible to make the special precursor display invisible or difficult to see in different modes depending on the type of the operation unit, it is possible to make the viewing mode suitable for the player's taste.

Further, there are a plurality of display modes of the simulated portent image imitating the attack button 3710, and the degree of expectation for the special lottery result may be indicated by the type of the simulated portent image displayed. For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color or shape of the simulated precursor image. Also in this case, it is preferable that the special sign display can be made invisible or invisible by means of the first shield image and the second shield image.
By adopting such a configuration, the player is not misled by the degree of expectation indicated by the precursor simulated image, and the display of the simulated operation portion image simulating the first operation portion (attack button 3710) and the display of the first operation portion are prevented. The player can concentrate on the operation of .

Even if the special omen display (display of a cheering dialogue image or simulated omen image) ends while the first shield image or the second shield image is being displayed, the first shield image or the second shield image will not be displayed for the predetermined time. You should continue. This is because if the display of the first shield image and the second shield image ends at the same time as the operation valid period starts, the background image (such as the road) located in the background of the first shield image and the second shield image will be displayed. This is because the player who wants to concentrate on the display of the simulated image of the operation unit simulating the attack button 3710 feels uncomfortable. It is preferable to continue displaying the concealment image (the first shield image and the second shield image) even if the operation effective period has occurred in this way.

Also, the display priority of the operation section simulation image should be higher than the display priority of the first shield image. For example, as shown in FIG. 370(h), it is preferable to display the operation section simulation image on the front side of the first shield image. With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed simulated image. If the first shield image were to be erased, the background image hidden by the first shield image would become visible, which would hinder concentration on the simulated operation unit image.
A similar configuration can be adopted not only for the first shield image, but also for the second shield image.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 371(h) and 378(h), the simulated image of the operating section and the second shield image may be displayed so as to partially overlap each other. At this time, it is preferable to set the display priority of the operation unit simulated image higher than the display priority of the second shield image. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 376(h) and 377(h), the simulated image of the operating section is positioned near the first shield image and the second shield image and does not overlap the first shield image and the second shield image. You may make it display in a position.
With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed operating section simulated image.

An embodiment has been described in which the display priority of the operation portion simulated image is higher than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image. The display priority may be lower than that of the 2 shield image. In this case, it is preferable that a part of the simulated operation section image is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player without overlapping the first shield image or the second shield image.

In addition to displaying the simulated precursor image and the simulated operation part image, the name and operation mode of the first operation part (attack button 3710) are displayed during the display of the special precursor display (during the display of the simulated precursor image) and during the operation valid period (operation may be configured to be displayed in the display area during display of the simulated image). In this case, a player who is unfamiliar with the game will have a better understanding of the name and operation method of the first operating section, and will be able to operate the first operating section with certainty.
On the other hand, a player skilled in the game may not need such a display. Therefore, the name and operation mode of the attack button 3710 may be made invisible or invisible by displaying the first shield image and the second shield image. On the other hand, it is preferable that the simulated operation section image is configured so as not to be visually difficult or invisible by the first shield image and the second shield image.
The operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 may be displayed only before the operation effective period occurs, or only during the operation effective period, or may be displayed from before the operation effective period to during the operation effective period. may
The embodiment illustrated with reference to Figures 372 and 373 is an example of such an embodiment. In FIGS. 372(d), 372(f), 373(d), and 373(f), in the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might", the words "Second Lieutenant! Aim at the enemy tank with the attack button!" Although the columns are displayed, the operation modes and names of the attack buttons 3710 are not visible because the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed.
With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed operating section simulated image.

If the first shield image can be easily displayed, the player may accidentally operate the defense button 3740 and unintentionally display the first shield image during execution of the precursor effect. There is a risk that the visibility of the portent effect will be hindered, and that the interest that the portent effect will bring will be lost.
Therefore, the first shield image is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied with the operation of the defense button 3740 as a trigger. Examples of the specific conditions include repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 (detection of pressing operations for a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time period) and long pressing (detection of continuous pressing operations for a predetermined time period or longer). However, other conditions that are satisfied when the defense button 3740 is operated may be employed.

An embodiment has been described in which the second shield image is displayed under the condition that the defense button 3740 is long pressed or the mission button 3700 is pressed. can be configured to For example, the second shield image may be displayed on condition that the mission button 3700 is pressed after the defense button 3740 is pressed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the second shield image is displayed under the condition that the mission button 3700 is long pressed or hit repeatedly.

Although the embodiment in which the second shield image is displayed regardless of whether or not the first shield image is displayed has been described, the second shield image is displayed on condition that the first shield image is being displayed. It may be configured as

The display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the display area. As a result, the decorative design is not hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image, so the visibility of the decorative design is ensured.

Although the operation effective period of the defense button 3740 is set to the timing t5 to the timing t27, the entire period during which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or the variation is stopped may be set as the operational effective period and the period in which the first shield image is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to practice displaying the first shield image by operating the defense button 3740 at an arbitrary timing.
It should be noted that since it is not necessary to adopt such a configuration for the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 that triggers the display of the second shield image, during the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from timing t5 to timing t27 ) is set as the operation valid period, or the second shield image can be displayed. Alternatively, it is preferable that the second shield image is not displayed at least while the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern from being degraded.

Although the embodiment has been configured in which a plurality of images are displayed and the special precursor display is performed, the special precursor display may be performed using only one image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 368 and the like, four cheering words images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. Also, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 377 and the like, nine precursor simulated images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

A case may be provided in which the operation of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is not effective after the special precursor display is displayed. In this case, after the special precursor display is displayed, the simulated operation portion image simulating the first operation portion is not displayed, and the valid operation period does not occur.
For a player who hides the simulated precursor image in the special precursor display with the first shield image or the second shield image, the simulated precursor image is not displayed even though the simulated precursor image is made invisible or invisible. Although the result is disappointing, by intentionally performing such a presentation display, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she wants to operate the operation section next time.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which, in a game effect for instructing a player to operate an operation means, the same effect display as when the operation means is operated is performed even when the player does not operate the operation means. (for example, JP-A-2007-136096).
However, since the same effect display is performed even when the operation is not performed as when the operation is performed, the operation burden on the player is reduced, but there is a possibility that the player will lose the desire to operate the operation means. . In particular, in a game effect requiring complicated operation instructions to the operation means, if the same effect display as when the operation is performed is performed even when the operation is not performed, the player's desire to operate is reduced. may be greatly lost.
An embodiment of a game machine that solves such problems and makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the player's willingness to operate the operation means will be described below.

Modified embodiments of the “shield bullet reach” will be described below with reference to FIGS. 380 to 382. FIG.
FIG. 380 shows a time chart in this embodiment. 381 and 382 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 380(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, at timing t15, an image of an enemy tank is displayed. Next, from timing t18 to timing t22, an operation effective period of attack button 3710 occurs. If repeated hits or long presses of the attack button 3710 are detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends. Subsequently, after a display corresponding to the operation status of the attack button 3710 is performed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at timing t34.
FIGS. 380(b) to 380(d) show examples of effects that can occur depending on the operation status of the attack button 3710 during the operation effective period.

FIG. 380(b) shows an example of an effect when a repeated hitting operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, at timing t15, a display is started in which an enemy tank appears from the right side of the display area and moves leftward. Next, at timing t18, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 starts. The effective period of operation ends at the timing when a repeated hit operation or a long press operation is detected. Also, when a long-pressing operation or a repeated hitting operation is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation mode is performed. If the long-pressing operation or repeated hitting operation is not detected, the valid operation period ends at timing t22 when four seconds have passed since the valid operation period started.
FIG. 381(a) shows a display example at timing t19. As shown in the figure, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, in the dialog window of "Sergeant Might", a character string "Lieutenant! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" In addition, in the upper right corner of the dialogue window of “Sergeant Might,” an operation unit simulated image (circular image) imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. In addition, the character "attack" is displayed in the simulated image of the operation unit.
It should be noted that the same display as that shown in FIG. 382(a), FIG. ) is performed.

When the continuous hit operation is detected at timing t21, after a display is made in which the own tank fires a shell at the enemy tank, a smoke image representing smoke generated by the explosion of the shell is displayed on the enemy tank. is displayed instead of the image of FIG. 381(b) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, a smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
At timing t23, two seconds after the start of the display of the smoke image, the bomb character image appears behind the smoke image and moves to the left for display. The bomb character images to be displayed include a bomb character image A and a bomb character image B, and the types of bomb character images to be displayed indicate the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit.
FIG. 381(c) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, a bomb character image A is displayed to the left of the smoke image. FIG. 381(d) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, a bomb character image B is displayed to the left of the smoke image. The display of the bomb character image and the smoke image continues until timing t27 (six seconds after the continuous hitting operation is detected).
In this way, the degree of expectation of the special lottery result is indicated to the player by the player performing an appropriate operation on the operation unit.

FIG. 380(c) shows an effect example when a long press operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, the display state is switched from the display example shown in FIG. 382(a) to the display examples shown in FIGS. 382(b) and 382(c).
In this production example, when the long-pressing operation is detected at timing t21, instead of the image of the enemy tank, a display in which a shell is fired from the own tank is displayed, and then the smoke generated by the explosion of the shell is displayed. A smoke image, which is an image, is displayed. FIG. 382(b) is a display example at timing t22. In this display example, a smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
In this production example, the bomb character image is not displayed, and only the smoke image is displayed. FIG. 382(c) is a display example at timing t25. The display of the smoke image continues until timing t27 (six seconds after the long press is detected).
In this way, when the operation performed by the player on the operation means is not an appropriate operation, although the display corresponding to the operation is performed, the degree of expectation for the special result (the special lottery result is a big hit, etc.) expectations) are not shown to the player.

FIG. 380(d) shows an effect when repeated hits or a long press operation on the attack button 3710 is not detected during the operation valid period from timing t18 to timing t22 (for example, when the attack button 3710 is pressed only once or when no operation is performed). shows an example.
In this production example, the display example shown in FIG. 382(d) is switched to the display examples shown in FIGS. 382(e) and 382(f).
In this production example, when the valid operation period ends at timing t22, the image of the enemy tank turns right at the upper center of the display area and starts to move upward in the display area. FIG. 382(e) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the center of the display area.
FIG. 382(f) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank moves upward and is displayed smaller than in the case shown in FIG. 382(e).
As described above, when the player does not perform an appropriate operation on the operation means, the display corresponding to the operation is not displayed. Also, the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, etc.) is not shown to the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation for the special lottery result is suggested by the type of bomb character image. Specifically, when the bomb character image A is displayed, it is suggested that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is higher than when the bomb character image B is displayed. It should be noted that different expectations may be suggested by different colors (red and green) of the bomb character images. Further, it may be configured such that the bomb character may not be displayed even when an appropriate operation (repeated hits) is performed.

In this embodiment, a player who has performed an appropriate operation on the operation means (attack button 3710) can visually recognize a special game-related display (smoke image) and a specific effect (bomb character image display). can be done. Moreover, the degree of expectation of the special lottery result can be known by the type of specific presentation. On the other hand, a player who has not performed an appropriate operation on the operation unit can visually recognize the special game-related display but cannot visually recognize the specific effect, or can visually recognize both the special game-related display and the specific effect. Can not do it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the operation unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 380 and the like, as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710, it is possible to execute a production pattern that requires repeated hits and a production pattern that requires a long press, and one of the production patterns is executed. may be modified to be In this case, in the dialog window of "Sergeant Might", the line "Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" or "Lieutenant! Press and hold the attack button to attack the enemy tank!" It is good to configure so that the line "" is displayed. In addition, when the player performs a long press while an instruction for repeated hits has been given, or when the player performs repeated hits after an instruction for a long press has been given, the process is shown in FIG. It is preferable to perform control so that the bomb character image cannot be visually recognized.
With such a configuration, the player is required to carefully view the contents of the operation instruction display (the character string displayed in the dialogue window). It is possible to improve the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the .

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 380 to 382, the same smoke image is displayed at the same position when the attack button 3710 is repeatedly pressed and when the attack button 3710 is pressed long (for example, FIG. 381 ( b) and FIG. 382(b)). With this configuration, even if another player sees the display contents of the display area, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the operation contents are appropriate. It is possible to prevent embarrassment due to being noticed.
It should be noted that a part of the smoke image may be different and partly common may be displayed depending on whether the operation is appropriate or not. Alternatively, an image showing the same or similar concept as the smoke image may be displayed.
In this way, instead of displaying a completely identical image as the smoke image, a similar image is displayed, or a similar image that can be recognized as a similar motif (smoke in this embodiment) is displayed. Even in this case, it can be difficult for other players to determine whether or not the content of the operation was appropriate.
Note that the same configuration may be adopted for an embodiment that displays a smoke image and an explosion image, which will be described later. For example, an image that the player recognizes as having a similar motif may be displayed. In addition, depending on whether the operation content is appropriate or not, similar smoke images are displayed, similar messages regarding the operation of the operation means are displayed, and smoke images and explosion images similar to smoke images are displayed. It is good to display it. Moreover, it is preferable to display these similar images at a position overlapping the display position of the reserved image or near the center of the display area. A similar effect can be obtained even when a slightly different image is displayed in this manner.

A predetermined suggestive effect display indicating the degree of expectation of a special lottery result can be executed over a predetermined period (for example, timing t10 to timing t30) spanning an operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22), and during execution of the suggestive effect display. If the attack button 3710 is not properly operated during the operation valid period, the suggestive effect display being executed may be terminated. For example, during the period from timing t10 to timing t30, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect display different from the effect of displaying the bomb character, and when the attack button 3710 is appropriately operated, this suggestive effect display is continued. , when the attack button 3710 is not properly operated, the suggestion effect display may be terminated.

Further, during a predetermined period after the effective period of operation (for example, from timing t22 to timing t34 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends), a predetermined suggestive effect display indicating the degree of expectation of the special lottery result can be executed, and the operation is performed. If attack button 3710 is not properly operated during the validity period (timing t18 to timing t22), execution of the suggestive effect display may be restricted for a predetermined period after the operation validity period. For example, during the period from timing t22 to timing t34, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect display different from the effect of displaying a bomb character. It may be configured such that it is executed with probability, and if the attack button 3710 is not properly operated, this suggestive effect display is not executed.

In this way, if the operation is not properly performed, the suggestive effect display being executed is terminated or the suggestive effect display is not executed until the variable display of the decorative pattern stops, thereby reducing the tension of the operation. The feeling increases, and the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the operation means can be improved.

If the attack button 3710 is not properly operated in a certain variable display, execution of the suggestion effect may be restricted in a predetermined number of variable displays after that variable display. For example, it is preferable to limit the execution of the suggestion effect until the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed 10 times.
With such a configuration, depending on the operation mode of the operation means, a game situation may occur in which execution of a specific effect (suggestive effect) is restricted over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols. The sense of tension increases, and the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the operation means can be further improved.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 380 and the like, when the operation of the attack button 3710 is not performed appropriately, the degree of expectation is not suggested for the change display result being executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 383 and the like, an embodiment modified so as to limit the execution of the look-ahead effect when the attack button 3710 is not properly operated will be described.

FIG. 383 shows a time chart in this embodiment. 384 to 386 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 383(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, at timing t16, an image of the minefield is displayed. Next, from timing t18 to timing t22, an operation effective period of attack button 3710 occurs. It should be noted that at the timing of occurrence of the operation valid period, three pending operations have occurred. Next, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, from timing t35 to timing t44, a new variable display of the decorative design is performed, and from timing t44 to timing t45, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.
FIGS. 383(b) to 383(d) respectively show a plurality of production examples corresponding to the operation modes for the attack button 3710 during the operation valid period.

FIG. 383(b) shows an example of an effect when a continuous hitting operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this production example, at timing t16, a display in which a minefield consisting of a bomb character appears from the upper side of the display area and moves downward is started. Next, at timing t18, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 384(a) shows a display example at timing t19. An image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant", a character string "Second Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack them!" At the upper right of the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant", an operation unit simulated image (circular image) imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with the character "attack" attached. Furthermore, a pending image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Specifically, pending images corresponding to the pending, the first pending, the second pending, and the third pending are displayed from the left. Of these, the suspension, the first suspension, and the third suspension are displayed as white suspension images, which are normal suspension images. On the other hand, the second hold is displayed with a red hold image indicating that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher than the normal hold. It is to be noted that it is possible to display a total of 5 pending images, ie, 1 pending image and 4, which is the upper limit of the number of pending items. Further, in each of the holdings from the holding to the fourth holding, it is possible to display in a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher than the normal holding image. In addition, the pending image is basically continued to be displayed regardless of whether the decorative symbols are being variably displayed or variably stopped.
It should be noted that the display similar to this display is also performed in the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 383(c) and the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 383(d).

When a repeated hit operation is detected at timing t21, a display is made in which a shell is fired from the own tank against the minefield, and then a smoke image, which is an image representing smoke generated by the explosion of the shell, is displayed in the minefield. is displayed instead of the image of FIG. 384(b) shows a display example at timing t22. In this display example, a smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 384(c) shows a display example after timing t23. Note that the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of repeated hit detection. For example, if repeated hits are detected early, the smoke image is displayed relatively in the upper part of the display area, and if repeated hits are detected later, the smoke image is displayed relatively in the lower part of the display area. be. Also, the position of the displayed smoke image does not change and continues to be displayed at the same position.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. FIG. 384(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the hold is cleared. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. At this time, the hold that has been the first hold until then moves to the left and becomes larger and becomes the relevant hold. Also, the hold that was the second hold moves to the left and becomes the first hold. Similarly, the hold that was the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold. In addition, in this production example, at the timing when the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold, from the normal hold (white hold image) to the higher expected hold (green hold image) Change. FIG. 384(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 384(f) shows a display example during the period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends.

In this way, the player appropriately operates the operating means, thereby maintaining the state in which the player is shown the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, etc.). be.

FIG. 383(c) shows an effect example when a long press operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
Also in this production example, at timing t16, a display of a minefield consisting of a bomb character appearing from the upper side of the display area and moving downward is started. Next, at timing t18, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 is started.
FIG. 385(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display contents at this time are the same as the display contents in the display example shown with reference to FIG. 384(a).

Even if the long-pressing operation is detected at timing t21, the display that the self-tank is firing a shell against the minefield is not displayed. Then, the display of the minefield approaching the own tank is continued. FIG. 385(b) shows a display example from timing t22 to timing t23 when the valid operation period ends. Next, at timing t23, the minefield and the own tank come into contact with each other, causing the minefield to explode, and instead of the minefield image, a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area. At the same time, the second hold, previously shown in red, changes to a white hold image. FIG. 385(c) shows a display example at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. FIG. 385(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the hold is cleared. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. At the same time, the hold that has been the first hold until then moves to the left and becomes larger and becomes the relevant hold. Also, the hold that was the second hold moves to the left and becomes the first hold. Similarly, the hold that was the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold. FIG. 385(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 385(f) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In this embodiment, the smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image. In addition, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal pending image can be displayed, and the pending image (red pending image) that was displayed until then indicating high expectations is replaced by the normal pending image (white pending image). image). Further, while the smoke image is being displayed, no effect display is performed to change the normal pending image to another pending image (for example, green pending image) indicating that the degree of expectation is high.
The display of the smoke image is continued until the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension that existed when the display of the smoke image was started ends. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal hold image is displayed.
In addition, in this production example, an example is shown in which a hold image (red hold image) indicating high expectations is replaced with a normal hold image (white hold image) for the second hold, but the second hold If there is a hold indicating that the degree of expectation is high in other holds, it is replaced with a normal hold image in the same manner as the second hold.

As described above, when the player does not perform an appropriate operation, the player is not shown the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, etc.). The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 383(d) shows an example of an effect when a continuous hitting operation or a long pressing operation on the attack button 3710 is not detected during the operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22).
Also in this production example, at timing t16, a display of a minefield consisting of a bomb character appearing from the upper side of the display area and moving downward is started. Next, at timing t18, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 starts.
FIG. 386(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display contents at this time are the same as the display contents in the display example shown with reference to FIG. 384(a).

In this production example as well, similar to the other production examples, a display of a minefield approaching the own tank is displayed. FIG. 386(b) shows a display example from timing t22 to timing t23 when the valid operation period ends. Next, at timing t23, the minefield and the own tank come into contact with each other, causing the minefield to explode, and an explosion image is displayed at the bottom of the display area instead of the image of the minefield. The display priority of the explosion image is set higher than that of the self-tank image and the reserved image. FIG. 386(c) shows a display example at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. FIG. 386(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. The display priority of the explosion image is set higher than that of the decorative pattern, and the explosion image makes it difficult to visually recognize the stationary display mode of the decorative pattern. In addition, the held image also remains invisible. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. FIG. 386(e) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 386(f) shows a display example during the period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In this embodiment, the explosion image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the pending image and the decorative pattern. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and the decoration pattern, and the reserved image and the decoration pattern are hidden by the explosion image and displayed. Therefore, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern also becomes difficult to see.
The display of the explosion image is continued until the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension existing at the start of the display of the explosion image ends. Further, as described above, while the explosion image is being displayed, the suspended image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern becomes invisible.

In this way, when the player does not perform an appropriate operation, the player is not presented with the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit, etc.) and the number of pending items. is generated and this state is maintained for a predetermined period.

As described above, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 383 and the like, the smoke image and the explosion image are displayed even after the variable display in which the smoke image and the explosion image are displayed ends and the next variable display is started. , and the visual recognition mode of the reserved image and the decoration pattern is changed according to the operation mode of the player.

Thus, when a specific condition is satisfied (when the operation to the operation means (attack button 3710) is appropriate), a special game-related display (smoke image) is displayed across a plurality of fluctuation displays. is displayed, and a specific effect (changed pending image) is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, etc.), and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In the case (when the operation to the operation means is not appropriate), a special game-related display is displayed across multiple fluctuation displays, and a specific effect is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation for the special result. By not performing the operation, the player's desire to operate the operation means can be increased. In addition, by giving a penalty step by step according to the operation mode of the operation means, it is possible to increase the willingness to perform more appropriate operations.

During the effective period of operation, when repeated hits are detected after a long press on the attack button 3710 is detected, the effect similar to the example shown with reference to FIG. A performance is held. In order to perform such processing, the timing at which the display corresponding to the long press is executed is not when the long press is detected but when the valid operation period ends.
With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a state in which the display indicating the degree of expectation cannot be visually recognized by quickly performing the correct operation even if the operation means is operated incorrectly, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Shows an example of an effect that restricts the change in the display mode of the pending image or makes the pending image invisible until the variable display corresponding to the pending that existed at the timing when the smoke image or the explosion image started to be displayed ends. However, the change in the display mode of the pending image is limited until the variable display is performed the number of times corresponding to the maximum number of pending items (4, which is the maximum pending number of the first start port 2002 in this embodiment). Alternatively, the reserved image may be rendered invisible.
In this way, the number of variable displays that limit the pending change and the number of variable displays that make the pending image invisible are predetermined, thereby simplifying the display control of the smoke image and the explosion image on the peripheral control board 1510. can do.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 383 and the like, there are cases in which an effect pattern requiring repeated hits is executed as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710, and a effect pattern requiring a long press is executed. It may be configured as In this case, as the line of "Sergeant Might", in the production pattern that requires repeated hits, the line of "Sergeant Might" is displayed as the line "Lieutenant! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack them!" In production patterns that require a long press, it is preferable to display the line "Lieutenant! Press and hold the attack button to attack them!"
When an appropriate operation is performed, it is preferable to display the same display as the display examples shown in FIGS. 384(b) to 384(f).
On the other hand, when the player performs a long press while an instruction for repeated hits has been given, or when the player performs repeated hits after an instruction for a long press has been given, the It is preferable to display the same display as the display example shown in 385(f).
Further, when neither repeated hitting nor long pressing is performed, the same display as the display examples shown in FIGS. 386(b) to 386(f) may be performed.
By adopting such a configuration, it is necessary to carefully confirm the contents of the operation instruction, and the sense of tension for the operation increases, and the player's willingness and aggressiveness to operate the operation means can be improved.

With reference to FIG. 385 , an effect example in which the pending image is displayed in front of the smoke image has been shown, but an embodiment modified so that the smoke image is displayed in front of the pending image is also possible. FIG. 383(e) is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. FIG. 387 shows a display example in this embodiment.

Also in this production example, at timing t23, the minefield and the own tank come into contact with each other, causing the minefield to explode, and instead of the image of the minefield, a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area. It has a higher display priority than reserved images and decorative patterns. FIG. 387(a) is a display example at timing t24. As shown in the figure, the smoke image obscures the pending image, making the pending image invisible.

At timing t34, the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. FIG. 387(b) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t35. FIG. 387(c) shows a display example at timing t36. FIG. 387(d) shows a display example during the period from timing t44 to timing t45 when this variable display ends. In the present embodiment, since the smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image, the reserved image is invisible. Also, part of the changing decorative pattern becomes invisible. On the other hand, the visually recognizable mode of the statically displayed decorative pattern is not hindered.

In each of the production examples shown in FIGS. 384, 385, 386, and 387, the variable display of the smoke image and the explosion image corresponding to all the suspensions that existed when the smoke image and the explosion image started to be displayed ends. However, these displays may be ended at a predetermined timing before the end of the variable displays corresponding to all the holds. For example, at the timing (timing t35) when the fluctuating display in which the smoke image or the explosion image is displayed ends and a new fluctuating display is started (timing t35), the display of the smoke image or the explosion image is finished, and the pending image is visible. may be It should be noted that the reserved images displayed at this time should be limited to normal reserved images only, and reserved images with a high degree of expectation (for example, red reserved images) should not be displayed. In addition, the period for displaying only the normal hold image is not limited to the remaining number of fluctuations, and may be a condition that a predetermined time has passed (for example, 120 seconds) from the timing when the display of the smoke image or the explosion image ends. .
In this way, while the special game-related display (display of the smoke image or the explosion image) is terminated in a short period of time, the specific effect (read-ahead effect) is prohibited for a predetermined period of time, and only the normal pending image is displayed for a predetermined period of time. By doing so, the player can only see the normal hold image for the hold, and can not see the highly expected hold image, but can know the number of holds. . In addition, it is possible to prevent other players from feeling embarrassed when the smoke image or the explosion image is displayed for a long time and the operation means cannot be operated well.

Further, it is possible to end the special game-related display earlier than the end period of the special game-related display by operating when the special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image is displayed. You may make it provide a new operation means in a game machine. As for this operation means, it may be possible to end the display early with a simple operation, but it is better to end the display by requiring a special operation such as multiple operations. Since the display ends early as a result of the operation with a clear intention, it is preferable in terms of countermeasures against erroneous operations. Further, even if the special game-related display such as the smoke image or the explosion image is terminated by the operation of the operation means, the execution of the look-ahead effect in the game progressed after the special operation of the operation means is performed for a predetermined period of time. should be configured to prohibit Moreover, it is preferable to configure so that only the normal pending image is displayed during the predetermined period.

383(d) and FIG. 386 (the explosion image is displayed, the suspended image is invisible, and the decorative pattern is difficult to be seen) is performed. 383(c) and 385 (a display in which a smoke image is displayed and a hold image is normally held) is performed when an operation other than a long press is performed or when no operation is performed. good.
In this case, for the player who dares to perform an operation different from the operation instruction, the explosion image is displayed, the suspended image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see, and the operation is performed. You will be penalized more severely than if you didn't.
On the other hand, when an operation other than repeated hits or a long press is performed, or when no operation is performed, a smoke image is displayed and only a normal pending image is displayed, but the number of pending items can be recognized. becomes. This is because if the player is in a situation where the player cannot perform an operation (for example, purchasing a drink from a game store clerk), it would be cruel to give a large penalty for that.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 383, the display content is limited based on the operation mode during one operation effective period (timing t18 to timing t22). The effect as shown is executed multiple times, and during the operation valid period, if the player performs an operation that does not result in repeated hits or long presses, or if there is no operation, multiple times (2 times or more and predetermined) (predetermined number of times), the display content may be restricted.
In this case, in the presentation until the predetermined number of times, the smoke image or the explosion image is not displayed regardless of the operation content, thereby enabling the display of a specific pending image indicating that the degree of expectation is high. In the rendered effect, a smoke image may be displayed and only a normal pending image may be displayed as a pending image, or an explosion image may be displayed to make the pending image invisible.

Alternatively, if the player performs an operation that does not result in repeated hits or long presses, or if the player does not perform an operation a plurality of times (a predetermined number of times that is two or more times), the decoration for the next and subsequent times is performed. A special effect may be executed in the variation of the design so that only the normal reserved image is displayed as the reserved image, or the reserved image may be made invisible.
Examples of special effects include the example effects shown with reference to FIGS. 385(a) to 385(f), the example effects shown with reference to FIGS. a) to FIG. 387(d) are modified, and the player intervenes without generating an operation valid period (without displaying the simulated image of the operation part) in these examples of effects. It may be configured such that a smoke image or an explosion image is automatically displayed by executing an effect that prevents the smoke image or the explosion image.
Note that the special effect may be executed in the variable display next to the variable display in which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed, or may be performed randomly from the variable display in which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed. It may be executed in the variable display after a predetermined number of times (for example, after 2-10 rotations). Alternatively, it may be started after a randomly selected period (for example, after 10 seconds to 120 seconds have passed) from the timing at which the appropriate operation was not performed for the predetermined number of times.

With such a configuration, since a penalty is given on the condition that an inappropriate operation is performed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the player from being suddenly given a penalty.
In addition, since the same effect as the effect that was operable is automatically executed in a state in which the operation is disabled, it is possible to limit the display suggesting the degree of expectation in a natural way as the effect.
If the player keeps ignoring the operation instructions, the pending display indicating the high degree of expectation will not be displayed, so the player can concentrate only on the changing display of the currently changing decorative symbols. In other words, it can be said that the player can change the mode of presentation to suit his or her taste.

In the present embodiment, for the hold that exists at the timing when the operation was not performed appropriately, the execution of a specific effect (display of the hold image with high expectation based on the look-ahead of the hold) is restricted, and the operation is performed As for suspension that occurs after the timing when it was not performed appropriately, the execution of a specific effect is not restricted. For example, the execution of a specific effect may be limited by a predetermined number of fluctuations (holding number). In addition, it becomes possible for the player playing the game machine to start the game in a state in which the execution of the performance is restricted. Therefore, by not restricting the execution of a specific effect (prefetching effect) for the hold that occurred after the timing when the operation was not properly performed, it is possible to prevent other players from being disturbed. can be made

A state in which the smoke image is displayed and a state in which the smoke image is not displayed may be repeated instead of continuously displaying the smoke image. For example, a state in which the smoke image is displayed and a state in which the smoke image is not displayed may be switched every 0.5 seconds.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to highlight a specific effect (a bomb character image, a read-ahead effect such as a pending image) that may be displayed together with the special game-related display (smoke image).

As for the explosion image and the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 387, the state in which the explosion image and the smoke image are displayed and the state in which they are not displayed may be repeated. For example, a state in which the explosion image is displayed and a state in which it is not displayed may be switched every 0.5 seconds. When the explosion image or the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 387 is hidden, the pending image hidden in the explosion image or smoke image becomes visible. should only be normal pending images (white pending images).
By adopting such a configuration, it becomes impossible to recognize the degree of expectation regarding the hold, and it becomes difficult to recognize the number of holds, and it is possible to give a moderate penalty to the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display position of the smoke image varies depending on the timing of detection of repeated hits. For example, if repeated hits are detected early, the smoke image is displayed relatively in the upper part of the display area, and if repeated hits are detected later, the smoke image is displayed relatively in the lower part of the display area. be. That is, the later the detection of repeated hits, the closer the smoke image is displayed to the display position of the smoke image displayed when the long press is detected. Further, the smoke image displayed by the continuous tapping operation and the smoke image displayed by the long pressing operation are the same image. Therefore, if the player hits repeatedly just before the expiration of the valid operation period, it is difficult to distinguish on the display from the case that the player has mistakenly pressed the button for a long time. As a result, even if another player visually recognizes the smoke image being displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the player has properly performed the operation or performed the wrong operation. Even if a player makes a mistake in the operation mode, it is possible to prevent other players from noticing and feeling embarrassed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 385, all of the hold to the fourth hold are shown to be displayed in the normal hold, but the first hold to the fourth hold are displayed only in the normal hold image However, for the suspension, the display of the suspension image showing that the expectation of the big win is higher than that of the normal suspension may be continued. For example, when the suspension indicates that the degree of expectation is high, even if the display of the smoke image is started, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the suspension. Further, while the smoke image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the suspension from a normal suspension image to a suspension image (for example, a red suspension image) indicating a higher degree of expectation.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 386 and 387, the first to fourth holds may be hidden by the smoke image or the explosion image, and the hold may not be hidden. In addition, when the hold is a hold image indicating that the degree of expectation is high, even if the display of the smoke image or the explosion image is started, the display mode of the hold is changed to a normal hold image. It is better to prevent this from happening. Also, during display of the smoke image or the explosion image, it may be possible to change the hold from a normal hold image to a hold image (for example, a red hold image) indicating a higher degree of expectation.

With such a configuration, the degree of expectation for the first to fourth reservations is not shown to the player, but the degree of expectation for the variation result of the decoration pattern currently fluctuating can be displayed according to the display mode of the reservation. , it is possible to prevent the penalty given to the player from becoming excessive.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 384 to 387, instead of the smoke image and the explosion image, a dialogue window of "Colonel Dina" may be displayed at the display position of the smoke image and the explosion image. As for the pending image at this time, it is preferable to display only the normal pending image as described above, or to limit the visibility of the pending image by a serif window displayed instead of the smoke image or the explosion image. . Also, a character string saying "Check the details of the operation and perform the operation properly!" may be displayed in the dialogue window. Alternatively, it may be possible to display "You did a good job!" when the repeated hits were performed properly, or to display "You should have done the repeated hits" when the repeated hits were not properly performed. Alternatively, a character string "Don't confuse continuous pressing with long pressing!" may be displayed to indicate that there are multiple operation modes.
In this way, by displaying a message regarding the operation of the operation means, a player who is not familiar with the operation method of the operation means can know the operation method of the operation means after the end of the effective period of operation, so that the player can know the operation method of the operation means afterwards. After that, you will be able to operate the operation means well.

An example is shown in which a hold image indicating that the degree of expectation is high is displayed instead of the normal hold image by prefetching. may be used to suggest that the

Although the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is indicated by the display mode of the pending image, the degree of expectation that other events will occur may be indicated by the display mode of the pending image. For example, the degree of expectation for a variable probability big hit or the degree of expectation for a time-saving loss may be indicated.

With reference to FIGS. 301 to 387, an embodiment has been described in which the performance using the operation unit is further improved. Embodiments applicable to these embodiments are described below.

Although an example in which the operating portion is provided at the lower portion of the door frame has been shown, another operating portion may be adopted. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor is provided on the game board, and the glass plate is divided into a plurality of areas, for example, four areas, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, in a cross shape. The operation acceptance may be performed when the is brought close to the . By adopting such a configuration, the player can move his or her hand upwards greatly, so that the player can feel more participating in the game. In this regard, a sensor is provided in the movable part of the movable body provided on the frame (a part imitating a rabbit's ear, a movable body imitating a root vegetable, etc.) so that the movement by the player can be detected, and the operation input by the player is made possible. You may give these movable parts the function to receive. In this case, the feeling of participating in the game is further enhanced.

In various operation instructions in each embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. A special display may be performed by operating a part, etc.). For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that is normally displayed when an operation is performed in accordance with an operation instruction is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed that does not follow an operation instruction. .

On the other hand, some players, such as players who are tired or aged, may show a tendency to dislike such operation inputs that require large physical movements. Therefore, one or more sensors are provided in a predetermined area in the game area, and the above-described various operation units are operated based on the detection by the sensor of a game ball shot into the game area by the player. It can be used as a substitute for In this case, the player can replace the operation of the operation part by operating the operation part only with the right hand. Input can be made. It should be noted that it is also possible to accept both an operation to the operation unit and an input from a sensor provided in a predetermined area, and to perform an effect display corresponding to the operation input at the time when an operation input is made to either one of them. good. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the player or the store clerk of the game parlor can select which of the operation input to the operation unit and the sensor provided in the predetermined area receives the operation input. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the operation input is performed only by the shot game ball. As the predetermined area, a dedicated performance sensor capable of detecting the passage or approach of a game ball may be provided on the board surface, or an existing winning opening (for example, general winning opening, first start opening, gate , a large winning opening, etc.), the operation input may be received based on the winning of the game ball (detection by a sensor). Note that the sensor function may be added to an existing predetermined member instead of the predetermined region. For example, when a backflow prevention member at the top of the rail or a sensor at the upper right corner of the game board is provided with a sensor to detect that a game ball has passed or collided based on the player's operation. It may be configured so that the operation input is accepted at the same time. In order to correspond to the directional input of the lever, two or more sensors provided at different positions may be used to simulate the directional input. Further, the operation time may be calculated in a pseudo manner according to the number of detections per unit time. In this way, the operation input may be accepted by the player adjusting the shooting intensity of the game ball so that a predetermined sensor or the like detects the game ball. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the effects by reducing the number of operation units and enabling execution of further effect display based on the reception of operations on the operation units.

308 to 312, an embodiment capable of displaying a predetermined image hidden by a shield image has been shown, but in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. A configuration may be adopted in which simulated images simulating parts are displayed respectively and can be hidden by the shield image. Further, it may be configured such that operation instruction displays are displayed corresponding to a plurality of operation units and can be hidden by the shield image. In addition, it is also possible to display operation correspondence displays corresponding to operations on a plurality of operation units, and to hide them with shield images. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is less interested in operating the operation units to visually recognize the displays related to the plurality of operation units.
The embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 313 to 387 may also be configured so that displays relating to a plurality of operation units and shield images can be similarly displayed.
It should be noted that the shield image may be displayed by operating a predetermined operation unit (defense button 3740, etc.).

301 to 387, "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", "AI tank reach" , etc., it is possible to employ a given technical idea in one presentation as a technical idea in another presentation. Also, it is possible to employ a plurality of technical ideas in a plurality of presentations as technical ideas in one presentation.

For example, the display of the shield image related to "shield bullet reach" is changed to "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach". may be applied to each production of At this time, predetermined images (images of enemy tanks, images of bomb characters, simulated images imitating predetermined buttons, images of exploding cannonballs, images of exploding bullets, images of smoke, images of white flags, etc.) are displayed in each effect. Images used in each production) should suggest the degree of expectation in a way related to "shield bullet reach". Also, the degree of expectation shown in this way may be hidden by a shield image.
In addition, the look-ahead mode related to the "suddenly tank effect", the execution mode related to the look-ahead effect, and their technical ideas are described as "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "full power "Breakthrough Reach", "AI Tank Reach", "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Chara Reach", "Full Breakthrough" over multiple display changes Reach" and "AI Tank Reach" may be executed.
For example, in contrast to the production mode using the shield image related to "shield bullet reach" and the smoke image related to "full breakthrough reach", the production mode and technology using the image of the destroyed enemy tank of "suddenly tank effect" Ideas can be applied.
Also, the shield image and the smoke image may be configured to be displayed multiple times by the player, or the shield image and the smoke image may be displayed across the variable display. In this case, the image that suggests the degree of expectation (the image of the destroyed enemy tank in the "suddenly tank effect") corresponding to the variable display that is the target of prefetching is hidden by the shield image or the smoke image. It should be configured as follows.
In addition, for example, in "special machine gun reach" and "silent machine gun reach", images of shells fired from a battery, bullets fired from a machine gun, and images of shells and bullets exploding may be displayed across the variable display. .
In addition, for example, in the case of "bomb character reach", a collision scene between the bomb character and the self-tank can occur not only during the variation of the decorative symbols but also immediately before the stop of the variation of the decorative symbols. The self-tank may explode (part of the self-tank is destroyed) across the , and the self-tank may straddle the stop display of the decorative pattern without exploding. It should be noted that, immediately before the variable display to be read ahead stops changing, it is preferable to perform the effect of displaying a large bomb character shown with reference to FIGS.
In addition, in the "full-strength breakthrough reach", it may be configured so that there are cases where the player is attacked by the shells of the enemy unit a plurality of times during the variable display of one decorative pattern. Also, the smoke image may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, after effecting display based on the look-ahead a plurality of times, it is preferable to display a group of enemy tanks appearing at the last timing of the variable display, which is the subject of the look-ahead.
Also, in the "AI tank reach", display over a plurality of variable displays may be performed based on the look-ahead. In this case, each variable display may be configured so that one or more encounters with enemy tanks occur. At least, immediately before the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, an encounter with an enemy tank may occur, and an image of destroying the cannonball or bullet may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, when the left lever 3720, which is normally not instructed to operate, is operated, as a production, the tank falls on the cliff on the left side of the road and a smoke image is displayed on the screen. good too. In this case, the display of the smoke image is preferably performed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols until the variable display of the decorative symbols targeted for the look-ahead effect display is stopped.
In addition, in each production of "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach", the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, defense button 3740, etc. are shown to be operable. Alternatively, when the look-ahead effect is performed, it may be configured to be executable over the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols. Further, it is preferable that the effective number of operations can be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of one decorative pattern. Also, the display corresponding to the reception of the operation of the operation unit may be configured to be displayed a plurality of times. Further, it is preferable that the display corresponding to such operation acceptance is displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbols.
By adopting such a configuration, since some kind of display reaction occurs in response to the player's operation on the operation unit, it is possible to satisfy the player. Furthermore, the effect display based on the operation is executed across the variable display without being interrupted by the stop display of the variable display, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the executed effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine capable of executing a display effect of switching effect images according to a game situation (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340037).
However, if the display effect of switching the effect image is something that the player feels uncomfortable with, there is a risk that the interest will decrease, and there is a demand for a more appropriate display method for the display effect of switching the effect image. It was true. It is also possible to improve interest by realizing a more appropriate display method.
Therefore, in the following embodiments, a gaming machine will be described in which the player is less likely to feel a sense of incongruity with regard to the display effect of switching effect images, and in which the decline in interest can be suppressed or the interest can be improved.

Embodiments modified from the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 254 to 256, 301 to 312, etc. will be described below with reference to FIGS. 388 to 400, and the like. 388 to 392 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or modification). FIG. 393 shows the display priority of these images. 394 and 397 show time charts in this embodiment. 395, 396, and 398 to 400 show display examples in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, a special reach background image is displayed in place of the normal background image in the special reach performances of "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

388 to 390 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, background images (normal background image A, normal background image B, special reach background image A, special reach background image B, normal background image C displayed during right-handed hitting), images of various decorative patterns, automatic Images of tanks, enemy tanks, etc., strip-shaped look-ahead effect images, relevant pending images, first to fourth pending images, character images for resurrection effects, fourth symbols, pending number display images, and error notification images are shown.
Data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modifications are stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.

388(a) shows a normal background image A. FIG. Background image A is usually an image representing a state in which a plurality of tanks are gathered near a destroyed building.
388(b) shows a normal background image B. FIG. The normal background image B is an image representing a state in which a tank is stopped in a hangar.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images displayed when the game state is the normal state.

FIG. 388(c) shows a special ready-to-reach background image A that is displayed when the special ready-to-reach effect "giant tank ready-to-win" effect is executed. The special reach background image A is an image representing sky, desert, and unpaved road.
FIG. 388(d) shows a special ready-to-win background image B displayed when a special ready-to-win effect “enemy tank destruction ready-to-win” effect is executed. The special reach background image B is an image representing the sky, grasslands, and roads.

FIG. 388(e) shows a normal background image C displayed in a variable probability state or a time saving state advantageous to the player, which may shift after the end of the jackpot game state. The normal background image C is an image indicating that the player will hit to the right.

Note that the size (the number of pixels) of the background image is the same as the size of the display area. Also, the background image is opaque. Therefore, some image is displayed behind the background image and is not visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 389 shows examples of decorative symbols that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Each decorative design consists of a left decorative design, a middle decorative design, and a right decorative design. These are appropriately switched and displayed according to the progress of the effect and the game situation.

Fig. 389(a) shows a normal decoration design. This figure shows an example of normal decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed. Each normal decorative pattern is displayed by scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, downward), or is temporarily stopped at a predetermined position. is also possible.
The display mode of the normal decorative pattern is determined according to the result of the special lottery. When the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a square pattern (for example, "222"), and when the result of the special lottery is not a big win. It is stopped and displayed in a form (for example, "352") that is not square. FIG. 389(a) shows, as an example, a state in which the normal decoration pattern is stopped at "352".
A normal decorative pattern consists of a vertically long rectangular background area and numbers and characters arranged on the front side of the background area. There is a one-to-one correspondence between numbers and characters.

FIG. 389(b) shows a special ready-to-win decorative pattern displayed when the special ready-to-win effect "giant tank ready-to-win" effect or "enemy tank destroying ready-to-win" effect is executed.
The special ready-to-win decorative pattern is displayed in a location near the center of the display area smaller than the normal decorative pattern. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the effect suggesting the result of the special lottery that is executed during the execution of the ``gigantic tank reach'' effect and the ``enemy tank destruction reach'' effect.
FIG. 389(c) is a modification of the special reach decoration pattern. In this way, a special ready-to-win decorative pattern in which numbers are displayed with more emphasis may be adopted.
In addition, FIG.389(b) and FIG.389(c) have shown the state in which the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
In addition, during the ready-to-win production, only the left decorative design and the right decorative design may be displayed, and the middle decorative design may not be displayed.

FIG. 389(d) shows a decoration pattern during right hitting displayed during right hitting. The right-handed decorative pattern is a decorative pattern displayed in a game state such as a probability variable state or a time-saving state in which the player is required to hit to the right. FIG. 389(d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol "352" is stopped during right-handed strokes.

As shown in FIG. 389, the normal decorative pattern, the special reach decorative pattern, and the right-handed middle decorative pattern can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters, the size of numbers, and the like. is. By visually recognizing the decorative symbols, it is easy to understand the effect situation and the game state.

Fig. 390(a) shows an image of own tank, an image of enemy tank, an image of "Sergeant Might", an image of "Colonel Dyna", and a mission button 3700 displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" effect is executed. A simulated image simulating the A special lottery result is suggested by the display mode of these images.
Fig. 390(b) shows an image of own tank, an image of enemy tank, an image of "Sergeant Might", an image of "Colonel Dyna", and an attack button displayed when the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is executed. A simulated image simulating 3710 is shown. A special lottery result is suggested by the display mode of these images.
A specific mode of suggesting the special lottery result will be described later with reference to FIG. 397 and the like.

FIG. 390(d) shows a pending image. In the lower part of the display area, from the left, the suspension display area, the first suspension display area, the second suspension display area, the third suspension display area, and the fourth suspension display area are set. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and basically white in color. Also, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.
The drawing shows an example in which the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area, and the reserved images are displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas.
When the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, the relevant reserved image or reserved image is displayed in the relevant reserved display area, the first to fourth reserved display areas. For example, in the state where the pending image is displayed in the pending display area and the pending image is displayed in the first pending display area and the second pending display area (that is, the state where there are two pending), for the first start port 2002 When a game ball wins, a pending image is displayed in the third pending display area.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 254 to 256, based on the prefetching of the hold, the specific hold image having a different display mode (color and shape) from the normal hold image and hold image (white and circular) or a specific hold image may be displayed to indicate that the special lottery result corresponding to the hold is highly expected to be a big hit.

For example, by displaying a red pending image instead of a white pending image that is a normal pending image, it may be possible to indicate that the special lottery result is expected to be a big hit. For example, in the order of white, green, red, and gold (which is recognized as gold by the player, but is represented by a combination of white pixels and yellow pixels that express metallic luster in the display process), the winning Expectations may be raised. Also, it may be configured such that the probability of being displayed in this order decreases. In addition, although the reserved image is mentioned as an example, it is preferable to display the reserved image in the same manner.
For example, the pending image or the pending image displayed at the time of the initial winning is most likely to be the white pending image or pending image, and the lowest likely to be the gold pending image or pending image. .
Further, it is preferable that the last displayed reserved image at the end timing of the variation of the decorative pattern has the highest probability of being the white reserved image and the lowest probability of being the gold reserved image.
In addition, the green, red, and gold pending images and pending images may be displayed at the time of starting winning, and the white pending images and the pending images at the time of starting winning are displayed until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. may be changed to green, red, and gold reserved images or the relevant reserved image at a predetermined timing.

In addition, the holding display area, the first holding display area to the fourth holding display area, the holding image or holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 is displayed, for example, the right During hitting, etc., in response to the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004, in the reservation display area, the first reservation display area to the fourth reservation display area, the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 You may make it display the said pending|holding image corresponding to , and a pending|holding image in a similar manner.
Alternatively, the holding image or the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is the same position as the holding image or the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 but different. You may make it display by a display mode. For example, the pending image or the pending image may be represented by using a hexagonal shape instead of a circular shape, or by superimposing the characters "electric chew" on each circular image.
In addition, the holding image and the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are displayed in the same manner as the holding image and the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. It may be displayed at a different position (for example, the lower left corner of the display area).
Further, by combining these, the pending image and the pending image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 may be displayed in different display modes at different positions.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can understand which starting port the hold corresponds to.

FIG. 390(e) shows a resurrection effect character and its lines that may be displayed when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a state of reach loss. Details of the effect using the resurrection effect character will be described later.

FIG. 390(f) shows the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405. For example, in the upper right of the display area, the It is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 389(d). The fourth symbol is variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol, and is stop-displayed according to the stop-display of the special symbol. Similarly to the decorative pattern, the fourth pattern is also displayed in a grid mode when the special lottery result is a big hit, and is displayed in a mode other than the grid mode when the special lottery result is a loss. FIG. 390(f) shows a state in which the numeral "352" is stopped and displayed as the fourth symbol.

Although an embodiment in which the fourth pattern consists of three numbers has been shown, there are only two types of patterns displayed as the fourth pattern, the symbol "O" indicating a big hit and the symbol "X" indicating a loss. may indicate the results of the special lottery. It should be noted that during the variable display of the special symbols, it is preferable to alternately display "O" and "X" for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds).
According to such a configuration, during the variable display of the decorative patterns, ``○'' and ``X'' are alternately displayed as the fourth pattern, and when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative patterns are displayed in a square pattern. Stop-display is performed, ``○'' is stop-displayed for the fourth pattern, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in a mode other than the grid pattern, and ``X'' is stop-displayed for the fourth pattern.
In this case, the combination of the decorative symbols stopped display can be displayed in a different manner for each variable display, but only two symbols, ie, "o" and "x", are stopped and displayed as the fourth symbol.

In this embodiment, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 1403 and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol display device 1405 are not performed at the same time, the fourth symbol is the first special symbol display device 1403 and the The second special symbol display device 1405 also shows the fluctuation situation, but the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display device 1403 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display device 1405 may be provided separately. For example, the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display 1403 is displayed above the number of reserved images display image, and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display 1405 is displayed below the number of reserved images display image. may be displayed.

FIG. 390(g) shows a pending number display image. The pending number display image consists of an image displaying the pending number corresponding to the first starting port 2002 on the upper side and an image displaying the pending number corresponding to the second starting port 2004 on the lower side. FIG. 388(h) shows a display example when the number of reservations corresponding to the first start port 2002 is 3 and the number of reservations corresponding to the second start port 2004 is 0. In this way, the pending number can be confirmed by the pending number display image shown in FIG. 390(g) as well as by the pending image and the pending image shown in FIG. 390(d).

FIG. 390(h) shows an error notification image displayed when some kind of abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when an illegal act to the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The figure shows an example of the message "Error occurred. Please call a clerk." The error notification image may indicate specific contents of an abnormality that occurred in the gaming machine or a fraudulent act performed by the player. In this case, the error notification image is displayed at a position that does not overlap the fourth symbol or the pending number display image.

Note that a hitting method instruction image for instructing operation of the handle 302 may be displayed by the same display method as the error notification image. For example, as the hitting instruction image, a message such as "Please hit to the right" and "Please return to hitting to the left" may be displayed. It is preferable that the display priority of the hitting instruction image is higher than the display priority of the fourth pattern and the pending number display image, and lower than the display priority of the error notification image.

By arranging an object in a virtual space, creating a moving image by moving a virtual camera in a predetermined manner, and displaying the moving image as a normal background image, the normal background image can be visually recognized dynamically. You may do so.
Figures 391(a) to 391(c) are display examples of a normal background moving image A generated by following a virtual camera, showing a group of tanks entering an enemy position in a virtual space at a predetermined timing. is shown. By generating and repeatedly reproducing such a normal background moving image A, it is possible to repeatedly display a dynamic background image in a loop.
Specifically, Figure 391(a) shows a display example when a group of tanks has departed, Figure 391(b) shows a display example of a group of tanks entering enemy territory, and Figure 391(c) shows a group of tanks Furthermore, display examples when entering an enemy position are shown respectively.

With reference to FIGS. 391(a) to 391(c), an example of displaying a moving image of a group of tanks entering an enemy position has been shown, but moving images of other modes may be displayed.
An example of a normal background moving image B created by moving the virtual camera from the initial position to the right and then to the left in the virtual space is shown below. In this normal background moving image B, each tank is stopped in the hangar. Also, the virtual camera returns to the position where the movement started when the movement ends. The direction of the virtual camera is adjusted so that it faces the direction of the tank. FIG. 391(d) shows a display example when the virtual camera is at the initial position. FIG. 391(e) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves to the right and moves to the front of the hangar. FIG. 391(f) shows a display example when the virtual camera is moved all the way to the right. The virtual camera then moves to the left and finally returns to its initial position. 391(d), 391(e), 391(f), 391(e), and 391(d). Become.
391(d), 391(e), 391(f), and 391(e), and then again in FIG. 391 ( From d), the normal background moving image B is displayed.

The length (playback time) of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is preferably set to approximately 30 to 120 seconds. In this case, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B can be looped and displayed at intervals of about 30 to 120 seconds.
A plurality of normal background moving images such as normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B are generated in advance, and displayed in a predetermined order including normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B. may
Note that the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B can also be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the same manner as the normal background image A and the normal background image B. FIG.

It should be noted that, as in an embodiment to be described later, when execution of a special reach effect, such as the "giant tank reach" effect or the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, is started while the normal background moving image A is being displayed, The background image is changed to a special reach-only background image or background moving image.
After that, in accordance with the end of the special ready-to-reach production, the normal background moving image A that was displayed before the special ready-to-reach production was displayed instead of the special ready-to-win background image or background moving image. good. At this time, the normal background moving image A may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (the display state shown in FIG. 391(a)), or the normal background image A may be reproduced even during the special ready-to-win effect. is progressed, and the normal background image A that has been progressed may be displayed in accordance with the end of the special ready-to-win effect.
Although the normal background moving image A is taken as an example, the normal background moving image B may also be displayed in the same manner.

An example has been shown in which the dynamically displayed normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed instead of the statically displayed normal background image A and the normal background image B, but the special reach background image A , the special reach background image B, the reserved image, and the reserved image may be displayed as still images or dynamically displayed using moving images. In the case of dynamic display, images may be displayed in a loop at predetermined intervals. For example, the special reach background image may be displayed in a loop with a period of about 10 to 60 seconds. Further, the pending image and the pending image may be displayed in a loop with a period of about 1 to 2 seconds.

FIGS. 392(a) to 392(c) show examples of background concealed images.
The background cover-up image is an image that is displayed when switching between the normal background image A or normal background image B and the special reach background image that is displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects are executed. . The background concealing images shown in FIGS. 392(a) to 392(c) consist of black images. The background-concealing image can reduce the visibility of an image having a lower display priority than the background-concealing image.
A plurality (specifically, three) of background concealing images having different degrees of lowering visibility are prepared for the background concealing image. Each background concealed image in this embodiment is black, but has a different degree of transparency. Specifically, the background concealing image A (FIG. 392A) with high transparency and low degree of visibility reduction, and the background concealment image B with medium transparency and moderate degree of visibility reduction (FIG. 392A). (b)), and a background concealing image C (FIG. 392(c)) with low transparency and a high degree of lowering visibility (FIG. 392(c)), which are switched in a predetermined order and sequentially displayed. Although the details will be described later, by sequentially displaying the background concealing images, the switching of the background images can be visually recognized by the player in a natural manner. Although three background-concealed images with different degrees of transparency are shown, two or four or more background-concealed images may be used, or a moving image consisting of more images may be used. In this case, the switching of the background is further visually recognized by the player in a natural manner.
Also, instead of preparing a plurality of background concealing images with different degrees of transparency, the visibility of the background image is changed by gradually changing the transparency of one black background concealing image using the function of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. You may do so. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly change the visibility of the background image while reducing the capacity used to store the background concealing image.
FIGS. 392(d) to 392(f) show other examples of background concealed images. This is an example in which an image of a bomb character (specifically, bomb character A shown in the above embodiment) is used as a background concealment image. In addition, although the details will be described later, a white background concealing image may be used instead of black.

Each image shown with reference to FIGS. 388 to 392 has its own display priority. FIG. 393 is a table showing display priorities, layer names in which images are arranged, and types of images that can be arranged in each layer. For example, the background image is placed on layer L90, the own tank image, enemy tank image, operation instruction image, etc. are placed on layers L75 to L80, and decorative patterns are placed on layer L70. are superimposed and displayed based on
As shown in the table in FIG. 393, background images (normal background image, special reach background image), various images displayed during special reach (own tank image, enemy tank image, "Sergeant Might" dialogue image, " Colonel Dyna' dialogue image, operation instruction image imitating attack button 3710 and mission button 3700, etc.), decorative patterns (normal decorative pattern, special reach decorative pattern, etc.), pseudo-running number display image, belt-like prefetch effect image, first Suspended image to fourth suspended image, the suspended image, a dialogue preview image and background concealing image described later with reference to FIG. 433 and the like, a game result image described later with reference to FIG. The display priority increases in the order of the dialogue), the fourth pattern, the pending number display image, and the error notification image.
Specifically, the display priority of various images, decorative patterns, and the pending image displayed during special reach is higher than the display priority of the background image, and the various images, decorative patterns, and the like displayed during special reach. A pending image or the like is displayed in front of the background image.
On the other hand, the display priority of the background concealed image is higher than the display priority of the background image, various images displayed during special reach, decorative patterns, the hold image, etc., and the background concealed image is placed in front of these images. By being displayed, these images are hidden and visibility is reduced.

An example has been shown in which the reserved image is arranged on the layer L40 and the reserved image is arranged on the layer L45, but the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L26 and the reserved image on the layer L27. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background hiding image arranged on the layer L30.
Alternatively, the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L21 and the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L22. In this case, the pending image and the pending image are not hidden by the background hiding image placed on the layer L30 or the game result image placed on the layer L25.

Also, a decorative pattern may be arranged on the layer L26. In this case, the decorative pattern is not hidden by the background hiding image arranged on the layer L30.

Various production modes in this embodiment and various modifications are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of the special lottery determined by the main control board 1310, the game state, etc. executed in time.
For example, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the peripheral control board 1510 stops and displays the decorative symbols in a non-reach loss state (for example, "352") in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, or After reaching the reach state (for example, "2↓2"), the stop display is finally performed in the reach-loss state (for example, "232"). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative pattern is put in a ready-to-win state ("2↓2"), and then the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed in a grid (for example, "222"). conduct.
It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 also determines whether special ready-to-reach effects (“huge tank reach”, “enemy tank destroying reach”) and other effects to be described later are to be executed.

First, an example of rendering when the decorative pattern is not in the ready state and the background image is not switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 394(a) and 395. FIG. FIG. 394(a) shows a time chart in this production example, and FIG. 395 shows a display example at a predetermined timing in this production example.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 395(a) shows a state in which the variable display of decorative symbols is stopped. The number of reservations at this time is 3. As the decorative pattern, a decorative pattern is usually displayed. A background image A is usually displayed behind the decorative pattern as a background image.
When the timing t0 comes from this state, a new variable display of the decoration pattern is started. FIG. 395(b) shows the display state immediately after the variable display is started.
Thereafter, left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a downward scrolling manner. FIG. 395(c) shows the display state at that time.
After that, after the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs and the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, the left decorative drawing is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t5. FIG. 395(d) shows the display state at that time.

Next, at timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 395(e) shows the display state at that time. Next, at timing t15, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at timing t16, left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display of the reserved image ends. FIG. 395(f) shows the display state during the period from timing t16 to timing t17. In this state, it is shown that the special lottery results are lost. After timing t17, the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the next hold is performed.

Next, an example of effect when the background image is not switched while the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 394(b) and the display example shown in FIG. During the period from timing t0 to timing t10, a display similar to the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 394(a) is performed.
In this example of effect, at timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same number "2" as the left decorative symbol, and the ready-to-win state occurs. FIG. 396(a) shows the display state at that time. After that, at timing t20, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t21, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the player is shown whether the special lottery result is a loss or a big hit.
FIG. 396(b) shows a display example during the period from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a loss. In the drawing, a state in which the decoration pattern is stopped at "232" is shown.
FIG. 396(c) shows a display example during the period from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a big win. In the drawing, each decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state with a grid of "222".
After timing t22, when the special lottery result is a loss, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next hold is executed, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the background image is replaced with the normal background image. From A, the background image is switched to the background image during the big win exclusively for the middle of the big win, and the big win game state is executed.

As compared with the example of effect in which the ready-to-win state is not shown with reference to FIG. 394(a), the variable display time of decorative symbols is longer in the example of effect in which the ready-to-win state is shown with reference to FIG. 394(b). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel for a long time the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit.

In the examples of effects shown with reference to FIGS. 394(a) and 395 and the examples of effects shown with reference to FIGS. , and the special reach background image A and the special reach background image B are not displayed. Also, the background hidden image is not displayed.

In the time chart of FIG. 394(a), while the decorative design is changing (timing t0 to timing t16), while the decorative design is stopped (timing t16 to timing t17), and during the next and subsequent decorative design fluctuations (timing t17). , the normal background image A is continuously displayed, but the normal background image A is displayed even in a state where the pending number is 0 and the decorative pattern does not change. FIG. 396(d) shows a display example after "253" indicating that the pending number is 0 and that the result of the special lottery is a loss in the most recent decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed. This display state is maintained unless the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) occurs.
As with the normal background image, the display state of the normal background moving image is maintained in a state in which the decorative pattern does not change. Specifically, even after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the reproduction of the normal background moving image displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols is continued. Also, after the background moving image is reproduced to the end, it is preferable that the moving image is reproduced again from the beginning so that the moving image is reproduced in a loop.
Thus, the normal background image or the normal background moving image is an image or moving image displayed as a background image when the decorative symbols are not variably displayed and the game is not in the jackpot game state.

When the state of zero pending numbers continues for a predetermined period of time (when the variable display is not performed for a predetermined period of time), the decorative pattern may not be displayed.
Specifically, if the variable display of the decorative design is not performed and the number of reservations is 0, the decorative design shown in FIG. Seconds), after the stop display of the decorative pattern is further continued, the display of the decorative pattern may not be performed. FIG. 396(e) shows a display example in which the decorative symbols are not stopped.
Such a display state may be continued until a game ball wins for the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004).
It should be noted that the display area may be shifted to a demonstration image display state in which a demonstration image for introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed. In the demonstration image display state, the demonstration image may be displayed in front of the stopped decorative pattern, or the demonstration image may be displayed in a state where the decorative pattern is not displayed.
In this way, the normal background image A is continuously displayed even from the state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed to the state in which the decorative symbols are not variably displayed.
Also, from the state in which the decorative pattern is not variably displayed, from the state where the number of reservations corresponding to the first start port 2002 (or the second start port 2004) is 0, the first start port 2002 (or the second start port 2004 ), the normal background image A is continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started.

It should be noted that in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols is not performed and the number of reserved symbols is 0, and after the stationary display of the decorative symbols has been performed for one second, the touch of the handle 302 by the player is detected by the handle touch sensor 310. If the undetected state continues for a predetermined period of time, the decorative design may not be displayed.
In addition, when the player's contact with the handle 302 is newly detected by the handle touch sensor 310, or when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) occurs, decorative symbols are displayed. may be resumed. Also, it is preferable to end the display of the demonstration image at the same time. Also in this case, it is preferable that the normal background image A is continuously displayed regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed.

Although the normal background image A is taken as an example, the normal background image B and the normal background image C are also used in the same manner as the normal background image A, and can be displayed as background images while the decorative pattern is changing or not changing.

In addition, the normal background image satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, if a predetermined lottery is won, the special reach effect, which is a high-expectation reach effect, will result in a loss. , etc.), one of the normal background image A and the normal background image B may be switched to the other.
In addition, in the variable display of the most recent decorative pattern that is started after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the variable display executed next to the variable display in which the special reach effect was performed as a result of losing) , it is preferable to execute an effect of switching the normal background image.
Although the normal background image A and the normal background image B have been described as normal background images that can be displayed in a game state (normal state) that is not a game state of hitting right, the number of types is not limited to two, and may be three or more. . In that case, the normal background image may be switched based on a predetermined rule, such as displaying in a predetermined order. Alternatively, normal background images may be switched irregularly, such as by being displayed in random order.
In addition, when the game state (probability variable state or time-saving state) of hitting to the right is reached with the jackpot game state as a trigger, the normal background image C is displayed as the background image during hitting to the right. In this way, the displayed normal background image may be changed with the change in the game state as a trigger. Note that there may be a plurality of background images other than the normal background image C as the background image during right-handed hitting. Also in this case, the background image may be switched in the same manner as the normal background image display method in the normal state.

394(a), 394(b), 395, and 396, the background image is not switched during the variable display of decorative patterns, and the normal background image is continuously displayed. 394(c) and 397(a) show the effect of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" in which the normal background image is switched to the special Reach background image during the variable display of decorative patterns. Description will be made with reference to the time charts and display examples shown in FIGS. In the time chart shown in FIG. 394(c), an example of the rendering from timing t0 to timing t10 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" rendering is shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 397(a). Rendering examples at timing t10 to timing t45 in the rendering are respectively shown.
It should be noted that during the period from timing t0 to timing t13, the variable display is performed in the same manner as the production example shown with reference to FIG. 394(b). FIG. 398(a) is a display example at a predetermined timing during a predetermined period (timing t10 to timing t13) before the background concealing image is displayed.

In this rendering example, from timing t13 to timing t19, background concealing image A, background concealing image B, and background concealing image C are displayed in a predetermined order. Also, at timing t16 when the background concealing image C is displayed, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B. FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 397(a), the background concealing image A is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t13 to timing t14. FIG. 398(b) shows a display example during this period.
Also, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t14 to timing t15. FIG. 398(c) shows a display example during this period.
Also, the background concealed image C is displayed during the period (two seconds) from timing t15 to timing t17. FIG. 398(d) shows a display example during this period.
Also, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t17 to timing t18. FIG. 398(e) shows a display example during this period.
Also, the background concealing image A is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t18 to timing t19. FIG. 398(f) shows a display example during this period.

At timing t16 when the background concealing image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B, and the decorative pattern is changed from the normal background image shown in FIG. However, since the background concealing image C is displayed in front of the background image and the decorative pattern, it can be recognized that these images have been switched. is after timing t17 when the background concealed image B is displayed.
The special ready-to-win decoration pattern is displayed during the period (timing t16 to timing t39) in which the special ready-to-win background image is displayed. Further, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state without being scrolled downward.

From timing t30 to timing t33, an operation valid period occurs during which acceptance of an operation on attack button 3710 is valid. FIG. 398(g) shows a display example during this period. Simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a line instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 is also displayed.
If an appropriate operation mode for the attack button 3710 is performed during the operation valid period, or if the operation valid period ends, a mode suggesting a special lottery result (whether or not an enemy tank is destroyed is displayed) or) is displayed.

FIG. 399 shows a display example when the special lottery result is a big hit. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a big win, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In addition, the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is displayed in a state temporarily stopped in a square pattern ("222") at timing t34 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 has ended. FIG. 399(a) shows this state.

On the other hand, FIG. 400 shows a display example when the special lottery result is a loss. If the result of the special lottery is a loss, an image of the enemy tank passing through without being destroyed is displayed. In addition, the special ready-to-win decorative pattern is displayed in a state temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win state (“232”) at timing t34 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 has ended. FIG. 400(a) shows this state.

Next, the background concealing image is displayed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
Specifically, the background concealing image A is displayed during a period (one second) from timing t36 to timing t37. FIGS. 399(b) and 400(b) show display examples during this period.
Also, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t37 to timing t38. FIGS. 399(c) and 400(c) show display examples during this period.
Also, the background concealed image C is displayed during the period (two seconds) from timing t38 to timing t40. FIGS. 399(d) and 400(d) show display examples during this period.
Also, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t40 to timing t41. FIGS. 399(e) and 400(e) show display examples during this period.
Also, the background concealing image A is displayed during the period (one second) from timing t41 to timing t42. FIGS. 399(f) and 400(f) show display examples during this period.

At timing t39 when the background concealing image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the special ready-to-win background image B to the normal background image A, and the decorative design is changed from the special ready-to-reach decorative design B to the normal decorative design A. However, since the background concealing image C is displayed in front of the background image and the decorative pattern, it is possible to recognize that these images have been switched at timing t40 when the background concealing image B is displayed. After that.

During the period from timing t34 to timing t44, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are maintained in a temporarily stopped state. During the period from timing t42 to timing t44, the background concealing image A is not displayed, and the visibility of the normal decoration pattern A during the temporary stop is not hindered by the background concealing image. FIGS. 399(g) and 400(g) show the display state at this time.

At timing t44, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result is shown to the player. FIGS. 399(h) and 400(h) show the display state during the period from timing t44 to timing t45.

394(b) and 396 in which the background image is not switched and the special reach in which the background image is switched as shown in FIGS. 394(c) and 397 to 400 Reach ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") is more likely to be a big hit in the latter. For example, while the expectation level is 3% in the former case, the expectation level may be 10% in the latter case.

Further, it may be possible to make it possible to execute a plurality of special reach with different expectations of a big hit, and to execute any one of the special reach. In this case, the background image of the special reach, the image of the own tank, the image of the enemy tank, and the operation section required to be operated may be changed according to the type of the special reach. Thus, by visually recognizing the displayed special ready-to-win background image, the image of own tank and enemy tank, and the operation instruction image of the operation unit, the player can know whether the expectation of a big hit is high or low.
It should be noted that a form suggesting the degree of expectation in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.

At timing t16, an example of the effect of switching the background image was shown, but since it is after timing t17 that the change to the special reach background image B or the small special reach decoration pattern becomes recognizable, special You may make it change to the reach background image B or a small special reach decoration pattern.
At timing t39, an example of the effect of switching the background image is shown, but since it is after timing t40 that the change to the normal background image A or the small normal decorative pattern becomes recognizable, the normal background image is displayed at timing t38 or t40. A or a change to a normal decoration pattern may be performed.

Thus, in this example of effect, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B at timing t16. Similarly, the background image is switched from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A at timing t39.
At timing t16 and timing t39, the background concealing image C is displayed, so the player does not recognize that the background image has been switched.

In the switching effects of the background images in this embodiment, the background concealing image A and the background concealing image B are displayed in order, and the visibility of the background images decreases, and the background image before switching becomes gradually difficult to recognize. and a period during which the background concealing image C is displayed and the background images before and after switching are not visible (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "second period"). Then, the background-concealing image B and the background-concealing image A are displayed in order, the visibility of the background image increases, and the background image after switching gradually becomes easier to see (hereinafter referred to as the "third period"). (sometimes).
After the end of the third period, during the period until the decorative pattern stops changing (period from timing t42 to timing t44), the normal background image is maintained in a state where it can be easily viewed (hereinafter referred to as this period may be referred to as the “fourth period”).

According to such a configuration, the switching of the background image is perceived by the player in a natural manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.
Also, at the start of the special reach, the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image while the background masking image is displayed, so the player perceives the start of the special reach in a natural way, which reduces the interest. can be suppressed.
Similarly, at the end of the special reach, the background image of the special reach is switched to the normal background image while the background concealing image is displayed. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In such a background image switching effect, the background image is switched during the period (second period) when the background is most difficult to see (the background image switching is performed at the same time as the third period starts). may be done). As a result, the background can be switched smoothly, and the player is less likely to feel discomfort in the presentation.
In addition, since the black background concealing image is displayed in the entire display area, the luminosity of the display area is reduced, and the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced, thereby reducing the movement of the image within the display area. . Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is less aware of the display contents of the display area by operating a smartphone recognize that an opportunity has come to pay attention to the display area.
Further, when the special reach is finished, a black background concealing image is displayed and the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image, so that the display content in the display area is simple for a predetermined period. As a result, even if the player is shown that the result of the special lottery is a loss by the display result of the special reach, the player's feeling of anticipation for the big win is calmed down, and the subsequent variable display is performed. Since the game is continued without losing the interest in the game, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the game machine.

An example of the display when the special lottery result is a big hit was shown with reference to FIG. Alternatively, without displaying the background concealing image, the display mode shown in FIG. 399(a) may be continued until timing t44, and the special ready-to-win decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed. Further, although the background concealing image is displayed, at timing t39, the special reach background image B may not be switched to the normal background image A, but may be switched to the background image during the big win.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the feeling of being overwhelmed by the occurrence of the big win until the big win game is started.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400, the result of the special lottery was indicated by the display mode of the enemy tank and the temporary stop display mode of the special reach decorative pattern. As the decorative pattern, a large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 389(c) may be adopted.
For example, the end timing (timing t33) of the operation valid period, or the timing (timing t34) when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped after a predetermined time (1 second) has passed since the operation valid period ended. Then, the decoration pattern may be changed from the small special ready-to-win decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 389(b) to the large special ready-to-win decorative pattern shown with reference to FIG. 389(c).
It is preferable that the display of the large special ready-to-win decorative pattern continues until timing t39 during the second period, and the normal decorative pattern is displayed after timing t39.
When the special lottery result is a big hit and the background concealing image is not displayed, the display of the large special ready-to-win decoration pattern may be continued until timing t45.

The background hiding image may be configured so that the reserved image or the reserved image is not hidden. For example, when the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. Each display example shown in (h) is displayed like each display example shown in FIGS. 401(a) to 401(h). Such a display can be realized by setting the display priority of the reserved image and the reserved image higher than the display priority of the background masking image. Note that the background hiding image may be configured so that the pending image and the pending image are not hidden not only at the end of the special reach but also at the start of the special reach.

According to such a configuration, since the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is not lowered, the player can check the number of reservations, and operate the handle 302 to move the game ball to the first start port 2002. You can make a decision whether to win or not.
Specifically, the background masking image is displayed at the start of special reach, which has a relatively long fluctuation display time compared to reach, where only the background image is displayed, or when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped during reach. immediately after In addition, from the state in which the ready-to-win decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the number of reservations is reduced by one and the next variable display is started, or a big win game state is generated, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is started.
Therefore, if it is possible to confirm the number of reservations at the start of special reach, it is possible to determine whether to increase the number of reservations during special reach, where the expectation of a big hit is high and the need to increase the number of reservations is not necessarily high. It becomes possible.
Also, if it is possible to confirm the number of reservations at the end of the special reach, the player who has stopped shooting the game ball during the special reach can accurately determine whether or not to shoot the game ball. .

With reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, an embodiment has been shown in which the look-ahead effect display is performed over a plurality of variable displays based on the look-ahead results. The embodiment shown with reference to 400 or the like may be modified so as to perform a look-ahead effect display.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 398 to 400, etc., if the configuration is such that a read-ahead effect display is performed, the display examples shown in FIGS. A) to FIG. 402(h) are displayed as display examples.
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 402, as the prefetch effect display in the special reach, band-like prefetch effect images with a character string of "Enemy tank approaching!" In addition, by displaying the background concealing image A and the background concealing image B, the first period in which the strip-like prefetch effect image is difficult to recognize becomes visible, and by displaying the background concealing image C, the strip-shaped prefetch effect image becomes invisible. It will be the second period. After that, the background concealing image B and the background concealing image A are displayed, so that the third period in which the strip-like prefetch effect image becomes gradually easier to see, and the strip-like prefetch effect image changes from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see. . Such a display mode can be realized by setting the display priority of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image lower than the display priority of the background hiding image.

The display of the band-like prefetch effect image ends at timing t45 when the stop display of the decorative symbols ends. Alternatively, the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image may be terminated during the period from timing t36 to timing t42 (see FIG. 397) during which the background concealing image is displayed. In this case, the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image may be ended in any one of the first period to the third period. Alternatively, the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image may be ended in the fourth period until the visibility of the background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image may be terminated at timing t44 when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In this manner, the band-like prefetch effect image can be displayed in a visually difficult or invisible manner by using the background concealing image using the same display method as other images such as the reserved image.

Also in the first period and the third period during which the background concealing image is being displayed, by displaying the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image, it is possible to know under what level of expectation the variable display of the decorative pattern was performed. A player can recognize it.
On the other hand, by ending the display of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image in the first to third periods (especially the second period), the display of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image can be ended in a natural manner.
Further, by ending the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image before the stationary display of the decorative symbols, the visibility of the stationary displayed decorative symbols is not hindered.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 402, the reserved image, the reserved image, and the prefetch effect image are rendered invisible/invisible by the background concealing image.
On the other hand, the pre-reading effect image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. can be In this case, since the reserved image, the reserved image, and the prefetch effect image are displayed in front of the background concealed image, these images are easily visible.
On the other hand, the reserved image and the reserved image are displayed in front of the background concealed image to make it easy to see, and the prefetch effect image is displayed behind the background concealed image to make it difficult or invisible to see. may be displayed.
Alternatively, the reserved image and the reserved image are displayed behind the background concealed image to make it difficult or invisible, and the prefetch effect image is displayed in front of the background concealed image so that it is easily visible. You may
It should be noted that the superimposition of these images may be performed by appropriately setting the display priority for each image and using the layer function.

When the reserved image or both the reserved image and the look-ahead effect image are invisible, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the scene has been switched.
When both the pending image, the pending image, and the prefetch effect image are visible, the player cannot easily recognize that the scene has been switched, but the player recognizes the degree of expectation indicated by these images. can.
When only one of the reserved image or the reserved image and the look-ahead effect image is visible, the player can roughly recognize the degree of expectation, although the scene switching feeling is somewhat inferior.

In addition, when the reserved image is displayed in a special manner (for example, the reserved image in green or red) indicating that the expectation of the big win is high, it indicates that the expectation of the big win is high. recognizable.
For example, if the pending image can be visually recognized at the start of the special reach, it is possible to recognize under what degree of expectation the special reach is being performed.
Also, if the pending image is visible at the end of the special reach, under what level of expectation did the decorative pattern at the time of reach stop with a grid indicating a big hit, or non-matching indicating a loss? It is possible to confirm whether it has stopped in the manner of the eyes. For example, if the result is a loss under high expectations, or a big hit under low expectations, the results may be presented in a way that betrays the player's expectations. can make you feel. Then, in subsequent games, if the same pending image is displayed, even if a low expectation is shown, the expectation that the result of the special reach will result in a big win is lost. In addition, even if a high degree of expectation is indicated, it is possible to enjoy the performance in the special reach with a sense of tension considering that the result of the special reach will be a failure.
Further, by displaying the pending image or the pending image, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the player misunderstands that the gaming machine is broken.

A white background concealing image may be employed as the background concealing image. For example, when the embodiments shown in FIGS. 398 to 400 are modified to display a white background concealing image, the display examples shown in FIGS. 400(a) to 400(h) are It will be displayed like the display examples shown in FIGS. 403(a) to 403(h).
Similarly to the black background-concealing image, white background-concealing images A to C having different degrees of transparency are prepared. , the visibility of the image located behind the white background concealing image is gradually reduced (FIGS. 403(b) and 403(c)). Next, a white background concealing image C is displayed to make the image behind the white background concealing image invisible (Fig. 403(d)). Next, the white background-concealing images B and A are displayed, and the transparency is gradually increased to gradually improve the visibility of the images positioned behind the white background-concealing image (FIG. 403(e), Figure 403(f)). After that, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily and then stopped (Fig. 403(g), Fig. 403(h)).

A predetermined character or the like may be displayed as the background masking image. For example, when the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 398 to 400 are modified to display a plurality of bomb characters, the display examples shown in FIGS. 404(a) to 404(h) are displayed as display examples.
Note that in the first period in this modified embodiment, the display of the image of the bomb character and the triangular background area as the background concealing image A starts from the upper left and lower right of the display area (Fig. 404 (b )), and then the background concealed image B is displayed (FIG. 404(c)).
In the second period, the image of the bomb character and two trapezoidal background areas are displayed as the background masking image C (FIG. 404(d)).
Also, in the third period, the background concealing image B is displayed (FIG. 404(e)), and then the background concealing image A is displayed (FIG. 404(f)). After that, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily and then stopped (Fig. 404(g), Fig. 404(h)).
Thus, in this embodiment, the background concealing image is composed of the image of the bomb character and the background area (triangular or trapezoidal portion).
In addition, it is preferable to use a single color (white or black) for the background area. Also, the bomb character itself may be a still image, or may be displayed dynamically such as by moving the hands and feet of the bomb character. In place of or in addition to the bomb character, at least one of characters other than the bomb character, a predetermined pattern, the model name of the pachinko machine 1, the name of the special reach being executed or being executed, etc. It may be displayed as part of the background concealed image on the near side of the area.
According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be switched to the variable display of the decorative symbols to be performed next.

With reference to FIGS. 398 to 400 and the like, an example of switching the background image by displaying a black background concealing image at both timings of the start and end of the special reach has been shown.
As the background concealing image, instead of the black background concealing image, a white background concealing image is displayed with reference to FIG. However, instead of displaying the same background concealing image at the start and end of the special reach, different background concealing images may be displayed at the start and end of the special reach.
For example, as the background concealment image at the start of the special reach, any one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. is displayed, and a black background concealment image is displayed at the end of the special reach. Any one of a background concealing image, a white background concealing image, and a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like may be displayed.
Specifically, a white background concealment image is displayed as the background concealment image at the start of the special reach, and a black background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed as the background concealment image at the end of the special reach. You may make it

In the embodiment referring to FIG. 397(a), the first period is a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see, the second period is a period in which the background image is invisible, and the background image is gradually easy to see. An example is shown in which the length of the third period (specifically, two seconds) is the same. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to simplify the display processing of the background concealed image and reduce the number of man-hours required for developing the image effect.

On the other hand, the length of each period may be different rather than the same. Figure 397 (b), Figure 397 (c) is a modified example (modified example 01 to modified example 12) in which the length of the first period to the third period at the time of special reach start and special reach end is different showing. For example, in modification 08, the length of the first period is 3 seconds, which is the longest, the length of the second period is 1 second, which is the shortest, and the length of the third period is 2 seconds, which is intermediate. there is
Note that in each modification, the length of the fourth period may also be different from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397(a).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch and display the background images within a limited time without unnecessarily lengthening the time required to display the background concealing image.

Below, the basic effects at the start of the special reach of Modification 01 to Modification 12 are shown.

According to Modification 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "third period>first period=second period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By increasing the time until it is recognized), you can enjoy which one of the multiple reach effects is displayed.

According to Modification 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of special reach is set to "first period = second period > third period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By shortening the time until it is recognized), it is possible to recognize the special reach effect to be executed at an early stage.

According to Modification 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period>first period=third period" (that is, the background concealing image C is displayed By extending the period in which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed), it is possible to secure a long time to enjoy which reach effect out of the plurality of reach effects will be executed. .

According to Modification 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "first period = third period > second period" (that is, the background concealing image C is displayed By shortening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed, the special reach effect can be enjoyed for a long time.

According to Modification 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (that is, the normal background image is completely By extending the time until it becomes unrecognizable), it is possible to provide the joy of developing into a special reach effect for a long time.

According to Modification 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period = third period> first period" (that is, the normal background image is completely By shortening the time until recognition becomes impossible, the background concealing image C is displayed early, so that the user can quickly prepare for the special ready-to-win effect.

According to Modification 07, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period > second period > third period", so that the normal background image is completely The time until the recognition becomes unrecognizable becomes longer, and the pleasure of developing into the special ready-to-win performance can be provided for a long time, and the special ready-to-reach performance to be executed can be recognized at an early stage.

According to the modified example 08, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "first period> third period> second period", so that the normal background image is completely The time until it becomes unrecognizable is long, and the joy of developing into a special reach performance can be provided for a long time, and the background hiding image C is displayed, and the special reach background image and the normal background image are displayed. By shortening the period when it is not performed, it is possible to enjoy the special reach effect for a long time.

According to the modification 09, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period> first period> third period". It is possible to secure a long time for enjoying which ready-to-win performance will be executed, and to quickly recognize the special ready-to-reach performance to be executed.

According to Modification 10, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "second period>third period>first period", so that the background concealing image C is displayed early. , it is possible to prepare for the special ready-to-win performance at an early stage, and to secure a long time for enjoying which ready-to-win performance among a plurality of ready-to-win performances will be executed.

According to Modified Example 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "third period > first period > second period", so that the special reach effect is extended for a long time. The player can be entertained, and can enjoy which ready-to-win effect is displayed among a plurality of ready-to-win effects.

According to Modified Example 12, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is "third period>second period>first period", so that the background concealing image C appears early. Since it is displayed in , it is possible to prepare early for the special reach effect and enjoy which reach effect is displayed among a plurality of reach effects.

Below, the basic effects at the end of the special reach of Modification 01 to Modification 12 are shown.

According to Modification 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period > first period = second period" (that is, the normal background image is completely By prolonging the time to recognize it, you can take time to change your feelings for the next change.

According to Modification 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period = second period> third period" (that is, the normal background image is completely By shortening the time until the change is recognized), it is possible to end the expectation for the change early and to have the expectation for the next change (quick change of mind).

According to Modification 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is "second period>first period=third period" (that is, the background concealing image C is displayed By lengthening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed, the time during which the background concealing image C is displayed can be made to feel longer, and the normal background image may not be displayed. It can make you feel hopeful.

According to Modification 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is "first period = third period > second period" (that is, the background concealing image C is displayed By shortening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed), the normal background image, which has low visibility, can be recognized at an early stage and the expectation for the change can be generated at an early stage. You can end it and have expectations for the next change (you can quickly switch your feelings).

According to Modification 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By extending the time until it becomes unrecognizable, it is possible to enjoy the afterglow that the fluctuation is off.

According to Modification 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period = third period > first period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely By shortening the time until it becomes unrecognizable, it is possible to end the sense of expectation for the change early and to have expectations for the next change (switching feelings quickly). .

According to modification 07, the relationship between the lengths of the first to third periods at the end of the special reach is set to "first period > second period > third period", so that the fluctuation is off. In addition, the anticipation for the change can be terminated early, and the expectation for the next change can be made (the feeling can be changed quickly).

According to modification 08, the relationship between the lengths of the first to third periods at the end of the special reach is set to "first period > third period > second period", so that the fluctuation is off. In addition, the normal background image, which has low visibility, can be recognized at an early stage to end the expectation for the change early, and to have the expectation for the next change (switching of feelings can be done quickly).

According to Modified Example 09, the background concealing image C is displayed by setting the relationship of the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach as "second period>first period>third period". It is possible to make the user feel that the time for which the background image is displayed is long, and it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the normal background image will not be displayed. It is possible to have expectations for fluctuations in (can quickly switch feelings).

According to Modification 10, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is "second period > third period > first period", so that the special reach background image is completely The time until the change becomes unrecognizable is shortened, and the background concealed image C is displayed for a long time even though the expectation for the change was thought to have ended early, creating a new expectation. be able to.

According to Modification 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period> first period> second period", so that visibility is low but normal By recognizing the background image early and ending the expectation for the change early, and by extending the time until the normal background image is completely recognized, the change in feelings toward the next change You can take your time.

According to modification 12, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period> second period> first period", so that By ending the anticipation early and lengthening the time until the background image is completely recognized, it is possible to take time to change the mood for the next change.

In addition, the display mode of the background concealed image at the start of the special reach of the embodiment shown in FIG. 397(a) and the modifications shown in FIGS. The embodiment shown in FIG. 397(b) and the display mode of the background concealed image at the end of the special reach in each modification shown in FIG. 397(b) and FIG. 397(c) may be appropriately combined. For example, at the start of special reach, each background concealing image may be displayed in the form of modification 01, and at the end of special reach, each background concealing image may be displayed in the form of modification 02.
With such a configuration, the background image can be switched in a more appropriate manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397(a), the number of seconds in each of the first to third periods was 2 seconds, and the total number of seconds was 6 seconds. Also, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397(b) and 397(c), the number of seconds in each period of the first to third periods is 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds is 5. seconds to 7 seconds, but these are only examples.
For example, each of the first period to the third period may be appropriately set within a range of approximately 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds may be appropriately set within a range of approximately 3 to 9 seconds. It should be noted that the number of seconds of each period may be shortened or lengthened as long as the effect is recognized.

As shown in modifications 04, 05, 08, and 11 of FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the first period.
Also, as shown in Modification 01, Modification 04, Modification 08, Modification 11, and Modification 12 in FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the third period.
Also, as shown in modifications 04, 08, and 11 of FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the first and third periods.

During the first period and the third period, the transparency of the background concealing image changes and is dynamically visible, and although the decorative pattern and the background image are less visible, they are not invisible. On the other hand, during the second period, the decorative patterns and the background image became invisible and the display seemed to stop, and depending on the player, the gaming machine broke down (or the special lottery result was a big win, and the expectation was high). However, the second period is relatively shorter than the first and third periods to suppress the occurrence of such a situation. can be done.

Further, when displaying a black background concealing image, the light from the light emitting means provided in the game machine located behind the player's own face or the game machine is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. , there is a risk that it will be visually recognized by the player and the sense of immersion in the game will be reduced. Such a tendency is conspicuous when a glossy (glare) type display device is adopted as the liquid crystal display device constituting the game board side effect display device 1600 . However, by making the second period shorter than the first period and the third period, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

Note that the third period may be executed after the first period is executed without providing the second period. In this case, the switching of the background image is preferably performed at the switching timing from the first period to the third period. Similar effects can be obtained with such a configuration.
Note that in the embodiment and modification shown in FIG. 397, if the second period is not provided, the third period is executed after the end of the first period without changing the start timing of the first period. You may do so. Alternatively, the end timing of the first period may be modified to match the start timing of the third period without changing the end timing of the third period.

As shown in modifications 03, 06, 09, 10, and 12 of FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the first period.
Also, as shown in modifications 02, 03, 07, 09, and 10 of FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the third period.
Also, as shown in Modification 03, Modification 09, and Modification 10 in FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the first and third periods.

According to such a configuration, since the background image and the decorative pattern are hidden by the background masking image so that they cannot be visually recognized for a long period of time, the display contents in the display area are simplified, and the player's feelings are reflected in the background. It is possible to switch to the effect after switching the image or to the game situation.
For example, at the start of the special reach, the player's feelings can be concentrated on the content of the effect performed at the time of the special reach. In this case, a plurality of special reach effects with different expectations may be executed as the special reach effects, and one of the special reach effects may be executed (the "giant tank reach" effect described later is an example. is). In this case, it is possible to tantalize the player as to which special reach will develop, and to improve interest.
On the other hand, at the end of the special reach, the player's mind can be switched to the next pattern variation or big hit game.

Further, when a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like is displayed as the background concealing image, the player can take time to carefully observe the displayed background concealing image in the second period. Feelings will be changed more. It should be noted that the background concealed image may be dynamically displayed such that the character moves around within the screen. In this case, the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol variation or the big win game.
On the other hand, a black or white background concealed image changes only in transparency, and the image itself does not move. Therefore, unnecessary information is not given to the player, and the delimitation of the performance can be made clearer, so that the player's feelings can be switched.

As shown in modifications 02, 05, 07, 08, and 09 in FIG. 397, the first period may be longer than the third period.

According to such a configuration, the player can sufficiently perceive that the switching of the background image has started, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot understand how the content of the effect has changed. If the first period is shorter than the third period, there is a risk that the player will not be able to understand how the contents of the presentation have changed.

As shown in modifications 01, 06, 10, 11, and 12 of FIG. 397, the third period may be longer than the first period.

According to such a configuration, since the special reach background image is gradually displayed at the start of the special reach, the player feels teased, and the expectation for the special reach increases. . In this case, a plurality of special reach effects with different expectations may be executed as the special reach effects, and one of the special reach effects may be executed (the "giant tank reach" effect described later is an example. is). In this case, the player is interested in which special ready-to-win effect will be executed, but by lengthening the third period, the player can be made to feel a stronger interest.
In addition, the visibility of the special reach background image can be quickly lowered at the end of the special reach, and the player's feelings can be switched to the next pattern variation or the big win game. Especially when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the effect is great.

The embodiment shown in FIGS. 397(a) to 397(c) may be modified so that the first period is not provided. In this case, the background concealing image is not displayed during the first period, and the second period starts at the timing shown in the figure.
Even if the configuration is such that the first period is not provided, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

The embodiment shown in FIGS. 397(a) to 397(c) may be modified so that the third period is not provided. In this case, the background concealing image is not displayed during the third period, and the second period ends at the timing shown in the figure.
Even if the third period is not provided in this manner, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested depending on the type of background masking image displayed at the start of the special reach. For example, when a black background concealing image is displayed and when a white background concealing image is displayed, the white background concealing image is displayed to increase the expectation of a big win. You may

The degree of expectation for a big win may not be indicated depending on the presentation mode of the background masking image to be displayed. For example, it is preferable to display the same background concealing image even when a special reach with a different degree of expectation for a big hit is executed.
According to such a configuration, the player waits for the end of the display of the background concealing image while having a sense of anticipation as to what kind of special reach will occur. In addition, when the special reach is finished, the player can face the variable display of decorative symbols and the jackpot game from the next time onwards with a calm mind.

In the middle of the special ready-to-win effect, the content of the effect may be switched to a special ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation. Also at this time, the background concealed image may be displayed using any of the above-described modes. Further, at this time, as the special ready-to-win effect after switching, any one of a plurality of special ready-to-win background images having different degrees of expectation for big wins may be displayed.

Although the embodiment in which the background image is rendered invisible by the background concealing image has been described, it may be made invisible instead of invisible.
For example, even in the second period in which the visibility of the background image is most reduced due to the background concealing image, the background image does not become invisible, but the background image can be seen through the background concealing image. It may be configured as For example, when a black background concealing image is used, the background image is visible in the second period in an intermediate display state between the display state shown in FIG. 398(c) and the display state shown in FIG. 398(d). It may be configured as
Alternatively, the size of the background hiding image is not set to a size that can hide the entire background image, but a size that can hide most of the background image (at least 70% or more, preferably 90% or more). However, this background concealed image may be displayed in the second period.
Moreover, you may combine these aspects.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the switching of the background image.

As the background concealing image, the black background concealing image, the white background concealing image, the background concealing image composed of the bomb character, etc. are displayed, but these background concealing images may be displayed at the same time.
For example, the display area may be divided and a different background concealed image may be displayed for each divided area. For example, a black background concealing image may be displayed in the right half of the display area, and a white background concealing image may be displayed in the left half of the display area.
Further, a display priority may be given to the background concealed image, and the background concealed image may be displayed in an overlapping manner.
For example, it is possible to display a background concealing image composed of a bomb character or the like and a black background concealing image, and the display priority of the background concealing image composed of the bomb character or the like is set higher than the display priority of the black background concealing image. good too. In this case, the area where the background image is visually recognized narrows from the left and right due to the background concealing image made up of the bomb character or the like, and the visibility of the background image is reduced even within the area where the background image is visually recognized. It will be visually recognized by the player in the mode of doing so. A white background concealing image may be displayed instead of the black background concealing image.
Note that the display time (the length of the first period to the third period) of the plurality of background concealed images displayed in this manner may adopt any one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 397 and its modifications. . Alternatively, a different display time (a different one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 397 or its modification) may be employed for each background-concealed image.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the switching of the background image.

The background image itself is darkened at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a failing manner, and a background concealment image brighter than the background image (for example, a white background concealment image or a background concealment image composed of a bomb character, etc.) is displayed. ) to switch the background image.
As a result, the player can clearly see that the background concealing image is displayed, the player can recognize that the performance contents have been switched, and the player's feelings can be switched to the next pattern variation.

On the other hand, the background image itself may be darkened at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a failing manner, and the background image may be switched using a black background concealing image. In this case, since the visual difference between the background image and the background-concealed image is small, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the background image has been switched.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 388 to 404, the display area was used to execute the display effect, but in addition to these display effects, a decorative member provided near the display area was used. These embodiments may be modified such that the renditions may be performed simultaneously.
Below, with reference to FIG. 405 and the like, a tank accessory 3770 that excites the special reach by emitting light or moving during the special reach will be described.

The tank accessory 3770 is a three-dimensional accessory imitating the shape of a tank when viewed from behind, and is provided on the game board 5 . The tank character 3770 is provided on the front side and lower part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. FIG. 405 shows the positional relationship between the display area and the tank character 3770 when viewed from the front.

The tank character 3770 has a tank character light-emitting part (not shown). The tank character light emitting part has a full-color LED, and can take a non-light emitting state and a light emitting state of a predetermined color. As a specific light emission mode, for example, it is possible to light or blink the tank object light emitting portion in white, green, red, and yellow.
In addition, the tank function 3770 has a function of moving vertically between a lower standby position and an upper movement position by driving a tank function driving mechanism (not shown). Moreover, it is possible to stop at any position between the standby position and the moving position.

FIG. 405(a) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is non-emitting and positioned at the standby position.
FIG. 405(b) shows a state in which the tank character 3770 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is positioned at the standby position.
FIG. 405(c) shows a state in which the tank character 3770 is not emitting light and is positioned at the moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank character 3770 overlap and are visually recognized by the player.
FIG. 405(d) shows a state in which the tank character 3770 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is positioned at the moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank character 3770 overlap and are visually recognized by the player.

Figure 405 (b), Figure 405 (d) is displayed in the pending image display area, red pending image with higher expectation of big hit than the normal pending image instead of white which is the normal pending image example is shown. In addition, it shows a state in which the tank character 3770 is positioned at the standby position or the moving position, and the tank character 3770 is illuminated in the same red color as the reserved image.
Although red is given as an example of the color of the reserved image, the color is not limited to red and may be green or gold.

The tank function 3770 may be configured to move from the standby position to the movement position when the special reach starts.

The light emission and movement of the tank accessory 3770 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of the special lottery.

An embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 397(a) will be described below with reference to FIG. 406(a). In addition, aspects other than the tank character 3770 and the reserved image are basically the same presentation aspects as those of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.

FIG. 406(a) is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the tank character 3770 does not move from the standby position, but emits light in red, which is the same color as the reserved image, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. The timing of turning the pending image red may be the timing at which the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs and the pending image is displayed, or the timing at which the variable display is started (timing t0). , a predetermined timing during the variable display (for example, a predetermined timing in the period from timing t1 to timing t33).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 406(a), the red pending image is displayed as the pending image until timing t45 at which the variable display ends and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for one second. Note that the reserved image is difficult or invisible during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42 when the background concealing image is displayed.
On the other hand, the tank character 3770 does not move and is positioned at the standby position during the period from timing t0 when the variable display is started to timing t45.
The tank function 3770 will emit light in red at the timing when the pending image is displayed in red (the timing of the start winning as described above, the start timing of the variable display, the predetermined timing during the variable display, etc.). , red light emission continues until timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 406(a) is shown with reference to Figure 406(b).
FIG. 406(b) is a time chart showing modification 01. FIG. In Modification 01, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t36 when the background concealing image A starts to be displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 406(a) is shown with reference to Figure 406(c).
FIG. 406(c) is a time chart showing modification 02. FIG. In Modification 02, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t38, which is the timing at which the background hiding image C starts to be displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 406(a) is shown with reference to Figure 406(d).
FIG. 406(d) is a time chart showing modification 03. FIG. In Modified Example 03, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t40, which is the timing at which the background concealing image C is finished being displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 406(a) is shown with reference to Figure 406(e).
FIG. 406(e) is a time chart showing modification 04. FIG. In Modification 04, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t42, which is the timing at which the background concealing image A is finished being displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 406(a) is shown with reference to Figure 406(f).
FIG. 406(f) is a time chart showing modification 05. FIG. In Modified Example 05, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t36, which is the timing at which the background concealing image A starts to be displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the red light emission state to the light off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 406(a) is shown with reference to Figure 406(g).
FIG. 406(g) is a time chart showing modification 06. FIG. In Modification 06, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t38, which is the timing at which the background hiding image C starts to be displayed. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the red light emission state to the light off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 406(a) is shown with reference to Figure 406(h).
FIG. 406(h) is a time chart showing modification 07. FIG. In Modified Example 07, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing at which the display of the background hiding image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the red light emission state to the light off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 406(a) is shown with reference to Figure 406(i).
FIG. 406(i) is a time chart showing modification 08. FIG. In Modified Example 08, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of the background concealing image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the red light emission state to the light off state.

Next, another modified example is shown with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 407(a) is the same view as FIG. 406(a).

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 407(a) is shown with reference to Figure 407(b).
FIG. 407(b) is a time chart showing Modification 09. FIG. In modification 09, the display mode of the pending image remains red until timing t45. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in luminance from timing t40 to timing t42, and returns to normal from timing t42 to timing t45. red light with a brightness of .

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 407(a) is shown with reference to Figure 407(c).
FIG. 407(c) is a time chart showing the tenth modification. In modification 10, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t39, increases in luminance from timing t39 to timing t42, and emits red light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 407(a) is shown with reference to Figure 407(d).
FIG. 407(d) is a time chart showing the eleventh modification. In Modified Example 11, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in luminance with white emission color from timing t40 to timing t42, and reaches timing t42. White light is emitted from t42 to timing t45.

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 407(a) is shown with reference to Figure 407(e).
FIG. 407(e) is a time chart showing modification 12. FIG. In modification 12, the display mode of the pending image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t39, changes in emission color from red to white at timing t39, and emits white light in luminance from timing t39 to timing t42. It rises and emits white light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 407(a) is shown with reference to Figure 407(f).
FIG. 407(f) is a time chart showing the thirteenth modification. In modification 13, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t39. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the tank character 3770 is such that the luminance decreases from timing t36 to timing t38, and is extinguished from timing t38 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 407(a) is shown with reference to Figure 407(g).
FIG. 407(g) is a time chart showing the fourteenth modification. In Modified Example 14, the display mode of the pending image is changed to non-display at timing t39. On the other hand, the luminescence mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t39, and is extinguished from timing t39 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 407(a) is shown with reference to Figure 407(h).
FIG. 407(h) is a time chart showing the fifteenth modification. In modification 15, the display mode of the pending image remains red until timing t45. On the other hand, the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, and is extinguished from timing t39 to timing t45.

In these embodiments, the degree of expectation can be shown to the player by causing the light-emitting decorative member (the tank character 3770) to emit light in the same color as the reserved image.
In addition to the display of the background concealing image, it is possible to switch the display mode of the pending image or end the display of the pending image when switching the background image.
At this time, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting decorative member is gradually reduced as the visibility of the background image is lowered, or the light is emitted from the light-emitting decorative member as the visibility of the background image is increased. By gradually increasing the brightness of the light emitted from the luminous decorative member, it is possible to make the appearance of the luminous decorative member natural.

Although the display of the pending image is performed until timing t45, the display of the pending image may be terminated at timing t44, which is the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At the same time when the display of the reserved image ends, the luminescent color of the tank character 3770 may be changed from the luminescent color of the reserved image to white, which is the normal luminescent color.

In the fifteenth modification of FIG. 407, while the red pending image is displayed, the tank character 3770 is turned off at timing t38, but instead of being turned off, white light may be emitted.
In modifications 11 to 13 of FIG. 407, at timing t39, the red reserved image is changed to the white reserved image, or the reserved image is hidden. may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44 when the stop display of the decorative symbols is started, or timing t45 when the stop display of the decorative symbols is finished).

An embodiment in which the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 is made white or extinguished has been shown, but at the timing when the light emission form of the tank character 3770 is made white or extinguished, the light emission form of the tank character 3770 is changed to It may be modified so as to finish adjusting to the light emission mode of the pending display and start the state of emitting light as decoration. In this case, the degree of expectation may not be indicated by the lighting mode, or the lighting mode may be adapted to match the type of the normal background image being displayed.

An effect of changing the reserved image or the reserved image to the reserved image or the reserved image indicating that the degree of expectation is higher may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.
For example, at timing t25 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406(a), the pending image in red may be changed to the pending image in gold. This allows the player to know that the degree of expectation is higher.
In the first period to the third period in which the background concealing image is displayed, it is preferable not to change the reserved image or the reserved image to another display mode indicating a different degree of expectation.
According to such a configuration, the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is ensured at the timing when the degree of expectation changes, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the change of the display mode of the reserved image and the reserved image. .

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 406(a) will be described below with reference to FIG. 408(a). It should be noted that aspects other than the movement aspect of the tank accessory 3770 are basically the same rendering aspects as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment, the tank accessory 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position when the special reach is executed, and then moves from the moving position to the standby position.
As described above, FIGS. 405(a) and 405(b) show the state where the tank accessory 3770 is in the standby position. Also, FIGS. 405(c) and 405(d) show the state where the tank accessory 3770 is at the moving position.

The tank accessory 3770 in this embodiment is positioned at the standby position from timing t0 to timing t21. Thereafter, from timing t21 to timing t24, it moves upward from the standby position to the movement position. It is located at the movement position from timing t24 to timing t36. From timing t36 to timing t42, it moves downward from the movement position to the standby position. It is positioned at the standby position from timing t42 to timing t45. These movements of the tank component 3770 should be performed at a constant speed.

In addition, the tank character 3770 will emit light in red at the timing when the pending image is displayed in red (the timing of the start winning as described above, the start timing of the variable display, etc.), and will continue to emit light in red until timing t45. continues to emit light.
Thus, in this embodiment, the downward movement of the tank object 3770 is started at the same time as the background concealing image is displayed, and the tank object 3770 is moved downward at the same time as the background concealing image is displayed. End downward movement.

It should be noted that, depending on whether the tank accessory 3770 moves upward or not, it is preferable to configure the game so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the tank accessory 3770 moves.

According to such a configuration, the movement of moving the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) from the moving position to the standby position can be made inconspicuous. Therefore, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the joy of the player who is happy with the occurrence of the big win. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who lost the game to feel regret that the result was a loss despite having high expectations.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 408(a), the tank component 3770 is moved downward during the period from timing t36 to timing t42. A modified embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 408(b).

Modification 01 is an example in which the tank component 3770 is moved from the movement position to the standby position from timing t34 to timing t36.
Similarly, in Modifications 02 to 14, the tank character 3770 moves from the moving position to the standby position at the respective timings shown in FIG. 408(b).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 408(a) and 408(b), the period before the visibility of the background image decreases, the period during which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period). , the period in which the background image is invisible (second period), the period in which the background image gradually becomes visible (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period). Although the movement of the tank character 3770 is started and ended at the same time as the movement of the tank character 3770, the movement of the tank character 3770 may be started or stopped in the middle of a certain period by modifying these embodiments. The downward movement of the tank accessory 3770 may be terminated in the middle of the period.
For example, the downward movement may be started at timing t37 in the middle of the first period, and the downward movement may end at timing t39 in the middle of the second period. Further, for example, the downward movement may be started and the downward movement may be ended within the second period.

In this way, by moving the movable decorative member (tank role object 3770) from the moving position to the standby position near the timing when the background concealing image is displayed and the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered, the movable decorative member is displayed. The action of returning to the standby position can be made inconspicuous.

408(a) and 408(b), and FIGS. 406(a)-406(i) and 407(a)-FIG. You may combine the display aspect of the said withholding image shown with reference to 407(h), and each embodiment about the light emission aspect of the tank character 3770. FIG.
For example, each embodiment described in FIG. 408 is combined with each embodiment described in FIG. A pending image may be displayed.
Alternatively, at the timing when the period when the tank character 3770 shown in FIG. may start.
406 and 407. Alternatively, the change of the light emission mode and the pending image shown in FIGS.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the luminescence mode of the tank accessory 3770 more conspicuous or less conspicuous.
Even if the background concealing image is displayed in the display area and the visibility of the display area is reduced, the light emission of the movable decorative member (tank role object 3770) can prevent a big hit or a loss at any level of expectation. The player can know what the result was.
Alternatively, the movement of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) is turned off to make the movement of the movable decorative member inconspicuous by turning off the light of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) as the background concealing image is displayed in the display region and the visibility of the display region is lowered. can be done.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397 to 400, the embodiment in which the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern is lowered at the same time is shown. , with reference to FIG.

Note that FIG. 409(a) shows basically the same production mode as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. Therefore, description of these will be omitted.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 409(a), during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42, the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually decreases, and the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually decreases. The decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually increases.

FIG. 409(b) shows an embodiment in which the embodiment shown in FIG. 409(a) is modified so that the visibility of the background image and the visibility of the decorative pattern may not match.

In the modified example 01, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t14 to timing t15, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t15 to timing t17, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t17 to timing t18.
In addition, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t37 to timing t38, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t38 to timing t40, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t40 to timing t41.

Similarly, in variations 02 to 08, the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered, the decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the decorative pattern is increased at the respective timings shown in FIG. 409(b).

FIG. 410 shows a display example corresponding to modification 03 of FIG. 409(b). Also, FIGS. 410(a) to 410(h) show display states corresponding to the respective display states shown with reference to FIGS. 400(a) to 400(h).
FIG. 410(b) shows a display example from timing t37 to timing t38 in modification 03 of FIG. 409(b). This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is lowered, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is not lowered. In order not to lower the visibility of the decorative pattern, the display priority of the decorative pattern should be temporarily higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.
FIG. 410(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t43. This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is not lowered, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered. In order to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern when the background concealing image is not displayed, it is preferable to display a semi-transparent black image in front of the decorative pattern.
For FIGS. 410(a), 410(c) to 410(f), and 410(h), refer to FIGS. 400(a), 400(c) to 400(f), and 400(h). Since it is the same as the embodiment shown with reference, the description is omitted.

Also, the embodiment shown in FIG. 409 (a), the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the special reach of each modification shown in FIG. 409 (b), the embodiment shown in FIG. 409 (a), FIG. It may be appropriately combined with the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern at the end of the special reach in each modification shown in (b). For example, at the start of the special reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed in the form of the modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed in the form of the modified example 02.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch the background image according to the content of the presentation.

An embodiment in which a black background concealing image is displayed has been shown with reference to FIG. may

According to the embodiments of Modification 01, Modification 02, Modification 03, Modification 04, and Modification 06, when switching the background image, it is possible to lengthen the time during which the decorative symbols can be visually recognized, and the game content can be changed by the player. You can prevent misunderstandings.
According to the embodiments of Modification 03, Modification 05, Modification 06, Modification 07, and Modification 08, when the background image is switched, the time during which the decorative pattern is difficult to see can be lengthened. As a result, at the start of the special ready-to-win, the player's attention can be directed to the display contents other than the decorative symbols, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, when the special reach ends, the decoration pattern is displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is lost or the big win is made. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the interest of the player can be enhanced by teasing the player.

During the special reach, a special decorative pattern with a design different from that of normal decorative patterns is displayed. Specifically, during normal, the normal decoration pattern with large size characters shown in FIG. 389(a) is displayed, and during special reach, small size characters shown in FIG. 389(b) are displayed. A special reach decoration pattern that has not been displayed is displayed. Although the designs of the decorative patterns are different, the numbers indicated by the decorative patterns are the same before and after the background concealing image is displayed.
At the end of the special reach, the special reach decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the first period, the special reach decoration pattern is changed to the normal decoration pattern in the second period, and the normal decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the third period. displayed in the state of
At the time of temporary stop display, the displayed decorative pattern is not changed to another decorative pattern with a different number, and the decorative pattern is displayed in such a manner that it oscillates periodically, but it fluctuates between the first period and the third period. The aspects may be the same or different. For example, the mode of temporary stop display of the decorative symbols in the first period and the third period is one of the modes of swinging in the vertical direction, the mode of swinging in the horizontal direction, and the mode of swinging by rotating about the vertical direction. may be adopted.
Further, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period and the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period may be the same. For example, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period and the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period may be longer than the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period. For example, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period may be set to 2 seconds, and the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the first period may be shorter than the swing cycle of the decorative symbols in the third period. For example, the swing period of the decorative design in the first period may be set to 1 second, and the swing period of the decorative design in the third period may be set to 2 seconds.

In this way, by differentiating the display mode at the time of temporary stop between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern, the player can easily recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern.

The swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. Similarly, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when each of the first period and the third period is two seconds, the swing period of the decorative symbols in the first period and the swing period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to one second.
Alternatively, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when each of the first period and the third period is 2 seconds, the swing period of the decorative design in the first period may be set to 3 seconds, and the swing period of the decorative design in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing cycle of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when each of the first period and the third period is 2 seconds, the swing period of the decorative design in the first period may be set to 1 second, and the swing period of the decorative design in the third period may be set to 3 seconds.
Alternatively, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. Similarly, the swing period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when each of the first period and the third period is two seconds, the swing period of the decorative symbols in the first period and the swing period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to three seconds.

In this way, by differentiating the display mode at the time of temporary stop between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern, the player can easily recognize the difference between the normal decorative pattern and the special ready-to-win decorative pattern.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397(a), the length of the third period, which is a period in which the background image gradually becomes more visible, is set to 2 seconds, and Although the length of the fourth period, which is a period, is set to 2 seconds, the variation of the decorative design may be stopped at the end timing of the third period without providing the fourth period. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 397(a), the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at timing t42 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modification 01 shown in FIG. 397(b), the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at timing t43 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modification 02 to the modification 12, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the third period ends.
Note that the fourth period may be shorter than the third period. For example, if the third period is two seconds, the fourth period may be less than two seconds.

According to such a configuration, after the end of the third period, it is possible to promptly perform a definitive display of the decorative pattern.

With reference to FIG. 397(a), in the embodiment, at timing t44 when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the display of the pending image ends, but the dynamic display of erasing the pending image is stopped for a short period of time from timing t44. You can go in between.
At this time, instead of simply ending the display of the reserved image, after displaying a concealing image that hides at least a part of the reserved image on the front side of the reserved image at the same time as the stationary display of the decorative pattern, 0.3 ~ The display of the pending image and the concealed image may be ended after 0.5 seconds have elapsed.
Alternatively, the reserved image itself may be similarly dynamically erased and displayed. For example, the size of the reserved image may be gradually reduced, and after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds have passed, the size of the reserved image may be set to 0, and the display of the reserved image may be terminated.

According to such a configuration, the player can accept the result of the special lottery without adhering to the degree of expectation shown during the variable display.
Also, the display of the pending image can be terminated in a natural manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397 to 400, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t34 indicate whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a big hit. 411 to 415 for an embodiment in which the form is changed so that after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the failure, the decorative symbols may change to the display mode indicating the big win. It is explained below. In addition, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the decorative symbols do not change to the display mode indicating the loss.

In the present embodiment, at timing t34 during the special reach, after the special reach decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, "232") indicating a loss, a resurrection effect after the temporary stop loss is executed. After the execution of the resurrection effect after the temporary stop loss, the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the loss, and the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit. There are cases.

411 to 413 are time charts showing examples of effects in this embodiment. 414 and 415 are diagrams showing display examples in this embodiment.
Note that the effect modes other than the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure are basically the same as those in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG.

Figures 411(b), 412(b), and 413(b) show the variable display time of decorative symbols when the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure and the decoration when the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure is successful. It shows the fluctuation display time of the pattern.
FIGS. 411(c) to 411(g), FIGS. 412(c) to 412(f), and FIGS. 413(c) to 413(h) are display areas when the resurrection effect after a temporary stop failure is unsuccessful. and an example of the effect in the display area when the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is successful.
FIG. 414 shows a display example in the display area when the revival effect after temporary stop failure is unsuccessful, and FIG. 415 shows a display example in the display area when the revival effect after temporary stop failure is successful.

Of these production examples, the recovery production after temporary stop failure will be described with reference to the time chart (modification 06) shown in FIG. 412(d) and the display examples shown in FIGS.

In the modification 06, at the timing t34, the decoration pattern at the time of reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure. Fig. 414(a) and Fig. 415(a) show a state in which the ready-to-win decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
Next, from timing t36 to timing t37, a bomb character and a line image saying "There is still a chance!" are displayed in the upper right of the display area. 414(b) and 415(b) show the display state during the period from timing t36 to timing t37. 414(c) and 415(c) show the display state during the period from timing t37 to timing t38.
Next, from timing t38 to timing t39, the bomb character and the dialogue image move from the upper right of the display area to the lower center of the display area.
From timing t39 to timing t40, along with the bomb character, there is an image of the words "I can't help it..." indicating that the resurrection effect after the failure of the temporary stop failed, or the image of the success of the resurrection effect after the failure of the temporary stop. One of the dialogue images "Premonition of Victory!" is displayed. FIG. 414(d) shows a display example when the recovery effect after temporary stop failure is unsuccessful, and FIG. 415(d) shows a display example when the recovery effect after temporary stop loss is successful.

When the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure fails, the bomb character and the dialogue image are not displayed at timing t40, and the same display as when the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure is not performed is performed from timing t40 to timing t45. will be
FIG. 414(e) shows a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, FIG. 414(f) shows a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, and FIG. 414(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t44. 414(h) show display examples from timing t44 to timing t45, respectively.

When the resurrection effect after the temporary stop loss is successful, at timing t40, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a grid stop mode indicating a big win, and at timing t49, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped, and timing is reached. The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed from t49 to timing t50. Also, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image continues from timing t40 to timing t50. In other words, the variable display time of the decorative symbols when the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is successful is longer than the variable display time of the decorative symbols when the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is unsuccessful.

FIG. 415(e) shows a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, FIG. 415(f) shows a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, and FIG. 415(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t49. 415(h) show display examples from timing t49 to timing t50, respectively. As is clear from the figure, when the resurrection effect after a temporary stop failure is successful (when the special lottery result is a big hit), the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image continues until the decorative pattern is stopped.

Modification 06 has been described as a representative example, but in other modifications, the timing at which the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is started, the number of seconds the bomb character is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and the movement of the bomb character are determined. Although the timing at which failure or success is displayed and the time during which the resurrection effect is successful and the bomb character is displayed at the bottom center of the display area are different, in other aspects, the same display as in modification 06 is performed. .
For example, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 411(c) to 411(g) and modified examples 01 to 411, at timing t34, the display of the bomb character starts, but the bomb character moves and the special lottery is held. The timing at which the display of the dialog image indicating the result is started is timing t37 in modification 01, timing t39 in modification 02, timing t41 in modification 03, and timing t43 in modification 04.
Similarly, FIG. 412 shows a modified example in which display of the bomb character is started at timing t36, and FIG. 413 shows a modified example in which display of the bomb character is started at timings t38, t40, and t42. .

In addition, when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is successful, at the timing when the dialogue image "Premonition of victory!" It is preferable to change the display mode to that shown. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to indicate a big win at a timing after a predetermined number of seconds (for example, one second) have elapsed from the timing at which the line image "Premonition of Victory!" was displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 411 to 415, after the temporary stop in the mode indicating the failure of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the period until the visibility of the background image starts to decrease, the background image is gradually difficult to see (first period), the background image is invisible (second period), the background image is gradually easy to see (third period), and the background image visibility is At the same time as the period after returning to the original (fourth period), the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image is started, the display of the dialogue image is started during these periods, and the dialogue is started at the end of these periods. In the past, an image was used to notify whether or not the game was a big hit (when the resurrection effect failed). At the same time as the end of the period, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started, or in the middle of a certain period, the dialogue image may be used to indicate whether or not the game is a big hit.
For example, at timing t37, which is in the middle of the first period, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started, and at timing t38, which is the start timing of the second period, the dialogue image may be used to notify whether or not there is a big hit. . Further, for example, the start of display of the bomb character, the movement of the bomb character, and the display of a dialogue image to inform whether or not the game is a big hit may be performed within the second period.

The display priority of the bomb character and the dialogue image is higher than the display priority of the background concealing image. On the other hand, the display priority of the bomb character and the dialogue image is lower than the display priority of the fourth pattern and the pending number display image.

When the result of the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure is failure, the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure may be executed again. For example, if the execution mode shown in FIG. 411(c) fails, one of the modes shown in FIGS. 412(c) to 412(f) and FIGS. The resurrection effect may be executed again. Similarly, even if the mode shown in FIG. 412(c) fails, the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure may be executed again in the modes shown in FIGS. 413(c) to 413(h).
In this way, after the result of failure is once displayed in the resurrection performance after temporary stop failure, the resurrection performance after temporary stop failure is finally successful, and the player is shown that the result of the special lottery is a win. As in some cases, the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure may be configured to be executable a plurality of times.

In this way, even when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss, the resurrection effect after the temporary stop loss is executed at the time of switching the background image, and there is a case where the result is a big win. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big hit until the final stage.
In particular, since the background masking image is displayed, the display contents in the display area are simple, so in this state, the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is executed, or the result of the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is successful. By being notified of the occurrence of a big hit, the player can be made to feel great surprise and joy.

In the period (first period) in which the visibility of the special ready-to-reach background image gradually decreases, if the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is performed, it is regrettable that the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating the failure. It is possible to inflame the expectation of a big hit without sustaining the feeling.
In the period when the special reach background image is invisible (second period), if the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is performed, the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is performed because the visibility of the revival effect after the temporary stop failure is high. The player can easily notice that the game has been done, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the fact that the resurrection presentation is being executed after a temporary stop failure.
In the period (third period) when the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see and the period (fourth period) when the normal background image is easier to see, when the resurrection effect after the temporary stop failure is performed, the normal background image is visible. The result of the special lottery may make the player think that the result is a loss, and the player may get a big win, which can excite the player.
These effects can be made more effective by lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods as shown in FIG. 397(b).
By lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods, the resurrection effect after a temporary stop failure may be executed a plurality of times in a certain period.

411 to 415, the embodiment related to the resurrection effect after temporary stop failure has been shown, but it may be combined with other embodiments described above.

With reference to FIGS. 388 to 415, an embodiment and a modification of the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect have been shown. Effect) may be applied to the embodiment of the ``enemy tank destruction reach'' effect or its modification.

Embodiments modified from the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 388 to 400 and the like will be described below. In the special ready-to-reach effect of the present embodiment, the special ready-to-reach background image A is displayed instead of the special ready-to-reach background image B. Also, instead of the attack button 3710, operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled. Further, the display of the pending image is not performed during the period in which the special reach background image is displayed.
FIG. 416(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect from timing t10 to timing t45 in this embodiment. In addition, except for the display mode of the pending image, the pending image, and the production mode during special reach (background image, enemy tank mode, etc.), it is basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. Since the presentation modes are the same, a description of these will be omitted.

FIG. 417 shows a display example at the start of the “giant tank reach” effect. The display examples shown in FIGS. 417(a) to 417(g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 398(a) to 398(g), respectively. It is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 398(g).
FIG. 418 shows a display example at the end of the “Giant Tank Reach” (at the time of the big win). The display examples shown in FIGS. 418(a) to 418(g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 399(a) to 399(g), respectively. It is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 399(g).
FIG. 419 shows a display example at the end of the “Giant Tank Reach” (at the time of losing). The display examples shown in FIGS. 419(a) to 419(g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 400(a) to 400(g), respectively. This is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 400(g).

As shown in FIGS. 416 to 419, in the "giant tank reach" in this embodiment, the displayed image of the enemy tank is different from that in the "enemy tank destruction reach". Also, a special reach background image A is displayed as a background image. Also, the operation of the mission button 3700 instead of the attack button 3710 is valid. In addition, the pending image and the pending image are not displayed during "Giant Tank Reach".

"Giant Tank Reach" in this embodiment has a higher expectation of a big hit when the Reach effect is executed than "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to FIGS. For example, the expectation level for "enemy tank destruction reach" is 10%, and the expectation level for "giant tank reach" is 50%.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 418 and 419, the pending image and the pending image are not displayed during the “giant tank reach”, but the pending image is displayed and the pending image is not displayed. can be
With such a configuration, the player can recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the pending image even during the "giant tank reach". Also, during the execution of "Giant Tank Reach", which has a very high expectation, the player basically does not consider increasing the number of holds or the expectation of the change display that will be performed after the current change display ( For example, even if a green pending image is displayed in the third pending display area, the player cares more about the result of "Giant Tank Reach"). Therefore, by not displaying the pending image, the display contents of the display area can be simplified, and the player can concentrate on the "giant tank reach".

With reference to FIGS. 397 and 416, an example is shown in which the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach" are performed at the same timing, but when the "giant tank reach" occurs, The time during which the background image is normally displayed may be lengthened compared to the case where "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" occurs. For example, the time during which the normal background image is displayed is extended by 5 seconds, and at timing t15, the reach state occurs, and at timing t21, the normal background image A is switched to the special reach background image A, and the "giant tank reach" is displayed. may be started.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397 and 416, the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach" have the same reach effect execution length, but the reach effect is executed. Different lengths may be used. For example, "Giant Tank Reach" may take longer than "Enemy Tank Destroy Reach", and "Giant Tank Reach" may take less time than "Enemy Tank Destroy Reach". may terminate.

If the pending image (for example, the red pending image or the gold pending image) is displayed that indicates that the level of expectation is higher than the predetermined level, even if the "giant tank reach" always occurs. good. On the other hand, if the pending image (for example, the pending image in white or the pending image in green) indicating that the degree of expectation is less than the predetermined level is displayed, a “giant tank reach” occurs, and the “enemy It is preferable to set the effect mode to either that "Tank Destruction Reach" is generated or that none of Reach is generated.

In "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", I indicated that black background concealment images, white background concealment images, or background concealment images consisting of bomb characters, etc., could be used. , a black background concealing image, a white background concealing image, or a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like.
For example, a background masking image made up of a bomb character or the like may be used in the "huge tank reach", and a black background masking image may be used in the "enemy tank destroying reach", so that the background masking images are different. Alternatively, the same background concealment image (for example, both black background concealment images) may be used in the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach".

416(b) and 416(c) show a first period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see, a second period in which the background image becomes invisible, and a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see. The embodiment shown in FIG. 416(a) is modified so that the length of the third period (specifically, 2 seconds), which is the period in which it becomes easier, is not the same but different. A plurality of embodiments (Variation 01 to Variation 12) are shown. Note that these embodiments may also have the same effect as the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 397(b) and 397(c).

Thus, in the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank ready-to-win”), the pending image is not displayed while the special ready-to-reach background image is being displayed. On the other hand, in the second ready-to-reach production (“enemy tank destroying ready-to-reach”), a suspended image is displayed while the special ready-to-reach background image is being displayed. In this way, by providing a case where the pending image is not displayed and a case where it is displayed according to the type of reach, display contents can be diversified.
For example, by not displaying the pending image, the player's attention can be focused on the effect using the tank. On the other hand, by displaying the pending image, the player can decide whether to operate the handle 302 or not. In addition, when the pending image is displayed, the player can know the degree of expectation of the big win.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 416(a) and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 416(b) and 416(c) may be adopted as the viewing mode of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach". . The contents shown in the time chart are the same as those shown with reference to FIG. 397 except for some.
Also, as for the visibility of the background image in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", the embodiment shown in FIG. 397(a) and the modified examples shown in FIGS. good too.
In addition, the "Giant Tank Reach" employing any of the embodiments and modifications shown in FIG. 416 and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" adopting any of the embodiments and modifications shown in FIG. 397 are executed. It may be configured to
For example, the modification 01 shown in FIG. 416(b) may be adopted in the "giant tank reach", and the modification 02 shown in FIG. 397(b) may be adopted in the "enemy tank destruction reach".

The embodiment and modification shown with reference to FIG. 416 can also achieve the same effect as the embodiment and modification shown with reference to FIG.

As in Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. 416(b) and Modified Example 02 shown in FIG. The third period (3 seconds) is longer than the third period (1 second) during which a black background concealing image is used in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which is different from "Giant Tank Reach". You may
According to such a configuration, the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is more likely to be displayed at the end of the ready-to-reach effect than the second ready-to-reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). The held image that was not displayed slowly appears.

As in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 416(b) and Modification 01 shown in FIG. The third period (3 seconds) will be the same length as the third period (3 seconds) during which the display adopting a black background concealing image different from "Giant Tank Reach" is performed in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" You can say
According to such a configuration, display processing can be simplified.

As in modification 02 shown in FIG. 416(b) and modification 01 shown in FIG. The third period (1 second) is shorter than the third period (3 seconds) during which a black background concealing image is used in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which is different from "Giant Tank Reach". You may
According to such a configuration, the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is more likely to be displayed at the end of the ready-to-reach effect than the second ready-to-reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). The retained image, which was not there, rapidly becomes visible in a short period of time.

When switching the background image at the end of the 1st Reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), the background image changes more gradually than when switching the background image at the end of the 2nd Reach effect ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach"). By lengthening the third period, which is a period in which the images are easily visually recognized, the player's eyes are drawn to the reserved image displayed for the first time in a long time, and the player's awareness of the reserved number can be heightened. This allows the player to determine whether or not to shoot the game ball.
In particular, in the first ready-to-win effect, the time elapsed after the start of the variable display is longer, and the expectation of a big hit is higher, so the player tends to lose awareness of the number of reservations. By adopting such a display method, it is possible to regain awareness of the number of holds, and to raise awareness of the shooting of the game balls that were suspended during the ready-to-win production.

As in modification 02 shown in FIG. 416(b) and modification 01 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (three seconds) after the end of the third period, the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' is displayed with a black background hidden image that is different from the ``Giant Tank Reach''. may be longer than the fourth period (1 second) after the period of .
According to such a configuration, the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is more likely to be invisible or visible at the end of the reach effect than the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). Since the hard-to-see pending image is displayed in a clear state for a relatively long period of time, the player can remember to shoot the game ball. In addition, there is a possibility that the result of the special lottery will be lost and some players will be shocked, but it is necessary to secure the time for the players to change their minds to the variable display of the decorative patterns from the next time onwards. can be done.

As in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 416(b) and Modification 01 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the 3rd period, the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' will be displayed with a black background hidden image that is different from the ``Giant Tank Reach''. may be the same length as the fourth period (1 second) after the period of .
With such a configuration, display processing can be simplified.

As in Modified Example 01 shown in FIG. 416(b) and Modified Example 02 shown in FIG. During the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the 3rd period, the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' is displayed with a black background hidden image that is different from the ``Giant Tank Reach''. may be shorter than the fourth period (3 seconds) after the period of .
According to such a configuration, the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is more effective than the second ready-to-reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”) when the ready-to-reach effect ends. can be shortened.

As a method for making the length of the fourth period different or the same between the "huge tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiments shown in FIGS. Alternatively, in the modification, the timing at which the decorative symbols stop changing can be changed from timing t44 to timing t43 or timing t45.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. For example, in the period from timing t10 to timing t44, it is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative pattern higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.
With such a configuration, a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period), a period in which the background image becomes invisible (second period), and a period in which the background image gradually becomes easy to see ( 3rd period), the decorative pattern is always visible.
It should be noted that it is preferable to switch between the ready-to-win decoration pattern and the normal decoration pattern at an appropriate timing such as the start of the next variable display.
In this way, in the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), the decorative pattern is made invisible in the second period, and in the second reach effect ("Enemy tank destruction reach"), the decorative pattern is visible in the second period. It may be possible.

In the first Reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), which has relatively high expectations, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a failed manner, the decorative pattern will not be visible in the second period. It is possible to soften the shock felt by the player as a result of losing.
On the other hand, in the second ready-to-reach production (“Enemy Tank Destruction Reach”), which has a relatively low degree of expectation, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a failed manner, and the decorative pattern is visible during the second period. However, the player does not feel such a shock. Rather, since the decorative patterns are continuously visible, the player can smoothly switch to the next decorative pattern, and the player can change the decorative pattern smoothly. Do not disturb the tempo of fluctuation.

During the third period during which the "Giant Tank Reach" is displayed with a hidden background image consisting of, for example, a bomb character, the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" has a black background hidden image different from the "Giant Tank Reach". In the third period in which the display adopting the Other modes may be employed as the stop display mode.
For example, within the third period, the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed at the same position may be slightly changed. Alternatively, during the third period, the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed by changing the position may be the same size. Alternatively, during the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed and the size of the normal decorative pattern may be changed smaller.
Strictly speaking, the "same position" may mean the average position of the normal decorative patterns that are displayed while fluctuating at a predetermined cycle.

After the reach effect for both "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends (the end of the special Reach background image for each Reach), the same normal decoration pattern will be displayed as a decoration pattern from the third period. . In addition, the temporary stop position of the normal decorative pattern is also the same. In addition, during the third period of "Gigantic Tank Reach", a background masking image consisting of bomb characters etc. is displayed, and the third period of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is a black color different from "Giant Tank Reach". is displayed using a background masking image.
With such a configuration, after the end of the first reach and the second reach, which differ in the content of the effect display and the degree of expectation, since the normal decorative pattern is visually recognized by the player in the same effect mode, the player's intention can be directed to subsequent changes.

With reference to FIG. 402, an example of displaying the band-shaped prefetch effect image when "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed is shown, but the band-shaped prefetch effect is similarly displayed when "giant tank reach" is executed. An image may be displayed.
Also, the display mode of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image when the background concealing image is displayed in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. . For example, the display priority is set higher than that of the background concealed image so that the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is not affected even in the first period to the third period, or the display priority is set lower than that of the background concealed image. The visibility of the strip-like prefetch effect image may be lowered in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and improved in the third period. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is stopped during the display of the background concealing image (the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is reduced in the first period, the visibility is made invisible in the second period, and the third and fourth be invisible even for a period of time).

As a display mode of the strip-like prefetch effect image, the display priority is higher than that of the background concealing image so that the display of the strip-like prefetch effect image is not affected even in the first period to the third period, and the background concealing image. A mode in which the display priority is lowered to lower the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image in the first period, make it invisible in the second period, and improve the visibility in the third period. , The display of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image is stopped during the display of the background concealing image (The visibility of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image decreases in the first period, becomes invisible in the second period, and becomes invisible in the third and fourth periods However, as the display mode of the strip-shaped prefetch effect image in "Giant Tank Reach", any one of these display modes is adopted, Any one of these display modes may be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

By adopting the same display mode as the display mode of the look-ahead effect image even for different types of ready-to-win games, the effect processing can be shared, and the display process and development man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, by adopting different display modes as the display mode of the prefetch effect image depending on the type of reach, the effect mode can be diversified.

405 to 408, in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", an embodiment and a modification thereof are shown in which the tank character 3770 emits light in a predetermined emission color or moves between the standby position and the moving position. However, in the ``Giant Tank Reach'', the embodiment and its modification of the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' are adopted to cause the tank function 3770 to emit light in a predetermined luminous color, or to distinguish between the standby position and the moving position. You may make it move between.
That is, any one of the light emission modes shown in FIGS. 406 and 407 may be employed as the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 in the “Giant Tank Reach”. Similarly, any one of the operation modes shown in FIG. 408 may be adopted as the operation mode of the tank component 3770 .

Even with different types of reach in this way, by adopting the same mode as the light emission mode and movement mode of the movable decorative member (tank object 3770), the production process can be shared, and the display process and development can be performed. Man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, it is possible to diversify the production mode by adopting different modes as the light emission mode and the movement mode of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) depending on the type of reach.

Although the tank accessory 3770 is shown as an example of the movable decorative member, one or more other movable decorative members having similar functions may be provided on the game board 5 . For example, a total of three movable decorative members may be provided whose standby positions are above, to the right and to the left of the display area, and whose moving positions are near the center of the display area. When a plurality of movable decorative members are provided, they may emit light or move at the same timing as the tank character 3770 , or may emit light or move at a different timing from the tank character 3770 . In other words, other movable decorative members can adopt any of the light emission modes and operation modes shown in FIGS. 406-408.
In addition, the luminous mode and the movement mode of the other movable decorative members may be different between the ``huge tank reach'' and the ``enemy tank destruction reach''. 406 to 408 can be adopted.

Although the tank accessory 3770 is shown as an example of a decorative member capable of emitting light, the door frame 3 or the game board 5 may be provided with a decorative member capable of emitting light. The decoration means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc.) and the decoration members provided on the game board 5 may emit light at the same timing as the tank accessory 3770. However, the light may be emitted at a timing different from that of the tank character 3770 . 406 to 408, any of the luminous modes shown in FIGS. 406 to 408 can be adopted for the luminous decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the luminous decorative members provided on the game board 5. FIG.
In addition, the luminous mode of the decoration means provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative member provided on the game board 5 may be different between the ``gigantic tank reach'' and the ``enemy tank destruction reach''. Any one of the lighting modes shown in FIGS. 406 to 408 can be adopted for "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

With reference to FIGS. 406 and 407, in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", embodiments and modifications of the display mode of the pending image are shown. , or any one of the display modes of the reserved image in the embodiment or the modification thereof may be adopted to display the reserved image.

For example, the modification 01 shown in FIG. 406(b) may be adopted in the “giant tank reach”, and the embodiment shown in FIG. 406(a) may be adopted in the “enemy tank destruction reach”.
In such a relatively high expectation "Giant Tank Reach", when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been lost, the pending image is quickly returned to the normal mode, and the high expectation It is possible to soften the shock of the player who has lost as a result even though it was supposed to be.
On the other hand, in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which has relatively low expectations, even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been lost, the pending image is displayed in red, so that what kind of expectation It is possible to impress the player whether or not the variable display was performed under the control, and it can be used as a reference when the same performance situation occurs in the variable display after the next time.

Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG. 406(a) may be adopted in the "giant tank reach", and the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 406(b) may be adopted in the "enemy tank destruction reach".
In such a relatively high expectation "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is lost, the pending image will be displayed in red, It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the fact that the result of the special lottery resulted in a loss in spite of high expectations, and to stimulate the player's feelings toward the next and subsequent variable displays.
On the other hand, in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", which has a relatively low level of expectation, when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been lost, the pending image is quickly returned to the normal mode. It is possible to smoothly switch the player's feelings from the ready-to-win performance, in which the degree of expectation is low and the result of the big hit is difficult to be achieved, to the next variable display.

Regarding the display mode of the pending image, the priority of such effects should be taken into consideration when deciding which embodiment or modification to adopt, the embodiment of "Giant Tank Reach" or the embodiment of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". It is recommended to use them in combination as appropriate.

The degree of expectation for a big hit of "Giant Tank Reach" in this embodiment may be lower than the degree of expectation for a big hit of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to FIGS.

Not limited to the example described above, a modified example applied to the embodiment of "Enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. It may be applied to such an embodiment to form a new embodiment.

Thus, in the third period of the first ready-to-reach effect (“giant tank ready-to-reach”), a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special display A”) is performed.
Also, during the third period of the second ready-to-reach effect (“enemy tank destroying ready-to-reach”), a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special display B”) is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 306 and 307, when a big hit occurs in the normal state, the subsequent game state is a time-saving state, a non-time-saving variable state, and a time-saving state that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. It may become a probability variable state (probability variable time reduction state). The advantageous state shown below refers to the time-saving state and the variable time-saving state among the states.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 306 and 307, when "loss with time saving" occurs as a special lottery result, or when the special lottery result of losing occurs a predetermined number of times in succession, the time saving state is changed. It is good also as a structure which generates.
In an advantageous state, the player rotates the handle 302 greatly to hit the game ball toward the right side of the game area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right hit"), and hits the game ball on the right side of the game area. A game ball is made to enter the provided starting port (for example, the second starting port 2004).
In addition, when a big win occurs in an advantageous state and the advantageous state continues after that, the number of balls produced by the big win or the small win during that time is added and stored in the peripheral control board 1510.例文帳に追加
Further, in an advantageous state, a normal background image C is displayed instead of the normal background images A and B, which indicates that the player is in an advantageous state.
Such favorable conditions end when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, after the start of an advantageous state, the result of losing a predetermined number of times is continuously displayed without the decorative pattern becoming a big hit (the special lottery result is a result of losing a predetermined number of times in a row). ) is the condition. For example, in the probability variable time saving state, the probability variable time saving state ends when the loss continues 100 times. Note that the time-saving state may also end when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of failures continue. Also, in the so-called falling type that draws a lottery whether to end the variable time saving state at the start of the fluctuation of each game, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the lottery to end is won.
In this way, the advantageous state ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (during the 100th change, during the change in which the falling lottery is won in the falling type), the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A or the normal background image B, and during the big hit or advantageous state, The total number of game balls paid out is displayed.

FIG. 420 shows an image displayed at the end of hitting to the right. FIG. 420(a) shows the background concealed image A at the end of right-hand hitting, FIG. 420(b) shows the background concealing image B at the end of right-hand hitting, and FIG. 420(c) shows the background concealed image C at the end of right-hand hitting. . These images are based on the sunglasses worn by the bomb character.
FIG. 420(d) shows a game result image indicating that the "Dynamite Time", which is a right-handed state, has ended, the number of consecutive wins (13 times), and the number of game balls paid out to the player (14125 balls). ing.

The effect mode at the end of hitting to the right will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 421 and the display example shown in FIG.
In FIG. 421(a), from timing t0 to timing t7, the 99th variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the probability variable time-saving state, which is an advantageous state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed during the probability variable time saving state is a decorative pattern during right hitting.
After that, from timing t8 to timing t24, the 100th variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the probability variable time saving state. Note that this time chart shows an effect example in which the result of the 100th variable display of decorative symbols is a loss.
FIG. 423(a) shows a display example during the period from timing t14 to timing t16. The normal background image C shows a display state in which the right-handed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped on the near side.

From timing t16 to timing t17, the background concealing image A at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 423(b) shows a state in which the background concealed image A is displayed at the end of hitting to the right.
From timing t17 to timing t18, the background concealing image B at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 423(c) shows a state in which the background concealed image B is displayed at the end of hitting to the right.
From timing t18 to timing t20, the background concealing image C at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 423(d) shows a state in which the background concealed image C at the end of hitting to the right is displayed.

From timing t18 to timing t20, a game result image showing the game results during right-handed hitting, such as "Dynamite Time Ended", "13 Defeated", and "14125 Acquired", is displayed. In addition, it is shown that the probability variable time saving state is ended by the display of "dynamite time end". In addition, the display of "destroy 13 bodies" indicates that the number of times of consecutive chances was 13 times. In addition, the display of "14125 acquired" informs the player that the number of game balls paid out by winning the game balls in the big winning opening 2005 during right-handed hitting is 14125 balls.
Further, the background image is switched from the normal background image C to the normal background image A at the timing t19 during the second period in which the background concealing image C is displayed at the end of the right stroke and the background image is invisible. Note that the switching may be performed at timing t18 or timing t20.

From timing t20 to timing t21, the background concealing image B at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 423(e) shows a state in which the background concealed image B is displayed at the end of hitting to the right. At this time, the background image is changed to the normal background image A. FIG. Also, the decorative pattern is changed to a normal decorative pattern.
From timing t21 to timing t22, the background concealing image A at the end of hitting to the right is displayed. FIG. 423(f) shows a state in which the background concealed image A is displayed at the end of hitting to the right.
From timing t22 to timing t24, the normal decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 423(g) shows a state in which the background concealing image A is no longer displayed at the end of hitting to the right.
After that, from timing t24 to timing t25, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 423(h) shows a state in which the normal decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

At timing t25, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the background image is changed to the normal background image A, and the decorative pattern is changed to the normal decorative pattern. In addition, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is also changed from 1/30 to 1/300 by changing the game state from the probability variable time saving state to the normal state (see FIGS. 306 and 307).

In this way, when the background concealing image is displayed at the end of the right-hand shot, the background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period), the background image becomes invisible (second period), and the background image gradually becomes visible. A period (third period) during which the visibility of the background image is easily restored and a period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored are provided.

When the result of the 100th variable display in the variable probability state is a big win, the background concealing image is not displayed at the end of right-handed hitting, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the big win.
At this time, a ``huge tank reach'' effect or an ``enemy tank destruction reach'' effect may be executed.

FIGS. 421(b), 421(c), and 421(d) show variations in the timing of displaying the background concealing image at the end of the right stroke in the embodiment shown in FIG. 421(a). 10 and 11 respectively show different embodiments.
For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 421(c), at timing t24, the end of the display of the background concealing image A at the end of the right stroke and the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols are performed at the same time.

FIGS. 422(b) and 422(c) are examples in which the display time and display timing of the background concealing image A at the end of right-hand hitting, the background concealing image B at the end of right-hand hitting, and the background concealing image C at the end of right-hand hitting are modified ( Modifications 01 to 12) are shown.

By performing such a display, the player can know the number of consecutive wins (the number of consecutive big wins) and the number of winning game balls at the end of the right-handed state.
In addition, while the normal background images A to C are not displayed, it is possible to take a picture of the display area where the number of consecutive wins and the number of game balls obtained are displayed using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a digital camera. can.
In addition, behind the display, the background image and the decorative pattern can be smoothly switched from those in the probability variable time-saving state or time-saving state to those in the normal state.

The period during which the background image is invisible at the end of the right-hand shot (second period) is shorter than the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS.

Even if the period during which the background image is invisible at the end of the right-hand shot (second period) and the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period) are the same length. good.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 and the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397 are the same.

Even if the background image invisible period (second period) at the end of the right shot is longer than the background image invisible period (second period) in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" good. In addition, the period (second period) in which the background image is not visible at the end of right-handed hitting is performed over half or more of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation (that is, the final fluctuation at which the advantageous state ends). good too. More than half of this variation time may be longer than the shortest time of all variation patterns.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS.

The period when the background image at the end of the right-hand shot gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period). may be shorter than
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIGS.

The period during which the background image at the end of the right hand shot gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the period during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period). and may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 and the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397 are the same.

The period when the background image at the end of the right-hand shot gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period). may be longer than
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIGS.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of the right-hand shot (4th period), after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal. It may be shorter than the period (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in modification 02 shown in FIGS.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of the right-hand shot (4th period), and the period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" period (fourth period) may have the same length.
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 and the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397 are the same.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of the right-hand shot (4th period), after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal. It may be shorter than the period (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIGS.

The background image displayed at the end of the right hand shot and the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends with a failure are both normal background image A. , the background image displayed at the end of the right-hand shot may be different from the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends with a failure.
For example, the normal background image B may be displayed at the end of the right hand shot, and the normal background image A may be displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends with a failure. Alternatively, the normal background image A may be displayed at the end of the right hand shot, and the normal background image B may be displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends with a failure.

An example has been shown in which the normal background image A is displayed instead of the normal background image C at the end of hitting to the right. They may be displayed randomly.
In addition, in addition to the normal background image C, the background image during right-handed shooting has a background image in a form other than the normal background image C (for example, a background image with a form of a bomb character or a different form of dialogue). It may be randomly displayed as a background image during right-hand hitting.

In addition, in place of the normal background image C, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed at the end of hitting to the right. At this time, it is preferable to display the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B from the beginning of the moving image (the display states shown in FIGS. 391(a) and 391(d)).
It should be noted that a background moving image exclusively for right-handed hitting may be displayed during right-handed hitting.

With reference to FIG. 420, an example of the background concealing image at the end of hitting to the right is shown, but a background concealing image in another display mode may be employed as the background concealing image at the end of hitting to the right. For example, one of a black background concealing image, a white background concealing image, and a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like may be used as the background concealing image exclusively for the end of the right hand shot.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 423, an example of displaying the game result image in the second period (timing t18 to timing t20) was shown, but the game result image is displayed in the first period and the third period. may be displayed. In this case, by moving the game result image from the left and right of the display area in accordance with the movement of the background concealing image at the end of right-hand hitting, the game result image appears in the display area, or the game result image disappears from the display area. You can do

In the variable display of the decorative pattern at the end of right-handed hitting, whether the ready-to-win state occurs or not to occur, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the background concealing image is displayed. . On the other hand, in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", a background concealment image is displayed as the reach state occurs.

With reference to Fig. 406 and the like, before and after the background concealing image is displayed when executing "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", the display mode of the pending image is maintained (for example, the red pending image is displayed in red). or change the display mode (for example, change the red pending image to a normal pending image (white pending image) and display it). Reach” may also be displayed in the same way).
On the other hand, when the right-handed state ends and the normal state is entered by executing the variable display of the decorative symbols a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. As for the pending image displayed after the end of the background concealing image at the end of hitting to the right, a normal pending image (white pending image) may be displayed.
In addition, the hold image that will be displayed after the end of right hitting is displayed as a normal hold image (white hold image), and is held in a manner that indicates that the degree of expectation is higher than the normal hold image It is a good idea not to display images (red pending images or gold pending images).

During the period (third period) in which the background concealing image at the end of the right-handed state is displayed and the normal background image A and the normal background image B are gradually more visible, the reserved image is replaced with another reserved image. It is best not to change it.
Similarly, during the period (third period) when the background concealing image is displayed when executing "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destroying Reach" and the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see, the suspended image is changed to another mode. It is preferable not to change to the held image of
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that the state of the reserved image has changed and the degree of expectation shown has changed.

With reference to FIG. 402 and the like, before and after the background concealing image is displayed when "Enemy Tank Destroy Reach" is executed, the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is maintained, or the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is maintained. (In addition, the same display may be performed in "Giant Tank Reach").
On the other hand, when the right-handed state ends and the normal state is entered by executing the variable display of the decorative symbols a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed. It is preferable that the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is not displayed after the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting is completed. Alternatively, the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may not be displayed in the variable display when the right-handed state ends.
Whether or not the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is executed is determined by the look-ahead processing at the time of starting winning. should not be displayed. For example, it is preferable not to start the display of the band-like prefetch effect image for the suspension that occurs during the 96th to 100th variable display.

When the decorative pattern changes at the end of the right-handed state (100th time), if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the period during which the background concealing image made up of sunglasses etc. is displayed (1st period to 1st period) 3 period) or a period after the display of the background masking image (fourth period), a jackpot notification image for notifying that a jackpot will occur may be displayed.

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 421 is modified so as to display a jackpot notification image for notifying that a jackpot will occur will be described with reference to FIG. 424 .
FIG. 424(a) shows an embodiment in which a big hit notification image is displayed during a period from timing t14, which is the timing at which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period. ing.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 424(a), modified examples (modified example 01 to modified example 14) in which the period for displaying the jackpot notification image is modified will be described below with reference to FIG. 424(b). do.

In the modification 01, the big hit notification image is displayed during the period from the timing t14 when the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped to the timing t18 when the first period ends.
In the modification 02, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In the modification 03, a big hit notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the modification 04, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modification 05, a big hit notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, to timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period.
In modification 06, a big hit notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In the modification 07, a big hit notification image is displayed during a period from timing t16 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In modification 08, a big hit notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modification 09, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In the tenth modification, a big hit notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the eleventh modification, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the twelfth modification, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the thirteenth modification, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modification 14, the jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

Timing t14 when the left decorative pattern to right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, timing t16 when the first period starts, and timing t18 when the second period starts are displayed as the timing for starting the display of the big hit notification image. , timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, and timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, are shown.
For example, the timing t15, the timing t17, the timing t19, the timing t21, and the timing t23 may be the timings for starting the display of the big hit notification image.

In addition, timing t16 that is the start timing of the first period, timing t18 that is the end timing of the first period, timing t20 that is the end timing of the second period, timing t20 that is the end timing of the second period, and timing t20 that is the end timing of the second period, as the timing for ending the display of the big hit notification image. Although the timing t22, which is the end timing, and the timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period, are shown, a predetermined timing within these periods may be the timing for ending the display of the big win notification image.
For example, the timing t15, the timing t17, the timing t19, the timing t21, and the timing t23 may be the timings for ending the display of the big hit notification image.

In this way, the timing for starting the display of the big win notification image can be any timing from timing t14 to timing t23, and the timing for ending the display of the big win notification image can be any timing from timing t15 to timing t24. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 424, the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A at timing t19. The display of the normal background image C may be continued after the timing t19, and the normal background image C may be changed to the background image during the big win at the timing t25.

The display priority of the jackpot notification image should be higher than the display priority of the background masking image and the game result image. Also, the big win notification image is preferably displayed at a position overlapping the game result image. The big win announcement image may be a moving image, and the big win announcement may be performed by displaying the moving image.

The period from the start of the variable display to the display of the background concealment image at the end of the right-handed shot will be the special reach in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" from the start of the variable display. It is preferable that the period is shorter than the period until the background concealed image is displayed.
For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 421(a), the display of the background concealing image at the end of right-handed hitting is started at timing t16 eight seconds after timing t8 when the variable display is started.
On the other hand, in the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 416(a) and the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. At t36, display of the special reach background concealing image is started.
Also, at the end of the right-hand shot (if the result of the 100th variation display is a loss), "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" will not be executed, and the special reach background concealment image will not be displayed. It should be configured as follows.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize a suitable presentation mode.

In this way, during the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display C") is performed.

When executing the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach"), by displaying a background masking image such as a bomb character, even if the result of the first reach effect is a failure, a special effect in which the character appears will be displayed. It can be seen, and the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated.
Also, comparing the special display A in the first ready-to-win effect and the special display C at the end of hitting to the right, the background concealing image used in the special display A and the background concealing image used in the special display C are different. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the game state.

When the second ready-to-reach effect ("enemy tank destroying ready-to-reach") is executed, a black background concealing image is displayed to calm the player's disappointment even when the second ready-to-reach effect results in a failure. be able to.
Also, when comparing the special display B in the second ready-to-win effect and the special display C at the end of right-handed hitting, the background concealing image used in the special display B and the background concealing image used in the special display C are different. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 425 and the like, there will be shown an embodiment of a pseudo-continuous effect in which the decorative symbols are once visually recognized as if they have stopped, and then are displayed in a fluctuating manner again.
Specifically, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 425 and 426, after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at decorative symbols with different numbers, special decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbols. By performing the stop effect, each temporarily stopped decorative pattern is again scrolled downward and variably displayed. Further, when the downward scroll movement is started again after each decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, an image of "x2" is displayed in the display area. Hereinafter, such a presentation will be referred to as a pseudo-continuous presentation.

In the state where the image "×2" is displayed, the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped at decorative symbols with different numbers, and a special design is displayed in the middle design, so that the temporarily stopped decorative design is lowered again. It may fluctuate by scrolling in the direction. In this case, instead of the image "x2", the image "x3" is displayed. Hereinafter, these "x2" and "x3" images will be referred to as pseudo consecutive number display images. FIGS. 425(b) and 426(b) are time charts showing an effect example in which the image "x2" is displayed and then the image "x3" is displayed.

An effect example will be specifically shown below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 425(b) and the display example shown in FIG. At timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started.
At timing t4, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At timing t6, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. FIG. 427(a) shows the display state at this time. At timing t8, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. In the middle decorative pattern, a special decorative pattern with a Chinese character "continued" is displayed. FIG. 427(b) shows the display state at this time. At timing t10, the left to right decorative symbols are again scrolled downward and variably displayed. In addition, “×2” of the pseudo-run count display image is displayed on the upper left of the display area. FIG. 427(c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t14, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At timing t16, the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. FIG. 427(d) shows the display state at this time. Incidentally, as shown in this figure, the display priority of the pseudo run number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. At timing t18, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. In the middle decorative pattern, a special decorative pattern with a Chinese character "continued" is displayed. FIG. 427(e) shows the display state at this time. At timing t20, the left to right decorative symbols are again scrolled downward and variably displayed. In addition, “×3” of the pseudo-run count display image is displayed on the upper left of the display area. FIG. 427(f) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t25, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At timing t30, the right decorative design temporarily stops at the same number (number "2") as the left decorative design, and a ready-to-win state occurs. FIG. 427(g) shows the display state at this time. During the period from timing t37 to timing t39, "x3" in the pseudo-run count display image gradually becomes translucent and difficult to see. FIG. 427(h) shows the display state at this time. At timing t40, the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. It is indicated whether the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a loss depending on the display mode of the decorative pattern at the time of temporary stop. At timing t41, the left to right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and this state is maintained until timing t42. After the timing t42, the variation display from the next time onwards is executed, or the jackpot game state is executed.

The effect mode of the pseudo-continuous effect has been described using FIG. 425(b) as a representative, but the same display is also performed in other time charts.

In the production example shown in the time chart of Fig. 425(a), after "x2" is finally displayed as the display image of the number of pseudo-runs, it does not develop into "reach to huge tank" or "reach to destroy enemy tank". Then, at the timing t31, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a reach loss or a big hit. The pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
In addition, since the pseudo consecutive number display image has a higher display priority than the normal background image, a part of the normal background image is made invisible or invisible due to the pseudo consecutive number display image. The gradual disappearance of the pseudo continuation display image of the time chart is synonymous with the gradual recognition of the normal background image.

In the production example shown in the time chart of Fig. 426(a), after "x2" is finally displayed as the display image of the number of pseudo-runs, the production develops into a "giant tank reach" production and a "enemy tank destruction reach" production. do. After the ready-to-win state occurs at timing t20, the ready-to-win effect is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 416(a) and FIG. 397(a).

In the production example shown in the time chart of Fig. 426(b), after "x3" is finally displayed as the pseudo-run count display image, it develops into a "giant tank reach" production and a "enemy tank destruction reach" production. do. After the occurrence of the ready-to-win state at timing t30, the ready-to-win effect is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 416(a) and FIG. 397(a).

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 426(a) and 426(b), the pseudo-run count display image is visually recognized by the background concealed image displayed at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" production or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" production. It becomes difficult or invisible, and the display ends when in this state. For example, the display may end at a predetermined timing in the period from timing t13 to timing t19 shown in FIGS. 416(a) and 397(a).

As described above, the display priority of the pseudo-run count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols, and is displayed closer to the viewer than the decorative symbols. FIG. 427 shows that a pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern.
Further, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive count display image is lower than the display priority of the background concealed image, and the pseudo consecutive count display image is displayed behind the background concealed image.

As shown in FIG. 425(a), from timing t27 to timing t29, the pseudo consecutive number display image ("x2") is gradually erased.
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 425(b), from timing t37 to timing t39, the pseudo consecutive count display image ("x3") is gradually erased.
During these periods, the pseudo repeat number display image is gradually changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state over a period of 2 seconds, and the display is terminated at the timing when it finally becomes transparent, so that the background image and decorative patterns are visually recognized. It is good to improve the quality. FIG. 427(h) shows a state in which the pseudo-run count display image is displayed in a translucent state.
Instead of gradually making the entire pseudo-running number display image transparent, the pseudo-running number display image is made transparent from the surroundings, and finally the central part is made transparent to display the pseudo-running number display image. may be terminated.
Any other display mode may be adopted as long as the display image of the number of pseudo-runs is displayed in such a manner that the visibility gradually decreases.

The display priority of the pseudo-run count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols, and is displayed on the nearer side than the decorative symbols. The priority may be temporarily lower than the priority of the decorative symbol so that at least a portion of the pseudo consecutive number display image is hidden by the temporary stop-displayed decorative symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 426(a) and 426(b), when the background concealing image is displayed because the background image is switched to the special reach background image, a predetermined At the timing of , the display of the pseudo-run count display image should be ended. For example, the display may be terminated while the background concealing image A and the background concealing image B are being displayed, or the display may be terminated while the background concealing image C is being displayed.

When the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous number display image ("x2", "x3") is displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern should be prevented from being non-reachable.
That is, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern stop at the decorative patterns with the same number to enter the ready-to-win mode, and then, in FIGS. 425(a) and 425(b) 426(a) and 426(b), as shown in FIG. 426(a) and FIG. 426(b), the middle decoration pattern is stopped without developing into the special reach and the result of the special lottery is shown. It is preferable that the symbols stop to indicate the result of the special lottery.
Alternatively, when "x3" is displayed as the pseudo-run count display image, the stop display mode of the decorative symbols may be set so as not to result in a non-reach loss. In addition, although "x2" is displayed as the pseudo-run count display image, if "x3" is not displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern may be a non-reach loss. .

The expectation of a big hit is higher in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed and in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the pseudo-continuous number display image "x2" is displayed.
In addition, after the pseudo-continuation display image "x2" is displayed, the pseudo-continuation number display image "x3" is not displayed, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. In the case where the pseudo-running number display image of "x2" is displayed and then the pseudo-running number display image of "x3" is displayed, the latter has a higher expectation of a big hit.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols in the pseudo continuous effect is not limited to the display example shown in FIG. 427, and other temporary stop modes may be used.
For example, only one of the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, and special symbols such as "NEXT", "run", "pseudo run", and "next" may be stopped in the middle decorative symbols.
Alternatively, such a special design may stop on one of the left and right decorative designs, not limited to the middle decorative design.
Also, the left, middle, and right decoration patterns may be temporarily stopped in a special combination (numbers "1, 3, 5", numbers "6, 7, 7", etc.).
In this way, in the pseudo-continuous effect, it is visually recognized as if some or all of the left decorative symbols, the middle decorative symbols, and the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and then these symbols are moved and displayed again to play the game. It should be visible to people.
Although the decorative pattern itself does not temporarily stop, the effect image in which the recollection story of a predetermined character progresses step by step is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern to hide a part or all of the decorative pattern, thereby changing the decorative pattern. It may also be visually recognized by the player as a display break. In this case, the first effect image and the second effect image show different stories.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 425(a) and 425(b), the player can more easily understand the degree of expectation by displaying the pseudo-run count display image in front of the decorative symbols. In addition, the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends at the timing (timing t29 or timing t39) before the timing (timing t30 or timing t40) at which a part of the decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing so, the visibility of the decorative pattern is secured, and the player can easily recognize the result of the special lottery.
In the production examples shown in FIGS. 426(a) and 426(b), the display of the pseudo-run count display image is terminated while the background concealed image is being displayed. Since the number display image is not displayed, the player can concentrate on the result of the battle between the tanks during the execution of the special reach.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 425(a), the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased from timing t27 to timing t29, but it may be erased at other timings. FIG. 428(b) shows an embodiment in which the mode of erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image is modified in the effect example shown in FIG. 425(a).
As in Modifications 01 to 11 shown in FIG. 428(b), the timing of starting to erase the pseudo-run count display image, the period required to erase the pseudo-run count display image, and the end of erasing the pseudo-run count display image. It is also possible to determine the timing of the display, and the period from the end of erasing the pseudo-running number display image to the stop display of the decorative symbol. Note that FIG. 428(a) is the same view as FIG. 425(a). It should be noted that, in the modified example 01 and the like, for the convenience of drawing, parts that should be described as "gradually deleted" are described as "gradually".

In order to facilitate comparison with other inventions, the period from the start of display of the pseudo-run count display image to the start of erasure (timing t10 to timing t27 in FIG. 428(a)) is It may be referred to as a "second period". Similarly, the period (timing t27 to timing t29 in FIG. 428(a)) required for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image may be referred to as "third period" for convenience. Similarly, the period from the end of erasing the pseudo-run count display image to the stop display of the decorative symbols may be referred to as a "fourth period" (timing t29 to timing t30 in FIG. 428(a)) for convenience. In addition, a first period (timing t10 to timing t12 in FIG. 428(a)) may be provided in which the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state gradually becoming opaque.

Modification 01 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t27.
Modification 02 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t28.
Modification 03 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t29.
Modification 04 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t28.
FIG. 425(a) has already shown an effect example in which the pseudo-run count display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
Modification 05 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t30.
Modification 06 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t29.
Modification 07 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t30.
Modification 08 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t31.
Modification 09 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t30.
Modification 10 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t31.
Modification 11 indicates that the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t30 to timing t31.
In these examples, any one of 1 second to 3 seconds is set as the time for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image. In addition, the time from the completion of erasing the pseudo-running number display image until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is set to any one of 0 to 4 seconds.

Referring to FIG. 428(b), an embodiment and a modified example of erasing the pseudo-run count display image “×2” are shown. The method described in FIG. 428(b) can also be applied when erasing the image “×3”.

Decorative patterns displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect, and decorative patterns displayed during the reach effect shown in Figs. 425(a) and 425(b). are different in design and size. Specifically, the decorative patterns displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect consist only of numbers and square frames, and are small in size, but are shown in Fig. 425(a). The decoration pattern displayed during execution of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 425(b) consists of numbers, rectangular frames and bomb characters, and is large in size.

The period required for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes more visible.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo-run count display image in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 428 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS.

The period required for erasing the pseudo number display image may be the same length as the period (third period) during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 428 and the length of the third period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397 are the same.

The period required for erasing the display image of the number of pseudo-runs may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" becomes more visible.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo-run count display image in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 428 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS.

The period from the end of display of the display image of the number of pseudo-runs to the end of the change display of the decorative pattern is the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period).
For example, the length of the period from the end of display of the pseudo-run count display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols in modification 05 shown in FIG. 428 is the length of the fourth period in modification 02 shown in FIGS. shorter than the length.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo-running display image to the end of the display of the variable decoration pattern, and the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period) may be of the same length.
For example, the length of the period from the end of display of the pseudo-run count display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols in Modification 05 shown in FIG. 428, and the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. are the same.

The period from the end of display of the display image of the number of pseudo-runs to the end of the change display of the decorative pattern is the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal (4th period).
For example, the length of the period from the end of display of the pseudo-run count display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols in modification 01 shown in FIG. 428 is the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIGS. It's longer than it should be.
In the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", the size of the decorative pattern is small, but in the reach effects shown with reference to FIGS. is large, and is displayed overlapping with the pseudo-run count display image. Therefore, by lengthening the period from when the pseudo-run number display image is erased to when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state of the decorative symbols.

With the reach effects shown in FIGS. 425(a) and 425(b), the "giant tank reach" effect, and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, the background image A is usually displayed at the start of the change. However, the normal background image A may be displayed again after the background concealing image and the pseudo repeat count display image are finished. Alternatively, the normal background image A may be replaced with the normal background image B at the timing when the background concealing image C is displayed or at the end timing of the display of the pseudo-run count display image. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
Also, only at the end of the display of the pseudo run number display image shown with reference to FIGS. It may be possible to switch to another normal background image.

In this way, the normal background image displayed during the display of the pseudo-run count display image or before the special ready-to-win effect can be switched to another normal background image after the display of the pseudo-run count display image ends or after the special reach effect. By adopting a configuration in which it is possible, the special lottery results in a loss, and it is possible to change the feelings of the player who is feeling regret.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends. Alternatively, in a situation where the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed, the pseudo-repeated count display image is displayed, and the degree of recognition of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is lowered, and the pseudo-repeated count is displayed. When the degree of recognition of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is increased during the period of erasing the display image, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image are not displayed even when the period of erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image comes. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are continuously displayed without displaying the image B from the beginning, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed even after the period for erasing the pseudo consecutive number display image ends. Instead of displaying the normal background moving image B from the beginning, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed.

426(a) and 426(b), it will shift to "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". Regarding the display mode of the pending image and the pending image in "Destructive Reach", the display modes in the above-described embodiments with reference to FIGS. 397 to 408 may be adopted.

On the other hand, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the pending image or the pending image to another display mode indicating the degree of expectation while the pseudo consecutive number display image is being erased.
For example, at timing t27 in FIG. 425(a), when the pending image is the green pending image, the green pending image is displayed during the period from timing t27 when the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased to timing t29. An image should be displayed.

Based on the pending look-ahead, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the state where the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is displayed, after the timing t20 in the effect example shown in FIG. ), after timing t30 in the production example shown in FIG. You may do so.

In this way, while the pseudo-run count display image is being erased, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display D") is performed.

At the start of the variable display of decorative symbols, the normal background image may be switched to another normal background image. An embodiment of a normal background image switching effect for displaying a special background masking image and switching the normal background image to another normal background image will be described below.

First, the background masking image displayed in the normal background image switching effect in this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 429(a) shows a giant bomb character viewed obliquely from the front left. Also, the portions other than the bomb character are translucent blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image A hereinafter.
FIG. 429(b) shows a state in which the bomb character is seen obliquely from the front left and slightly from the front. Also, the portions other than the bomb character are translucent blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image B hereinafter.
FIG. 429(c) shows a front view of the bomb character. In addition, portions other than the bomb character are opaque blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image C hereinafter.
FIG. 429(d) shows a state in which the bomb character is seen obliquely to the right and slightly from the front. Also, the portions other than the bomb character are translucent blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image D hereinafter.
FIG. 429(e) shows the bomb character viewed obliquely from the front right. Also, the portions other than the bomb character are translucent blue. An image composed of these will be referred to as a background concealed image E hereinafter.
Note that the outline of the image of the giant bomb character is opaque black, and the other portion (the area enclosed by the outline) is opaque white.
In this embodiment, the normal background image is switched during the display of the background concealing image made up of such a huge bomb character or the like.

In the background concealment image made up of a giant bomb character or the like, the blue translucent portions of the background concealment images A and E have a higher degree of transparency than the blue semitransparent portions of the background concealment images B and D, and thus are more transparent than the background concealment images B and D. High visibility. Since the blue portion of the background masking image C is opaque, the image positioned behind is not visible. In addition, the bomb character may be displayed in a large size so that only the bomb character can be visually recognized in the background concealing image C. FIG.

An example of the normal background image switching effect for switching the normal background image being displayed to another normal background image will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 430(a) and the display example shown in FIG.
First, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started from timing t0. FIG. 431(a) shows a display example of the period from timing t0 to timing t1. Note that the normal background image A has already been displayed at the timing t0. The normal background image A is displayed, for example, over a plurality of variable displays.
Next, the background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t1 to timing t2. FIG. 431(b) shows a display example of the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Next, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 431(c) shows a display example of the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Next, the background concealed image C is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t5. Also, at timing t4, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the normal background image B. FIG. FIG. 431(d) shows a display example of the period from timing t3 to timing t5.
Next, the background concealed image D is displayed during the period from timing t5 to timing t6. FIG. 431(e) shows a display example of the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Next, the background concealed image E is displayed during the period from timing t6 to timing t7. FIG. 431(f) shows a display example of the period from timing t6 to timing t7. In this way, the normal background image switching effect is executed from timing t1 to timing t7.
After the timing t7, the decorative symbols are variably displayed while the background masking image is not displayed. FIG. 431(g) shows a display example after timing t7.
Thus, in this embodiment, the normal background image A is displayed from timing t0 to timing t4, and the normal background image B is displayed from timing t4 to timing t32. It should be noted that the background image B is normally displayed in the variable display from the next time onward.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a period in which the normal background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period), a period in which the normal background image becomes invisible (second period), and a period in which the normal background image gradually becomes difficult to see. It has a period (third period) during which the visibility of the normal background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped (fourth period). Note that the normal background image in the first period is different from the normal background images in the third and fourth periods. As a result, the normal background image can be switched without a sense of discomfort.
In addition, the background concealing image is displayed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the display for switching the normal background image is performed, so that the player's mood can be switched.

The background concealing image in this embodiment is the background concealing image used when starting "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destroying Reach", and the background used when ending "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destroying Reach". The obscuring image is different from the background obscuring image used to exit the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that a ready-to-win effect advantageous to the player has occurred.
In this way, after switching the normal background image, depending on the result of the special lottery, it is possible to execute the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, such as "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". It should be possible to do so.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 430, the display of the background concealing image is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the background image is normally changed. At the end of the game, the normal background image may be changed.
It should be noted that the normal background image may be changed only once during one variation of the decorative pattern.
Also, the change of the normal background image should be executed in a state in which none of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 430(a), the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t20, which is timing after timing t7 when the display of the background concealing image ends.

Before the display of the background masking image ends (before timing t7 in FIG. 430(a)), the left to right decorative symbols may be changed at high speed. Specifically, before the display of the background concealing image ends, it is preferable to change the scroll speed of the decorative symbols downward to the fastest state (the scroll speed immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, The scroll speed just before the temporary stop is slower than this scroll speed).
Alternatively, even after the display of the background concealing image is finished, at least one of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the previous variable display may be visible. For example, it is preferable that the predetermined decorative pattern, whose variable display is started at timing t0 in FIG. 430(a), does not move or moves slowly so that it can be visually recognized after timing t7.

The background may be hidden as shown in Modifications 01 to 12 in FIG. In these modified examples, the lengths of the first period to the fourth period are 1 second to 3 seconds. It is an example.
For example, as in Modification 01, although the lengths of the first and second periods are the same, the third period is longer than the first and second periods. By doing so, there is an effect that enjoyment is generated as to which normal background image is displayed as the new normal background image. In Modified Example 02, the lengths of the first period and the second period are the same, but the third period is shorter than the first period and the second period. By doing so, there is an effect that a new normal background image can be displayed at an early stage, and it is possible to spend time on a so-called notice effect such as a comment notice (for example, a notice effect by a speech notice image described later). In Modification 03, the first and third periods have the same length, but the second period is longer than the first and third periods. By doing so, the player can be entertained by the display of the background concealed image itself. It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.
Further, there are a plurality of types of normal background images, such as switching the normal background image in the mode of Modification 01 in the first normal background image switching effect, and switching the normal background image in the mode of Modification 02 in the second normal background image switching effect. Various modifications may be applied to each of the background image switching effects.

The period during which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) is shorter than the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 430 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS.

The period during which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) is the same as the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). may be
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 430 and the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397 are the same.

The period during which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) is longer than the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). good too.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS.

The period during which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the period during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period) ).
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 430 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIGS.

The period during which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the period during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period) ) may have the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 430 and the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397 are the same.

The period during which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period), and the period during which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (3rd period) ).
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIGS.

During the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (4th period), the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" will be used. It may be shorter than the period after returning (the fourth period).

Based on the period after the normal background image switching effect and the visibility of the background image returned to normal (4th period), and the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" The period after returning (the fourth period) may be the same length.

During the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (4th period), the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" will be used. It may be longer than the period after returning (the fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIGS.

As described above, when the special reach ends, the high-expectation pending image displayed in the pending image display area may be displayed as it is, or may be returned to a white pending image and displayed.

On the other hand, regarding the pending image in the present embodiment, the pending image is moved during the display of the background masking images A to E (at least one of the first period, the second period, and the third period; the same shall apply hereinafter). may Also, during the display of the background concealing images A to E, it may be possible to change the reserved image or the mode of the reserved image to a higher expected reserved image. When the mode of the pending image or the pending image is changed to a pending image with a higher degree of expectation while the background concealing images A to E are being displayed, it is possible to recognize the mode of the pending image or the pending image after the change. , If the change starts in the 1st period, any of the 1st to 4th periods, and if the change starts in the 2nd period, any of the 2nd to 4th periods, and the 3rd period If the change is to start in any of the 3rd to 4th periods, and if the change is to start in the 4th period, the change will be made in the 4th period. should be For example, when the change is started in the first period and the state of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change is made recognizable in the first period, the state of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change can be recognized at an early stage. Therefore, if the effect is to be able to provide a sense of anticipation early, or if it is possible to recognize the state of the pending image or the pending image after the change starts in the first period and changes in the fourth period, which mode will be used? It can provide a sense of anticipation of change. If the change starts in the 4th period, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation that even the 1st to 3rd periods, which do not change, may change, and each pattern has its own effect. Needless to say. Alternatively, during the display of the background masking images A to E, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 430 and the like, an effect example is shown in which the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is reduced by the background masking image, but similar to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. The reserved image and the visibility of the reserved image may be configured so as not to deteriorate. For example, the display priority of the pending image or the pending image may be set higher than the display priority of the background masking image.

At the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a display is performed in which the reserved images, which have been displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas until then, are moved to the reserved display areas to the third reserved display area. FIG. 432(a) shows that the movement of the pending image started and ended during the period from timing t0 when the variable display was started to timing t1. Note that the movement of the reserved image may be started and ended within this period. This point also applies to Modifications 01 to 07 shown in FIG. 432(b).
FIG. 431(a) shows a state in which the movement of the reserved image from the first reserved display area to the reserved display area is completed before the background concealed image A starts to be displayed.

FIG. 432(b) shows a modification of the period during which the pending image is moved.
Modification 01 indicates that the movement of the pending image starts and ends during the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Modification 02 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Modification 03 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
Modification 04 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t4 to timing t5.
Modification 05 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Modification 06 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t6 to timing t7.
Modification 07 indicates that the movement of the pending image is started and ended during the period from timing t7 to timing t8.

Modification 01 to Modification 07 indicate that the movement of the pending image is started and ended over one second within the period from timing t1 to timing t8. The movement of the reserved image may be started at a predetermined timing, and the movement of the reserved image may be finished at a predetermined timing. Also, the time required to move the pending image is not limited to 1 second, and may be shorter or longer than 1 second.
For example, the movement of the reserved image may be started at timing t1 and the movement of the reserved image may be finished at timing t7. Alternatively, the movement of the reserved image may be started at timing t6 and the movement of the reserved image may be finished at timing t8.

Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to move the pending image during execution of the normal background image switching effect. On the other hand, during the execution of the "huge tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" effects, the pending image is not moved, and the position of the pending image does not change before and after the reach effect.

An embodiment in which the strip-like prefetch effect image shown with reference to FIG. 402 is displayed may be adopted in this embodiment.
For example, after executing the normal background image switching effect, the display of the band-like prefetch effect image may be started based on the prefetch result. Alternatively, the normal background image may be changed by executing the normal background image switching effect while the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is displayed.
On the other hand, when the band-shaped look-ahead effect image has already been displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has high expectations for a big win from displaying an excessive performance by displaying the belt-like prefetch effect image.
In addition, in the reserved display area, the first to fourth reserved display areas, a reserved image (for example, a green or red reserved image) with a higher degree of expectation than a white reserved image that is a normal reserved image is displayed. Similarly, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed when the background image is displayed, and the same effect can be obtained in this case as well.

The time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the start of the change of the normal background image (for example, the time until the start of the display of the background concealing image) is the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is better to make it shorter than the time until the special reach ("giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach") starts.
In addition, the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the change of the normal background image (for example, the time until the end of the display of the background concealing image) is the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is better to make it shorter than the time until the special reach ("giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach") starts.
Also, after the normal background image is switched and the hidden background image is displayed, the hidden background image will be displayed at the start of the special reach ("Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") after a certain amount of time has passed. can be started.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the switching of the normal background image with the switching of the background image during special reach.

In the normal background image switching effect, an embodiment has been described in which a background masking image made up of a giant bomb character or the like is displayed. may be executed. For example, instead of a giant bomb character, a giant tank may be displayed so that the normal background image can be switched.
Further, the degree of expectation for the special lottery result may not be indicated by executing the normal background image switching effect. That is, the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the special lottery result during the variable display. Specifically, the normal background image switching effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/3) in the next variable display in which the special reach is lost. It should be noted that in the variable display after no reach loss (a) in FIG. 394 and the variable display after the reach loss (no background switching) shown in FIG. good too. In this case, a predetermined probability (for example, 1/30 probability) that is lower than the probability (for example, 1/3 probability) of executing the normal background image switching effect in the next variable display in which the special reach results in failure. , the normal background image switching effect may be executed.
On the other hand, the execution of the normal background image switching effect may indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the changing decorative symbols. For example, when another normal background image is displayed instead of normal background image A or normal background image B, expectations are higher than when normal background image A or normal background image B is displayed. It is good to be In this case, the degree of expectation indicated by the switching of the normal background image should be lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the occurrence of the special reach.

A plurality of production patterns for normal background image switching production may be provided. For example, a plurality of types and colors of characters to be displayed may be provided. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit that differs for each production pattern may be indicated. Moreover, any one of the modifications shown in FIG. 430 may be appropriately adopted for each effect pattern, and the first period to the third period may be different.
For example, the length of the third period in the normal background image switching effect may vary depending on the type and color of the characters to be displayed. At this time, different expectations may be indicated depending on the type or color of the displayed character.

416 and 397, in the production examples of the "giant tank reach" effect and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and the normal background image A is displayed after the background concealing image ends. The background image A is displayed again, but at the timing when the background masking image C is displayed, the normal background image A may be replaced with the normal background image B and displayed. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the effect example of the background image switching effect shown with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of fluctuation, and the normal background image A A different normal background image (normal background image B in this embodiment) is displayed. Note that the normal background image A may continue to be displayed after the background concealing image is finished. In this case, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the background image switching effect.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the background masking image C ends. Alternatively, in a situation where the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed, the background concealing image is displayed, the visibility of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is lowered, and the background concealing image is deleted. When the degree of recognition of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is increased during the period, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed from the beginning even when the period for erasing the background concealing image comes. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are continuously displayed without removing the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed from the beginning even after the period for erasing the background concealing image is over. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed.

As described above, in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special display E”) is performed in the third period.

The embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 420 etc. and the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 429 etc. will be compared below. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 420 and the like, the background concealing image at the end of hitting to the right is displayed at the end of hitting to the right, and the background image is switched. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 429 and the like, the background image is switched when the decorative pattern starts to change.

The period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of the right-hand shot may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. .
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG.

Even if the period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of the right-hand shot and the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see are set to the same length. good.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 and the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 430 are the same.

The period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of the right-hand shot may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. .
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored at the end of the right-hand shot is changed to the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored after the normal background image switching effect is completed. period).

The period after the visibility of the background image is restored at the end of the right-hand shot (fourth period), and the period after the visibility of the background image is restored after the normal background image switching effect is finished (fourth period) period) may be of the same length.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of the right-hand shot (fourth period), the period after the background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG.

In the example of the effect at the end of right-handed hitting shown with reference to FIG. 421, etc., the normal background image C is displayed during right-handed hitting, and the normal background image A is displayed after the display of the background concealing image is finished. However, there may be cases where the normal background image C is displayed. For example, the normal background image A may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and the normal background image C may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of fluctuation, and the normal background image A normal background image different from A (normal background image B in this embodiment) is displayed. Note that the normal background image A may be displayed even after the background concealing image is finished. In this case, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the background image switching effect.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
Also, instead of the normal background image C, a normal background moving image C that is displayed like a moving image like the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the right hand stroke ends or the display of the background hiding image C in the normal background image switching effect ends. Alternatively, the background concealed image is displayed in a situation where the normal background moving images A to C are displayed, and the degree of recognition of the normal background moving images A to C is lowered, and the background concealed image is erased. When the degree of visibility of the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C is increased during the period, the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C are displayed from the beginning even if the period for erasing the background concealing image comes. The normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C are continuously displayed without removing the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C, and the normal background moving image A to normal background moving image C are displayed from the beginning even if the period for erasing the background concealing image ends. The normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be continuously displayed without being displayed.

When the right-handed state ends and the normal state is reached, the background concealed image at the end of right-handed hitting is displayed, but at this time, the pending image displayed after the background concealed image at the end of right-handed hitting A pending image (a white pending image) may be displayed.
In addition, during the period (third period) when the normal background image A and the normal background image B are gradually becoming more visible by displaying the background concealing image at the end of the right-handed state at the end of the right-handed state, the held image is put on another hold. It is better not to change it to an image.

On the other hand, as for the suspended image in the normal background image switching effect, the suspended image may be moved during the display of the background masking images A to E (first period to third period). Also, during the display of the background concealing images A to E, it may be possible to change the reserved image or the mode of the reserved image to a higher expected reserved image. Alternatively, during the display of the background masking images A to E, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image.

In this way, in the third period at the end of the advantageous state, the display (“special display C”) in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed. Further, in the third period in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display (“special display E”) in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases is performed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols, an effect may be executed to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. An embodiment capable of executing a dialog preview effect for displaying a dialog preview image will be described below.

First, the dialog preview image displayed in the dialog preview effect in the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 433 shows dialog preview images A to E displayed in the dialog preview effect of this embodiment.
The display priority of the dialogue preview image A to dialogue preview image E is higher than that of the decoration pattern and the reserved image, and the dialogue preview image A to the dialogue preview image E are displayed in front of these images.
The dialogue preview image is composed of a bomb character (white image) positioned in the center, dialogue (white image) consisting of four Chinese characters "bomb boy", and other areas (green background image). It should be noted that the background image referred to here is simply referred to as a background image for the sake of convenience in comparison with images of bomb characters and dialogue images.
The green background areas of dialog preview images A and E have high transparency, the green background areas of dialog preview images B and D have low transparency, and the green areas of dialog preview image C have the highest transparency. Low and the background image is not visible.
The kanji character "Baku" is attached to the dialogue preview image A, the kanji character "bomb" is attached to the dialogue preview image B, and the kanji character "bomb boy" is attached to the dialogue preview images C to E. .

FIG. 434 shows a time chart showing an example of an effect of the dialogue announcement effect. Also, FIG. 435 shows a display example in which a dialog preview image is displayed at a predetermined timing.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 434(a), the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t0. FIG. 435(a) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image.
Next, during the period from timing t10 to timing t11, the dialog preview image A is displayed. FIG. 435(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t11 to timing t12, the dialog preview image B is displayed. FIG. 435(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t12 to timing t14, the dialog preview image C is displayed. FIG. 435(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t14 to timing t15, the dialog preview image D is displayed. FIG. 435(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t15 to timing t16, the dialog preview image E is displayed. FIG. 435(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t16, the series of display of the dialog preview images ends. FIG. 435(g) shows a display state at a predetermined timing during the period from timing t16 to timing t20 (the period until the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped).
The left decorative design is temporarily stopped at timing t20, the right decorative design is displayed at timing t25, and the middle decorative design is displayed at timing t30.
At timing t31, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big win.

In this manner, even in the dialog preview effect, the display of the dialog preview image causes the background image to gradually become difficult to see (first period), the background image becomes invisible (second period), and the background image gradually disappears. It has a period (third period) during which the background image becomes easily visible and a period (fourth period) until the visibility of the background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped. That is, the dialogue preview image also functions like the background concealing image.

In this way, when the dialogue forewarning effect of displaying a series of dialogue forewarning images is executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the dialogue forewarning performance is not executed. Whether or not to execute the speech announcement effect is determined based on the special lottery result.
In some situations during the execution of the dialogue notice effect, the normal background image becomes invisible, but before and after the execution of the dialogue notice effect, the normal background image will not be changed to another normal background image. , the same normal background image is displayed.

A plurality of dialogue forewarning effects with different display modes may be made executable, and any one of the dialogue forewarning effects may be executed. For example, it is preferable to use dialogue preview images with different contents of dialogue, types of characters, colors of background areas, and the like. Also, depending on the type of speech announcement effect, the same level of expectation may be suggested, or a different level of expectation may be suggested.
For example, when the color of the background area is red, the degree of expectation may be higher than when the background area is green.

Although an example of displaying words and a character has been given, these are only examples, and either the words or the character may be configured to be executable as an advance notice effect. Alternatively, in place of the words and characters, other images may be displayed as a preview effect.

Although the display of the dialog preview image A to the dialog preview image E indicates that the dialog preview effect is performed, the dialog preview effect may be performed by displaying a moving image. For example, a character or dialogue may be moved, or the transparency may be smoothly changed.

Comparing the normal background image switching effect in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. good.
For example, compared to the modification 02 of the normal background image switching effect, the modification 01 of the dialog preview effect has a longer execution time of the effect.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the speech announcement effect. On the other hand, the execution of the normal background image switching effect basically does not indicate the degree of expectation for the big win. Therefore, even if the time for executing the effect is relatively shortened, the influence of the player overlooking the degree of expectation can be reduced.

The period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the dialog preview effect may be shorter than the period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG.

A period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the speech advance notice effect may be the same length as a period (second period) in which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 434 is the same as the length of the second period in modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period during which the background image is invisible (second period) in the speech advance notice effect may be longer than the period during which the background image is invisible (second period) in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 434 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG.

A period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes more visible in the speech advance notice effect may be shorter than a period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes more visible in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG.

A period (third period) in which the background image in the speech advance notice effect is gradually easier to see may be the same length as a period (third period) in which the background image is gradually easier to see in the normal background image switching effect. .
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 434 and the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 430 are the same.

A period (third period) in which the background image in the speech advance notice effect gradually becomes easier to see may be longer than a period (third period) in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the third period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 434 is longer than the length of the third period in modification 02 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the dialog preview effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal, and the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal ( fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period after the dialog preview effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal (fourth period), and the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal ( 4th period) may have the same length.

The period (fourth period) after the dialog preview effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal, and the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the background image visibility returns to normal ( fourth period).

Both of the speech announcement effect shown in FIG. 434 and the normal background image switching effect shown in FIG. 430 may be executed during one variation of the decorative pattern.
For example, the normal background image switching effect may be executed during the period from timing t1 to timing t7, and the dialogue announcement effect may be executed during the period from timing t10 to timing t16. Further, modifications of both embodiments may be appropriately combined and executed.
It should be noted that the speech announcement effect is not executed prior to the normal background image switching effect, and conversely, it is preferable that the dialogue announcement effect is executed after the normal background image switching effect. Further, it may be configured such that the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the dialog preview effect.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the like, an effect example in which the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is reduced during the dialogue announcement effect is shown, but the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 401 In addition, it may be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image does not deteriorate. For example, the display priority of the pending image or the pending image may be set higher than the display priority of the dialog preview image.

In both the dialogue announcement effect shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. can be
Alternatively, in both the dialogue announcement effect shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. Instead of becoming invisible, the state of being easily visible may be maintained in the same way as before execution of the effect.

Alternatively, in the dialog forewarning effect shown with reference to FIG. In the effect, even during the execution of the effect, the reserved image or the reserved image does not become difficult to see or cannot be seen, and the easily visible state may be maintained as before the effect is executed.
Conversely, in the speech announcement effect shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the like, even during the execution of the effect, the reserved image or the reserved image does not become difficult or invisible, and can be easily viewed in the same way as before the effect is executed. is maintained, and in the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG.

Even when the strip-like prefetch effect image shown with reference to FIG. 402 is being displayed, it is preferable to configure the dialog preview effect to be executable.
On the other hand, when the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is being displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's expectations are confused by the execution of the normal background image switching effect, which does not necessarily indicate the expectations.

When only the dialogue foretelling effect is executed and when only the normal background image switching effect is executed, it is preferable to increase the degree of expectation when only the dialogue foretelling effect is executed.
Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be the same when both the dialogue foretelling effect and the normal background image switching effect are executed, and when only the dialogue foretelling effect is executed.

Since the background image is not normally changed before and after execution of the speech announcement performance, even if the first period or the third period of the speech announcement performance is shortened or the second period is lengthened, the player hardly feels a sense of incongruity.
In addition, since the background image is usually not changed, even if the time until the decorative pattern finishes changing is short, the player is unlikely to feel a sense of discomfort.

The dialogue announcement effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect based on the pending look-ahead. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 435 (a), the number of pending is 2, the pending image is displayed in the second pending display area, corresponding to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area Prefetching of the suspension may be performed, and the dialog preview image may be displayed at each time of a total of three variable displays until the suspension image displayed in the second suspension display area becomes the suspension image. In this way, the dialogue announcement effect may be displayed over a plurality of times of variable display. Also, it is preferable that a predetermined degree of expectation is indicated by the display mode of the dialog preview image.

On the other hand, the normal background image switching effect is not executed based on the look-ahead effect. Also, as described above, it may be executed in the next variable display that results in a loss.
In addition, at the timing when the variable display resulting in the failure is stopped and displayed, if there is a hold, the normal background image switching effect is executed with a predetermined probability, and if there is no hold, a starting prize is generated. Even if the next variable display is started, the normal background image switching effect may not be performed.
Alternatively, a specific reach effect (such as the aforementioned "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach", a reach effect in which a special reach background image is displayed instead of the normal background image) is executed. On the condition that a result is obtained, it is internally determined with a predetermined probability (including 100% execution of the normal background image switching effect) that the normal background image switching effect is executed in the next variable display. may be stored, and the normal background image switching effect may be executed based on the content of the determination when the variable display is executed next time. A specific implementation mode can be realized by turning on or off a normal background image switching effect execution flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 . According to such a configuration, even if the pending number is 0, by turning on the normal background image switching effect execution flag, when the start winning occurs and the next variable display is performed In addition, a normal background image switching effect can be executed. It should be noted that the normal background image switching effect execution flag is preferably kept on until the next variable display is started.
Even if it is decided to execute the normal background image switching effect, the normal background image switching effect is not executed in the next variable display on the condition that the starting prize does not occur for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). (the normal background image switching effect execution flag is turned off). It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 may be introduced in the display area at the same time as the predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display area may shift to a demonstration image display state. The normal background image switching effect execution flag is turned on even after the transition to the demo image display state, and the normal background image switching effect is executed when the start winning occurs and the variable display is performed in the demo image display state. , the normal background image switching effect execution flag may be turned off.

In this way, while the dialog preview image is being erased, a display in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display F") is performed.

A plurality of embodiments and modifications of these embodiments have been described with reference to FIGS. may be Alternatively, one pachinko machine 1 may be able to execute some of the multiple embodiments and modifications described.

In addition, before the start of the game, the player or the store clerk of the amusement parlor can determine which one of the plurality of aspects in the embodiment and modifications shown with reference to FIGS. You may enable it to be selected in advance. For example, the player himself/herself may be allowed to set the length of the first to fourth periods in each of the effects shown in FIGS. 388 to 435 on the customization screen or the like.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can set the game effect to be executed in a manner that suits his or her taste. In addition, the store clerk of the amusement parlor can set such that a game presentation suitable for the customer base of the amusement parlor is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

388 to 435, each effect in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. has the second period in which the is the lowest and the third period in which the visibility of the background image is high. It also has a fourth period, which is a period from the end of each effect, the end of displaying the image that hides the background image, the return of the visibility of the background image to the original state, and the stop of the decorative pattern.

An example has been shown in which all of the background image becomes invisible in the second period due to the display of the background concealing image. You may make it difficult to visually recognize.
In this case, the transparency of the background concealed image should be minimized in the second period.
Alternatively, the size of the background-concealed image is not the same size as the display area, but is made smaller than the display area so that part of the background image is visible even when the background-concealed image is displayed. good too. In this case, it is desirable that the ratio of the background masking image to the display area is 50% or more, or 2/3 or more.
Note that the dialog preview image can also be transformed in the same manner.
On the other hand, the pseudo-run count display image and the resurrection effect image (resurrection effect character and its lines) are originally smaller than the display area. It is desirable that these images occupy less than 50% of the display area.

Background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect that is part of the notice effect Although it is shown that there are 1st to 4th periods, the length of at least one of the periods (1st to 4th periods) in each effect is longer than the length of each state described below. You can do it, or you can make it shorter.

The special reach decoration pattern swings in the vertical direction at a predetermined cycle during the special reach, but each effect (background image switching effect at the start of the special reach, background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, background image at the end of the right hit Each period (first period to fourth period) in the switching effect, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. may Alternatively, even if it is lengthened, it should be less than two cycles.
For example, the length of the first period in the background image switching effect at the start of special reach is longer than the predetermined cycle of the special reach decoration pattern displayed at a predetermined cycle during special reach, so that special reach decoration during special reach The predetermined period of the pattern is relatively long (because if it is shortened, it will look rushed and you will not be able to concentrate on the ready-to-win effect). There is an effect of being able to provide pleasure developed into reach for a long time.
Also, for example, the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the predetermined cycle of the special reach decoration pattern displayed at a predetermined cycle during the special reach, so that There is an effect that it is possible to quickly end the sense of anticipation of the next change and to have expectations for the next change (to quickly switch the mood).
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

The pending image or the pending image may be a moving image, and may be repeatedly displayed at a predetermined cycle. At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hitting, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. Alternatively, even if it is lengthened, it should be less than two cycles.
For example, the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of special reach of special reach that does not display the hold image or hold image during special reach is the predetermined period of the hold image or hold image displayed as a moving image By making it longer than , the reserved image and the reserved image are displayed for one cycle or more in the third period, so that the presence of the reserved image can be impressed on the player, and the player is encouraged to operate the handle 302. It has a reminder effect.
For example, the length of the second period in the normal background image switching effect and the dialog preview effect is set to be shorter than the predetermined period of the pending image and the pending image displayed as a moving image, so that the pending image and the pending image can be animated. There is an effect that the visibility of the dramatic effect display is ensured to a certain extent.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

With reference to FIGS. 306 and 307, it is shown that there are four game states (normal state, time saving state, non-time saving probability variable state, probability variable state) in addition to the jackpot state. In these four game states, special symbols can be variably displayed. In addition, it is possible to variably display the decorative design at the same time as the special design.
In the normal state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of production patterns with different variable display times (the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop display), but compared with the shortest variable display time among them. , Each period ( Each of the first to fourth periods) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the time saving state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of production patterns with different variable display times (the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop display), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them. , Each period ( Each of the first to fourth periods) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the non-time-saving probability variable state, variable display is performed with multiple production patterns with different variable display times (time from when the decorative pattern starts variable display to when it stops displaying), but compared with the shortest variable display time among them. Then, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the probability variable state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of production patterns with different variable display times (the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the stop display), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them , Each period ( Each of the first to fourth periods) may be longer or shorter than this length.

The shortest time of the variable display time may be set differently according to the number of reserved symbols at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols. For example, it is preferable to shorten the shortest variable display time as the number of holds is larger, and lengthen the shortest variable display time as the number of holds is smaller.
At this time, compared with the shortest variable display time of the variable display time of the effect pattern that can occur corresponding to each number of holds, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching at the end of special reach Effect, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hitting, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect), each period (1st period to 4th period) is longer than this length It can be longer or shorter.

The effect pattern of the decorative symbols and the variable display time of the decorative symbols are also determined according to the game state and the number of reservations. Background image switching effect at the start of reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hitting, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) (1st period to 1st period) 4 periods) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit (the fourth period is the period immediately after the display of a different type of decorative pattern is started) By setting the length to be shorter than the shortest variable display time of the effect patterns, there is an effect that the player does not misunderstand that a new variable display has started and stopped.
For example, the length of the fourth period of the normal background image switching effect and the dialog preview effect is set to be longer than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns, so that the effect is performed after the normal background image switching effect and the dialog preview effect are executed. There is an effect that it is possible to take sufficient time to develop (for example, to develop into special reach, pseudo-continuous performance, etc.).
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

With reference to FIGS. 425 to 428, an embodiment of the pseudo-continuous effect has been shown. Compared to the time to perform the special pattern display), each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous effect, normal Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in the background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit is made shorter than the display that makes the player recognize that the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred. Since the transition to the second period is swift, the distinction between the pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred, and the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred (the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are all temporarily stopped, so the player can (There is a possibility that it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the effect has occurred).
For example, the length of the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right hit is longer than the display that makes the player recognize that the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred. It is displayed as it is with the combination of decorative patterns that are displayed temporarily (in the case of pseudo-continuous production, re-variation display is always performed after temporary stop, but the background image switching effect at the end of special reach and the background at the end of right hitting In the fourth period of the image switching effect, except for the case where the resurrection effect is executed and the result is a success, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as it is). There is an effect that it is possible to make the user give up on the variable display.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

Compared to the shortest shooting interval of the game ball fired into the game area, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous Each period (first period to fourth period) in the effect, normal background image switching effect, and dialog announcement effect) may be longer or shorter than the shortest firing interval. For example, when 100 game balls can be shot in 60 seconds, the shortest shooting interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the shortest shooting interval of the game ball, thereby obtaining the following effects.
There are also experienced players who stop shooting game balls when a special reach with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") is started. When the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started, the player with a lot of game experience guesses that the result of the special lottery is a loss, and operates the handle 302 to operate the game ball. to resume firing. In this case, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the shortest shooting interval of the game ball, so that the shooting of the game ball is restarted and the second game ball is shot. At that time, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is completely unrecognizable. From the second game ball onwards, it becomes possible to concentrate attention on the whereabouts of the game ball (whether or not the game ball starts winning a prize). In other words, the number of game balls on which the player cannot concentrate can be minimized while smoothly changing the background.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the shortest shooting interval of the game ball, thereby obtaining the following effects.
As described above, when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started, the player with a lot of gaming experience guesses that the result of the special lottery is a loss and operates the handle 302. Resume launching game balls. At this time, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is displayed in the display area and is recognizable by the player. will be In particular, even an experienced player may feel uncomfortable when viewing a special reach background image that has been viewed for a long time in the expectation of a big hit in a situation where the result of losing is expected. will be Due to these circumstances, it is expected that even experienced players will find it difficult to accurately shoot game balls because they will be distracted by the display contents of the display area and become upset. be. Therefore, the probability that the game ball shot in the first period will start winning is lower than when the player correctly shoots the game ball. In this way, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest shooting interval of the game ball, it is possible to make the player's state in which the probability of starting winning is lowered longer. You can contribute to the sales of the game store.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

After the variable display of decorative patterns is completed without suspension and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, a demonstration image display state is entered in which an image introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in the display area. You may make it shift with. At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo continuous effect, normal background image switching effect) , dialogue preview effect), each period (first period to fourth period) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demonstration image display state, thereby obtaining the following effects.
Even players who do not necessarily have a lot of game experience stop launching game balls during special reach. However, a player who is not necessarily rich in gaming experience may think, "Seriously?"~" and so on, and I'm in a situation where I can't recover for a while, and I often can't resume shooting game balls (as mentioned above, the more experienced and advanced you become, the more quickly you can calm down. be able to switch). In this way, if the screen change (transition to the demo effect state) is executed when the player is in a situation where he or she cannot recover for a while, the effect (the fact that he/she has lost the game) will be a last resort for the player who is not necessarily rich in gaming experience. There is a risk that it may seem like an exaggerated production) (such a tendency is noticeable in pachinko machines that employ resurrection production). Therefore, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demonstration image display state, it is possible for a player who is not necessarily rich in gaming experience to do so. You can take care of your heart.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the predetermined waiting time, thereby obtaining the following effects.
If the result of the special lottery is a loss, players who do not necessarily have a lot of gaming experience may be in a situation where they can not recover for a while after receiving a big shock "Are you serious?" many. In such a shocking situation, by making the transition to the demo image display state quickly and causing a change in the screen, it is possible to make people feel, "Wait, maybe a resurrection effect has occurred!?" Such a tendency is conspicuous in pachinko machines that employ a resurrection effect (note that experienced players remain calm under such circumstances). In this way, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined waiting time for shifting to the demonstration image display state, the This can provide a sense of exhilaration and motivate the player to resume shooting game balls.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

It should be noted that, by driving the payout motor 834, for example, when the game ball wins successively to the winning opening such as the start opening or the big winning opening that pays out when winning, the payout corresponding to the first winning is performed. After that, the payout corresponding to the second winning is performed, but after the payout corresponding to the first winning is performed, it takes a predetermined time (for example, , 1 second), but compared to this predetermined time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hand hitting, Each period (first period to fourth period) in the pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue announcement effect) may be longer or shorter than this time. .
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set shorter than the predetermined time until a new payout is performed, thereby obtaining the following effects.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, there is a possibility that the resurrection effect will be executed, so if the game balls are paid out multiple times during the third period, the phenomenon that will occur due to the payout. (Collision sound generated by game balls colliding with the upper tray 321, management of the number of game balls existing in the upper tray 321, etc.), and a resurrection effect is executed saying "Revive!" However, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made. By shortening it, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation in which concentration is interrupted. The reason why the payout is made once is that the player will not believe that the payout is not made immediately when the player wins the predetermined winning opening (the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, etc.) in the third period. This is because I think
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is performed, thereby obtaining the following effects.
The above-mentioned experienced player guesses that the result of the special lottery will be a loss when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started, so naturally in the third period, the game ball is launched. Is going. Therefore, it is conceivable that a plurality of game balls will win in predetermined winning openings (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, etc.) in the third period following the first period. Experienced players understand that when a game ball wins a prize in a predetermined winning hole (starting hole, general winning hole, etc.), the game ball will be paid out immediately. If not, there is a risk of causing a sense of distrust (such a tendency is to suppress the output of the fluctuating effect sound in the background image switching effect, simplify the display of the display area, etc.) This is noticeable when it is possible to turn a certain amount of attention to the payout), but the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to the predetermined time until the new payout is performed. By making it longer than , it is possible to prevent such a feeling of distrust.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

When the result of the ordinary lottery is a winning result, the movable piece (not shown) is driven and moved to open the second start opening 2004, and the game ball rolling in the game area 5a can be entered. After a predetermined period of time, the movable piece is returned to its original position to close the second starting port 2004, making it impossible to enter the game ball rolling in the game area 5a. A plurality of different times are set as the time (opening time) from when the second starting port 2004 is opened by the movement of the movable piece until it is closed, and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 at one of the opening times. It may be possible to enter the ball, or for one ordinary lottery win, the second start port 2004 may generate a state in which the game ball can be entered multiple times (movable piece is driven and moved multiple times). At this time, compared with the shortest time (if there is only one pattern of the opening time of the second starting port 2004, the opening time in that pattern) among the times during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered. , Each period ( 1st period to 4th period) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set shorter than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, thereby obtaining the following effects.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach. During the period, the background image is usually visible, and it often causes a big shock in the mind, such as "Are you serious?", and you can not recover for a while. In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach When the start of the third period and the timing at which the second starting port 2004 becomes enterable are the same, the special reach ends before the second starting port 2004 becomes incapable of entering. It is possible to end the third period of the background image switching effect. When the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered, a lottery for special symbols is performed when the game ball can be won in the second starting port 2004, so the game experience is not necessarily rich. The person operates the handle 302 to let the game ball enter the second starting port 2004, and the interest is improved again. Since the 3rd period has already ended, it is possible to make the player forget that the special reach has occurred and that the result was a failure, and switch his or her mind to the change of the new decorative pattern.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the shortest open time of the second starting port 2004, thereby obtaining the following effects.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach. During the period, the background image is usually visible, and it often causes a big shock in the mind, such as "Are you serious?", and you can not recover for a while. In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach When the start of the third period and the timing when the second starting port 2004 becomes ready for ball entry are the same, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach ends before the third period ends. The second starting port 2004 can be put into a state in which the ball cannot be entered. When the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered, a lottery for special symbols is performed when the game ball can be won in the second starting port 2004, so the game experience is not necessarily rich. Even if the person operates the handle 302 to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004, the interest is improved again, and the game ball cannot be entered into the second start port 2004, the special reach ends. Since the third period of the time background image switching performance continues, the execution of the resurrection performance can be anticipated, so that the shock received by the player can be alleviated as a whole.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397 and 416, the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is 3 seconds (there is only one type of operation effective period). As the production pattern, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 may be configured to be longer or shorter than 3 seconds.
For example, effect pattern A in which the operation effective period of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is, for example, 2 seconds and effect pattern B in which the operation effective period of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is, for example, 4 seconds may be adopted. A plurality of operation effective periods may be provided in this way.
At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each of the periods (first period to fourth period) may be longer than the operation valid period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. FIG. In addition, each period in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each period of the (first period to fourth period) may be longer than the operation effective period of the effect pattern A and shorter than the operation effective period of the effect pattern B. In addition, each period in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) Each period of the (first period to fourth period) may be shorter than the operation effective period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. FIG.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, an effect (effect pattern A or effect pattern B) in which the operation unit can be operated may be executed. can be expected. In addition, when the operation unit can be operated in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the operation effective period does not span the fourth period or after the stop of the variable display (that is, the second The valid period of operation ends within three periods) or the fourth period may be deleted, in which case the effects described below can be expected.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the shortest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times when there are a plurality of operation effective times. In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can expect that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) will be displayed as the resurrection effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set longer than the longest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times when there are a plurality of operation effective times. In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can expect that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) will be displayed as the resurrection effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the shortest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times when there are a plurality of operation effective times. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, it is possible to recognize that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as the resurrection effect will not be displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to quickly switch one's mind to the expectation of the display.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is longer than one effective time of the plurality of effective operation times, but not the other. By making it shorter than the operation effective period of 1, it is possible to display an operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" There is an effect that it can make people expect.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be longer than the valid operation time of 1 (there is only 1 valid operation time) as the valid operation time. In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can expect that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) will be displayed as the resurrection effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to be shorter than the valid operation time of 1 (there is only 1 valid operation time) as the valid operation time. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, it is possible to recognize that the operation instruction image (display of "PUSH!" etc.) as the resurrection effect will not be displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to quickly switch one's mind to the expectation of the display.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have similar effects.

By displaying the special display A to the special display F, the degree of expectation for the big win may differ. In addition, in the relationship between any one of the special displays A to F and any one of the special displays A to F, the degree of expectation for one or both may have the same degree of expectation, or one may have a lower degree of expectation.
Similarly, in the relationship of three or more special indications, even if the degree of expectation for a particular indication is high, the expectation for multiple special indications is the same, or the expectation for a certain special indication is low, good.

For example, when special display A is displayed and when special display E is displayed, the degree of expectation may be higher than when special display B or special display D is displayed. In addition, when the special display A is displayed and when the special display E is displayed, the degree of expectation when the special display A is displayed may be high, and when the special display B is displayed, the degree of expectation may be high. You can raise your expectations.
Further, the degree of expectation when the special display C is displayed may be lower than the special display A and the special display E and higher than the special display B and the special display D. Alternatively, it may be lower than special display A, special display B, special display D, and special display E.

Light-emitting decoration means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door-frame left-side unit 530, the door-frame right-side unit 550, etc.) may be caused to emit light when the special display is executed.
For example, the door-frame left-side unit 530 and the door-frame right-side unit 550 may emit light in the light emission patterns A to F corresponding to the special displays A to F, respectively. In the relationship between any one of Special Indications A to F and any one of Special Indications A to F, the light emission pattern may be different or the same. good too.
For example, for a display with a high degree of expectation such as special display A and a display indicating that the game state is to be changed such as special display C, a unique light emission pattern is adopted for each of the special displays B and C. , the special display E may adopt the same light emission pattern.
In this way, by making the light emitting pattern different for each special display, even if the player is looking away without looking at the display area, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. comes into view, it is possible to recognize which special display has been executed.
As a method of making the light emission pattern different for each special display, a method of lighting or blinking, making the light emission color or light emission time different, or the like may be adopted.

A light emission pattern corresponding to the color of the image used for the special display may be adopted. For example, when a black background concealing image is displayed, the brightness of the door-frame left side unit 530 and the door-frame right side unit 550 may be reduced or turned off. When a white background concealing image is displayed, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may emit white light. When another background concealing image is displayed, the door frame left side unit 530 or the door frame right side unit 550 may emit light in the color of the displayed character, or the background area of the displayed background concealing image may be displayed. may emit light in the color of

The light emission pattern corresponding to each special display may end earlier than the special display, may end simultaneously with the special display, or may end later than the special display.
After the light emission pattern corresponding to each special display ends, the light may be turned off, or light may be emitted in a light emission mode that matches the BGM.

An embodiment of the "Giant Tank Reach" has been shown with reference to FIG. . Also, the degree of expectation for the "giant tank reach" may vary depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit to be operated. Even in this case, it is preferable that the expectation level of the "huge tank reach" is higher than the expectation level of the "enemy tank destruction reach". In addition, it is preferable that the switching display of the background image is performed in the same manner even in the "giant tank reach" of such a different aspect. For example, in a plurality of "Giant Tank Reach", a background concealing image made up of a bomb character or the like may be displayed, and the background image may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

397, etc., an embodiment of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" has been shown. good too. Also, the degree of expectation of the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be changed depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit to be operated. Even in this case, the degree of expectation should be lower than that of the "giant tank reach". In addition, it is preferable that the switching display of the background image is performed in the same manner even in the "enemy tank destruction reach" which is different in this way. For example, in a plurality of "giant tank reach", a black background concealing image may be displayed and the background image may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397, a simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed during the effective operation period to suggest the result of the special lottery. During execution, the operation valid period was not set, and a simulated image simulating the operation unit was not displayed.
Similarly, in the other effects (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right hand hitting, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect), the first period to the third period , it is preferable not to set it as an operation effective period and not to display a simulated image simulating an operation unit (that is, a simulated image simulating an operation unit is not always displayed).
In this way, the first period to the third period in all the ready-to-win productions are not set as the operation valid period, and it is preferable not to display a simulated image simulating the operation unit (that is, the operation unit is simulated). simulated images are not always displayed).
It should be noted that the operation effective period is not set, and the first period to the third period are periods during which the simulated image simulating the operation unit is not displayed (that is, the simulated image simulating the operation unit is not always displayed). The period is merely an example, and the fourth period may be included, or any one of the first to fourth periods or any plurality of periods among these periods may be used.
By adopting such a configuration, the display contents of the display area are simplified, and the situation where the player cannot operate the operation unit without noticing that the operation acceptance of the operation unit is enabled can be prevented. can be prevented.

While the variable effect sound is output during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the output of the variable effect sound may be suppressed in the special displays A to F.
An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 416 and the like will be described below with reference to FIG. 436(a). Similarly, an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 434 will be described with reference to FIG. 436(b).
In the effect example shown in FIG. 436(a), the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t13 when the background concealing image is displayed to timing t19. Also, the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
In the effect example shown in FIG. 436(b), even in the period from timing t10 to timing t16 when the background concealing image is displayed, the fluctuating effect sound is not suppressed, and the output in the normal state is maintained.
Thus, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 436(a), the first period is a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see, the second period is a period in which the background image is not visible, The output state of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed during the third period during which the background image gradually becomes more visible.
On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 436(b), even in the first to third periods, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is maintained in the normal state without being suppressed. Was.
When the background image is switched in this manner, the output state of the fluctuating sound effect may be set to the suppressed state, and when the background image is not switched, the normal state may be maintained as the output state of the fluctuating sound effect.

Although an example in which the first period to the third period are in the suppression state has been shown, the first period to the third period are the period until the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. In at least one period of , the fluctuating effect sound may be suppressed. After the fourth period, the suppression state may be maintained even during the period in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the normal state may be set at the timing when the next variable display is started.

Note that the suppression state may be a state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is reduced compared to the normal state and output. Alternatively, it may be in a state in which no fluctuating effect sound is output. In this case, although the variable effect sound is internally reproduced, the output sound volume may be internally set to 0 (muted) so that the variable effect sound is not output from the speaker. Alternatively, the variable effect sound may not be output from the speaker by ending or interrupting the reproduction of the variable effect sound.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 436(a), it is in the normal state from timing t19 to timing t36. good. In this case, it is preferable to start outputting the special fluctuating effect sound at timing t16 during the suppression state or timing t19 at the end of the suppression state. In addition, it is preferable to end the output of the special fluctuating effect sound at timing t36 when the suppression state is started or at timing t39 during the suppression state.

Not limited to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. In the pseudo-continuous effect shown with reference to FIG. 425 and the like, and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG.

Embodiments may be obtained by combining and applying each technical matter in the structure of the gaming machine in the embodiments. Further, the embodiments may be applied by combining each production example and each technical matter in each production example. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment combining and applying each technical matter in each role product structure. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment, combining and applying each of these technical matters.
Further, another embodiment obtained by modifying a certain embodiment may be applied to one embodiment obtained by modifying a certain embodiment to form another embodiment.
In addition, a plurality of embodiments that can be conceived by those skilled in the art may be employed in one game machine.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5' game board 5a game area 190 glass unit 530 door frame left side unit 550 door frame right side unit 570 door frame top unit 931 power board 1000 front constituent member 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel board 1110a Obstacle nail penetration hole 1110b Panel board back rough surface part 1110c Panel board back first rough surface part 1110d Panel board back second rough surface part 1110e Panel board back metallic glossy part 1110f Panel board back first metallic gloss part 1110g Panel board back second metallic gloss part 1110h Panel board back bright color visible part 1110i Panel board back first bright color visible part 1110j Panel board back second bright color visible part 1110m Panel board front decoration Opaque thin layer portion 1110p Panel plate boss insertion hole 1110q Panel plate screw insertion hole 1117 Panel convex portion 1200 Obstacle nail 1201 Obstacle nail 1201a Obstacle nail head 1201b Obstacle nail first body 1201c Obstacle nail helical part 1201d Obstacle nail second body Part 1202 Obstacle nail 1203 Obstacle nail 1204 Obstacle nail 1205 Obstacle nail 1206 Obstacle nail 1207 Obstacle nail 1208 Obstacle nail 1209 Obstacle nail 1210 Obstacle nail 1211 Obstacle nail 1212 Obstacle nail 1213 Obstacle nail 1214 Obstacle nail 1215 Obstacle nail 11216 Obstacle nail 1217 Obstacle nail Obstacle nail 1219 Obstacle nail 1220 Obstacle nail 1221 Obstacle nail 1222 Obstacle nail 1223 Obstacle nail 1224 Obstacle nail 1230 Life nail 1231 Jump nail 1232 Left guide nail 1233 Right guide nail 1402 Normal pattern display 1403 First special pattern display 1404 First special Reserved number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserved number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Display area 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate portion 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large prize winning port 2400 Panel board lower light emitting substrate 2410 Panel board rear decorative member 2410a Panel board rear decorative member Rough surface portion 2410b Panel board rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410c Panel board rear decorative member Rotating shaft 2420 Panel plate rear substrate 2425 Panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2450 Panel plate front decorative member 2450a Panel plate front decorative member through hole 2452 Panel plate front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2454 Panel plate front decorative member opaque portion 2456 Panel plate front decorative member colored transparent portion 2460 Light guide plate 2460a Light guide plate uneven portion 2470 Decorative member 2470a Decorative member front surface portion 2470b Decorative member rear surface portion 2470c Decorative member boss 2470d Decorative member inclined portion 2470e Decorative member screw insertion hole 2470f Decorative member first inclined portion 2470g Decorative member second inclined portion 2471 Decorative member mounting screw 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 2600 Area cover member 2600a Area cover member 2610 Penetration part 2610a Penetration part 2611 Penetration part 2612 Penetration part 2613 Penetration part 2614 Penetration part 2615 Penetration part 2616 Penetration part 2617 Penetration part 2617a Notch end 2618 through portion 2619 through portion 2620 through portion 2630 mounting boss 2631 mounting boss 2632 mounting boss 2633 mounting boss 2640 ball restricting projection 2650 through portion 2651 through portion 2652 through portion 2653 through portion 2660 boss portion 2670 accommodation recess 2700 first flow path device Path entrance 2710b Second passage entrance 2720a First passage forming member 2720b Second passage forming member 2730a First passage outlet 2730b Second passage outlet 3700 Mission button 3710 Attack button 3720 Left lever 3722 Left lever vibration source 3724 Left lever light source 3730 Right lever 3732 Right lever vibration source 3734 Right lever light source 3740 Defense button 3770 Tank accessory 5000 Nail sheet 5100 Film sheet 5110 First area printed material 5120 Second area printed material 5200 Obstacle nail printed material 5950 Rail Member 6000 Rabbit accessory 6010 Face cover part 6011 Face cover front part 6011a First face light scattering part 6011b Second face light scattering part 6012 Face cover upper surface part 6013 Face cover right surface part 6014 Face cover lower surface part 6015 Face cover Part left surface part 6016 First arm part 6017 Second arm part 6020 Face substrate 6021 First ear part 6021a First ear decoration part 6022 Second ear part 6022a Second ear decoration part 6023 Face light emitting part 6023a First face light emitting part 6023b 2 Face emitting part 6024 Mouth decoration part 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistor 6027a First resistor 6027b Second resistor 6027c Third resistor 6027d Fourth resistor 6027e Fifth resistor 6027f Sixth resistor 6028 Capacitor 6028a First capacitor 6028b Second capacitor 6029 Connector 6030 Body 6100 Stump accessory 6200 Stump 6210 Stump plate 6210a Stump opening 6300 Stump box 6310 Box top wall 6320 Box right wall 6330 Box bottom wall 6340 Box left wall 6350 Box rear wall 6352 Rear Wall substrate 6352a First rear wall substrate 6352b Second rear wall substrate 6354 Rear wall light emitting portion 6354a First rear wall light emitting portion 6354b Second rear wall light emitting portion 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a First rear wall cover Light scattering portion 6358b Second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6360 First grass movable portion 6360a First grass decorative portion 6370 Second grass movable portion 6370a Second grass decorative portion 6380 Rear wall plate portion 6381 Grass plate portion 6381a Grass plate colored transparent Part 6381b Grass board colorless and transparent part 6382a Grass board center decorative part 6382b Grass board upper decoration part 6382c Grass board right decoration part 6382d Grass board lower decoration part 6382e Grass board left decoration part 6400 Grass board 6420 Grass board 6422 Grass board front light emitting part 6422a Grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422b Grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422c Grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6424 Grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424a Grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424b Grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6426 Grass substrate opening Part 6426a Grass substrate first opening 6426b Grass substrate second opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover transparent part 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442b Grass front cover colored transparent part 6444 Grass front cover light scattering part 6444a Grass front cover Colorless light scattering portion 6444b Grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6446 Grass front cover opaque portion 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass front cover first opening 6448b Grass front cover second opening 6460 Grass rear cover 6462 Grass rear cover transparent portion 6462a Back cover cover colorless transparent part 6462b Back cover cover colored transparent part 6464 Back cover cover light scattering part 6464a Back cover cover colorless light scattering part 6464b Back cover cover colored light scattering part 6466 Back cover cover opaque part 6470 First grass accessory 6475 2nd Grass Accessory 6480 3rd Grass Accessory 6485 4th Grass Accessory 6500 Mountain Accessory 6520 Mountain Board 6522 Mountain Board Front Light Emitting Part 6522a Mountain Board Front First Light Emitting Part 6522b Mountain Board Front Second Light Emitting Part 6522c Mountain Board Front Third light emitting portion 6522d Fourth front light emitting portion of mountain substrate 6522e Fifth front light emitting portion of mountain substrate 6522f Sixth front light emitting portion of mountain substrate 6522g Seventh front light emitting portion of mountain substrate 6522h Eighth front light emitting portion of mountain substrate 6522i Ninth front surface of mountain substrate 6522i Light emitting part 6524 Mountain substrate opening 6540 First mountain front cover 6542 First mountain front cover colored transparent part 6544 First mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6548 First mountain front cover opening 6560 Second mountain front cover 6562 Second mountain Front cover colorless transparent part 6564 Second mountain front cover colorless light scattering part 6600 First giant tree accessory 6610 First giant tree trunk substrate 6630 First giant tree leaf substrate 6650 Second giant tree accessory 6660 Second giant tree trunk substrate 6680 Second giant tree leaf Substrate 6700 First cloud component 6750 Second cloud component 6800 Back grass component 6820 Back grass substrate 6822 Back grass substrate front light emitting part 6824 Back grass substrate opening 6824a Back grass substrate first opening 6824b Board Back grass substrate second opening 6824c Back grass substrate third opening 6824d Back grass substrate fourth opening 6840 Back grass front cover 6842 Back grass front cover colored transparent portion 6844 Back grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6848 Back grass front cover opening 6848a Back grass front cover first opening 6848b Back grass front cover second opening 6848c Back grass front cover third opening 6848d Back grass front cover fourth opening 7000 Door Frame top unit top right ear opening 7002 Door frame top unit top first right ear opening 7004 Door frame top unit top right ear opening 7010 Door frame top unit top left ear opening 7012 Door frame top unit top first Left ear opening 7014 Second left ear opening above door frame top unit 7020 Lower right ear opening below door frame top unit 7022 First right ear opening below door frame top unit 7024 Second right ear opening below door frame top unit 7030 Door frame top unit lower left ear opening 7032 Door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7034 Door frame top unit lower second left ear opening 7040 Door frame top unit upper both ear openings 7050 Inside door frame top unit Right light emitting part 7052 Left light emitting part in door frame top unit 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface inner decorative part 7114 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decoration Part 7116 Right ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7118 Right ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7120 Right ear-frame movable body second surface 7140 Right ear-frame movable body rotation shaft 7200 Left ear-frame movable body 7210 Left ear-frame movable body No. 1st surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface inner decorative part 7214 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decorative part 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body Second surface 7240 Left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7300 Right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear inner frame movable body First surface 7320 Right ear inner frame movable body Second surface 7330 Right ear inner frame movable body Light emitting part 7340 Right Inner ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7350 Right ear outer frame movable body 7360 Right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body 2nd surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body Light emitting part 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body Body rotation axis 7400 Left ear inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body First surface 7420 Left ear inner frame movable body Second surface 7430 Left ear inner frame movable body Light emitting part 7440 Left ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7450 left ear outer frame movable body 7460 left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7470 left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7480 left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7490 left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7500 door frame top Unit face decoration part 7510 Door frame top unit face upper movable body 7512 Door frame top unit right eye decoration part 7514 Door frame top unit left eye decoration part 7520 Door frame top unit face lower part 7522 Door frame top unit Face lower nose movable body 7524 Door frame top Unit face lower mouth movable body 7600 Door frame side unit right arm part 7610 Door frame side unit right arm case part 7620 Door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7630 Door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7650 Door frame side unit left arm part 7660 Door frame side unit Left arm case part 7670 Door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7680 Door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7700 Curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7710 Curtain board bottom unit right leg shin part 7720 Curtain board bottom unit right foot tip part 7750 Curtain board bottom unit left leg Movable body 7760 Curtain plate bottom unit left foot shin part 7770 Curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip part 7800 Root vegetable frame movable body 7802 Root vegetable frame movable body 1st cover part 7804 Root vegetable frame movable body 2nd cover part 7810 Root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7820 Right side Connection linear member 7825 Right vertical movement drive mechanism 7830 Left connection linear member 7835 Left vertical movement drive mechanism 7850 Root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7852 Cover unit frame 7854 Front part of cover unit 7856 Right side part of cover unit 7858 Left side part of cover unit HKB Whitening Department YGK game ball

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
a determination means for determining whether or not the lottery result by the lottery means is advantageous;
a display means capable of performing a predetermined display;
an effect control means that enables the display means to display a predetermined display based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls the variation of decorative patterns,
Background display includes normal background display, first special background display, and second special background display,
A first ready-to-reach effect and a second ready-to-reach effect with a lower expectation that the determination result is more advantageous than the first ready-to-reach effect can be performed,
In the first ready-to-reach effect, the first special background display and the display suggesting the determination result can be displayed,
In the second reach effect, the second special background display and the display suggesting the determination result can be displayed,
When the first ready-to-win effect ends, it is possible to execute a first special effect that changes the visibility of the decorative pattern,
The execution period of the first special effect includes a first period in which the visibility of the decorative pattern is lower than before the execution of the first special effect, and a period after the first period. , a second period in which the decorative pattern is impossible or difficult to see, and a period after the second period, in which the visibility of the decorative pattern is increased compared to the second period. a third period and
the first special background display is displayed during the first period of the first special effect, and the normal background display is displayed during the third period of the first special effect;
When the second ready-to-win effect ends, it is possible to execute a second special effect of changing the visibility of the decorative pattern,
The execution period of the second special effect includes a first period in which the visibility of the decorative pattern is lower than before the execution of the second special effect, and a period after the first period. , a second period in which the decorative pattern is impossible or difficult to see, and a period after the second period, in which the visibility of the decorative pattern is increased compared to the second period. includes a third period,
the second special background display is displayed during the first period of the second special effect, and the normal background display is displayed during the third period of the second special effect;
The first special effect and the second special effect can be executed in different display modes ,
The first special effect and the second special effect do not indicate the degree of expectation that the determination result is advantageous,
A length from the start of the third period included in the first special effect to the stop display of the decorative pattern, and a length of the decorative pattern from the start of the third period included in the second special effect. The length until the stop display is different,
When the normal background display is non-variable display after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in the third period of the first special effect and the third period of the second special effect. allow it to be displayed over
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images